■
Undergraduate and Graduate
Course Catalog
2003 • 2004
nil
The University
OF THE Arts®
Digitized by tine Internet Archive
in 2011 with funding from
LYRASIS IVIembers and Sloan Foundation
http://www.archive.org/details/coursecatalog200304univ
jaesssssrassEsiagasgareaiaE
College of Art and Design
College of Performing Arts
College of Media and Communication
Undergraduate and Graduate
Course Catalog
2003 • 2004
I
The University
OF THE Arts®
320 South Broad Street
Philadelphia, PA 19102
i« 800 •616 'ARTS
www.uarts.edu
The arts have the power to transform society. They play an essen-
tial role in ensuring and enhancing the quality of life. The University
of the Arts is committed to inspiring, educating and preparing inno-
vative artists and creative leaders for the visual, performing, and
media arts of the 2 1 st century.
The University of the Arts is the nation's only university devoted
exclusively to education and professional training in design, visual,
media, and performing arts. Located in the heart of Philadelphia,
The University of the Arts was founded in 1 987 through the consoli-
dation of two century-old institutions: the Philadelphia College of
Art and the Philadelphia College of Performing Arts. A third aca-
demic unit, the College of Media and Communication, was
established in 1996. Offering undergraduate and graduate degrees in
communication, crafts, dance, graphic design, industrial and
museum exhibition design, fine arts, illustration, media arts, multi-
media, museum communication,, music, theater, writing, and
museum and arts education, the University prepares its students to
assume over 150 careers in traditional and emerging arts and related
fields.
The University of the Arts
320 South Broad Street
Philadelphia, PA 19102
215-717-6000
1 -800-6 16-ARTS
http://www.uarts.edu
CEEB code 2664
Title IV code 003350
Nondiscrimination Policy
The University of the Arts is committed to maintaining an envi-
ronment in which students, faculty, and staff may pursue academic,
artistic, and professional excellence. This environment can be
secured only through mutual respect and unconstrained academic
and professional interchange among faculty, staff and students.
Under the Civil Rights Act of 1964, Title IX of the Educational
Amendments of 1972, other state and federal laws, and The
University of the Arts policy, the faculty, staff, and students of the
University are entitled to participate in and obtain the benefits of
University programs, activities, and employment without being dis-
criminated against on the basis of their race, creed, color, ethnic
background, national origin, sex, gender, age, religion, disability, or
sexual orientation.
The University also strictly prohibits any form of retaliation or
reprisal against anyone reporting allegations of harassment or dis-
crimination, or cooperating in an investigation of such a report.
Such retaliation shall be considered a serious violation of the
University'snondiscrimination policy and shall be punishable by
discipline up to and including termination, regardless of whether the
charge of discrimination is substantiated. However, if an employee,
student, or faculty member is found to have intentionally lied about
a claim of discrimination, or brought a claim in bad faith, knowing
that the allegation of discrimination is false, then that employee, stu-
dent, or faculty member may be subject to discipline or expulsion.
Examples of prohibited retaliation include: threatening reprisals
against the person who complained or cooperated in an investiga-
tion; unfairly changing a person's evaluations, assignments, grades,
or working conditions; or otherwise continuing any harassment or
discrimination against such person.
The University of the Arts gives equal consideration to all appli-
cants for admission and financial aid, and conducts all educational
programs, activities, and employment practices without regard to
race, color, sex, religion, national origin, ethnic background, or dis-
ability. Direct inquiries to the Office of the Dean of Students/ADA
Coordinator, The University of
the Arts, 320 S. Broad Street, Philadelphia, PA 19102;
215-717-6618.
This catalog was updated as of July 2003. The University of the
Arts reserves the right to revise any information herein at its discre-
tion and without prior notice.
Trademarked names appear throughout this catalog. Rather than
list the names and entities that own the trademarks or insert a trade-
mark symbol with each mention of the trademarked name, the
publisher states that it is using the names only for editorial purposes
and to the benefit of the trademark owner with no intention of
infringing upon that trademark.
The University of the Arts' is registered with the US Patent and
Trademark Office, Reg. No. 2,341,258. UArts"' is also registered
with the US Patent and Trademark Office, Reg. No. 2,677,865.
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
^m
The University of the Arts
Contents
4 Academic Calendar 2003-2004
The University of the Arts
6 Mission Statement
6 History of Tiie University of the Arts
6 Accreditation
7 Coilegeof Art and Design
7 College of Performing Arts
7 College of Media and Communication
7 Degree Programs
8 University Libraries
9 Academic Policies and Procedures
15 Grading Policies
Undergraduate Degree
Requirements
20 Undergraduate Degree Requirements
2 1 Division of Liberal Arts
College of Art and Design
College of Performing Arts
Course Descriptions
28
College of Art and Design
31
Undergraduate Programs
32
Minors
35
Foundation Program
37
Crafts
40
Fine Arts
46
Graphic Design
48
Illustration
50
Industrial Design
52
Media Arts
58
Art Education
60
Art Therapy
62
College of Art and Design
Graduate Programs
64
Post-Baccalaureate Options
66
Art Education
69
Visual Arts
71
Book Arts/Printmaking
73
Ceramics, Painting, or Sculpture
75
Industrial Design
77
Museum Studies
78
Museum Communication
79
Museum Education
80
Museum Exhibition Planning
and Design
84
College of Performing Arts
132
Art Education
85
Minors
134
Art Therapy
90
The School of Dance
134
Communication
90
Ballet
137
Crafts
90
Jazz
142
Dance
90
Modem
146
Electronic Media
90
Dance Education
147
Fine Arts
96
The School of Music
149
Foundation
97
Instrumental Performance
151
Graphic Design
97
Voice
153
Graduate Seminars
97
Composition
153
Liberal Arts
97
The School of Music
166
Industrial Design
Graduate Programs
169
Illustration
97
Master of Arts in Teaching Music
171
Internships
97
Master of Music in Jazz Studies
172
Master of Fine Arts in
111
The School of Theater Arts
Ceramics, Painting, or Sculpture
HI
Acting
173
Multimedia
111
Musical Theater
176
Museum Studies
HI
Applied Theater Arts
179
Music
186
Media Arts
186
Photography/FilmA'ideo/Animation
Coilegeof Media and
190
Printmaking/Book Arts
Communication
193
Painting/Drawing
195
Sculpture
120
College of Media and Communication
196
Theater Arts
121
Minors
201
Writing for Film and Television
126
Communication
128
Multimedia
General Information
130
Writing for Film and Television
204 Admission
210 Tuition and Expenses
213 Financial Aid
224 Student Services
226 General Information
227 Code of Conduct
229 Student Code
235 University Guidelines for
Responsible Computing
235 Academic Computing
237 Continuing Education Programs
238 Administration
239 Board of Trustees
240 Faculty Index
243 Index
257 Campus Map
Tlie University of the Ail.s Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Academic Calendar 2003-2004
Summer 2003
May
Monday. May 5 and Tuesday. May 6
Summer Session I & II Registration
Monday, May 5
Spring 2003 semester ends
Tuesday, May 6 thru Friday, May 9
Examinations
Monday. May 12 thru Friday, May 16
Studio Critiques and Juries
Friday. May 16
Grades due to Registrar - 12:00 noon
Saturday. May 17
Student Residences close -
12:00 noon
Monday, May 19
SUMMER SESSION I BEGINS
Continuing Education Summer Session I begins
Wednesday, May 21
Awards Ceremony
Thursday, May 22
Commencement
Monday. May 26
Memorial Day Holiday
Thursday. May 29
CPA/CMAC Academic Review
Friday. May 30
CAD Academic Review
Deadline — Fall 2003 Application for Readmission
June
Thursday. June 12 and Fnday. June 13
Fall 2003 Registration for Summer Foundation
Summer II Registration
Friday. June 20
Summer MFA Orientation
Monday, June 23
Summer MFA Classes Begin
Friday, June 27
SUMMER SESSION I ENDS
Monday, June 30
SUMMER SESSION II BEGINS
Continuing Education Summer Session I ends
July
Tuesday, July 1
Continuing.Education Summer Session II Begins
riday. July 4
Independence Day Holiday
University Closed
Monday, July 7
Summer World of Dance begins
Summer Pre-College begins i
Tuesday, July 8
Summer — New Student Placement Test
Friday, July 1 1
Summer I grades due to the Registrar - 12:(
)p.m.
Friday, July 1 8
2-wk Summer World of Dance program ends
August
Friday, August 1
4-wk Summer World of Dance ends
Pre-College ends
Saturday, August 2
Residence Halls close at 5:00 p.m.
Friday, August 8
SUMMER^SESSION II ENDS
Monday, August 1 1
Continuing Education Summer Session II ends
Friday, August 15
CAD Summer MFA program ends
Summer Session II grades due to Registrar
Tuesday, August 19
Summer MFA grades due to Registrar
Saturday, August 30
Fall - New Student English Placement Test
Student Residences open/move-in
Saturday, August 30 thru Tuesday, September 2
New Student Orientation
September
Monday, September 1 ■ *
Labor Day Holiday
Tuesday, September 2
Advising/Registration for all new transfers, grad-
uate, and readmitted students 9 a.m. - 2 p.m.
Wednesday. September 3
Registration Continued 9 a.m - 5 p.m.
Thursday. September 4
Fall 2003 semester classes begin
Thursday, September 4 thru Wednesday,
September 17
Drop/ Add period/Late registration
Monday. September 15
Continuing Education Fall Session begins
Friday, September 19
Deans and Directors submit additional Spring
2004 course chanses to Registrar
October
Saturday, October 4
Saturday School begins
Friday, October 17
Last day for removal of Spring 2003 Incomplete
"I" grades
Monday, October 20
Automatic conversion from "I" to "F" grade
Friday, October 24
Last day to withdraw with a "W" grade
Saturday. October 25
Admission Open House
Monday, October 27 thru Friday, November 7
Advising for Spring 2004 registration
November
Advising for Spring 2004 registration
Continues thru Friday, November 7
Monday, November 3
Deadline for Readmission Application for
Spring 2004 semester
Thursday, November 6
Joint University Advising Session
Monday, November 17
Graduation Petitions for Dec. 2003 due to
Registrar
Monday. November 17 thru Friday, November
21
Registration for Spring 2004
Thursday, November 27
Thanksgiving Day Holiday
Thursday, November 27 thru Sunday, November 30
Thanksgiving Vacation — Residence Halls
remain open
December
Friday, December 12
Fall 2003 classes end
Saturday. December 13
Saturday School ends
Sunday, December 14
Continuing Education Fall session ends
Monday, December 15 thru Friday, December 19
Examinations, critiques, and juries
Friday. December 19
Fall 2003 semester ends
Residence Halls close at 5:00 p.m.
Grades due to Registrar - 12 p.m.
Documents for students graduating Dec. 2003
due to Registrar
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Spring 2004
January
Thursday, January 1
New Year's Day Holiday
Thursday. January 8
CPA/CMAC Academic Review
Friday. Januar\' 9
CAD Academic Review
Thursday, January 15
New Student Registration
Residence Halls open. 9 a.m.
Thursday. January 15 and Friday. January 16
New Student Orientation
Monday March 15 thru Friday. March 19
CAD Freshmen Major Orientation Week
■Friday. March 19
CAD Freshman Major Selections due to Registrar
Monday, March 22 thru Friday April 2
Advising for Fall 2004 Registration
April
Advising for Fall 2004 continued thru Friday,
April 2
Saturday April 3
Admission Open House
Monday, April 12 thru Friday. April 16
Registration for Fall 2004
Thursday, June 10 and Friday. June 1 1
Fall 2004 Registration for Summer Foundation
students
Summer 11 Registration
Monday. June 21
CAD Summer MFA program begins
Fridav. June 25
SUMMER SESSION I ENDS
Foundation Summer semester ends
Monday. June 28
SUMMER SESSION II BEGINS
Continuing Education Summer Session I ends
Tuesday. June 29
Continuing Education Summer Session II begins
Monday. January 19
Martin Luther King Holiday
Tuesday, January 20
Spring 2004 semester classes begin
Tuesday January 20 thru Monday, February 2
Drop/Add period/Late Registration
Friday, January 23
Continuing Education Spring session begins
February
Monday, February 2
Last day of Drop/Add
Wednesday, February 4
Deans/Dir submit Fall 2004 courses to Registrar
Saturday, February 14
Saturday School begins
Monday, February 16
Graduation Petitions for May 2004 due to
Registrar
Friday, February 20
Deans/Dir submit Spring 2005 courses to
Registrar
Friday, February 27
Last day for removal of Fall 2003 Incomplete "I"
grades
March
Monday, March 1
Automatic conversion from "I" to "F"
Friday, March 5
Last day to withdraw with a "W" grade
Monday. March 8 thru Friday March 1 2
Spring Break/Residence Halls remain open
Monday, March 15
Spring 2004 classes resume
Monday March 15
2004/2005 Financial Aid Applications Due
Saturday, April 24
Saturday School ends
Sunday, April 25
Continuing Education Spring Session ends
May
Monday May 3
Spring 2004 classes end
Monday, May 3 and Tuesday May 4
Registradon for Summer Sessions I & II
Tuesday, May 4 thru Friday, May 7
Liberal Arts Examinations
Monday, May 10 thru Friday. May 14
Studio critiques and juries
Foundation Summer semester begins
Friday. May 14
Final grades due to Registrar by 12 p.m.
Documents for students graduating May 2004 due
to Registrar
Saturday, May 15
Student residences close at 12 p.m.
Monday. May 17
Continuing Education Summer Session I begins
SUMMER SESSION I BEGINS
Wednesday May 19
Awards Ceremony
Thursday May 20
Commencement ceremony
Thursday. May 27
CPA/CMAC Academic Review
Friday. May 28
CAD Academic Review
Monday. May 3 1
Memorial Day Holiday
June
Tuesday. June 1
Fall 2004 Application for readmission due
July
Sunday. July 4
Independence Day Holiday
Monday, July 5
University closed for observance of Independence
Day
Wednesday, July 7
Summer New Student English Placement test
Friday. July 9
Summer I grades due to Registrar
Monday July 12
Summer Worid of Dance begins
Summer Pre-CoUege begins
Wednesday. July 15
Graduation Petitions for August 2004 due to
Registrar
Friday. July 23
2-v. k Summer Worid of Dance ends
August
Friday, August 6
SUMMER SESSION II ENDS
4-wk Summer World of Dance ends
Pre-College ends
Wednesday, August 1 1
Continuing Education Summer Session II ends
Friday August 13
CAD Summer MFA program ends
Summer Session II grades due to Registrar
Tuesday, August 17
CAD Summer MFA grades due to Registrar
Saturday, August 28
Fall New Student Placement Test
Student Residences open/move-in
Saturday. August 28 thru Tuesday. August 31
New Student Orientation
Tuesday. August 31 and Wednesday. September I
New Student Registradon
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Mission Statement
The University of the Arts is devoted exclusively to education and
training in the arts. Within this community of artists the process of
learning engages, refines, and articulates all of our creative capabili-
ties. Our institution was among the first to contribute to the formafion
of an American tradition in arts education. We continue to develop
interpreters and innovators who influence our dynamic culture.
The University's Mission:
To educate and professionally train artists in the visual
and performing arts, in design, in media, and in writing;
To grant graduate and undergraduate degrees, diplomas,
and certificates in the arts;
To provide educational programs centered in the arts to
multiple populations;
To encourage relationships among the arts;
To promote high standards in creativity and scholarship;
To prepare artists who will contribute responsibly
to our culture;
To challenge students to think critically, joining knowledge
and skill to their individual creative vision;
To anticipate and to cultivate new art forms as they emerge.
The University of the Arts offers instruction across a broad spec-
trum of artistic disciplines. We serve the community in which we
reside, the professions for which we prepare new members and, ulti-
mately, the society whose culture we both sustain and advance.
The University's goal is to direct each student's quest for creative
self-expression toward a productive role in society. Our programs
develop the student's talent, aesthetic sensibility, conceptual and
perceptual acumen, cultural awareness, and professional expertise.
The curricula integrate specific knowledge and skills needed for
technical mastery of the various arts disciplines with a significant
exainination of conceptual and humanistic studies.
To this end, the University must gather and retain a distinguished
teaching faculty offering a breadth of professional expertise. Their
scholarly work and artistic exploration have national and interna-
tional consequences for the institution. Our educational programs
seek to stimulate and influence not only our students but the very
disciplines that we teach.
History of
The University of the Arts
The University of the Arts is the largest comprehensive educa-
tional institution of its kind in the nation, preparing students for
professional careers in design, visual, media, and performing arts,
and emerging creative fields.
The University of the Arts has evolved from two century-old insti-
tutions: the Philadelphia College of Art and the Philadelphia College
of Performing Arts.
The Philadelphia College of Art was formed in 1876 along with
the Philadelphia Museum of Art. Initially known as the
Pennsylvania Museum and School of Industrial Art, the institution
was established in response to the interest in art and the Centennial
Art Exposition. In 1949, the school became known as the
Philadelphia Museum School of Art, reflecting the expanded pro-
grams that trained artists in many other areas, including the fine arts.
The school received accreditation in 1959, and in 1964 separated
from the Museum to become the Philadelphia College of Art. Today,
the College of Art and Design of The University of the Arts offers
curricula in crafts, design, fine arts, media arts, museum communi-
cation, museum education, and art education.
The performing arts programs of The University of the Arts date
from 1 870, when three graduates of the Conservatory of Leipzig
opened one of the first European-style conservatories of music in
America: the Philadelphia Musical Academy. The Philadelphia
Musical Academy became an independent college of music in 1950,
granting a Bachelor of Music degree after a four-year course of
study, one of only eight such music colleges in the nation at the
time. While still offering only a music program, the school changed
its name to the Philadelphia College of Performing Arts in 1 976, the
first such college in Pennsylvania. One year later the former
Philadelphia Dance Academy became part of the Philadelphia
College of Perf'orming Arts, and in 1 983 the School of Theater Arts
was created, thus achieving the college's ideal program of studies;
dance, music and theater arts.
In 1983, the Philadelphia College of Art and the Philadelphia
College of Performing Arts joined to become the Philadelphia
Colleges of the Arts, and in 1 987, The University of the Arts was
inaugurated. In the fall of 1 996, the University created a new aca-
demic unit, the College of Media and Communication, which
emphasizes the integration of art, technology, and communication.
The first two BFA degree programs offered by this new college were
Writing for Film and Television, and Multimedia; the third, a BS
degree program in Communication, began in September 1999.
Accreditation
The University of the Arts is authorized by the Commonwealth of
Pennsylvania to grant degrees in the visual, performing, and related
arts, and is accredited by the Middle States Association of Colleges
and Schools (Commission on Higher Education, Middle States
Association of Colleges and Schools, 3624 Market Street,
Philadelphia, PA 19104; telephone; 215-662-5606). The College of
Art and Design is also an accredited institutional member of the
National Association of the Schools of Art and Design, and the
Industrial Designers' Society of America. The School of Music is
also accredited by the National Association of Schools of Music.
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
College of Art and Design Degree Programs
The College of Art and Design offers the Bachelor of Fine Arts
degree in Animation, Crafts, Film/Animation, Film/Digital Video,
Graphic Design, Illustration, Painting and Drawing, Photography.
Printmaking/Book Arts, and Sculpture. A major in Industrial Design
leads to the Bachelor of Science degree. Crafts offers a post-bac-
calaureate certificate program. Art Education offers a
post-baccalaureate pre-certification program.
At the graduate level are programs leading to the degrees of Master
of Arts in Art Education, Master of Arts in Museum Communication,
Ma,ster of Arts in Museum Education, Master of Industrial Design,
Master of Arts in Teaching in Visual Arts, Master of Fine Arts in
Book Arts/Printmaking, Master of Fine Arts in Museum Exhibition
Planning and Design, and a low-residency summer Master of Fine
Arts in Ceramics, Sculpture, or Painting. Teaching certification is
offered on a non-degree basis, either independently or in conjunction
with an undergraduate degree in the College of Art and Design.
Concentrations in Art Therapy and Digital Fine Arts are offered, as
well as seven minors.
College of Performing Arts
The School of Dance offers Bachelor of Fine Arts degrees in
Ballet, Modem, Jazz/Theater Dance, and Dance Education, as well as
a two-year Certificate in Dance.
The School of Music offers the Bachelor of Music degree in Jazz
Vocal Performance. Instrumental Performance with a jazz/contempo-
rary focus, and Composition. In addition, a four-year Undergraduate
Diploma and two-year Certificate in Dance or Music are offered.
At the graduate level, the School of Music offers the Master of
Arts in Teaching in Music Education and the Master of Music in Jazz
Studies.
The School of Theater Arts offers the Bachelor of Fine Arts in
Theater Arts, with majors in Applied Theater Arts, Acting and
Musical Theater.
College of Media
and Communication
The College of Media and Communication offers three degree pro-
grams. The department of Communication offers a Bachelor of
Science in Communication with concentrations in Advertising,
Digital Journalism, and Documentary Production. The department of
Multimedia offers a Bachelor of Fine Arts in Multimedia and a minor
in Information Architecture. The department of Writing for Film and
Television offers a Bachelor of Fine Arts in Writing for Film and
Television.
Bachelor of Fine Arts
(BFA)
Acting
Animation
Applied Theater Arts
Ballet
Crafts
Dance Education
Film/Digital Video
Film/Animation
Graphic Design
Illustration
Jazz/Theater Dance
Modem Dance
Multimedia
Musical Theater
Painting and Drawing
Photography
Printmaking/Book Arts
Sculpture
Writing for Film and Television
Bachelor of Music
(BM)
Composition
Instrumental Performance
Vocal Pertbrmance
Bachelor of Science
(BS)
Communication
Industrial Design
Post-Baccalaureate
Certificate
in Crafts
Post-Baccalaureate
Teacher Program
(non-degree)
Master of Fine Arts
(MFA)
Book Arts/Printmaking
Ceramics
Museum Exhibition Planning
and Design
Painting
Sculpture
Master of Arts (MA)
Art Education
Museum Communication
Museum Education
Master of Arts in
Teaching (MAT)
Music Education
Visual Arts
Master of Industrial
Design (MID)
Master of Music (MM)
Jazz Studies
Undergraduate
Certificate
Dance
Music
Undergraduate
Diploma
Music
Minors
Animation
Book Arts
Digital Film/Video
Documentary Video
E-Music
E-Publishing
Figurative Illustration
Film/Digital Video
Game Design
Information Architecture
Multimedia
Narrative Video
Photography
Screenwriting
Strategic Advertising
Studio Photography
Typography
Web Design
Web Drama
Concentrations
Art Therapy
Digital Fine Arts
Pre-Certification in
Art Education
The University of the Ans Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
University Libraries
Carol Graney
cgraney@uarts.edu
Director of University Libraries
Greenfield Library, 1 st tloor Anderson Hall
215-717-6281
The University libraries are central to the educational mission of
the University, enabling and enriching every student's professional
preparation and general education. Through the services the library
staff provides, and through the materials it collects or to which it
provides access, the University libraries seek to enhance teaching
and improve learning, and to educate students in the arts to be suc-
cessful and productive users of information.
The libraries of the University of the Arts include the following
three campus locations:
The Albert M. Greenfield Library, on the first floor and lower
level of Anderson Hall (333 South Broad Street), serves as the main
library for the campus, containing materials in many formats on art
and design, communication, dance, theater, film and television, mul-
dmedia, liberal arts, and other general subjects. The Greenfield
Library also houses the libraries' administrative offices and technical
services operation, as well as the library's Picture File, University
Archives, and the library's Special Collections, with particular
strengths in book arts and textiles.
The Music Library, on the third tloor of the Merriam Theater
Building (250 South Broad Street), is a specialized library serving
academic programs and interests in music. Its holdings and services
are also important for students and faculty studying or needing
information about dance, musical theater, and other areas related to
music. The Music Library contains listening facilities for recorded
sound in addition to general reading areas and a music education
resource area.
The Slide Collection, in Anderson Hall, houses a large collection
of 35mm slides relating to subjects of interest to all University
visual and performing arts programs and Liberal Arts courses. Light
tables and slide carousels may be used for viewing the library's and
one's own slides.
The total holdings of the libraries are more than 101,000 books
and bound periodicals, 14,600 music scores. 1 15,000 mounted and
encapsulated pictures, 166,000 slides, and 12,000 items of recorded
music in LP and CD formats. The library also has a growing collec-
tion of audiovisual materials in videocassette, videodisc, DVD. and
multimedia formats. Listening and viewing facilities, IntemetAVorld
Wide Web access, and photocopiers are available in addition to gen-
eral reading facilities.
Information about the libraries' collections is available through an
online catalog that is accessible from computers in the Greenfield
and Music Libraries or via the World Wide Web. Records for library
materials can be searched by author, title, keyword, subject, and call
number. Once a record is found, information including its shelf loca-
tion and whether or not it is available for circulation is displayed.
Traditional card catalogs are also maintained for some specialized
collections, which have not yet been added to the automated system.
Other electronic reference tools are also available, including online
and CD-ROM periodical indexes, databases, and encyclopedias.
Reference assistance and course reserves are available at each
University library location. The libraries provide other information
services such as interlibrary loan, class instruction in research tech-
niques and library use, and advanced electronic research capabilities
including discounted online database searching for students. The
library maintains reciprocal use arrangements with other nearby aca-
demic libraries.
Albert M. Greenfield Library
215-717-6280
Music Library '■ .
215-717-6292 '
Visual Resources/Slide Collection
215-717-6290
University Libraries' Web site
http://library.uarts.edu
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Academic Policies
and Procedures
Lynn Powell Dougherty
ldougherty@uarts.edu
Registrar
Office of the Registrar
Second Floor, Dorrance Hamilton Hall
215-717-6420
215-717-6417 (Fax)
Office of Registrar email: registrar@uarts.edu
The Office of the Registrar develops and maintains all records and
files relating to the students' academic life at the University. Course
and program transactions and changes become official only when
property processed through the Office of the Registrar Students who
are formally admitted to the University and have paid all applicable
tuition and fees will be allowed to register.
Students must have a program of courses documented and
approved by the required advisor(s). All students are advised to
obtain a copy of their curriculum requirements as soon as possible
after admission to the University and to check them against their
transcripts after each term. Student copies of the transcript are avail-
able upon request. The Office of the Registrar maintains the official
academic record for each student and is responsible for certification
of completion of requirements for graduation.
Transcript Request Procedures
You may request a transcript by completing a transcript request
form (available in the Office of the Registrar) or providing the fol-
lowing information;
• Name under which you attended the University or any prede-
cessor institutions
• Current address and telephone number
• Social security number
•Date of birth
• Last date of attendance
• Major/Degree program
• Address where transcript is to be sent
• Signature; transcripts will not be released without the original
signature of the requesfing sUident
Fees:
• Currently enrolled students can obtain an unofficial "student"
copy of their transcript from the Office of the Registrar at no charge.
Official transcripts are subject to the following fees;
• $5.00 fee for each transcript that you request (checks should be
made payable to THE UNIVERSITY OF THE ARTS). Mailed via
U.S. Mail, normally within three to five business days.
• FAX Service; Transcript requests received by fax will be subject
to a $10 fee, processed within three to five business days and sent
via U.S. Mail. Faxed requests must include a credit card number,
expiration date, and an authorizing signature. The University accepts
Visa or Mastercard payments.
• Emergency service (not available for requests to the Continuing
Education Program or Professional Institute for Educators) is avail-
able for a $12 fee. Transcripts will be processed within one day of
receipt of request and sent out via U.S. Mail.
• FedEx service - U.S. only (not available for The Continuing
Education program or Professional Institute for Educators) — avail-
able for a $30 fee. The transcript request will be processed within
one day and sent via FedEx overnight service.
• International service (not available for The Continuing
Education program or Professional Institute for Educators )-avaiI-
able for a $40 fee. The transcript request will be processed within
one day and sent via DHL.
• Transcripts will not be processed if there is a financial hold on
the account of the student. Please allow three to five working days to
complete requests.
Mail requests to;
Office of the Registrar
The University of the Arts
320 S. Broad Street
Philadelphia, PA 19102
Attention; Transcript Requests
or
Fax requests to;
Office of the Registrar
The University of the Arts . \
Attention; Transcript Requests
215-717-6417
Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act
(FERPA)
(Please also see "access to Student Records" in the Student Code
located in the rear of this catalog.) The Family Educational Rights
and Privacy Act (FERPA) of 1974 affords students certain rights
with respect to their educational records. They are;
• The right to inspect and review the student's education records
within 45 days of the day the University of the Arts receives a
request for access.
• Students should submit to the registrar, dean, head of the aca-
demic department, or other appropriate officials, written requests
that identify the record(s) they wish to inspect. The University offi-
cial will make arrangements for access and notify the student of the
time and place where the records may be inspected. If the records
are not maintained by the University official to whom the request
was submitted, that official shall advise the student of the correct
official to whom the request should be addressed.
• The right to request the amendment of the student's education
records that the student believes is inaccurate or misleading.
Students may ask the University to amend a record that they believe
is inaccurate and misleading. They should write to the University offi-
cial responsible for the record, clearly identify the part of the record
they want changed, and specify why it is inaccurate or misleading.
If the University decides not to amend the record as requested by
the student, the University will notify the student of the decision and
advise the student of his or her right to a hearing regarding the
request for amendment. Additional information regarding the
hearing procedures will be provided to the student when notified of
the right to a hearing.
• The right to consent to disclosures of personally identifiable
information contained in the student's education records, except to
the extent that FERPA authorizes disclosure without consent.
One exception, which permits disclosure without consent, is dis-
closure to school officials with legitimate educational interests. A
school official is a person employed by the University in an adminis-
trative, supervisory, academic or research or support staff position
(including law enforcement unit personnel and health staff); or a
person or company with whom the University has contracted (such
as an attorney, auditor, or collection agent).
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
A school official has a legitimate educational interest if the offi-
cial needs to review an educafional record in order to fulfill his or
her professional responsibility.
• The right to file a complaint with the U.S. Department of
Education concerning alleged failures by State University to comply
with the requirements of FERPA. The name and address of the
Office that administers FERPA is:
Family Policy Compliance Office
U.S. Department of Education
400 Maryland Avenue, S.W.
Washington, D.C.
• Directory Information - The University of the Arts has estab-
lished that the following information will be considered as
"directory information" and the University may release it without
prior consent from the student:
Name
Address ' ■ • '
Telephone listing
E-mail address
Date and place of birth
Major field of study _ ,
Participation in officially recognized activities
Dates of attendance
. Enrollment status
Degrees and awards received
Last institution attended
In accordance with the Family Educational Rights and Privacy
Act of 1974, students may request to have this information withheld
from public information. Students must file this request within the
first three weeks of the term.
Verification of Enrollment
Students often need to send additional information concerning
their enrollment to insurance companies, loan services, scholarship
programs, and other outside parties. Any request for verification of
enrollment beyond the directory information listed below must be
made in writing and signed by the student wishing to release the
information. The request for verification must state exactiy which
information the student wants released and who is authorized to
receive it. There is no fee for this service. The Office of the Registrar
will verify enrollment for future terms only after the student has reg-
istered in classes and has been cleared by the Student Billing Office.
Normal service for other verifications of enrollment is three to five
working days from the time the request is received.
Academic Advising and Student
Responsibility
Each student is personally responsible for observing all regula-
tions in the catalog that may affect academic progress, financial
obligations, relationships with University authorities, transferability
of credits, acceptance of credits for graduation, and eligibility to
graduate.
Academic advising at the University is designed to assist students
in directing and completing their degree programs by providing
guidance through contact with informed advisors and by providing
information in various publications. Students are expected to refer to
this catalog and course bulletins for information on policies, proce-
dures, and deadlines. Students in doubt about any College or
University regulation should seek advice from their academic
advisor or the Office of the Registrar.
In preparing for registration, students consult with their faculty
advisors, who help them assemble schedules for the semester and
who give final approval to all course selections. Students entering the
final year of their degree program are urged to consult with the
Registrar to ensure that all major requirements will be completed on
schedule for graduation. Students are responsible for knowing the
specific requirements of their particular degree program and for
tracking their academic progress toward the degree. Meeting require-
ments for graduation is ultimately the student's responsibility.
Change of Address
It is essential that students keep the Office of the Registrar
informed of all current addresses: permanent and billing. Change of
Address forms are available in that office. Grades, schedules, and
other important information are mailed to the addresses provided by
the student.
Change of Name
Students must notify the Office of the Registrar of any change of
name (through marriage, divorce, etc.) by bringing to the office an
original legal document showing the change, which may be photo-
copied and kept on file. This is important in order to maintain all of
the student's records in one place and prevent future confusion with
transcript requests, etc.
Registration
Official registration forms must be filed in order for the student to
attend class. Students are responsible for knowing regulations
regarding withdrawals, refund deadlines, program changes, and aca-
demic policy.
Matriculating students must register for subsequent semesters in
accord with the posted schedule (see Academic Calendar). Failure to
register will result in a late registration fee (see below). A student
is not officially registered until Finance Office clearance has
been obtained.
In order to register for classes, it is necessary to meet any finan-
cial or academic criteria that have caused a hold to be placed on a
student's record.
All students are responsible for completing any prerequisites
required for enrollment in a course. Failure to complete prerequisites
may result in cancellation of registration in the course requiring
the prerequisite.
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Place Holders
During registration some students have trouble finding courses
that fit in their schedules. As a result, they may not be able to reg-
ister for the 12-credit minimum necessary to maintain full-time
status. In order to allow such students to pick up a course(s) during
the Drop/Add period and thereby maintain their full time status for
Financial Aid purposes, a "place holder" is added to the student's
registration. It is presumed that the student will find an additional
course during Drop/Add. Prior to the beginning of the Drop/Add
period, each student who has a place holder will be reminded, via
mail, to register for the additional course! s). If the student does not
register for additional coursework by the end of Drop/Add. the place
holder will be deleted. At that time, a list of these students in this
status will be generated for the Finance and Financial Aid Offices.
Under no circumstances will a place holder remain on their registra-
tion after the Drop/ Add period ends.
Late Registration
A late-registration fee of $35 will be charged to any student who
has not completed registration by the first day of term. Late registra-
tion may jeopardize a student's chance of obtaining his/her desired
course schedule.
Matriculated Students
Matriculated students are those who have applied, been accepted,
and enrolled in a degree program at The University of the Arts
during the semester for which they were admitted. Course credits
completed prior to matriculation at the University will not neces-
sarily be accepted into the degree programs. In no case will more
than six credits taken as a non-matriculated .student at The
University of the Arts be accepted into the degree program. Students
seeking degrees may enroll for part-time or full-time study.
Non-Matriculated Students
A student who takes classes in a major department but is not
enrolled in a degree program at The University of the Arts and has not
submitted an application to the Office of Admission qualifies as a
non-matriculated student.
Non-matriculated status provides opportunity for students to
study with a specific professor, or pursue additional college-level
instruction for those who already hold a bachelor's degree.
Non-matriculated students may enroll for a maximum of 1 1 .5
credits per semester and may not audit any classes.
Students who subsequently enroll in a University of the Arts
degree program may apply a maximum of six credits taken as a non-
matriculated student to their degree at the discretion of the
department director/chair Non-matriculating students who are
simultaneously enrolled or have plans to enroll at another institution
may transfer credits to that institution if they have received prior
approval in writing from that institution.
To enroll as a non-matriculated student, please contact the Office
of the Registrar. Please be advised that there are no payment plans or
financial aid opportunities for non-matriculated students.
Non-matriculated students are otherwise governed by all the rules
and regulations that apply to matriculated students.
Full-Time Credit Load/Overloads
Full-time undergraduate students are defined as those who are
enrolled in at least 12 credits a semester Students wishing to take
more than 1 8 credits in a semester must obtain pennission from the
dean of their college. Factors such as grade-point average and
progress in meeting degree requirements will be considered in
giving permission for an overioad. Excess credits are subject to
additional charges at the standard credit rate. Registration as Audit
or Pass/Fail is counted the same as all other academic credit for the
purpose of determining tuition.
Graduate students are considered full-time if enrolled in at least
nine credits per term.
International students cannot drop below full time status.
Student Classification
A student's class is determined by the number of credits earned,
regardless of the number of semesters of enrollment or the student's
standing in his or her major program. Class status is a factor in ,'
determining financial aid eligibility and is one indicator of academic
progress. Class standing is also used to prioritize scheduling during
registration.
Undergraduate class status is determined as follows:
Ul up to 29.5 credits
U2 30 - 59.5 credits
U3 60 - 89.5 credits
U4 90 - 123 credits
U5 more than 123 credits
Graduate status is determined as follows:
Gl up to 17.5 credits
G2 1 8 or more credits
Transfer of Credit
Students may receive credit for courses taken at other regionally
accredited institutions that are similar in content, purpose, and stan-
dards to those offered at The University of the Arts. A minimum
grade of "C" is required in order to present a course for transfer
credit. Only credits are transferable, not grades.
Candidates are given a preliminary transfer credit evaluation at
the time of admission; final award of transfer credit and placement
level is subject to receipt of final official transcripts and verification
by the registrar at the time of enrollment.
Graduate Double Degree Policies
Graduate students already enrolled in a master's degree program
at the University of the Arts may apply to simultaneously pursue a
second master's degree. A second degree may be added only after
the successful completion of at least one semester of graduate study,
with a grade-point average of at least 3.0. Students who are inter-
ested in this option must be aware that completion of two degrees
will likely require additional time to complete and requires intensive
advising and coordination of requirements.
Students currently enrolled in a master's degree program who
wish to pursue a second master's degree must request, in writing,
that the Registrar forward a copy of their transcript and official file
to the director of the program to which they are seeking admission.
The director of the second program may require the student to
submit materials for portfolio review, and may require additional let-
ters of reference. The director of each graduate program is
responsible for coordinating any required portfolio review. Portfolio
requirements are listed on the Graduate Application or may be
obtained directly from the graduate director or coordinator Final
acceptance into a double degree program must be approved by the
Director of Graduate Programs.
1 . A student may be awarded a particular degree from the
The University of the Ans Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
University only once; i.e., once the student has earned an MA, he or
she may not be awarded another MA.
2. A student may not receive two different master's degrees from
the same program; i.e.. he or she cannot pursue both the MA in Art
Education and MAT in Visual Arts.
3. A student may earn up to two master's degrees, either simulta-
neously or sequentially.
4. If a student is approved for a double degree, and six credits are
shared between the two programs, the student may transfer a max-
imum of six additional credits from an accredited institution.
5. A student who has completed one degree and wishes to matric-
ulate in another does so by applying to the new program through the
Office of Admission.
6. Students in the Summer MFA program who wish to pursue a
second graduate degree will be charged the regular graduate tuition
rate in the semesters in which they are pursuing two degrees.
Change of Major/Degree Program/College
Students may request a change of major through the Office of the
Registrar. Students are advised to initiate the Change of Major
Petition prior to registration for the upcoming semester. The petition
requires the approval of the appropriate chairpersons or directors of
both the former and the intended new department or school. The stu-
dent will be required either to present a portfolio or to audition as
part of the transfer review process. Deadlines are June 1 for the fall
semester and November 1 for the spring semester.
After completion of a change of major, students are advised to
review their degree program requirements with their new academic
advisor, the department chair or school director, and the dean of the
appropriate college.
Change in Degree Requirements
Students who have not completed their degree requirements at the
end of seven years from the date of initial matriculation may be sub-
ject to new degree requirements, which will be determined by the
department chairperson and the Office of the Registrar on a case-by-
case basis.
Course Substitutions
Occasionally a student may not be able to enroll in the exact
course required for the degree program, or the department may rec-
ommend an alternate course to better suit a specific academic goal.
In this case, the student is to request an approval for a course substi-
tution from the department chairperson or program director. The
director/chair lists the required course and the approved substitution
on the form. After completion the department chairperson or pro-
gram director submits the form to the Office of the Registrar for
processing.
Schedule Revision - Drop/Add
Beginning with the first week of the semester, only students who
have obtained finance office clearance may revise their schedules
without academic penalty until the end of the Drop/Add period. Any
schedule revision must be approved in writing by the appropriate
instructor or department chairperson and advisor This is accom-
plished by completing a Drop/Add Form, obtaining the appropriate
signatures, and submitting the form to the Registrar's Office for pro-
cessing. The Drop/Add period takes place during the first 10 days of
classes each semester in accordance with the Academic Calendar.
Withdrawal from a Course
A student may withdraw from a course with a "W" (Withdrawal)
from the last day of the Drop/ Add period through the last day of the
seventh week of the semester The withdrawal form must be signed
by the course instructor and the student's advisor and submitted to
the Office of the Registrar prior to the deadline.
After the end of the seventh week, a "W" is possible only under
unusual circumstances such as an accident or severe illness, which
must be documented. Permission for an exceptional withdrawal
must be given by the instructor and the Dean/Assistant Dean of the
college.
A student who wishes to withdraw from all of his or her classes
must initiate an official Withdrawal or Leave of Absence from the
University as outlined in this catalog. If a student withdraws from all
of his/her classes and does not officially withdraw from the
University or take a leave of absence, he/she may be withdrawn
from the University or dismissed in accordance with Academic
Review policies.
Leave of Absence
A student may request a Leave of Absence by obtaining a Leave
of Absence Form, available in the Office of the Registrar. Only stu-
dents in good academic standing may request a Leave of Absence.
Undergraduate students who maintain a minimum 2.0 cumulative
and semester grade-point average (GPA) are considered to be in
good standing. A Leave may be granted for one or two semesters,
with approval granted by the Dean of the appropriate college, pro-
vided that the student is in good standing.
A Leave of Absence will not be granted after the seventh week of
the semester in which the student is enrolled. If a student wishes to
leave during a semester and the request is approved, he/she may
withdraw from the current semester with the leave taking effect in
the current and subsequent semester. In this instance, the student
will be subject to the grading, withdrawal periods, and withdrawal
refund policies listed elsewhere in this catalog.
A student who is granted a Leave of Absence is unconditionally
eligible to register for classes for the semester immediately after the
Leave expires. (A student may return before the expiration of the
Leave by indicating his/her intention to do so in writing to the Office
of the Registrar.)
If the student does not register for the term following the Leave's
expirafion, but wishes to resume his/her studies at a later date, the
student must apply for readmission following the guidelines in this
catalog.
A graduate student may take a Leave of Absence prior to the com-
pletion of all coursework, subject to approval by his/her program
director. Graduate students may take a maximum of two one-
semester Leaves of Absence throughout their course of study,
whether in sequence or as needed. Once the thesis or Master's of ,
Music graduate project has begun and all coursework has been com-
pleted, graduate students are not eligible for a Leave of Absence.
Students must register and pay for the thesis conUnuation fee for
successive semester and are not eligible for a Leave of Absence.
Leave of Absence is granted only to students who are in good aca-
demic standing. If a student is granted a Leave of Absence for a
future semester, but is subsequently placed on probation for the cur-
rent semester, the Leave Of Absence will be converted to a
withdrawal. Notification of a conversion to "withdrawn" status will
be provided in writing by the office of the Registrar. Students who
are converted to a "withdrawn" status must apply for readmission
The University of the Ans Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
through the Office of the Registrar in accordance with the policies
described in this catalog.
The following procedure must be followed to obtain a Leave of
Absence from the University:
1. The student obtains a Request for Leave of Absence Form from
the Office of the Registrar.
2. The student must get approval from his/her department
chair/director.
3. The Student must submit form to the college dean for approval.
4. After the Leave of Absence approvals are obtained, the student
submits the completed form to the Office of the Registrar for pro-
cessing and coding. A copy of the form will then be distributed to
the student and the college dean.
Withdrawal from the University
A student may withdraw from the University by initiating an offi-
cial Withdrawal process with the Office of the Registrar. Students
who withdraw from the University prior to the beginning of the fall
or spring semesters or summer sessions, or prior to the end of the
Drop/Add period, do so without academic penalty.
Official Withdrawals after the Drop/ Add period, but prior to the
end of the seventh week of the respective fall or spring semester or
second week of the respective summer session, will result in the
notation of the grade "W" (Withdrawal) for all courses.
Students are not permitted to withdraw without academic penalty
from the University after the end of the seventh week of a fall or
spring semester or second week of a summer session, except when
non-academic extenuating circumstances exist, in which case docu-
mentation (by a physician or a counseling professional) must be
presented and approval of the appropriate Dean must be obtained.
Students who have withdrawn and who wish to resume their
studies at a later date must submit a Request for Readmission Form
to the Office of the Registrar in accordance with application dead-
lines and pay the readmission fee.
The following procedure must be followed to obtain official
Withdrawal from the University:
1 . The student obtains a Withdrawal from the University Form
from the Office of the Registrar.
2. If the student does so in person, the Office of the Registrar will
advise the student to visit the Dean of Students.
If the student withdrawing from the University is not physically
on campus, the Office of the Registrar will accept a letter signed by
the student. After processing the withdrawal, appropriate depart-
ments will be notified.
Non-attendance in classes or non-payment of tuition does not
constitute grounds for withdrawal. The University does not recog-
nize non-attendance in classes or non-payment of tuition as the
equivalent of withdrawal.
Readmission
Written appeal for reinstatement as a degree candidate should be
addressed to the Office of the Registrar by June 1 for the fall
semester and November 1 for the spring semester. There is a $50
application fee. Appropriate deans, departmental chairpersons/direc-
tors, and the Finance Office must endorse the readmission prior to
registration. The major department reserves the right to require tran-
scripts, letters of recommendation, an additional portfolio review, or
audition. Credit for courses taken seven or more years prior to the
date of readmission will be re-evaluated in conjunction with degree
programs currently offered. Academic units may choose not to
accept courses regardless of when they were completed for credit
toward the degree. Final determination will be made by the dean of
the college. In the event of Dismissal, an application for readmission
will not be entertained until a full academic year has elapsed.
Readmitted students will carry the cumulative GPA that was in place
at the completion of the last semester attended at L'Arts.
Please also note that previous censure from the Academic Review
Committee may apply to any readmitted student.
Registering for Other Categories
of Study
Independent Study
Independent Study offers a matriculated student the opportunity
to initiate individual research or advanced projects that are beyond
the limits of the standard cumculum. with limited supervision.
Independent Study is available to junior and senior undergraduate
students who have a minimum 2.5 GPA and to graduate students in
good standing. To enroll in an Independent Study, the student must
follow these guidelines:
1 . Obtain an Independent Study Form from the Office of
the Registrar.
2. Prepare a proposal and identify a University of the Arts faculty
member having expertise in the area of investigation who is willing
to ser\'e as the course advisor. With the consultation of the course
advisor, complete the Independent Study Fomi, which must include
a semester plan for the course of study, indicating the number of
credits being taken and the evaluation criteria. The form must be
signed by the course advisor and the student's department
chair/school director.
y. Present the approved Independent Study Form at registration or
within the Drop/Add period, along with your registration or
Drop/Add form. The course number for an independent study is the
department code (the course advisor's department) and course
number "999" for undergraduates (Example: PR999) and the depart-
ment code and "799" for graduate students (Example: PR799).
4. Each Independent Study may be taken for one to three credits
in Liberal Arts, 1.5 to six credits in CAD, and one to six credits in
CPA and CMAC.
5. The student is responsible for documenting the content of the
Independent Study work to other institutions or outside agencies.
6. Students cannot elect the Pass/Fail or Audit options for
Independent Study.
Independent Study cannot fulfill major requirements. Independent
Study may serve as free, studio, and liberal arts electives, depending
on the topic of investigation. Students cannot apply more than 12
total credits of independent study towards their degree requirements.
Credit for an Independent Study cannot be reduced or increased
after the student has registered.
Internships
Internships allow matriculated undergraduate students in their junior
or senior year to earn academic credit while working in their chosen
field. Internship courses are scheduled during the fall and spring semes-
ters and, with special permission, during the summer. To register for an
internship, see the course bulletin and the appropriate depattment for
current offerings. Internship courses are graded on a Pass/Fail basis.
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
13
With the approval of their dean and department chair/director, stu-
dents may take internships during the summer. Those who intend to
do so and wish to receive academic credit for the experience must
pre-register in the spring if the internship is to be included on the fall
schedule and transcript. (Such courses will be calculated as part of
the fall credit load for billing purposes.) It is the responsibility of
students wishing to take summer internships to identify faculty who
are willing to sponsor and are able to supervise their work. Summer
internships cannot be added to the schedule once the internship has
begun.
Students may not apply more than six internship credits toward
their degree requirements, with the exception of students who major
in Dance or Theater. For detailed information please see the
Internship section of the Art and Design section of this Catalog, and
the course descriptions in the back of this catalog.
Undergraduate Minors/Concentrations
The University offers minors and concentrations for students who
wish to focus on a specific discipline through organized electives.
Please refer to the college sections of this catalog for information
about eligibility, prerequisites, and course requirements. You may
also contact the departments directly for additional information.
Students wishing to include a minor as part of their undergraduate
program are governed by the following guidelines:
1. Students must meet eligibility requirements, which may
include a satisfactory grade point average, prerequisites, and depart-
mental portfolio review.
2. Intent to complete a minor is declared by filing the completed
Minor Declaration Form with the Office of the Registrar. The forms
are available in the Office of the Registrar.
3. A student may not major and minor in the same program,
except where indicated.
4. Courses applied to the minor may not also be applied towards
the major program requirements.
5. All minors require a minimum of 15 credits, with the exception
of E-Music for Music majors. Generally, no substitutions to the
minor requirements are allowed. In exceptional situations where
substitutions are granted, they must have the approval of both the
major and minor program advisors.
6. The minor advisor must approve all courses taken as part of a
minor.
7. A student pursuing a minor may be required to complete more
than the minimum number of credits required to complete the under-
graduate degree in order to also complete the minor.
8. Minors are available only to undergraduate students.
Cross-College Elective Options
and Prerequisites
The University encourages students to take courses outside their
major department and college. To facilitate this goal, the University
offers a wide selection of courses that are open for enrollment
without prerequisites. Students may select from introductory elec-
tives and non-major courses. In general, upper-level courses will
have specific prerequisites, which must be satisfied prior to registra-
tion. Students interested in these areas are advised to contact the
department chairperson or school director regarding specific course
offerings and prerequisite requirements.
Private Lessons
Private instrumental/vocal lessons for non-majors may be taken
for elective credit ( 1 .5 credits, seven hours of instruction per
semester) with permission of the Director of the School of Music.
An additional fee is required.
Credit Duplication
No course, including graduate courses, which has satisfied under-
graduate degree requirements, may be counted again for graduate
credit.
Auditing a Course
Audited courses carry no credit and do not satisfy degree require-
ments. An audited course may not be repeated for credit. Regular
tuition rates are charged for audited courses, and they are included in
the full-time tuition charge. Audited courses will be indicated on the
transcript with a grade of " AU" and may be registered for until the
end of the Drop/ Add period.
Courses With No Credit
Courses that reflect no credit on a student's transcript (such as
Graduate Thesis Continuation, Music Jury, Senior Recital,
Professional Writing Intensive, etc.) or audited courses, still gen-
erate tuition and registration fees. Students who have questions
regarding registration for non-credit coursework should contact the
Finance Office.
Foreign and Summer Study Programs
Foreign and summer study opportunities are available through pro-
grams hosted by other accredited institutions. Interested sUidents
should meet with the chair or director of their major department to dis-
cuss issues such as program selection, timing, and feasibility. Those
who choose to participate must contact the Registrar and the Financial
Aid Office for advising on transfer of credit and financing options.
Study Abroad and Off-Campus Study
Students who wish to study abroad or at another U.S. school for
one or two semesters as part of the degree program at the University
of the Arts will need the advice and approval of their department
chair and a written agreement in advance of the courses. This agree-
ment must specify how those courses will transfer back into the
degree program. In most UArts academic programs, off-campus
study is most successful when conducted in the junior year.
Interested students should begin by making an appointment in the
college dean's office to discuss their plans at least six months before
the program begins. Appointments with the Registrar, Financial
Aid, and Billing Offices are also recommended at that time. A stu-
dent maintains his/her status as an active student at the University of
the Arts in one of two ways: by obtaining approval for a Leave of
Absence and Approval of Transfer Credit: or, by registering for
"Exchange" credits and obtaining Approval of Transfer Credit. The
necessary forms are available in the Office of the Registrar. A stu-
dent's financial aid package will usually determine the most
appropriate registration for the off-campus semester. While away,
the student should keep the Financial Aid Office informed of any
changes in status. More information regarding Financial Aid can be
found in the Financial Aid section of this Catalog. Upon his/her
return, a student should make an appointment with the Office of the
Registrar to finalize the transferring of credits and receive an accu-
rate credit count.
14
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Undergraduates Enrolled for Graduate Credit
A student in the final year of the bachelor's degree program may
take a maximum of six credits of graduate courses toward a master's
degree, subject to all of the following conditions:
1 . The student must have completed the junior level of the major
2. The credits must be over and above the credits required for the
bachelor's degree and may not be applied to that degree.
3. The student must have a cumulative GPA of 3.00 or better
4. Permission is granted by the department chairperson/director
and dean of the college.
5. No more than a total of six credits, taken either as an under-
graduate or non-matriculated student, or taken at another college or
university, may be applied to the graduate program.
Graduate Courses for Undergraduate Credit
Undergraduate students who wish to enroll in a graduate course
must have junior status (U3), a 3.0 cumulative GPA. and permission
of the instructor to enroll in the course.
Graduates Enrolled in an Undergraduate Course
Graduate students may register for 300-400 level undergraduate
liberal arts courses or 200-400 level studio courses (with permission
of the graduate director and director of liberal arts) for graduate
credit. Graduate students will be expected to contribute at a higher
level in the classroom and will have additional assignments (read-
ings, papers, etc.) in order to be granted graduate credit. Students
are advised to select an area of study that broadens or intensifies
their background in the arts, education, and related disciplines.
Often this work contributes directly to preparation of the graduate
project proposal.
Graduate Thesis Requirements
CAD graduate programs require each graduate student to meet
specific thesis requirements. The requirements may include a thesis
exhibition or project, and should be successfully completed once the
student has fulfilled all other program requirements. Students must
submit three copies of their thesis to their program director in order
to qualify for the degree. One copy of the thesis remains with the
department and two are submitted to the Greenfield Library.
Graduate Project/Tliesis Continuation Fee
A student who has completed all the course requirements for the
master's degree and is currently working on the graduate thesis,
either on or off-campus, must register and pay a graduate thesis con-
Unuation fee per semester until the thesis is completed and accepted.
This registration, through the Office of the Registrar, is required in
each succeeding semester, excluding the summer sessions", until all
degree requirements are met. Students completing a degree in the
summer must pay the thesis fee in the final summer semester.
Grading Policies
Grading System
A
4.00 C
2.00
A-
3.67 C-
1.67
B+
3.33 D-h
1.33
B
3.00 D
1.00
B-
2.67 F
0.00
C-^
2.33
Grades not included in computing
averages:
I
Incomplete
IP
In Progress ( Graduate Thesis only)
NC
No Credit
W
Withdrawal
OP
Optional Pass (Grade of "C" or better)
OF
Optional Fail (Grade of less than "C")
AU
Audit
P
Pass
Thesis Grading
The grade of "TP" ("Tn Progress") signifies that the student is
making satisfactory progress toward completing the graduate thesis.
This grade will apply only to graduate thesis courses where the stu-
dent's thesis is still in progress.
This grade is available only for the following courses:
AE 649 Graduate Project/Thesis
MS 749 A/B Thesis Development
ID 749 Master's Thesis DocumentaUon
FA 795 MFA Thesis Exhibition
MU 603 Graduate Project/Recital
An "TP" grade acknowledges the fact that the final course product
(thesis) may require some period of time past the semester of regis-
tration to complete. The "IP" grade will remain on the student's
record until a final thesis grade is submitted by the instructor. In
some cases, a student will be registered for thesis courses as a
sequence (e.g.. MS 749 A/B). When the final grade is submitted by
the instructor, it will replace the "IP" grade. The "IP" grade is not
computed in the grade-point average.
In order to remain in good standing while the thesis is "in
progress," the student must register for the thesis continuation fee
for each semester he or she is not enrolled in coursework.
Computing Grade-Point Average (GPA)
The GPA is computed by multiplying the number of credits
earned for a course by the numerical value of the grade. The
resulting figures from all courses for that semester are then totalled,
and this figure is divided by the total number of credits attempted
that semester. The grades of I, IP, NC. W, OP, OF, P, and AU are not
entered in this computation.
Dean's List
This list is compiled each semester in the respective deans'
offices. The Dean's List honors those undergraduate students who
have met the following criteria:
1 . Students are full-time undergraduate degree candidates.
Candidates for certificate, diploma, and master's degrees are
not eligible.
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
15
2. A minimum semester GPA of 3.60.
3. No grade lower than a "B" in any course.
4. No grade of "I" or "F" in any course.
5. Enrolled in at least 12 credits for a letter grade.
Pass/ Fail Option
1 . In courses taken on a Pass/Fail basis, the standard letter grades
of "A" to "C" are converted to "OP" by the Registrar. A grade of "C-
" to "F" is recorded as "OF."
2. The Pass/Fail grading option must be selected prior to the end
of the Drop/Add period; no change from Pass/Fail to a regular grade
or a regular grade to Pass/Fail may be made after that deadline.
3. Grades of "OP" or "OF" are not computed in the grade-
point average.
4. The Pass/Fail policy stipulates that the instructor is not to be
informed as to who is enrolled on a Pass/Fail basis.
5. Availability of this option is limited to a total of nine credits in
Liberal Arts courses or studio electives during the student's under-
graduate career. Pass/Fail courses may not include First Year
Writing, Introduction to Modernism, or any required disciphne his-
tory course.
Notice of Deficiency
Instructors may advise a student of unsatisfactory performance in
the course with a Notice of Deficiency.
Grade of Incomplete ("I")
An incomplete grade may be granted only in extraordinary cir-
cumstances, either personal or academic, which prevent the student
from completing coursework by the end of the semester. The grade
"T" is given only when the completed portion of the student's
coursework is of a passing quality. To receive the grade of
Incomplete, the student must obtain written approval on the
Incomplete Form from the course instructor, and the Dean of the
College or the Director of Liberal Arts prior to the conclusion of the
semester.
Incomplete grades not cleared by the end of the sixth week of the
following semester will be automatically assigned the grade of "F."
Incomplete Forms are available from the Office of the Registrar.
Class Attendance
All students are expected to attend classes regularly and promptly,
and for the duration of the scheduled instructional time. Individual
instructors will decide the optimum time for taking attendance and
may penalize for habitual lateness or absence. Repeated, unexcused
absences may result in a grade of "F" for a course.
Students who withdraw from a course or the University must do
so through the Registrar's Office. Non-attendance does not consti-
tute an official withdrawal.
Absences
Full participation is expected of all UArts students and is neces-
sary to fully benefit from and succeed in our programs of study.
Absences from class may result in a lowered grade or an "F" in
the course, depending on the attendance policies stated by the
instructor on the syllabus. It is the responsibility of the student to
arrange with his/her instructor(s) to make up all missed work.
Failure to do so will also affect the student's grade.
In the event that absences are the result of extraordinary, docu-
mented circumstances and are numerous enough that it is impossible
for the student to qualify for advancement, the student may be
advised to withdraw from the course. If the course is required, the
student will also be required to repeat the course in a subsequent
semester.
Class/Lesson Cancellations or Lateness of Instructor
Students must check every morning for notices regarding class or
lesson changes. Such notices are posted in a designated area. If none
is posted for the scheduled class or lesson and the instructor is not
present, students are expected to wait 10 minutes for an hour-long
class/lesson and 15 minutes for those of longer duration. In the event
the instructor fails to appear within the 10-15 minute waiting period,
students are to report to the appropriate School Director's or
Department Chairperson's office and may then leave without penalty.
Academic Grievance Procedure
Students who have a concern or grievance regarding an academic
matter are encouraged to discuss their concern directly with the
instructor. If they are not comfortable presenting their concern in
person, or are not satisfied with the outcome of the discussion they
should submit their grievance in writing to the instructor, and send a
copy to the chair/director of the department in which the instructor
resides. The instructor must respond, in writing, to the student
within 1 business days. If the student believes that his/her concern
requires further attention he/she may submit the matter in writing to
the Office of the Dean of the college in which the course is offered,
or to the Office of the Director of Liberal Arts when applicable.
If the Office of the Dean/Director of Liberal Arts does not rule on
the matter, he/she may convene an Academic Grievance Committee
or similar committee to review the concern. The composition of the
Academic Grievance Committee is determined by the Dean/Director
of Liberal Arts. As a last resort, the Office of the Dean/Director
and/or the student may forward concerns to the Office of the Provost
for final resolution.
Please note that a student may request the assistance of any pro-
fessional member of the university community at any stage of the
grievance process.
Ciiange of Grade
An instructor may change a grade only if an error occurred in
computing or recording the final grade, or if reevaluation of previ-
ously submitted work is warranted. Extra work, beyond that required
of other class members during the period when the class met, or
work handed in after the completion of the course, may not be
offered as reasons for a grade change.
In exceptional circumstances, a student may be granted an
Incomplete, which is posted to the transcript as an "I". Once the
work for the course has been completed, a Change of Grade Form
must be submitted to the Office of the Registrar in order to convert
the "I" to the earned grade. Please refer to the section of this catalog
tiffed "Grade of Incomplete" for more information.
If a student questions the correctness of a grade, the student
should address his/her concern in accordance with the Academic
Grievance Procedures listed above.
Any change of a final grade may only be made by the course
instructor, who must personally submit the signed Change of Grade
Form, including the signature of the college dean, to the Office of
the Registrar no later than the end of the semester following the one
in which the grade was given.
i6
The University of the Ans Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Academic Review
Undergraduate students who maintain a minimum 2.0 cumulative
and semester grade-point average (GPA) are considered to be in
good standing. In some programs students must also satisfy min-
imum grade requirements in major coursework. (Please refer to the
department sections of this catalog for more specific information on
minimum grade requirements for certain majors. ) Students who fail
to meet these minimum requirements will be reviewed by the
Academic Review Committee. The Committee evaluates the record
of such students, determines their academic status, gives bench-
marks for progress in order to assist their return to good standing,
and, when appropriate, dismisses students, according to University
policy.
Academic Censure
Probation
The Academic Review Committee places students who are no
longer in good standing on Probation, in accordance with University
policy. The Committee can also place additional requirements on
students to encourage adequate progress towards completion of the
degree and improved academic performance. These activities may
include repeating courses, meeting with advisors, limiting the
number of credits taken in a given semester, tutoring, and/or coun-
seling. Students placed on Probation will receive a letter from the
dean's office of their college on advisement from the Academic
Review Committee, in which the terms and conditions of the
Committee's decision are explained.
Dismissal
The Academic Review Committee may also dismiss students:
1 . After three consecutive semesters on Probation.
(Note: the number of consecutive semesters on probation prior to
dismissal may be reduced for students with a GPA belbw 1.5.)
2. After a single semester GPA below 1 .0.
3. After continued failure to fulfill academic probationary require-
ments specified by the Academic Review Committee.
Students who are being dismissed will receive a Letter of
Dismissal from the Office of the Dean of their college. Guidelines
for appeal of a dismissal, in the event of extenuating circumstances,
are described in the Letter of Dismissal. Any student whose appeal
of dismissal is upheld and who is permitted to enroll will automati-
cally be placed on Probation until the stated conditions are met.
Academic Censure and Financial Aid
Academic censure imposed by the Academic Review Committee
may have financial aid ramifications, including loss of financial aid
after two consecutive semesters on Probation, (or as the result of not
completing the minimum number of credits per year). Please refer to
the Financial Aid section of this catalog for more specific infonnation.
Disciplinary Dismissals
In addition to Academic Dismissal, the University may dismiss
students for disciplinary reasons. In such cases, students will auto-
matically receive the grade of "W" for all classes in which they were
enrolled at the time of dismissal. For more information on discipli-
nary action, please refer to the Student Code of Conduct section in
this catalog.
Graduate Probation and Dismissal Policies
A minimum cumulative GPA of 3.0 is required for good standing
and for graduation for graduate students. If a student is unable to
achieve a semester or cumulative GPA of 3.0. he or she will be
placed on probation. If a 3.0 GPA and/or other conditions are not
attained by the following semester, the student may be dismissed
from the program. While on Probation, a student will be ineligible to
hold a graduate assistantship or to receive a University supplemental
grant-in-aid or scholarship.
Appeal
Students who are dismissed may make an appeal to the Academic
Review Committee regarding the dismissal. In order to request a
hearing for an Appeal by the Academic Review Committee, students
must contact the dean's office of their college by the date indicated
in the Letter of Dismissal. Students must also deliver a written
request for an appeal to the committee at the time of the hearing, and
will be notified of the committee's decision at the completion of the
hearing.
Graduation Requirements
It is the student's responsibility to complete the requirements of
the degree program in which he or she is enrolled.
Residency Requirements
The time it takes for a student to reach graduation will depend
upon the time needed to fulfill The University of the Arts' degree
requirements.
Every transfer student must complete a minimum of four full-time
semesters in residence preceding graduation and must earn a
minimum of 48 credits in studio and/or Liberal arts courses.
Transferable credits will be applied only to the specific studio and
Liberal arts requirements sfipulated for a UArts degree. For this
reason, transfer students may be required to remain in residence at
the University for more than the minimum four semesters and to
complete more than the minimum 48 credits, regardless of the
number of credits earned at previously attended institutions.
Transfer credit is evaluated by the department chair or school
director and the Director of Liberal Arts in consultation with the
Office of the Registrar.
Undergraduate Degree Requirements
To be certified for a degree, a student must:
• submit a Petition for Award of Degree to the
Office of the Registrar.
• fulfill all degree requirements.
• satisfy the minimum residency requirements
(four semesters in residence, a minimum of 48 UArts credits).
• achieve a minimum cumulative GPA of 2.0 (C average), and
• receive the approval of his/her department chairperson or
director as having met all major requirements, including any and
all requirements unique to the department.
Once the student has submitted a Petition for Award of Degree,
and the Registrar has certified that student as having completed the
degree requirements, the degree will be awarded. Two-year certifi-
cates are awarded only to students who are in residence and are
matriculated in the certificate program.
The University of the Ails LJndergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
17
Graduate Degree Candidacy and Completion
Midway through the program, each graduate student's progress in
his/her discipline and thesis proposal will be reviewed by the appro-
priate Graduate Committee to formally determine whether a student
becomes a degree candidate, and is ready to continue toward devel-
opment and completion of the thesis or graduate project.
Graduate students have up to seven years from matriculation date
to complete a two-year master's program, and up to six years from
matriculation date to complete a one-year program.
To be certified for a degree, a student must:
• submit a Petition for Award of Degree to the Office of the
Registrar. . . •
• fulfill all degree requirements,
• satisfy the minimum residency requirements and
• achieve a minimum cumuiarive GPA of a 3.0 (B average).
Graduation - Conferral of Degrees and
Diplomas
Students expecting to complete requirements for a degree within
the year (December. May, or August) are required to file a Petition
for Award of Degree with the Office of the Registrar by the deadline
indicated below. The Office of the Registrar is responsible for certi-
fication of completion of requirements for the degree. Students may
and are encouraged to petition during registration at the time of their
final semester.
Deadline for submission of Petitions:
• July 1 5 - August completion
• November 15 - December completion
• February 1 5 - May completion
Degrees and diplomas are conferred once a year at the spring
Commencement Exercises. For students who complete degree
requirements in other terms, the transcript will be posted "degree
granted" with either the date of December 3 1 for the fall semester or
August 31 for summer semester graduates. Diplomas will be mailed
to August and December graduates' permanent address approxi-
mately six weeks after the graduation date.
Graduation with Honors
Candidates for the baccalaureate degree inay graduate with
honors only if they achieve a minimum cumulative GPA of 3.6.
l8 The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/200-4
"-s^jsasesHESi^siKssra^sna
1
w
P
Undergraduate
Degree
Requirements
1^
1
i
1
Undergraduate and Graduate
Course Catalog
2003 • 2004 . :
in
The University
OF THE Arts®
Undergraduate Degree
Requirements
Understanding the degree requirements is crucial to tiie smootli
progression to graduation. Students, both new freshman and trans-
fers, are encouraged to consult with their academic advisors
regularly to ensure that they are making appropriate progress toward
their degree and to consult their advisor and the Office of the
Registrar for assistance and clarification of degree requirements. An
overview of the degree requirements for the baccalaureate follows.
Please refer to the section of the catalog that describes the major
programs and to the Division of Liberal Arts section for specific
course requirements. Students should also keep in close contact with
their academic advisors regarding official departmental and major-
specific requirements.
Most UArts undergraduate degrees require from 123 to 129
credits. A full-time student, however, may enroll for as many as 1 8
credits per semester, resulting in a possible 144 credits over four
years. Students who are interested in additional electives, or who
wish to fulfill a minor by taking additional elecfives. are strongly
encouraged to consult with their advisor to develop an effective plan
for completion of their degree requirements and fulfillment of their
personal educational goals.
Liberal Arts (42 credits)
Freshman Common Core (12 credits)
First Year Writing
Introducrion to Modernism
All students at The University of the Arts must take First Year
Writing and Introduction to Modernism.
Freshmen typically take two semesters of First Year Writing
(HU 1 10 A/B). Based on transcripts, SAT scores, TSWE scores on
the verbal text of TOEFL (Test of English as a Foreign Language),
and a placement test, students may be placed in HU 008 (ESL) or
HU 009. These courses do not satisfy the First Year Writing require-
ments and will not apply toward degree requirements. Students who
successfully complete HU 008 or HU 009 will then take HU 1 10 A,
or may in some cases be assigned to HU 109 B, First Year Writing,
which counts toward the degree and substitutes for HU 110 A.
In addition, freshmen take two semesters of Introduction to
Modernism (HU 103 A/B). Students in HU 008 (English as a
Foreign Language) and HU 009 begin the Introduction to
Modernism sequence in the second semester of their studies at the
University.
Satisfactory completion of the First Year Writing sequence is
required prior to registration for HU 130 and above liberal arts
courses. In addition, failure to complete this sequence will prevent
the student from proceeding in his or her major studio coursework.
Discipline History (9 credits)
Discipline history courses acquaint students with the historical
framework of their respective majors. These courses provide a his-
torical foundation and mark the intersection of professional training
and liberal arts education. The specific courses fulfiUing this
requirement vary by college and major.
Liberal Arts Distribution (21 credits)
The liberal arts distribution requirement ensures that students
have an opportunity to explore the literature, philosophy, institu-
tions, and arts of their own and other cultures. Acquaintance with the
humanities, social sciences, and natural sciences is essential for any
educated person to understand the world, and provides a knowledge
base for informing the creative endeavors of the artist. The specific
distribution requirements are outlined in the section tided Division
of Liberal Arts.
Major (varies by program)
Major requirements have been carefully designed by the faculty to
provide the student a professional education in his or her chosen
field of study. Refer to the appropriate section of the catalog for spe-
cific major and departmental requirements.
Free Electives (9 credits)
Free electives play an important role in the University's mission
of providing a dynamic milieu for creative exploration, innovation,
and intellectual investigation, extending the practice and under-
standing of the arts and the arts professions. They give the student
the opportunity to explore subjects beyond those offered or required
by the major department and encourage educational autonomy on
the student's part.
An elective is defined as any studio or liberal arts course, that is
neither a requirement for the student's major nor a requirement for
the University's liberal arts core. Electives are courses that a student
can choose freely without restriction. While advisors may make rec-
ommendations regarding electives, the final choice for elective
courses must rest with the student. Obviously, prerequisites and
corequisites apply to any course that a student may elect to take.
Every major undergraduate program at the University contains at
least nine credits of free electives. Please refer to the program
requirements for further information on specific department require-
ments; some programs have as many as 21 credits of electives built
into the degree requirements.
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Division of Liberal Arts
Peter Stambler
pstambler@uarts.edu
Director ■ .
215-717-6262
In addition to the major requirements for earning a baclielor's
degree at The University of the Arts, all undergraduate students are
required to complete approximately one-third of their studies in the
liberal arts, reflecting the University's conviction that the liberal arts
are essential for the educadon of artists, designers, performers, and
writers. The aims of the division are to develop students' powers of
cridcal thinking and their understanding of the history and criticism of
the creative arts, to introduce them to philosophic and scientific modes
of thought, and to the study of human cultures and societies. In sum,
we aim to refine students' percepdons of both their inner world and
the outer worid and to help make them both intellectually responsible
and creative. The Liberal Arts Division represents a common ground
in the curriculum where students from all the colleges meet. It thus
offers a unique forum for artistic and academic exchanges.
Students are expected to meet with their advisors regularly and are
responsible for knowing and fulfdling their liberal arts requirements.
Transfer Credit Policy
and Requirements
New Students:
The University of the Arts will accept, after review, transfer credit
for liberal arts courses completed elsewhere provided that the
coursework completed is determined to be equivalent to University
of the Arts offerings, is from an accredited college or university, and
a grade of "C" or better was earned. Students are required to present
official transcripts of courses taken at other instituUons. as well as
course bulledns in order for evaluation of transfer credits to take
place. Contact the Office of the Registrar for further informadon.
Enrolled Students
Once they have matriculated, students may transfer up to 15
credits in the liberal arts, provided they have not already transferred
that many or more at the dme of matriculation. Students who wish to
take liberal arts credits at other colleges must secure prior written
approval from the Director of the Division of Liberal Arts. Such
courses may not duplicate courses already taken for credit at The
University of the Arts.
Credit-Hour Ratio
Liberal arts credit is earned at the rado of 1 credit per class con-
tact hour.
University Writing Standards
The faculty of the University have established a standard of pro-
fessionalism for all formal papers written for liberal arts and studio
courses.
1 . Citarions of any text used must be documented as appropriate.
The MLA and APA styles, as detailed in Diane Hacker's A Writer's
Reference, are taught in First-Year Writing HU 1 10 A/B. Lack of
knowledge of citation procedures will not be an acceptable explana-
tion for plagiarism.
2. Papers must be free of consistent patterns of error in punctua-
tion and grammar and must be spell-checked and proofread.
3. Papers must be word-processed and printed with appropriate
margins. In addition, papers must be concepmally and visually
divided into paragraphs as appropriate.
Liberal Arts Requirements
Common Core
12 credits
HUllOA/B
First Year Writing
6 credits
HU 103 A/B
Introduction to
Modernism
6 credits
Discipline History (1
3H)
9 credits
Majors in:
Acting
TH311A,
TH311B,
TH213
Animation
HU140A.
HU140B,
WM251
Applied Theater Arts
TH213.
TH311A,
TH311B
Communication
CM 250.
CM 251,
CM 260
Crafts
HU140A,
HU140B,
HU 253
Dance
DA 211 A,
DA 21 IB,
DA 117
Film
HU140A,
HU140B,
WM251
Fine Arts (FT PR, SO
HU140A,
HU140B,
Art History
elective
Graphic Design
HU140A.
HU140B,
HU254
Illustration
HU140A.
HU140B.
Art History
elective
Industrial Design
HU140A,
HU140B,
HU251
Multimedia
MM 271.
six credits c
:hosen from any
Arts/Discipline History
Music *
Performance and Composition:
MU301A,
MU301B.
MU401B
Vocal:
MU301A,
MU301B.
TH312A
Musical Theater
TH312A.
TH312B.
TH213
Photography
HU140A,
HU140B.
HU255
Writing Film and TV
HU320A,
HU 320 B,
WM 253
Additional discipline history course required (MU 401 A) counts
toward major requirements.
Liberal Arts Distribution
21 credits
Social and Behavioral Sciences
(SS)
6 credits
Natural Science and Mathematics
(SCI/M)
3 credits
Literature
(LIT)
3 credits
Humanities
(HU)
3 credits
Liberal Arts Electives
6 credits
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Liberal Arts Distribution Requirements
This grid shows how liberal arts courses may be used to satisfy
the liberal arts distribution requirement.
Key: LIT = Literature
AH = Art History
SS = Social Science
SCI/M = Science/Math
HU = Humanities
DH = Discipline History
Distribution
HU130A French I
HU
HU130B French I
HU
HU131A German I
HU
HU131B German I
HU
HU132A Italian I
HU
HU132B Italian I
HU
HU140A Art History Survey I
HU140B Art History Survey II
HU 162 Individual and Society
HU181A Child and
Adolescent Psychology
HU181B Adult Psychology
HU 201 Lyric Poetry
HU210A 19th C.American Writers
HU 2 1 B 20th C. American Writers
HU211 Women Writers
HU 2 1 2 Introduction to Mythology
HU213 World Drama
HU216 The Short Story
HU 2 1 7 African American Literature
HU218 Super Heroes
HU219 Children's Literature
HU 22 1 Forms of Autobiography
HU(DH/all CAD majors)
HU(DH/all CAD majors)
SS
SS
SS
LIT
LIT
LIT
LIT
LIT
LIT
LIT
LIT
LIT
LIT
LIT
HU230A
French I
HU
HU 230 B
French II
. HU
HU232A
Italian I
HU
HU 232 B
Italian 11
HU
HU240
Ancient Art
AH/HU
HU241
Medieval Art
AH/HU
HU242A
Northern Renaissance Art
AH/HU
HU242B
Italian Renaissance Art
AH/HU
HU243
Baroque Art
AH/HU
HU244
Mythology in Oriental Art
AH/HU
HU 245 A
History of Western Arch. I
AH/HU
HU 245 B
History of Western Arch. II
AH/HU
HU246
19th Century Art
AH/HU
HU248A
Film History
HU(=WM25r)
HU 248 B
Issues in National Cinema
HU(=WM252)
Distribution
HU250
History of Sculpture
AH/HU
HU251
History of Industrial Design
AH/HU
HU253
History of Crafts
AH/HU
HU254
History of
Communication Design
AH/HU (DH/GD)
HU255
History of Photography
AH/HU
(DH/Photo majors)
HU259
Listening to Music
HU
HU260A Human Origins and Primates SS
HU260B Human Evolution SS
HU 261 Observing Humans SS
HU262A History of China SS
HU262B History of Japan SS
HU263 History of Italian Renaissance SS
HU 264 Modem American History SS
HU265
Introduction to Folklore
SS
HU266A
History of Classical Worid
SS
HU 266 B
History of Medieval Europe
SS
HU267
Introduction to
Cultural Anthropology
SS
HU268
Introduction to the Bible
SS
HU270
Introduction to Aesthetics
HU
HU272
Money Matters
SS
HU274
Introduction to Philosophy
HU
HU281
Dynamic Anatomy
SCI/M
HU282A
Fundamentals of
College Math.
SCIM
HU 282 B
Calculus
SCI/M
HU283
Probability
SCI/M
HU 285 A
Life Sciences
SCI/M
HU 285 B
Physical Sciences
SCI/M
HU286
Science and P,seudoscience
SCI/M
HU288
Introduction to Brain,
Mind and Behavior
SCI/M
HU289
Contemporary Issues in
Life Sciences
SCI/M
HU 292 Introduction to
Worid Religions SS
HU 293 Dance and Expressive Culture HU
HU 3 1 The Stories of Chekhov LIT
HU311 Greek Drama LIT
HU 3 1 3 Poetry Writing Workshop HU/LIT
HU314 Literature and Film LIT
HU315A Modem Drama LIT
HU 315 B Contemporary Drama LIT
HU316 American Playwrights LIT
HU3I7 Romanticism LIT
HU318 Literature of
the Roman Empire LIT
The University of the Ans Undergraduate .ind Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Distribution
Distribution
HU320A Masterpieces-
Western Tradition I
HU320B Masterpieces-
Western Tradition II
HU 322 Scriptwriting
HU 323 Arts Criticism
HU 325 Fiction Writing
LIT (DHAVFT majors)
LIT (DHAVFT majors)
HU/LIT
HU
HU/LIT
HU 326 Contemporary Arts in America LIT
HU342 Arts of China AH/HU
HU343 Art of Venice AH/HU
HU 344 Avant-Garde Cinema HU
HU345 Modern Architecture AH/HU
HU346 Folic Art and Architecture AH/HU
HU 347 Arts of Africa AH/HU
HU 348 American Art to 1 945 AH/HU
HU 349 American Film Genres HU
HU351 Electronic Video HU
HU353A Impressionism AH/HU
HU353B Post Impressionism AH/HU
HU354 Women Artists AH/HU
HU 355 Dada and Surreahsm AH/HU
HU357 Modem Art AH/HU
HU 359 Politics and the Media SS
HU360A
HU 360 B
HU361
HU362A
HU 362 B
HU363
HU364
HU 365 A
HU 365 B
HU366
HU367
HU368
HU369
Renaissance and Reformation SS
Age of Enlightenment
Islam: Religion and Culture
American Civilization I
American Civilization II
Modem Culture
Sociology of Art
Latin American
History and Culture
Latin American
History and Culture
The City
Eastern Religions
Sociology of Politics
Cultural Ecology
HU370 Greek Philosophy
HU 37 1 The American Suburbs
HU 372 Continental Philosophy
and Existentialism
HU 373 Ethics
HU 374 Personality and Creativity
HU 377 Critical Theory and the Arts
HU378 Psychology of Touch
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
HU
SS
HU
HU
SS
SS/HU
SS
HU381 Urban Wildlife SCI/M
HU 382 Social Psychology SS
HU383 Personality and Adjustment SS
HU 384 Abnormal Psychology SS
HU385 Concepts of Modern Physics SCI/M
HU 386 Human Genetics SCI/M
HU 388 Perception SCI/M
HU 389 Evolution in
Modern Perspecti\'e SCI/M
HU 390 Mass Media SS
HU 392 American Musical Theater HU
HU 393 African American Culture SS/HU
HU 394 Play, Performance
and Literature HU
HU410 The Uncanny LIT/HU
HU 41 1 A Renaissance Literature LIT
HU411B Shakespeare LIT
HU412 Detective Film and Fiction LIT
HU413 Literature and Film:
From Text to Screen LIT
HU414A Big Fat Famous Novel LIT
HU414B European Novel LIT
HU415A Modem Poetry LIT
HU415B Contemporary Poetry LIT
HU416 Contemporary Novel LIT
HU417 Lyric LIT
HU419 American Modernists LIT
HU420 Major Writers LIT
HU421 On the Nature of
Poetry and Art LIT .
HU 422 American Politics
and Culture 1945-75 LIT/SS
HU 423 Literature and Opera LIT
HU 424 Latin American Literature LIT
HU428 Portraits of the Artist LIT
HU440 Wagner and the Ring Cycle HU
HU 442 Abstract Expressionism AH/HU
HU448A American Art Since 1945 AH/HU
HU448B European Art Since 1945 AH/HU
HU 449 Diashilev and the Ballet Russe HU
HU450
Arts of India
AH/HU
HU451
Arts of Islam
AH/HU
HU452
Topics in Design
AH/HU
HU 453
Arts of Japan
AH/HU
HU456
Major Artists
AH^U
HU462
American Social Values
SS
HU463
Middle East Art and Culture
SS
HU464
Holocaust
SS
HU466
Comparative Religion I
SS
HU467
Comparative Religion II
SS
HU474
Contemporary Philosophy
HU
HU 475
Freud and Mahler
HU
HU478
Aesthetics Seminar
HU
:rsity of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
23
Distribution
Key: LIT
SS
SCI/M
HU
DH
= Literature
HU480
HU481A
HU481B
HU 483
HU484
Psychology of Creativity
Physics
Physics
Theories of Personality
Educational Psychology
SS
SCIM
SCI/M
SS
SS
- Social Science
= Science/Math
= Humanities
- Discipline History
HU492
HU495
HU497
Vienna and Berlin
Dante in the Modem World
Women and Sex Roles
HU
LIT
LIT
'
AE 549
Program Design & Methods;
Aesthetics/Art Critism
HU
CM 250
CM 251
History of Communication
Communication Theory and
Culture in the 20th Century
SS
SS
CM 260
Media Industries
SS
CM 293
History of Documentary
HU
DA 117
Survey of Music
HU (DH/Dance majors)
DA 211 A
DA 21 IB
Dance History I
Dance History 11
HU (DH/Dance majors)
HU (DH/Dance majors)
MM 271
Survey of Multimedia
HU
MM 360
Psychology of
Human/Computer Interaction
SS
MU301A Music History I
MU 301 B Music History II
MU 306 History of Rock Music
HU (DH/Dance majors)
HU (DH/Dance majors)
HU
MU401A Jazz History
MU 401 B American Music History
MU402 World Music
HU
HU (DH/ Music majors)
HU
_
-
MU411
MU417A
MU417B
20th Century Music
Opera Literature
Opera Literature
HU
HU
HU
; ~
MU424
Wagner and the Ring Cycle
HU
TH213
Script Analysis
HU (DH/Acting &
MusTh majors)
TH311A Theater History I
TH311B Theater History II
TH 3 1 2 A Musical Theater History I
TH 3 1 2 B Musical Theater History II
WM 25 1 Narrative Cinema I
WM 252 Narrative Cinema II
WM253 History of Television
HU (DH/Acting majors)
HU (DH/ Acting majors)
HU (DH/MusTh majors)
HU (DH/MusTh majors)
HU (DH/Film &
Anim Majors)
HU (DH/Film &
Anim Majors)
HU
2H
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Liberal Arts Faculty
|uan Sebastian Agudeio
Adjunct Assistant Professor
BA. MA. Southern Illinois University
Steven Antinoff
Senior Lecturer
BA. MA. PhD. Temple University
Jolin Bal<er
Visiting Assistant Professor
AB. Washington University
STB. Gregorian University
PhD. Brown University
Yana Balson
Senior Lecturer
BA. Pennsylvania State University
MA. Temple University
Susan Barry
Senior Lecturer
BA. Nova Scotia College of Art
and Design
MA. University of Sussex
Ann Ricliman Beresin
Assistant Professor
BA. Tufts University
MEd. Harvard University
PhD. University of Pennsylvania
Steplien Berg
Professor
BA. State University of Iowa
Donald Chant Bolin
Senior Lecturer
BS. Gettysburg College
Gerard Brown
Senior Lecturer
BFA, Boston University
MFA, School of the Art Institute
of Chicago
Tliomas Ceneri
Senior Lecturer
BA. SUNY Purchase
MA. City College of New York
Nancy Davenport
Professor
BA. MA. Bryn Mawr College
PhD, University of Pennsylvania
Jacl< DeWitt
Professor
BA. Northeastern University
MA, PhD. University of Connecticut
Mary Ellen Didier
Senior Lecturer
BA. University of Wisconsin
MA. University of Chicago
Samuel Durso
Assistant Professor
BA, MA, Temple University
Richard Farnum
Associate Professor
AB. Princeton University
PhD. University of Pennsylvania
Kevin Finn
Senior Lecturer
BA. Wilkes University
MA. University of Delaware
Janet Fishman
Senior Lecturer
BA, Brandeis University
MA, Villanova University
Eileen Flanagan
Senior Lecturer
BA, Duke University
MA, Yale University
Cheryl Floyd
Adjunct Assistant Professor
BA. Chestnut Hill College
MA, PhD, Temple University
Nancy Heller
Professor
AB, Middlebury College
MA. PhD. Rutgers University
Eugene Howard
Senior Lecturer
BA, Antioch University
MA, Norwich University
JamerHunt
Associate Professor
BA, Brown University
PhD, Rice University
Johnjernigan
Senior Lecturer
BA, Swarthmore College
MA, Temple University
Elisejuska
Senior Lecturer
BA, Bowdoin College
MA. University of New Hampshire
Anne Karmatz
Adjimct Associate Professor
BA, University of Pittsburgh
MS, University of Pennsylvania
MA, Villanova University
Anita Lam
Adjimct Assistant Professor
BA, Beaver College
MA, Temple University
Cris Larson
Senior Lecturer
BFA, Rhode Island School of Design
MFA. Rutgers University
Sharon Lefevre
Adjunct Assistant Professor
BA, Princeton University
MA, MPhil, Columbia University
Mary Martin
Adjunct Assistant Professor
BA. Macalester College
MA. Washington University
Mara Miller
Senior Lecturer
BA. Cornell University
MA. University of Michigan
PhD. Yale University
Slavko Milekic
Associate Professor
M. Sc„ MD Belgrade University.
Yugoslavia
PhD, University of Connecticut
Chris Myers
Associate Professor
BA. University of Toledo
MFA. Yale University
Stewart Netsky
Adjunct Associate Professor
BS, Drexel University
MA, Philadelphia College Art
MFA, Tyler School of Art
Paul Nolan
Adjunct Assistant Professor
BA. Shenandoah Conservatory of Music
MA. Hahnemann University
The University of liie Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
25
Martin Novelli
Adjunct Professor
BS, St. Joseph's University
MA, Purdue University
PliD, JD, Temple University
Charles F. Pennacchio
Associate Professor
BA, University of California, Berkeley
MA, PhD, University of Colorado
Andrew Petto
Associate Professor
BA, Middlebury College
MA, PhD, University of Massachusetts,
Amherst
Steve Reeder
Senior Lecturer
BA, West Chester University
MA, Villanova University
Robin Rice
Adjunct Assistant Professor
BFA, Ohio Wesleyan University
MA, University of Missouri
Catlierine Robert
Adjunct Assistant Professor
BA, Connecticut College for Women
MA, PhD, University of Pennsylvania
William Rudolph
Senior Lecturer
BA, University of Nebraska, Lincoln
MA, University of Virginia
Sid Sachs
Senior Lecturer
BFA, Tyler School of Art
MFA. Rutgers University
Mil<hall Sergeev
Adjunct Assistant Professor
BA, Moscow State University
MA, PhD, Temple University
Martha Shaw
Senior Lecturer
BA. Smith College
Kiernan Slater
Senior Lecturer
BA, Davidson College
MA, Georgetown University
Frank Smigiel
Adjunct Assistant Professor
BA, University of Pittsburgh
MA, PhD, University of Delaware
David Spolum
Senior Lecturer
BSS, Cornell College
MA, Temple University
Noah Brodie Spring
Senior Lecturer
BA, Yale University
MFA, University of Southern California
Peter Stambler
Director of Liberal Arts
Professor
BA, Yale University
MFA. Carnegie-Mellon University
PhD, Syracuse University
Andrew Stein
Senior Lecturer
BA, Grinnell College
MA, PhD, Indiana University
Patricia Stewart
Adjunct Associate Professor
BA, University of Pennsylvania
DenaSukol
Senior Lecturer
BA, JD, Temple University
Fabian Ulitsky
Associate Professor
BA, MEd, Temple University
PlppaVanderstar
Master Lecturer
AB, Princeton
MA, New York University
MPhil, Oxford University
DPMI, Oxford University
Judith Vassallo
Adjunct Professor
BA. American International College
MA, University of Pennsylvania
Susan T. Viguers
Professor
BA, Bryn Mawr College
MA, University of North Carolina
at Chapel Hill
PhD, Bryn Mawr College
Pierre Vilain
Senior Lecturer
BA, Tufts University
MA, New York University
PhD, University of Pennsylvania
Stanley Ward
Adjunct Assistant Professor
BA, Duke University
MA, PhD, Harvard University
Faith Watson
Master Lecturer
BA, MA, University of Pennsylvania
Carla Weinberg
Adjunct Associate Professor
Dottore in Lingue, University of Pisa
Burton Weiss
Adjunct Professor
BA, MA, PhD, Princeton University
TobyZinman
Professor
BA, MA, PhD, Temple University
26
The University of the Arts Undergradu
nd Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Coaege of ^
Art and Design ^
1
Undergraduate and Graduate
Course Catalog
2003 • 2004
i/)
The University
OF THE Arts®
College of Art and Design 'viajor Areas of study
Stephen Tarantal, Dean
starantal@uarts.edu
Adrienne Stalek, Assistant Dean
astalek@uarts.edu
215-717-6120
The College of Art and Design is a comprehensive visual arts col-
lege oifering a full range of undergraduate and graduate programs in
fine arts, crafts, design, media arts, art education, and museum com-
munication and education. Micrograms are dedicated to the
development of the individual artistic spirit and vision within each
student; the study of the historical and contemporary precedents that
have shaped our culture; and the full range of analog and digital
methods and processes that give form to the visual arts.
The College offers coursework toward the BFA, BS, MFA, MA,
MAT, or MID degree with major programs in;
Bachelor of Fine Arts
Animation
Crafts (Ceramics, Fibers. Metals, and Wood)
Film/Digital Video
Graphic Design
Illustration
Painting and Drawing
Photography
Printmaking/Book Arts
Sculpture ■ . , .
Bachelor of Science
Industrial Design
The College also offers the following graduate degree programs:
Master of Art
Art Education
Museum Communication ^ . ;
Museum Education
Master of Art in Teaching
Visual Arts
Master of Fine Arts
Book Arts/Printmaking
Ceramics
Museum Exhibition Planning and Design
Painting
Sculpture
Master of Industrial Design
These special undergraduate and graduate programs are also
offered;
Special concentration in Art Therapy
Pre-certification program in Art Education
Post-baccalaureate certificate program in Crafts
Class Size and Structure
Each department is unique, with its own curriculum and structure,
but in every department, classes are small and informal. Facuhy
advisors and the generous student/faculty ratio assure close indi-
vidual attention and assistance throughout a course of study.
One of the important teaching modes in the college is the critique,
or "crit." an evaluation of student work by the instructor with the
participation of the class. Given informally to the class or individual
as often as once a class, crits have proven to be an invaluable method
for the development of critical thinking and self-awareness, which
are major educational goals in our programs.
Credit-Hour Ratio
In general, credit is earned at the ratio of one credit for two class-
contact hours in studio courses. Please refer to the course
descriptions for specific informafion.
Return Degree Program
Diploma graduates of the Philadelphia College of Art may apply
credits earned for the diploma toward the University's baccalaureate
requirements. For additional information and to apply, contact the
Office of the Registrar.
28
The University of the Ans Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Exhibition Program
The Exhibition Program showcases major contemporary exhibi-
tions related to the University's diverse academic curricula in
design, crafts, and the fine arts.
Over the years, the Rosen wald-Wolf Gallery, the University's pri-
mary exhibition space, has attracted national and international artists
to the campus. Artists who have had one-person exhibitions in the
gallery include Vito Acconci, Siah Armajani, Alice Aycock, Willie
Cole. Gregory Crewdsen, Richard Fleishner. April Gomik. Lois
Greenfield, Alex Grey, John Hejduk. Daniel Jackson. Barbara
Kasten, Mel Kendrick. Jon Kessler, Donald Lipski. Henry Moore.
Ree Morton, Robert Motherwell, Thomas Nozkowski, Ir\ing Penn,
Anne and Patrick Poirer. Yvonne Rainer. Judith Shea, Pat Steir,
Lenore Tawney, Paul Thek. George Trakas. and Lebbeus Woods. In
addition, the gallery has presented notable historic exhibitions of
design: Alexei Brodovich. Czech Cubism. Charles Eames. frogde-
sign, and Memphis.
Additional exhibition spaces in Dorrance Hamilton Hall Galleries,
the Solmssen Court Gallery, and the Window on Broad furnish
opportunities for faculty, alumni, students, and regional talents.
Nearly every department also launches its own series of exhibits.
The galleries in Media Arts, The Mednick and 1401 . the Painting/
Drawing Gallery, the Printmaking Gallery, the Richard C. von Hess
Illustration Gallery, and the Ceramics/Sculpture Gallery all show
work of emerging and established artists. Student-run invitational and
juried exhibitions in Gallery One give students the experience of
installing shows. Museum Exhibition Planning and Design MFA stu-
dents gain experience and skills from their practical work in the
galleries. Highlights of the year are the Annual Student Show, a fea-
tured Commencement event, the Student Scholarship Exhibition, and
Senior Student and Master of Fine Arts exhibitions.
Special Facilities
Anderson Hall is a nine-story visual arts facility that houses a spa-
cious gallery, studios, classrooms, and a library designed with a
feeling of openness. Through the combination of Anderson Hall.
Dorrance Hamilton Hall, and the Terra Building, the University pro-
vides a wealth of modem studios, shops, labs, equipment, galleries,
and libraries to support the making of art.
The variety of studios and equipment is extensive, ranging from
woodworking and metal shops, printmaking and computerized type-
setting shops, to fine arts, crafts and design studios, and photo, film,
and digital imaging labs. Four large kilns enhance ceramic-making
capabilities and a forge has been built for sculpture. A large weaving
shop is complete with dozens of looms and a dyeing room. A 19th
century carriage house was converted into a skylit figure-modeling
studio for sculpture students.
Digital Technology/Electronic Media
Advances in digital technologies have established the computer as
an essential tool for creative work. Artists, designers, and performers
will increasingly be responsible for the development of new digital
media. These advances are creating a wealth of job opportunities for
individuals with creative talent that is unparalleled in the history of
the arts.
Since 198 1 , The University of the Arts has been a leader in the
field of computer-mediated art and design education in the Northeast
region. The University has carefully integrated new media technolo-
gies into traditional fields of study within art and design disciplines.
Additionally, the Electronic Media Department offers studio elecrive
courses in computer concepts, virtual sculpture, digital multimedia,
and electronic media production, at introductor)'. intermediate, and
advanced levels for all students regardless of their major. UArts
remains dedicated to continuing this leadership role of preparing
students for career opportunities in traditional and electronic media.
Typography/Imaging Lab
The Imaging Lab is a fully equipped pre-press and output facility
that accommodates Book Arts, The Borowsky Center for Publicafion
Arts, Graphic Design, Illustration, Media Arts, and Printmaking,
among many other departments. We have a traditional darkroom
with three copy cameras, two enlargers. and one contact frame. Non-
silver classes do all their darkroom work in this facility. The output
center houses a Dolev 400 image-setter, film processor. Cannon
CLC 900 color fiery printer, HP large-format six color printer, and
three Macintosh workstations. We process film and color output for
student work and departmental needs. Students are able to work in
the lab under technicians and learn the workings of pre-press and
high-end digital output. Imaging workshops are held with classes in
the lab, as well as one-on-one consultations with students in the final
stages of creative digital work for critiques, portfolios, and thesis
exhibitions.
Media Arts Studios
The Media Arts Department (photography/film/digital video/ ani-
mation) provides students with high-end equipment and studios
modeled after professional environments. Media Arts houses two
Master Series Oxberry animation stands, as used by Disney and
other professional firms, to film animation drawings, which enable
students to produce professional-quality work. In addition. Media
Arts digital facilities include three AVID digital video editing sys-
tems, a state-of-the-art Windows XP Professional computer
animation lab, and a 16-station closed-loop color-calibrated digital
imaging computer lab. Media Arts also houses two animation
shooting studios, a specially built and acoustically isolated film
shooting studio, two fully equipped digital sound studios, five
flatbed film editors, as well as video editing, a Casablanca editing
system, splicers, synchronizers, and projectors.
Other Media Arts facilities include state-of-the-art high-venUla-
tion darkrooms with 55 4x5 enlargers, a black-and-white RC print
processor, a color darkroom with 14 individual stations and a 32"
RA-four color print processor, and four photography shooting stu-
dios with all the essential equipment for studio photography.
The Media Arts Equipment Room serves student needs by
checking out animation, film, and photography equipment,
including lights, cameras, tripods, animation discs, and sound equip-
ment. The Equipment Room is open seven days a week and offers
extended hours on weekdays.
Digital Imaging Lab
The Media Arts Department Digital imaging Lab is a unique
facility built to support high-resolurion digital imaging and digital
video. The lab has 16 Apple Macintosh G4 computers, equipped
with one gb of RAM, dual high-capacity hard drives, dual 21 -inch
Color Calibrated Apple Studio Display monitors for each cpu. Ultra
SCSI cards, DVD-RAM, and Fire Wire CD-RW drives. Each station
has an Epson 2450 Fire Wire flatbed scanner, and an Wacom Intuos
9x12 tablet. There are a number of Polaroid and Minolta Film
Scanners, and an Agfa T2500 Digital Pre-Press scanner. For output.
The University of the Art.s Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
29
there are a number of devices including a Tektronix Phaser 780
color laser printer, a Fuji Pictrography 3500 Digital Printer, a Xante
Tabloid Laser Printer, a Polaroid Pro-Palette 8045 8K film recorder,
and a Hewlett Packard 5000PS wide-format digital Inkjet printer,
with both dye- and pigment-based inks. The lab also has two Pro-
Tools XP systems, 1 7 Panasonic DV 1 000 digital video decks and a
Sony DSR-40 digital video deck. The lab is managed by an Apple
OS X server, with more than one terrabyte of storage to facilitate the
requirements of a modem digital workflow. The lab is available to
students majoring in a Media Arts program, or enrolled in specifi-
cally designated Media Arts courses.
Computer Animation Lab
The Media Arts Department Computer Animation Lab is a lab
designed solely for computer animation. It features 16 IBM Dual
Intel XEON processor workstations running Windows XP
Professional, with Softimage XSI 3.0. Maya for 3-D animation, and
Adobe Premiere, After Effects, Illustrator, and Photoshop for 2-D
work. Digital Audio is handled by Sound Forge and Pro-Tools, and
there is also a Macintosh OS X system for Fire Wire output to the
Sony DSR-40 Digital Video Deck. Each system is designed specifi-
cally for animation, and has a Wacom Tablet, a dedicated Fire Wire
scanner, CD-RW drives, and a DVD and RW drive. Digital output is
handled by three DPS Perception systems, a Sony Beta deck, a
Panasonic SVHS deck, a Sony Digital Video Deck, and a DVD
burner. The lab also has a Tektronix Phaser 780 color laser printer
for output of animation stills. The lab is managed by a dedicated
IBM Fibre Channel server running Windows 2003.
Digital Audio Sound Studios
The Media Arts Department houses two state-of-the-art Digital
Audio Sound Studios. They are based around two Pro-Tools 24 Mix-
TDM systems, each with a Mackie 16x8x2 Mixing Console, a
Tascam 234 4-track Cassette Recorder, a Tascam 1 22 Stereo
Cassette recorder, two Neutrik 48 pt. patch bays, a Yamaha SPX900
Sound Processor, an Apple Macintosh G4 with a 17-inch monitor,
DVD-RAM, Fire Wire CD-RW Drive. Tascam DA60 DAT recorder,
and a USD Sync Controller. Both rooms can record from the Film
Studio, or an Isolation Booth with microphones, foldback, and direct
instrument connection.
The facilities also inclde three AVID Express Deluxe (v.5.7) suites
running Windows 2000 Professional on Compaq W8000 2.8ghz,
512 RAM Computer Systems with Dual Stream Uncompressed
video, Meridien III Board Set, Son Beta UVW01800 video deck,
JVC BR-5800 SVHS video deck, mackie mixer, and dual 21 -inch
Sony Trinitron Monitors, complemented by three Final Cut Pro
video editing Workstations. Twi Apple XServe Dual Processor sys-
tems, one Dual Processor Apple G4 system. Each suite includes
DigiDesign ProTools 001 software and Hardware, Sony DSR 1 1 DV
Decks, and 20-inch flat panel displays.
Media Arts Department Dub Room
The Media Arts Dub Room allows conversion of audio and video
media to differing formats. The following components are supported
through track-mounted patch bays for dupes of conversion. Sony
Beta UVW-1800 video deck, JVC BR-5800 SVHS video deck,
Mackie 12 channel mixer, Elmo TRV-16 Film Transfer unit, Otari
1/4-inch half-track studio editing deck. Tascam 122 Stereo Cassette
Deck, Yamaha DVD Player, Panasonic AGW3 Multi-Sandard VHS
deck, Tascam DA60 Studio DAT recordcer, Tascam MDl Minidisk
deck, Technicx Turntable, Magnasync 16 mm magnetic film
recorder, Nagra 4.2 tape deck, two Sony UMatic 3/4-inch video
decks, and a Tascam Patch Bay.
Borowsky Center for Publication Arts
The Borowsky Center for Publication Arts is both a unique educa-
tional arm of the University and a printing facility that provides
students, staff, faculty, and visiting artists a resource to explore the
creative potential inherent in the offset lithographic printing
medium. The Center enables qualified users to experience the com-
plete graphic arts process from initial conceptualization through
production, while maintaining the highest printing standards. The
Center is equipped with state-of-the-art equipment, including a
Heidelberg Kors 19" x 25" offset press, a Dos flatbed horizontal
camera, a darkroom for shooting and developing negatives, and
platemaking and stripping facilities. Staffed with two master printers
and student assistants, the Borowsky Center produces a wide variety
of printed material including posters, catalogs, brochures, announce-
ments, and limited edition prints. The Center's Fact Sheet, which
includes all procedures for project submittal, is available in the CAD
Dean's office.
30
The University of the Ails Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Undergraduate Programs
All freshman students enter the 18-credit Foundation core pro-
gram that includes courses in drawing, two-dimensional design,
three-dimensional design, and time-motion studies. The Foundation
program introduces the basic language and processes of the visual
arts and prepares the students for entry into a major department.
Through freshman elective course offerings, students are introduced
to major course options and opportunities offered by the College of
Art and Design.
In the sophomore year, students select a major from one of the
following departments:
Crafts: (Ceramics, Fibers, Metals, Wood)
Fine Arts: Painting and Drawing,
Printmaking/Book Arts, Sculpture
Graphic Design
Illustration
Industrial Design
Media Arts: Animation, Film/Digital Video, Photography
The major program is augmented by required and elective courses
in other departments in CAD, CPA, and CMAC to encourage an
awareness of the productive interaction that can occur between the
many disciplines available at the University. Alternative career
opportunities tire often developed by students stimulated by courses
outside their major.
The college cuiTcntly offers three concentrations and seven minor
programs that can augment or complement the student's major
course of study.
Many departments offer internships and practicums to study off-
campus during the junior and senior years. Frequent field trips to
museums, galleries, artists* studios, and design .studios in
Philadelphia, New York, and Washington, D.C., supplement their
regular work in studios and workshops.
Academic Advising
Academic advising at the University is designed to provide max-
imum information and assistance to students from the time they
enter the Foundation program in their freshman year until they com-
plete their final .semester as seniors.
In the Foundation year, each student is assigned to a Foundation
section with its own advisor. Each student is required to meet with
the advisor at least once each semester and is encouraged to seek out
the advisor as soon as any difficulties begin to occur.
At the end of the Foundation year, when the student selects and
enters one of the major departments, the student is assigned to a fac-
ulty member who teaches in that department. This faculty member
serves as that student's advisor for the next three years. Each student
meets with his or her advisor at least once a semester to discuss the
student's acadeinic program.
In addition, there are two formalized advising sessions:
1 . Second semester, freshman year: When students enter a major
department, the advisor meets in small groups (four to five students)
to orient them to collegiate and departmental academic requirements
and standards, departmental expectations, elective options and
opportunities, program strategies, two-year planning, and office
hours;
2. Second semester, junior year: Individual meetings to review
progress, plan final year (both semesters), and review graduation
requirements. Students may request a degree audit from the Office
of the Registrar at any time.
Transcript copies of student records are supplied on request to
faculty advisors by the Registrar following the recording of grades
each semester.
Credit Distribution
The student is ultimately responsible for completion of all course
requirements for the degree program in which he/she is enrolled.
The College requires a minimum of 123 credits for graduation (126
for the BS in Industrial Design). A student carrying an average of
15.5 credits per semester would be making normal academic
progress toward graduation.
The seneral credit structure for the BFA is as follows:
Courses
Foundation
Major department credits
Studio Elective
Liberal Arts
Credits
18
42
21
42
Total credits
123
Studio Electives
• Major studio departments may require up to six credits in
another studio major, and/or Liberal Arts.
• Students may elect to replace up to six studio elective credits
with Liberal Arts courses.
• Students are required to take at least nine credits of studio elec-
tive courses outside of their major program.
• Elective studio credits may be completed in any department at
the College of Art and Design, the College of Performing Arts, or
the College of Media and Communication.
Major Program Requirements
The professional orientation and preparation of the College of Art
and Design's undergraduate major degree programs require students
to achieve beyond the University's minimum academic standards.
Students must achieve a grade of "C" or better in all College of
Art and Design major course requirements and any required courses
in other departments, including a discipline history if applicable.
Students who receive a grade of "C-" or lower in a required
major course must repeat the course. The degree requirement for
that student will be increased by the number of credits that must
be repeated.
Students who receive "C-" or lower grades in major courses are
required to schedule an appointment with the chair of their depart-
ment during the first week of classes of the semester immediately
following the .semester in which the "C-" or lower grade was
received. After advising with the chair, students must adjust their
schedule accordingly during the Drop/Add period.
A student who receives more than one grade of "C-" or lower in
required major courses in a given semester will be reviewed by the
Academic Review Committee and placed on academic censure, even
if the student's GPA is above 2.0.
An excessive number of grades of "C-" or lower in major course-
work may result in dismissal. Students who are unable to achieve
minimum grades in major coursework are advised to speak with
their advisor and consider transferring to another major.
The University of the Aits Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
31
The Art Therapy and Education concentrations are special courses
of study that are offered in conjunction with the studio major pro-
grams. Interested students should refer to the program requirements
of those concentrations.
Every student must have the approval of his or her department to
proceed to the next level of coursework. Advising is a shared respon-
sibility between the department and the student. Each must remain
informed about the student's progress toward graduation. Finally, the
student's petition to graduate must be approved by the department
advisor or chairperson in consultation with his/her faculty.
CAD Minors/Concentrations
The College of Art and Design offers minors and concentrations
that enable a student to focus on a specific discipline through organ-
ized electives. Students wishing to include a minor or concentration
are governed by the following guidelines:
1 . A student may not take a major and a minor or concentration in
the same subject. Minors must be taken in a program other than the
major.
2. Courses applied to the minor or concentration may not be used
for the major, but students may include this coursework as part of
their studio elective degree requirement.
3. All minors require a minimum of 15 credits, which are defined
by the department: generally, no substitution is allowed.
4. Students must declare their intent to complete a minor or con-
centration by filing the Minor Declaration Form in the Office of the
Registrar. This form must be signed by the student's major and
minor advisors. Once a minor or concentration is on file in the
Registrar's Office, any changes must be discussed with the faculty
advisor.
5. A student pursuing a minor or concentration may be required to
complete more than the minimum number of credits required for
graduation.
6. Minors and concentrations are available only to undergraduate
students.
7. Students wishing to pursue a minor or concentration must meet
eligibility requirements, which may include satisfactory completion
of foundation courses, prerequisites, and departmental portfolio
review.
Animation Minor, Media Arts Department
This minor concentrates on the development of drawing skills that
embrace a sense of timing and movement. The program also
includes instruction in the basics of film and video technology.
Film/Digital Video and Animation majors may not declare an
Animation Drawing minor
PF 2 1 A Introduction to Film I
PF212A Introduction to Animation I
PF 2 1 2 B Introduction to Animation II
PF312A Junior Animation Workshop I
PF 3 1 2 B Junior Animation Workshop II
Book Arts Minor, Fine Arts Department
This minor emphasizes the development of skills related to
designing and creating books, incorporating both type and imagery.
Instruction in image-making in multiples through printmaking
processes, basic typesetting techniques, and introductory book-
binding methods are studied. Fine Arts-Printmaking majors may not
declare a Book Arts minor
PR 201 Relief Monotype or 3.0 credits
PR 204 Screenprinting - Etching
PR 307 Book Arts: Concept and Structure 3.0
PR 326 Introduction to Offset Lithography 3.0
PR 425 Book Production 3.0
PR 223 Bookbinding Methods 1.5
PR 224 Book Arts Structures 1.5
Figurative Illustration Minor, Illustration Department
The focus of this minor is on work with the figure in space. Old
master and traditional drawing and painting techniques are demon-
strated and utilized as the student concentrates on the development
of skills related to figurative drawing and painting. Illustration
majors may not declare a Figurative Illustration minor.
IL 200 A Pictorial Foundation
IL 200 B Pictorial Foundation
IL 202 A Figure Anatomy
IL 202 B Figure Anatomy
IL 303 Figure Utilization
3.0 credits
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
Film/Digital Video Minor, Media Arts Department
This minor provides training in film and video technology.
Students work on their own as well as in teams with other students.
Animation and Film/Digital Video majors may not declare a
Film/Digital Video minor
PF2I0A
PF210B
PF3I0A
PF320
PF322
Introduction to Film I
3.0 credits
Introduction to Film/Digital Video 3.0
Junior Cinema Production I 3.0
Sine-Sound for Narrative Film 3.0
Experiments in
Advanced Digital Video 3.0
Narrative Video, Media Arts Department
The minor in Narrative Video explores digital video as a medium
for storytelling. It introduces students to various aspects of video
production, including script writing, storyboarding, editing, sound
design, directing, and producing. Students develop their skills as
they advance from scene exercises through a short film to a final
year-long project. This minor is open to all UArts majors, except
those in Film/Digital Video. As this minor is co-hosted by the
College of Media and Communications, CMAC students should
refer to the CMAC section of this catalog for additional regulations
regarding this minor
One of the following:
3.0 credits
WM219
Writing for Film
3.0
3.0
CM 295
Narrative Video
3.0
Production Workshop
3.0
3.0
PF410A
Senior Cinema Production I
3,0
3.0
PF410B
Senior Cinema Production II
3.0
One of the following:
CM 120 Sound Communication 3.0
PF 320 Sync-Sound for
Narrative Film 3.0
32
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Photography Minor, Media Arts Department
The Photography minor stresses a fine-art approach to photog-
raphy. It provides the basics of black-and-white as well as color
photography and digital imaging. The emphasis is placed on gaining
experience in a wide range of pictorial photographic applications.
Once a student has mastered basic photographic technique, materials
and processes that are used to manipulate photographic imagery are
explored. Creativity and personal expression are emphasized in all
of these courses. Photography majors may not declare a
Photography minor.
PF 2 1 1 A Introduction to Photography I or 3.0 credits
PF 209 Photography for Illustrators
PF211B Introduction to Photography II 3.0
PF217 Color Concepts 3.0
PF 3 1 1 A Junior Photography Workshop 3.0
PF 3 1 5 Digital Photography Workshop 3.0
Studio Photography Minor, Media Arts Department
This minor is designed to give the student mastery of the full
range of camera formats from a 35mm small format up to a 4x5
studio view camera. Technical training covers electronic strobe and
tungsten studio lighting, as well as color transparency film and con-
ventional black-and-white, and color photographic print materials
and techniques. Advanced-level classes concentrate on design and
creative approaches to staged and directed shooting. Photography
majors may not declare a Studio Photography minor.
GD 310 Photographies or
PF 3 1 5 Digital Photography Workshop or
PF 2 1 1 B Photography II 3.0 credits
PF 2 1 1 A Introduction to Photography or 3.0
PF 209 Photography for Illustrators
PF217 Color Concepts 3.0
PF 3 1 3 A Basic Photography Studio I 3.0
PF 3 13 B Basic Photography Studio II 3.0
Typography Minor, Graphic Design Department
The student learns the basic visual grammar of typography, incor-
porating this knowledge into information-based interpretations.
Intermediate studies are concerned with the informational and edito-
rial uses of typography, as well as multi-page formats. The advanced
level develops a sophisticated expertise in solving complex mes-
sages through typographic expression. Graphic Design majors may
not declare a Typography minor.
GD212 Typography Fundamentals 3.0 credits
EM 201 Electronic Media/Production I 1.5*
EM 202 Electronic Media/Production II 1.5**
GD 306 A Typography Emphasis 3.0 *
GD 306 B Typography Emphasis 3.0 **
GD 426 Advanced Typography 3.0
* It is recommended that these two courses be taken concurrently,
when possible.
** It is recommended that these two courses be taken concur-
rently, when possible.
Digital Fine Arts Concentration, Electronic Media
Department
This concentration is designed for students grounded in tradi-
tional two- and three-dimensional art and design principles who
wish to incorporate digital tools and technology to create highly per-
sonalized artistic statements. While conceptually and procedurally
digitally based, the digital fine arts concentration provides for phys-
ical output in two-, three- and four-dimensional realms as well as
combined formats. Working closely with advisors, the student
selects 15 credits from categories I and II, with a six credit minimum
in each category.
I. Imaging. Interactivity and Sound Options:
EM 210
Digital Multimedia
3.0 credits
PF216
Computer Animation
3.0
PF315
Digital Photo Workshop
3.0
MU149A
Aural Concepts
3.0
MU415A
Introduction to MIDI
3.0
PF218
Creative Sound
3.0
II. Digital Expression and Output Alternatives:
PR 412 Advanced Printmaking Media:
Digital Applications 3.0 credits
PR 425 Book Production 3.0
PF322 Media Technology 3.0
ID 425 Advanced Computer-Aided Design 1.5
Art Education Pre-Certification Concentration, Art
Education Department
This concentration is designed to be taken in conjunction with a
regular studio major in the CAD BFA program. In addition to
meeting the requirements of a major studio department, students
take courses in the Art Education Department, plus prescribed
courses in liberal arts, photography, electronic media, and other
studio areas. Please see the Art Education program description for
additional information, requirements, and regulations.
Art Therapy Concentration, Art Education/Art Therapy
Department
While enrolled in one of the BFA programs in CAD, students may
also elect this concentration, which introduces them to the discipline
of art therapy on the undergraduate level. Students take four desig-
nated courses in psychology and behavioral science, which can also
count toward the liberal arts requirements of their BFA program, and
15 credits of art therapy courses, which are considered as studio
electives. Please see the Art Therapy program description for addi-
tional information, requirements, and regulations.
Internships
Crafts, Fine Arts, Media Arts, Illustration, and Design sponsor an
internship course open to all CAD students regardless of their
majors. Internships are voluntary and valuable. They reinforce and
expand classroom theory and practice and allow the student to test
possible career choices and get a feel for the workplace. Students
applying for an internship must meet the following eligibility
requirements: junior or senior level in a BS or BFA program, a 2.5
cumulative grade-point average and be registered for no more than
18 credits, including those from the Internship during the semester.
No more than six Internship credits may be credited toward a BS or
BFA degree.
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
33
Each participating department has an Internship Faculty Advisor
who is responsible for coordinating the internships, placing students
with workplace sponsors, advising students on course requirements,
and deciding on the final pass/fail grades.
Students who are interested in pursuing an internship may obtain
Internship information from their faculty advisor, the Career
Services Office, or the Dean's Office in CAD. Students sign up for
internships during the registration process. The internship course is
graded on a pass/fail basis and carries three academic credits.
Foreign and Summer Study Programs
Foreign and summer studies are available through a number of
programs hosted by other institutions. Interested students should
meet with the chair of their major department to discuss the appro-
priate program, timing, and feasibility of off-campus study. Those
who choose to participate should contact the Registrar and Financial
Aid Office for advising on transfer of credit and financing.
Vermont Studio Center, Vermont
The University of the Arts is the accrediting institution for the
Vermont Studio Center and our students receive a discount on
tuition charges. Interested students should contact the Office of the
Dean for advising and the Office of Continuing Studies for registra-
tion procedures.
Cooperative Program with
Philadelphia University
An agreeriient between The University of the Arts and
Philadelphia University (formerly Philadelphia College of Textiles
and Science) permits a limited number of students in each institu-
tion to register for a maximum of three undergraduate credits per
semester at the sister institution without the payment of additional
tuition.
Students are limited to a total of six undergraduate exchange
credits during their four-year enrollment at the home institution.
Registration is available on a selective basis for qualified students
and is restricted to courses not offered at the home institution.
Interested students should contact the Office of the Registrar at
215-717-6420 for additional infonnation and reoistration materials.
Student Exchange
Students in good standing from other institutions may attend the
College for either one or two semesters on a full-time basis. To be
eligible, a student must have completed the freshman year at the
home institution and receive approval from the department chair of
the major department in the College of Art and Design. In addition,
the student must provide a letter from the dean of the home college
granting permission to take courses at The University of the Arts
and agreeing to accept those credits for credit at the student's own
institution. All University expenses are the responsibility of the stu-
dent. Inquiries should be addressed to the Office of the Dean at
215-717-6120.
Association of Independent Colleges of Art
and Design (AICAD) Mobility Program
The College of Art and Design at The University of the Arts is a
member of the Association of Independent Colleges of Art and
Design (AICAD). Students in good standing may .spend a semester
(with a possible extension to two semesters on a space-available
basis) as a guest at another member institution. Students remain
matriculated at The University of the Arts, and with their advisor's
prior approval will receive full credit for work done at one of the
following cooperating institutions:
Art Academy of Cincinnati
Art Institute of Boston
Art Institute of Southern California
Atianta College of Art
California College of Arts and Crafts
California Institute of the Arts
College for Creative Studies
Cleveland Institute of Art
Columbus College of Art and Design
Cooper Union School of Art
Corcoran School of Art
Kansas City Art Institute " ■
Lyme Academy of Fine Arts
Maine College of Art
Maryland Institute, College of Art ■
Massachusetts College of Art
Memphis College of Art
Milwaukee Institute of Art and Design
Minneapolis College of Art and Design
Montserrat College of Art
Moore College of Art and Design
OregonCollegeof Art and Craft ' '
Otis College of Art and Design
Pacific Northwest College of Art
Parsons School of Design
Pennsylvania Academy of the Fine Arts
Rhode Island School of Design
Ringling School of Art and Design
San Francisco Art Institute
School of the Art Institute of Chicago
School of the Museum of Fine Arts,
Boston
AICAD International Affiliates
Alberta College of Art and Design
Burren College of Art
Emily Carr Institute of Art and Design
Nova Scotia College of Art and Design
Ontario College of Art and Design
Students apply through their home institutions, which are respon-
sible for the selection of participants. For further information,
contact the Office of the Dean, 215-717-6120.
34
The University or the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Foundation
Program
Diane Pepe
dpepe@uarts.edu
Michael Rossman
mrossman@uarts.edu
Co-Chairpersons
215-717-6210
The Foundation program in the College of
Art and Design provides incoming freshmen
with a year devoted to a basic understanding
of principles and concepts in the visual arts.
During the first semester, each student is a
member of a Foundation section and takes
three co-requisite courses: Two-Dimensional
Design. Three-Dimensional Design, and
Drawing. During the second semester, stu-
dents select a minimum of nine credits
(three co-requisite courses) from the four
courses offered by Foundation: Two-
Dimensional Design. Three-Dimensional
Design, Drawing, and Time and Motion.
Each class meets for three hours, twice a
week.
Each section of students is taught by a
team of faculty members who are profes-
sionals in their various fields of art and
design; many hold the ranks of Professor
and Associate Professor In Foundation
courses, faculty members stress not only the
independent qualities of a discipline, but
also its interdependent character Through
these basic studies and their interactions,
students discover the underlying values and
principles important to all visual arts.
Classroom work is enriched by home
assignments, critiques and reviews, guest
artists, films, slides, and class trips. One fac-
ulty member from each section's team is
designated as the advisor to that section.
Students meet individually with the advisor
to discuss concerns, the registration process,
and their choice of major
The student chooses an additional course
offered by the major studio departments
each semester These elective courses are
designed to acquaint the student with the
practices of the major studio areas. Students
also register for two Liberal Arts courses in
each semester, as required by the University
core.
Midyear Admission
In addition to the typical September start
date, students may also enter midyear and
begin the Foundation Program in January.
The department schedules first-semester
core courses during the spring semester, and
a seven-week, nine-credit, intensive second
semester between mid-May and the end of
June. Midyear admits who successfully
complete the two-semester Foundation
Program between January and June can
enter their major program of study in the
fall of the same calendar year in which they
entered the program.
Facilities
In addition to the numerous multipurpose
studios used by Foundation students for
their regular class activities, the Foundation
program provides other facilities to support
and enrich studio projects.
The Foundation Department has a Mac-
based digital media lab and a compliment of
analog and digital video cameras. This
facility is used by all classes and can be
accessed by students to execute projects in
Two-Dimensional Design, Three-
Dimensional Design, and Time Motion.
The Foundation Shop is used for all
Three-Dimensional Design, and Time and
Motion classes, and provides all Foundation
students with the opportunity to work with a
diversity of materials such as wood, metal,
plastic, and stone. The Foundation Shop
houses a wide range of power equipment,
including band saws, scroll saws, sanders,
table saws, chop saws and other power
tools. The Shop is monitored by a full-time
Shop Supervisor and is open from 8 a.m. to
4 p.m. Monday through Friday.
The Nature Lab (the Visual Resource
Center) contains an extensive selection of
natural and man-made objects that serve as
sources for research that enhances and com-
plements the educational experience. The
Nature Lab is used frequently by all
Drawing classes. It is also well utilized by
Three-Dimensional and Two-Dimensional
Design classes. Some of the many objects in
our collection include rocks, minerals,
animal skeletons such as birds, cats, and tur-
tles, human skeletons and skulls, plant
forms, seashells. sea horses, coral, horse-
shoe crabs, taxidermy reptiles, bats, frogs,
and more. Students are invited to use the
Nature Lab in addition to their scheduled
class time.
The full-time freshman student is typi-
cally scheduled for 16.5 credits each
semester usually as follows:
Foundation
Credits
Fall*
FPllO
Drawing
3.0
FPI20
2-D Design
3.0
FP 130
3-D Design
3.0
Electives
1.5
HUllOA
First Year Writing!
3.0
HU103A
Intro, to Modernism I
3.0
FallTotal
16.5
Spring **
Choose am
three courses:***
FPlll
Drawing
3.0
FP121
2-D Design
3.0
FP131
3-D Design
3.0
FP140
Time and Motion
3.0
Electives 1 .5
HUllOB First Year Writing II 3.0
HU 103 B Intro, to Modernism II 3.0
Spring Total 16.5
Freshman Year Total
33.0
* Students entering the Foundation pro-
gram through Midyear Admission will
enroll in these courses for the spring
semester
** Students entering the Foimdation pro-
gram through Midyear Admission will
enroll in these courses for the Summer I
semester.
*** Under certain circumstances, stu-
dents may take all four second-semester
Foundation courses.
Ttie University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
35
Foundation Faculty
David V. Berger
Senior Lecturer
BFA, The University of the Arts
MFA, Pennsylvania Academy of the
Fine Arts
Lowell Boston
Adjunct Assistant Professor
BFA, The University of the Arts
MFA, Cahfomia Institute of the Arts
Bill Brown
Senior Lecturer
BA, Temple University
MFA, Washington University
Mark Campbell
Associate Professor
BFA, Philadelphia College of Art
MFA, Mills College
Charles Cooper
Senior Lecturer
BFA, Philadelphia College of Art
MFA, Yale University . •
MaddyGold
Senior Lecturer
BFA, Philadelphia College of Art
MFA, Pratt Institute
Eileen Goodman
Adjunct Professor
BFA, Philadelphia College of Art
MFA, Tyler School of Art,
Temple University
Michael Grothusen
Assistant Professor
BFA, University of Kansas
MFA, Tyler School of Art,
Temple University
Gerald Herdman
Associate Professor
Certificate, Cleveland Institute of Art
MFA, University of Pennsylvania
Debra Hoffman
Lecturer
BFA, Pennsylvania Academy of the
Fine Arts
MFA, Milton Avery Graduate School,
Bard College
Steven Jaffe
Associate Professor
BFA, Philadelphia College of Art
MFA, Tyler School of Art,
Temple University
Elsa Johnson
Professor
BFA, Cooper Union
MFA, University of Pennsylvania
Niles Lewandowski
Associate Professor
BFA, Maryland Institute College of Art
MFA, University of Pennsylvania
David Love
Senior Lecturer
BFA, Columbus College of Art & Design
MFA, Pennsylvania State University
Larry Mitnick
Associate Professor
BArch, Cooper Union
MArch, Harvard University
Diane Pepe
Adjunct Associate Professor •
BFA, Carnegie Mellon University
MFA, University of New Mexico
Boris Putterman \
Associate Professor ,
Diploma, Cooper Union School of Art
BFA, Philadelphia College of Art
MFA, Indiana University
Leo Robinson
Master Lecturer
BA, Howard University
MFA, Cranbrook Academy of Art
Michael Rossman
Professor
BID, MFA, Pratt Institute
Karen Saler
Associate Professor
BFA, Philadelphia College of Art
MFA, Maryland Institute College of Art
Foundation Professors
Emeritus
EdnaAndrade
Robert McGovern
Richard Stetser
36
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Crafts
James Makins
jmakins@uarts.edu
Chairperson
215-717-6100
The Crafts Department seeks to develop
artists of originality and resourcefulness
who can excel in the most competitive pro-
fessional environment. Smdio experience is
provided in four major craft areas: ceramics,
fibers, metals, and wood. There are also
offerings in glass and plaster to complement
the curriculum.
Each crafts area offers a balanced con-
centration in both the technical and
aesthetic aspects of the medium. While
practical training and specialized skills are
necessary for creative ability, the conceptual
and expressive evolution of each student is
the essential focus of the department. An
ongoing study of the contemporary crafts
movement is seen as an integral element for
those involved in the program. The range of
faculty in each area provides the student
with exposure to a diversity of professional
perspective and experience.
Through an incisive and rigorous cur-
riculum, the department prepares students
for professional involvement in their craft.
Upon graduation, students elect to
become independent artists, teachers, or
designers, or tlnd employment in industry.
Individuals often combine these occupa-
tions in order to meet their individual needs
and goals.
Crafts Faculty
Sharon Church
Professor "" -
BS, Skidmore College
MFA. School for American Craftsmen,
Rochester Institute of Technology
Maegan Crowley
Lecturer
BFA. The University of the Arts
MFA, Cranbrook Academy of Art
William Daley
Professor Emeritus
BA, Massachusetts College of Art
MA, Columbia Teachers College
Christopher Darway
Senior Lecturer
BFA, Philadelphia College of Art
Larry Donahue
Adjunct Associate Professor
BFA, Philadelphia College of Art
MA, The University of the Arts
Rachel Fuld
Lecturer
BA, Oberlin College
Alec Karros
Visiting Assistant Professor
BFA, Philadelphia College of Art
MFA, Rhode Island School of Design
Lucartha Kohler
Senior Lectuivr
Moore College of Art
Carnegie Mellon University
Jack Larimore
Adjunct Associate Professor
BS, Michigan State University
Mi-KyoungLee
Assistant Professor
BFA, Dong-A University, Pusan, Korea
MFA, The University of the Arts
MFA, Cranbrook Academy of Art
James Makins
Professor
BFA, Philadelphia College of Art
MFA, Cranbrook Academy of Art
Rod McCormick
Professor
BFA, Tyler School of Art,
Temple University
MFA, Rhode Island School of Design
Pam Pawl
Lecturer
BS, Philadelphia College of Textiles
and Science
Judith Schaechter
Adjunct Professor
BFA, Rhode Island School of Design
Anne Schaefer
Lecturer
BFA, Washington University
Warren Seelig
Distinguished Visiting Professor
BS, Philadelphia College of Textiles
and Science
MFA, Cranbrook Academy of Art
Patricia Siembora
Lecturer
BFA, MAT, The University of the Arts
Lola Brooks Spier
Lecturer
BFA, State University of New York
at New Paltz
Lizbeth Stewart
Associate Professor
BFA, Moore College of Art
Roy Superior
Professor
BFA, Pratt Institute
MFA, Yale University
Walter Zimmerman
Assistant Professor
BA, Pennsylvania State University
Certification in Art Therapy
MFA, Rochester Institute of Technology
The University of the Ans Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
37
Crafts
Bachelor of Fine Arts 123 credits
Media-Specific Course
Offerings:
Foundation
Credits
Junior
Credits
CR211A/B
CR2I2A/B
Fall
Fall
CR221A
FPIIO
Drawing
3.0
CR300A
Projects II
3.0
FP120
2-D Design
3.0
CRXXX
Media-Specific Course
3.0
CR22IB
FP 130
3-D Design
3.0
CRXXX
Media-Specific Course
(300 level/advanced)
3.0
CR222
Electives
1.5
Electives
3.0
CR227
HUIIOA
First Year Writing I
3.0
HU253
History of Crafts
3.0
CR231A/B
HU103A
Intro, to Modernism 1
3.0
CR232
Fall Total
16.5
Fall Total
Spring
15.0
CR 241 A
CR241B
Spring
CR300 B
Projects II
3.0
CR242
Choose any
three courses:
CRXXX
Media-Specific Course
3.0
CR243
FPlll
Drawing
3.0
(300 level/advanced)
CR245
FP121
2-D Design
3.0
Electives
3.0
CR249
FP131
3-D Design
3.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
6.0
CR251
FP140
Time and Motion
Electives
3.0
1.5
Spring Total
15.0
CR252
CR 253
Junior Year Total
30.0
HUllOB
First Year Writing II
Intro, to Modernism II
3.0
3.0
CR255
HU103B
Senior
CR256
16.5
CR26I
Spring Tota
Fall
CR277
Freshman Year Total
33.0
CR400A
Projects III
3.0
CR278
CRXXX
Media-Specific Course
3.0
CR280
Sophomore
(300 level/advanced)
CR28I
Fall
Electives
3.0
CR282
CR200A
Projects I
3.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
6.0
CR283
CRXXX
Media-Specific Course
3.0
Fall Total
15.0
CR285
CRXXX
Media-Specific Course
3.0
Spring
CR286
HU140A
Art History Survey I
3.0
CR400 B
Projects III
3.0
CR287
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
CRXXX
Media-Specific Course
3.0
CR299
Fall Total
15.0
(300 level/advanced)
CR322A/B
Spring
Electives
6.0
CR329
CR200B
Projects I
3.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
CR331
CRXXX
Media-Specific Course
Electives
3.0
3.0
Spring Tota
15.0
CR332
CR370A/B
Senior Year Total:
30.0
HU140B
Art History Survey II
Liberal Arts
3.0
3.0
CR37IA/B
HUXXX
CR380A/B
Spring Tota
15.0
CR38IA/B
Electives must mclude at least nine studio credits
CR385A/B
Sophomore
Year Total
30.0
outside of the Crafts offerings.
CR386
CR999
Liberal Arts Distribution
Note all Liberal Arts courses are 3.0 credits.
HUllOA/B
3cr
3cr
HU103A/B
3cr
3cr.
HU140A/B
3cr
3cr
Literature
3cr
Humanities
3cr
Social Science
3cr
3 en
Science/Math
3 en
Lib. Arts Electives
3cr
3 en
HU 253 Histon of
Crafts
3 en
Introduction to Throwing
Introduction to Handbuilding
Introduction to Fibers
and Mixed Media
Introduction to Color and the Loom
Constructed Surface
Experimental Costume Design
Introduction to Glassblowing
Stained Glass
Body Adornment
Introduction to Jewelry
Introduction to Metalsmithing
Jewelry Rendering and Design
Art for the Body
Enameling
Introduction to Molding and Casting
Plaster Wotkshop
Ceramic Technology
Large-Scale Handbuilding
Ceramics
Introduction to Wood
Fabric Resists and Embellishment
Fabric Printing
Introduction to Metal Casting
Introduction to Electroforming
Metal Furniture
Small-Scale Steelworking
Introduction to Furniture
Wood Carving
Low-Tech Furniture
Selected Topics
Advanced Fibers Mixed Media
Advanced Texule Design
Advanced Glassblowing
Advanced Fusing and Stained Glass
Advanced Throwing
Advanced Ceramics
Advanced Jewelry/Metals
Advanced Metals
Advanced Furniture
Advanced Wood
Independent Study
38
The University of the An.s Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Crafts Curriculum
Options
The Crafts curriculum has been designed
to give the student flexibihty in his or her
choice of media concentrations. Some stu-
dents may enter the Crafts Department
knowing the specific medium in which they
wish to concentrate. Other students may elect
to divide their media-specific coursework
between two areas of potential concentration.
Still others may want to pursue a mixed
media approach to their Crafts education. All
are possible, but careful attention must be
paid to meeting departmental, college, and
University requirements while pursuing per-
sonal interests.
Of the 42 credits required for a Crafts
major, 18 of these credits are devoted to the
core of Project Courses. The remaining 24
credits are to be taken elsewhere in the
Crafts Department. However, it is important
to note that 12 of those credits must be at
the advanced (300-400) level.
Core Studio Projects
Courses
Each semester all Crafts students take
Projects, a core studio course. These courses
provide aesthetic structure and involve dis-
cussion and investigation of broader Crafts
issues, with critiques of the student's work.
Students then have the freedom to choose
from a variety of technique-based courses,
which aid in developing that aestheUc.
Emphasis is placed on the interdependency
of all the arts, with particular attention given
to the unique contribution of Crafts ide-
ology and pracfice. As a co-requisite for
Projects, each student must be enrolled in at
least one three-credit media-specific course
in a major area of concentration: ceramics,
fibers, jewelry, metalsmithing. and wood.
These co-requisites must be at the appro-
priate 200 or 300 level. Glass is currently
offered as a department elective.
Single Medium
Concentration
Students entering the department
knowing the specific medium in which they
wish to concentrate from sophomore
through senior year take one three-credit
media-specific course in that concentration
each semester of the three-year journey
through the department. Four media-spe-
cific courses must be at the advanced level.
Dual Concentration
It is possible to ha\'e a dual concentration
within the Crafts Department. If the stadent
enters the sophomore year with an interest
in two distinct media then, by taking the
prerequisite of two courses at the 200 level
early on. in the sophomore and junior years,
the student can continue at the advanced
level in these same two media during the
junior and senior years. Two three-credit
courses at the advanced level in each con-
centration will fulfill the 12-credit advanced
level requirement.
Multiple Media
Concentration
It is possible to take courses during the
sophomore and junior years in three or more
media. However, this will require the
greatest vigilance on the part of the student
to meet all the requirements for graduation.
Having sampled an array of introductory
courses, the student must then take an addi-
tional introductory course in at least one
medium in order to proceed to the advanced
level. To meet the advanced level require-
ment as a multiple media student, it will be
necessary to (a) take all 12 advanced credits
in one medium or (b) use studio elective
credits to take advanced level courses in
additional media.
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
39
Fine Arts
Gerald Nichols
gnichols@uarts.edu
Chairperson
215-717-6495
The Fine Arts Department provides stu-
dents an opportunity to explore both the
common and diverse nature of the Fine Arts
traditions of Painting/Drawing,
Printmaking/Book Arts, and Sculpture. On
the sophomore level, students are intro-
duced to the media and concepts of all three
disciplines. In the junior year, students
choose a major from one of the above studio
areas to develop personal authority and
commitment within the discipline. The
senior year is focused on advanced studio
practice and performance in the major
Upper-level Fine Arts seminars and studio
classes are designed to foster an apprecia-
tion of the shared purposes and goals of the
contemporary fme artist.
In addition to the major programs,
the University offers a Digital Fine Arts
concentration. See the listing of minors
and concentrations for information
on requirements.
Having encountered a diversity of con-
cepts, attitudes, and media, from charcoal to
the computer. Fine Arts graduates find
career opportunities as professional,
exhibiting artists, curators and gallery per-
sonnel, critics, mural and portrait painters,
decorative artists, set designers, print-
makers, bookbinders, paper and book
conservators, graphic designers, commercial
printers, mold-makers, commercial sculp-
tors, cinemafic prop makers, special effects
artists, and teachers at elementary, sec-
ondary, and university levels.
Painting/Drawing
Gerald Herdman
Coordinator
215-717-6495
The Painting/Drawing major provides a
firm basis for students to develop a profes-
sional involvement with their work. A
balance is sought between the acquisition
of studio skills and the development of a
critical intelligence.
Students are encouraged, through the
rigor of studio activity, to understand the
breadth of art in both its traditional and con-
temporary forms, and to gain increasing
authority in their own work.
Courses evolve from the study of basic
working methods and concepts to the refine-
ments of personal vision and aesthetic
judgment. In the final semester of the senior
year, each student is required to complete a
thesis project, which culminates in a formal
presentation of a paper and an exhibition of
a coordinated body of work.
The faculty of pracficing professional
artists represents a diversity of attitudes and
ideals. Through the format of studio instruc-
fion, dialogue, and critique, they seek to
instill in each student a habit of self-instruc-
tion, which will serve far beyond the
program at the University.
The Painting/Drawing Department pos-
sesses its own gallery space where faculty,
students, alumni, and invited artists have an
opportunity to exhibit their work.
Studio activity is augmented by lectures,
symposia, seminars, visiting artists, and
field trips to museums and galleries.
Painting/ Drawing Faculty
Eugene Baguskas
Associate Professor
BFA, Yale University
Gerald Herdman
Associate Professor
Certificate, Cleveland Institute of Art
MFA, University of Pennsylvania
Sharon Horvath
Assistant Professor
BFA, The Cooper Union
MFA, Tyler School of Art,
Temple University
Steven jaffe
Associate Professor
BFA. Philadelphia College of Art
MFA, Tyler School of Art,
Temple University
David Kettner
Professor
BFA, Cleveland Institute of Art
MFA, Indiana University
Eileen Neff
Adjunct Professor
BA, Temple University
BFA, Philadelphia College of Art
MFA, Tyler School of Art,
Temple University
Gerald Nichols
Professor
Diploma, Cleveland Institute of Art
MFA, University of Pennsylvania
Boris Putterman
Associate Professor
Diploma, Cooper Union School of Art
BFA, Philadelphia College of Art
MFA, Indiana University
40
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Painting/Drawing
Bachelorof Fine Arts 123 credits
Foundatic
>n Credits
Junior
Credits
Fall
Fall
FPIIO
Drawing
3.0
PT340
Color Studies
1.5
FPI20
2-D Design
3.0
FA 333 A
Attitudes and Strategies
3.0
FP 130
3-D Design
3.0
PT302A
Junior Painting
Electives
3.0
3.0
Electives
1.5
HU XXX
Liberal Arts
6.0
HUIIOA
First Year Writing I
3.0
Fall Total
16.5
HU103A
Intro, to Modernism I
3.0
Fall Total
16.5
Spring
PT360
Junior Seminar
1.5
Spring
PT334
Junior Drawing
3.0
Choose am
three courses:
PT 302 B
Junior Painting
3.0
FPlll
Drawing
3.0
FP121
2-D Design
3.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
6.0
FP131
3-D Design
3.0
Spring Total
13.5
FP140
Time and Motion
Electives
3.0
1.5
Junior Year Total
30.0
Senior
HU HOB
First Year Writing II
Intro, to Modernism U
3.0
3.0
HU 103 B
Fall
PT402A
Senior Painting
4.5
Spiing Tota
16.5
FA 424 A
Drawing References
1.5
Freshman Year Total
33.0
FA 460
Senior Fine Arts Seminar
1.5
Electives
3.0
Sophomore
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
Fall
Fall Total
13.5
PT202A
Sophomore Painting
3.0
Spring
FA 222 A
Drawing: Form and Space
3.0
PT402B
Senior Painting
6.0
Choose one course from the following three*:
FA 424 B
Drawing References
1.5
SC201
Sculpture I
3.0
Electives
6.0
PR 201
Relief/Monotype
3.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
PR 204
Screen Printing/Etching
3.0
Spring Total
16.5
HU140A
Art History Survey 1
3.0
Senior Year Total:
30.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
15.0
Fall Total
Spring
* Painting Majors must take one sculpture course
PT 202 B
Sophomore Painting
3.0
and one printmaking course. These will be counted
as electives
wtside of the Painting offerings.
Choose 3.0
redits from the following:
Electives must include at least nine studio
credits
FA234
Drawing Studies and
1.5
outside the Painting ojfering.s.
FA235
Media Techniques
1.5
FA 223
Intro, to Figure Modeling*
3.0
Liberal Arts
Distribution
FA 205
ConceptsAVorks on Paper*
3.0
Note all Liberal Arts courses are 3.0 credits.
Choose one course from the following three*:
HUIIOA/B
3 cr 3 cr
PR 201
Relief/Monotype
3.0
HU103A/B
HU I40A/B
3 cr 3 cr
3 cr 3 cr.
PR 204
Screenprinting/Etching
3.0
Literature
3 cr
SC202
Sculpture 1
3.0
Humanities
3cr
Social Science 3 cr. 3 cr.
HU140B
Art History Survey II
3.0
Science/Math 3 cr.
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
Lib. Arts Electives 3 cr. 3 cr
Spring Tota
15.0
Art History Elective 3 cr.
Sophomore
Year Total
30.0
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
41
Printmaking/Book Arts
Lois M.Johnson
ljohnson@uarts.edu
Coordinator
215-717-6491
The Printmaking major bases its instruc-
tional program on the development and
realization of visual ideas through multiple
image-making processes. The primary
objectives are to develop conceptual
abilities and technical proficiencies,
leading the student to acquire personal
imagery and professional competence in
printmaking media.
The department provides the expertise of
a faculty of professional artists to study tra-
ditional and contemporary methods. The
major graphic media explored include relief
processes, etching (intaglio), lithography
stone, metal plate, and offset and water-
based screenpiinting, and non-silver
photographic printmaking. Courses in book
and typographic design stimulate experi-
mentation in unifying the elements of paper,
prints, typography, and bookbinding.
Visiting artists, field trips, and guest lec-
turers supplement the studio experience.
Using the city as an extended workshop.
Print students attend seminars and museum
collections. The Print Study Seminar is held
in the Print Room at the Philadelphia
Museum of Art and furnishes a unique
opportunity to study original prints from the
15th through the 20th centuries.
The main emphasis over the three-year
undergraduate period of study is on the evo-
lution of students as artists who make
individualized demands upon the media. As
with any study in the fine arts, the experi-
ence should be multidimensional, reflective
of a broad range of personal and profes-
sional involvement, and reinforced with
stimulation from related areas of interest,
including drawing, painting, digital arts,
photography, graphic design, illustration,
sculpture, and crafts.
The undergraduate curriculum is enhanced
by the graduate program in Book Arts/
Printmaking. This two-year course of study of
60 credits culminates in a Master of Fine Arts
Degree. The program provides the opportu-
nity for the individual artist's expression in
limited edition bookworks. Undergraduate
students work alongside MFA candidates in
studios, workshops, and some major and elec-
tive classes. (Students interested in the MFA
degree in Book Arts/Printmaking should con-
tact the Department of Printmaking or the
Office of Admission.)
Facilities
The Printmaking Department provides
extensive facilides for water-based screen-
printing, stone and plate lithography, relief,
etching and non-silver photographic
processes. The bookbinding room houses
book presses, board shear, and a guillotine
paper cutter. The letterpress studio contains
three Vandercook presses for printing
handset type and polymer plates with over
100 fonts of varied type. The offset lithog-
raphy press room features a Davidson 901
offset press used by the students for hands-
on experience.
Another important resource is the
Borowsky Center for Publication Arts,
which is equipped with a Heidelberg KORS
offset press and a full darkroom for experi-
mental and production printing of student,
faculty, and visiting artist works.
Printmaking/Book Arts faculty and stu-
dents have been committed to the testing
and integration of non-toxic printmaking
processes and inks in the studios since the
late 1970s.
Printmaking/ Boole Arts Faculty
Carol Barton
Senior Lecturer
BFA, Washington University
Denise Carbone
Senior Lecturer
BFA, Glassboro State College
MFA, The University of the Arts
Sandra Davis
Lecturer
BFA, The University of the Arts ■
James Dupree
Adjunct Assistant Professor
BFA, Columbus College of Art • '
and Design
MFA, University of Pennsylvania
James Green
Master Lecturer
BFA, Oberlin College
MPh. Yale University
MLA, Columbia University
Lois M. Johnson
Professor
BS, University of North Dakota
MFA, University of Wisconsin-Madison
Nathan Knobler
Professor
BFA, Syracuse University
MA, Florida State University
Hedi Kyle
Adjunct Associate Professor
Diploma, Werk-Kunstschule, Wiesbaden,
Germany
Peter Lister
Senior Lecturer
Certificate, Pennsylvania Academy of
the Fine Arts
The Barnes Foundation, Philadelphia
MaryPhelan
Associate Professor
BS, The College of Saint Rose
MA. University of Wisconsin-Madison
Rosae Reeder
Lecturer
BFA, The University at Buffalo,
New York
MFA, The University of the Arts
Anthony Rosati . .
Adjunct Associate Professor
BA, Rider College
MFA, Tyler School of Art,
Temple University
Laurel Schwass-Drew
Lecturer
BFA, The University of the Arts
Patricia M. Smith
Assistant Professor
BA. Immaculata College
MAEd, Philadelphia College of Art
Lorl Spencer
Adjunct Assistant Professor
BFA, State University of New York,
Purchase
MFA, The University of the Arts
Sarah Van Keuren
Adjunct Professor
BA, Swarthmore College
MFA, University of Delaware
42
sity of the Art.s Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Printmaking/Book Arts
Bachelor of Fine Arts 123 credits
Foundatic
n Credits
Junior
Credits
Fall
Fall
FPIIO
Drawing
3.0
FA 333 A
Attitudes and Strategies
3.0
FPI20
2-D Design
3.0
PR 300
Lithography
3.0
FP130
3-D Design
3.0
PR 306
Print Study Seminar I
Electives
1.5
3.0
Electives
1.5
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
6.0
HUllOA
First Year Writing I
3.0
Fall Total
16.5
HU103A
Intro, to Modernism I
3.0
Fall Total
16.5
Spring
PR 333
Attitudes and Strategies
3.0
Spring
PR 301
Printmaking Workshop
1.5
Choose any
three courses:
PR 307
Book Arts:
FPlll
Drawing
3.0
Concepts and Structure
3.0
FP121
2-D Design
3.0
Electives
3.0
FP131
3-D Design
3.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
6.0
FP140
Time and Motion
Electives
3.0
1.5
Spring Total
16.5
Junior Year Total
33,0
HUIIOB
First Year Writing n
Intro, to Modernism II
3.0
3.0
16.5
HL:|03B
Senior
Spring Tota
Fall
Freshman Year Total
33.0
PR 400
Ad\anced Workshop
3.0
PR 406
Print Studv Seminar II
1.5
Sophomore
Electives
6.0
Fall
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
FA 222 A
Drawing: Form and Space
3.0
Fall Total
13.5
PR 201
Relief/Monotype
3.0
Spring
PT202
Sophomore Painting
3.0
PR 420
Thesis Workshop
3,0
HUI40A
Art History Sur\'ey I
3.0
FA 460
Senior Fine Arts Seminar
1.5
HU XXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
Electives
6.0
Fall Total
15.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
Spring
Spring Total
13.5
PR 204
Screen Printing/Etching
3.0
Senior Year 'total:
27.0
SC201
Sculpture I
course from the following thr
3.0
Choose one
ee:
FA 222 B
Drawing: Form and Space
3.0
Electives must include at least nine studio credits
FA 223
Intro, to Figure Modeling
3.0
outside the Printmaking/Book Arts offerings.
FA 205
ConceptsAVorks on Paper
3.0
Liberal Arts Distribution
HUI40B
Art History Survey II
3.0
Note all Liberal Arts courses are 3.0 credits.
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
HUllOAm
3 en 3 en
HUI03A/B
3 en 3 en
Spring Tota
15.0
HU140A/B
3 en 3 en
Sophomore
Year Total
30.0
Literature 3 cr
Humanities 3 cr
Social Science 3 en 3 en
Science/Math 3 en
Lib. Arts Electives 3 en 3 en
Art Histor\ Elective 3 en
The University of ttie Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
«
Sculpture
Jeanne Jaffe
jjatfe@uarts.edu
Coordinator
215-717-6102
The field of sculpture today is open and
wide-ranging. Sculptors now create works
that range from coin-sized medallic art to
pieces that incorporate actual craters and
other natural landforms. While some sculp-
tors work with traditional materials such as
clay and stone, others incorporate light and
sound and video into their work. Figurative
sculpture today can be either traditional
modeled forms, or robotic forms that actu-
ally move. The expansive nature of
sculpture provides a challenge to institu-
tions that educate artists, and we take that
challenge seriously.
The Sculpture Department's aim is to
provide a sound, balanced exposure to all
the formal, technical, and intellectual
aspects of art, in preparation for the stu-
dent's continued professional growth
beyond the undergraduate years. To this
end, our curriculum is structured to provide
formal and technical instruction, while at
the same time allowing for individual cre-
ative development. Seminar classes in the
junior and senior years engage the student
in discussions on sculpture theory, philos-
ophy, and critical thought.
Comprehensive facilities include fully
equipped wood and metal shops, a foundry,
a plaster shop and figure modeling studio,
as well as an open studio for general use.
Juniors and seniors have individual studios.
A full-time shop supervisor provides tech-
nical assistance and supervision. Faculty
members are all practicing professional
sculptors, representing a wide variety of
styles and interests. Classroom instruction is
supplemented by visiting artists, gallery and
museum visits in Philadelphia, and field
trips to New York and Washington D.C.
Our graduating students are recognized
nationally for their creativity and diversity,
and for their preparation for the next steps
in their professional careers.
Sculpture Faculty
Harvey Citron
Adjunct Professor '
BFAEd, Pratt Institute
Diploma, Academy of Fine Arts, Rome
Laura Frazure
Senior Lecturer
BFA, The University of the Arts
Jeanne Jaffa
Professor
BFA, Tyler School of Art,
Temple University
MFA, New York State College
of Ceramics at Alfred University
Elsa Johnson
Professor
BFA, Cooper Union
MFA, University of Pennsylvania
Mashiko Nakashima
Master Lecturer
Brooklyn Museum School of Art
Steve Nocella
Senior Lecturer
BFA, Philadelphia College of Art
MFA, University of Pennsylvania
Barry Parker
Professor
BFA, Eastern Michigan University
MFA, University of Massachusetts
John Phillips
Master Lecturer
BA, Temple University
Jennie Shanker i
Senior Lecturer
BFA, Philadelphia College of Art
MFA, Yale University
44
The University of the Ans Undergraduate and Gr.iduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Sculpture
Bachelor of Fine Arts 123 credits
Foundation
Credits
Junior
Credits
Liberal Arts Distribution
Note all Liberal Arts courses are 3.0 credits.
Fall
Fall
HUllOA/B
3 CK 3 cr.
FPllO
Drawing
3.0
FA 333 A
Attitudes and Strategies
3.0
HUI03A/B
3 CK 3 cr
FP120
2-D Design
3.0
SC251
Theories of Structure
1.5
HU140A/B
Literature
3 CK 3 CK
3CK
FP 130
3-D Design
3.0
Sculpture Elective*
1.5
Humanities
3CK
Electives
3.0
Social Science
3 CK 3 cr
Electives
1.5
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
6.0
Science/Math
3CK
HUllOA
First Year Writing I
3.0
Fall Total
15.0
Lib. Arts Electives
3 CK 3 CK
HU103A
Intro, to Modernism 1
3.0
Art History Elective
3CK
Fall Total
16.5
Spring
SC 333
Attitudes and Strategies
3.0
Spring
Sculpture Elective*
3.0
Clioose am
three courses:
Electives
3.0
FPlll
Drawing
3.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
6.0
FP121
2-D Design
3.0
Spring Total
15.0
FP131
3-D Design
3.0
FP140
Time and Motion
Electives
3.0
1.5
lunior Year Total
30.0
Senior
HUllOB
First Year Writing n
3.0
Fall
HU 103 B
Intro, to Modernism H
3.0
SC401
Sculpture III
3.0
Spring Tota
16.5
Sculpture Elective*
3.0
Freshman Year Total
33.0
Electives
6.0
HU XXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
Sophomore
Fall Total
15.0
\
Fall
Spring
SC201
Sculpture I
3.0
SC402
Sculpture Ul
3.0
FA 223
Intro, to Figure Modeling
3.0
FA 460
Senior Fine Arts Seminar
1.5
Choose one course from the following thi
ee:
Sculpture Elective*
1.5
PT202A
Sophomore Painting
3.0
Electives
6.0
PR 201
Relief/Monotype
3.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
PR 204
Screen Printing/Etching
3.0
Spring Total
15.0
HU140A
Art History Survey I
3.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
15.0
Senior Year Total
30.0
Fall Total
Spring
* Sculpture
Electives
SC202
Sculpture 1
3.0
Choose from:
Choose one course from the following three:
SC220A
Molding and Casting
PT202B
Sophomore Painting
3.0
SC241
Intro, to Sculpture Projects
PR 201
Relief/Monotype
3.0
SC242
Intro, to Sculpture Projects
PR 204
Screen Printing/Etching
3.0
SC260A
Structure of the Figure
HU140B
Art History Survey II
3.0
SC 260 B
Structure of the Figure
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
Choose one course from the following three:
FA 222 B Drawing: Form and Space 3.0
FA 223 Intro, to Figure Modeling 3.0
FA 205 ConceptsAVorks on Paper 3.0
Spring Total 15.0
Sophomore Year Total
30.0
SC321 Carving
SC421 Metals
SC 43 1 A Advanced Figure Modeling
SC 43 1 B Advanced Figure Modeling
SC441 Advanced Projects
SC 442 Advanced Projects . ' - ' ■
SC 443 Projects in Figure Modeling
Electives must include at least nine studio credits
outside the Sculpture offerings.
Tlie University of tiie Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
45
Graphic Design
Debra Drodvillo
ddrodvillo@uarts.edu
Chairperson ' .
215-717-6225
Graphic designers play a key role in our
information-based society. They give form
to the interface between users and our cul-
ture of rapidly proliferating products,
places, processes, information, and services.
The Graphic Design Department, since its
beginning, has sought to give students the
basis to solve problems in communication in
a way that merges concerns for fidelity to
content, for the visual aesthetic, and for
engaging the reader-viewer's rapport.
The faculty and students are engaged in a
collaborative process of exploring the
"New" as it emerges. For graphic design,
the New has meant specifically the transfor-
mation of media, which affects how
messages are created and transmitted, and
how the intersection of design, media, and
culture understood.
Throughout the three years of major
concentration, problems in graphic commu-
nication are combined with exploratory and
experimental studies in drawing, color, pho-
tography, typography, and emerging
technologies. The curriculum is supple-
mented by special lecture programs;
workshops with invited design firms; and
on-site studio seminars in selected design
offices and studios, paper and printing
plants, museums and libraries, and with film
and computer graphic producers.
Opportunities for additional study in fine
arts, illustration, photography, animation,
filmmaking, and emerging technologies are
available.
Designers work across several media and
venues-from handmade images to digital
images, still images to time-based commu-
nications, and print-oriented problems to
communications in cyberspace.
With successful completion of the pro-
gram, students are prepared for entry-level
positions as graphic designers with design
studios, publishers, corporations, nonprofit
institutions, governmental agencies, archi-
tects and planners, network or cable
broadcasters, film and video producers, or
advertising agencies.
The faculty are practicing professionals
with distinguished records of accomplish-
ment, sensitive and responsive to the
changes in the field of design, yet not lim-
ited by its current practices.
Graphic Design Faculty
HansAllemann
Adjunct Professor
Swiss National Diploma, School of
Design, Basel, Switzerland
Jan Almquist
Adjunct Professor
BFA, Philadelphia College of Art
Laurence Bach
Professor
BFA, Philadelphia College of Art
Certificate, Graduate Study, School of
Design, Basel, Switzerland
Jennifer Bernstein
Senior Lecturer
BA, Brown University
MFA, Yale University
Jolin Connolly
Senior Lecturer
BFA, The University of the Arts
MFA, Yale University
Debra Drodvillo
Assistant Professor
BFA, Cooper Union
MFA, Yale University
Inge Druckrey
Professor
AB, University of Basel, Basel,
Switzerland
Swiss National Diploma, School of
Design, Basel, Switzerland
Richard Felton
Professor
BS in Design, University of Cincinnati
MFA, Yale University
Dorothy Funderwhite
Senior Lecturer
BFA, The University of the Arts
Certificate, Graduate Study, School of
Design, Basel, Switzerland
Marie Greco
Senior Lecturer
BFA, Philadelphia College of Art
Kenneth Hiebert
Professor Emeritus
BA, Bethel College
Swiss National Diploma, School of
Design, Basel, Switzerland
Peter Kery
Master Lecturer
BFA, Philadelphia College of Art
Deborah McSorley-Kery
Senior Lecturer
BFA, The University of the Arts
Chris Myers
Associate Professor
BA, University of Toledo
MFA, Yale University
Kristie Williams
Associate Professor
BS, University of Cincinnati
MFA, Yale University
Certificate, Graduate Study, School of
Design, Basel, Switzerland
Chris Zelinsky
Associate Professor
Swiss National Diploma, School of
Design, Basel, Switzerland
46
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Graphic Design
Bachelor of Fine Arts 123 credits
Foundatio
n
Credits
Junior
Credits
Fall
Fall
FPllO
Drawing
3.0
GD306A
Typography Emph
asis
3.0
FP120
2-D Design
3.0
EM 202
Electronic Media/
FPI30
3-D Design
3.0
Production U
1.5
HUllOA
HU103A
Electives
First Year Writing I
Intro, to Modernism 1
1.5
3.0
3.0
GD311A
HU254
HUXXX
Communications Studio
Electives
History of Comm. Design
Liberal Arts
3.0
1.5
3.0
3.0
Fall Total
16.5
Fall Total
15.0
Spring
Choose any
FPlll
FP121
FP 131
FP140
three courses:
Drawing
2-D Design
3-D Design
Time and Motion
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
Spring
GD 306 B
EM 203
GD311B
HUXXX
Typography Emphasis 3.0
Digital Interactive Techniques 1 .5
Communications Studio 3.0
Electives 1 .5
Liberal Arts 6.0
Electives
1.5
Spring Total
15.0
HUllOB
HU 103 B
First Year Writing II
Intro, to Modernism II
3.0
3.0
16.5
Junior Year Total
30.0
Spring Tota
Senior
Freshman Year Total
33.0
Fall
GD4I 1 A
Design Studio
3.0
Sophomore
GD4I2A
Problem-Solving
3.0
Fall
Electives
3.0
GD210
Letterform Design
3.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
6.0
GD211A
Descriptive Drawing
3.0
Fall Total
15.0
GD213A
Design Systems
3.0
Spring
Electives
3.0
GD4IIB
Design Studio
3.0
HU140A
Art History Survey I
3.0
GD412B
Problem-Solving
3.0
Fall Total
15.0
Electives
3.0
Spring
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
6.0
GD2I2
Typography Fundamentals 3.0
Spring Total
15.0
EM 201
Electronic Media/
Production I
Descriptive Drawing
1.5
3.0
Senior Year Total:
30,0
GD2IIB
GD2I3B
Design Systems
3.0
Electives must include nine studio credit.
taken
HU 140 B
Electives
Art History Survey II
1.5
3.0
outside the Graphic Design offerings.
Spring Tota
15.0
Liberal Arts Distribution
Note all Liberal Arts courses art
3.0 credits.
Sophomore
Year Total
30.0
HUllOA/B
HU 103 A/B
3cr
3 cr
3cr
3cr
HU140A/B
3cr
3cr
Literature
3cr
Humanities
3cr
Social Science 3 cr
3cr
Science/Math 3 cr
Lib. Arts Electives 3 cr
3cr
HU 254 His
oiy of Comm.
3cr
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
lil
Illustration
MarkTocchet
mtocchet@uarts.edu
Chairperson
215-717-6240
Illustrators give visual substance to
thoughts, stories, and ideas. The Illustration
Department prepares its students for entry
into the fields of book and periodical pub-
lishing, promotion, advertising, design, and
specialty fields.
Illustrators must call upon a broad range
of traditional and up-to-date competencies
to respond to today's visual problems. As
visual communicators, illustrators need to
be open-minded, eclectic, flexible, and
imaginative. The illustrator's solution
should be appropriate, intelligent, expres-
sive, and visually engaging.
In order to prepare for a career in this
competitive field. The University of the Arts
Illustration student develops skills that
encompass two-dimensional media: from
painting and drawing to photography,
design, production processes, and emerging
opportunities in digital image-making.
Students may concentrate on a studio, a dig-
ital, or a pictorially-oriented illustration
curriculum. These skills are nurtured within
a stimulating cultural climate provided by
the resources of the faculty, visiting profes-
sionals, a gallery exhibition program, the
University, and the city at large. Each stu-
dent progresses from general competencies
to a personal viewpoint, clarified career
goals, a professional attitude, and a finished
portfolio.
Illustration Faculty
Jonathan Barkat
Senior Lecturer
BFA, The University of the Arts
Megan Berkheiser
Senior Lecturer
BFA, The University of the Arts
MFA, School of Visual Arts
Jay Bevenour
Lecturer
BA, Tyler School of Art,
Temple University
Brian Biggs
Assistant Professor
BFA. Parsons School of Design
Robert Byrd
Senior Lecturer
BFA, The University of the Arts
Russell Farrell
Senior Lecturer
BFA, The University of the Arts
Renee Foulks
Master Lecturer
BFA, Moore College of Art
MFA, Tyler Schoofof Art,
Temple University
Ralph Giguere
Adjunct Associate Professor
BFA, The University of the Arts
Linda Gist
Senior Lecturer
BFA, The University of the Arts
AlGury
Master Lecturer
BA, St. Louis University
Sabln Howard
Master Lecturer
BFA, Philadelphia College of Art
MFA. New York Academy of Art
Paul King
Adjunct Associate Professor
Certificate, Pennsylvania Academy
of Fine Art
BFA, Philadelphia College of Art
MFA, Boston University
Earl Lewis
Adjunct Associate Professor
BFA, MFA, Tyler School of Art,
Temple University
William Masi
Senior Lecturer
BFA, The University of the Arts
Tim O'Brien
Senior Lecturer
BFA, Paier College of Art
Phyllis Purves-Smith
Associate Professor
BFA, Cooper Union
MFA, Tyler School of Art,
Temple University
David Rankin, III
Senior Lecturer
BFA, The University of the Arts
Roger Roth
Senior Lecturer
BFA, Pratt Institute
Robert Stein
Professor
BFA, Massachusetts College of Art
MFA, Tyler School of Art,""
Temple University
Stephen Tarantal
Professor
BFA, Cooper Union
MFA. Tyler School of Art,
Temple University
Mark Tocchet
Associate Professor
BFA, School of Visual Arts
48
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Illustration
Bachelor of Fine Arts 123 credits
Foundation
Credits
Fall
FPllO
FP120
FP130
Drawing
2-D Design
3-D Design
Electives
HUllOA First Year Writing I
HU 1 03 A Intro, to Modernism I
Fall Total
Spring
Choose any three courses:
FP 1 1 1 Drawing
FP121 2-D Design
FP131 3-D Design
FP 140 Time and Motion
Electives
HUllOB First Year Writing II
HU 103 B Intro, to Modernism II
Spring Total
Fresliman Year Total
Sophomore
Fall
IL200A
IL202A
IL204
HU140A
HUXXX
Fall Total
Spring
IL 200 B
IL 202 B
PF209
HU 140 B
HUXXX
Spring Total
Pictorial Foundation
Figure Anatomy
Typography
Art History Survey I
Liberal Arts
Pictorial Foundation
Figure Anatomy
Photo, for Illustrators
Art History Survey II
Liberal Arts
Sophomore Year Total
3.0
3.0
3.0
1.5
3.0
3.0
16.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
1.5
3.0
3.0
16.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
15.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
15.0
30.0
Junior
Credits
Fall
IL300A
IL30I
IL 302
HUXXX
Fall Total
Spring
IL 300 B
IL 303
IL304
HUXXX
Spring Total
Figure, Digital or Studio Track
Illustration Methods
Design Methods
Figurative Communication
Electives
Liberal Arts
Illustration Methods
Figure Utilization
Sequential Format* or
Electives
Liberal Arts
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
15.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
6.0
15.0
Junior Year Total:
30.0
Senior
Fall
IL 400 A
IL 403 A
HUXXX
Fall Total
Spring
IL 400 B
IL403B
HUXXX
Spring Total
Figure, Digital or Studio Tracl<
Illustration
Senior Portfolio
Electives
Liberal Arts
Illustration
Senior Portfolio
Electives
Liberal Arts
3.0
3.0
3.0
6.0
15.0
3.0
3.0
6.0
3.0
15.0
Senior Year Total
30.0
Electives must include at least nine studio credits
outside the Illustration offerings.
* Sequential Format is only required of
Design/Studio Track Students
Liberal Arts Distribution
Note all Liberal Arts courses are 3.0 credits.
HUllOA/B
3cr
3CK
HU103A/B
3cr
3CK
HU 140A/B
3cr
3cr.
Literature
3cr
Humanities
3cr
Social Science
3CK
3CK
Science/Math
3cr
Lib. Arts Electives
3 en
3cr
Art History Elective
3CK
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
49
Industrial Design
Jonas Milder
jmilder@uarts.edu
Chairperson
215-717-6250
The Industrial Design Department pro-
vides a professional education for those
wishing to bring order, utility, aesthetics,
and appropriateness to the products, con-
tents, and processes of our modem global
society. The program prepares students for
careers in the design of products, environ-
ments, and design systems/strategies,
integrating the design of communications,
furniture, equipment, interfaces, and inte-
riors/exhibits. Also addressed are issues of
human factors research, computer-aided
design, product development, manufac-
turing, business, and a host of other
considerations related to the humanistic
uses of technology.
Industrial Design involves considerable
conceptual experimentation. An encom-
passing investigation into our evolving
material-product culture and contemporary
social issues provides a forum in which stu-
dents may draw from diverse sources: high
technology, fine arts, industrial production,
architectural constructions, invention, social
behavior, craft techniques, and contempo-
rary design culture.
The department emphasizes the develop-
ment of graphic, sculptural, and spatial
design skills as a complement to creative
problem-solving, technical innovafion, and
effective communications during the solu-
tion of actual problems of design.
After initial coursework to introduce
basic design, communication, and collabo-
ration processes, including computer-aided
design and model-making, students develop
and apply theory, skill, and knowledge to
functional design problems, many brought
into the studio by industry. Visiting
designers also bring knowledge of current
design, manufacturing, and professional
practices into studio and lecture courses,
while visits to industry provide opportuni-
ties for direct observation and firsthand
knowledge of design and manufacturing
processes. Based on this foundation of skill,
experience, and information, emphasis in
the final semesters shifts to the responsi-
bility for integration of the total design
process by the individual student, who
works directly with a client/sponsor on a
thesis project prior to graduation. During
the final semester, the instructional focus
shifts to career planning, portfolio prepara-
tion, and the development of information-
gathering and business communication
skills to better prepare the student to enter
the profession.
Due to the wide scope and creative, yet
practical character of an Industrial Design
education, many career opportunities await
the graduate with consulting design firms,
corporate design staffs, manufacturing facil-
ities, exhibit houses, retailers, advertising/
marketing agencies, research organizations,
museums, educational institutions, and gov-
ernment agencies, all of whom recognize
the need to constantly improve the appear-
ance, manufacture, performance, and social
value of their products.
Industrial Design Faculty
Michelle Barfoot
Senior Lecturer
BA, The University of Rhode Island
MID, The University of the Arts
Rama Chorpash
Assistant Professor
BSID, California College of
Arts and Crafts
David Comberg
Adjunct Associate Professor
BFA, Massachusetts College of Art
MFA, Yale School of Art
Antliony Guido
Associate Professor
BSID, The Ohio State University
Jamer Hunt
Associate Professor
BA, Brown University
PhD, Rice University
James Janish
Senior Lecturer
BS, State University of New York, Buffalo
MID, Prati Institute
Miciiael McAllister
Senior Lecturer . ' •
BS, Drexel University
MID, The University of the Arts
Jonas Milder
Assistant Professor
BID, Fachhochschule fuer Gestaltung,
Germany
Design Diploma (MID),
Hochschule der Kuenste,
Berlin, Germany
Larry Mitnick
Associate Professor
BArch, Cooper Union
MArch, Harvard University
Barent Roth
Senior Lecturer
BSID, University of Illinois
MID, The University of the Arts
Jane Swanson
Senior Lecturer
BS, Iowa State University
50
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Industrial Design
Bachelor of Science 126 credits
Foundation
Credits
Fall
FPllO
Drawing
3.0
FP120
2-D Design
3.0
FP130
3-D Design
3.0
Electives
1.5
HUllOA
First Year Writing 1
3.0
HU103A
Intro, to Modernism 1
3.0
Fall Total
16.5
Spring
Choose am
three courses:
FPlll
Drawing
3.0
FP121
2-D Design
3.0
FP131
3-D Design
3.0
FP140
Time and Motion
3.0
Electives 1.5
HUllOB First Year Writing!! 3.0
HU103B Intro, to Modernism 11 3.0
Spring Total 16.5
Freshman Year Total
33.0
Sophomore
ID 200 A
Studio 1: Projects
3.0
ID 220 A
Studio 2: Techniques
3.0
ID 214
Materials and Processes Sem. 3.0
HU140A
Art History Sur\'ey I
3.0
HU251
History of Industrial Design
3.0
Fall Total
15.0
Spring
ID 200 B
Studio 1 ; Projects
3.0
ID 220 B
Studio 2: Techniques
3.0
ID 290
Design Issues Seminar
3.0
Electives
3.0
HU 140 B
Art History Sun'ey 11
3.0
Spring Tota
15.0
Sophomore Year Total
30.0
Junior
Credits
Fall
ID 300 A Studio 3: Projects Studio 3.0
ID 320 A Studio 4: Techniques 3.0
ID 327 Design Semantics Seminar 3.0
Electives 3.0
HU XXX Liberal Arts 6.0
Fall Total 18.0
Spring
ID 300 B Smdio 3: Projects Studio 3.0
ID 320 B Studio 4: Techniques 3.0
ID 326 Human Factors Seminar 3.0
HU XXX Liberal Arts 6.0
Spring Total 15.0
Junior Year Total
33.0
Senior
Fall
ID 400 A Studio 5: Projects Studio 3.0
ID 420 A Studio 6:
Professional Comm. 3.0
ID 490 A Design Theory Seminar 3.0
HU XXX Liberal Arts 6.0
Fall Total 15.0
Spring
ID 400 B Studio 5: Projects Studio 3.0
ID 420 B Studio 6:
Professional Comm. 3.0
ID 490 B Design Practice Seminar 3.0
Electives 3.0
HU XXX Liberal Arts 3.0
Spnng Total 15.0
Senior Year Total
30.0
Electives must include nine studio credits taken
outside the Industrial Design offerings.
Recommended Electives:
While none of the following is required for
graduation, they are recommended by the
department.
ID 113 Freshman ID
ID 312 Architectonics
PF 203 Portfolio Documentation
CR 25 1 Intro, to Molding and Casting
CR252 Plaster Workshop
EM 1 10 Computer Concepts
EM 210 Digital Multimedia
HU 452 Topics in Design
Liberal Arts Distribution
Note all Liberal Arts courses are 3.0 credits.
HUllOA/B 5cr. 3 cr.
HU103A/B 3cr. 3 cr
HU140A/B 3cr 3 cr
Literature 3 cr
Humanities 3 cr
Social Science 3 cr 3 cr
Science/Math 3 cr
Lib. Arts Electives 3 cr 3 cr
An Histor\' Elective 3 cr
Tlie University of ttie Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/7004
51
Media Arts
Harris Fogel
hfogel@uart.s.edu
Chaiiperson
215-717-6300
The Media Arts Department offers majors
in photograpliy, film/digital video, and ani-
mation, wiiile providing elective classes to
the University at large. The three-year cur-
riculum of each major is built around a
sequence of courses designed to move the
student to a position of independence within
the discipline. Many of our studio courses
feature a written component to provide a
balance between technical skills and the
critical thinking and historical context nec-
essary for a complete exploration of one's
medium. An introduction to the funda-
mental ideas and techniques of the medium
fills much of the sophomore year. During
the two remaining years, the student is
expected to refine techniques, develop a
sense of personal vision, identify goals, and
pursue activities directly related to profes-
sional practice.
The Media Arts Department provides
extensive studio facilities and equipment for
students enrolled in its courses. A nominal
fee is required for access.
Philadelphia's professional resources
have allowed the department to develop an
extensive internship program for advanced
Media Arts majors. This program allows
students to gain professional experience
while earning academic credit. Internship
sponsors have included commercial photog-
raphy studios; galleries; independent artists;
animation, film, video, and multimedia pro-
duction houses: television stations; medical
facilities; magazine and book publishers;
and digital imaging studios.
The Media Arts Department also offers
minor concentrations in all three of its pro-
grams-film/digital video, animation, and
photography-which are available to stu-
dents outside of their major studio program.
Those interested in this option should con-
sult with both their major advisor and the
Media Arts Department.
Media Arts Faculty
George Akerley
Adjunct Associate Professor
BM, Composition, Philadelphia
Musical Academy
MM, Composition, Philadelphia College
of Performing Arts
Susan Arthur
Senior Lecturer
BA, Wellesley College
MA. The University of Texas, Austin
Laurence Bach
Professor
BFA, Philadelphia College of Art
Certificate, Graduate Study, School of
Design, Basel, Switzerland
Rick Barrick
Senior Lecturer
BA, University of Georgia
MFA, School of Visual Arts
Lowed Boston
Adjunct Assistant Professor
BFA, The University of the Arts
MFA, California Institute of the Arts
Gerard Brown
Lecturer . .
BFA, Boston University School of
Fine Arts
MFA, School of the Art Institute of
Chicago
John J. Carlano
Adjunct Associate Professor
BFA, Philadelphia College of Art
Connie Coleman
Adjunct Professor
BFA, MFA, Rhode Island School
of Design
John Columbus
Adjunct Associate Professor
BFA, Hartford Art School
MFA, Columbia University School
of the Arts
Colette Copeland
Lecturer
BFA, Pratt Institute
MFA, Syracuse University
David Deneen
Adjunct Assistant Professor
BFA, The University of the Arts
Dominic Episcopo
Lecturer
BFA, The University of the Arts
Alida Fish
Professor , ]
BA. Smith College I
MFA, Rochester Institute of Technology
Harris Fogel
Associate Professor
BA, Humboldt State University
MA, New York University
JudyGelles -
Senior Lecturer
BS, Boston University J
MEd, University of Miami ]
MFA, Rhode Island School of Design '
David Graham
Associate Professor ■ '•]
BFA, Philadelphia College of Art J
MFA, Tyler School of Art, ''
Temple University . \
Matthew Hollerbush '
Lecturer ^ ••]
BFA, The University of the Arts
Jenny Lynn
Senior Lecturer
BFA. Tyler School of Art,
Temple University
Robert Lyons
Senior Lecturer ^
BS, State University of New York, :
New Paltz '.
Chris Magee
Assistant Professor i
BA, Reed College !
BFA, University of Oregon j
MFA, California Institute of the Arts j
i
Michael O'Reilly \
Lecturer J
BS, Indiana University of Pennsylvania ,
Jeannie Pearce i
Adjunct Professor '
BFA, Rochester Institute of Technology '
MFA, University of Delaware
52
The University of the Aits Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
John Phillips
Senior Lecturer
Barbara Proud
Senior Lecturer
BA. University of Delaware
Kathryn Ramey
Senior Lecturer
BA, Evergreen State University
MFA. Temple University
Maria Rodriguez
Senior Lecturer
BA, University of Virginia
MFA, Temple University
Kathy Rose
Senior Lecturer
BFA, Philadelphia College of Art
MFA, California Institute of the Arts
Peter Rose
Professor
BA, City College of New York
John Serpentelli
Senior Lecturer
BFA, MAT, The University of the Arts
Sandy Sorlien
Master Lecturer
BA, Bennington College
Karl Staven
Associate Professor
BA, Yale University
MA, Harvard University
MFA. New York University
Amanda Tinker
Lecturer
BS, Drexel University
MFA, Tyler School of Art,
Temple University
Tricia Treacy
Lecturer
BA, West Virginia University
MFA, The University of the Arts
VldaVJda
Master Lecturer
BA, California State University
MA, California State University
Wendy Weinberg
Assistant Professor
BA, University of Michigan
MFA, Temple University
John Woodin
Adjunct Assistant Professor
BFA, University of New Orleans
MFA, Tyler School of Art,
Temple University
Ken Yanoviak
Senior Lecturer
BA, Temple University
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
53
Photography
Alida Fish
afish@uarts.edu
Coordinator
215-717-6303
This major prepares students for a wide
range of careers in photography by pro-
viding a solid grounding in traditional
photography and digital imaging. In the
sophomore year, students receive in-depth
training in craft and ideas fundamental to
photographic imaging. Technical exercises
emphasize electronic imaging as well as tra-
ditional black-and-white and color
processes. The curriculum covers both
descriptive photography and more experi-
mental manipulated image-making.
During the junior year, students consider
photographic forms beyond the traditional
print, such as the photographic book, non-
silver proces.ses, and installation work.
Large-format photography and studio prac-
tice with its control of artificial lighting are
also part of the junior curriculum. In both
the junior and senior years, students may
pursue the study of specialized interests on
an elective basis, including illustration and
editorial photography, photojournalism,
environmental portraiture, creative portfolio
development, advanced digital imaging, and
professional practice.
The senior year is primarily devoted to
the production of an independent body of
work of the student's own choosing and
direction. The senior thesis provides the
opportunity to begin the process of self-
definition as photographer and artist. A
required junior-level course in photographic
criticism, coupled with required classes in
the history of photography, exemplifies the
strong emphasis that the department places
on critical thinking and self-expression in
words as well as through photographs.
Each spring, the Media Arts Department
hosts the Paradigm Lecture Series, an out-
standing resource available to photography
majors. Through this series, photographers
of national and international reputation are
invited by the department to visit the
campus to discuss their work and meet with
the students.
Photography
Bachelorof Fine Arts 123 credits
Foundatio
n Credits
Junior
Credits
Fall
Fall
FPllO
Drawing
3.0
PF311A
Jr Photography Workshop I
3.0
FP120
2-D Design
3.0
PF313A
Basic Photography Studio 1
3.0
FP 130
3-D Design
3.0
PF315
Digital Photography
HUllOA
HU103A
Fall Total
Spring
Chouse any
FPlll
FP121
FP 131
FP140
Electives^
First Year Writing I
Intro, to Modernism 1
1.5
3.0
3.0
16.5
HUXXX
Fall Total
Spring
PF311B
Workshop* 3.0
Liberal Arts 6.0
15.0
Jr. Photography Workshop II 3.0
three courses:
Drawing
2-D Design
3-D Design
Time and Motion
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
PF313B
PF415A
HUXXX
Spring Tota
Basic Photography Studio I
Critical Issues in
Photography
Electives
Liberal Arts
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0 ■
15.0
HUllOB
Electives
First Year Writing II
Intro, to Modernism II
1.5
3.0
3.0
16.5
Junior Year Total
30.0
HU103B
Senior
Spring Total
Fall
Freshman Year Total
33.0
PF411A
Sr. Photography Workshop
3.0
PF 4 1 5 B
Critical Issues in
Sophomore
Photography
3.0
Fall
Electives
3.0
PF210A
Intro, to Film I *
3.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
6.0
PF211A
Intro, to Photography I
3.0
Fall Total
15.0
HU140A
HU255
Electives
Art History Survey I
History of Photography
3.0
3.0
3.0
Spring
PF411B
Select one o
Sr. Photography Workshop
f the following three courses:
3.0
Fall Total
15.0
PF323
Selected Topics;
Spring
Photography
3.0
PF211B
Intro, to Photography II
3.0
PF413
Professional Practices
3.0
PF217
Color Concepts *
3.0
PF499
Internship
3.0
HU140B
HUXXX
Spring Total
Sophomore ''
Electives
Art History Survey II
Liberal Arts
ifear Total
3.0
3.0
3.0
15.0
30.0
Electives
HUXXX Liberal Arts
Spring Total
Senior Year Total
6.0
3.0
15.0
30.0
Electives must include nine studio credits
Liberal Arts
Distribution
(
taken
Note all Liberal Arts courses are 3.0 credits.
HUIIOA/B 3cr 3 ck
outside the Photography offerings.
HU103A/B
HUI40A/B
3 cr 3 cr
3 cr 3 cr
* Can be taken either fall or spring semester
Literature
3cr
Humanities
3cr
Social Scien
'e 3 cr 3 cr
Science/Math 3 cr
Lib. Arts Electives 3 cr. 3 cr
m 255 Hist
ory of Photo. 3 cr
54
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Film/Digital Video
Peter Rose
prose@uarts.edu
Coordinator
215-717-6554
The Film/Digital Video program in the
Media Arts Department prepares students to
work in Narradve. Documentary, and
Experimental fdmmaking. At the same time,
a solid preparation and foundation in craft
has enabled an extremely high percentage of
our graduates to enter the professional field
as freelance editors, sound recordists, cine-
matographers, technicians, animators,
screenwriters, and directors.
The Filmmaking major provides students
with a background in all phases of fdm and
video production, including film cinematog-
raphy, videography, fdm and video editing,
and sound/image manipulation. As in still
photography, fdmmaking students acquire a
strong background in criticism, theory, and
history of media. All FihnA'ideo majors
pursue at least one pracdcal internship as
part of the degree requirements.
The study of fdm and video at the
University has been supplemented by a
number of other activities, including the
Paradigm Lecture Series. Through this
series, which occurs each spring, fdm and
video artists of national and international
reputation visit the campus to conduct lec-
tures and present screenings of their work.
Film/Digital Video
Bachelor of Fine Arts 123 credits
Foundation
Credits
junior
Credits
Fall
Fall
FPllO
Drawing
3.0
PF310A
Jr. Cinema Production I
3.0
FP120
2-D Design
3.0
WM219
Writing for Film
3.0
FP130
3-D Design
3.0
PF320
Sine-Sound for
HUllOA
HU103A
Electives
First Year Writing I
Intro, to Modernism I
1.5
3.0
3.0
HUXXX
Fall Total
Narrative Film
Liberal Arts
3.0
6.0
15.0
Fall Total
16.5
Spring
PF310B
Jr. Cinema Production II
3.0
Spring
PF324
Film Forum: Selected Topics 3.0
Choose am
three courses:
PF 322
Experiments in
FPlll
FP121
FP131
FP 140
Drawing
2-D Design
3-D Design
Time and Motion
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
HUXXX
Spring Tota
Advanced Digital Video
Electives
Liberal Arts
3.0
3.0
3.0
15.0
Electives 1.5
HUllOB First Year Writing II 3.0
HU 103 B Intro, to Modernism II 3.0
Spring Total 16.5
Freshman Year Total
33.0
Sophomore
Fall
PF210A Intro, to Film I 3.0
PF 2 1 1 A Intro, to Photography I 3.0
WM 25 1 Narrative Cinema I * 3.0
CM 120 Sound Communication 3.0
HU 1 40 A Art History Survey I 3.0
Fall Total 15.0
Spring
PF 2 1 B Intro, to Film/Digital Video 3 .0
PF 2 1 2 B Intro, to Animation II 3.0
WM252 Narrative Cinema II ** 3.0
HU140B Art History Survey II 3.0
HUXXX Liberal Arts 3.0
Spring Total 15.0
Sophomore Year Total
30.0
Liberal Arts Distribution
Note all Liberal Arts courses are 3.0 credits.
HUIWA/B 3cr 3 cr
HU103A/B 3cr 3 cr
HU140A/B 3cr 3 cr.
Literature 3 cr
Humanities 3 cr
Social Science 3 cr 3 cr
Science/Math 3 cr
Lib. Arts Electives 3 cr 3 cr
WM 251 Narrative Cinema I 3 cr
Junior Year Total
30.0
Senior
Fall
PF410A Sr. Cinema Production I 3.0
PF 424 Time:
A Multi-disciplinary Sent. 3.0
PF499 Internship 3.0
Electives 3.0
HUXXX Liberal Arts 3.0
Fall Total 15.0
Spring
PF 4 1 OB Sr, Cinema Production II 3.0
Electives 6.0
HUXXX Liberal Arts 6.0
Spring Total 15.0
Senior Year Total
30.0
Electives must include nine studio credits taken
outside the Filnt/Video offerings.
* VJM 251 and WM 252 Narrative Cinema I & II
are required of all Film/Video majors.
** WM 252 Narrative Cinema II can be counted
as a studio elective, humanities, or liberal arts
elective.
The tjniversity of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
55
Animation
Karl Stave n
kstaven@uarts.edu
Coordinator
215-717-65523
The Animation program in the Media
Arts Department prepares students to work
in computer, traditional, stopmotion, and
experimental animation. The basic princi-
ples of animation can be applied to all forms
of image and object manipulation. The
program gives its graduates a strong under-
standing of timing and motion, and a
grounding in the wide variety of techniques
available to the animator. Animation majors
get a solid background in life drawing, tra-
ditional hand-drawn animation, stop-motion
and experimental animation, and 2-D and 3-
D computer animation. Animation majors
choose the area(s) on which to focus as they
construct their junior and senior thesis
fdms.
This broad-based approach has allowed
graduates to obtain professional positions in
both the animation industry and as inde-
pendent artists. Alumni become computer
animators, directors, storyboard artists, pro-
duction assistants, special-effects animators,
and character designers.
Animation
Bachelor of Fine Arts 123 credits
Foundation
Credits
Fall
FPllO Drawing 3.0
FP120 2-D Design 3.0
FP130 3-D Design 3.0
Electives 1 .5
HUllOA First Year Writing 1 3.0
HU 103 A Intro, to Modernism I 3.0
FallTotal 16.5
Spring
Choose any three courses:
FP 111 Drawing 3.0
FP121 2-D Design 3.0
FP131 3-D Design 3.0
FP 140 Time and Motion 3.0
Electives 1 .5
HU 1 10 B First Year Writing II 3.0
HU103B Intro, to Modernism n 3.0
Spring Total 16.5
Freshman Year Total
33.0
Sophomore
Fall
PF210A
PF212A
IL205
WM251
HU140A
Fall Total
Spring
PF210B
PF212B
PF216
WM252
HU140B
Spring Total
Intro, to Film 1
Intro, to Animation I
Figure Drawing**
for Animators
Narrative Cinema I *
Art History Survey I
Intro, to Film/Digital Video
Intro, to Animation II
Computer Animation I ***
Narrative Cinema II *
Art History Survey II
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
15.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
15.0
Sophomore Year Total
Liberal Arts Distribulion
Note all Liberal Arts courses are 3.0 credits.
HUllOA/B
3cr
3CK
HU103A/B
3cr
3cr
HUI40A/B
3cr
3cr
Literature
3cr
Humanities
3cr
Social Science
3cr
3cr
Science/Math
3cr
Lib. Arts Electives
3cr
3cr
WM 251 Narrative
Cinema I
3CK
Junior
Credits
Fall
PF312A
PF316
PF325
HUXXX
Fall Total
Spring
PF312B
PF327
HUXXX
Spring Total
Jr. Animation Workshop I
Computer Animation II***
Sound Design and Tech.
Liberal Arts
3.0
3.0
3.0
6.0
15.0
Jr Animation Workshop II 3.0
Moving Art: Animation Theory3.0
and Production
Electives 6.0
Liberal Arts 3.0
15.0
Junior Year Total
30.0
Senior
Fall
PF4 1 2A Sr Animation Workshop
Select one course from the following r\\o:
WM219 Writing for Film
Time;
A Multidisciplinary Sem.
Electives
Liberal Arts
PF424
HUXXX
Fall Total
Spring
PF412B
PF324
HUXXX
Spring Total
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
6.0
15.0
Sr. Animation Workshop 3.0
Film Forum: Selected Topics 3.0
Electives
Liberal Arts
3.0
6.0
15.0
Senior Year Total
30.0
Electives must include nine studio credits taken
outside the Animation offerings.
* WM 251 and WM 252 Narrative Cinema I and II
are required of all Animation majors. WM 252
Narrative Cinema II can be counted as a studio
elective. Inunanities. or liberal arts elective.
**IL 205 fulfills 3 credits of elective requirements.
*** Can be taken either fall or spring semester
By the end of the junior year, it is strongly recom-
mended that Animation majors have taken
at least one of the following five advanced major
electives for three studio elective credits:
IL 202 Figure Drawing
PF326 Advanced 3-D Computer Animation
PF 328 Selected Topics in Animation
PF 330 Clay and Puppet Animation
PF 33 1 Image and Performance
56
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Film/Animation
Bachelor of Fine Arts 135 credits
Foundation
Credits
Junior
Credits
Liberal Arts Distribution
Note all Liberal Arts courses are 3.0 credits.
Fall
Fall
HUnOA/B
3cr.
3cr
FPllO
FP120
Drawing
2-D Design
3.0
3.0
PF310A
PF312A
Jr. Cinema Production I
Jr. Animation Workshop I
3.0
3.0
HUIOSA/B
HU140A/B
Literature
3cr.
3cr
3cr
3cr
3cr.
FP130
3-D Design
3.0
PF316
Computer Animation II
3.0
Humanities
3cr
PF320
Film Sound
3.0
Social Science
3cr
3cr
Electives
1.5
HU XXX
Liberal Arts
6.0
Science/Math
3cr
HUIIOA
First Year Writing I
3.0
Fall Total
18.0
Lib. Arts Electives
3cr
3cr
HU 103 A
Intro, to Modernism 1
3.0
\VM 251 Narrative Cinema I
3cr
Fall Total
16.5
Spring
PF310B
Jr. Cinema Production I!
3.0
Spring
PF312B
Jr Animation Workshop n
3.0
Choose any
three courses:
PF327
Moving Art:
FPlll
Drawing
3.0
Animation Theory
3.0
FP121
2-D Design
3.0
PF 322
Media Technology
3.0
FP 131
3-D Design
3.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
6.0
FP140
Time and Motion
3.0
1 5
Spring Total
18.0
Junior Year Total
36.0
HUllOB
First Year Writing II
Intro, to Modernism II
3.0
3.0
HU 103 B
Senior
Spring Total
16.5
Freshman Year Total
33.0
Sophomore
Fall
PF210A
PF211A
PF212A
IL 205
WM251
HU140A
Fall Total
Spring
PF210B
PF212B
PF216
WM252
HU140B
Spring Total
Intro, to Film I
Intro, to Photography I
Intro, to Animation I*
Figure Drawing
for Animators*
Narrative Cinema I**
Art History Survey I
Intro, to Film/Digital Video
Intro, to Animation II
Computer Animation I*
Narrative Cinema II**
Art History Survey II
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
15.0
Sophomore Year Total
33.0
Fall
PF410A Sr. Cmema Production I
PF412A Sr. Animation Workshop I
Select one course from the following two:
WM219 Writing for Film
PF424 Time:
A Multi-disciplinary Sem.
HUXXX
Fall Total
Spring
PF410B
PF412B
PF 324
PF499
HUXXX
Spring Total
Electives
Liberal Arts
Sr. Cinema Production U
Sr. Animation Workshop II
Film Forum: Selected Topics
Internship
Liberal Arts
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
6.0
18.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
15.0
Senior Year Total
Electives must include nine studio credits taken
outside the Film/Animation offerings.
* Can be taken either fall or spring semester
** WM 251 and WM 252 Narrative Cinema I and II
are required of all Film/Animation majors as part ■
of the total Liberal Arts distribution.
The University of the Arts tJndergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
57
Art Education
Barbara Suplee
bsuplee@uarts.edu
Chairperson, Director
215-717-6053
Pre-Certification
Concentration in Art
Education
The teaching of art is a profession that
allows for the artist-teacher's continued
growth while nurturing the aesthetic and
creative experiences of others. Recent
national as well as statewide attention to
education and to the role of the arts in edu-
cation makes this an especially good time
for students to consider becoming an art
teacher and artist. In preparing students for
careers in art education, the University is
committed to the ideal of exemplary
teachers who are also able to produce their
own competent works. To that end, the
University offers a flexible program of
competency-based education at the under-
graduate level to prepare students to
complete a professional certification pro-
gram after graduation or within a
four-year undergraduate program plus
an additional post-baccalaureate
professional semester.
The Pre-Certification concentration is
designed to be taken in conjunction with a
regular studio major in the BFA program.
In addition to meeting the requirements of
a major studio department, students
enrolled in the pre-certification concentra-
tion take courses in the Art Education
Department, plus prescribed courses in lib-
eral arts, photography, electronic media,
and other studio areas that help fulfill the
general Liberal Arts and studio electives
requirements.
All candidates seeking certification to
teach K-12 in Pennsylvania must complete
48 credits including six credits of college-
level math, three credits of college -level
English composition, and three credits of
British or American literature prior to
formal admission to the professional edu-
cation program. Careful advising is
essential.
Students enrolled in the Pre-Certificafion
Concentration in Art Education must take
and pass the Professional Writing Intensive
course in the first semester of their senior
year, prior to student teaching in the Post-
Baccalaureate Student Teacher Program.
A score of 90 percent or higher is passing.
Students with scores of 80 to 89 percent
will be required to obtain remedial tutoring,
and they must take and pass the depart-
ment's "Writing Proficiency Exam" before
they can student teach. Those who score
below 70 percent may not be admitted to
the Post-Baccalaureate Student Teacher
Program. Students may test out of the
Professional Writing Intensive course by
taking and passing the department Writing
Proficiency Exam. Prior to entering the
Post-Baccalaureate Teacher Program, stu-
dents must have successfully completed the
Instructional I PRAXIS tests.
The Art Education concentration pro-
vides a strong theoretical and practical
foundation for teaching as a career.
Through field experiences starting in the
sophomore year, the student is able to
explore teaching in a variety of traditional
and alternative settings. Students are also
provided with the necessary competencies
in teaching K-12 Art, and in meeting the
state and national standards through special
studies in education combined with liberal
arts coursework in art history, aesthetics,
criticism, social sciences, and studies in
studio production.
The Pre-Certification Concentration may
be taken in its entirety or in part to fit indi-
vidual plans and needs. Students who
complete the program will be able to enroll
directly in the Post-Baccalaureate Teacher
Program, in which they can complete the
student-teaching requirement (AE 659, AE
552) in as littie as one regular semester
beyond the bachelor's degree. In addition,
students must successfully complete the
PRAXIS required tests, with satisfactory
scores to qualify for the Pennsylvania
Instructional I Certificate to teach Art K-12.
In another viable alternative, qualified
graduates may enter the Master of Arts in
Teaching program, in which it is possible to
earn a master's degree and certification in
as little as three semesters or two semesters
and two summers.
Academic Regulations
SUidents working toward certification are
required to maintain a 3.0 cumulative
average in certification coursework.
Admission to the Post-Baccalaureate
Student Teacher Program is by permission
of the department, based on satisfactory
completion of all prerequisites, evidence of
promise as a teacher demonstrated in prior
coursework, and good academic standing.
Students must maintain a "B" average in art
education courses to be permitted to sUident
teach. A grade of "B" or better in the
Student Teaching Practicum is required for
recommendation for certification.
Art Education Faculty
Paul Adorno
Adjunct Assistant Professor
AB, Georgetown University
MSEd, University of Pennsylvania
Raye Cohen
Adjunct Assistant Professor
BA, University of Pennsylvania
MA, The University of the Arts
Diane Foxman
Senior Lecturer
BA, Antioch College
MA, Goddard College
Arlene Gostin
Associate Professor
BA, University of Delaware
MA, Philadelphia College of Art
June Julian
Associate Professor
BS, Kutztown University
MEd The Pennsylvania State University
EdD, New York University
Maria Lengauer
Senior Lecturer
BFA, Philadelphia College of
Art and Design
MAT, The University of the Arts
Slavl<o Milel<ic
Associate Professor
MSc. MD, Belgrade University,
Yugoslavia
PhD, University of Connecticut
58 The University of IheAns Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Janis Norman
Professor
BAE, University of Kansas
MA. University of Missouri. Kansas City
PhD. University of Kansas
Susan Rodriguez
Adjunct Professor
BFA. MEd. Tyler School of Art,
Temple University
Barbara Suplee
Associate Professor
BFA, West Chester University
MEd, Tyler School of Art.
Temple University
PhD, Pennsylvania State University
JoAnn Wright
Senior Lecturer
BA, Rutgers University
BA, Rowan University
Pre-Certification
in Art Education
Foundation
Credits
Fall
FPllO
Drawing
FP120
2-D Design
FP 130
3-D Design
Electives
HUllOA
First Year Writing I
HU103A
Intro, to Modernism I
Fall Total
Spring
Choose cun
tliree courses:
FPlll
Drawing
FP121
2-D Design
FP131
3-D Design
FP140
Time and Motion
Electives
HUllOB First Year Writing II
HU 103 B Intro, to Modernism II
Spring Total
Freshman Year Total
Sophomore
Sophomore Year Total
3.0
3.0
3.0
1.5
3.0
3.0
16.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
1.5
3.0
3.0
16.5
AE200
Presentation Skills
1.0
AE201
Introduction to
Visual Arts Education
2.0
HU18I*
Child and Adolescent
Psychology
3.0
Math
6.0
British/American Lit.
3.0
15.0
AE533
Art and Inclusionary Ed. 3.0
AE547-^
Program Design and Methods:
Elementary 3.0
AE547
Prog. Design: Elementary 3.0
HUI62
Individual and Society 3.0
HU270
Intro, to Aesthetics or
AE549
Program Design and Methods:
Aesthetics/ Art Criticism 3.0
HU357
Modem Art (preferred)
or a Discipline Art History 3.0
Senior
AE 599*
AE 559-h
AE 548+
Professional Writing
Intensive 2.0
Saturday Practicum 3.0
Program Design and Methods:
Secondary 3.0
Senior Year Total
6,0
Students must successfully complete the
Instructional I PRAXIS tests prior to entering the
Post-Baccalaureate Teacher Program.
Post-Baccalaureate Teacher Program
Credits
AE 552
AE659■^-^
The Art of Teaching 3.0
Student Teaching Practicum 9.0
Post Baccalaureate Total
lunior Year Total
15.0
* These courses also count toward the liberal arts
core of the bachelor's degree.
***AE 599 is required of students who do not pass
the Art Education Department Writing Proficiency
Exam. It does notfidfill any requirements for pre-
certification or the bachelor's degree.
+These courses have a required field placement.
++ The Student Teaching Practicum consists of two
4.5-credit components: a seven-week elementary
field placement and a seven-week secondary field
placement. The two field placements may be taken
over two semesters. If this option is elected, the full
15-week seminar that accompanies the Practicum
must be taken in both semesters
Required Studio Electives
Pre-Certification students should complete at least
three upper level credits in a two-dimensional
medium if their major is in a three-dimensional
area, and vice versa. Other studio work must
include at least one course each in photography,
computer with graphics applications, painting,
drawing, ceramics, and printmaking.
AE 533. AE 547. AE 548. andAE 559fidfillAn
Education and studio elective rt^uirements outside
of the major program.
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
59
Art Therapy
Karen Clark-Schock
kcschock@uarts.edu
Director
215-717-6236
Concentration in Art Therapy
Art therapy, a well-respected discipline
within the human services profession.
offers an exciting career opportunity for the
studio art major. It utilizes art as a non-
verbal means of communication and
self-expression, and thereby provides a cre-
ative vehicle through which to explore
personal problems as well as personal
strengths and potentials. Art therapy recog-
nizes that the entire art process, how it
unfolds, the drawn forms and content, as
well as the verbal associations, are all
reflections of the individual client.
Art therapists work with children and
adults of all ages in a variety of settings.
These include psychiatric and medical hos-
pitals, schools, clinics, community centers,
nursing homes, and drug and alcohol treat-
ment clinics. As members of a team, art
therapists may work with physicians, psy-
chiatrists, psychologists, social workers,
and educators. The art therapist uses art-
work for both diagnosis and treatment. Art
therapy may also be utilized as a means of
promoting creativity and wellness, and may
therefore be viewed as a force in the pre-
vention of illness.
While enrolled in one of the BFA pro-
grams within the College, students may
also elect a concentration in Art Therapy.
This concentration introduces them to the
discipline on the undergraduate level. This
concentration gives students a chance to
explore a career option while they are
. engaged in undergraduate study.
Students who do not wish to pursue the
professional degree will nonetheless find
that their study of art therapy is beneficial
in other fields, particularly in education,
and in their own personal development.
StiideiUs who elect the An Therapy pro-
gram take four designated courses in
psychok)gy and five courses in art therapy,
each of which meets overall requirements
toward the Bachelor of Fine Arts. At gradu-
ation. Art Therapy Concentration students
receive a certificate of completion in Art
Therapy along with the Bachelor of Fine
Arts degree.
The Hahnemann Creative Arts
in Therapy Program at Drexel
University
Students interested in applying to The
Hahnemann Creative Arts in Therapy
Program at Drexel University for a master's
degree in Art Therapy have the advantage
of studying with faculty who teach in both
the UArts and Hahnemann therapy pro-
grams. Course content and experience in
the UArts undergraduate program provides
excellent credentials for graduate study
and, in particular, educational continuity
with the graduate program at Drexel
University.
Art Therapy Faculty
Karen Clark-Schock
Adjunct Associate Professor
BA, Rosemont College
MCAT, Hahnemann University
PsyD, Immaculata College
Nancy Gerber
Senior Lecturer
BS, Pennsylvania State University
MS, Hahnemann University
Susan Kaye-Huntington
Adjunct Assistant Professor
BA, New York University
MCAT, Hahnemann University
PsyD, Immaculata College
60
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Art Therapy
Concentration
Foundatic
m
Credits
Junior
Credits
Fall
Fall
FPllO
Drawing
3.0
AT 300
Intro, to Art Therapy
3.0
FP120
2-D Design
3.0
HU384
Abnormal Psychology
3.0
FP130
3-D Design
3.0
Fall Total
6.0
Electives
1.5
Spring
HUllOA
First Year Writing I
3.0
AT 301
Social and Group Process
3.0
HU103A
Intro, to Modernism I
3.0
AT 304
Theories and Techniques of
Fall Total
16.5
Art Therapy with
Spring
Choose an\
three courses:
Spring Total
Children and Adolescents
3.0
6.0
FPlll
Drawing
3.0
Junior Year Total
12.0
FP PI
2-D Design
3-D Design
Time and Motion
30
FP131
3.0
3.0
Senior
FP140
Fall
HUllOB
HU 103 B
Electives
First Year Writing n
Intro, to Modernism
1.5
3.0
3.0
AT 305
HU 483
Theories and Techniques of
Art Therapy with Adults
Theories of Personality
3.0
3.0
Spring Total
16.5
Fall Total
6.0
Freshman Year Total
33.0
Spring
AT 401
Spring Total
Senior Practicum
3.0
Sopliomore
3.0
HU181A
Child and Adolescent
Senior Year Total:
9.0
Psychology
Adult Psychology
3.0
3.0
HU181B
Art Therapy Courses
15.0
Liberal Arts Courses
12.0
Sophomore
Year Total
6.0
The University of ttie Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
6i
College of Art and Design
Graduate Programs
Carol Moore
cmoore@uarts.edu
Graduate Coordinator
215-717-6106
Graduate study in the College of Art and Design provides
intensive professional preparation in a stimulating multi-arts envi-
ronment. A select range of specialized graduate degrees in Fine Arts,
Design, and Visual Arts Education features focused curricula, small
classes, dedicated faculty, and access to outstanding facilities and
resources.
All programs address interarts and/or interdisciplinary issues
through both studio activity and the University Seminars on
"Structure and Metaphor," and "Art and Society." which bring stu-
dents together from all graduate programs at the College of Art and
Design. Additionally, all MFA students take the University
Seminar on "Criticism."
A University of the Arts education extends beyond the classroom
and studio. Through partnerships, workshops, residencies, intern- ■
ships, and symposia, students engage the larger art, design,
and education communities and interact with some of today's
most important artists, designers, and educators in a broad
range of disciplines.
The College of Art and Design offers these graduate programs:
Master of Fine Arts degrees in Book Arts/Printmaking, Museum
Exhibition Planning and Design; low-residency summer Master of
Fine Arts degrees in Ceramics, Painting, or Sculpture; Master of
Industrial Design; Master of Arts in Art Education; Master of Arts in
Museum Communication; Master of Arts in Museum Education;
Master of Arts in Teaching in Visual Arts.
Student Classification and
Course Load
Graduate students must be enrolled for at least nine credits to be
considered full-time. Tuition for part-time graduate students is
charged on a per-credit basis.
Graduate student class status is determined as follows:
Gl up to 17.5 credits
G2 18 credits or more
Graduate Thesis Requirements
CAD graduate programs require each graduate student to meet
specific thesis requirements. The requirements may include a thesis
exhibition or project, and should be successfully completed once the
student has fulfilled all other program requirements. Students must
submit three copies of their thesis to their program director in order
to qualify for the degree. One copy of the thesis remains with the
department and two are submitted to the Greenfield Library.
Thesis Grading
The grade of "IP" ("In Progress") signifies that the student is
making satisfactory progress toward completing the graduate thesis.
This grade will apply only to graduate thesis courses where the stu-
dent's thesis is still in progress.
This grade is available only for the following courses:
AE 649 Graduate Project/Thesis
MS 749 A/B Thesis Development
ID 749 Master's Thesis Documentation
FA 795 MFA Thesis Exhibition
MU 603 Graduate Project/Recital
An "IP" grade acknowledges the fact that the final course product
(thesis) may require some period of time past the semester of regis-
trafion to complete. The "IP" grade will remain on the student's
record until a final thesis grade is submitted by the instructor. In
some cases, a student will be registered for thesis courses as a
sequence (e.g., MS 749 A/B). When the final grade is submitted by
the instructor, it will replace the "IP" grade. The "IP" grade is not
computed in the grade-point average.
In order to remain in good standing while the thesis is "in
progress," the student must register for the thesis continuation fee
for each semester he or she is not enrolled in coursework.
Graduate Project/Thesis
Continuation Fee
A student who has completed all the course requirements for the
master's degree and is currently working on the graduate thesis,
either on or off-campus, must register and pay a graduate thesis con-
tinuation fee per semester until the thesis is completed and accepted.
This registration, through the Office of the Registrar, is required in
each succeeding semester, excluding the summer sessions, until all
degree requirements are met. Students completing a degree in the
summer must pay the thesis fee in the final summer semester.
Leave of Absence
A graduate student may take a leave of absence prior to the com-
pletion of all coursework and with the program director's approval.
Students may take a maximum of two one-semester leaves of
absence throughout their course of study, either in sequence or as
needed. Once the thesis has begun and all coursework has been com-
pleted, students must register and pay for the thesis continuation fee
for successive semesters and are not eligible for a leave of absence.
SUMFA students are limited to one off-semester leave of absence
between the first and third summers. If a longer leave of absence is
necessary, the student will be asked to take a full year's leave of
absence.
62
The University of the Ans Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Graduate Double Degree Policies
Graduate students already enrolled in a master's degree program
at the University of the Arts may apply to simultaneously pursue a
second master's degree. A second degree may be added only after
the successful completion of at least one semester of graduate study,
with a grade-point average of at least 3.0. Students who are inter-
ested in this option must be aware that completion of two degrees
will likely require additional time and requires intensive advising
and coordination of requirements.
Students currently enrolled in a master's degree program who
wish to pursue a second master's degree must request, in writing,
that the Registrar forward a copy of their transcript and official file
to the director of the program to which they are seeking admission.
The director of the second program may require the student to
submit materials for portfolio review, and may require additional let-
ters of reference. The director of each graduate program is
responsible for coordinating any required portfolio review. Portfolio
requirements are listed on the Graduate Application or may be
obtained directly from the graduate director or coordinator. Final
acceptance into a double degree program must be approved by the
Director of Graduate Programs.
' 1 . A student may be awarded a particular degree from the
University only once; i.e., once the student has earned an MA, he or
she may not be awarded another MA.
2. A student may not receive two different master's degrees from
the same program; i.e., he or she cannot pursue both the MA in Art
Education and MAT in Visual Arts.
3. A student may earn up to two master's degrees, either simulta-
neously or sequentially.
4. If a student is approved for a double degree, and six credits are
shared between the two programs, the student may transfer a max-
imum of six additional credits from an accredited institution.
5. A student who has completed one degree and wishes to matric-
ulate in another does so by applying to the new program through the
Office of Admission.
6. Students in the Summer MFA program who wish to pursue a
second graduate degree will be charged the regular graduate tuition
rate in the semesters in which they are pursuing two degrees.
Summer Graduate Electives Policy
Students wishing to complete studio or liberal arts electives
during University summer sessions may review pre-approved
summer course offerings in the spring with their program advisor
and may register for these courses only after obtaining approval and
the signature of the CAD Graduate Coordinator. A maximum of six
credits is transferrable to the graduate curriculum.
Degree Candidacy and Completion
Midway through their respective programs, graduate students'
progress in their discipline and proposal for thesis will be reviewed
by the appropriate Graduate Committee to formally determine
whether a student becomes a degree candidate, and is ready to con-
tinue toward development and completion of the thesis or graduate
project.
Graduate students have up to seven years from matriculation date
to complete a two-year master's program, and up to six years from
matriculation date to complete a one-year program.
Credit Duplication
No course, including graduate courses, which has satisfied under-
graduate degree requirements, may be counted again for graduate
credit.
Transfer Credit
A maximum of six credits of graduate credit may be transferred
and applied toward the graduate degree requirements upon approval
of the program director. All transfer credits must be graduate level
classes or upper-level undergraduate classes taken for graduate
credit at an accredited college or university, approved by the
Registrar and the Graduate Director, and must be a "B" or higher
grade.
Studio courses must be 300-level for graduate credit. Two hun-
dred level courses may be taken with justification from the director
and written approval from the Graduate Coordinator. Art Education
Competency may be taken as an independent study.
Probation and Dismissal Policies
A cumulative GPA of 3.0 is required for good standing and for
graduation for graduate students. If a student is unable to achieve a
semester or cumulative GPA of 3.0. he or she will be placed on pro-
bation. If a 3.0 GPA and/or other conditions are not attained by the
following semester, the student will be dismissed from the program.
While on probation, a student will be ineligible to hold a graduate
assistantship or to receive a University supplemental grant-in-aid
or scholarship.
The University of the Ans Utidergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
63
Post-Baccalaureate Options
Crafts Studio Certificate Program
A Post-Baccalaureate Portfolio Development
Program
The University's 30-credit certificate program offers an intensely
focused education in crafts. The program is designed for those stu-
dents with bachelor's degrees who wish to become proficient artists
in one or more of the following areas: ceramics, fibers, glass, jew-
elry, metal-smithing, or wood. Courses dealing with technique,
philosophy, and contemporary issues are aimed to develop an indi-
vidual's portfolio for further graduate study or a career as an
independent studio artist or design professional.
The Crafts Studio Program offers the studio component of the
University's undergraduate crafts program in a focused one-and-
one-half or two-year period. Students accepted to the program take a
minimum of 7.5 credits to a maximum of 12 credits per semester
Certificate students must take a minimum of 12 media-specific
credits at the 300 course level. The prerequisite for 300-level courses
is two 200-level courses in that same medium. However, if an appli-
cant's portfolio indicates enough experience in a particular medium,
200-level prerequisites may be waived at the time of acceptance. See
the preceding section for a listing of media-specific courses.
Certificate students benefit from taking courses with degree can-
didates in a quality undergraduate program. In addition to
technically oriented, media-specific courses, students take core
courses involving design/theory issues, crificism, and
professional/career practices.
Admission is by portfolio and interview. Students with little or no
formal art training will be required to take Foundation courses. The
program advisor (in consultation with the student) will set the
number of required prerequisites. These may be taken in advance of
or concurrently with the certificate program.
Post -Baccalaureate Teacher Program
Pre-Certlfication Concentration in Art
Education, Professional Semester (for UArts
alumni only)
The Post-Baccalaureate Teacher Program, Professional Semester,
is an intensive one-semester experience built around a fourteen-
week student teaching practicum, in which the student devotes seven
weeks to teaching at the elementary school level and seven weeks to
teaching at the middle or secondary school level under the guidance
and supervision of master teachers and Art Education Department
faculty.
The Post-Baccalaureate Teacher Program, Professional Semester,
is only available to University of the Arts/College of Art and Design
students the semester following receipt of the bachelor's degree,
which must include all pre-certification requirements except AE 552
and AE 659. Students must also have a 3.0 GPA, have successfully
completed the instructional I Praxis Tests, and be recommended by
the Art Education department.
Prior to teaching in the Post-Baccalaureate Teacher Program, stu-
dents must take the AE 599 Professional Writing course or pass the
Professional Writing Proficiency Exam with a score of 90 percent or
higher. Those who score below 70 percent on the Professional
Writing Proficiency Exam after completing the Professional Writing
Intensive course may not be admitted to the Post-Baccalaureate
Student Teacher Program, Professional Semester.
The Pre-Certification Concentration, when coupled with the Post-
Baccalaureate Teacher Program, is accredited by the Pennsylvania
Department of Education as an approved program to prepare stu-
dents to receive the Instructional I Certificate to teach Art K-12.
Since June 1987, all applicants for certification in Pennsylvania
must also take and pass all required tests in the PRAXIS Series,
Professional Assessments for Beginning Teachers of the National
Teachers Exam to qualify for the certificate.
Supplementary courses and activities complete the preparation of
the future teacher to enter the profession.
Post-Baccalaureate Teacher Program, Professional Semester
Credits
AE552
AE659
The Art of Teaching
Student Teaching Practicum
3.0
9.0
Post Baccalaureate Total
64
sity of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Post- Baccalaureate Teacher Program
(Non-Degree for non-UArts graduates)
The Post-Baccalaureate Teacher Program (Non-Degree) is an
intensely focused course of study designed to prepare those seeking
certification to teach Art K-12. To be eligible for this 30-credit
program, candidates must hold a BFA or BA degree in art, or equiv-
alent, with four credits in studio art and 12 credits in art history, with
a "B" or better cumulative average. They must also have completed
six credits in college-level math, three credits of English composi-
tion, and three credits in American or British literature. In addition
candidates must have successfully completed the Instructional I,
PRAXIS tests. Depending on the student's background and all co-
requisites being met, this 30-credit program may be completed in
three full semesters.
Post-Baccalaureate Teacher Program (Non-Degree)
Credits
Fall
AE559*
Professional Writing Intensive
2.0
AE200
Presentation Skills
1.0
AE201
Introduction to Visual Arts Education
2.0
AE547+
Program Design and Methods: Elementary
3.0
AE 550
Creative and Cognitive Development
3.0
Fad Total
9.0
Spring
AE 548+
Program Design and Methods:
Middle and Secondary
3.0
AE533+
Art and Inclusionary Education
3.0
AE 559+
Saturday Practicum
3.0
Spring Total
9.0
Fall
AE552
The Art ot Teaching
3.0
AE649
Student Teaching Practicum
9.0
Fall Total
12.0
Post Baccalaureate Total (Non-Degree)
30.0
*AE 599 is required of students who do not pass out of the Art Education
Department Writing Proficiency Exam. It does not fulfill any requirements for
pre-certification, AE 599 must be taken and passed in the first semester of
enrollment. (See course description for additional information.) Those who
score below 70 percent on the Professional Writing Proficiency Exam after
completing the Professional Writing course may not continue in the Post-
Baccalaureate Teacher Program (Non-Degree).
+ These courses have a required field placement.
No credits earned in the Post-Baccalaureate Teacher Program (Non-Degree)
may be converted to graduate credits or be considered for transfer credit in a
graduate program.
Ttie University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
65
Art Education
Master of Arts
Barbara Suplee
bsiiplee@uarts.edu
Chairperson, Director
215-717-6053
The Master of Arts in Art Education pro-
gram at The University of the Arts is
designed to develop the studio, intellectual,
and professional education background of
art educators, enabling them to meet
advanced professional goals.
Coordinating professional education
courses with work in liberal arts, graduate
research, and a concentration in studio arts
that include emerging digital and alternative
media, the MA in Art Education Program
offers custom-designed programs of study to
meet individual needs. A series of graduate
education seminars address historical and con-
temporary issues in art theory, criticism, and
education. Drawing on the wide range of
studio departments, nearly half of the program
is reserved for work in one or more smdio
areas, museum studies, or liberal arts
depending upon the student's particular back-
ground and career needs. The independent
thesis or graduate project, which is normally
completed in two semesters, may take the
form of either an academic research paper or a
graduate project in an appropriate format.
Designed for both established and new
teachers, the degree may satisfy credit
accrual requirements for pemianent certifi-
cation or lead to other career advancement.
Graduates have also found the program rele-
vant to positions in museum education,
college (especially junior college) teaching,
arts administration, educational media, and
other related fields. Applicants must hold a
bachelor's degree or equivalent with no
fewer than 40 credits in studio work and 12
credits in art history with a "B" or better
cumulative average. A teaching certificate is
not required. Students not holding degrees
in the visual arts can expect to complete 18
credits of foundation studies and/or up to 40
credits of studio work, depending upon fac-
ulty review of their portfolio.
The degree may also be taken in conjunc-
tion with the Certification Program in Art
Education, thereby allowing the student to
earn a master's degree plus Certification.
The difference between this combination
and the MAT (Master of Arts in Teaching),
is the concentration in graduate studio work
and the research and thesis required for the
MA degree. Full-time students may com-
plete the MA program in one academic year
plus a summer or three semesters. Part-time
students may take coursework over as many
as five years. Depending on the needs of the
individual student, professional education
courses and selected studio arts and liberal
arts courses may be taken in the evenings
and summers.
Master of Arts Faculty
Paul Adorno
Adjunct Assistant Professor
AB, Georgetown University
MSEd, University of Pennsylvania
Raye Cohen
Adjunct Assistant Professor
BA, University of Pennsylvania
MA, The University of the Arts
Anne El-Omami
Associate Professor
BFA, BA, University of Nebraska,
Lincoln
MA, University of Nebraska
Diane Foxman
Senior Lecturer
BA. Antioch University
MA, Goddard College
Arlene Gostin
Associate Professor
BA, University of Delaware '
MA, Philadelphia College of Art
June Julian
Associate Professor
BS, Kutztown University
MEd, The Pennsylvania State University
EdD, New York University
Maria Lengauer
Lecturer
BFA, Philadelphia College of Art
and Design
MAT, The University of the Arts
Slavko Milekic
Associate Professor
MSc, MD, Belgrade University,
Yugoslavia
PhD, University of Connecticut
Carol Moore
Associate Professor
BFA, MFA, Tyler School of Art,
Temple University
Janis Norman
Professor
BAE, University of Kansas
MA, University of Missouri, Kansas City
PhD, University of Kansas
Susan Rodriguez
Adjunct Professor
BFA, MEd, Tyler School of Art,
Temple University
Barbara Suplee
Associate Professor
BFA, West Chester University
MEd, Temple University
PhD, Pennsylvania State University
JoAnn Wright
Senior Lecturer
BA, Rutgers University
BA, Rowan University
66
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Art Education
Master of Arts
36 credits
Summer
Credits
Studio Electives 3.0
Liberal Arts Elective 3.0
Summer Total 6.0
Fall
AE 599*
Professional Writing
Intensive
2.0
AE606
Research in Education:
Methods and Trends
3.0
GR691
University Seminar:
Structure and Metaphor
3.0
AE610
Graduate Studio Seminar
3.0
Electives
6.0
Fall Total
15.0
Spring
AE602
History of Ideas in
Art and Museum Education
3.0
AE649**
Graduate Project/Thesis
6.0
GR692
University Seminar:
Art and Design in Society
3.0
Electives
3.0
Spring Total
15.0
Total Credit
36,0
*AE 599 is required of students who do not pass
the Art Education Department Writing Proficiency
Exam. It must be talien and passed in the first
semester of enrollment, and does not fulfill any
credit requirements for the MA program. (See
course description for additional information.)
**AE 649 Graduate Project/Thesis may be taken
as a six-credit block or in two three-credit blocks.
To remain in good standing while the thesis is "in-
progress." students must register for the thesis con-
tinuation fee for each semester they are not
enrolled in coursework. Students must be registered
for the semester in which they defend their thesis,
and imtil the thesis is completed and bound copies
are submitted to the Art Education Department.
Tlie Univereity of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004 (yj
Concentration in
Educational Media
Barbara Suplee
bsuplee@uarts.edu
Chairperson, Director
215-717-6053
The Concentration in Educational Media,
as part of a Master of Arts in Art Education,
is designed to prepare graduate students to
use, plan, and manage technology in the
K- 12 art curriculum and classroom.
Educational media are those digital tools and
applications used for creative and instruc-
tional purposes within a K-12 classroom and
school setting. The use of educational media,
therefore, is not solely for developing cre-
ative expression in students, but also as a
means to support the teaching and learning of
K-12 art.
Candidates for this Concentration are
students with a background and training in
both technology and art who want to inte-
grate the use of technology into the teaching
of art. Students in the Master of Arts in Art
Education program who complete this
Concentration will serve as classroom art
teachers integrating technology into their cur-
riculum and practice, and as technology
leaders in their school and district.
Requirements
A Master of Arts in Art Education major
must complete a total of 12 credits in
required core and elective courses in tech-
nology for a Concentration in Educational
Media. The other remaining six credits may
be elective courses that the student chooses
to advance his or her study of technology.
In addition to these 12 credits toward a
Concentration in Educational Media, the
graduate thesis/project (six credits) will be
directed toward research involving the use of
technology in art education. Competencies
and specific requirements for the Educational
Media Concentration are the following:
Technology Competencies
To acquire the following basic competen-
cies in technology, a student may take
University technology courses, workshops,
and tutorials, including those offered through
the Continuing Studies Professional Institute
for Educators. Based on a review of portfolio
and approval by the Art Education
Department, a graduate student may be
excused from this requirement.
• Macintosh and Windows operating
environments
• Navigation, menu, file management,
and transfer and storage skills
• Productivity skills
(word processing and spreadsheet)
• Navigational and information search
and retrieval skills
(Internet and World Wide Web)
• Electronic presentation skills
(PowerPoint, etc.)
• Computer graphics knowledge,
concepts, and skills
(raster vector and Web graphics)
Required Core Courses
Two related semester courses form the
required core of the Concentration in
Educational Media A: Teaching and
Learning, and Educational Media B:
Planning and Management. These two core
courses are designed to be taken together as a
year-long sequence. Educational Media A:
Teaching and Learning focuses on the con-
ceptual, curricular, and instructional
approaches and strategies needed to integrate
digital technologies into the K-12 art class-
room. Educational Media B: Planning and
Management examines the issues and topics
related to designing technology environments
for K-12 art education.
Elective Courses
The purpose of the elective courses is to
give the student concentrating in Educational
Media the opportunity to explore specific
interests involving technology. To that end,
six credits must be used for further explo-
ration in technology-related courses from the
University.
Thesis/Project
A student in the Master of Arts in Art
Education program with a Concentration in
Educational Media will focus on a topic or
idea related to technology in art education as
part of his or her graduate thesis/project. The
thesis/project in technology will be the cul-
mination of study for a Concentration in
Educational Media.
Art Education
Master of Arts with a
Concentration in
Educational Media 36 credits
Fall
Credits
AE599*
Professional Writing
Intensive
2.0
AE507
Educational Media A:
Teaching and Learning
3.0
GR691
University Seminar:
Structure and Metaplior
3.0
AE606
Research in Art Education:
Methods and Trends
3.0
Elective (technology-based)
3.0
Fall Total
12.0*
Spring
AE509
Educational Media B:
Planning and Management
3.0
AE602
History of Ideas in
Art and Museum Education
3.0
GR692
University Seminar:
Art and Design in Society
3.0
Elective (technology-based)
3.0
Spring Tota
12.0
Fall
AE 530
Interactive Media for
Art and Museum Educators
3.0
AE610
Graduate Studio Seminar
3.0
AE 649**
Graduate Project/Thesis
6.0
Fall Total
12.0
Total Credit
36.0
*AE 599 is required of students who do not pass the
Art Education department Writing Proficiency Exam.
It must be talien and passed in the first semester of
enrollment and it does notfidfill any credit require-
ments for the MA. If a student must take AE 599,
his/lier semester will include a total of 14 credits.
**AE 649 Graduate Project/Thesis may be taken as
a six-credit block or in tnv 3-credit blocks. To
remain in good standing while the thesis is "in-
progress," students must register for the thesis con-
tinuation fee for each semester they are not enrolled
in coursework. Students must be registered for the
semester in which they defend their thesis, aitd until
the thesis is completed and bound copies are sub-
mitted to the Art Education Department.
68
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Visual Arts
Master of Arts in
Teaching
Barbara Suplee
bsuplee@uarts.edu
Chairperson, Director
215-717-6053
The Master of Arts in Teaching in Visual
Arts is a professional degree program incor-
porating preparation for the Pennsylvania
Instructional I Certificate to teach Art K- 12,
including a student teaching practicum.
Additional coursework includes the history,
theory, and practice of art education.
Depending on the completeness of the stu-
dent's background, the MAT Program
provides a flexible mix of professional edu-
cation, advanced studio, and liberal arts
study in a 42-credit program that may be
completed in three full semesters or two
semesters and two summers.
MAT candidates must successfully com-
plete the Instructional I PRAXIS tests by
the end of their first semester Although the
program normally leads to certification
upon receiving the degree, all candidates
must, in addition, successfully complete all
the required PRAXIS tests with satisfactory
scores to qualify for State certification. This
unique degree program allows a student to
obtain his/her certification requirements for
teaching while also earning a master's
degree recognized by potential employing
school districts and educational institutions.
In many cases this enables the MAT recip-
ient to qualify for a higher salary and often
preferred placement.
Applicants to the MAT Program should
possess a BFA or BA degree in studio art
with a minimum of 45 credits in studio and
12 credits in art history with a "B" or better
cumulative average. They must have com-
pleted six credits of college-level math,
three credits of college-level English com-
position and three credits of British or
American literature prior to formal admis-
sion to the professional education program.
Applicants must also have satisfactorily
completed the coursework and/or acquired
competencies in fields relating to teacher
certification described below. If any defi-
ciencies exist, up to 16 corequisite credits
may be completed concurrently with the
degree and applied to elective requirements.
Corequisites:
• Coursework in painting, drawing,
ceramics, and printmaking
• Three upper-division credits in a 3-D
studio area, if a 2-D studio major for
bachelor's degree
• Three upper-division credits in a 2-D
studio area, if a 3-D studio major for
bachelor's degree
• Introduction to computers, preferably
including graphic applications (required
competency); minimum requirement of
one course
• Basic Photography (required compe-
tency ), minimum requirement of one
course
• Art History, 12 credits, including at
least one course in 20th century art, one
course in non-Western art
• Introduction to Psychology or
Child and Adolescent Psychology
• Sociology or Cultural Anthropology
(may be satisfied by GR 692)
• Aesthetics (may be satisfied by GR 691
orAE549)
• Art Criticism
(may be satisfied by GR 691 or AE 549)
• Speech or Acting
(may be satisfied by AE 200
Presentation Skills)
• Six credits college-level math (prior to
entry to the MAT program)
• Three credits college-level English
composition (prior to entry to the MAT
program)
• Three credits college-level British or
American literature (prior to entry into
the MAT program)
• AE 201 Introduction to Visual Arts
Education
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
69
Visual Arts
Master of Arts in Teaching
42 credits
Summer
Credits
AE550** Creative and Cognitive
Development 3.0
AE 602** History of Ideas in
Art and Museum Education 3.0
Summer Total 6.0
The Instructional I PRAXIS tests must be success-
fully completed by the end of the first semester.
Fall
AE599*
Professional Writing
Intensive
2.0
AE606
Research in Education
3.0
AE 547+
Program Design and Methods:
Elementar)'
3.0
AE548+
Program Design and Methods:
Middle and Secondary
3.0
AE 559+
Saturday Practicum
3.0
AE552
The Art of Teaching
3.0
Unrestricted Electives
3.0
Fall Total
18.0*
Spring
AE 659++
Student Teaching Practicun
Art Education
9.0
Technology Elective
3.0
Unrestricted Electives
3.0
AE533+
Art and Inclusionary
Education
3.0
Spring Tota:
18.0
Total Credit
42.0
Note: Courses to satisfy requirements for the MAT
are offered at varying times, allowing graduate stu-
dents 'programs to be customized to their needs.
*AE 599 is required of all students who do not pass
the Art Education Department Writing Proficiency
Exam. It must be taken and passed in the first
semester of enrollment, and it does not fulfill any
credit reqinrements for the MAT program. (See
course description for additional information. }
Those who score below 70 percent on the
Professional Writing Proficiency Exam after com-
pleting the Professional Writing course may not
continue in the MAT program. Students enrolled in
AE 599 must either pay a per-credit charge for all
credits exceeding the I8-credit alottment. or must
delay two credits of electives to a future semester.
** May be taken either the summer or fall semester
-t-These courses have a required field placement,
and may be taken in either the fall or spring
semester
+ + The Student Teaching Practicum consists of two
4.5-credit components: seven-week elementary field
placement and a seven-week secondary field place-
ment. The two field placements may be taken over
nio semesters. If this option is elected, the full 15-
week seminar that accompanies the Practicum must
be taken in both .semesters.
70
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Book Arts/
Printmaking
Master of Fine Arts
Patricia M.Smith
psmith@uarts.eclu
Director
215-717-6490
The MFA Program in Book Arts/
Printmaking focuses on the book as a con-
ceptual departure for art making and
personal expression. A two-year, 60-credit
program built upon the University's long
tradition of involvement with the book and
the printed image, it is open to qualified stu-
dents with an undergraduate degree in
liberal arts, design, photography, print-
B making, or fine art.
Students explore the book as an art form
that incorporates three-dimensional as well
as two-dimensional structure, time and
sequence, text and image. It embraces both
the rich history of the book and the new
processes and forms created by digital tech-
nology. Its concept of book arts includes
fine-press printing and illustrated texts,
visual and verbal narratives, and works that
push the idea of a book toward expressions
as different as sculpture and mulfimedia.
Important features of the program are its
printmaking opportunities, its emphasis on
investigating traditional and modem book-
binding, and its encouragement of wrifing
and the use of text. Its situation in an arts
university gives the students a unique
opportunity to draw on other art areas-pho-
tography, graphic design, multimedia,
crafts, and sculpture, among others.
The course of study, which is individually
tailored to each student's interests and expe-
rience, encourages the development of new
concepts, while offering proficiency in both
traditional and contemporary processes. The
core program of bookbinding, offset lithog-
raphy, and letterpress courses is augmented
by investigations into related fields of study
in studio arts and coUoquia and seminars on
art and the book. Courses in the first
semester intersect, reflecting the integration
of skills and concepts integral to book arts.
Through both years, students are encour-
aged to work on their writing. The second
year concentrates on the MFA Thesis
Exhibition under the supervision of an advi-
sory committee.
Students frequently choose to use their
elective credits for internships in profes-
sional laboratories and organizations and
are welcome as interns in many prestigious
conservation labs.
The MFA Program invites internationally
recognized visiting artists and critics to give
workshops, exhibit, speak about their work,
address issues of entry into the profession,
and critique the work of students.
Distinguished artists are also frequently
invited to produce books or prints in the
Borowsky Center for Publication Arts: stu-
dents are welcome to observe or assist in the
printing process.
By the conclusion of the MFA program,
the student will have developed the concep-
tual and technical skills necessary to teach,
print, design, publish, curate, work in the
fields of book conservation, or open an
independent studio or business.
Specialized Facilities
Students have individual workstations
where light tables, storage space, book
presses, and paper cutters are available.
They enjoy full use of the University's well-
equipped studios and specialized facilities,
including studios for papermaking, non-
silver photography, bookbinding,
water-based screenprinting. letterpress,
intaglio and relief printing, stone and paper
lithography, and offset lithography.
Stationary vertical and portable book
presses, a board shear, tabletop shears, and a
guillotine paper cutter are available for
bookbinding. Letterpress facilities include
four Vandercook proof presses, a pho-
topolymer platemaking system, and over
400 drawers of monotype, foundry, and
wood type. Five etching presses and four
lithography presses are available for
printing. Besides an ATF-David.son offset
press in the lithography pressroom, students
have access to the Borowsky Center for
Publication Arts, equipped with a
Heidelberg KORS offset press and a full
darkroom for experimental and production
printing. An imaging lab houses a darkroom
equipped with enlargers, horizontal and ver-
tical copy-cameras, and a state-of-the-art
filmsetting system integrated with the
University's Macintosh computer labs.
In the graduate Book Arts/Printmaking
resource room, students can find book struc-
ture models, books, journals, and
newsletters relating to book arts and print-
making, and professional materials on book
artists, presses, and programs.
Students also have access to many of the
University's other extensive facilities.
including state-of-the-art computers, gal-
leries, and the Greenfield Library, whose
visual art collection (books, periodicals,
and slides) is one of the largest among the
nation's visual art schools. Its special col-
lection of artists' books provides a valuable
teaching resource.
Academic Requirements
A cumulative GPA of 3.0 is required for
good standing and for graduation for grad-
uate students. A qualifying review at the
conclusion of the first year's coursework is
required to continue in the program. The
final semester culminates in a MFA Thesis
Exhibition. Please refer to CAD Graduate
Programs for further information on grad-
uate requirements.
MFA in Bool< Arts/Printmaking
Faculty
James Green
Master Lecturer
BFA. Oberlin College
MPh, Yale University
MLS, Columbia University
Lois M. Johnson
Professor
BSEd, University of North Dakota
MFA, University of Wisconsin-Madison
Peter Kruty
Master Lecturer
BA, University of Chicago
MLS. MA, University of Alabama
Hedi Kyle
Adjunct Associate Professor
Diploma. Werk-Kunstschule. Wiesbaden,
Germany
Carol Moore
Associate Professor
BFA, MFA, Tyler School of Art,
Temple University
Mary Phelan
Associate Professor
BS. College of Saint Rose
MA. University of Wisconsin-Madison
Winifred Radolan
Senior Lecturer
BS, Moore College of Art
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
71
Patricia M. Smith
Assistant Professor
BA, Immaculata College
MA, Philadelphia College of Art
Yoshida Hanga Academy, Tokyo
Lori Spencer
Adjunct Assistant Professor
BFA, State University of New York,
Purchase
MFA, The University of the Arts
Lynne Sures
Master Lecturer
BA, University of Maryland
MFA. University of Maryland
Susan T. Viguers
Professor
BA, Bryn Mawr College
MA, University of North Carolina at
Chapel Hill
PhD, Bryn Mawr College
Susan White
Lecturer
BFA, Moore College of Art
MFA, The University of the Arts
Book Arts/Printmaking
Master of Fine Arts 60 credits
Year One
Credits
Fall
PR 600 A
Colloquium A:
Text and Image
1.5
PR6I0A
Book Arts Studio;
Color Mark
3.0
PR 612 A*
Book Arts Studio
4.5
PR 623 A
Bookbinding
1.5.
PR 626*
Offset Lithography
1.5
Free Electives
3.0
Fall Total
15.0
Spring
PR 600 B
Colloquium B:
History of the Book
1.5
PR 610 B
Book Arts Studio;
Color Mark
3.0
PR 612 B*
Book Arts Studio
3.0
PR 623 B
Bookbinding
1.5
GR692
University Seminar:
Art and Design in Society 3.0
Free Electives
3.0
Spring Iota
15.0
First Year Total
30.0
Year Two
Credits
Fall
PR 700 A
Colloquium:
Professional Practices
1.5
PR 7 10 A
MFA Thesis Studio
3.0
PR 711 A
MFA Thesis Studio:
Thesis Exhibition
3.0
PR 723 A
Bookbinding
1.5 .•
GR691
University Seminar:
Structure and Metaphor
3.0
Free Electives
3.0
Fall Total:
15.0
Spring
PR 700 B
Colloquium:
Professional Practices
1.5
PR 710 B
MFA Thesis Studio
3.0
PR711B
MFA Thesis Studio:
Thesis Exhibition
3.0
PR 723 B
Bookbinding
1.5
GR791
University
Seminar; Criticism
3.0
Free Electives
3.0
Spring Total
15.0
Second Year Total
30.0
Total Credit
60.0
* These courses may be taken for variable credit.
72 The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Ceramics,
Painting, or
Sculpture
Master of Fine Arts
Low Residency Program
Carol Moore
cmoore@uarts.edu
Director
215-717-6106 ■
These studio-based Master of Fine Arts
degree programs are intended to broaden
and advance the conceptual, critical, histor-
ical, and practical knowledge needed to
sustain a contemporary studio. The pro-
grams have been designed to meet the needs
of artists holding BFA or BA degrees who
are interested in pursuing an MFA in either
Ceramics, Painting, or Sculpture within a
time frame that accommodates their
employment or academic year schedule.
Departing from the traditional semester
format, students enter this three-year pro-
gram in summer and complete the major
portion of their work during three annual
eight-week summer residencies of intensive,
individually focused studio experience. In
addition to exploration in the major, stu-
dents pursue interdisciplinary investigations
in studio topics common to each discipline
and address contemporary critical issues
and methodology in University graduate
seminars.
During the fall and spring semesters, stu-
dents complete independent studios, writing
and research projects, and independent
thesis preparations. Regional students main-
tain contact with studio faculty and present
studio work at specific intervals throughout
the off-campus semester and at final cri-
tiques held at the end of the fall and spring
semesters. Non-regional students meet with
assigned studio mentors in their geographic
region for concurrent periodic and final cri-
tiques of in-progress and completed work.
Off-campus writing and research projects
are completed via mail or e-mail communi-
cation with seminar faculty. A final thesis
review and exhibition is held following
completion of the third summer
Studios and Facilities
During residence at the University,
summer MFA students enjoy access to well-
equipped studios and facilities that support
work undertaken in each discipline. These
include: dedicated painting studios, three
major gas kilns with 90. 40. and 30 cubic
foot capacity, numerous electric kilns, wood
and metal shops, carving studios, a forge,
and foundry. Students are expected to locate
off-campus studio space for work under-
taken during the fall and spring independent
studio semesters. In addition, students have
access to the University's extensive facilities
that include the Greenfield Library, whose
visual arts collection ranks among the
largest of the nation's visual art schools;
state-of-the-art academic computing labora-
tories; numerous galleries and performance
spaces; and the more than 100 museums and
cultural institutions that comprise the
extended campus of the city of Philadelphia.
The cultural resources of New York and
Washington, D.C., are only hours away.
Students will be challenged by the broadly
diverse aesthetic and critical opinions of dis-
tinguished studio faculty and noted visiting
artists and critics who are in\'ited to partici-
pate in the program each summer.
Recent visiting artists and critics have
included; Siah Annajani, Bany Bartlett, Jose
Bedia, Paul Bloodgood, Tom Butter, William
Daley, Arthur Danto, Heidi Fasnacht, Sharon
Horvath, Komar and Melamid. Janet Koplos.
Sean Landers. Winifred Lutz. Dominique
Nahas, Thomas Nozkowski, Lisa Orr, Sheila
Pepe, Howardena Pindell, Elaine Reichek,
Kathy Rose, Sandy Skoglund, Robert Storr,
Stephen Tanis, George Trakas, Ursula Von
Rydingsvard, and Leslie Wayne.
Summer MFA candidates are expected to
follow the curriculum as structured in order
to complete the program within three years
and present a final thesis exhibition fol-
lowing the completion of the third summer
Vermont Studio Center
Graduate Study Exchange
The University of the Arts has a special
relationship with the Vermont Studio Center
in Johnson, Vermont. Summer Master of
Fine Arts candidates who have completed
the first year in the SUMFA program may
apply to attend VSC during the off-campus
fall and spring semesters by contacting the
Director of the Summer MFA Programs.
Scholarships received during the summer
session are not transferable for tuition pay-
ment during the off-campus fall and spring
semesters.
MFA in Ceramics, Painting,
or Sculpture Faculty
Tom Csaszar
Senior Lecturer
BFA, University of Pennsylvania
A. P. Gorny
Adjunct Associate Professor
BFA, The State University of New York
at Buffalo
Institute dell'Arte, Siena, Italy
MFA. Yale University School of Art
Jeanne laffe
Professor
BFA. Tyler School of Art.
Temple University
MFA, New York State College of
Ceramics at Alfred University
Mark Lueders
Lecturer
BFA, Miami University
MFA, University of Pennsylvania
Carol Moore
Associate Professor
BFA, MFA, Tyler School of Art,
Temple University
Eileen Neff
Adjunct Professor
BA. Temple University
BFA. Philadelphia College of Art
MFA. Tyler School of Art.
Temple University
Gerald Nichols
Professor
Diploma. Cleveland Institute of Art
MFA. University of Pennsylvania
Robin Rice
Adjunct Assistant Professor
BFA. Ohio Wesleyan University
MA. University of Missouri
Jennie Shanker
Lecturer
BFA. MAT, The University of the Arts
MFA. Yale University
The University of tlie Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
73
Ceramics, Painting,
or Sculpture
Master of Fine Arts 60 credits
Year One
Credits
Summer I
XX 610 Major Studio in Ceramics,
Painting, or Sculpture 6 .0
FA 611 Graduate Drawing 3.0
Choose one of the following nw:
GR691 University Seminar:
Structure and Metaphor 3.0
OR 692 University Seminar:
Art and Design in Society 3.0
Summer Total: 12.0
Fall I
Independent Studio 1 in Ceramics,
FA 69 1
FA 695
Fall Total:
Spring I
FA 692
FA 696
Spring Total:
Painting, or Sculpture
Independent Writing
Project I
3.0
1.5
4.5
Independent Studio II in Ceramics,
Painting, or Sculpture 3.0
Independent Writing
Project II 1.5
4.5
First Year Total
21.0
Year Two Credits
Year Three
Credits
Summer II
Summer
III
XX 6 1 1 Major Studio in Ceramics,
XX710
Major Studio in Ceramics,
Painting, or Sculpmre
6.0
Painting, or Sculpture
6.0
Elective*
3.0
FA 612
Professional Practices
3.0
Choose one of the following t^vo:
GR791
University Seminar:
GR 69 1 Structure and Metaphor or
3.0
Criticism
3.0
GR 692 University Seminar:
Summer Total:
12.0
Art and Design in Society
Summer Total:
3.0
12.0
Fall III
FA 795
Thesis Exhibition
6.0
Fall II
FA 781 Thesis Writing Project 1 in
Painting, or Sculpture
Ceramics,
1.5
3.0
4.5
Fall Total:
6.0
Third Year Total
18.0
FA 793 Thesis Preparation I
Fall Total:
Total Credits
60.0
Spring II
FA 782
FA 794
Spring Total
Thesis Writing Project II in Ceramics,
Painting, or Sculpture 1.5
Thesis Preparation II 3.0
4.5
Second Year Total
21.0
■■■Recommended Electives:
FA 610 Studio Topic
AE 602 History of Ideas in
Art and Museum Education
HU 448 A American Art Since 1945
HU 448 B European Art Since 1945
HU456 Major Artists ' -
Note: Prefixes (XX) for the major studio courses
reflect the student's area of concentration:
Ceramics (CR), Painting (PT), or Sculpture (SC).
74
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Industrial Design
Master of Industrial
Design
JamerHunt
jhunt@uarts.edu
Director
215-717-6253
The Master's Program in Industrial
Design is a graduate laboratory for postin-
dustrial design. Students and faculty are
actively exploring how to design for new
social conditions in which behavioral, mate-
rial, technological, and natural landscapes
are shifting. We are committed to devel-
oping new models of design practice that
are multidisciplinary, collaborative, and
team-based. We stress process, with an
emphasis on research, conceptualization,
communication, and appropriate form-
giving.
The program itself is a two-year, 60-
credit curriculum consisting of studio,
methods, and seminar courses. The cur-
riculum is project-based, which means that
each semester, course content is integrated
around studio-based projects. Projects range
from the development of new urban indus-
tries to incubating independent publishing
labels for hard and soft design. By pro-
viding research proposals, future studies,
and case studies, we are promoting a new,
more proactive role for design education.
Because design is a collaborative profes-
sion, most studio projects will be
team-based. During the first and third
semesters of study, first-year students will
work with second-year students in a shared
studio. Semester two is more individually
oriented. The final semester of the two-year
program is devoted to a master's thesis in
which the candidate will work more inde-
pendently with a group of internal faculty
and/or outside professionals to develop a
thesis project that must advance the candi-
date's chosen field of study.
Like the program itself, the faculty repre-
sent a wide range of approaches to the
practice of design. This means that students
have access to currently practicing design
professionals with backgrounds in fields
ranging from architecture, graphic design,
cultural anthropology, and psychology to
industrial, systems and environmental
design. The Industrial Design Department
thus offers a unique core faculty group who
share a common philosophy and commit-
ment to the design process.
We are an interdisciplinary program, so
we welcome applicants from diverse fields
such as the fine arts, architecmre, sociology,
law, business, engineering, and information
technologies. What unites the students is
their enthusiasm for design and material
culture, as well as an interest in the social
impact of design on our society. All candi-
dates must hold a bachelor's degree (or
equivalent). In addition, in order to be
accepted at the graduate level, all qualified
applicants must demonstrate some form of
professional involvement in a design-related
field. Each candidate is then carefully
selected to assure a comprehensive balance
of disciplines in the program.
Specialized Facilities
In the graduate design studio, each stu-
dent is provided with an Apple computer for
his/her desktop, access to the University
network, and a powerful suite of software;
there are Windows NT machines, as well,
for advanced 3-D modeling. The department
also provides access to digital cameras and
projectors for process documentation and
presentation.
Master of Industrial Design
Faculty
David Comberg
Adjunct Associate Professor
BFA, Massachusetts College of Art
MFA.Yale School of Art
Anthony Guido
Associate Professor
BSID, The Ohio State University
JamerHunt
Director MID. Associate Professor
BA, Brown University
PhD in Cultural Anthropology,
Rice University
Jonas Milder
Assistant Professor
BID. Fachhochschule fur Gestaltung,
Germany
MID, Hochschule der Kiinste, Germany
Slavko Milekic
Associate Professor
MD. Belgrade University, Yugoslavia
MSc, PhD, University of Connecticut
Barent Roth
Senior Lecturer
BSID, University of Illinois
MID, The University of the Arts
MarekWalczak
Adjunct Professor
RIBA 1 and II, Architecture Association,
London
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
75
Industrial Design
Master of Industrial Design
Year One
Credits
Fall
ID 600
ID Seminar:
Concepts and Contexts
3.0
ID 601
Graduate Design Studio
6.0
ID 620
Advanced Design Methods
3.0
GR691
University Seminar:
Structure and Metaphor
3.0
Fall Total
15.0
Spring
1D710
Advanced Project Tutorial 1
6.0
ID 627
Human Factors: Interactivity
3.0
GR692
University Seminar:
Spring Total
Art and Design in Society 3.0
Elective 3.0
15.0
First Year Total
30.0
Year Two
Fall
ID 700
ID Seminar:
Professional Development
3.0
ID 602
Advanced Design Studio
6.0
ID 625
Advanced
Computer Applications
3,0
Elective
3.0
Fall Total
15.0
Spring
ID 711
Advanced Project Tutorial II 6.0
ID 749
Master's Thesis
Documentation
6.0
Elective
3.0
Spring Total
15.0
Second Year Total
30^0
Total Credit
60,0
In addition to required courses, students take elec-
tive courses that enable them to pursue their spe-
cific interest, as well as overcome deficiencies in
their design preparation. In certain cases, particu-
larly for applicants fivm non-design undergraduate
programs, it is necessary to complete specific
courses in industrial design. These courses are
selected from appropriate undergraduate courses
and may not apply towards degree requirements.
76
The University of ttie Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Museum Studies
Polly McKenna-Cress
pmckennacress@uarts.edu
Chairperson
215-717-6328
The Museum Studies Department pro-
vides students with the skills and
knowledge necessary to promote and
enhance the relationship between museums
and the public. In all three graduate
museum programs, students take core
courses addressing the character of
museums, the nature of museum audiences,
current museum practice, and the theory
underlying museum practice.
Lecture courses, seminars, and studio
courses allow students to understand the
demands of museum practice, to understand
past and current issues in the profession, to
address the future needs of museums, to
meet and talk with professionals in the field,
and to acquire hands-on skills in the many
areas of museum practice.
Students specialize in the areas of
museum exhibition or museum education,
or pursue a more general course of study
focusing on the interface between the
museum and the public. Most museum
studies courses are open to all museum
studies majors, and some are open to stu-
dents from other departments who are
interested in museum practice and profes-
sions. A wide range of concepts,
experiences, and approaches are encoun-
tered, including hands-on visitor studies
and on-site internships and practicums;
computer skills are developed for use in
design, publication, museum record-
keeping, interactive museum media, and
museum outreach via the Web.
Museum Studies graduates find career
opportuniUes as museum educators, cre-
ators of museum exhibitions, museum
digital media specialists, program special-
ists, and in the ranks of museum
administration dealing with the public:
directorships, collections management and
display, public relations, development, and
related activifies in museums, historic sites,
zoos, aquariums, botanic gardens, and spe-
cialist consultancies.
Museum Studies Faculty
Ed Bedno
Adjunct Professor
BFA, Art Institute of Chicago
MS/GD, Institute of Design.
Illinois Institute of Technology
jane Bedno
Professor
BA. Roosevelt University
JD. College of William and Mary
Gerard Brown
Lecliirt'r
BFA. Boston University School of
Fine Arts
MFA, School of the Art Institute
of Chicago
Allegra Burnette
Senior Lecturer
BA, Dartmouth College
MFA, The University of the Arts
Eddie Chernoff
Master Lecturer
BA, Rutgers University
MEd, Temple University
Susan Clarke-Plumb
Adjunct Assistant Professor
BA, Mary Washington College,
The University of Virginia
MED, Pennsylvania State University
MED, Harvard University
PhD, Pennsylvania State University
Tom Csaszar
Senior Lecturer
BFA, University of Pennsylvania
Alice A. Dommert
Senior Lecturer
BS, Architecture, Louisiana State
University
MFA, The University of the Arts
Barry Dornfeld
Associate Professor
BA. Tufts University
MA, PhD, University of Pennsylvania
Anne El-Omami
Associate Professor
BFA, BA, University of Nebraska,
Lincoln
MA, University of Nebraska
Aaron Goldblatt
Senior Lecturer
BFA, Philadelphia College of Art
MFA, Tyler School of Art,
Temple University
jamerHunt
Assistain Professor
BA, Brown University
PhD, Rice University
Polly McKenna-Cress
Associate Professor
BFA, Rhode Island School of Design
MFA, The University of the Arts
Janet Kamien
Senior Lecturer
BFA, Boston University
MED, MFA. Lesley University
Wm. Frank Mitchell
Assistant Professor
AB, Bowdoin College
MA, Yale University
MA, University of Michigan
PhD, University of Michigan
Carol Moore
Associate Professor
BFA, MFA, Tyler School of Art,
Temple University
Danielle Rice
Master Lecturer
BA, Wellesley College
MPh, PhD, Yale University
Portia Hamilton Sperr
Adjunct Associate Professor
Diploma in Pedagogy, Assoc.
Montessori International
BA, Barnard College
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
77
Museum Communication
Master of Arts
Polly McKenna-Cress
pmckennacress@uarts.edu
Chairperson
215-717-6328
The MA in Museum Communication is a
course of study in the contemporary theory
and practice of museum work. Museum pro-
fessionals seeking a graduate degree in
museum studies for professional advance-
ment, and museum volunteers who seek
professional credentials to make the transi-
tion into professional museum work can
acquire the skills, knowledge, and practical
training in dealing with the public sector,
with responsibilities that include museum
publications, public relations, membership,
development, record-keeping, outreach activ-
ities including Internet presence, and visitor
services.
Organized within the traditional academic
semester framework, with some short, inten-
sive one- and two-week-long sessions during
the winter and summer academic breaks, and
annual international museum issues semi-
nars, the Department of Museum Studies
prepares those who seek careers as collec-
tions managers, exhibition developers,
educators, and media and public affairs spe-
cialists. International museum professionals
may further their careers through the acqui-
sition of academic credentials and through a
broader perspective and knowledge of cur-
rent museum practices acquired in courses,
seminars, special museum placements,
internships, and a thesis. Course content and
design, which bridge the academic and the
professional, recognize the growing need for
specialized museum training and preferences
in a competitive job market for those with
both graduate degrees and museum studies
training. Graduates work in museums of
anthropology, archaeology, fine art, history,
natural history, science centers, zoos, arbore-
tums, and national parks. Others find
employment in government agencies, histor-
ical societies, historic sites and houses, and
with private and coiporate collections and
foundations.
Full-time MA students undertake a three-
semester academic course of study, and a
12-week (240-hour) internship placement.
Those students studying for the MA in
Museum Communication conclude their
degree program through the submission
of a written thesis, thesis defense, and
examination.
During each 15-week semester, students
participate in lectures, seminars, workshops,
and study visits to appropriate museums,
historic sites, galleries, and government cul-
tural agencies. All courses in the department
welcome visiUng scholars and museum pro-
fessionals to give lectures and hold
discussion groups on aspects of museum
practice.
The department of Electronic Media, the
Master of Industrial Design program, and
the College of Media and Communication
contribute to the graduate student's educa-
tion through inter-departmental coursework,
workshops, seminars, and interdisciplinary
special projects.
Applicants to the Master of Arts in
Museum Communication should possess a
BFA, BA, or BS degree, demonstrated work
experience in the museum field or in related
institutions/consultancies, or discipline-
based training, and the intention of utilizing
this specialized training in a museum con-
text, and basic word processing and Internet
research skills.
Museum
Communication
Master of Arts 45 credits
Year One
Credits
Fall
MS 501
Museum Seminar:
The Museum
3.0
MS 508
The Museum Audience
3.0
MS 600
Muscology
3.0
GR691
University Seminar:
Structure and Metaphor
3.0
Elective*
3.0
Fall Total
15.0
Spring
'
MS 601
Issues in Museums Seminai
3.0
MS 740
Thesis Research
3.0
MS 749 A
Thesis Development
1.5
Elective*
3.0
Elective*
3.0
GR692
University Seminar:
Art and Design in Society
3.0
Spring Tola
16.5
First Year Total
33.0
Year Two
Summer
MS 759
Museum Internship
3.0
Summer Total
3.0
Fall
MS 602
Museum Governance: Legal Issues,
Ethics in Museums
3.0
MS 749 B
Thesis Development
1.5
Elective*
3.0
Elective*
3.0
Fall Total
10.5
Second Year Total
13.5
Total Credits
45.0
* Nine credit hours ofelectives must be in Museum
Studies.
78
Tlie University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Museum Education
Master of Arts
Anne El-Omami
aelomami@uarts.edu
Director
215-717-6051 or 717-6050
The Master of Arts in Museum Education
is a concentrated program focused on the
development and implementation of appro-
priate pedagogical practices and
critical/interpretive skills for communi-
cating to the public about culture and the
arts. Coursework comprises three distinct
areas: a broad education core addressing
theory and methods, a concentration in
museum studies and practices, and a profes-
sional core including research and an
internship with a cooperating museum.
Applicants should have had a core of at
least 40 credits in the arts, liberal arts,
and/or communications, with a minimum of
18 credits in art history (or 12 credits in art
history and six credits in anthropology or
communications). This degree is an appro-
priate option for those with a strong
commitment to providing educational pro-
gramming within a museum context or
alternative site, as well as for teachers who
wish a concentration in museum education
so they may utilize museum resources more
effectively in the classroom.
Museums and galleries worldwide are
becoming more dependent upon their audi-
ences for support. The role of museums is
changing to meet audience demands,
including expectations for more relevant
and accessible public educational program-
ming to promote cultural knowledge and
interests. This growing trend has created a
greater demand for well-trained profes-
sionals with special knowledge and
expertise in planning and implementing
museum programs. Additionally, current
educational theory and methodology
embrace the inclusion of art history, criti-
cism, and aesthetics as critical components
of the arts education curriculum, all areas
heavily dependent upon museums for exem-
plary resources and reference. The MA in
Museum Education focuses on a wide
variety of museums and institutions with
similar missions and operations, and pre-
pares educators to function within the
changing context of contemporary schools,
museums, and related institutions. The MA
in Museum Education may be completed in
two semesters and a summer or in three
semesters.
The Museum Studies core may be taken
separately or in conjunction with another
master's program at The University of the
Arts. The core includes courses from the
museum studies core and may also include
the Graduate Museum Project and
Internship with special approval. This series
of courses may be combined with the
Master of Arts in Teaching in the Visual
Arts, the Master of Arts in Art Education, or
the MFA in Museum Exhibition Planning
and Design.
Museum Education
Master of Arts 36 ere
Year One
Credits
Fall
AE606
Research in Education:
Methods and Trends
3.0
GR69I
University Seminar:
Structure and Metaphor
3.0
AE 550
Creative and Cognitive
Development
3.0
MS 510
Museum Education
Practicum
3.0
MS 508
The Museum Audience
3.0
MS 658
Museum Education
Internship
3.0
FallTotal
18.0
Spring
MS 622
Media for Museum
Communication
3.0
MS 615
Educational Programming
for Museums and
Alternative Sites
3.0
MS 648
Graduate Museum Project
3.0
MS 658
Museum Education
Internship
3.0
Choose one of the following nw:
MS 501
Museum Seminar:
The Museum
3.0
MS 600
Museology
3.0
GR692
University Seminar:
Art and Design in Society
3.0
Spring Tota
18.0
Total Credit
36.0
Additional elective courses are encouraged in
interactive media, multicultural learning arts,
design for interdisciplinary learning, history of
ideas in art and museum education, and media for
museum communication.
TTie University of tlie Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
79
Museum Exhibition
Planning and Design
Master of Fine Arts
Polly McKenna-Cress
pmckennacress @ uarts.edu
Director
215-717-6328
Recognized formally by the American
Association of Museums since 1981, the field
of exhibition planning and design has
become a demanding, fast-growing profes-
sion as museums respond to the demand for
exhibitions addressed to public needs and
interests. With the cooperation of a group of
major regional museums, following the
guidelines established by N.A.M.E. (National
Association for Museum Exhibition), The
University of the Arts offers a two-year, 60-
credit Master of Fine Arts degree that
prepares students for professional careers in
the development and design of exhibits for
museums and other interpretive centers,
focusing on methods of presentation for col-
lections, while exploring the full range of
exhibition communication and methodology.
Representatives of cooperating museums
and the University faculty offer a curriculum
that addresses the conceptualization,
research, organization, design, and produc-
tion of museum exhibits and educational
presentations, utilizing a variety of tech-
niques and media. It also explores exhibii
programming, evaluation, and management
methods applicable in a wide range of
museum situations. Visiting experts teach
many aspects of museum presentation, edu-
cation, and management, and students make
formal visits to design departments, produc-
tion shops, galleries, exhibits, and programs
in numerous museums, service providers, and
consultancies in Philadelphia, the Mid-
Atlantic Region. Washington, D.C., and New
York.
Students undertake a thesis project and a
supervised museum internship related to their
career interests during the second year of the
program. To preserve the intimate contact
with museum professionals and to guarantee
participants studio facilities, the program is
limited to nine entrants per year
Most candidates for this program will have
previously completed a baccalaureate degree
in industrial, graphic, interior, or architectural
design, and demonstrate an acceptable level
of professional accomplishment through a
portfolio or another appropriate means.
Alternatively, they may seek admission with
a baccalaureate in a discipline related to a
particular career direction, and take courses
to develop the necessary background in
design. Students from non-design, non-art
backgrounds are also encouraged to apply.
The first year provides a basic under-
standing of the exhibition process, with the
first semester focused on conceptual develop-
ment, planning, systems, and intellectual
analysis of problems, and the second on the
practical implementation of concepts and on
understanding materials and methods of exhi-
bition design and production. The second
year is dedicated to practice of skills learned
during the first year, and practical exposure
to actual exhibition development practice in
museums and museum consultancies.
Activities during the final semester are
focused primarily on thesis development and
completion.
Museum Exhibition
Planning and Design
Master of Fine Arts 60 credits
Specialized Facilities
The graduate studios in Museum
Exhibition Planning and Design feature
direct student access to a Computer-Aided
Design Center. The Computer-Aided Design
Facility and the Academic Computing labora-
tories are completely equipped computer
centers dedicated to drafting, rendering,
desktop publishing, computer-aided graphic
design, multimedia, and illustration. Students
get installation experience through the
University galleries and regional institutions.
Year One
Credits
Year Two
Credits
Fall
Summer
MS 501
Museum Seminar:
MS 759
Museum Internship*
3.0
The Museum
3,0
Summer Total
3.0
MS610A
Museum Exhibition
Fall
.
Design Studio
6.0
MS 710
Museum Exhibition
MS 620 A
Museum Graphics
1.5
Design Studio
6.0
MS 623 A
Exhibition Materials
MS 508
The Museum Audience
3.0
and Methods
1.5
Elective
3.0
MS 749 A
OR 691
Thesis Development
University Semijiar;
3.0
Fall Total
15.0
Structure and Metaphor
3.0
Spring
Fall Total
15.0
MS 502
Museum Seminar;
The Exhibition
3.0
Spring
MS 622
Media for Museum
MS 610 B
Museum Exhibition
Communication
3.0
Design Studio
6.0
MS 749 B
Thesis Development
3.0
MS 620 B
Museum Lighting
and Color
1.5
OR 791
University Seminar;
Criticism
3.0
MS 623 B
Exhibition Materials
and Methods
1.5
Elective
3.0
GR692
University Seminar;
Spring Tota
12.0
Art and Design in Soc
ety 3.0
Second Year Total
30.0
Spring Iota
15.0
— Total Credis
60.0
First Year Tc
tal
30.0
* Students with at least six months of direct exhibition
related experience in a museum, equivalent institution
or a museum consultancy may substitute one three-
hour elective for the internship requirement.
8o
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Graduate Seminars
The graduate seminar serves as a lively,
interdisciplinary forum that brings together
students engaged in discreet graduate pro-
grams to examine relationships between
contemporary visual culture and historic
ideas about art and design. Recognizing
Philadelphia as a setting and laboratory for
the development of collaborative projects and
career initiatives, students in the seminar can
discuss and apply ideas being explored in
their own fields of study in order to identify
and cultivate connections between and
beyond their respective areas of study.
In practice, graduate seminar study empha-
sizes the development of writing, research,
and critical skills to aid students in the com-
munication and documentation of their work
and ideas — both in the major, as it pertains
to their specific explorations, and in the
wider contemporary context of art and design
issues. The seminar experience offers stu-
dents the opportunity to develop presentation
skills by maximizing the use of multimedia
applications for presentations of their
research results.
Each graduate program in The College
of Art and Design offers a selection of semi-
nars designed to inform the direction of the
major curriculum. Seminar course listings.
Structure and Metaphor. Art and Society, and
Criticism are described in the course descrip-
tions, and are listed as part of each graduate
program's curriculum.
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004 8l
Undergraduate and Graduate
Course Catalog
2003 • 2004
i
The University
OF THE Arts®
College of Performing Arts Major Areas of study
Richard J. Lawn, Dean
riawn@uarts.edu
215-717-6126
Marianne Mele, Assistant to the Dean
mmele@uarts.edu
215-717-6127
The College of Performing Arts (CPA) is comprised of the Schools
of Dance. Music, and Theater Arts. Its curricula combine the per-
formance emphasis of the traditional conservatory, stressing
individualized training, practice, and discipline, with a liberal arts
education.
Founded in 1870 as the Philadelphia Musical Academy, and
merged with the Philadelphia Conservatory of Music in 1962, the
College has long been regarded as one of America's foremost profes-
sional schools of higher education. Many of its eariy graduates and
faculty were members and founders of the Philadelphia Orchestra
when it was formed in 1900.
In 1976, the institution was renamed the Philadelphia College of
the Performing Arts, thereby signaling its intention to expand its pro-
gram to include all three of the pertbrming arts disciplines-Music,
Dance, and Theater. In 1977, The Philadelphia Dance Academy
joined the College to become the School of Dance. Founded in 1947,
The Philadelphia Dance Academy was one of the foremost conserva-
tories of dance in the nation and one of the first three insfitutions in
the country to grant a degree in dance. The School of Theater was ini-
tiated in 1983.^
The College of Performing Arts thus became Pennsylvania's first
and only independent college dedicated exclusively to the performing
arts, and one of the first of its kind in the United States. Its philos-
ophy is founded on the principle that there is a common bond among
artists, whatever their discipline, and that artists must interact with
each other for their inspiration and growth. Indeed, many of the
College's students have developed interdisciplinary careers that
require familiarity with all the performing arts, as well as the visual
and media arts.
All students are assigned to a faculty advisor. Lists are posted in
each of the schools' offices during the first week of the academic
year Appointments are made at the mutual convenience of the stu-
dent and the faculty advisor
Students should feel free to see their advisor at any time con-
cerning problems they may encounter
School of Dance
Undergraduate Programs
Bachelor of Fine Arts (BFA) in Dance
Bachelor of Fine Arts (BFA) in Dance Education
Certificate in Dance (two-year program)
Dance Majors
Ballet
Jazz/Theater Dance
Modern Dance
Dance Education
School of Music
Undergraduate Programs
Bachelor of Music (BM in Jazz Studies) in Composifion ■
Bachelor of Music (BM in Jazz Studies) in Instrumental
Performance
Bachelor of Music (BM in Jazz Studies) in Vocal Performance
Diploma in Jazz Studies
Certificate in Jazz Studies (two-year program)
Graduate Programs
Master of Arts in Teaching (MAT), Music Education
Master of Music (MM), Jazz Studies
Areas of Concentration
Flute
Clarinet " ■'
Saxophone .
Woodwinds ' '
Trumpet .■
Trombone ' -
Tuba , ■ . ~
Guitar ' ' ■
Electric and/or Upright Bass
Violin ~ .
Cello
Percussion
Drums
Piano •
Voice
Composition
School of Theater Arts
Bachelor of Fine Arts (BFA) in Theater Arts
Majors
Acting
Applied Theater Arts
Musical Theater
Credit-Hour Ratio
Please refer to the course descriptions for specific information.
8H
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
CPA Minors
The College of Performing Arts offers minors that enable a stu-
dent to focus on a specific discipline through organized electives.
Students wishing to include a minor are governed by the fol-
lowing guidelines:
1. Students must meet eligibility requirements, which may
include a satisfactory grade point average, prerequisites, and depart-
mental portfolio review.
2. Intent to complete a minor is declared by filing the completed
Minor Declaration Form with the Office of the Registrar. The forms
are available in the Office of the Registrar.
3. A student may not major and minor in the same program,
except where indicated.
4. Courses applied to the minor may not also be applied towards
the major program requirements.
5. All minors require a minimum of 15 credits, with the exception
of E-Music for Music majors. Generally, no substitutions to the
minor requirements are allowed. In exceptional situations where
substitutions are granted, they must have the approval of both the
major and minor program advisors.
6. The minor advisor must approve all courses taken as part of a
minor.
7. A student pursuing a minor may be required to complete more
than the minimum number of credits required to complete the under-
graduate degree in order to also complete the minor.
E-Music Minor, Multimedia/Music Department
The minor in E-Music offers students majoring in both
Multimedia and Music an opportunity to create electronic and
experimental music, to develop skills that allow them to produce,
package and distribute music by taking advantage of digital tech-
nology, and to design electronic instrumental interfaces. The minor
prepares students for a variety of highly entrepreneurial careers
ranging from entertainment and product development to creative and
production work in the recording and musical fields. This minor is
only available to students majoring in Multimedia or Music. Please
note that this minor reqiures 17 credits for Music majors.
MU306 History of Rock &
Experimental Music
3.0 credits
MU413A Recording
2.0
MM 370 E-Music Thesis Project
3.0
For Multimedia Majors
MU 1 1 1 A/B Composition/Non-Majors
2.0
MM 440 Innovative Interfaces
3.0
MU 130 A/B Piano for Non-Majors ( 1/1 )
2.0
For Music Majors
MM 110 Visual Concepts I
3,0
MM 121 Introduction to
Interface Design
3.0
One of the following:
MM 22 1 Interactive Studio I
3.0
MM 222 Interactive Studio II
3.0
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004 85
CPA Full-
Faculty
and Part-Time
School of Dance
Kim Bears-Bailey
Assistam Professor
BFA. The University of the Arts
Ninotchl<a Bennahum
BA, Swarthmore College
PhD. New York University
Peter Bertini
Associate Professor
BS. State University of New York,
Brockport
MFA, Philadelphia College of
Performing Arts
Jennifer Binford
Assistant Professor
BS, Utah State University
MFA, The University of Utah
Wayne David
Assistant Professor
BFA. The University of the Arts
Manfred Fischbeck
Adjunct Associate Professor
BA Equivalent - Freie Universitat Berlin
Lisa Fox
Senior Lecturer
BFA. University of Colorado
Susan Glazer
Adjunct Professor
BA, American University
MA. Temple University
Theresa Greenland
Senior Lecturer
BS, West Chester University
MM. Temple University
Curt Haworth
BFA, University of California
MFA. Tisch. New York University
Nancy Heller
Professor
BA, Middlebury College
MA. PhD. Rutgers University
Nancy Kantra
BA. University of Colorado
MFA, Philadelphia College of
Performing Arts
Ronen Koresh
Adjunct Assistant Professor
Donald Lunsford
BFA, University of the Arts
Molly Misgalla
Assistant Professor
BA. Point Park College
Brie Neff
Lecturer
BFA, Temple University
R.JeannineOsayande
Adjunct Associate Professor
Andrew Pap
Associate Professor
Baccalaureat Diploma, Scoala de
Coreogrefie. Cluj. Romania
Dance Education Degree, Certificate of
Professor of Ballet, Ministry of Culture
and Education, Bucharest, Romania
LaVaughn Robinson
Adjunct Professor
Brian Sanders
BFA, The University of the Arts
Pearl Schaeffer
Adjunct Associate Professor
BS, Drexel University
MFA, Philadelphia College of
Performing Arts
Jon Sherman
Adjimct Assistant Professor
BS, Temple University
Carole Sklaroff
Adjunct Associate Professor
Suzanne Slenn
Adjunct Associate Professor
Faye Snow
Adjunct Associate Professor
BS, West Chester State College
MA, George Washington University
Eva Szabo
Adjunct Assistant Professor
Diploma, Ballet Institute, Budapest,
Hungary
EliseTropea
Adjunct Associate Professor
BS, Bennington College
MS, Hahnemann Medical College
Connie Vandarakis
Assistant Professor
BS, Northern Illinois University
Doctor of Education candidate,
Temple University
School of Music
PaulAdkins
Senior Lecturer
BS, West Virginia University
Professional Certificate.
Academy of Vocal Arts
George Akerley
Adjunct Assistant Professor
BM, Philadelphia Musical Academy
MM. Philadelphia College of
Performing Arts
Carl Allen
Senior Lecturer
BM, William Paterson University
Steve Beskrone
Senior Lecturer
John Blake
Adjunct Associate Professor
BM, West Virginia State University
Robert Brosh
Adjunct Assistant Professor
BA. Glassboro State College
MA, DA. New York University
Brian Brown
Senior Lecturer
BM. MM, Juilliard
Jimmy Bruno
Adjunct Assistant Professor
Donald Chittum
Professor
BM, MM, DM, Philadelphia
Conservatory of Music
Andrea Clearfield
Adjunct Assistant Professor
BA. Muhlenberg College
MM. Philadelphia College of
Performing Arts
DMA. Temple University
Meg Clifton
Lecturer
BM, MM, University of the Arts
86
The University of the Ans Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Norman David
Adjunct Associate Professor
BA, McGill University
MM, New England Conservatory
DMA, Temple University
Marc Dicciani
Adjunct Professor
BM. Philadelphia Musical Academy
Annette DiMedio
Professor
BA, Swarthmore College
MM, Temple University
PhD, Bryn Mawr College
Samuel Dockery
Senior Lecturer
BM, Philadelphia College of
Performing Arts
John Dulik
Lecturer
BM, Philadelphia Musical Academy
MM, DMA, Temple University
Craig Ebner
Senior Lecturer
BM, Hartt School of Music,
University of Hartford
Charles Fambrough
Senior Lecturer
Chris Farr
Adjunct Assistant Professor
BM, MAT, The University of the Arts
John Fedchock
Senior Lecturer
BME, Ohio State University
MM, Eastman School of Music
Matt Gallagher
Senior Lecturer
BS, West Chester University
MM, University of the Arts
William Garton
Senior Lecturer
BA, MA, Glassboro State College
Richard Genovese
Adjimct Assistant Professor
Certificate, Curtis Institute of Music
Thomas Giacabetti
Senior Lecturer
Don Glanden
Assistant Professor
BS, West Chester University
BM, North Texas University
MM, Rutgers University
Janice Goltz
Adjunct Assistant Professor
BM, Philadelphia Musical Academy
BME, Philadelphia College of
Performing Arts
MME, Temple University
Robert Goltz
Senior Lecturer
BS, West Chester University
MA, Beaver College
Steven Goodsell
Lecturer
BS. State University of New York.
Fredonia
Theodore Greenberg
Senior Lecturer
BM, Philadelphia College of
Performing Arts
Orlando Haddad
Senior Lecturer
BM, North Carolina School for the Arts
MS, Drexel University
Tim Hagans
Senior Lecturer
Rick Hall
Senior Lecturer
Dave Hartl
Assistant Professor
BM, West Chester State University
Richard Hotchkiss
Senior Lecturer
BM, Philadelphia Colleges of the Arts
Luke Housner
Lecturer
BM, Oberlin College Conservatory
of Music
MM, University of Illinois
Damon Ireland
BM, Hartl College of Music
Joseph Jackson
Lecturer
BA,MA, McKendre College
Jeffjarvis
Senior Lecturer
Micah Jones
Assistant Professor
BM, Temple University
MM, The University of the Arts
Patrick Jones
Associate Professor
BS, West Chester University
Diploma of Fine Arts,
University of Calgary
MA, George Mason University
PhD, Pennsylvania State University
Michael Kennedy
Senior Lecturer
BM, MM, The University of the Arts
Ronald Kerber
Associate Professor
BM. Philadelphia College of
Performing Arts
Jeffrey Kern
Assistant Professor
BS, Lebanon Valley College
MM, University of Michigan
John Knebl
Adjunct Assistant Professor
BM, BME, Philadelphia Musical
Academy
MA, Villanova University
Kevin MacConnell
Senior Lecturer
Tony Marino
Senior Lecturer
Pat Martino
Senior Lecturer
Christopher Maute
lecturer
BM, The University of the Arts
Frank Mazzeo
Adjunct Assistant Professor
BS, West Chester University
MM, Temple University
Kelly Meashey
Senior Lecturer
BME, MM Temple University
sity of the Aits Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
87
Patrick Mercuri
Adjunct Assistant Professor
BM, BME. Philadelphia Musical
Academy
MM, Temple University
Tony Miceli
Senior Lecturer
BM, The University of the Arts
Daniel Muller
BM, MAT, The University of the Arts
Joseph Nero
Adjunct Associate Professor
Diploma, Curtis Institute of Music
Theodore Pasternal(
Senior Lecturer
BM, Philadelphia Musical Academy
Music Ed. Certificate,
Chestnut Hill College
James Paxson
Adjunct Assistant Professor
Reginald PIndell
Senior Lecturer
BM, MM, Peabody Conservatory
of Music
Diploma, Curtis Institute of Music
Trudy Pitts
Adjunct Associate Professor
BM, Philadelphia Musical Academy
Michael Quaile
Senior Lecturer
BM, Philadelphia College of
Performing Arts
MM, The University of the Arts
George Rabbai
Senior Lecturer
Mathew Reese
BM, BS Penn State University
MA, George Mason University
Thomas Rudolph
Senior Lecturer
BM, Philadelphia College of
Performing Arts
MM, West Chester University
DME, Widener University
Anthony Salicondro
Senior Lecturer
BM, Philadelphia Musical Academy
Anne Sciolla
Senior Lecturer
BM, Philadelphia College of
Performing Arts
Marlon Simon
Senior Lecturer
BFA, New School for Social Research
Suzanne Snizel<
Senior Lecturer
BA, Indiana University
MM, The University of the Arts
Evan Solot
Professor
BM, BME, MM, Philadelphia Musical
Academy
Patricia Stasis
Adjunct Assistant Pjvfessor
Diploma, Curtis Institute
Diploma, Munich Conservatory of Music
Edward Stimson
Senior Lecturer
BS, West Chester University
John Swana
Senior Lecturer
Craig Thomas
Adjunct Associate Professor
BA, Rutgers University
BM, Philadelphia Musical Academy
MM, Rowan University
David Thomas
Senior Lecturer
BS, Westchester University
MM, Peabody Conservatory of Music
Gerald Veasley
Master Lecturer
Elio Vlllafranca
Senior Lecturer
MM, University of Art, Havana, Cuba
Dennis Wasko
Senior Lecturer
BM, Philadelphia College of
Performing Arts
Bill Zaccagni
Assistant Professor
School of Theater Arts
Irene Baird
Adjunct Associate Professor
BFA, Carnegie-Mellon
MFA, New York University
James Brill
Senior Lecturer
Graduate, Neighborhood Playhouse
Thea Chaloner
Senior Lecturer • ■
BA, Clark University
Jennifer Childs
Senior Lecturer
BFA, The University of the Arts
Karen Cleighton
Senior Lecturer
Charles Conwell
Professor
BS, Northwestern University
MFA, Brandeis University
Kali Lela Cotton
Senior Lecturer
Aaron Cromie
Senior Lecturer "■
BM, College of New Jersey
Eric Ebbenga
Senior Lecturer
BM, MM, Temple University
Mari Fielder
Adjunct Professor
BA, Temple University
MA, Ohio State University
PhD, University of California,
Los Angeles
Manfred Fischbeck
Adjunct Associate Professor
BA Equivalent - Freie Universitat, Berlin
Charles Gilbert
Chair Musical Theater Associate Professor
BA, University of Delaware
MFA, Carnegie-Mellon University
Mary Ellen Grant-Kennedy
Senior Lecturer
BM, Temple University
88
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Theresa Greenland
Senior Lecturer
BS, West Chester University
MM, Temple University
Neill Hartley
Adjunct Assistant Professor
BA. SUNY Oneonta
MFA, Temple University
Linda Henderson
Senior Lecturer
MM, West Chester University
BFA. Indiana University
Rex Henriques
Senior Lecturer
Johnnie Hobbs, Jr.
Clwir. Acting, Associate Professor
David Howey
Associate Professor
Nancy Kantra
Assistant Professor
BA, University of Colorado
MFA, Philadelphia College of
Performing Arts
Connie Koppe
Senior Lecturer
BS, Indiana University of Pennsylvania
MM, Temple University
Rebecca Lisal<
Senior Lecturer
BFA, University of North Carolina at
Greensboro
Ernest Losso
Assistant Professor
Carnegie-Mellon University
Troy Martin O'Shia
Lecturer
BFA, Webster University
Forrest McClendon
Adjunct Assistant Professor
BM, University of Connecticut
Drucie McDaniel
Adjunct Assistant Professor
BA, University of Maine
Tammy Meneghini
Adjunct Assistant Professor
MFA, Northern Illinois University
David Newer
Adjunct Assistant Professor
BA, University of California,
Santa Barbara
MFA. Rutgers University
Michael Pedretti
Senior Lecturer
BS, University of Wisconsin
MA, University of Kansas
Aaron Posner
Adjunct Associate Professor
BS, Northwestern University '
Peter Pryor
Senior Lecturer
BFA, The University of the Arts
Patricia Raine
Assistant Professor
BM. Arizona State University
MM, Northern Arizona University
Owen Robbins
Assistant Professor
BLArch., Virginia Polytechnic Institute
MS, University of Pennsylvania
Ed Shocl<ley
Adjunct Assistant Professor
MFA, Temple University
Leigh Smiley
Adjunct Assistant Professor
BA, Marlboro College
Rick Stoppleworth
Assistant Professor
BS, University of Wisconsin/Madison
MFA, Temple University
Denise Taylor
Senior Lecturer
Gene Terruso
Director, School of Theater Ans
Professor
AB, MA, University of Scranton
MFA, Rutgers University
Neal Tracy
Adjunct Associate Professor
BM, MM, DM, Indiana University
Joan Twiss
Adjunct Assistant Professor
MFA, Rutgers University
BSN, Ohio State University
D'ArcyWebb
Senior Lecturer
BA, Point Park College
jiri Zizi<a
Adjunct Professor
BA, Graphic Design School, Prague
MFA, MWI of Chades IV. Prasue
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
89
The School of
Dance
Susan B. Glazer
sglazer@uarts.edu
Director
Maria Urrutia
murrutia@uarts.edu
Assistant to the Director
211 South Broad Street
215-717-6577
The School of Dance is dedicated to the
training of young artists for careers as pro-
fessional performers, dance educators, and
choreographers, and provides an intensive
exploration of dance in its physical, intellec-
tual, and creative aspects. The School
provides an environment in which students
may develop an individual artistic vision
while being exposed to a variety of artistic
roles.
Facilities
The main studios of the School of Dance
are located in the Terra Building at 2 1 1
South Broad Street. These spacious, bright,
and well-lit studios are fully equipped with
bars and mirrors, huge windows, pianos,
and audio consoles. Their floors are con-
structed with four-inch, state-of-the-art
suspension for the safest and most comfort-
able dancing surface available. Lockers,
dressing rooms, showers, and lounges are
found adjacent to the studios. The
University has completely restored its his-
toric Merriam Theater, which .serves as the
institution's major performance hall for stu-
dents, as well as "home" to a number of
regional performing arts organizations,
including the Pennsylvania Ballet. The
UArts Dance Theater, a 150-seat theater, is
used for student performances. The Albert
M. Greenfield Library contains books,
journals, and videotapes devoted to dance,
which are available to students for research
and coursework.
Programs of Study
Bachelor of Fine Arts (BFA) in Dance
Bachelor of Fine Arts in Dance Education
(BFA Dance Ed)
Certificate in Dance — two-year program
Majors
Ballet
Jazz/Theater Dance
Modem Dance
Dance Education
Bachelor of Fine Arts in Dance:
Ballet, Modern, or
Jazz/Theater Dance
The Bachelor of Fine Arts (BFA) degree
in Dance is a program designed for those
students who wish to prepare for profes-
sional careers in dance performance and/or
choreography. The BFA in Dance program
is normally completed in four years of full-
time study with a total requirement of 128
credits (130 credits for Dance Education).
Bachelor of Fine Arts in
Dance Education
The Bachelor of Fine Arts (BFA) in
Dance Education is a program designed
.specifically for students whose primary
intention is to enter the profession as a
teacher of dance. Although there is currently
no Pennsylvania state certification for dance
teachers, this program includes supervised
class teaching in schools and/or private
dance studios. The BFA in Dance Education
is designed as a four-year program of full-
time study with a total requirement of 130
credits.
Certificate in Dance
The Certificate in Dance is a two-year,
55-credit program intended for those stu-
dents who wish to concentrate exclusively
on dance studies. This intensive program is
designed to develop the student's familiarity
with and proficiency in a broad spectrum of
dance styles. The Certificate in Dance is
awarded in recognition of achievement, and
does not constitute an academic degree.
Students wishing to transfer from this
program to the Bachelor's degree program
may apply to do so and will be required to
obtain the approval of both the Director of
the School of Dance and the Director of
Liberal Arts. The Certificate in Dance is
awarded only to students who are in resi-
dence and are matriculated in the Certificate
program.
The Curriculum
The curriculum in the School of Dance
has been carefully organized to allow the
students to grow to their maximum potential
as dancers. It has been developed over the
years by professionals who are experienced
with the world of dance and its demands.
Daily technique classes in ballet, modem
dance, and jazz dance are basic to all
courses of study and are the heart of the pro-
gram. One year of tap is required. Each
student must be familiar with all major
styles of dance in order to become as versa-
tile as possible. Dance electives offered
every semester include African dance,
Spanish dance, Brazilian dance. Character,
pointe, men's class, partnering, and yoga.
In addition to the rigorous stijdy of tech-
nique, the dance curriculum includes:
1 . Creative subjects such as improvisation
and composition;
2. Academic dance subjects such as dance
history, music, Labanotation, anatomy/kine-
siology, pedagogy;
3. Ensembles, repertory, and other per-
forming courses;
4. Free electives including voice, acting,
and visual arts courses.
Declaration of Major
In March of the sophomore year, the stu-
dent must take an upper-divisional exam, at
which time the student will be evaluated
with respect to his or her requested major.
The student is evaluated for future success
and. if appropriate, invited to continue the
program for the junior and senior years. The
student must complete a Declaration of
Major form, obtain approval for the major
from the School of Dance, and submit the
completed form to the Office of the
Registrar.
School of Dance Faculty
Ballet
Scott Jovovitch
Andrew Pap
Jon Sherman
Carole Sklaroff
Suzanne Slenn
Eva Szabo
90
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Jazz/Theater Dance
Peter Bertini
Ronen Koresh
Donald Lunsford
Molly Misgalla
Wayne St. David
Modern Dance
Kim Bears-Bailey
Jennifer Binford
Manfred Fischbeck
Curt Haworth
Nancy Kantra
Brian Sanders
Faye Snow
Tap Dance
La Vaughn Robinson ^
Karen Cleighton
African Dance
R. Jeanine Osayande
Brazilian Dance
Peter Bertini
Spanish Dance
Nancy Heller
Dance Studies
Ninotchka Bennahum
Peter Bertini
Annette DiMedio
Manfred Fischbeck
Susan B. Glazer
Theresa Greenland
Stephen Jay
Nancy Kantra
Pearl Schaeffer
Elise Tropea
Connie Vandarakis
Accompanists
Larissa Bell
Hans Boman
Asya Haykin
Richard lannacone
John Levis
Tom Lowery
Tim Motzer
Valentina Slutsky
Technical Director
Jay Madara
Costumer
Clyde Michael Hayes
Special Regulations/
Requirements
Dance Technique Class
Regular, consistent presence in dance
technique classes is essential to the stu-
dent's professional development. Dance
technique classes meet up to five times per
week, depending upon the course and level.
Physical Demands of the
Program
To be a dance artist, students must be
physically prepared to attend and participate
in technique classes. Strength and stamina
are key to the success of the education and
training. Dancers are expected to maintain
and support their technique through phys-
ical conditioning in and out of class. To this
end, it is expected that students attend all
classes and make up those missed due to ill-
ness or injury.
Absences
Unexcused absences must not exceed the
number of credits per semester for the par-
ticular course, i.e., in a two-credit course,
no more than two absences are permitted.
Extensive absences, whether "excused" or
"unexcused," will adversely affect the
course grade. If, after warnings, a student
persists in not attending or participating in
class, he/she will fail the course and be
placed on departmental probation.
Policy on Injury and/or Illness
If a student is injured and cannot partici-
pate in class, he/she is required to inform
the faculty member and, if possible, attend
the class. If the student is "sitting out" the
class, he/she must first get the teacher's
approval. To be counted as "present" the
student will be expected to take copious
notes of the class and/or write a research
paper that is to be given to the teacher. If the
injury is in the healing stage and the student
feels able to participate in a limited way,
he/she must again secure the approval of the
faculty before the class begins.
In case of illness, the student should tele-
phone the School of Dance to keep them
apprised of the health situation.
Injuries/Illness Of Short-Term
Duration:
If a student misses class due to illness or
injury, medical documentation is necessary
from one of the following sources: the uni-
versity nurse, the university trainer, or a
medical doctor. The School of Dance needs
to have in writing the diagnosis of the
nature of the injury /illness, specific dates of
how long the student will be unable to par-
ticipate in technique classes, what, if any,
rehabilitation is being done and, finally,
when re-evaluation will take place.
Longer-Term Injury/Illness
If a student is unable to participate in
class for two or more weeks, he/she must
make an appointment with the Director or
Assistant Director of the School of Dance to
determine the course of action. If the
injury/illness happens at the end of the
school term or well after the mid point, the
student might be permitted to earn the
Incomplete grade, rather than withdrawing
from technique courses. In this instance, the
student will be permitted to make up the
incomplete in the Summer World of Dance,
or by doing additional work the following
semester
If the injury requires a student to miss, or
sit out, in excess of four weeks, he/she will
be required to withdraw from all technique
classes. Under no circumstances may the
student confinue to remain on the sidelines
for more than four weeks and expect to
receive a grade for technique classes.
If the injury/illness requires abstaining
from rigors of the class repeatedly, it may be
necessary for the student to take a leave of
absence, or to leave the program perma-
nently. In this case, the student must present
medical documentation to be considered for
readmission.
Dress Code
The School of Dance requires the fol-
lowing attire for all technique classes:
Women-black leotards with black tights
for modem and jazz: pink or black tights for
ballet: ballet, jazz, character, and tap shoes
are required.
Men-black tights with white tee shirts or
black leotard and fights and black ballet,
jazz, and tap shoes.
Warm-ups are permitted only during the
first 10 minutes of a class and must then be
removed. Failure to adhere to the dress code
will result in the student not being able to
take class.
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
91
Extracurricular Activities
All students are expected to attend all
classes and rehearsals for which they are
registered. Outside commitments must
never interfere with school work. If a stu-
dent has an outside professional
performance, he/she must ask the Director
for special permission to be absent from
school, and the school's "Professional
Engagement Form" must be completed and
approved by the instructor and the Director
of the School of Dance two weeks prior to
the engagement.
Performance Requirements
To fulfill the curricular requirement in
performance, every sophomore, junior, and
senior dance major is required to participate
in at least one perfonnance each semester in
either faculty-directed ensembles or a senior
student's work.
Scheduled concerts include end-of-
semester performances in the Merriam
Theater, senior concerts, and freshman,
sophomore, and junior composition con-
certs in the UArts Dance Theater.
Ensemble Requirements
Sophomores are required to take a max-
imum of one ensemble per semester.
Junior Modem majors are required to
take one ensemble plus Modem Repertory.
Junior Jazz majors may take a maximum
of two ensembles per semester.
Junior Ballet majors may take Ballet
Ensemble and an optional ensemble for a
maximum of two ensembles per semester.
Seniors may take a maximum of three
ensembles per semester.
If a student wishes to drop the assigned
ensemble, he/she will not be able to register
(or take for noncredit) another ensemble,
unless there is a class schedule conflict.
All students are placed in one required
ensemble by audition. Juniors (except for
Modem majors) and seniors may add an
additional ensemble for credit.
Senior Dance Concert
One of the School's most important
requirements for graduation is the creation of
a senior dance concert, which includes
responsibility for choreography, rehearsals,
lighting, costume and sound design, and
advertising.
Preparation for the senior concert takes
place during the two-semester Dance
Production course. A faculty advisor will
assist in the choreographic and technical
production of the concert. Performance
dates are chosen in September. Concerts are
shared by several seniors.
Requirements
Students should refer to the School of
Dance Senior Dance Production Guidebook
for details.
a. Choreography — All majors must
choreograph at least one group piece. In
addition, students may choreograph either a
second group work or a solo: however, the
total must not exceed 10 minutes. All music
must be approved by the faculty advisors.
b. Perfonnance — All students must per-
form in at least one work.
c. Technical Assistance — Each student
must fulfdl a crew requirement in another
student's performance either as stage man-
ager: lighting, sound, or video technician: or
backstage assistant.
Responsibilities
The University provides the theater, a
technical director, and the basic technical
facilities. Any additional support, special
lighting, or sound needs must be provided
by the student. All programs, flyers, and
promotional materials can be duplicated by
the dance office if presented well in advance
of the production in a finished state.
Evaluation
Dance smdents view their senior concert as
the culmination of their four years at the
University of the Arts and an extremely
important aspect of their college experience.
The faculty, too, judge this performance as a
serious demonstration of the student's ability
as a dance artist. All senior dance students
must present their finished choreography on a
date scheduled by the School to a jury con-
sisting of diree faculty members and the
Director of the School of Dance. Evaluations
of the content of the performance are offered
by at least three faculty members after the
performance.
The production aspect of the concert is
graded by the faculty in charge of the
course. The final grade thus reflects both the
process and the choreographic end result. \
Student Evaluations I
Juried examinations in each technique
take place at the end of each semester. In !
addition, individual conferences are sched-
uled in December and May. At this time, the
faculty and student explore the progress
made in the program and review the stu-
dent's potential for future success.
The School of Dance recognizes that it is
possible for a student to earn a passing
grade in a course, yet not truly be able to
perform on a professional level in the art
form. In this instance, the faculty and j
Director will advise the student of this lack |
of promise for a future career and make sug-
gestions for alternative career options.
Academic Progress
Students will receive Academic Censure, i
as determined by the Academic Review
Committee, for the following reasons:
1. Semester GPA below li). ,,
2. Failure to meet the stipulation for
removal of Academic Censure by the
end of the specified period will result
in dismissal.
Please refer to the section in the front of
this catalog on Academic Review. j
Professional Standards I
and Befiavior '
Students are expected to maintain high
standards of professionalism in studio,
classroom, rehearsal, and performance com-
mitments. Failure to follow directions, and
absence from or lateness to rehearsals, per-
formances, and related activities may result
in Academic Censure including lowering of
grade or course failure.
92
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Dance Core Curriculum
The Core Curriculum is common to all
Bachelor of Fine Arts programs in the
School of Dance for the first two years.
These required courses develop a solid
foundation from which students pursue their
Ballet Major
127 credits
The final two years of the Ballet inajor emphasize
advanced technique in Ballet, including Pointe or
Men's Ballet class. In addition. Ballet majors con-
tinue non-major studies in either Modem or Jazz
Dance.
speciric ar
eas or mterest.
JuniorYear
Credits
Fall
DA 301 A
Ballet V
Freshman
Year Credits
Sophomore Year
4.0
Fall
DA 100
Rhythm for Dancers
1.0
Fall
DA 201 A
Ballet III
2.0
DA .308 A
DA 307 A
Dance Pedagogy 1
Ballet Repertory I
2.0
1.0
DA 101 A
Ballet 1
2.0
DA 203 A
Modem Dance III
2.0
DA 309 A
Partnering I
1.0
DA 103 A
Modem Dance I
2.0
DA213A
Jazz Dance ID
1.0
DA 326 A
Modem Dance
DA 113 A
Jazz Dance I
1.0
DA 205 A
Notation I
2.0
for Non-Majors V
1.0
DA 123 A
Tap I
1.0
DA211A*>
Dance History I
3.0
DA .321 A
Pointe I or
1.0
DA 116 A
Fundamentals of Dance 1
1.0
DA 216
Music for Dancers
1.0
DA 327 A
Men's Class I
DA 190
Language of Music
1.0
DA77X
Dance Ensemble
1.0
DA 77X
Dance Ensemble
1.0
Elective
1.0
HU281*
Dynamic Anatomy
3.0
Electives
3.0
HUllOA
First Year Writing I
3.0
Electives
2.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
HU103A
Intro, to Modemism I
3.0
Fall Total
17.0
Fall Total
17.0
Fall Total
Spring
16.0
Spring
DA 201 B
Ballet IV
2.0
Spring
DA 301 B
Ballet VI
4.0
DA 101 B
Ballet II
2.0
DA 203 B
Modem Dance IV
2.0
DA 308 B
Dance Pedagogy II
2.0
DA 103 B
Modem Dance II
2.0
DA 213 B
Jazz Dance IV
1.0
DA 307 B
Ballet Repertory II
1.0
HU103B
Intro, to Modemism I
3.0
DA 21 IB*'
Dance History II
3.0
DA 309 B
Partnering II
1.0
DA 113 B
Jazz Dance II
1.0
DA 217
Dance Composition I
1.0
DA 319
Theater Functions
1.0
DA 123 B
Tap II
1.0
DA77X
Dance Ensemble
1.0
DA 324
Character Dance
1.0
DA 109
Improvisation I
1.0
Electives
2.0
DA 326 B
Modem Dance
DA116B
Fundamentals of Dance II
1.0
HU X.X.X
Liberal Arts
3.0
for Non-Majors VI
1.0
DA 117**
Survey of Music
3.0
Spring Tota
15.0
DA 321 B
Pointe II or
1.0
HUllOB
Elective
First Year Writing II
1.0
3.0
18.0
Sophomore
Year Total:
32.0
DA 327 B
DA77X
Men's Class LI
Dance Ensemble
Elective
I.O
Spring Tota
1.0
Freshman Year Total;
34.0
* May be taken either term, and fulfills
the Liberal
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
Arts science
requirement.
iberalArts discipline histo
Spring Tota
Junior Year
17.0
** Fulfills L
ment.
ry require-
Total:
.M.O
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
93
tazz/Theater
)ance Major 128 credits
The Jazz/Theater Dance major emphasizes acting,
music, and voice in addition to the technical study
of jazz dance, and prepares students for dance
careers related to theatrical performance.
Senior Year
Fall
DA 401 A Ballet Major VII
DA 4 1 9 A Dance Production 1
DA 426 A Modem Dance
for Non-Maiors VII
4.0
2.0
1.0
Junior Year Credits
Senior Year
Fall
DA311A
DA 308 A
DA317A
JazzV
Dance Pedagogy I
Dance Composition 11
4.0
2.0
2.0
Fall
DA411A
DA 419 A
DA 425 A
Jazz VII
Dance Production I
Ballet for Non-Majors VII
4.0
2.0
1.0
DA77X
Dance Ensemble
Elective
1.0
1.0
DA 323 A
DA 325 A
Tap III
Ballet for Non-Majors VI
1.0
1.0
DA77X
Dance Ensemble
Elective
1.0
1.0
HUXXX
Fall Total
Liberal Arts
6.0
15.0
Choose one of the following rivo:
DA 345 A Voice I or
THIOOA Acting I
1.0
HUXXX
Fall Total
Spring
DA 41 IB
DA 419 B
DA 425 B
DA77X
Liberal Arts
6.0
15.0
Spring
DA 401 B
DA 419 B
DA 426 B
Ballet Major Vin
Dance Production II
Modem Dance
for Non-Majors VIII
4.0
2.0
1.0
DA77X
HUXXX
Fall Total
Dance Ensemble
Electives
Liberal Arts
1.0
2.0
3.0
17.0
Jazz VIII
Dance Production II
Ballet for Non-Majors VIII
Dance Ensemble
4.0
2.0
1.0
1.0
DA77X
Dance Ensembles
Electives
1.0
2.0
Spring
DA 311 B
Jazz VI
4.0
HUXXX
Electives
Liberal Arts
2.0
3.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
DA 308 B
Dance Pedagogy I
2.0
Spring Tota
13.0
Spring Totai
Total:
13.0
28.0
DA 3 1 7 B Dance Composition III
DA 3 1 9 Theater Functions
DA 323 B Tap IV
DA 325 B Ballet for Non-Majors VI
Choose one of the following two:
DA 345 B Voice II or
THIOOB Acting II
2.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Senior Year Total:
28.0
Senior Year
Note: DA 326 and DA 426 may substitute
DA 325 and DA 425.
Note: DA 32S and DA 428 may substitute for
DA 326 and DA 426.
for
DA77X
HUXXX
Spring Tota
Dance Ensemble
Elective
Liberal Arts
1.0
1.0
3.0
17.0
-
Junior Year Total:
34.0
94
The University of ttie Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Modern Dance Major
Dance Education Major
Certificate in Dance
128 credits
130 credits
55 credits
Modem Dai
nee majors further develop technique,
ind composition in the area of Modem
Students choosing to pursue the Bachelor of Fine
Arts in Dance Education continue dance technique
repertoire, a
First Year
Credits
Dance. In addition. Modem Dance Majors also
studies in one major area and one non
-major area of
Fall
pursue non-
major studies in either Ballet
or Jazz
concentration. The culmination of the
program is
DA 100
Rhvthm for Dancers
1,0
Dance.
an internship as a student teacher.
DA 101 A
DA 103 A
DA 190
DA 113 A
DAI16A
DA 123 A
Ballet I
Modem Dance I
Language of Music
Jazz Dance I
Fundamentals of Dane
Tapl
2.0
Junior Year Credits
Junior Year
Credits
2.0
1.0
1.0
:el I.O
1.0
Fall
DA 303 A
DA 305 A
Modem Dance V
Modem Repertory I
4.0
1.0
Fall
DA3XXA
DA3XXA
Major Technique
Non-Major Dance
4.0
1.0
DA 308 A
Dance Pedagogy I
2.0
DA 308 A
Dance Pedagogy I
2.0
30
DA 317 A
DA 322 A
Dance Composition II
Improvisation II
2.0
1.0
DA317A
DA77X
Dance Composition U
Dance Ensemble
2.0
1.0
Fall Total
12.0
DA 325 A
Ballet for Non-Majors V
1.0
Elective
1.0
Spring
DA77X
Dance Ensemble
1.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
6.0
DA 101 B
Ballet n
2.0
HUXXX
Elective
Liberal Arts
1.0
3.0
Fall Total
Spring
DA 3XX B
DA 3XX B
17.0
DA 103 B
DA 109
Modem Dance II
Improvisation I
2.0
1.0
Fall Total
Spring
16.0
Major Technique
Non-Major Dance
4.0
1.0
DA113B
DA116B
DA 117
Jazz Dance II 1.0
Fundamentals of Dance II 1.0
Survey of Music 3.0
DA 303 B
DA 305 B
DA 308 B
DA 317 B
DA 319
Modem Dance VI
Modem Repertory II
Dance Pedagogy II
Dance Composition III
Theater Functions
4.0
1.0
2.0
2.0
1.0
DA 308 B
DA 317 B
DA 319
DA77X
Dance Pedagogy D
Dance Composition III
Theater Functions
Dance Ensemble
Electives
2.0
2.0
1.0
1.0
3.0
DA 123 B
DA 319
Spring Total
Tap II
Theater Functions
Elective
1.0
1.0
1.0
13.0
DA 322 B
DA32B
DA77X
Improvisation III
Ballet for Non-Majors VI
Dance Ensemble
Elective
Liberal Arts
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
3.0
17.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
First Year Total:
25.0
Spring Total
Junior Year Total:
17.0
34.0
Second Year
Fall
DA 201 A Ballet III
DA 203 A Modem Dance III
HUXXX
Senior Year
2,0
2.0
Spring Total
Fall
DA4XXA
DA4XX
DA 408 A
DA419A
Junior Year Total:
33.0
Major Technique
Non-Major Dance
Dance Symposium I
Dance Production I
Elective
4.0
1.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
DA 211 A
DA 213 A
DA 216
DA 308 A
DA77X
Dance History I
Jazz Dance III
Music for Dancers
Dance Pedagogy I
Dance Ensemble
3.0
1.0
Senior Year
1.0
2.0
1.0
30
Fall
DA 403 A
Modem Dance VII
4.0
DA 419 A
DA 425 A
Dance Production I
Ballet for Non-Majors VII
2.0
1.0
HU XXX
Fall Total
Liberal Arts
6.0
17.0
Fall Total
15.0
DA77X
Dance Ensemble
1.0
.
Spring
HUXXX
Fall Total
Spring
DA 403 B
DA 419 B
DA 425 B
Electives
Liberal Arts
Modem Dance VIII
Dance Production II
Ballet for Non-Majors VlII
Dance Ensemble
Electives
2.0
6.0
16.0
4.0
2.0
1.0
1.0
2.0
Spring
DA 408 B Dance Symposium II
DA 410 Student Teaching
DA 419 B Dance Production II
Electives
Spring Total
Senior Year Total:
3.0
7.0
2.0
1.0
13.0
30.0
DA 201 B
DA 203 B
DA 21 IB
DA 213 B
DA 308 B
DA77X
DA 217
Spring Total
Ballet IV
Modem Dance IV
Dance History II
Jazz Dance IV
Dance Pedagogy II
Dance Ensemble
Dance Composition I
Electives
2.0
2.0
3.0
1,0
2.0
1.0
1.0
3.0
DA77X
15.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
13.0
Second Year Total:
30.0
Spring Total
Senior Year Total:
29.0
Note: DA 328 and DA 428 max substitute for
DA 325 and DA 425.
The University of Uie Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
95
The School of
Music
Marc Dicciani
mdicciani@uarts.edu
Director
250 South Broad Street
215-717-6342
Mission Statement
The mission of the School of Music at
The University of the Arts is to train and
educate creative musical artists. We affirm
the central role of jazz in nurturing the
musician's creative impulse. Improvisation,
experimentation, and innovation are
intrinsic to our goals and methodologies.
The School of Music is dedicated to the
preparation and training of musicians for a
career in music performance, composition,
and music education. The student's growth
as a musician is the primary goal of
the program.
The music program is distinguished by its
emphasis on American music idioms, such
as jazz and contemporary music, and
includes study in European and worid tradi-
tions. The School's mission of training
professional musicians and educators of the
highest caliber is maintained through a con-
servatory atmosphere, which stresses
individualized training, and a comprehen-
sive curriculum that includes private lessons
with master faculty, and an abundance and
diversity of ensembles. Coursework for
instrumental, vocal, and composition majors
includes jazz improvisation, jazz theory and
ear training, arranging, orchestration, basic
piano and jazz piano, music and computer
technology, MIDI, recording engineering,
music business, music histories (classical,
jazz, American, rock), and worid music.
Performance opportunities play an impor-
tant part in the student's education by
sharpening technical and improvisation
skills, and increasing the student's command
of repertoire and styles. The School's
numerous performance ensembles represent
a wide range of styles and categories of jazz
and American music. Students are involved
in a rigorous schedule of performances, with
over 150 concerts and recitals presented
each year.
This contemporary curriculum is organ-
ized in three degree programs: the Bachelor
of Music in Jazz Studies, which prepares
students for careers as music professionals
in vocal or instrumental performance, or
composition; the Master of Arts in Teaching
in Music Education, which prepares stu-
dents for certification as music teachers for
kindergarten through 12th grade: and the
Master of Music in Jazz Studies, which is a
finishing program for highly advanced stu-
dents preparing for careers as performers or
college-level instructors. A unique aspect of
the undergraduate program allows students
to select a special Music Education or Jazz
Master's track that may enable them to earn
both a bachelor's and master's degree in
five years.
The School of Music faculty is made up
of experienced and practicing professionals,
many of whom have attained international
stature as performing and recording artists.
This professional faculty is supplemented
by a long list of guest artists and a regular
series of workshops, master classes, and
performances with greats that has included
Wynton Marsalis, Randy and Michael
Brecker, Arturo Sandoval, Dave Weckl,
Joshua Redman. Jack DeJohnette, Terence
Blanchard, Danilo Perez. Bill Stewart, Peter
Nero, Ernie Watts, Mike Stem, Chris Potter,
Adam Nussbaum, Dave Liebman. Mike
Mainieri, Gonzalo Rubalcaba, Dennis
Rowland, Gregg Field, Grover Washington,
Jr, Max Roach, Eddie Gomez. Phil Woods.
Yo-Yo Ma, Ray Brown, Scott Henderson,
John Fedchock, Pat Martino, Phil Ramone.
Bill Watrous. Bob Mintzer, Billy Joel, Peter
Erskine, Jon Faddis, James Moody, Marvin
"Smitty" Smith, Dave Samuels, Rob
McConnell, Dennis Chambers, McCoy
Tyner, Patti Austin, Kurt Elling, Nestor
Torres. The Yellowjackets, and Joey
DeFrancesco.
Founded in 1870 as the Philadelphia
Musical Academy, which later merged with
the Philadelphia Conservatory of Music, the
School counts among its alumni some of the
nation's most accomplished musicians,
including bassist Stanley Clarke, pianists
Kenny Barron, Andre Watts, and Sumi
Tonooka, vocalists Florence Quivar and
Osceola Davis, drummer Gerry Brown, sax-
ophonist Lew Tabackin, trombonist
Robin Eubanks, composer Vincent
Persichetti. and TV/film composers John
Davis and Edd Kalehoff.
Facilities
The School of Music is located in the
Merriam Theater building at 250 South
Broad Street. Facilities include fully
equipped music studios, practice rooms, a
class piano laboratory, and classrooms. The
school's MARS (MIDI and Recording
Studios) is a modem recording and music
technology facility, with a complete 32-
input recording studio, MIDI and computer
labs, computer and synthesizer workstation
labs, and an audio-for-video dubbing and
editing lab. Most practice rooms are
equipped with grand pianos. A suite of fully
equipped percussion and dmmset studios is
available for student practice.
The University's historic Merriam
Theater and the Arts Bank are used for stu-
dent and faculty performances. The music
library, located in the Merriam building,
contains books, manuscripts, journals,
scores, records, tapes, and compact discs, as
well as listening and viewing facilities, a
music education information center, and
online access to the Intemet for students.
Performance
Opportunities/Ensembles
Afro-Cuban Ensemble
Big Band
"Blue Note" Ensemble
Brass Ensemble
Brazilian Jazz Ensemble
Brazilian Percussion Ensemble
"Brecker Brothers" Ensemble
Chamber Singers . ■ .
"Charles Mingus" Ensemble
Choms
Dmmset Ensemble
Fusion Ensemble
"GRP" Ensemble
Handbell Choir
"Horace Silver" Ensemble
Inter-arts Ensemble
Jazz Guitar Ensemble
"Jazz Messengers" Ensemble
Jazz Lab Band
Jazz Singers Ensemble
Latin Jazz Ensemble
"Maynard Ferguson" Ensemble
"Miles Davis" Ensemble
Musical Theater Ensemble
New Music Ensemble
Percussion Ensemble
Saxophone Ensemble
Trombone Ensemble
Vocal Jazz Ensemble
Worid Music Ensemble
"Yellowjackets" Ensemble
Faculty Recitals
Guest Artist Concerts
Opera Scenes
Small Jazz Ensemble Concerts
Student Recitals
96
The University of (he Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Programs of Study
Major Areas of Concentration
Flute
Clarinet
Saxophone
Woodwind Doubling
Trumpet
Trombone
Tuba
Guitar
Bass (Electric and/or Upright)
Percussion
Drums
Piano
Violin
Composition
Voice
Cello
Undergraduate
Programs
Bachelor of Music in Jazz
Studies in Instrumental
Performance
The Jazz Studies instrumental curriculum
provides a direct and pragmatic education
for students interested in establishing a
career as a performer or arranger in jazz
and/or contemporary music. Students
receive weekly, one-hour private lessons in
their major area with renowned artist
teachers. Pertormance opportunities are
plentiful in the school's award-winning jazz
ensembles. Special courses include Jazz
Improvisation, Jazz Theory, Jazz Ear-
Training, Basic Piano, Jazz Piano, Jazz
Arranging, History of Jazz. The Business of
Music, MIDI Synthesis, Music Technology,
Recording Engineering, Transcription and
Analysis, Orchestration, Worid Music, 20th
Century Music, Advanced Rhythmic
Theory, and Advanced Improvisation.
Woodwind majors may elect to enroll in a
woodwind specialist program that includes
the study of various woodwind instruments.
Bachelor of Music in Jazz
Studies in Vocal Performance
The Vocal Jazz Studies program in the
School of Music is a unique curriculum that
provides strong training in traditional vocal
technique, and combines skills and knowl-
edge in a range of vocal styles and literature
including jazz/contemporary, and classical
and musical theater. Students receive private
instruction in voice, and take a core of
courses in jazz ear training, jazz theory, jazz
history, music skills, sight singing, styles
and diction, theory, basic piano, jazz piano,
advanced piano, music technology, and
careers in music. Additionally, Vocal majors
select classes and ensembles that most accu-
rately reflect performance and study
interests, including jazz vocal ensembles,
chorus, and chamber singers; and classroom
activities such as American, Western, and
Musical Theater music history, vocal work-
shops, and an ongoing series of master
classes.
Bachelor of Music in Jazz
Studies in Composition
Students enrolled as majors in
Composition take private lessons with our
faculty who work professionally in contem-
porary classical, jazz, and commercial
(radio, TV, film, industrial) and pop idioms.
Monthly workshops featuring guest com-
posers representing a variety of musical
genres present students with an inside look
at their creative processes and techniques.
Additional courses include Jazz Ear
Training, Jazz Theory, MIDI and Music
Technology, Arranging, Orchestration,
Music History, Business of Music, and
ensembles. Student compositions are read
or pert'ormed by our ensembles, and fre-
quent performances of students" music
highlight the school's concert schedule.
Composition students can also elect an
option to take additional study on an instru-
ment or voice. The University's creative
environment encourages collaborations with
film, animation, dance, theater, and multi-
media students.
Diploma Program
This four-year program is designed pri-
marily for students who wish to take the
entire musical portion of the undergraduate
curriculum without liberal arts courses.
Students wishing to transfer from this pro-
gram to the bachelor's degree program may
apply to do so in any year of their matricula-
tion and will be required to obtain the
approval of both the Director of the School
of Music and the Director of Liberal Arts.
The Diploma program is ideal for students
who have already earned a degree in a field
other than music, but who want the benefit
of a complete undergraduate training and
education in music.
Certificate in Music
The two-year Certificate in Music pro-
gram consists of the musical studies
normally taken during the first two years of
the Bachelor of Music program. No liberal
arts courses are required.
The Certificate in Music is awarded only
to students who are in residence and are
matriculated in the certificate program.
MATPREP
Master of Arts in Teaching -
Corequisite Program
MATPREP is a 17-credit elective course
of study designed to satisfy corequisite
requirements for entrance into the Master of
Arts in Teaching in Music Education pro-
gram. Open to all undergraduate music
majors, classes include an Introduction to
Music Education, Basic Conducting, Lab
Teaching, Psychology of Music Teaching,
and Orchestration. Completion of the MAT-
PREP program with an average of 3.0 or
higher in these courses and an overall cumu-
lative GPA of 3.0 or higher satisfies most
MAT entrance requirements.
Graduate Programs
Master of Arts in Teaching in
Music Education (MAT)
The Master of Arts in Teaching in Music
Education is a 36-credit program designed
for students who have completed bachelor's
degrees in applied music, music
theory/composition, music history /litera-
ture, or other non-education, music-related
curricula. The MAT can be completed in
one academic year provided that corequisite
requirements have been met and placement
testing does not indicate the need for sup-
plementary studies. Undergraduate students
in music at the University may take advan-
tage of the preparatory program known as
MATPREP, a 1 7-credit course of elective
studies that satisfies all corequisites. The
MAT in Music Education leads to teaching
certification in the Commonwealth of
Pennsylvania.
Master of Music in
Jazz Studies
The Master of Music in Jazz Studies is a
32-credit program designed for students
who have completed a bachelor's degree in
jazz performance or other applied music
with significant experience in jazz/contem-
porary music studies. The MM can be
completed in a one-year, two-semester
schedule, providing that all prerequisite
skills are satisfied prior to beginning the
program. The entrance requirements include
advanced technical and stylistic facility on
the major instrument or voice, and skills in
The University of tlie Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
97
improvisation, jazz theory and ear training,
and jazz history. The MM program is
intended to dramatically increase the stu-
dent's performance abilities, as well as
provide a diversity of other professional-
level competencies, preparing the student
for a career as a music professional or col-
lege-level teacher. .
School of Music Faculty
Applied and Ensemble Studies
Composition
George Akerley
Andrea Clearfield
Don Glanden
Rick Hall . '
Evan Solot, Chair
David Thomas
Voice
Paul Adkins "
Meg Clifton
Jeffrey Kern, Chair
Kelly Meashey
Reginald Pindell
Patricia Raine
Anne Sciolla
Patricia Stasis
Strings
John Blake
Richard Hotchkiss
Saxophone
Chris Farr
Ronald Kerber, Chair
Frank Mazzeo
Daniel Muller
Anthony Salicondro
Bill Zaccagni
Trumpet
Matt Gallagher
Tim Hagans
JeffJarvis < . ,-
George Rabbai
JohnSwana
Dennis Wasko, Chair
Trombone
John Fedchock
Richard Genovese
Clint Sharman
Keyboards
Annette DiMedio
Samuel Dockery
Don Glanden, Chair
Dave Hartl
Trudy Pitts
Elio Villafranca
Guitar
Jimmy Bruno, Co-Chair
Craig Ebner
Thomas Giacabetti, Co-Chair
Michael Kennedy
Pat Martino
Patrick Mercuri
Michael Quaile
Upright Jazz Bass/Electric
Bass
Steve Beskrone
Charles Fambrough
Kevin MacConnell
Tony Marino
Craig Thomas, Chair
Gerald Veasley
Percussion/Drums
Carl Allen
Robert Brosh
Marc Dicciani
Orlando Haddad
Tony Miceli
Joseph Nero, Chair
James Paxson
Marlon Simon
Vocal Ensembles and
Conducting
Chorus and Chamber Singers
Meg Clifton
Jeffrey Kern • ' •'
Large Jazz Ensembles
Frank Mazzeo
Evan Solot
Bill Zaccagni
Small Jazz Ensembles
All Jazz faculty
Music Studies
Theory
Donald Chittum. Chair
Don Glanden
Dave Hartl
Stephen Jay
Micah Jones
Evan Solot
Craig Thomas
David Thomas
Bill Zaccagni
98
The University of the Ans Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Computer and Electronic Music
George Akerley
Steve Goodsell
Dave Hartl
Damon Ireland
Micah Jones
Thomas Rudolph
Conducting
Patrick Jones
Jeffrey Kern
Theodore Pasternak
Musicianship
Chris Farr
Don Glanden
Stephen Jay
Micah Jones
Ronald Kerber
Jeffrey Kern
Evan Solot
Music History and Literature
Robert Brosh
Donald Chittum
Annette DiMedio
Bill Zaccagni
Recording
Steven Goodsell
Theodore Greenberg
Music Business
Marc Dicciani
Latin-American Music
Orlando Haddad
Marlon Simon
Elio Villafranca
Arranging/Orchestration
Norman David
Bill Zaccagni
Class Piano
Annette DiMedio
Jeffrey Kern
David Thomas
Music Librarian
Mark Germer
World Music
Robert Brosh
Donald Chittum
Jazz Improvisation
Jimmy Bruno
Chris Farr
Don Glanden
Ronald Kerber
Pat Martino
Tony Miceli
Michael Quaile
John Swana
Craig Thomas
Music Education -
Undergraduate and Graduate
Studies
Marc Dicciani
Annette DiMedio
William Garton
Janice Goltz
Robert Goltz
Patrick Jones. Chair
Jeffrey Kern
John Knebl
Theodore Pasternak
Thomas Rudolph
Anthony Salicondro
Dennis Wasko
Special Regulations/
Requirements
Attendance
The number of hours of "Unexcused
Absences" permitted per semester in the
School of Music may not exceed the
number of credits per course, i.e., in a three-
credit course, no more than three hours of
unexcused absences are permitted; in a two-
credit course, no more that two hours of
unexcused absences are permitted, etc.
Attendance at Lessons
Students must attend all private lessons as
scheduled except in the case of illness or
emergency. It is the student's responsibility
to notify the teacher if he/she is unable to
keep the appointment time. Failure to give
at least 24 hours prior notice may result in
forfeiture of the lesson. A maximum of
three lessons per semester will be made up
in the case of excused absences.
Lessons missed because of unexcused
absences will not be made up.
Lessons missed due to the teacher's
absence will be rescheduled and made up by
the teacher, or his/her designee.
Unless circumstances render it impos-
sible, "make-up" lessons for the Fail
semester are to be completed prior to the
Spring semester: "make-up" lessons for the
Spring must be completed by June 15.
Normally, students are entitled to 28 one-
hour lessons during the academic year ( 14
per semester).
Change of Major Teacher
Students who wish to petition for a
change of major teacher must:
1 . Secure a "Request for Change of Major
Teacher" form from the Director of the
School of Music.
2. State reasons for requesting a change
of teacher.
3. Obtain the signed approval of the
present and the requested teacher.
4. Obtain the signed approval of the
department chair.
5. Obtain the signed approval of the
Director of the School of Music.
Such changes are not usually effected in
mid-semester If the change is approved
during the semester, in addition to the
process stated above, the student must also
complete a Drop/Add form to correct the
current major teacher designation. The
Drop/Add form must be signed by the
Director of the School of Music and sub-
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
99
mitted by the student to the Office of the
Registrar.
Faculty Advisors
All students are assigned to a faculty
advisor. Lists are posted in the Merriam
Lobby during the first week of the academic
year. Students should feel free to see their
advisor at any time concerning problems
that they may encounter.
Appointments can be made at the mutual
convenience of the student and the faculty
advisor.
Jury Examinations
All first, second, and third-year music
majors must take a jury examinafion in their
applied area upon the completion of the
second, fourth, and sixth semesters of applied
study. This usually occurs in May during the
week immediately following classroom
examinations. However, students who began
their matriculation in midyear, transferred
from another institution, or have failed their
jury in a prior year may be scheduled to take
the examination in December.
Students are evaluated in comparison to
the Minimum Applied Jury Requirements in
their major. A list of these requirements is
given to each student by his/her major
teacher at the beginning of each year. The
jury consists of at least two faculty members
in addition to the major teacher (who may
be present but may not grade). The jury
examination is graded "Pass/Fail." but also
includes areas of optional letter grading
evaluation.
Failure in any single "Pass/Fail" aspect of
the jury examination constitutes an "F'
(Failure) in the entire jury examination. A
student who fails the jury fails the entire
semester in the applied major; the examina-
tion may not be retaken. A grade of "F" will
appear on the student's transcript for both the
major lessons and the jury exam, and the stu-
dent will receive no credit for the semester's
work in major lessons. The student must
repeat the failed semester of applied study
and retake the jury examination at the com-
pletion of the next semester. A student who
fails the same semester jury examination
more than once, or who fails a total of more
than one jury examination during his/her
matriculation at the University, will be rec-
ommended for dismissal.
The requirements that are tested in the
jury examination are those that have been
established, by a departmental faculty com-
mittee, to be the minimum set of skills and
knowledge necessary for successful com-
pletion of applied study. Requirements are
established for each year of study and are
considered cumulative: e.g., a jury examina-
tion of a second-year student may include
requirements from the first year.
It is possible for a student to pass the jury
examination and yet receive a failing grade
in the major, due to the different grading
and evaluation criteria for each. However, a
student who fails the jury will receive a
failure in the major.
Jury Recital Requirements
Regulations regarding jury examinations
and Senior Recitals are available in the
office of the School of Music.
Academic Progress
Students will receive Academic Censure,
as determined by the Academic Review
Committee, for the following reasons:
1. Semester GPA below 2.0.
2. Grade below "B-" (2.67) in the fol-
lowing major courses: Major Lessons
(MU 192-692 A/B)
3. Failure to meet the stipulation for
removal of Academic Censure by the
end of the specified period will result
in dismissal.
"First Wednesday"
The first Wednesday of each month is
devoted to faculty and guest recitals, lec-
tures, master classes, and workshops, as
well as student performances.
Music majors should not schedule other
commitments during the time designated as
First Wednesday. In addition, all music stu-
dents are encouraged to attend student and
professional performances on a regular basis.
Professional Standards
and Behavior
Students are required to maintain high
standards of professionalism in studio,
classroom, rehearsal, and performance com-
mitments. Failure to follow directions, and
absence from or lateness to rehearsals, per-
fonnances, and related activities may result
in Academic Censure, including lowering of
grades or course failure.
Applied Workshops
Workshops in each applied major/depart-
ment are scheduled at least four times each
semester. Faculty and guests teach an array
of topics that are supplemental and sup-
portive to the major lesson. Attendance and
participation are required as part of the
grade in the major.
Graduation Requirements
In addition to the general CPA require-
ments for graduation, the following must be
fulfilled:
Undergraduate Requirements
1 . Performance majors must present a sat-
isfactory graduation recital before the public
("satisfactory" performance to be determined
by majority vote of a faculty jury).
2. Composition majors must submit a sat-
isfactory substantial work in the senior year,
to be publicly performed, adjudicated by the
Composition faculty.
3. The recital must include musical
selections as stipulated by the faculty, and
must conform to School of Music recital
requirements.
Exit Requirements for the
MAT in Music Education
Successful completion of all course and
related requirements shall lead to the granting
of the Master of Arts in Teaching with a
major in Music Education, provided that an
overall GPA of 3.0 or higher is maintained.
However, approval of the MAT in Music
Education Committee is required for recom-
mendation for teacher certification. It should
be noted also that the initial Instructional I
Certificate cannot be issued by the
Commonwealth of Pennsylvania Department
of Education unless PDE testing requirements
have been met.
Exit Requirements for the
Master of Music in Jazz Studies
All MM students must complete a satis-
factory graduate project and a graduate
recital in order to meet the degree require-
ments for completion of the Master of
Music.
The recital must include musical selec-
tions as stipulated by the major teacher and
department, and must conform to the guide-
lines as stated in the school policy
governing recitals.
All MM candidates are required to main-
tain a cumulative GPA of at least a 3.0.
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Bachelor of Music in Jazz
Studies-Instrumental
Performance 126 credits
Freshman
Credits
Junior
Credits
Fait
Fall
MU192A
Applied Major Instruction
3.0
MU392A
Applied Major Instruction
3.0
MU107A
Music Theory 1
3.0
MU7XX
Ensemble
1.0
MU103A
Musicianship 1
3.0
MU310
Transcription and Analysis
1.0
MUlOO
Major Workshop
1.0
Electives
3.0
MU113
Freshman Improvisation
1.0
MU401A*
* Jazz History
3.0
MU131A
Class Piano I
I.O
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
6.0
MU115
Music Technology Survey
1.0
Fall Total
17.0
HUllOA
First Year Writing I
3.0
Spring
Fall Total
15.0
MU 392 B
Applied Major Instruction
3.0
Spring
MU7XX
Ensemble
1.0
MU192B
Applied Major Instruction
3.0
MU311
Transcription and Analysis
1.0
MU107B
Music Theory 11
3.0
Electives
3.0
MU103B
Musicianship 11
3.0
MUXXX
Music Elective
3.0
MUI13
Freshman Improvisation
1.0
MU 030
Jury Examination
MU131B
Class Piano 11
1.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
6.0
MU116
Music Technology Survey
1.0
Spring Total
17.0
HUllOB
MUOlO
First Year Writing II
Jury Examination
;ar Total
3.0
15.0
30.0
Junior Year Total
34.0
Spring Total
Senior
Freshman Y(
Fall
MU492A
.Applied Major Instruction
3.0
Sophomore
MU301A*^
* Music History I
3.0
Fall
MU7XX
Ensemble
2.0
MU292A
Applied Major Instruction
3.0
Electives
3.0
MU208A
Jazz Theory I
3.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
MU209A
Jazz Ear Training I
3.0
Fall Total
14.0
MU7XX
Ensemble
1.0
Spring
MU492B
MU301B*^
MU7XX
MU232A
MU213A
HUI03A
Class Jazz Piano I
Jazz Improvisation I
Intro, to Modernism I
1.0
2.0
3.0
Applied Major Instruction
* Music History II
Ensemble
3.0
3.0
2.0
Fall Total
16.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
6.0
Spring
MU040t
Senior Recital
MU 292 B
Applied Major Instruction
3.0
Select one of the following mo;
MU 208 B
Jazz Theory II
3.0
MU420A*
Business of Music
2.0
MU 209 B
Jazz Ear Training II
3.0
MU420 B
Careers in Music
MU7XX
Ensemble
1.0
Spring Total
16.0
MU232B
MU213B
Class Jazz Piano II
Jazz Improvisation II
Intro, to Modernism II
1.0
2.0
3.0
Senior Year Total
29.0
HU 103 B
MU 020
Jury Examination
Spring Total
16.0
Sophomore '
Year Total:
32.0
N.B. All instrumental majors are required to suc-
cessfully complete one year of Chorus, which
may be taken as ensemble or elective credits.
Piano {MU 131 MB) and Jazz Piano (MU 232
A/Bj are not required for piano majors. Instead,
substitute four elective credits.
* All undergraduate music students must take
either Business of Music (MU 420 A) or Careers
in Music (MU 420 B). Students who take both
may apply one toward elective credits.
f Senior Recital may be completed either
semester
** Also fulfills Liberal Arts discipline history
requirement.
The University of ttie Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Bachelor of Music in Jazz
Studies- Vocal Performance
126 credits
Freshman
Credits
Fad
MU19IA Applied Major Instruction 3.0
MU107A Music Theory I 3.0
MU103A Musicianship I 3.0
MU139 Vocal Styles and Diction I 1.0
MU772 Chorus 1.0
MU131A Class Piano I 1.0
MU 115 Music Technology Survey 1.0
HU 1 1 A First Year Writing I 3.0
Fall Total 16.0
Spring
MU191B Applied Major Instruction 3.0
MUI07B Music Theory II 3.0
MU103B Musicianship II 3.0
MU 140 Vocal Styles and Diction I. II 1.0
MU772 Chorus 1.0
MU131B Class Piano II 1.0
MU116 Music Technology Survey 1.0
HUllOB First Year Writing II 3.0
MUOlO Jury Examination
Spring Total 16.0
Freshman Year Total
32.0
Sopliomore
Fall
MU 291 A
Applied Major Instniction
3.0
MU208A
Jazz Theory I
3.0
MU209A
Jazz Ear Training 1
3.0
MU772
Chorus
1.0
MU232A
Class Jazz Piano I
1.0
MU213A
Jazz Improvisation I
2.0
HU 103 A
Intro, to Modernism I
3.0
Fall Total
/
16.0
Spring
MU291B
Applied Major Instruction
3.0
MU 208 B
Jazz Theory II
3.0
MU209B
Jazz Ear Training II
3.0
MU772
Chorus
1.0
MU232B
Class Jazz Piano II
1.0
MU213B
Jazz Improvisation II
2.0
HU103B
Intro, to Modernism 11
3.0
MU020
Jur)' Examination
Spring Tota
16.0
Junior
Credits
Fall
MU391A Applied Major Instruction 3.0
MU7XX Ensemble I.O
MU772 Chorus 1.0
MU 33 1 B Advanced Piano and
Accompanying 1.0
MU 401 A** Jazz History 3.0
Electives 3.0
HUXXX Liberal Arts 6.0
Fall Total 18.0
Spring
MU39IB Applied Major Instruction 3.0
MU7XX Ensemble 1.0
MU772 Chorus 1.0
MU 33 1 B Advanced Piano and
Accompanying 1.0
MU030 Jury Examination
Electives 3.0
HUXXX Liberal Arts 6.0
Spring Total 15.0
Junior Year Total
33.0
Senior
Fall
MU 49 1 A Applied Major Instruction 3.0
MU772 Chorus 1.0
MU7XX Ensemble 1.0
Select one of the following two:
MU420A Business of Music 2.0
MU 420 B Careers in Music
MU 301 A** Music History I 3.0
Electives 3.0
HUXXX Liberal Arts 3.0
Fall Total 16.0
Spring
MU491B Applied Major Instruction 3.0
MU772 Chorus 1.0
MU7XX Ensemble 1.0
MU 040t Senior Recital
MU 301 B** Music Histor>' II 3.0
HU XXX Liberal Arts 6.0
Spring Total 13.0
Senior Year Total
29.0
All undergraduate Music students must take either
Business of Music (MU 420 A ) or Careers in Music (MU
420 B). Students who take both may apply one toward
elective credits.
f Senior Recital may be completed either term.
** Also fulfills liberal arts discipline history requirement.
Sophomore Year Total
32.0
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Bachelor of Music in Jazz
Studies- Composition 126 credits
Freshmar
Credits
Junior
Credits
Fall
Fall
MU193A
Applied Major Instruction
3.0
MU393A
Applied Major Instruction
3.0
MU107A
Music Theory I
3.0
MU401A*
* Jazz History
3.0
MU103A
Musicianship I
3.0
MU7XX
Ensemble
1.0
MU7XX
Ensemble
1.0
MU415A
Intro, to MIDI and Electronic
MUI31A
Class Piano I
1.0
Technology
3.0
MU115
Music Technology Survey
1.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
HUllOA
First Year Writing I
3.0
Electives
3.0
Fall Total
15.0
Fall Total
16.0
Spring
Spring
MU 193 B
Applied Major Instruction
3.0
MU 393 B
Applied Major Instruction
3.0
MU107B
Music Theory II
3.0
MU7XX
Ensemble
1.0
MU 103 B
Musicianship II
3.0
MU3I7A
Orchestration I
3.0
MU7XX
Ensemble
1.0
MUXXX
Music Elective
3.0
MU131B
Class Piano II
1.0
MU030
Jury Examination
MU1I6
Music Technology Survey
I.O
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
6.0
MUOlO
Jury Examination
Spring Tota
16.0 ■
HUllOB
Spring Tota
Freshman Y
First Year Writing II
3.0
15.0
Junior Year Total
32.0
;ar Total
30.0
Senior
Fall
Sophomore
MU493A
Applied Major Instruction
3.0
Fall
MU 301 A*
' Music History I
3.0
MU293A
Applied Major Instruction
3.0
MU7XX
Ensemble
1.0
MU208A
Jazz Theory I
3.0
Select one of the following nvo:
MU209A
Jazz Ear Training I
3.0
MU420A*
Business in Music
2.0
MU7XX
Ensemble
1.0
MU420B
Careers in Music
MU232A
Class Jazz Piano I
1.0
Electives
3.0
MU315A
Jazz Arranging I
2.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
6.0
HU103A
Intro, to Modernism I
3.0
Fall Total ,
18.0
Fall Total '
16.0
Spring
Spring
MU493B
Applied Major Instruction
3.0
MU 293 B
Applied Major Instruction
3.0
MU30IB*>
Music History II
3.0
MU208B
Jazz Theory II
3.0
MU7XX
Ensemble
1.0
MU209B
Jazz Ear Training II
3.0
MU 040t
Senior Recital
MU7XX
Ensemble
1.0
Electives
3.0
MU 232 B
Class Jazz Piano II
1.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
6.0
MU020
Jury Examination
Spring Total
16.0
HU 103 B
Spring Total
Intro, to Modernism II
fear Total
3.0
14.0
30.0
Senior Year Total
34.0
Sophomore ^
N.B. Ml composition majors are required to successfully
complete one year of Chorus, which may be taken as
ensemble or elective credits.
*All undergraduate music students must take either
Business of Music (MU 420 A) or Careers in Music
(MU 420 B). Students who take both may apply one
toward elective credits.
f Senior Recital may be completed either term.
"' Also fulfills liberal arts discipline history requirement.
Tlie University of tlie Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
103
Diploma in Music in Jazz
Studies-Instrumental
Performance 104 credits
Diploma in Music in Jazz
Studies- Vocal Performance
104 credits
Freshman
Credits
Junior
Credits
Freshman
Credits
Fall
MU192A
MU107A
MU103A
MUlOO
MU113
MU7XX
MU 131 B
MU115
Fall Total
Spring
MU192B
MU107B
MU103B
MU113
MU7XX
MU131B
MU116
MUOlO
Spring Total
Applied Major Instruction
Music Theory I
Musicianship I
Major Workshop
Freshman Improvisation
Ensemble
Class Piano I
Music Technology Survey
Applied Major Instruction
Music Theory II
Musicianship II
Freshman Improvisation
Ensemble
Class Piano II
Music Technology Survey
Jury Examination
Freshman Year Total
Sophomore
.0
.0
13.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
13.0
26.0
Fall
MU 292 A Applied Major Instruction 3.0
MU208A Jazz Theory I 3.0
MU 209 A Jazz Ear Training I 3.6
MU 7XX Ensembles 2.0
MU 232 A Class Jazz Piano I 1 .0
MU213A Jazz Improvisation 2.0
Fall Total 14.0
Spring
MU292B Applied Major Instruction 3.0
MU208B Jazz Theory 1 3.0
MU209B Jazz Ear Training II 3.0
MU 7XX Ensembles 2.0
MU 232 B Class Jazz Piano II 1.0
MU213B Jazz Improvisation 2.0
MU 020 Jury Examination
Spring Total 14.0
Sophomore Year Total
28.0
Fall
MU392A
MU7XX
MU310
MU401A
Fall Total
Spring
MU 392 B
MU7XX
MU311
MUXXX
MU030
Applied Major Instruction
Ensembles
Transcription and Analysis
Jazz History
Electives
Applied Major Instruction
Ensembles
Transcription and Analysis
Music Elective
Jury Examination
Electives
3.0
2.0
1.0
3.0
3.0
12.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
3.0
3.0
Spring Total
12.0
Junior Year Total
24.0
Senior
Fall
MU492A Applied Major Instruction 3.0
MU 7XX Ensembles 2.0
MU420A Business of Music 2.0
MU 040t Senior Recital
MU 301 A Music History I 3.0
Electives 3.0
Fall Total 13.0
Spring
MU492B Applied Major Instruction 3.0
MU 7XX Ensembles 2.0
MU 420 B Careers in Music 2.0
MU040t Senior Recital
MU301B Music History I, II 3.0
Electives 3.0
Spring Total 13.0
Senior Year Total
26.(
N.B. All instrunienlal majors are required to successfully
complete one year of Chorus (MU 772), which may be
taken as ensemble or elective credits.
Piano (MUISIA/B) and Jazz Piano (MU 232 A/B) are
not required for piano majors. Instead, substitute four
elective credits.
t Senior Recital may be completed either term.
Fall
MU191A
MU107A
MU103A
MU139
MU772
MU131A
MU115
Fall Total
Spring
MU191B
MU 107 B
MU 103 B
MU140
MU772
MU131B
MU116
MUOlO
Spring Total
Applied Major Instruction
Music Theory I
Musicianship I
Vocal Styles and Diction I
Chorus
Class Piano I
Music Technology Survey
Applied Major Instruction
Music Theory II
Musicianship II
Vocal Styles and Diction II
Chorus
Class Piano II
Music Technology Survey
Jury Examination
3.0
3.0
3.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
13.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
13.0
Freshman Year Total
26,0
Sophomore
Fall
MU29IA
Applied Major Instruction
3.0
MU208A
Jazz Theory I
3.0
MU209A
Jazz Ear Training I
3.0
MU772
Chorus
1.0
MU7XX
Ensemble
1.0
MU232A
Class Jazz Piano I
1.0
MU213A
Jazz Improvisation I
2.0
Fall Total
14.0
Spring
MU291B
Applied Major Instruction
3.0
MU 208 B
Jazz Theory II
3.0
MU 209 B
Jazz Ear Training II
3.0
MU772
Chorus
1.0
MU 7XX
Ensemble
1.0
MU 232 B
Class Jazz Piano II
1.0
MU213B
Jazz Improvisation n
2.0
MU020
Jury Examination
Spring Tola
14.0
Sophomore Year Total
28.0
104
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Junior
Credits
Fall
MU391A Applied Major Instruction 3.0
MU7XX Ensemble 1.0
MU772 Chorus 1.0
MU 33 1 A Advanced Piano and
Accompanying 1 .0
MU401A Jazz History 3.0
Electives 3.0
Fall Total 12.0
Spring
MU391B Applied Major Instruction 3.0
MU7XX Ensemble 1.0
MU772 Chorus 1.0
MU XXX Music Elective 3.0
MU 33 1 B Advanced Piano and
Accompanying 1 .0
MU 030 Jury Examination
Electives 3.0
Spring Total 12.0
Junior Year Total
24.0
Senior
Fall
MU491A Applied Major Instruction 3.0
MU772 Chorus 1.0
MU7XX Ensemble 1.0
MU420A Business of Music 2.0
MU 040t Senior Recital
MU301A Music History I 3.0
Electives 3.0
Fall Total ■ 13.0
Spring
MU491B Applied Major Instruction 3.0
MU772 Chorus 1.0
MU7XX Ensemble 1.0
MU 420 B Careers in Music 2.0
MU040t Senior Recital
MU 301 B Music History 3.0
Electives 3.0
Spring Total 13.0
Senior Year Total
26.0
f Senior Recital may be completed either tern.
Diploma in Music in Jazz
Studies- Composition
104 credits
Freshman
Credits
Junior
Credits
Fall
Fall
MU193A
Apphed Major Instruction
3.0
MU393A
Applied Major Instruction
3.0
MU107A
Music Theory
3.0
MU7XX
Ensembles
2.0
MUI03A
Musicianship I
3.0
MU317A
Orchestration I
3.0
MU7XX
Ensemble
1.0
MU415A
Intro, to MIDI and Electronic
MU131A
Class Piano
I.O
Technology
3.0
MU115
Music Technology
Survey
1.0
MU030
Jury Examination
Fall Total
12.0
MU401A
Jazz History
3.0
Spring
Fall Total
14.0
MU 193 B
Applied Major Instruction
3.0
Spring
MU 107 B
Music Theory
3.0
MU 393 B
Applied Major Instruction
3.0
MU103B
Musicianship II
3.0
MU311
Transcription and Analysis
1.0
MU7XX
Ensemble
1.0
MU7XX
Ensembles
2.0
MU131B
Class Piano
1.0
MUXXX
Music Elective
3.0
MU116
Music Technology
Sur\'ev
1.0
MU030
Jury Examination
MUOlO
Jury Examination
Electives
3.0
Spring Total
12.0
Spring Tota
12.0
Freshman Year Total
Junior Year Total
26.0
Sophomore
Senior
Fall
Fall
MU293A
Applied Major Instruction
3.0
MU493A
Applied Major Instruction
3.0
MU208A
Jazz Theory I
3.0
MU7XX
Ensembles
2.0
MU209A
Jazz Ear Training I
3.0
MU420A
Business of Music
2.0
MU7XX
Ensemble
1.0
MU30IA
Music History
3.0
MU232A
Class Jazz Piano
1.0
Electives
3.0
MU315A
Jazz Arranging I
2.0
Fall Total
13.0
Fall Total
13.0
Spring
Spring
MU493B
Applied Major Instruction
3.0
MU 293 B
Applied Major Instruction
3.0
MU7XX
Ensembles
2.0
MU 208 B
Jazz Theory II
3.0
MU420B
Careers in Music
2.0
MU 209 B
Jazz Ear Training II
3.0
MU 040t
Senior Recital
MU7XX
Ensemble
1.0
MU301B
Music History
3.0
MU 232 B
Class Jazz Piano
1.0
Electives
3.0
MUXXX
Music Elective
3.0
Spnng Tota
13.0
MU020
Spring Total
Jury Examination
14.0
Senior Year Total
26.0
Sophomore Year Total
27,0
N.B. All composition majors are required to suc-
cessfully complete one year of Chorus, which may
be taken as ensemble or elective credits.
t Senior Recital may be completed either semester
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
105
Certificate in Music in Jazz
Studies- Instrumental
Performance 54credi
Certificate in Music in Jazz
Studies- Vocal Performance
First Year
Credits
First Year
Credits
Fall
Fall
MU192A
Applied Major Instruction
3.0
MU191A
Applied Major Instruction
3.0
MU107A
Music Theory I, II
3.0
MU107A
Music Theory 1
3.0
MU103A
Musicianship
3.0
MU103A
Musicianship I
3.0
MUIOO
Major Workshop
1.0
MU 139
Vocal Styles and Diction I
1.0
MU7XX
Ensemble
1.0
MU7XX
Ensemble
1.0
MU131A
Class Piano
1.0
MU131A
Class Piano I
1.0
MU115
Music Technology Survey
1.0
MU115
Music Technology Survey
1.0
Fall Total
13.0
Fall Total
13.0
Spring
Spring
MU192B
Applied Major Instruction
3.0
MU191B
Applied Major Instruction
3.0
MU 107 B
Music Theory 1, 11
3.0
MU 107 B
Music Theory 11
3.0
MU 103 B
Musicianship
3.0
MU 103 B
Musicianship II
3.0
MU113
Freshman Improvisation
1.0
MU140
Vocal Styles and Diction II
1.0
MU7XX
Ensemble
1.0
MU7XX
Ensemble
1.0
MU131B
Class Piano
1.0
MU131B
Class Piano n
1.0
MU116
Music Technology Survey
1.0
MU116
Music Technology Survey
1.0
MUOlO
Jury Examination
MUOlO
Jury Examination
Spring Total
13.0
Spring Tota
13.0
First Year Total
26.0
First Year Total
26.0
Second Year
Second Year
Fall
Fall
MU292A
Applied Major Instruction
3.0
MU291A
Applied Major Instruction
3.0
MU208A
Jazz Theory 1, 11
3.0
MU208A
Jazz Theory I
3.0
MU209A
Jazz Ear Training I. II
3.0
MU209A
Jazz Ear Training I
3.0
MU7XX
Ensembles
2.0
MU7XX
Ensembles
2.0
MU232A
Class Jazz Piano 1,
1.0
MU232A
Class Jazz Piano
1.0
MU213A
Jazz Improvisation I, II
2.0
MU2I3A
Jazz Improvisation I
2.0
Fall Total
14.0
Fall Total
14.0
Spring
Spring
MU 292 B
Applied Major Instruction
3.0
MU291B
Applied Major Instruction
3.0
MU 208 B
Jazz Theory I. II
3.0
MU 208 B
Jazz Theory II
3.0
MU 209 B
Jazz Ear Training I, II
3.0
MU 209 B
Jazz Ear Training II
3.0
MU7XX
Ensembles
2.0
MU7XX
Ensembles
2.0
MU232B
Class Jazz Piano I, II
1.0
MU 232 B
Class Jazz Piano
1.0
MU213B
Jazz Improvisation I, II
2.0
MU213B
Jazz Improvisation II
2.0
MU020
Jury Examination
MU020
Jury Examination
Spring Total
14.0
Spring Tota
14.0
Second Year Total
Second Year Total
28.0
N.B. Piano (MU 131 A/B) and Jazz Piano (MU 232
A/Bj are not required for piano majors. Instead,
substitute four elective credits.
io6
Tlie University of Itie Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Music Education matprep
Preparatory Program for the
Master of Arts in Teaching
All undergraduate degree students in
music at The University of the Arts may
enroll in and take advantage of the MAT in
Music Education Preparatory Program
(MATPREP). Completion of this program
allows students to satisfy all corequisite
requirements for admission to the MAT in
Music program. MATPREP is also an
important means for maintaining continuity
between undergraduate and graduate experi-
ences, and for fostering communication
between students and faculty in Music
Education.
Admission to the University as a
BM/MAT student in Music indicates accept-
ance into the Bachelor of Music program
and into the MATPREP program. Full
admission to the MAT in Music Education
program must be granted prior to the begin-
ning of graduate-level instruction on the
same basis as other MAT candidates.
A minimum grade-point average of 3.0 in
MATPREP courses and a minimum overall
cumulative grade-point average of 3.0 must
be achieved in order to be considered as a
candidate for admission into the MAT in
Music Education Program.
Course
Credits
MU151A
Intro, to Music Education I
1.0
MU151B
Intro, to Music Education n
1.0
MU257A
Lab Teaching/Practicum I
2.0
MU 257 B
Lab Teaching/Practicum II
2.0
MU254
Basic Conducting
2.0
MU356A
Music Teaching Skills I
1.0
MU 356 B
Music Teaching Skills II
1.0
MU451A
Psychology of
Music Teaching I
2.0
MU451B
Psychology of
Music Teaching II
2.0
MU317A
Orchestration I
3.0
Total Credit
17.0
The University of tlie Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
107
Music Education
Master of Arts in
Teaching
Patrick M. Jones
pjones@uarts.edu
Division Head
215-717-6356
The Master of Arts in Teaching in Music
Education is an advanced teacher certifica-
tion program designed to prepare
individuals with established musical skills
and subject matter mastery for successful
careers in teaching and education-related
fields. It is a unique program in that candi-
dates for the MAT in Music Education
typically will have completed undergraduate
studies in applied music, composition,
theory, history /literature, or other profes-
sional areas. After satisfying Pennsylvania
standardized testing requirements, MAT
graduates will be eligible to receive K-12
certification in music from the
Commonwealth of Pennsylvania
Department of Education. In addition, com-
pletion of the MAT program fulfills
confinuing studies requirements, so that
after three years of full-time teaching
service, graduates may apply for permanent
certification without taking additional
courses.
Music Education graduates of the
University of the Arts are currently serving
successfully as teachers, supervisors, school
administrators, and in education-related
fields such as computer software develop-
ment, broadcasting, law and the arts, and
private studio teaching, and as professional
performers, composers, and arrangers.
The MAT curriculum in music education
comprises 36 credits and may be completed
in one academic year schedule, if all prereq-
uisites are satisfied prior to matriculafion. '
Prerequisite requirements may be satisfied
in a number of ways, including taking
courses in the undergraduate MATPREP
program. Professionals in the field may
choose to complete the Master of Arts in
Teaching in Music Education over an
extended period of time on a part-time
basis. The following listing presents the
normal sequence of courses if completed
within one year:
MAT in Music Education
Faculty
Marc Dicciani
Annette DiMedio
William Garten
Richard Genovese
Janice Goltz '
Patrick M. Jones
Jeffrey Kern
John Knebl
Christopher Maute
Thomas Rudolph
Anthony Salicondro
Dennis Wasko
Music Education
Master of Arts in Teaching
36 credits
Fall
MU55I
Education in
American Society
3.0
MU552
Workshop in Vocal Methods
2.0
MU 553
Music and Special Children
2.0
MU554A
Elementary Methods
and Materials
3.0
MU555
Elementary Student Teachin
2 4.0
MU560A
Workshop in
Instrumental Methods I
2.0
MU558
Student Teaching
Seminar and Major Project
2.0
Fall Total
18.0
Spring
MU550
Advanced Conducting -
Choral or Instrumental
3.0
MU 554 B
Secondary Methods
and Materials
3.0
MU556
Secondary Student Teaching
4.0
MU557
Music Administration
and Supen'ision
3.0
MU559
Research, Evaluation, and
Technology in
Music Education
3,0
MU 560 B
Workshop in
Instrumental Methods n
2.0
Spring Iota
18.0
Total Credits
36.0
io8
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Jazz Studies
Master of Music
Don Glanden
dglanden@uarts.edu
Chair, Graduate Jazz Studies
215-717-6353
The Master of Music in Jazz Studies
degree has its roots in three decades of
University of the Arts leadership in the field
of jazz education, carefully balancing aes-
thetic goals and a pragmatic approach to
vocational responsibility in the context of
this American music idiom. Open to a small
and highly advanced group of students who
have an undergraduate degree in jazz studies
or an undergraduate degree in music with
significant experience in jazz and contem-
porary music, or the equivalent thereof, the
program- while providing a solid founda-
tion in contemporary music- encourages a
primary focus on individual career goals.
Curriculum
Among the one-year, 32-credit program's
unique curricular components are advanced
private instruction in the major area to
develop professional-level artistry and
skills: hands-on internships and pedagogy
study; ensemble performances; arranging,
composing, transcribing and analyzing jazz
and contemporary music; study of MIDI
and music technology; and a final
thesis/project/ recital that integrates in-
depth research on a topic of special
relevance with personal musical growdi,
culminating in a public performance.
Graduate Applied Studies are the core
of the Master of Music in Jazz Studies.
Additionally, applied study at the graduate
level includes a pedagogy component.
Teaching is a facet of almost every per-
former's and composer's career; coursework
in the major applied area acknowledges this
importance.
Students, in addition to completion of the
requisite 32 credits, must take or have taken
two corequisite courses of two credit hours
each; Recording and The Business of
Music.
MM in Jazz Studies Faculty
Strings
John Blake
Saxophione
Chris Farr
Ronald Kerber
Frank Mazzeo
Anthony Salicondro
Bill Zaccagni
Trumpet
Matt Gallagher
Tim Hagans
Jeff Jarvis
George Rabbai
John Swana
Dennis Wasko
Trombone
John Fedchook
Richard Genovese
Clint Sharman
Keyboards
Samuel Dockery
Don Glanden
Trudy Pitts
Elio Villafranca
Guitar
Jimmy Bruno
Craig Ebner
Thomas Giacabetti
Pat Martino
Patrick Mercuri
Michael Quaile
Upright Jazz Bass/Electric
Bass
Steve Beskrone
Charles Fambrough
Kevin MacConnell
Tony Marino
Craig Thomas
Gerald Veasley
Percussion/Drums
Carl Allen
Robert Brosh
Marc Dicciani
Tony Miceli
Joseph Nero
James Paxson
Marlon Simon
Voice
Kelly Meashey
Reginald Pindell
Anne ScioUa
Large Jazz Ensembles
Frank Mazzeo
Evan Solot
Bill Zaccagni
Small Jazz Ensembles
All Jazz Faculty
Composition and Arranging
Evan Solot
Bill Zaccagni
Recording
Steven Goodsell
Latin American Music
Orlando Haddad
Marlon Simon
Elio Villafranca
Music Technology
Steven Goodsell
Thomas Rudolph
Jazz Improvisation and
Transcription
Jimmy Bruno
Chris Farr
Thomas Giacabetti
Don Glanden
Ronald Kerber
Pat Martino
Tony Miceli
John Swana
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
109
MM in Jazz Studies
Fall
Credits
MU592A
Applied Major Instruction
3,0
MU615
MIDI and Music Technology 2.0
MU617
Advanced Transcription
and Analysis
3.0
MU620
Professional Internship
1.0
MU622
Graduate Arranging
2.0
MU625
Advanced Improvisation
2.0
MU 627
Graduate Forum
1.0
MU764
Ensembles
2.0
Fall Total
16.0
Spring
MU 592 B
Applied Major Instruction
3.0
MU616
MIDI and Music Technolog
y2.0
MU621
Professional Internship
1.0
MU624
Composing for Performers
2.0
MU626
Graduate Improvisation
2.0
MU628
Graduate Forum
I.O
MU764
Ensembles
2.0
MU603
Graduate Project/Recital
3.0
Spring Total
16.0
Total Credits
32.0
Additional prerequisite/corequisite courses:
MU413 Recording 2.0
MU 420 Business of Music 2.0
Total 4.0
Total Credits with corequisites 36.0
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
The School of
Theater Arts
GeneTerruso
gten-uso@uarts.edu
Director
Nan Gilbert
ngilbert@uarts.edu
Assistant Director
211 South Broad Street
215-717-6450
The School of Theater Arts of The
University of the Arts is committed to devel-
oping the skills and professionalism of its
students to prepare them for careers in the
theater and related fields, or for advanced
study in graduate or conservatory programs.
The goal of the theater school is to culti-
vate practitioners for the live theater
entertainment media, communications, and
production. This is achieved by developing
a practical knowledge and competence that
include sensitivity to technique, artistry, and
style, as well as an insight into the role of
the theater arts.
All of the School's degree programs
employ a professional approach to training
and highly rigorous standards for evaluation
and retention. As with any theater program,
production work may serve as an important
means of gauging a student's growth in
his/her respective program. It is in the
studio, however, where the primary efforts
of both student and faculty are concentrated.
The highly focused and demanding training
is enhanced by appropriate courses in the
liberal arts. These are of particular impor-
tance to the theater artist, who is charged
with commenting on the human condition.
The effectiveness of that commentary is
dependent upon a sincere commitment to
excellence in liberal arts.
All programs within the School of Theater
Arts require 123 credits for graduation.
Facilities
Most facilities for the School of Theater
Arts are located in UArts' new Terra
Building at 21 1 South Broad Street. These
include seminar and classroom spaces, and
studios for individual voice instruction,
speech, dance, movement, and acting. The
studios are well-lit and individually
equipped with prop storage and audiovisual
capabilities. Lockers and lounges are
located adjacent to the studios.
Performances are held at three sites: the
ArtsBank, a technically up-to-date, 240-seat
theater at 601 South Broad Street that also
houses additional instructional spaces; the
University's historic Merriam Theater at
250 South Broad Street: and a
new flexible black box space at the
Gershman Y, 401 South Broad Street, where
stage combat classes are also held. Design
and technical support are provided by a pro-
duction shop, areas for both property and
costume stock, and a video editing studio
inside the ArtsBank. The Albert M.
Greenfield Library contains books, journals,
and videotapes devoted to the theater arts,
which are available to students for research
and coursework.
Programs of Study
The curriculum is conservatory-based,
acknowledging that the focal point of
training in both the Bachelor of Fine Arts
Acting and Bachelor of Fine Arts Musical
Theater programs is the acting instruction,
and that vocal and physical training are the
principal support areas for this instruction.
The first responsibility of the faculty is to
invest students with a foundation technique-
a rehearsal/performance process-which they
will continue to refine and personalize as
their creative development evolves.
Opportunifies for master classes, guest
speakers, internships, and apprenticeships
with many professional companies in the
city and region are among the experiences
open to students in all School of Theater
Arts programs.
Bachelor of Fine Arts (BFA)
Acting Program
The four-year Bachelor of Fine Arts
Acting program prepares students for
careers in the professional theater or for
continued study at the graduate level. In the
first year, students concentrate on finding
the "core of the actor" through the study of
improvisation, monologue, emotional dis-
covery, speech, and movement. In addition
to fostering these acting skills, the first year
of training is also designed to encourage an
in-depth self-analysis of the student's com-
mitment, discipline, and professionalism.
The second year is devoted to technique
training, in which actors develop a sense of
conversational reality and strengthen their
imagination, responsiveness, and spon-
taneity. This level of training also addresses
an actor's skill for evoking a full and acces-
sible inner life.
The third year is dedicated to giving
shape and specificity to the actor's behavior
and aims to refine technique and deepen
characterization. Advanced scene study and
an introduction to style work are also inte-
gral to this level of training. The focus of
the fourth year is on classical performance
and preparing the student to enter the pro-
fession. Students are given instruction in
audition and camera techniques, resume
preparation, how to work with agents, etc.
The fourth year culminates with an audition
clinic given by a selected panel of agents,
directors, and casting representatives.
Bachelor of Fine Arts (BFA)
Musical Theater Program
The four-year Bachelor of Fine Arts
Musical Theater Program prepares students
for professional careers as perfonners in the
musical theater or for continued study in
graduate school. The program defines the
term "musical theater" in a way that
embraces the richness and diversity of this
challenging interdisciplinary ail form,
which includes musical comedy, the
musical play (in the Hammerstein-
Sondheim tradition), new and alternative
music theater, "Broadway opera," cabaret,
and revue. Students receive the same tech-
nique training as do acting majors through
their first five semesters. This training is
complemented by training in vocal tech-
nique, musicianship and dance, and the
study of the repertoire of the musical theater
in print, recordings, and in rehearsal and
performance.
Bachelor of Fine Arts (BFA) in
Applied Theater Arts
The Bachelor of Fine Arts in Applied
Theater Arts allows students with a range of
theatrical interests to shape their own indi-
vidualized course of study. It is designed to
give students the practical, artistic, and
intellectual foundation necessary for a suc-
cessful professional life in live theater and
allied disciplines. Student artists may focus
on theatrical disciplines such as mask, stage
combat, stage management, playwriting,
directing, dramaturgy, production, and arts
administration.
Practical studio and production training,
received in a student's first two years, is
enriched by an understanding of the theater
as an art, an industry, and an institution,
with a history and a vital role in society.
This foundation training will prepare the
student to emphasize one or more of the
above-mentioned disciplines at the upper-
division levels and shape her/his own
curriculum. Much of the senior year in the
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
ATA program is shaped by production proj-
ects, independent study, and internships
arranged through the School's close associa-
tion with professional companies in the
area.
This program may prove a good choice
for students who are drawn to the collabora-
tive nature of theater. It is an ideal program
of study for the student who has a profound
passion for theater and/or the entertainment
field, but whose long-term interest may lie
outside performing. At the same time, it is a
curriculum that places that student at the
heart of the production process. The pro-
gram is also well-suited to students who
may have an interest in advanced or grad-
uate study.
Stage Combat Program
The School of Theater Arts is home to
one of the nation's most renowned stage
combat programs, serving as host to the
annual Philadelphia Stage Combat
Workshop. It is one of only a handful of
institutions that offers the option of an
eight-semester sequence of combat training.
One semester of combat is required for all
BFA Acting majors. Although not a degree
program in itself, students completing the
requisite course of study are tested on
campus each year and, if found proficient,
certified by the Society of American Fight
Directors. A year ago, the program was
ranked third in the country, based on the
number of certified stage combatants that
emerged from its ranks.
The Curriculum
BFA Programs in Acting and
Musical Theater
Actor training in the School of Theater
Arts lies at the heart of the two-performance
curricula. The training is designed to culti-
vate the actor's ability to "live truthfully
under imaginary circumstances." Students
develop an understanding that such truth
begins with a shared interconnectedness
between actors onstage.
Early technique studies, for majors in
both acting and musical theater, emphasize
the "reality of doing" as it is rooted in a full
emotional life, driven by action and
expressed with meaning, clarity, and theatri-
cality. To this end, students are challenged
to cultivate a fuller understanding of them-
selves, and to continually exercise their
skills as analysts of text and as observers of
human behavior.
The program introduces students to a
range of approaches (Linklater, Meisner,
LeCoq, Williamson. Fitzmaurice, Laban) as
a part of their training. The successful stu-
dent should emerge from the program with
a practicable performance technique in
place, which enables her/him to develop and
sustain a role from first rehearsal to closing
night.
Students completing these programs are
also expected to be knowledgeable about a
variety of styles and types of drama, and the
challenges presented by each: to work in a
vocally and physically free and efficient
manner; to be able to identify their character
type and its potential range within the
casting conventions of the industry; to have
a sense of how to begin to establish a career
as a performer; and to possess a work ethic
that will support the collaborative nature of
theatrical production.
The Musical Theater Program seeks to
train students who:
• use the singing voice in a vibrant,
healthy, and dramatically effective
manner;
• understand music as the singing actor's
second text and clearly present its
expressive intentions;
• have a solid dance technique and a com-
mand of the language of dance and
movement; and
• integrate all component skills of
musical theater performance to create
consistentiy honest and expressive
behavior.
Additionally, the Acting Program seeks to
train students who have developed:
• fundamental skills in stage combat and
the use of selected weaponry;
• an awareness of mask techniques as a
platform from which characterization
and behavior can evolve;
• basic skills in performing for the
camera, a familiarity with their image in
two-dimensional media, and some
experience in fundamental issues such
as slating, continuity, hitting marks,
working within frame, etc.; and
• scene study skills that will serve them in
the interpretation of classical material
that requires a command of both style
and language.
BFA Program in Applied
Theater Arts
A theater artist must be well-versed in a
variety of disciplines, each vital in itself and
intimately related to all that occurs in a pro-
duction effort. The student majoring in the
BFA in Applied Theater Arts is called upon
to develop competencies across a spectrum
of these disciplines. As such, he/she will
study playwriting, acting, combat, mask,
stage management, directing, administra-
tion, theater history, and dramatic literature-
all in a context that supports theatrical pro-
duction. This program is designed to
provide practical tiaining for the
student/artist who possesses a collaborative
perspective. The BFA in Applied Theater
Arts (ATA) allows the student/artist, in
his/her junior year, to move toward a con-
centration in a particular area of emphasis,
such as many of those mentioned here.
Upon declaring a concentration in one of
these fields, a student will complete his/her
course of study via a series of production
practica and independent study projects.
Internships, arranged through the School's
outstanding relationship with area profes-
sional theaters, will further strengthen the
student's skills and enhance his/her profes-
sional viability. The student completing this
program will be prepared to enter the
industry on either the production or the
administrative end, and may pursue a range
of career options or choose to pursue further
study in dramaturgy, directing, or several of
the above fields.
Production Season
The School of Theater Arts presents at
least 12 major productions a year- six in
our subscription series, and six more in our
studio series. These include comedies,
dramas, and musicals. Plays are selected
based on the educational and competitive
needs of the current casting pool, and on a
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
four-year cycle representing styles and
genres to which the faculty feels students
should be exposed.
All students in performance majors are
required to audition for all School-spon-
sored shows and to accept roles as cast,
unless excused as provided for in the School
of Theater Arts Student Handbook. Students
are also required to attend each production.
These audition and attendance requirements
will be part of all acting studio syllabi.
Failure to comply with these requirements
will have a direct impact upon one's grade
in acting studio.
Absences
Students in the School of Theater Arts are
expected to attend all classes, studios, work-
shops, rehearsals, and crews for which they
are registered or otherwise committed.
Generally, the School of Theater Arts
does not make a distinction between an
excused and unexcused absence. Rather it
recognizes that in the course of a student's
studies, circumstances may arise that, in the
student's judgment, may require absence or
lateness. The general policy of the School of
Theater is that any number of absences that
result in the student missing more than the
equivalent of two weeks' work will result in
failure or require withdrawal from the
course in question. This standard may be
somewhat more severe for acting studios.
Students should consult the syllabi for
any given course to see how this policy
applies to the course's number of weekly
meetings and contact hours. Please refer to
the "Absences" section of Academic
Regulations in this catalog for more infor-
mation, and to the Theater Arts Student
Handbook.
Advisors
Students are assigned advisors when they
enter the School of Theater Arts. Advisory
lists are posted in the theater lounge during
the first week of the academic year. The
advisor conveys information from the fac-
ulty to the student and counsels the student
in artistic and academic matters. The stu-
dent, however, is wholly responsible for
fulfilling his or her artistic and academic
obligations, and for meeting the require-
ments for graduation.
Call Boards
All Theater students must check the call
boards daily and will be responsible for all
official notices posted there within 24 hours.
The call boards are used for the posting
of all rehearsal and crew notices, as well as
School and professional audition notices.
Crew Assignments
All students are required to serve on pro-
duction crews in their second through fifth
semesters. Crew assignments and calls are
scheduled and monitored by the Production
Office, located in the main School of
Theater office.
All crew members are expected to be
prompt for crew calls. Lateness will not be
tolerated. Attendance at all crew calls is
mandatory. There are no unexcused
absences permitted. A student who misses a
crew call without prior permission from the
Production Office will receive an "F' for the
semester.
Extracurricular Activities
Students in the School of Theater Arts
may not participate in any theater projects
outside the University prior to completion
of five semesters in the School of Theater
Arts. Even students who have achieved
junior status must formally apply in writing
to the University director for such permis-
sion //) advance of auditioning or
intenieMing for such work. Students
involved with such projects without the
director's authorization will receive a grade
of "F" in their major studio and be restricted
from moving forward in their core classes
(see "Academic Progress"). A second occur-
ance may result in dismissal from the
School. Instructors are specifically directed
not to allow the absences nor scheduling
arrangements that may provide such oppor-
tunities.
Pliysical Demands of the
Program
The Theater Arts program is physically
demanding. Good health and its mainte-
nance are of paramount importance to an
actor.
Occasional illness or injuries are, of
course, justification for short-term absences.
Specific chronic physical or emotional dis-
orders that impair attendance or ability to
function within the program over a longer
period of time should be covered by a
formal leave of absence.
In either case, the student should confer
with his or her advisor as soon as a potential
health problem arises.
Professional Standards
and Betiavior
Students are expected to maintain high
standards of professionalism in studio,
classroom, rehearsal, and performance com-
mitments. Professionalism in rehearsal and
production is a factor in the grading for
Acting studio. Failure to follow directions
and absence from or lateness to rehearsals,
performances, and related activities may
result in Academic Censure including low-
ering of grade or course failure.
Academic Progress
A professional training environment and
an academic en\'ironment have goals that
are at once mutual and distinct. Within a tra-
ditional university, a student receiving a
grade of C may feel that he/she has done
"adequate" work and is entitled to continue
in his/her course of training. As a university,
UArts recognizes this right. By the stan-
dards required of professional training,
however, an "adequate" grade does not sug-
gest a student's viability within the
entertainment industry. Further, the world of
play production is a meritocracy - i.e.,
being in a play is not a right; it is earned by
a consistentiy demonstrated work ethic,
command of material, and strength of skills.
As such, the School of Theater Arts has
developed the following standards by which
the purposes of both the academic experi-
ence and the requirements of professional
training and production will be served.
The following are considered core courses:
Acting Major
TH103A Acting Studio I
TH103B Acting Studio II
TH 109 A Voice and Speech for Actors I
TH 109 B Voice and Speech for Actors H
TH 1 1 5 A Movement for Actors I
TH 223 Acting Studio III
TH 224 Acting Studio IV
TH209A Speech for Actors III
TH209B Speech for Actors IV
TH215A Movement for Actors III
TH215B Movement for Actors IV
TH309 Speech for Actors V
TH310 Speech for Actors VI
TH315A Movement for Actors V
TH 3 1 5 B Movement for Actors VI
TH 323 Acting Studio: Technique III
TH 324 Acting Studio: Poetic Realism
TH 4 1 5 A Movement for Actors VII
TH 423 Acting Studio: Verse Drama I
TH 424 Acting Studio: Verse Drama II
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
"3
Musical Theater Major
TH 103 A Acting Studio I
TH 103 B Acting Studio II
TH 14 1 A Voice for Musical Theater I
TH 141 B Voice For Musical Theater II
TH 142 A Voice Lesson - Musical Theater
TH142B Voice Lesson
TH 223 Acting Studio: Technique I
TH 224 Acting Studio: Technique II
TH 24 1 Foundations of Singing/Acting
TH 242 A Voice Lesson - Musical Theater
TH242B Voice Lesson
TH 3 1 8 A Musical Theater Repertory
TH318B Musical Theater Repertory
TH 323 Acting Studio: Technique III
TH 324 Acting Studio: Poetic Realism
TH 34 1 A Voice for Musical Theater V
TH 34 1 B Voice for Musical Theater VI
TH 342 A Voice Lesson - Musical Theater
TH342B Voice Lesson
TH 423 Acting Studio: Verse Drama I
TH 424 Acting Studio: Verse Drama II
TH 44 1 A Voice for Musical Theater:
Cabaret/Audition
TH 441 B Voice for Musical Theater:
Cabaret/Audition
TH 442 A Voice Lesson - Musical Theater
TH442B Voice Lesson
Applied Theater Arts
THI03A Acting Studio I
TH103B Acting Studio II
THI03L Crew
TH123 Scene & Lighting Tech I
TH 1 23 L Scene & Lighting Tech Lab
TH 124 Costume & Property Tech
TH 124 L Costume & Property Tech Lab
TH 227 Fund, of Stage Management
TH317 Fund, of Directing
HU 322 Scriptwriting
THXXX Theater Management
TH 327 Advanced Stage Management
TH 3XX Production Practicum
TH 3XX Production Practicum
TH 3XX Production Practicum
TH 430 Stage to Video Production
TH 4XX Senior Project
TH 4XX Senior Project
TH4XX ATA Seminar
To remain in good standing for casting
consideration or production assignments in
the School of Theater Arts, a student must
receive a grade of B or better in the core
courses listed above. In the view of the
SOTA faculty, a student whose work fails to
meet this level of achievement will be con-
sidered non-competitive by professional
standards. The following grades may result
in the actions indicated:
Grades of B-, C+, or C in core courses:
• student placed on Casting Restriction or
Production Restriction.
Grade of C- in core courses:
• student placed on Probation (refer to
"Academic Censure" in this bulletin for
more information), and
• student placed on Casting Restriction or
Production Restriction.
Grades of D, D-i- or F in core courses:
• student placed on Probation (refer to
"Academic Censure" in this bulletin for
more information);
• student placed on Casting Restriction or
Production Restriction;
• student receives no course credit for an
F grade, elective credit only for the
grade of D or D-i-;
• student may not advance to the next
semester of any core training class until
the course has been repeated with a
grade of C- or better; and
• both the original grade and repeated
grade will remain on the transcript and
will be applied to a student's cumulative
GPA.
Warnings
The School's obligation to its students is
to keep them abreast of their progress by
personal contact and review. A student will
be warned if his/her performance in class is
below par as defined by the instructor's
expectations expressed in the class syllabus,
rules, etc. Such warning will be issued as a
part of ongoing studio critiques, in a formal
verbal fashion at the student's in-person
evaluation (or jury), and in writing as a ■
follow-up to that evaluation. A student may
also receive such warning if he/she lacks
seriousness of purpose, demonstrates attitu-
dinal behavior that proves disruptive to the
ensemble or educational process, is exces-
sively tardy, is not prepared to work in class,
or is not seriously committed to profes-
sional training.
Evaluations
In the School of Theater Arts, progress
from one semester to the next is based not
only on successful completion of course
work, but also on the faculty's positive
assessment of the student's potential for a
career in the professional theater.
This assessment is recorded through a
process of in-person and written evaluation.
Students whose grade in core classes (see
"Academic Progress") is less than C- may
not be permitted to move on to the next
level of training in that area. Because the
curriculum is frequently integrated (i.e.,
what is being taught in speech or dance may
directly parallel what is being taught in
acting studio) the student may be prevented
from moving forward in those disciplines
as well.
In all degree programs, both the student
and the Director's Office will be provided
with copies of the written summation of the
student's evaluation. A student who has not
shown satisfactory improvement may be
asked to leave the program.
In the BFA Acting program, in-depth
evaluations will be conducted in semesters
two through five. These in-person evalua-
tions will be held with the student's acting,
movement, and speech teacher present and
will focus specifically on the student's work
and progress through the program. Ideally,
these sessions should recap the ongoing
input the student has received throughout
the term in studio.
As a follow-up to these sessions, the stu-
dent will receive a written evaluation
reviewing the points covered in-person and
including a statement on the student's status
in the program (i.e., reinvitation assured,
contingent upon further improvement, or
in jeopardy).
The BFA in Musical Theater employs a
jury system by which students are evalu-
ated. Musical Theater jury exams are held at
the end of semesters one to seven to eval-
uate students' progress. Each student is
required to prepare a minimum of five songs
(three for fu-st-year students) to be presented
before a panel of Musical Theater faculty. It
is expected that these songs be fully devel-
oped musically and dramatically. After
completion of the jury, the student receives
a written evaluation from each member of
the panel.
Junior musical theater majors must be
approved at midyear to proceed to advanced
acting technique. Not being approved for
such study, however, will not impede the
student's progress toward graduation.
Initial evaluations in the BFA for Applied
Theater Arts are conducted at the conclu-
sion of the first year and throughout the
second year. The student will convene with
her/his advisor and head of program. During
these first evaluations, the primary issues
dealt with will be the student's satisfactory
performance in production lab assignments
and aptitude in the areas of stage manage-
ment and dramaturgy. The first evaluation in
a student's third year will focus on the stu-
dent's progress and a statement submitted
114
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
by the student discussing the areas of
emphasis that have drawn his/her primary
interest. Evaluators will consider how effec-
tively the student has demonstrated skills in
those areas. By the end of the third year, eval-
uations will focus on the student's declared
area of emphasis.
School of Theater Arts Faculty
BFA Acting Program
Acting Training
Irene Baird
Jennifer Childs
Johnnie Hobbs, Jr
David Howey
Ernest Losso
Drucie McDaniel
David Newer
Mike Pedretti
Peter Pryor
Rick Stoppleworth
Gene Terruso
Joan Twiss
Voice/Speech Training
Neill Hartley
Connie Koppe - •
Leigh Smiley-Grace
D'ArcyWebb
BFA Applied Theater Arts
Program*
Jennifer Childs
Kali Colton
Charles Conwell
Mari Fielder
Nan Gilbert
Johnnie Hobbs, Jr.
Aaron Posner
Ed Shockley
Denise Taylor
Gene Terruso
Jiri Zizka
* The BFA program in Applied Theater Arts
draws instructors from all areas of the School
of Theater Arts.
Design and Production Training
Edward Johnson
Anna Michelle Oldham
Troy Martin O'Shia
IVIovement Training
Karen Cleighton
Kali Colton
Aaron Cromie
Manfred Fischbeck i
Nancy Kantra
Rebecca Lisak
Tammy Meneghini
Janice Orlandi
Dan Rothenberg
BFA Musical Theater Program
Performance Training
Charles Gilbert
Patricia Raine
Owen Robbins
Rick Stoppleworth
Neal Tracy
Voice Training
Eric Ebbenga
Mary Ellen Grant-Kennedy
Theresa Greenland
Forrest McClendon
Patricia Raine
Neal Tracy
Dance Training
Karen Cleighton
Rex Henriques
Nancy Kantra
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
"5
Acting
Bachelor of Fine Arts 123 credits
Applied Theater Arts
Bachelor of Fine Arts 123 credits
Freshmen
Year Credits
Junior
Credits
Freshmen
Year Credits
Fall
Fall
Fall
TH103A
Acting Studio 1
3.0
TH 323
Acting Studio: Technique III 3.0
TH103A
Acting Studio 1
3.0
TH109A
Voice and Speech
TH 103 L
Crew-
TH123
Scene and Lighting Tech.
2.0
for Actors I
2.0
TH309
Voice and Speech f
TH123L
Scene and Lighting
TH105A
Stage Combat 1
2.0
or Actors V
2.0
Tech. Lab.
1.0
TH115A
Movement for Actors I
1.0
TH315A
Movement for Actors V
2,0
TH113
Encounters with Theater Arts 3.0
TH 123
Scene and Lighting Tech.
2.0
TH317
Fundamentals of Directing
3.0
TH105A
Stage Combat I
2.0
TH113
Encounters with Theater Arts 3.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
HUllOA
First Year Writing 1
3.0
HUllOA
First Year Writing I
3.0
Electives
3.0
Fall Total
14.0
Fall Total
16.0
Fall Total
16.0
Spring
Spring
Spring
TH 103 B
Acting Studio II
3.0
TH 103 B
Acting Studio II
3.0
•TH 324
Acting Smdio:
TH124
Costumes and Prop Tech.
2.0
TH 103 L
Crew
Poetic Realism
3.0
TH124L
Costumes and Prop
TH 109 B
Speech for Actors n
2.0
TH310
Voice and Speech
Tech. Lab.
1.0
THXXX
Movement Elective
1.0
for Actors VI
2.0
TH213
Script Analysis
3.0
TH124
Costumes and Prop Tech.
2.0
TH 326
Audition Techniques
2.0
THIOI
Neutral Mask
1.0
TH213
Script Analysis
3.0
TH315B
Movement for Actors VI
2.0
HU 1 10 B
First Year Writing II
3.0
HUllOB
First Year Writing II
3.0
TH330
Acting on Camera '
1.0
Electives
3.0
Spring Tota
Freshman Y
;ar Total
re
14.0
30.0
HUXXX
Spring Tota
Liberal Arts
Electives
3.0
3.0
16.0
Spring Total
Freshman Year Total
■16.0
30.0
Sophomo
Fall
lunior Year Total
32.0
Sophomore
~ Fall
TH223
Acting Studio: Technique I
Crew
4.0
Senior Year
_ TH203A
TH103L
Acting Studio III
Crew-
3.0
TH 103 L
Fall
TH209A
Voice and Speech
TH423
Acting Studio: Verse Drama 1 4.0
TH311A
Theater History I
3.0
for Actors III
2'.0
TH415A
Movement for Actors Vn
2.0
HUXXX
Arts Criticism (or equivalent) 3.0
TH215A
Movement for Actors III
2.0
TH419
Business of Theater
1.0
HU103A
Intro, to Modernism 1
3.0
TH311A
Theater History I
3.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
6.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
HU103A
Intro, to Modernism I
3.0
Fall Total
13.0
Fall Total
15.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
Spring
Spring
Fall Total
17.0
THXXX
Studio Electives
8.0
TH103L
Crew
Spring
Electives
3.0
TH228
Playwriting
3.0
TH224
Acting Studio: Technique E
4.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
TH227
Fundamentals of
TH103L
Crew
Spring Tota
14.0
Stage Management
3.0
TH209B
Voice and Speech
for Actors IV
Movement for Actors IV
2.0
2.0
Senior Year Total
27.0
- TH351
TH311B
HU103B
Production Practicum
Theater History II
Intro, to Modernism II
1.0
3.0
TH215B
3.0
TH311B
Theater History II
3.0
HU XXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
HU 103 B
Intro, to Modernism 11
3.0
\
Spring Tota
16.0
HUXXX
Spring Tota
Liberal Arts
Year Total
3.0
17.0
34.0
-
Sophomore
Year Total
31.0
Sophomore
ii6
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Musical Theater
Bachelor of Fine Arts 123 credits
Junior
Credits
Freshmen Year Credits
Fall
Fall
TH351
Production Practicum
1.0
TH103A
Acting Studio I 3.0
TH103L
Crew
THI4IA
Voice for Musical Theater I 1 .0
TH327
Advanced Stage
THI41L
Voice for Musical Thtr. Lab
Management
3.0
TH122A
Music Skills for
Electives
3,0
Musical Theater I 2.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
6.0
TH142A
Voice Lesson for Musical Thtr. 1 .0
HUXXX
Dramatic Literature Elective
3.0
TH150A
Dance for Musical Theater I 1 .0
Fall Total
16.0
TH 123
Scene and Lighting Tech. 2.0
Spring
TH351
HUIIOA
First Year Writing I 3.0
Production Practicum
1.0
THII3
Encounters with Theater Arts 3.0
TH430
Stage to Video Production
2.0
Fall Total
16.0
TH3I7
The Fundamentals
Spring
of Directing
3.0
TH103B
Acting Studio II 3.0
Electives
3.0
TH103L
Crew
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
TH141B
Voice for Musical Theater II 1 .0
HU XXX
Dramatic Literature Elective
3.0
TH141L
Voice for Musical Thtr Lab
Spring Tota
15.0
TH122B
Music Skills II 2.0
Junior Year Total
31.0
THI42B
THI50B
THI24
HUllOB
Voice Lesson for Musical Thtr. 1 .0
Dance for Musical Theater II 1 .0
Senior Year
Costumes and Prop Tech. 2.0
First Year Writing II 3.0
TH35I
TH4I9
Production Practicum
Business of Theater
3.0
1.0
TH213
Spring Tota
Script Analysis 3.0
16.0
Studio Electives
2.0
Freshman Year Total 32.0
HUXXX
Dramatic Literature Elective
Liberal Arts
3.0
6.0
HU XXX
Sophomore
Junior
Credits
Fall Total 15.0
Spring
TH460 Production Practicum 3.0
TH452 Senior Project 3.0
TH 326 Audition Techniques 2.0
TH 449 Internship 6.0
Studio Electives 2.0
Spring Total 16.0
Senior Year Total
31.0
Fall
TH 223 Acting Studio: Technique I 4.0
THI03L Crew
TH 242 Voice Lesson for Musical Thtr. 1 .0
TH 209 A Voice and Speech
for Actors III 2.0
TH250A Dance for Musical Theater 2.0
TH222A Music Skills III 2.0
HUI03A Intro, to Modernism I 3.0
Fall Total 14.0
Spring
TH224 Acting Studio: Technique II 4.0
TH103L Crew
TH 242 Voice Lesson for Musical Thtr. 1 .0
TH 209 B Voice and Speech
for Actors IV 2.0
TH 250 B Dance for Musical Theater 2.0
TH 222 B Music Skills for
Musical Thtr. IV 2.0
TH241 Found, of Singing Acting 2.0
HU 103 B Intro, to Modernism II 3.0
Spring Total 16.0
Fall
TH323
THI03L
TH3I5A
TH3I8A
TH34IA
TH 342 A
TH350A
TH312A
HUXXX
Fall Total
Spring
TH318B
TH341B
TH 342 B
TH 350 B
THXXX
TH312B
HUXXX
Spring Total
Acting Studio: Technique III 3.0
Crew
Movement for Actors V 2.0
Musical Theater Repertory 2.0
Voice for Musical Theater 1 .0
Voice Lesson for Musical Thtr. 1 .0
Dance for Musical Theater
Musical Theater History I
Liberal Arts
I.O
3.0
3.0
16.0
Musical Theater Repertory
Voice for Musical Theater
Voice Lesson for Musical Thtr.
Dance for Musical Theater
Theater Studio Electives
Musical Theater History II
Liberal Arts
Junior Year Total
33.0
Senior Year
Fall
TH 441 A/B Voice for Musical Theater:
Cabaret 1.0,
TH 442 A/B Voice Lesson for Musical Thtr. 1 .0
THXXX Movement Elective 1.0
HUXXX Liberal Arts 6.0
Electives 4.0
Fall Total 15,0
Spring
TH 441 A/B Voice for Musical Theater:
Cabaret 1,0
TH 442 A/B Voice Lesson for Musical Thlr. 1 ,0
THXXX Movement Elective 1,0
TH4I9 Business of Theater 1,0
HU XXX Liberal Arts 6,0
Electives 4,0
Spring Total 16,0
Senior Year Total 31,0
Sophomore Year Total
30,0
Tlie University of ttie Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
117
Undergraduate and Graduate
Course Catalog
2003 • 2004
S/)
The University *
OF THE Arts® '
College of Media and
Communication
Neil Kleinman
nkleinman@uarts.edu •
Dean
215-717-6590
Barbara Spodobalski
bspodobalski @ uarts.edu
Assistant to the Dean
215-717-6024
The College of Media and Communication has approval of the
Commonwealth of Pennsylvania to grant Bachelor of Fine Arts and
Bachelor of Science degrees as part of The University of the Arts.
The newest of The University's three colleges, the College of
Media and Communication provides a crossroads for students inter-
ested in performing and visual arts, writing and narrative, new
media, new technology, and interactivity. In small classes, students
take advantage of an extremely close and supportive atmosphere, and
the opportunity to shape an education that is highly individualized
and able to reflect their goals and interests.
Programs of Study
The College of Media and Communication is dedicated to the inte-
gration of art, technology, and communication. In recognition of the
new artistic opportunities that have recently emerged and of the
importance of technology in many areas of communication, pro-
grams in the College of Media and Communication are characterized
by their reliance on text, their use of appropriate technologies, and
their commitment to collaboration and other strategies that take
advantage of individual expertise and vision placed in a cooperative
setting.
A distinctive aspect of the programs in the College is their multi-
disciplinary nature. Specialized courses that are unique and essential
to the field are augmented by major courses drawn from various pro-
grams throughout the University, and students are encouraged to
explore The University's vast artistic and academic offerings through
electives and minor courses of study.
The programs offered in the College are:
• BS in Communication
• BFA in Multimedia
• BFA in Writing for Film and Television
Each program is designed as a rigorous sequential course of study,
balancing major requirements with electives and a 42-credit liberal
arts core. As a result, each program promotes an education that is
broad and deep, as well as being practical and richly theoretical.
Students graduate knowing both how to make ideas using a diverse
set of media while also learning to think about what they are making
and why.
To extend their education. CMAC students may also develop spe-
cialized competencies by taking minors in a number of new areas:
• Documentary Video
• E-Music
• E-Publishing
•Game Design "i .
• Information Architecture
• Multimedia .
• Narrative Video _ ■ . "'
• Screenwriting
• Strategic Advertising
• Web Design • ■ . .
• Web Drama
These minors have been designed to complement the College's
majors, and have been developed with an eye both to new forms of
creative expression and the new careers that have emerged as a result
of the Internet and the growth of new media.
Special Facilities & Resources
The College of Media and Communication is housed in the
recently renovated Terra Building where students and faculty have
access to excellent facilities and equipment.
Production Studio
The College houses a multi-functional production studio available
for use by students in the College's video, audio, advertising, and
journalism classes. The studio offers students a flexibly designed
space in which to produce documentary television features, educa-
tional video and films, news features, corporate media, and television
commercials. Associated with it is a sound studio that also serves as
the center for the Communication Department's Web radio and
Webzine.
The University of the Ans Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Digital Labs and Editing Rooms
Students in Communication use a digital lab with a range of state-
of-the-art audio and video systems, pre- and post-production equip-
ment. PC. Mac. and Unix systems, and a complete spectrum of audio,
video, and Web software used to create films, videos, advertising
campaigns, and Web dramas. In addition, there is a logging and dub-
bing studio, as well as several private editing suites available to
students who need a quiet place and long blocks of uninterrupted
time to edit their work.
Multimedia Studios and Labs
The College's multimedia studios provide students with the most
advanced multimedia equipment in the region. The cross-platform
production environment spans Macintosh. PC, and Unix-based oper-
ating systems. A MAVIO station (Mobile Audio-Visual Input/Output)
allows users to input analog and digital information and to output
digital and analog information as well. These smdios are equipped
with industry-standard software from which students can create illus-
trations, scan images, record sounds, digitize video, and create
CD-ROMs. Students in the Multimedia Program use these labs to
work on video games, animations, Web nartatives, interactive
Websites, and digital videos.
MIDI Studio
The College features a MIDI Studio (Musical Instrument Digital
Interface), which is used by students in multimedia and e-music to
create electronic and experimental music for documentary and narra-
tive film and video, Web drama, and games.
Equipment Room
The College's Equipment Room offers CMAC students the oppor-
tunity to bortow the most current portable video, audio, and
photographic equipment for off-campus production. The equipment
includes digital video and still cameras, DAT and Minidisk audio
recorders, Lowell location lighdng kits, and an array of microphones,
field monitors, and accessories.
Galleries
There are a number of galleries and display areas throughout the
College that are highly flexible, equipped with professional lighting.
and supported by multimedia equipment for the display of work in all
media. There are periodic shows of student documentaries, final proj-
ects and works-in-progress developed by students as part of their
classes or independent study, as well as shows of work by faculty and
distinguished outsiders.
Special Resources
To provide its students with experience in publishing new media,
the College sponsors a student-run Webzine, a Web radio, hosts a
number of student- and alumni-produced Websites, and supports stu-
dent-developed videos, games, and interactive projects.
New Media Center
Chris Garvin
Director
The University of the Arts is proud to be a member of the New
Media Centers, a group of the nation's leading academic institutions
and technology corporations dedicated to the advancement of tech-
nology in education. The University of the Arts is one of the few art
schools worldwide to be welcomed into this organization, whose
members include New York University, Cornell, MIT, and UCLA.
The University of the Arts" New Media Center (NMC) is a state-
of-the-art digital laboratory that provides Internet access and permits
the integration of text, graphics, imagery, animation, music, and
sound. While the entire University community uses these labs, the
NMC is the primary classroom for students in the College's
Multimedia Program.
CMAC Minors
The College of Media and Communication offers minors that
enable a student to focus on a specific discipline through organized
electives. All of the CMAC minors have been designed to comple-
ment the majors students take and are intended to add skills and
experience that enrich the major as well as strengthen the capabilities
of students in a variety of fields upon graduating from the University.
A minor advisor will be assigned by the student's major program
director, except in the case of Information Architecture and Web
Design minors. Students interested in those minors will be advised by
the Director of the Multimedia department.
Students wishing to include a minor are governed by the following
guidelines:
1. Except as indicated. CMAC minors are only available to stu-
dents majoring in degree programs offered by the College of Media
and Communication.
2. A student may not take a major and a minor in the same subject.
3. Courses applied to the minor may not be used for the major, but
they may be used as elective credits.
4. All minors require a minimum of 15 credits, which are defined
by the department; generally, no substitution is allowed.
5. Students must declare their intent to complete a minor by com-
pleting the Minor Declaration Form available in the Office of the
Registrar. Both the student's major and minor advisors must sign this
fonn.
6. A student pursuing a minor may be required to complete more
than the minimum number of credits required for graduation.
7. Minors are available only to undergraduate students.
8. Students wishing to pursue a minor must meet eligibility
requirements, which may include a satisfactory grade-point average,
prerequisites, and departmental portfolio review.
9. The minor advisor must approve all courses taken as part of a
minor.
The University of tiie Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Documentary Video Minor
The minor in documentary video provides instruction in the
making of creative non-fiction stories, essays and informational pro-
grams, primarily in video form. It is designed for students who wish
to augment their studies in a related field. Through this minor, stu-
dents learn to document the lives and narratives of people and places,
portray historical, political and contemporary events, present infor-
mation in accessible and stimulating forms, and make persuasive
arguments, as well as to learn the skills related to documentary pro-
duction. Communication majors may not declare a Documentary
Video minor
E-Publisliing Minor
The minor in e-publishing provides students with skills connected to
both the craft and business of writing and publishing online. This minor
provides students with an opportunity to strengthen their journalistic
and expository writing styles especially as used in electronic media,
while also learning the basics of the business of estabhshing a Website,
Webzine, Web radio, or Weblog. The skills learned are useful for stu-
dents who are interested in online publishing as an independent
publisher or freelance writer, as well as those who wish to work with
online publishing enterprises. Majors in Communication may not
declare an E-Publishing minor.
CM 293
History of Documentary
3.0 credits
CM 391
Documentary Production I
3.0
CM 392
Documentary Production II
3.0
Elective*
3.0
One of the following:
CM 120
Sound Communication
3.0
PF 320
Film Sound
3.0
*To be determined with minor advisor.
E-Music Minor
The minor in e-music offers students majoring in both Multimedia
and Music an opportunity to create electronic and experimental
music, to develop skills that allow them to produce, package, and dis-
tribute music by taking advantage of digital technology, and to design
electronic instrumental interfaces. The minor prepares students for a
variety of highly entrepreneurial careers ranging from entertainment
and product development to creative and production work in the
recording and musical fields. This minor is only available to students
majoring in Multimedia or Music. Please note that this minor reqi-
ures 17 credits for Music majors.
MU306 History of Rock &
Experimental Music 3.0 credits
MU4i3A Recording 2.0
MM 370 E-Music Thesis Project 3.0
, For Multimedia Majors
MU 1 1 1 A/B Composition/Non-Majors 2.0
MM 440 Innovative Interfaces 3.0
MU130A/B Piano for Non-Majors (1/1) 2.0
For Music Majors
MM 110 Visual Concepts I 3.0
MM 121 Introduction to
Interface Design 3.0
One of the following:
MM 221 Interactive Studio I 3.0
MM 222 Interactive Studio II 3.0
CM 381
Digital Journalism I
3.0
HU272
Money Matters:
Applied Economics
3.0
CM 340
E-Publishing Thesis Project
3.0
Elective**
3.0
One of the following:
MM 221
Interactive Studio I*
3.0
MM 340
Interactive Programming
3.0
*Not applicable as minor credit for Multimedia majors. .
**To be determined with minor advisor.
Game Design Minor
The minor in game design explores the principles that inform
games - how they work, how to make them, why they are important,
and how they help us understand our worid and social interactions.
Students learn to construct logical narratives and rules that make pos-
sible the creation of an active .space in which gaming can take place.
Using skills based upon interface and experience design, students
program, write, and design interactive games. Upon completing the
minor, students will have completed a fully functional prototype of
an original same.
MM 240
Writing for Games
3.0 credits
MM 342
Game Play
3.0
MM 344
Game Design Thesis
3.0
Elective **
3.0
One of the following:
MM 221
Interactive Studio I *"•"
3.0
MM 222
Interactive Studio II *
3.0
MM 341
Programming for Games
3.0
*Not applicable as minor credit for Multimedia majors.
■^Not applicable as minor credit for Communication majors.
**To be determined with minor advisor, must be fulfilled
with MM 121 for Writing for Film and Television majors.
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Information Architecture Minor
The minor in information arciiitecture shows students how
designed information creates meaning. Students develop an under-
standing of user woricflow, information design, and interactivity.
They learn to create easy-to-use interfaces and information spaces.
The program has been created for students interested in developing
web sites and CD-ROMs, as well as other vehicles whose purpose is
to deliver information clearly and efficiently. This minor is available
to students majoring in any program in the University except
Multimedia. A portfolio review and interview are required before a
student is accepted into the minor.
MM 121
Introduction to
Interface Design
3.0 credits
MM 130
Information Concepts
3.0
MM 221
Interactive Studio I
3.0
MM 222
Interactive Studio II
3.0
MM 320
Advanced Interface Seminar
3.0
Multimedia Minor
The minor emphasizes the development of multimedia as an art
form, where students work in-depth to develop media-rich, multi-sen-
sorial, interactive experiences. The minor provides skills, concepts,
and tools for students interested in multimedia as a creative and
expressive art form. This minor is available to students majoring in
any program in the University except Multimedia.
MU149
MM 219
MM 310
MM 311
Aural Concepts
Intro, to Multimedia
Multimedia Studio I
Multimedia Studio II
One of the following:
MM 1 1 1 Visual Concepts
EM 110 Computer Concepts
MM 23 1 Digital Storytelling
3.0 credits
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
Narrative Video Minor
The minor in Narrative Video explores digital video as a medium
for storytelling. It introduces students to various aspects of video pro-
duction, including scriptwriting, storyboarding, editing, sound
design, directing, and producing. Students develop their skills as they
advance from scene exercises through a short film to a final year-long
project. This minor is open to all UArts majors, except those in
Film/Digital Video.
One of the followina:
WM219
Writing for Film*
3.0
CM 295
Narrative Video
Production Workshop
3.0
PF410A
Senior Cinema Production I
3.0
PF410B
Senior Cinema Production II
3.0
One of the following:
CM 120
Sound Communication**
3.0
PF320
Sync-Sound for
Narrative Film**
3.0
*Not applicable as minor credit for Writing for Film and
Television majors. A production, film studies, or Liberal Arts film-
related elective is taken instead, and is to be determined with minor
adviser.
**Not applicable as minor credit for Communication majors. A
production, film studies, or Liberal Arts film-related elective is taken
instead, and is to be determined with minor adviser.
Recommended electives for Communication and Writing for Film
and Television majors include: CM 391 Documentary Media
Production I; PF 423 Professional Practices in FilniA'ideo; PF 424
Time: A Multidisciplinary Seminar: WM 215 Screenwriting II; WM
225 Interactive Writing; WM 24 1 Arts of the Media: WM 243 Acting
and Directing for Writers.
Screenwriting Minor
The minor in screenwriting provides instruction and applied expe-
rience in the craft of scriptwriting for motion pictures and episodic
television. Topics include story structure, character, plot, beats, dra-
matic conflict, dialogue, and industry script formats. Students
advance from scene exercises through short scripts to major, profes-
sional-length portfolio pieces. Majors in Writing for Film &
Television may not declare a screenwriting minor.
WM 2 1 5 Screenwriting II
WM219 Writing for Fdm
WM 243 Screenplay Analysis
One of the following sequences:
WM 321 Adv. Screenwriting I
WM 322 Adv. Screenwnting II
or
WM317 Epi.sodic TV Writing I
WM318 Episodic TV Writing n
3.0 credits
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
123
strategic Advertising Minor
The minor in advertising strategy provides instruction in strategic
thinldng and creative execution required to design advertisements and
ad campaigns in multiple formats (print, audio, video, and interactive).
This minor offers tools and concepts to students interested in marketing
and promoting any product, service, or artistic activity. It broadens the
career options of students in any of the media and communication disci-
plines, and prepares them to work in both the profit and not-for-profit
sectors of the media and communication industries. Communication
majors may not declare a strategic advertising minor
Web Drama Minor
The minor in web drama allows students to learn and apply dra-
matic storytelling techniques to the web. It focuses on the
fundamentals of scriptwriting and interactivity, the acquisition of
basic video and animation techniques, and the overall adaptation of
these elements to the Internet. The minor allows students to combine
the principles necessary to write for television, film, or video with
those of interactivity required for web production. Upon completion
of this minor, students will have written and produced a dramatic
story that is suitable for web distribution.
CM 27 1 Creative Concepts I
CM 37 1 Advertising Strategy
CM 372 Creative Concepts II
Elective***
One of the following:
CM 211 Writing for Media*
CM 373 Introduction to
Public Relations**
3.0 credits
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
Not applicable as minor credit for Multimedia majors.
*Required for Multimedia majors.
**To be determined with minor advisor.
Web Design Minor
The minor in web design provides skills, concepts and tools for
students interested in web design as a creative medium of expression,
as a form of communication or as a profession. The skills learned
enhance the preparedness of students wishing to enter the design,
communication and media industries. Fine artists interested in the
role that Internet-based technologies and interactivity play in their
work will also find this minor to be broadening. Multimedia majors
may not declare a web design minor
WM 225
Interactive Writing I
3.0 credits
WM226
Interactive Writing II
3.0
MM 330
Web Drama Studio
3.0
One of the following:
WM219
Writing for Film*
3.0
MM 221
Interactive Studio I**
3.0
One of the following:
CM 120
Sound Communication***
3.0
CM 290
Video Production
Workshop****
3.0
MM 233
Interactive Narrative*****
3.0
*Not applicable as nninor credit for Writing for Film and
Television majors. Required for Communication and Multimedia
majors.
**Applicable as minor credit only for Writing for Film and
Television Students.
***Not applicable as minor credit for Communication majors.
****Not applicable as minor credit for Writing for Film and
Television majors.
*****Not applicable as minor credit for Multimedia majors.
MM 121 Introduction to
Interface Design
MM 3 1 1 Multimedia Studio II
One of the following:
MM 110 Visual Concepts I#
MM 1 1 1 Visual Concepts II*
Two of the following:
MM 22 1 Interactive Studio I**-i-
MM 222 Interactive Studio ll*+
MM 3320
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
Advanced Interface Seminar 3.0
■ *Required for Communication majors.
**Not applicable as minor credit for Communication majors
-I- Required for Writing for Film and Television majors
124
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
College of Media and
Communication Faculty
Susan Barry
Senior Lecturer
BFA, Nova Scotia School of Art
and Design
MA, University of Sussex
David Brown
Assistant Professor
BS, Duquesne University
MTS, Eastern Baptist Theological
Seminary
Tsla Carson
Adjunct Assistant Professor
BFA, Nova Scotia School of Art & Design
MFA. The Ohio State University
Geoff DiMasi
Assistant Professor
BA, Rutgers University
MFA, The University of the Arts
Barry Dornfeld
Director, Comimniication
Associate Professor
BA, Tufts University
MA. PhD, University of Pennsylvania
De Angela Duff
Assistant Professor
BFA, Georgia State University
BS, Georgia Institute of Technology
Mark Ellis
Master Lecturer
BA, Pennsylvania State University
Louis Fuiano
Senior Lecturer
BA, Tyler School of Art. Temple University
Chris Garvin
Director, Multimedia
Assistant Professor
BFA, State University of New York
at Buffalo
MFA, The Ohio State University
Randi Glatzer
Senior Lecturer
BS, State University of New York
at Binghamton
JoAnn Greco
Senior Lecturer
BA, New York University
Dave Hartl
Assistant Professor
BM, West Chester University
Susan jacobson
Adjimct Assistant Professor
BS, University of Florida
MPS, New York University
Ron Kanter
Master Lecturer
BS, Temple University
MFA, University of Pennsylvania
Nicole Marie Keating
Assistant Professor
BA, McGill University
MA. PhD, University of Pennsylvania
K. Lynne Koval-Bauer
Assistant Professor
BA, University of Texas at Austin
BA, University of Akron
Sharon Lefevre
Assistant Professor
BA, Princeton University
MA, MPhil, Columbia University
Larry Loebell
Adjunct Assistant Professor
BA, MFA. Temple University
MA, Colorado State University
Slavko Milekic
Associate Professor
MSc, MD, Belgrade University, Yugoslavia
PhD, University of Connecticut
JackMurnighan
Assistant Professor
BA, Brown University
MA, PhD, Duke University
CamilleA. Paglia
University Professor
BA, State University of New York
at Binghamton
MPhil, PhD. Yale University
Theta Pavis
Senior Lecturer
BA, University of California
at Los Angeles
MS, Columbia University
Graduate School of Journalism
John J. H.Phillips
Senior Lecturer
Jeff Ryder
Director. Writing for Film and Television
Associate Professor
BA. Rider College
Steven Saylor
Assistant Professor
BA, Franklin and Marshall College
MA, MFA, Temple University
Art Stiefel
Senior Lecturer
BFA, The School of Visual Arts
MarkViggiano
Senior Lecturer
BS, Saint Joseph's University
MA. Rowan University
Diane Walsh
Associate Professor
BA. San Jose State University
Michael Wellenreiter
Senior Lecturer
BS, University of Wisconsin, Madison
MFA, Temple University
Jeffrey Wolper
Adjunct Associate Professor
BA. LaSalle University
MS, PhD, University of Pennsylvania
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
125
Communication
Barry Domfeld
bdornfeld@uarts.edu
Director
215-717-6470
Media makers occupy a place of great
influence and importance in our increasingly
mediated world. This studio-based
Communication program is designed to
reflect the changing nature of the media
industries due to new technologies, demo-
graphic diversity, and the increase in global
flows of ideas, images, and products. Upon
their graduation, we expect our students to be
able to work in a variety of media forms, to
be broadly knowledgeable about the media
industry, and able to think critically about
media making and the media's impact on cul-
ture and society.
Students learn how to create work in one
or more of three principal concentrations:
documentary production, digital journalism,
and advertising using the digital tools of the
trade. While developing professional skills in
these areas, they are exposed to theory in
communication and media studies, grounding
their production work in an understanding of
how to think about media and its place in
contemporary culture. Students learn about
the connections between aesthetic
approaches and communicated meaning,
about the history of communication, and
about cultural context and organizational
constraints, and grapple with the ethical con-
siderations that arise in professional practice.
Throughout their undergraduate training,
students take a range of courses in the liberal
arts and choose electives throughout the
University. Students" production work builds
on this intellectual base, beginning with exer-
cises and growing to intensive projects in the
selected area of concentration. The program
stresses digital media production across plat-
forms and promotes an understanding of
what these new tools make possible and what
they limit.
Freshmen take courses that offer both an
historical and a social perspective to commu-
nication, while they learn visual and sound
fundamentals through introductory studio
courses. They are introduced to field-based
imaging equipment and post-production stu-
dios, and begin to produce and critique their
own work.
The year-long Media Forms and Contexts
course in the sophomore year acts as a key-
stone to the basic Communication curriculum
and intensive screening of mainstream and
alternative media forms. The course gives
students experience in producing in a broad
range of media genres. The Interactive Studio
and Writing for Media courses round out this
year.
In the junior year, students work more
intensively in each of the program concentra-
tions - Documentary Production, Digital
Journalism, and Advertising. Media
Industries and Communication Theory and
Culture in the 20th Century deepen students'
understanding of the changing landscape of
media industries and their cultural impact.
For their senior year, students choose one
of the three concentrations as the focus of
their studio work, taking a year-long team-
based studio course. Through this intensive
training, students develop a portfolio of
media work, pulling together their previous
experiences and interests into a project that
can represent their abilities to the profes-
sional worid. Additional courses, including
two internships, prepare students for profes-
sional life beyond the University.
In addition to the major, students may
minor in a five-course sequence designed to
augment of their major. Students in
Communication are particularly interested in
minoring in digital filmmaking, e-publishing.
screenwriting, or web drama. The
Department also offers minors in documen-
tary video and strategic advertising, which
are available to students in the other majors
by the College.
Communication
Core Curriculum
The core cumculum is common to all majors in the
Communication program. These required courses
develop a solid foundation from which students
pursue their choice of concentration. Students for-
mally select their concentration during the advising
period in the fall of the junior year.
Freshman
Year Credits
Fall
CM 120
Sound Communication
3.0
CM 250*
History of Communication
3.0
MM 110
Visual Concepts I
3.0
HUllOA
First Year Writing I
3.0
HU 103 A
Intro, to Modernism I
3.0
Fall Total
15.0
Spring
CM 290
Video Production Workshop
3.0
MM 130
Information Concepts
3.0
Electives
3.0
HUllOB
First Year Writing 11
3.0
HU 103B
Intro, to Modernism II
3.0
Spring Tota
15.0
Freshman Year Total:
30.0
Sophomore Year
Fall
CM 201
Media Forms and Contexts
4.5
CM 211
Writing for Media
3.0
PF220
Intro, to Documentary
Photography
3.0
Electives
3.0
HU XXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
Fall Total
16.5
Spring
CM 202
Media Forms and Contexts II 4.5
CM 271
Advertising:
Creative Concepts I
3.0
MM 221
Interactive Studio I
3.0
Electives
3.0
HU272
Money Matters
3.0
Spring Tota
16.5
Sophomore
Year Total:
33.0
" Indicates discipline history requirement.
126
The University of tlie Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Advertising Concentration
123 credits
Students learn to work in the creative sectors of the
advertising industry by combining creative skills,
strategic thinking, and the use of multiple media.
Digital Journalism
Concentration 123 credits
Students learn to combine research, reporting,
writing, editorial, and interactive design skills by
developing news-based material for online publica-
tions.
Documentary Production
Concentration 123 credits
Students learn to use video and audio technologies to
capture real-world stories in moving images. Courses
emphasize technique, project management, and
moving from concept through research to execution
Junior Year Credits
of documentary projects.
Fall
Advertising Strategy
Development
Digital Journalism 1
Documentary Media Prod. 1
Media Industries
Liberal Arts
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
Junior Year Credits
CM 371
Fall
CM 381
CM 391
CM 260 *
HUXXX
Digital Journalism I
Documentary Media Prod. 1
Media Industries
Electives
Liberal Arts
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
JuniorYear Credits
CM 381
CM 391
CM 260 *
HUXXX
Fall
CM 381
CM 391
CM 260 *
DigitalJoumalism 1 3,0
Documentary Media Prod. 1 3.0
Media Industries 3.0
Electives 3.0
Fall Total
15.0
Fall Total
15.0
HU XXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
Spring
CM 372
CM 373
CM 251*
Adv: Creative Concepts 11
Intro, to Public Relations
Communication
Theories and Culture
3.0
3.0
3.0
Spring
CM 382
CM 383
CM 251*
Digital Journalism 11
News and Culture
in the Digital Age
Communication
3.0
3.0
Fall Total
Spring
CM 392
CM 393
CM 251*
Documentary Media Prod.
History of Documentary
Communication
15.0
II 3.0
3.0
HUXXX
Electives
Liberal Arts
3.0
3.0
Theories and Culture
Electives
3.0
3.0
Theories and Culture
Electives
3.0
3.0
Spring Tota
15.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
HU XXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
Junior Year Total:
30.0
Spring Tota
15.0
Spring Total
15.0
Senior Year
Junior Year
Total:
30,0
JuniorYear total:
30,0
Fall
Senior Studio I
4.5
Senior Year
Senior Year
CM 461
Fall
Fall
CM 499
Internship
1.5
CM 461
Senior Studio I
4.5
CM 461
Senior Studio I
4.5
HUXXX
Electives
Liberal Arts
3.0
6.0
CM 499
Internship
Electives
1.5
3.0
CM 499
Internship
Electives
1.5
3.0
Fall Total
15.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
6.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
6,0
Spring
Fall Total
15.0
Fall Total
15.0
CM 462
CM 435
Senior Studio II
Current Issues in Comm.
4.5
3.0
Spring
CM 462
Senior Studio II
4.5
Spring
CM 462
Senior Studio II
4.5
CM 499
Internship
1.5
CM 435
Current Issues in Comm.
3.0
CM 435
Current Issues in Comm.
3.0
HU XXX
Electives
Liberal Arts
3.0
3.0
CM 499
Internship
Electives
1.5
3.0
CM 499
Internship
Electives
1.5
3.0
Spring Tota
15.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
Senior Year Total:
30.0
Spring Tota
15.0
Spring Total
15.0
Senior Year lotal:
30.0
Senior Year lotal:
30.0
''' Indicales discipline history requirement.
* Indicates discipline history requirement.
The University of ttie Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
127
Multimedia
Chris Garvin
cgarvin@uarts.edu
Director
215-717-6322
The comprehensive nature of its academic
programs makes The University of the Arts
an ideal setting for an education in the
emerging fields of multimedia. Our goal is to
develop the cultural producers of the next
millennium-not merely participants, but the
avant-garde of the many industries affected
by the advent of our knowledge-based
economy. Internet, communications, pub-
lishing, software, and entertainment, in
addition to the tine arts, are the most notable
of the industries ready to incorporate multi-
media into their core endeavors.
The major in multimedia at The University
of the Arts focuses on the integration of
image, sound, text, and interactivity into
communicative works, whether they be for
commercial or fine arts audiences. In our
holistic approach to the creation of these
works, we stress craftsmanship, collabora-
tion, seamless integration of diverse media,
and artistic excellence. Working with today's
technology, students create a variety of multi-
media works in a collaborative studio
environment, while they develop a concep-
tual and social perspective on the work they
and others create.
The curriculum consists of a four-year
studio sequence accompanied by a corre-
sponding intellectual sequence that includes
a generous amount of liberal arts and elective
courses. Freshmen are introduced to the basic
aesthetic and technical issues essential to
multimedia; these are approached visually,
aurally, and textually. Students develop an
understanding of the history and evolution of
multimedia: the ability to work collabora-
tively; basic design skills; facility in the use
of digital tools; sensitivity to general commu-
nication concepts; and an understanding of
the principles of music and of information
management for multimedia design.
As a means of expanding their under-
standing of the arts, developing a sensitivity
to the traditional media, and beginning or
advancing a skill in a particular art discipline
that they can bring to their collaborative proj-
ects, freshmen select an elective course from
any department in the University.
Presentarion of a portfolio and/or audition
and permission of the instructor may be
required for entry to these classes.
Built on the foundation of the first year,
the sophomore curriculum addresses in
greater depth components of mulUmedia
such as the moving image, writing and con-
tent, and interactivity. A discipline history
course reviews the development of multi-
media and analyzes its historical influences.
Multimedia students are encouraged to
develop a secondary concentration in another
art form as a specialty within multimedia.
The electives fulfill that function as well as
encourage a diversity of interests among the
multimedia students.
Students in their junior year refine their
craft with advanced work in multimedia that
focuses on completion, presentation, and col-
laboration in a project-based environment.
Thus they are prepared both conceptually and
technically for the integrated work required
in the senior year.
The senior-year curriculum enables stu-
dents to synthesize the concepts and
techniques learned during the first three years
while preparing them for entry into the pro-
fession. In the Senior Studio, full-length
projects with self-directed themes allow stu-
dents to explore the art of multimedia and its
potential for personal expression and com-
munication. In the Business Seminar and the
Special Projects courses, multimedia profes-
sionals address professional practice,
essential business skills, and current industry
issues in order to prepare graduates to pursue
satisfying careers in multimedia.
Students in Multimedia may also take five-
course minors, several of which have been
designed specifically to complement their
major Of particular interest for students in
Multimedia are minors in e-music, game
design, and digital filmmaking. The
Department also offers minors in information
architecture, e-publishing, multimedia, and
web design, which are available to students
majoring in programs throughout the
College.
128
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Multimedia
Bachelor of Fine Arts 123 credits
Freshman
Year Credits
Junior Year
Credits
Fall
Fall
MM 110
Visual Concepts I
3.0
MM 310
Multimedia Studio I
3.0
MM 130
Information Concepts
3.0
MM 320
Advanced Interface Seminar 3.0
MU149A
Aural Concepts I
3.0
Electives
3.0
HU103A
Intro, to Modernism I
3.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
6.0
HUllOA
First Year Writing I
3.0
Fall Total
15.0
Fall Total
15.0
Spring
Spring
MM 311
Multimedia Studio 11
3.0
MMlll
Visual Concepts II
3.0
MM 350
Business Seminar
2.0
MM 121
Intro, to Interface Design
3.0
Eleedves
3.0
MU 149 B
Aural Concepts II
3.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
6.0
Electives
2.0
Spring Total
14.0
HU103B
HUllOB
Intro, to Modernism II
First Year Writing II
;ar Total:
3.0
3.0
17.0
32.0
Junior Year Total:
29.0
Spring Tola
Senior Year
Freshman Y
Fall
— MM 410
Senior Studio I
4.0
Sophomore Year
MM 472
Special Projects in
Fall
Multimedia
3.0
MM 221
Interactive Studio I
3.0
Electives
3.0
MM 271*
Survey of Multimedia
3.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
6.0
MM 223
Interactive Narratixe
3.0
Fall Total
16.0
HUXXX
Electives
Liberal Arts
3.0
3.0
Spring
MM 411
Senior Studio II
4.0
Fall Total
15.0
Electives
6.0
Spring
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
MM 150
Collab. and Spontaneity Sem. 3.0
Spring Total
13,0
PF332
CM 211
Video and Animation Tech.
Writing for Media
Interactive Studio II
3.0
3.0
3.0
Senior Year Total:
29.0
MM 222
Electives
3.0
* Fulfills three credits of the discipline history
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
requirement
Spring Total
18.0
Sophomore
Year Total:
33.0
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
129
Writing for Film
and Television
Jeff Ryder
jryder@uarts.edu
Director
215-717-6466
Writing for Film and Television is an
undergraduate program dedicated to the art
of dramatic writing for film and television.
The dramatic script serves as the creative
blueprint for the collaborative creation in
film and television. The curriculum for the
program aims to educate and prepare stu-
dents for the professional world in this
unique genre of wriUng.
A four-year sequence of studio wrifing
courses act as the cornerstone of the cur-
riculum. Starting with Dramatic Structure in
the first year, students will create their own
written work in an intensive workshop envi-
ronment. In the second year, screenwriting is
introduced, along with script analysis. In the
third and fourth years, students will be
writing full-length scripts for film.
Adaptafion from ficfion and nonfiction
sources complements students" original
written work. To appreciate the art form, as
well as the collaborative spirit of film and tel-
evision, there are courses in film and video
production, as well as survey courses in the
history of film and television. A strong liberal
arts experience in drama, literature, and his-
tory gives students the breadth of knowledge
required of the professional writer.
Internships in the senior year will provide
students with an exposure to a professional
work setting.
In addition to the major, students may take
several minors in five-course sequences
designed to complement their major
Students in Writing for Film and Television
are particularly interested in the minors in
digital filmmaking, documentary video,
game design, strategic advertising, or Web
drama. The department also offers a minor in
screenwriting available to students in the
other majors offered by the College.
Writing for Film
and Television
Bachelor of Fine Arts 123 credits
Freshman
Credits
Junior Year Credits
Fall
Fall
WMI13
Dramatic Structure I
3.0
WM321
Advanced Screenwriting I
3.0
WM 253*
History of Television
3.0
WM341
Acting/Directing for Writer
3.0
WM251
Narrative Cinema I
3.0
Choose one of the following two:
HUllOA
First Year Writing I
3.0
HU411B*"
*Shakespeare
3.0
HU 103 A
Intro, to Modernism I
3.0
HU413***
Literature and Film:
Fall Total:
15.0
From Text to Screen
Spring
Electives
6.0,
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
WM114
Dramatic Structure II
3.0
WM252
Narrative Cinema II
3.0
Fall Total:
18.0
HU 264**
Modem American History
3.0
Spring
HUllOB
First Year Writing II
3.0
WM 322
Advanced Screenwriting II
3.0
HU 103 B
Intro, to Modernism II
3.0
WM317
Episodic TV Writing
3.0
Spring Iota
15.0
WM315
Adaptation from Fiction
Electives
3.0
6.0
30.0
rrcsnman i
_ Spring Total
15.0
Sophomore Year
Fall
Screenwriting I
3.0
~ Junior Total
33,0
WM214
Senior Year
WM343
Film Story Analysis
3.0
Fall
WM241
Arts of the Media
3.0
HU320A*
Found, of
WM411
Senior Thesis I
3.0
Western Literature I
3.0
WM316
Adaptation from Non Fiction 3.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
Electives
6.0
HU390
Mass Media and the Arts
3.0
Fall Total:
15.0
Fall Total:
15.0
Spring
WM215
Screenwriting II
3.0
Spring
WM243
Screenplay Analysis
3.0
WM412
Senior Thesis II
3.0
CM 290
Video Production Worksho]
3.0
WM499
Internship
3.0
HU320B*
Found, of
Electives
6.0
Western Literature II
3.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
HUXXX
Liberal Arts
3.0
Spring Tota
15.0
Spring Tola
Year Total:
15.0
30.0
Senior Year Total:
30.0
Sophomore
* Fulfills three credits of the discipline
hisloiy requirement.
** Fulfills three credits of the social sciences
requirement.
*** Fulfills three credits of the literature
requirement.
130
The University of ttie Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Undergraduate and Graduate
Course Catalog
2003 • 2004
j2
The University
OF THE Arts®
Art Education
AE200
Presentation Skills
1 credit. 2 hours (undergraduate)
A component of the Introduction to Visual
Arts Education, this course addresses effective
speech and presentation sicills for the teacher,
artist, and administrator communicating with
groups, classes, or clients.
Open 10 non-majors.
AE 201
Introduction to
Visual Arts Education
2 credits, 3 hours (undergraduate)
A theoretical and practical introduction to the
entire field of art education. A survey of var-
ious aspects of teaching in a variety of
situations and environments, through field
observations and classroom lecture-discus-
sions, including public and private schools
K-12, as well as specialized and alternative
settings in museum education, eariy childhood
educafion, special education (for students with
disabilities and gifted children), and adult edu-
cation.
Open to non-majors.
AE507
Educational Media A:
Teaching and Learning
3 credits, 3 hours
Provides students with the knowledge, skills,
and strategies to successfully integrate educa-
tional media in the teaching and learning of
K-12 art. Areas of study include the theoret-
ical and conceptual basis for educational
technology in the curriculum, training and
development of technology skills, such as
computer graphics. Web page design, elec-
tronic presentations, and issues and problems
related to technology use in education. Field
trips to local K- 1 2 technology arts programs
further student understanding of technology
use and integration in educational settings.
Prerequisite: Permission of the instructor.
AE 509
Educational Media B:
Planning and Management
3 credits, 3 hours
The design, planning, and management of
educational media in the K-12 classroom and
school. Topics of study include developing a
technology plan; software and hardware
acquisition and assessment: care, mainte-
nance, and security of classroom and lab
computer technologies; networking concepts,
design and protocols; Internet basics and
issues; and. managing technological and
human resources. Guest speakers support
the study of theses topics. Independent visita-
tions to either K-12 educational settings,
technology fairs, conferences, or businesses
will expand student knowledge and under-
standing of the planning and management
of technology.
Prerequisite: Permission of the instructor.
AE530
Interactive Media for Art and
Museum Educators
3 credits. 3 hours
This course acquaints students with existing
technology and media available for instruction
to art and museum educators. Students learn to
design and create interactive multimedia proj-
ects using a variety of multimedia authoring
tools.
Open to non-majors.
AE531
Multicultural Learning-Arts
3 credits, 3 hours
The artistic expressions of Africa, Asia, and
the Americas, the Near and Middle East, and
related societies are examined for their aes-
thetic and contextual meanings. Cross-cultural
contributions to world art history are recog-
nized through the study of characteristic styles
and techniques, dynastic periods of art and
artists, as well as the relationship of art to
varied systems of belief.
Open to non-majors.
AE532
Design for Interdisciplinary Learning
3 credits, 3 hours
An introduction and curricular model for inte-
grated learning in which design and the visual
arts, music, theater, and dance are the central
means of integrating all disciplines to provide
a more holistic approach to learning. An
approach to arts-centered learning through a
design-based problem-solving model is
emphasized to address issues in all subjects
and at all levels of education.
Open to non-majors with an interest in
integrated arts.
AE533
Art and Inclusionary Education
3 credits, 3 hours
This course is designed to provide the full
scope of methodologies, techniques, and inno-
vative strategies needed to teach special
education students effectively. Using the arts
as a means for adapting to diverse learning
methods, the K-12 classroom will be regarded
as a dynamic setting for inclusionary learning.
The impact of special-needs art education will
be further realized through direct school and
community engagement: programs and
national as well as local organizations will be
made available to assist in developing field
placements. Arranged field placement oppor-
tunities will include a broad range of
community resources.
Open to non-majors.
AE 547
Program Design and Methods:
Elementary
3 credits. 3 hours lecture-discussion,
3 hours field work (8 weeks)
Through review of current literature, lectures,
discussion, field observation, and mini-
teaching, students explore various educational
philosophies and develop and implement
effective classroom curricula based on pre-
vailing theories of learning and child
development.
Prerequisite: AE 201. May be taken by classroom
teachers or artists who wish to have a broader knowl-
edge of methodology and content for teaching
elementary art.
AE548
Program Design and Methods:
Secondary
3 credits, 3 hours lecture-discussion,
3 hours field work (8 weeks)
Continuation of AE 547 with emphasis on
middle and secondary school.
Prerequisites:. 4E 201 and either.iE547orAE559.
AE549
Program Design and Methods:
Aesthetics/Art Criticism
This course is designed to develop skills, tech-
niques, and strategies for integrating
developmentally appropriate aesthetics and art
criticism activities in the K-12 classroom.
Using prevailing theories of learning,
teaching, and child development, students will
design puzzle cases, activities, and curricula
that promote the philosophical investigation
and interpfetation of art and aesthetic objects.
Humanities
132
Ttie University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
AE550
Creative and Cognitive Development
3 credits, 3 hours
This course is designed to develop skills in
recognizing the developmental stages of chil-
dren, adolescents, and adults according to the
theories of Jean Piaget, Lawrence Kohlberg,
Viktor Lowenfeld, and Erik Erikson. In addi-
tion, the course will explore the learning
theories of Jerome Bruner, B.F. Skinner.
Howard Gardner, Madehne Hunter, and
Bemice McCarthy toward understanding indi-
vidual differences in creative and cogniti\'e
development and learning styles.
Open to non-majors.
AE 552
Tiie Art of Teaching
3 credits, 3 hours
Teacher preparation and knowledge of instruc-
tional techniques and curricula development
will be addressed, including development of
presentation and speaking skills, professional
image, teachers' rights and responsibilities,
and aspects of group processes. The course
will explore cultural and family factors that
influence learning, expectations conveyed by
teachers and peer behavior, and techniques of
instruction and creativity. A retrospective
analysis of each student's individual education
experience and his/her perceptions of teaching
will be explored through interactive simula-
tion of classroom situations and teaching
styles.
Prerequisite: AE 547.
Open to non-majors.
AE559
Saturday Practicum
3 credits. 3 hours lecture-discussion.
3 hours field work ( 10 weeks)
Students are involved in various aspects of the
Saturday Lab School. They observe classroom
instruction, plan and teach lessons, and exhibit
student work under the supervision of cooper-
ating master teachers and through the
instruction of a professor in the seminar por-
tion of the course.
Prerequisites: AE20I and A E 54 7.
AE599
Professional Writing Intensive
2 credits, 2 hours
This course is required for students entering
all art education programs (pre-certification,
MAT, MA, MA+EM) if they do not pass the
Art Education Department writing proficiency
exam. It addresses the use of effective and
cogent written communication for the teacher.
artist, and administrator to classes, groups, or
clients.
A rt Education students only.
AE 602
History of Ideas in Art
and Museum Education
3 credits, 3 hours
Seminar on major issues and trends in the his-
tory of art and museum education, with an
emphasis on child-centered and content-cen-
tered theories and the theoretical antecedents
of the Discipline Based Art Education move-
ment and standards-based education.
AE606
Research in Education:
Methods and Trends
3 credits. 3 hours
A graduate education seminar on the principal
approaches to research for art and museum
education. The course examines types of
research, applications, and recent studies for
their methodologies and findings, grant
writing, and assessment techniques.
Graduate students only.
AE610
Graduate Studio Seminar
3 credits. 3 hours
A one-semester interdisciplinary seminar
exclusively for arts educators. Topics of broad
concern to artists will be addressed in
response to students' work, assigned readings,
and occasional public lectures or other art
events in the University and the community.
Corequisite: Student siiouid he currently enrolled in
studio work \thile taking this course.
AE 632
Applications of
Interdisciplinary Learning
3 credits, 3 hours
This course practically applies the knowledge
gained in Design for Interdisciplinary
Learning by offering a variety of curriculum
frameworks through which elementary and
secondary school teachers can implement this
curriculum. Students use a variety of models
and thematic approaches to develop integrated
arts curricula that relate the arts to other disci-
plines. In keeping with interdisciplinary in a
postmodern aesthetic, students use a variety of
interactive media.
Class sessions include lectures, media pre-
sentations, discussions, interactive group
activities, guest presenters, and workshops in
the university and the community.
This graduate-level course is available for
advanced undergraduates with an interest in
integrated arts.
Prerequisite: AE 532.
AE649
Graduate Project/Thesis
6 credits (or 3 credits per semester for two
semesters)
A culminating independent project supervised
by a faculty advisor. The project or thesis may
take either of two distinct forms: a) an aca-
demic thesis presenting original research on a
significant historical, theoretical, or pedagog-
ical question relating to visual arts education,
or b) a studio or curriculum project intended
for use as a pedagogical tool.
Prerequisites: AE 602, .AE 606. and.AE 610.
Other conditions: Students must also complete a
University seminar, and be approved hy the Chair of
.Art Education to enroll for the Thesis Project.
AE659
Student Teaching Practicum
4.5 to 9 credits.
Five full days a week for 12. 2-hour lecture
discussions.
An intensive experience built around a 14-
week student teaching practicum. in which the
student devotes seven weeks to teaching at the
elementary school level and seven weeks at
the middle or secondary-school level under
the guidance and supervision of master
teachers and Art Education Department fac-
ulty. Educational issues and concerns are
addressed in the seminar portion of the course.
Students may elect to take the two field
placements over two semesters. If this option
is taken, the full 15-week seminar that accom-
panies the Practicum must be taken in both
semesters.
Prerequisites: AE 201. AE 533, AE 547, AE 548,
and A E 559.
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
133
Art Therapy
AT 300
Introduction to Art Therapy
3 credits, 3 hours
Introduces students to key concepts and
dimensions of the profession of art therapy.
Course content addresses the different orienta-
tions and approaches that comprise this
discipline, as well as the diverse populations
that are served. Art therapists that work within
a wide range of settings are invited to present
to the class to balance the theoretical with the
practical.
Prerequisite: HLi 181 A, HU I SI B, or permission
of instructor
Open to all students.
AT 301
Social and Group Process
3 credits, 3 hours
Introduces students to a basic understanding
of social groups, group behaviors, group
therapy, and group art therapy. The class helps
students to better identify their own role as
well as that of others within a group setting.
Experiential art tasks are used to underscore
course material and exemplify group
dynamics.
Prerequisite: HU 181 B, AT 500, or permission of
instructor
AT 304
Theories and Techniques of Art
Therapy with Children and
Adolescents
3 credits. 3 hours
Introduces students to the use of art therapy
with children and adolescents, including the
different arenas where art therapists work with
children, as well as the various approaches
that are utilized. Normal child development,
as evidenced in artwork, will serve as the
foundation for understanding key concepts.
Indicators of emotional, cognitive, and behav-
ioral difficulties, as seen in art productions,
are also presented.
Prerequisite: HU18IA. HU 181 B. HU 384,
AT 300, or permission of instructor
AT 305
Theories and Techniques of Art
Therapy with Adults
3 credits, 3 hours
The practice of art therapy with adults as
demonstrated through the use of case material
from a variety of clinical populations.
Overviews of diagnostic indicators, as seen in
artwork, are presented. Issues of long- and
short-term treatment are addressed, as well as
a rich variety of interventions at the art thera-
pist's disposal.
Prerequisite: AT 300, AT 304, or permission of
instructor
AT 401
Senior Practicum
3 credits. 3 hours
A field placement provides an opportunity for
the student to apply classroom knowledge to
work within a specific clinical setting. A
research paper, based on the experience,
enables students to integrate theory with
observation and practice. This pracficum
includes on-site individual supervision by an
art therapist, as well as a small group supervi-
sion on campus with the Art Therapy faculty.
Prerequisites: HU 181 A. HU 181 B. HU384,
HU483.AT300.AT301,AT304andAT305.
Open to Art Therapy Concentration students only.
Communication
CM 101
Communication, Culture,
and Process
6 credits. 7.5 hours
Grounds students in an exploration of commu-
nication as a social and cultural process by
integrating theory and analysis with practical
production projects. The course draws on
theory and research in communication, lin-
guistics, anthropology, and sociology, applied
across cultural settings. Student work includes
reading, writing of reaction papers, and proj-
ects combining observations and analysis of
communication processes with digital video
production. The studio component of the
course begins with basic instruction in the use
of digital video camera and audio equipment
and covers logging, organizing, importing,
editing, and presenting digital material.
Projects employ video to document observa-
tions of nonverbal communication, visual
communication, interviews and speech events,
and performances. Studio time will be linked
to course projects.
CIW 120
Sound Communication
3 credits, 4.5 hours
This introduction to the field of sound com-
munication enables students to conceptualize
the importance of sound in cultural life and
prepares them in practical approaches to field
recording and working with various types of
sound. The course surveys approaches to
sound as a critical dimension of social com-
munication through readings and a broad
range of audio examples, including documen-
tary, journalistic, theatrical, and experimental
approaches. Students receive training in dig-
ital audio field and post-production
equipment, and complete practical field exer-
cises and an intensive sound project.
^34 The University of Uie Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
CM 201. CM 202
Media Forms and Contexts I, II
4.5 credits. 7 hours
A two-semester exploration of a range of
media forms through the perspectives of
genre, structure, and representation, com-
bining analysis and media production.
Students are exposed to mainstream and alter-
native media in weekly screenings, focusing
on formal issues (i.e.. time, space, point of
view) and social issues (i.e., cross-cultural
representation, stereotyping, the portrayal of
gender and sexuality, the representation of
violence) in order to observe how media forms
create cultural meanings. Students develop an
analytical and practical language for talking
about media genres and an understanding of
how production practices and audience expec-
tations combine to affect the structure of
media forms. In the studio component of the
course, exercises approach the topics in media
representation through creative work in docu-
mentary, electronic journalism, and
advertising, using digital video, audio, still
images, and the Web.
Prerequisile.CM 101.
CM 211 ^
Writing for Media
3 credits. 4 hours
An intense writing course developing skills in
effective, clear, and persuasive writing in the
areas of media and communication. Students
work from a variety of source materials,
including secondary research and primary
interviews, to craft pieces in several formats.
Projects include a research paper from sec-
ondary research sources, a project proposal, a
treatment for a media work, a newspaper
article, and a life narrative from interview
material. Emphasis is on writing structure and
style, editing and revising, suitability to spe-
cific audiences, and delivering material on
time and at prescribed lengths. Class meets
two times per week, with original writing or
revisions due each class.
Prerequisite: HU HOB.
CM 250
History of Communication
3 credits, 3 hours
Examines how major developments and tech-
nological changes in communication have
influenced social and culmral history and how
major historical and social changes have had
an impact on communication. Draws connec-
tions between historically specific and
contemporary modes of communication in a
variety of times and cultures, and the present.
Discipline History ISocial Science
CM 251
Communication Theories
and Culture
3 credits, 3 hours
An intellectual history of influential 20th cen-
tury theories of communication, with a focus
on the relationships between media and cul-
ture. This course will intertwine critical
intellectual developments in the field with
public events and social movements, seen in
the context of the changing daily lives of
people in diverse places. We emphasize how
communication systems shaped the course of
public and private lives during this century,
and how changes in communicadon reshaped
the way we theorize about the world and the
field. Students read primary material in its
original form, view media material illustradng
critical concepts, write short position papers
reflecdng on communication theory and cul-
ture, and complete a term paper on one of the
course modules.
Discipline History ISocial Science
CM 260
Media Industries
3 credits. 3 hours
Investigates the range of organizations and
economic forces involved in media produc-
tion. It covers diverse production models,
from mainstream and corporate to public
sector to alternative, and draws comparisons
with media industries in other cultural set-
dngs. The course focuses on issues such as:
market structure, government regulation,
media conglomeration and linkages, produc-
tion organization, audience measurement and
behavior, and globalization. Students will
view examples from broadcast and cable
news, advertising, Hollywood and inde-
pendent cinema, public broadcasfing, public
access and community-based media, and new
media industries. The course includes a
research component in which students conduct
a small original research project, using inter-
views, fieldwork observations, and/or library
research.
Discipline History ISocial Science
CM 271
Advertising: Creative Concepts I
3 credits, 6 hours
Whether an advertisement appears in print, on
television or radio, or on the Internet, it is built
around an idea. Students learn to recognize
and create strong advertising ideas that are rel-
evant to the product and the audience.
Emphasis is placed on print advertising. After
students grasp what constitutes a strong idea
by smdying and creating print advertisements,
they translate that understanding into other
media. Students learn how to allow their cre-
ativity to be guided by strategy. Students are
exposed to outstanding creative work and
readings, from which they learn essendal prin-
ciples for developing strong ideas. They apply
these principles as they create advertising of
their o\\ n.
CM 290
Video Production Workshop
3 credits. 6 hours
Acquaints students with the fundamentals of
visual storytelling by providing hands-on
experience translating the written word into
images and sounds. Areas of study will
include framing images, lighting, using off-
screen space and sound, editing, and post
production sound. Students will integrate their
own wridng into producing some of these
projects.
CM 293
History of Documentary
3 credits. 4.5 hours
Introduces the historical and aesthetic sweep
of approaches to documentary film and video.
Through extensive screenings and readings,
this survey begins to expose students to the
range of choices and creative possibilities of
communicating information and emotion
through this form. These works are seen
through aesthetic choices, technological limi-
tations, and social setdngs. In addition to
attending screenings and discussion, smdents
write two short papers and one longer term
paper.
Humanities
CM 295
Narrative Video Production
Worl<shop
3 credits. 6 hours
Hands-on course in directing and producing of
narradve film with major emphasis on story-
boarding, blocking and rehearsal of actors,
dramatic beats, camera placement, point of
view, coverage, long takes, and analytic mon-
tage, as .well as the fundaments of continuity
editing. Includes three directing exercises and
a 10-minute final project.
Prerequisite: CM 290 or permission of instructor
The University of the Ans Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
135
CM 340
E-Publishing Thesis Project
3 credits, 3 hours
A culminating course for students in the
e-music minor in which they develop an appli-
cation. Students develop a proposal for an
application and carry the idea through
research implementation, execution, and pres-
entation. With the consent of the instructor,
projects may be the work of one student or
that of a group of students, be in a variety of
shapes, and in a variety of media.
PrerequisUe: Permission of instniclor.
CM 350
Gender Images in Media
3 credits, 3 hours
Explores the representation of gender and sex-
uality in the media over the past century and
how images of male and female both follow
and create social change.
Prerequisite: HU 103 B.
Liberal Art elective
CM 360
Communication Production
Woritshop
3 credits, 6 hours
This project-oriented production course is
designed to offer students an opportunity to
work on a publication project in a specific
communication medium or genre otherwise
unavailable. Many of these projects will be
built with the intention of being published or
made available to an audience beyond the
classroom: some of them will also be con-
nected to extracurricular clubs or activites.
Students will work collaboratively on projects
in this meduim, and present their work to an
audience of peers and/or professionals.
Projects will include: developing a Web radio
site, producing a television commerical, pro-
ducing advanced audio projects, developing
an online publication, etc.
Prerequisite: CM 1 01 or permission of instructor
CM 371
Advertising Strategy Development
3 credits, 4.5 hours
Grounds students in the business side of cre-
ative advertising. Examines the functions of
the various departments within an advertising
agency, focusing on strategic development,
and introducing students to the three key steps
in that development- market segmentation,
brand positioning, and research. Students
learn a variety of qualitative and quantitative
research methods and analytical methods, and
apply what they have learned by developing
and presenting an advertising strategy for an
actual product.
CM 372
Advertising: Creative Concepts II
3 credits. 6 hours
Having learned during the fall of their junior
year how to create strong individual concepts,
students go on to create broader and deeper
concepts that can form the basis for a number
of ads and learn how to execute an idea in
more than one medium. The course begins by
examining award-winning print campaigns in
order to recognize suitable ideas for multi-ad
campaigns: to identify elements and themes
and their grounding in research; and to under-
stand the consumer. The course then examines
how interactive media are being used to build
customer relationships and brand identities,
and explores the strategic functions of these
new media. Students apply what they have
learned by developing storyboards for a
product or service that reinforces that
product's existing brand personality.
Prerequisite: Sophomore standing.
CM 373
Introduction to Public Relations
3 credits. 4.5 hours
Introduces students to the fundamentals of
public relations, viewed as a marketing com-
munications tool, and pays special attention to
its role in the non-profit sphere. Reviews the
functions of a wide range of marketing com-
munications tools and explores how PR can be
used in conjunction with them to achieve an
organization's objectives, helping students to
come to understand the role of public relations
in the overall marketing communications plan.
Students learn how to coordinate messages in
order to allow the company to speak with one
voice and reinforce one overall corporate
identity, with special attention to social mar-
keting and the public. Students apply what
they have learned by working on a series of
projects that culminate in the development of
a public relations proposal for a non-profit
organization using the principles and practices
defined and discussed in this course.
Prerequisite: HU HOB or permission of instructor.
CM 381
Digital Journalism I
3 credits, 6 hours
The primary skills and practices involved in
constructing news for the online environment.
Begins with an exploration of the evolution of
journalism from print to online and digital
forms. By looking critically at a range of jour-
nalistic examples, and reading about the
changing work of reporting, students grapple
with the differences between traditional and
new media forms of journalism and begin to
learn the practice of reporting for the World
Wide Web. They work through a set of exer-
cises researching story ideas, pitching them to
the class, conducting interviews, gathering
images, and writing, designing and posting
short pieces for the Web, introducing them to
the possibilities and constraints of working in
this medium.
Prerequisite: CM 202 or permission of instructor
CM 382
Digital Journalism II
3 credits, 6 hours
A more intensive course in digital journalism,
building on CM 38 1 : Digital Journalism I, in
which students explore the present state and
future possibilities for journalism in the on-
line environment. Here students work in teams
and on their own to complete a more complex
set of online journalism projects, researching
story ideas, pitching them to the class, con-
ducting interviews, and writing and designing
story sites for the Web.
Prerequisite: CM 381.
CM 383
News and Culture in the Digital Age
3 credits. 3 hours
Surveys both the impact of social issues and
concerns on journalism and the social impact
of journalism on society. Working between
readings about journalism and society, and
case studies, both past and current, of how
journalism operates within our region and
nation, students learn about how issues such
as race, gender ethics, technology, and the
changing nature of the news business affect
the work of journalists.
Required of students in the Digital Journalism
Concentration.
136
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
CM 391
Documentary Media Production I
3 credits. 6 hours
Develops an understanding of the conceptual,
aesthetic, and pragmatic dimensions of
making documentary video and audio. Early
in the semester, students are exposed to exam-
ples of a variety of documentary approaches
through partial screenings and readings, to
Illustrate the range of choices and creative
possibilities of communicating information
and emotion through this form. They are also
introduced to more sophisticated digital video
technologies than they have employed in the
curriculum previously. Students simultane-
ously work through a series of structured
exercises, and later work in teams to develop
small-scale documentary projects. Project
work includes pre-production research, inter-
views, original shooting in small crews, and
editing and presenting finished work.
Prerequisite: CM 202. CM 290 or permission of
instructflr
CM 392
Documentary Media Production II
3 credits, 6 hours
Develops a deeper understanding of the prag-
matic, conceptual, and aesthetic dimensions of
producing documentary video and audio.
Exposure to contemporary issues and
approaches in documentary media making
through screenings and readings. Students
achieve increased mastery of more sophisti-
cated digital video technologies than they
have employed in the curriculum previously,
and work through a series of project stages in
the development of a medium-length docu-
mentary. Each student is responsible for
taking his or her own project through to com-
pletion and presenting this project to his or her
colleagues; they collaborate on these projects
in teams.
Prerequisite: CM 391. ■ "
CM 395
Advanced Narrative Production
Workshop I
3 credits, 6 hours
The first part of a two-semester production
studio in which students plan, shoot, and edit a
digital film project, roughly 20 minutes in
length. During this course, students advance
from locked screenplay through principal pho-
tography, including preparation of a shooting
script and storyboards; pre-production issues
such as location scouting, producfion design,
casting, and rehearsals; and the shoot itself.
By semester's end, students assemble their
best takes for screenings and critiques.
Prerequisite: CM 295.
CM 435
Current Issues in Communication
3 credits. 3 hours
Explores the changing landscape of ethical
and policy issues in communication from a
critical and intellectual perspective, with a
focus on emerging issues driven by the shift to
digital media (image ethics and manipulation,
intellectual property, changing nature of distri-
bution, etc.). Building on previous coursework
and studio experiences, students read material
from current literature and write reflective and
research-based papers on selected issues.
Presentations by guest speakers in the various
industries and independent sectors provide a
real-world perspective on how these issues
affect professional practice.
Prerequisite: CM 260.
CM 461. CM 462
Senior Studio I, II
4.5 credits. 7 hours
In this intensive project-based two-semester
studio, students work in multifunctional teams
on a common theme, collaborating on the
development of their own presentation-quality
work in their medium of choice and concen-
tration (documentary, social marketing, or
online journalism). They research and develop
their project proposals in the fall semester,
collaborating with individuals and institutions
in the region, and begin production work,
resulting in a short piece in video, audio,
and/or online form. They continue this project
work in the spring semester. This studio work
is supplemented by additional readings about
relevant historical, critical, and practical issues
and screenings of contemporary work.
Students write reflective pieces about their
production experiences in light of these histor-
ical and contemporary issues, and complete
the year-long course with a portfolio of their
own creative work.
Prerequisite: CM 3 72. CM 382, or CM 392.
CM 499
Internship
1.5 credits
Professional internship with a media organiza-
tion or producer. Student needs to gain
approval for internship from advisor, meet
periodically for supervisory discussions, and
complete a short, reflective essay at the end of
the internship.
Open to Communication majors only.
Crafts
CR 111
Freshman Ceramics
1.5 credits, 3 hours
Through lecture and demonstrations, basic
skills such as handbuilding, throwing, and
press molding are addressed, with an introduc-
tion to loading and firing kilns and mixing
clay and glazes. Problems are given with an
emphasis on developing each student's poten-
tial for personal expression and artistic
invention. Freshman students are encouraged
to participate in the departmental guest lecture
series and field trips.
CR 121
Freshman Fibers and Mixed Media
1 .5 credits. 3 hours
Provides foundation students with a hands-on
studio experience grounded in fabric
processes and materials as a means of per-
sonal expression. The student receives an
introduction to stamp printing and direct
painting on fabric, collage, three-dimensional
off'-loom structures, as well as tapestry
weaving on frame loom. Guidance is offered
in the form of demonstrations, slide presenta-
tions, field trips, informal discussions, and
intensive group critiques.
CR 131
Freshman Glass
1.5 credits, 3 hours
Explores glass as an expressive and creative
medium. Students work with flat glass in
stained-glass techniques.
CR 141
Freshman Jewelry and
Metalsmithing
1 .5 credits, 3 hours
An introduction to metal work through several
beginning jewelry projects. Students learn
basic fabrication techniques through simple
hollow construction; movement is approached
through aspects of linkage and chainmaking;
forming and fabrication are covered as well.
CR161
Freshman Furniture and Wood
1 .5 credits, 3 hours
The introduction of wood as a material, basic
joinery theory, and the ability to manipulate
the material safely with both hand and power
tools. Lecture and demonstration of the prop-
erties of wood, the proper use of the handsaw
and shaping tools, including rasps, chisels,
small hand planes, and gouges.
The University of the Art.s Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
137
CR 200 A/B
Projects I
3 credits/semester: fall and spring, 6 hours
Art making dealing with crafts issues and con-
cepts. Individual project consultations are
supplemented by lectures, visiting artists, and
group critiques. As this course is content-
based, students use any/all crafts studios
during in-class work time and open studio
hours. (Students have access to crafts studios
where they have completed or are currently
taking a media-specific course.) Non-crafts
majors taking this course may also work in
their accustomed media.
Corequisile: Enwllmem in a stitdio course.
CR 211 A/B
Introduction to Throwing
3 credits, 6 hours
Beginning studio work with clay using the
throwing process and related glazing and
firing techniques. Problems are given with an
emphasis on developing each student's poten-
tial for personal expression and artistic
invention.
CR 212 A/B
introduction to Handbuilding
3 credits, 6 hours
Beginning studio work with clay using the
handbuilding processes of slab, coil pinch, and
pressing form molds, plus related glazing and
funng techniques. Problems are given with an
emphasis on developing each student's poten-
tial for personal expression and artistic
invention.
CR 221 A
Introduction to Fibers Mixed Media
3 credits, 6 hours
An introduction to both tradidonal and experi-
mental uses of materials and structural
processes in the fabric media. Assignments
focus on the exploration of two- and three-
dimensional forms in preparation for versatile
approaches to the fibers media. A range of off-
loom mixed media techniques is covered.
CR 221 B
Introduction to Color and the Loom
3 credits, 6 hours
An introduction to both traditional and
experimental uses of materials and structural
processes in the fabric media. Students
explore the potential of two- and three-
dimensional forms in preparation for versatile
approaches to the fibers media. Loom-woven
structures, tapestry, and woven color are
covered.
CR 222
Constructed Surface
3 credits, 6 hours
Through a series of developmental assign-
ments, students are provided with a solid
technical and conceptual base in the fabric
media. Non-loom constructions, color, and
multifiber dye techniques are covered.
CR 223 A/B
Papermaking
1.5 credits, 3 hours
Through slide lecture/demonstrations and
films, this studio course introduces students to
all aspects of traditional Western and Japanese
papermaking techniques including pulp prepa-
ration, sheet formation, pressing, and drying
sheets. Students learn refined, professional
methods as well as explore the creative versa-
tility of pulp. Classes include: casting
three-dimensional objects and bowls, building
subtle relief images in colored pulp, and
painfing with pulp. Various fibers explored
throughout the semester include unique ones
made from garden vegetables and indigenous
plants.
CR227
Experimental Costume Design
1.5 credits, 3 hours
An introductory mixed media fibers
studio where students transform the body into
a fantastical art form through hat, mask, and
unconvendonal garment construction.
Students are introduced to a wide range of soft
materials including fabrics, plastics, net,
gauze, rugger yarns, paper, etc., and to simple
printing/dyeing fabric embellishment
processes.
CR 231 A/B
Introduction to Glass Blowing
3 credits. 6 hours
Through demonstrations, assignments, and
tutoring by the instructor, the students are
guided toward mastery in oftTiand blowing.
Blowing of well-balanced functional and non-
functional forms is emphasized. The aesthetics
of contemporary and historical glass are intro-
duced. Demonstrations and tutoring guide the
students in exploring the use of color in glass,
two- and three-dimensional surface treatment,
the relationship between volume and skin of
forms, blowing into molds, and working in a
variety of scales. The aesthedcs of contempo-
rary and historical glass are investigated as
they relate to the students" work.
CR232
Stained Glass
3 credits. 6 hours
Students work with transparent and
opaque glass sheets to produce both two- and
three-dimensional artwork. Techniques
include glass cutting and grinding, use of
caming and copper foil, soldering, enameling,
sandblasfing and carving, and kilnfiring.
Typical projects include stained glass win-
dows or panels, containers, and shallow
bowls.
CR 241 A/B
Introduction to Jewelry
3 credits. 6 hours
The student is asked to explore notions of jew-
elry and body adornment as means of personal
expression. Projects range from precious jew-
elry making to adornment that extends into
performance. Basic goldsmith skills are taught
as essential, while three-dimensional
sketching and experimentation in mixed
media are encouraged. Successful integrafion
of design, material, and process is the goal.
Projects are designed to provide students with
broad exposure to the many possibilides
inherent in jewelry and ornament as related to
the human form.
CR 242
Introduction to Metalsmithing
3 credits, 6 hours
Metal is an extremely versatile material;
though hard and durable, it is quite malleable
and easily worked. This course covers direct
working of metal. Sheet, wire. bar. and rod are
given form by hammering, seaming, bending,
etc. The majority of work is done in bronze,
brass, and copper, though steel, stainless steel,
aluminum, and precious metals may be used
as well. Emphasis is on basic hand and
machine processes conveyed through organ-
ized, comprehensive, and technical
information. The focus is on the possibilides
of metal for the contemporary artist.
Contemporary issues include the object as
sculpture, process as a source material, the
importance of surface and detail, and func-
tional objects made by artists.
CR243
Jewelry Rendering and Design
3 credits. 6 hours
Students explore two-dimensional pencil and
gouache techniques effective in creating the
illusion of finished pieces of jewelry.
Emphasis is placed on the skill development
necessary to communicate and evaluate ideas
prior to making. Presentation and develop-
ment of a portfolio are an integral part of the
course.
138
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
CR245
Art for the Body
3 credits, 6 hours
Introductory inixed-media course focuses on
the body as the site-specific locus for a variety
of art forms. Looking at a range of cultural
and historical examples, students gain an
appreciation for the many personal and social
influences that underiie our conception of the
human body and how we construct for it.
Students work in an array of media, with spe-
cific emphasis on the use of metal, paper,
fabric, and leather. Technical information
includes flat pattern making, piecing, and
sewing; forming and fabricadon; mixed media
construction; systems of attachment, linkage,
and closure. Emphasis on the students" ability
to generate unique solutions to the physical
challenges imposed by the human body on the
content of attire.
CR 249
Enameling
3 credits, 6 hours
Enameling is the art of firing colored glass
onto metal. The transparent, opaque, and
opalescent enamel colors are layered to pro-
duce richness, detail, depth, and brilliance in
this durable and painteriy medium. Traditional
techniques such as cloisonne, grisaille.
Limoges, basse taille, plique-a-jour, and
champleve'. as well as contemporary and
experimental processes are explored.
Once they have gained facility with the
medium, students produce jewelry or small
jewel-like paintings.
CR 251
Introduction to Molding and Casting
3 credits, 6 hours
A course in modelmaking, moldmaking and
casting techniques, using plaster and synthetic
compounds. Emphasis is given to developing
proficiency in slip casting for use in the
artist's studio and in industry for serial
production.
CR 252
Plaster Worl<shop
1.5 credits, 3 hours
An introductory course in modelmaking,
moldmaking, and casting techniques using
plaster and synthetic compounds. This course
emphasizes the usefulness of these media to
designers and artists.
CR 253
Ceramic Technology
1.5 credits, 3 hours
A lecture and laboratory course designed to
initiate investigadon of basic clay and glaze
materials. The primary intent is for the student
to gain an intuitive understanding of ceramic
materials, their practical and aesthetic proper-
ties, and to develop a series of personal
glazes ranging from bright gloss to matt.
Additionally, the nature of clays and the rela-
tionship among clay bodies, slips, sigallatas.
and glazes is explored.
CR255
Large Scale Handbuilding
1 .5 credits, 3 hours
Fundamentals of large scale handbuilding in
clay. It will address two specific areas: a)
building a three-dimensional form, students
learn to use proper clay bodies, how to build
interior support systems, building and drying
methods for large work, and moving, loading,
and firing techniques; b) Students learn how to
cover large areas with smaller parts and
explore fitdng and interiocking systems of
wall relief or free-standing form. Problems are
given with an emphasis on developing poten-
tial for personal expression and artistic
invention.
CR256
Ceramics
1 .5 credits, 3 hours
Through lecture and demonstration, students
learn basic skills such as handbuilding.
throwing, and press molding with an introduc-
tion to loading and firing kilns. Mixing clay,
slips, and glazes are also covered.
CR261
Introduction to Wood
3 credits. 6 hours
Introduction to basic woodworking skills and
processes, including sharpening and setting up
hand tools and machinery, theor}' of solid
wood joinery, and construcdon. In addidon to
building technical skills, there is emphasis on
contemporary and historical furniture design
issues.
CR277
Fabric Resist and Embellishment
3 credits. 6 hours
Extends students' basic color and drawing
vocabulary into the realm of ancient tech-
niques and tools of Indonesia. Japan, and
Africa. Fabric dyeing and resist methods cov-
ered include drawing and stamping with
waxes, sdtching and binding with threads, and
more. Students acquire a broader sense of
"mark-niaking." an understanding of the spe-
cial color properties of dyes, and an ability to
use non-Western traditional craft methods to
create contemporary art fabric.
CR 278
Fabric Printing
1.5 credits. 3 hours
Focuses on the fundamental principles of
translating drawings and photographs into
designs and images for screen-printed fabric,
using a fine art approach. Exploration of
myriad possibilides in creadng fabric using
siLkscreen and fabric pigments.
CR 279
Paper Casting
1.5 credits, 3 hours
Students use paper pulp to build up three-
dimensional forms. Molds are made of plaster
and other materials. The emphasis is on paper
as a material for the craftsperson and sculptor.
CR280
Introduction to Metal Casting
3 credits. 6 hours
Wax working for jewelry and sculpture,
rubber molding processes, and lost wax/cen-
trifugal casdng of bronze and (opdonal)
sterling silver and karat golds. Extensive tech-
nical information for students who are
design-oriented. Assignments allow projects
in all formats (design, one-of-a-kind jewelry,
fine art. etc.) and students are encouraged to
use the techniques demonstrated innovatively
and expressively. Students taking the course a
second time choose one aspect of the course
(wax carving, wax modeling, wax impres-
sions, vulcanized rubber molding, etc.) and
produce a small body of work investigating
that aspect in depth. Procedures for jobbing
out work to professional contract casters;
more experienced students send some of their
work out to be molded or cast.
Tlie University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 200S/2004
139
CR281
Introduction to Electroforming
3 credits, 6 hours
Electroforming is electroplating metal onto a
nonmetallic surface or object. Metal may be
built up on nonporous materials such as wax,
plastic, glass, stone, and lacquered found and
natural objects. Wax may be removed from
electroformed objects to leave a strong, light-
weight, hollow, self-supporting metal shell.
Students will work in electroformed copper;
assignments are structured to allow students to
work in accustomed formats and/or combine
electroforming with other materials and
processes.
CR 282
Metal Furniture
3 credits, 6 hours
Questions our cultural assumptions about fur-
niture. Are common furniture forms dictated
by functional requirements or arbitrary
choices, which have become traditional?
Metal (steel, aluminum, bronze) is used for its
strength and versatility; other materials are
combined with metal according to student
ideas and interests. Techniques include
bending/forming of rod, tube, and plate, oxy-
acetylene welding, brazing, mechanical
fasteners/tap and die, riveting,
and light blacksmithing. Typical student
projects include small tables, lamps,
chairs, outdoor/public furnishings, and
experimental forms.
CR 283
Small Scale Steelworking
3 credits, 6 hours
Steel is a metal with unique properties. This
course covers light blacksmithing, thin-sheet
welding, and other techniques suitable for
working steel at tabletop size. Aluminum and
other metals may also be used where appro-
priate. The focus is on the possibilities of
metal for the contemporary craftsperson.
Contemporary issues include the functional
object, the decorative impulse, process as a
source of inspiration, and the importance of
surface detail.
CR286
Wood Carving
1 .5 credits, 3 hours
An introductory course focused on the devel-
opment of skills and a survey of historical and
contemporary precedents. The class will cover
tools: selection, use, and sharpening; lamina-
tion and joinery utilized for carving; finishing
techniques; materials, and choice of woods;
letter carving, designs and content. Students
will provide their own carving tools.
CR287
Low-Tech Furniture
3 credits, 6 hours
Using materials gathered from nature, stu-
dents make chairs, tables, and other functional
objects with a minimum of technical and
mechanical procedures. Inspired by the
design inherent in natural materials, branches
and twigs, found objects, and imaginative
thinking, the class conceives and executes a
series of projects, mosdy with simple hand
tools. The woodworking techniques demon-
strated are simple and straightforward; even
the most 10-thumbed, tool-inept, and
machine-wary students are welcome in
this class.
CR 300 A/B
Projects II
3 credits, 6 hours
Art making which deals with crafts issues and
concepts. A continuation of Projects I, work
becomes increasingly student-determined as
the dialogue becomes more subjective. As this
course is content-based, students use any/all
crafts studios during class time and open
studio hours. (Students have access to crafts
studios where they have completed or are cur-
rendy taking a media-specific course.)
Non-crafts majors taking this course may also
work in their accustomed media.
Prerequisite: CR 200 B.
Corequisite: Enrollment in a studio course
CR 322 A/B
Advanced Fibers Mixed Media
3 credits, 6 hours
Through a series of developmental assign-
ments with a conceptual emphasis, and by
using acquired knowledge from previous
semesters, students are encouraged to explore
forms that reveal the inherent physical quali-
ties and potential image-making possibilities
of fabric. Loom-woven and mixed-media
fabric techniques are used as appropriate,
depending on the student's interest in the
development of a diverse range of two-dimen-
sional constructions, sculptural forms,
costume, etc.
Prerequisites: CR 221 B ami lor CR 222.
CR 329
Advanced Textile Design j
1.5 credits, 3 hours |
Use of the computer in the study of woven j
textile design. The course introduces fabric |
structures from simple, plain, and rib weaves,
through twills, satins, waffle weaves, double ]
cloth, composite structures, and color effects. |
Students learn the language of cloth through j
the incremental development of structures, j
first notating those structures by hand on point |
paper, and then using various computer soft- i
ware programs to develop a wide range of
fabric structures. At least one structure is real- |
ized through weaving on a 32-hamess
hand-weaving computer loom. |
I
CR 331 !
Advanced Glass Blowing |
3 credits, 6 hours \
Glass is considered as an expressive medium, '
and development toward a personal style is J
encouraged. Students work with hot glass in ;
advanced offhand work, blowing into molds, j
casting, and enameling, as well as advanced
stained glass work incorporating blown and
cast pieces on two- and three-dimensional
stained glass problems.
Prerequisite: CR 23 1 B. \
CR 332 A/B \
Advanced Fusing and Stained Glass
3 credits, 6 hours
Glass is the vehicle for creative expression ,
and aesthetic growth. During the first semester '
the students focus on developing a personal \
theme in their work under close guidance of j
the instructor During the second semester the i
students create a consistent body of work and I
present it in a small show, and trace the histor- ,
ical and contemporary sources of inspiration
of their work in a written or oral paper.
Prerequisites: CR 231 B andlor CR 232.
CR 370 A/B
Advanced Throwing |
3 credits, 6 hours '
Concentration on resolving conceptual and j
formal issues as they relate to individual \
exploration on the wheel. Problems encourage i
uniqueness and challenge abiliues. Typical j
issues include usage and symbolic function,
serial production, the table, site-oriented \
applications, and medium to large-scale use of '■■
materials. All problems stress practical as well
as aesthetic resourcefulness with clay on the !
wheel. Senior craft majors taking tiiis course
may choose to spend all or part of their time '
producing thesis work to supplement the j
thesis component of the Crafts Projects III. ;
Prerequisite: CR2I1 B.
1^0
Tlie University of the Alts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
CR 371 A/B
Advanced Ceramics
3 credits. 6 hours
Concentration on resolving conceptual and
formal issues as they relate to individual
exploration. Problems encourage uniqueness
and challenge abilities. Typical issues include
usage and symbolic function, production, and
site-oriented applications, and medium to
large-scale use of materials. All problems
stress practical as well as aesthetic resource-
fulness. Senior Crafts majors taking this
course may choose to spend all or part of their
time producing thesis work to supplement the
thesis component of Crafts Projects III.
Prerequisite: CR 212 B.
CR 380 A/B
Advanced Jewelry/Metals
3 credits. 6 hours
Built upon a basic grounding in jewelry con-
cepts and techniques. Lectures, technical
demonstrations, and conceptual projects vary
from year to year so that those students
retaking the course will not find it redundant.
The goals of the course are to increase the stu-
dent's awareness and understanding of jeweh^
as a component of our culture, aid the student
in the development of a personal aesthetic,
and develop the student's thinking and
problem-solving abilities. More experienced
students are encouraged to focus on one spe-
cialized area of the jewelry field. Senior Crafts
majors taking this course may choose to spend
all or part of their time producing thesis work
to supplement the thesis component of Crafts
Projects III.
Prerequisites: CR 241 B aiuilor CR 242.
CR 381 A/B
Advanced Metals
3 credits. 6 hours
Buih upon basic grounding in metalsmithing
skills. Technical demonstrations and concep-
tual projects vary from year to year so that
those students retaking the course will not find
it redundant. The goals of the course are to
increase the student's awareness of metal's
possibilities, increase the student's metal-
working skill, aid in the development of a
personal aesthetic, and develop the student's
thinking and problem-solving abilities. Senior
crafts majors taking this course may choose to
spend all or part of their time producing thesis
work to supplement the thesis component of
Crafts Projects III.
Prerequisites: CR 241 B aiullor CR 242.
CR386
Advanced Wood
3 credits. 6 hours
Covers tools, joinery, methods, and materials.
Content progresses with increasing com-
plexity, involving machining, hand tools,
finishing, and surface treatments. Senior crafts
majors taking this course may choose to spend
all or part of their time producing thesis work
to supplement the thesis component of Crafts
Projects III.
Prerequisites: CR26I.
CR 400 A/B
Projects III
3 credits. 6 hours
The student selects a topic and produces a
thesis body of work for-the Crafts Senior
Thesis Exhibifion. Part of this course is Senior
Seminar, a forum for the discussion of ideas
and issues through student participation, guest
lectures, and professional offerings. The
modem craft aesthetic is examined through
crifical dialogue. Emphasis on the interde-
pendency of all the arts, with an eye to the
unique contribution of crafts ideology and
practice. Topical discussions encourage stu-
dents to find contemporary relevancy and
validity in an analysis of historical precedents.
Other topics include: making an artist's pres-
entation, resume preparation, writing an
artist's statement, recordkeeping and ta.xes.
grant writing, and career opportunities.
Particular attention is paid to the style and sur-
vival techniques of contemporaries working in
crafts media.
Prerequisite: CR 300 B.
Corequisite: Enrollment in a studio course.
IN 449
Crafts/Fine Arts Internship
3 credits. 90 hours/semester
Conditions for enrollment; Must be enrolled
as a junior or senior in a BS or BFA program;
must have a 2.5 cumuladve GPA: and cannot
enroll for more than 1 8 credits, including
those earned from the Internship during that
semester.
Open to Crafts and Fine Arts majors only.
MFA in Ceramics
Each summer session will begin with a
detailed review of the student's previous
work, assessing progress, addressing
issues, and planning the siimtner's work.
Ongoing individual meetings with the
studio mentor will be augmented by
group critiques at the beginning, middle
and end of the summer session and by
occasional group or individual critiques
with visiting artists. Each summer's
course concludes with plaiming for work
to be continued on an indepeitdent-study
basis during the acadetnic year
Independent studio work is assessed at
weekend critiques held at periodic inter-
vals and at the end of the fall and spring
semesters.
The following courses are open to students in
the summer MFA program only.
CR610
Major Studio I
6 credits. 10 hours
Evaluation of the student's artisfic involve-
ment, projecting and testing options for the
direction of the suident's graduate work.
CR611
Major Studio II
6 credits. 10 hours
Further exploration of opdons, with increased
awareness of theoretical issues and personal
vision. Greater focus in the student's work,
with a view to completing the repertoire of
skills and expression in the medium needed to
undertake a thesis project.
CR 710
Major Studio III
6 credits. 10 hours
Planning and initiarion of a sustained body of
mature work to be presented in a thesis exhibi-
fion following the thesis exhibiton semester.
See complete course listing under
Master of Fine Arts.
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
141
Dance
DA 100
Rhythm for Dancers
1 credit, 1 .5 hours
Provides an understanding and experience of
rhythm that enables students to hear, feel,
count, and notate rhythmic structures and
enhance sensibility and creativity.
Required of all Danee majors.
DA 101 A/B
Ballet I, II
2 credits. 6 hours
Fundamentals of ballet technique including
barre and center floor work. The course serves
to introduce and develop basic ballet tech-
nique and vocabulary. Body placement and
alignment are stressed through an under-
standing and application of these basics.
Continuous advancement and development is
provided from beginning to advanced levels
throughout this four-semester sequence ,
(Ballet I-IV).
Open to Dance majors only.
DA 103 A/B
Modern Dance I, II
2 credits, 4.5 hours
Basic technique of modem dance for the
development of skills, intellectual under-
standing, kinetic perception, and maximum
versatility. Includes barre work, center floor,
isolation, falls and recoveries, contractions
and release. Part of a two-year sequence
(Modem Dance I-IV).
Open to Dance majors only.
DA 107
Eurythmics
1 credit. 1.5 hours
Comprises breathing and centering warm-ups.
isolation exercises, and technical improvisa-
tion on movement qualities, including
swinging, gliding, falling, rising, slow motion.
Students learn to develop choreographic ideas
through group improvisational structures. A
continuation of the creative work of DA 107.
Open to Dance majors only.
DA 111
Spanish Dance
1 credit. 1.5 hours
Basic techniques of playing castanets for the
sevillanas, as well as development of funda-
mental skills in footwork and handclaps
for flamenco.
DA 113 A/B
Jazz Dance I, II
1 credit. 3 hours
A presentation of styles designed to broaden
knowledge and technique of concert and the-
ater jazz dance. Classes employ floor stretches
and center barre as wami-up procedures.
Movement patterns emphasize simuhaneous
coordination of multiple rhythm pattems in
difterent parts of the body. Combinations
advance from simple to complex throughout
this four-semester sequence (Jazz Dance I-IV).
Open to Danee majors only.
DA 115
Mime
1 credit, 1.5 hours
An exploration of the commedia dell'arte,
Kabuki. and twentieth-century techniques
developed by Decroux, Barrault, and
Marceau. Emphasis is placed on animals as
the primary key to fundamental movement, as
well as analysis of human movement,
including elements of age, environment, body
type, and facial features.
DA 116 A/B
Fundamentals of Dance I, II
1 credit. 1.5 hours
Basic aesthetic considerations of the dance art
form. The first semester examines the nature
and forms of dance and care of the body. The
second semester allows dance students the
opportunity to work with their peers in the
Freshman Project.
Open to Dance majors only.
DA 117
Survey of Music
3 credits. 3 hours
Surveys the history of music from ancient to
modern, including jazz.
Discipline History
Required of all Danee majors.
DA 119
Yoga
1 credit. 1.5 hours
The study of a system of exercises to achieve
physical and spiritual well-being.
DA 120
Mat Class
1 credit. 1 .5 hours
Part of the Pilates-based method of exercise.
The mat class helps build strength while main-
taining flexibility. This system of exercises
has been used for over 70 years by dancers,
musicians, and athletes to help them enhance
their performance.
DA 121
The Alexander Technique
1 credit, 1.5 hours
A method for moving with ease and grace that
can be used in any situation (ballet, jazz,
modem dance, and also everyday activities).
By releasing unnecessary tension in move-
ment, the student learns to avoid dance
injuries or change harmful habits so that
chronic injuries can heal.
DA 123 A/B
Tap I, II
1 credit, 1 .5 hours
Basic vocabulary of tap. and development of
rhythmically accurate footwork and accompa-
nying body movements.
Open to Danee majors only.
DA 124
African Dance
1 credit. 1.5 hours
The study of the contribution of black dance
to the development of American dance
through the mastery of the technique.
DA 126
Dance Ethnology
1 credit. 1 .5 hours
A survey of the broad perspectives of dance
as an expression of culture through investiga-
tion of Western and non-Westem dance forms.
DA 129
Nutrition
1 credit, 1 hour
Nutrition and its applicafion to food selection,
with special emphasis on the nutritional needs
of the dancer.
DA 130
Dance Therapy
1 credit, 1.5 hours
An examination of the use of dance move-
ments as therapeutic tools in working with the
physically and mentally handicapped.
DA 190
Language of Music
1 credit, 1 .5 hours
The study of rhythm, melody and harmony,
tempo, dynamics, and musical forms.
DA 201 A/B
Ballet III. IV
2 credits, 4.5 hours
Continuation of DA 101 A/B.
Prerequisite: DA 1 01 B.
Open to Dance majors only.
142
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
DA 203 A/B
Modern Dance III, IV
2 credits. 4.5 hours
Continuation of DA 103 A/B.
Open to Dance majors only.
DA 205 A/B
Notation I, II
2 credits, 3 hours
Notation I is an introduction to the Laban
system of recording dance movement. The
course deals with the study of basic notation
symbols for reading and writing movements
involving steps, arm and leg gestures, turns.
and rhythmic and spatial patterns. Notation II
comprises intermediate study in reading and
writing dance phrases including torso, parts of
the limbs, and head.
DA 211 A/B
Dance History I, II
3 credits, 3 hours
The study of the interaction between dance
and the society in which it develops, empha-
sizing the changing role and nature of dance.
Dance History I deals with dance from the
Renaissance through Diaghilev's Ballet Russe.
Dance History II surveys dance from pre-
World War II to the present.
Discipline History
DA 213 A/B
Jazz Dance 111,1V
1 credit. 3 hours
Continuation of DA 113 A/B.
Open to Dance majors only.
DA 216
Music for Dancers
1 credit, 1.5 hours
An exploration of various kinds of musical
materials and literature, from Gregorian chant
to New Music, relating the .selection of music
to the creation of dance composition.
Improvisation utilizing different sounds and
instruments.
Prerequisite to Dance Composition (D,4 217).
Open to Dance majors only
DA 217
Dance Composition I
I credit, 1.5 hours
Integrates the improvisational skills acquired
earlier in Eurythmics, Improvisation, and
Music for Dancers. Designed to provide the
beginning choreographer with the tools
needed to structure a dance composition in
solo and duet forms.
Prerequisite: DA 216.
Open to Dance majors only.
DA 301 A/B
Ballet V-VI
1-4 credits. 7.5 hours
Continuation of DA 201 A/B.
Prerequisite: Junior status.
DA 303 A/B
Modern Dance V, VI
1-4 credits, 7.5 hours
Continuation of DA 203 A/B.
Prerequisite: Junior status.
DA 305 A/B
Modern Repertory I, II
1 credit, 3 hours
A study of contemporary and/or classical
repertory by resident or guest choreographers
or notators, as well as the viewing, discussion,
and analysis of great works on video and film.
Prerequisite: Junior status.
DA 306 A/B
Jazz Repertory I, II
1 credit, 3 hours
A study of concert and theater jazz dance
repertory by resident or guest choreographers
or notators, as well as the viewing, discussion,
and analysis of great works in video and film.
Prerequisite: Junior status.
DA 307 A/B
Ballet Repertory I, II
1 credit. 3 hours
The study and performance of dances of the
Renaissance and Baroque periods, followed
by major classical and modern ballets.
Prerequisite: Junior status.
DA 308 A/B
Dance Pedagogy I, II
2 credits. 3 hours
An introduction to current philosophies and
practices of teaching dance, and a historical
survey of the role of dance in education. The
second semester deals with identification and
exploration of basic concepts of teaching
dance, and application of these principles to
the concrete development of lesson plans.
Open to Dunce majors only.
DA 309 A/B
Partnering I, II
1 credit. 1 .5 hours
The basic technique of adagio (pas de deux).
Students perform major classical works.
Open to Ballet majors, and Dance majors with per-
mission of the instructor.
DA 311 A/B
Jazz V, VI
1-4 credits, 1.5-7.5 hours
Continued development of technique and var-
ious styles as introduced in DA 113 and 213
A/B. The course progresses from basic to
complex rhythm and isolation exercises, and
movement combinations stressing subtlety of
dynamics, as well as preparation of repertory.
Prerequisite: Junior status.
DA 313
Elements of Performing
2 credits. 3 hours
Analyzes the qualities of dance technique that
serve the ultimate goal of performance as an
artist. Students work with the elements of the
art of dance performance and discover how
inner focus, motivation, dynamics, muscle
intensity, rhythmic timing, breathing, and
movement texture are the essentials.
Open to Dance majors only
DA 317 A/B
Dance Composition II, III
2 credits, 3 hours
Continuation of DA 217. Problem solving and
analysis of materials through individual proj-
ects. Special emphasis on group
choreography.
Prerequisite: Junior status.
DA 319
Theater Functions
1 credit, 1 .5 hours
A basic production course dealing with con-
cepts of lighting and set design for dance.
Students are required to gain practical experi-
ence by working in the theater on dance
concerts during the year.
DA 320
Intermediate Pilates
1 credit. 1.5 hours
Continuation of DA 120
Prerequisite: One semester Pilates and permission
of instructor
DA 321 A/B
Pointel, II
1 credit, 1 .5 hours
Basic technique of dancing ballet on pointe.
Women's dance variations from the
classical repertoire.
Open to Dance majors only.
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
143
DA 322 A/B
Improvisation II, III
1 credit, 1.5 hours
Individual improvisations are performed on
themes with objects in restricted or altered
spaces and times. Various structures are used
for group improvisation. Free improvisation
with live music is stressed.
Prerequisite: Junior status.
DA 323 A/B
Tap III, IV
1 credit, 1.5 hours
The study and practice of the tap style of
dance from simple rhythmic footwork to more
complex multi-rhythms and repertory.
DA 324 ■
Character Dance
1 credit, 1 .5 hours
Deals with the study of the relationship
between ethnic styles of dance and classical
ballet, and the proper technique for per-
forming national dances stylized for the
classical ballet repertory.
Open to Ballet majors, and Dance majors with per-
mission of the instructor
DA 325 A/B
Ballet for Non-majors V, VI
1 credit. 1 .5-3 hours
Continuation of DA 201 A/B. For students
majoring in Modem or Jazz/Theater Dance.
Prerequisite: Junior status.
DA 326 A/B
Modern Dance for Non-majors V, VI
1 credit, 1 .5-3 hours
Continuation of DA 203 A/B. For students
majoring in Ballet or Jazz/Theater Dance.
Prerequisite: Junior status.
DA 327 A/B
Men's Class I, II
1 credit, 1.5 hours
The technical movements frequently per-
formed by the male dancer.
Open to Dance majors only.
DA 328 A/B
Jazz for Non-majors V, VI
1 credit, 1 .5-3 hours
Designed for Ballet and Modem majors. The
course further develops the vocabulary and
skills learned in DA 213 A/B.
Prerequisite: Junior status.
DA 331
Concepts of Health and Fitness
2 credits, 3 hours
A survey of the health/fitness industry, which
covers the following areas: personal training,
aerobics and dance, wellness, and fitness man-
agement. The course prepares students
to assume positions in this growing and
thriving field.
DA 345 A/B
Voice I. II
1 credit, 1 .5 hours
Vocal training for the non-Voice major.
Designed to develop the vocal instrument to
meet both the musical and nonmusical vocal
requirements of the theater.
DA 401 A/B
BalletVII,VIII
1-4 credits, 7.5 hours
Continuation of DA 30 1 A/B .
Prerequisite: Senior status.
DA 403 A/B
Modern Dance VII, VIM
1-4 credits, 7.5 hours
Continuation of DA 303 A/B.
Prefequisite: Senior status. ■/
DA 408 A
Dance Symposium I
3 credits, 3 hours
Designed specifically for dance education
majors who will be completing their student
teaching requirement in the following
semester. The course includes curriculum and
instruction materials, professional preparadon,
and evaluation criteria. Discussions center
around the application of dance principles to
the learning situation. The role of the dance
teacher is examined.
Prerequisite: Senior status.
DA 408 B
Dance Symposium II
3 credits, 3 hours
Designed to complement the actual student
teaching experience. Specific situations, prob-
lems, and achievements of the student
teaching process are discussed and evaluated.
Networking and employment opportunities
are integral to the course.
Corequisite: DA 410.
DA 409 A/B
Partnering
1 credit
DA 410
Student Teaching
7 credits, 14 hours
Students teach under supervised direcfion for
one semester in a public or private school. If
placement for student teaching is not within a
school system, arrangements are made for the
student to do this supervised teaching through
local dance studios.
Corequisite: DA 408 B.
Prerequisite: DA 408 A.
DA 411 A/B
JazzVII.VIII
1-4 credits, 1.5-7.5 hours
Continuation ofDA 311 A/B.
Prerequisite: Senior status.
DA 417
Dance Composition IV
2 credits, 3 hours
Continuation of DA 317. Senior elective
course to assist students in preparation of their
senior concerts.
Open to Dance majors with Senior status only.
DA 418
Repertory Etudes
2 credits, 3 hours
Students study a number of Repertory Etudes
in a variety of styles to improve performance
and technical skills. The solos selected will
reflect the history of American dance.
Students will research the era and, if possible,
collect oral histories, thereby adding to the
materials confinually being gathered and
developed.
DA 419 A/B
Dance Production I, II
2 credits, 3 hours
Designed to assist senior students in meeting
their graduation performance requirement.
Each student participates in the rehearsal, per-
formance, and technical aspects of the
senior graduation concerts scheduled at the
end of each spring. Students are expected to
take major responsibility for the production of
these programs.
Open to Dance majors with Senior status only.
DA 421 A/B
Pointe III, IV
1 credit, 1.5 hours
Continuation of DA 321 A/B.
Prerequisite: DA 321 A/B.
144
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
DA 422
Styles of Jazz
1 credit, 1 .5 hours
An exploration of Jazz styles of historic and
contemporary Jazz dance artists, from
Hip/Hop to Fosse.
Open to Dance majors only.
DA 424
Contact Improvisation
1 credit, 1 .5 hours
Students learn to develop choreographic ideas
through partnered improvisational structures.
Exploration of interactive movement qualities
include gravity, leverage, and momentum.
Prerequisite: DA 109 Improvisation I.
DA 425 A/B
Ballet for Non-majors VII, VIM
1 credit, 1.5-3 hours
Continuation of DA 323 A/B. For students
majoring in Modem or Jazz/Theater Dance.
Prerequisite: Senior status.
DA 426 A/B
Modern Dance for Non-majors VII,
VIM
1 credit, 1.5-3 hours
Continuation of DA 326 A/B. For students
majoring in Ballet or Jazz/Theater Dance.
Prerequisite: Senior status.
DA 427 A/B
Men's Class III, IV
1 credit, 1.5 hours
Continuation ofDA 327 A/B
DA 428 A/B
Jazz for Non-majors VII, VIM
1 credit, 1.5-3 hours
Continuation of DA 328 A/B. For students
majoring in Ballet and Modem Dance.
Prerequisite: Senior status.
DA 430
Survey of the Business of Dance
2 credits, 2 hours
Emphasizing the development of tools and
skills necessary for realizing individual pro-
fessional goals, vehicles and processes for
change in the various fields of dance within
our society. Develops an awareness of man-
aging life and work as a professional in dance.
Topics include basic business principles as
well as career self-management and an
overview of career opportunities. Guest
speakers will include faculty and staff from
within the University as well as experts from
the field.
DA 445 A/B
Voice III, IV
1 credit, 1.5 hours
Continuation of DA 345 A/B.
Prerequisite: DA 345 A and 345 B.
DA 499
Internship
3-12 credits, 90-360 hours/semester
Intemships are a valuable part of a student's
academic experience. By reinforcing and
expanding classroom theory and practice,
intemships enable students to test career
choices and gain a greater understanding of
the workplace through this initial entry into
the professional world. The ultimate goal of
the internship is to assist students in testing
and expanding their professional skills and
knowledge and enabling them to make
informed career decisions.
Open only to Junior and Senior Dance majors.
DA77X
Dance Ensembles/Labs
1 credit, 3-4.5 hours
DA 772
Ballet Ensemble
1 credit, 3-4.5 hours
DA 773
Modern Ensemble
1-3 credits, 3-9 hours
DA 774
Jazz Ensemble
1 credits, 3-4.5 hours
DA 775
Senior Ensemble
1-3 credits, 3-9 hours
DA 776
Tap Ensemble
1 credit, 3 hours
Dance Courses for
Dance and Non-Dance
Majors
DA 101 X
Beginning Ballet
1 credit, 1.5 hours
A fundamental ballet technique course for
non-Dance majors.
DA 103 X
Beginning Modern Dance
1 credit, 1 .5 hours
A fundamental modem dance technique
course for non-Dance majors.
DA 104 X
Beginning Brazilian Dance
1 credit, 1.5 hours
DA 111 X
Beginning Spanish Dance
1 credit, 1.5 hours
DA 113 X
Beginning Jazz Dance
1 credit, 1.5 hours
A fundamental jazz dance technique course
for non-Dance majors.
DA 114 X
Karate Elective
1 credit, 1 .5 hours
DA 123 X
Beginning Tap Dance
1 credit, 1.5 hours
A fundamental tap technique course for non-
Dance majors.
DA 201 X
Advanced/Beginner Ballet
1 credit, 1 .5 hours
A continuation of DA 101 X.
DA 203 X
Advanced/Beginner Modern
1 credit, 1.5 hours
A continuation of DA 103 X. ,
DA 204 X
Advanced/Beginner Brazilian
1 credit, 1 .5 hours
DA 211 X
Intermediate Spanish Dance
1 credit, 1.5 hours
DA 213 X
Advanced/Beginner Jazz Dance
1 credit, 1.5 hours
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
145
DA 223 X
Advanced/Beginner Tap
1 credit, 1.5 hours
DA 301 X
Intermediate Ballet
1 credit, 1 .5 hours
DA 401 X
Advanced Ballet
1 credit, 1.5 hours
Electronic Media
EM 110
Computer Concepts
3 credits, 3 hours
A conceptual and hands-on course that intro-
duces the student to the foundations of digital
processes in the arts. Experience with word
processing, basic spreadsheet usage, database
search techniques, digital photography, scan-
ning, image processing, compositing, and
basic page layout techniques. Includes an
introduction to online services. Dialog and the
World Wide Web, along with a basic under-
standing of HTML. Software usage includes
Microsoft Word, Excel, QuarkXpress, Adobe
PhotoShop, and Illustrator. Students are given
assignments in each of the software environ-
ments as well as supplemental readings.
No prior computer experience is required.
EM 201
Electronic Media/Production I
1.5 credits, 3 hours
Addresses the development of foundation
computer skills in image scanning technology,
desktop publishing, digital photographic tech-
nologies, and basic output procedures.
Technical expertise and efficient working
methodologies are applied to problems that
are brought into the class from other design
courses as well as from both individual and
group assigned projects. All software is stan-
dard in current graphic design industry
practice.
Prerequisite: Second-semester Sophomore status in
the Graphic Design department.
EM 202
Electronic Media/Production II
1 .5 credits, 3 hours
An extension of EM 201 . Addresses the devel-
opment of advanced computer skills in image
scanning, technology, desktop publishing, pre-
press production, color, output technology,
and digital photographic technologies. Special
attention is given to comparative study of
output technologies and the translation of the
on-screen image to offset lithography.
Technical expertise and efficient working
methodologies are applied to problems that
are brought into the class from other design
courses as well as from both individual and
group assigned projects. All software is stan-
dard in current graphic design industry
practice.
Prerequisite: EM 201 or permission of the
instructor by portfolio review and interview.
EM 203
Digital Interactive Techniques
1.5 credits, 3 hours
Addresses the development of computer skills j
in digital time-based software and cyberspace
software. Special attention is given to interac-
tivity and theories of informational
architecture. Technical expertise and efficient
working methodologies are applied to prob-
lems in both individual and group projects. All
software is standard in current graphic design
industry practice.
Prerequisite: EM 202 or permission of the
instructor by portfolio and interview.
EM 210
Digital Multimedia
3 credits, 3 hours
The elements of digital muhimedia production
techniques used to create Internet Websites
and interactive programs. Hands-on produc-
tion experience as well as a perspective on
developments in this rapidly growing field
through readings and lectures. The first half of
the semester is dedicated to learning the basics
of Macromedia Director and sound manipula-
tion software utilized to create interactive
projects that combine images, sound, and ani-
mation.
The balance of the semester is dedicated
to the creation of a Website using
Macromedia Dreamweaver. Emphasis is
on clear communication and the creation of
intuitive interactive interfaces.
Prerequisite: EM 1 10 or equivalent introductory
course that includes experience with the Macintosh
operating system and a working knowledge of Adobe
PhotoShop, or permission of the instructor.
EM 221
Virtual Sculpture
3 credits. 3 hours
Students will create physical models made of
Styrofoam. wax, or clay, and create virtual
versions of the same models. Working back
and forth between the real and the virtual, sm- ■
dents will gain an understanding of the
differences and similarities of the ideas gener-
ated by each working style. Computer-
generated images will be combined with pho-
tographs of physical maquettes and real
environments. Final products will be digital
files and 2D prints or slides suitable for com-
mission proposals, presentations, and artist's
portfolios.
Prerequisite: EM 110 or equivalent introductory
course that includes a working knowledge of Adobe
PhotoShop, or permission of instructor
146
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Fine Arts
Fine Arts courses are open to non-Fine
Arts majors on an elective basis as space
and experience pennits.
FA 205
Concepts/Works on Paper
3 credits, 6 hours
Offers an opportunity for idea development,
visual perception, and the organization of
experience into compositions. Primary
emphasis is on developing visual expression,
skill in using various materials, and growth of
critical evaluative abilities through group dis-
cussions and critiques. Contour drawing,
collage, Xerox transfer, book arts, and other
experimental drawing and printing techniques
are explored. Students are encouraged to com-
bine media.
FA 222
Drawing: Form and Space
3 credits, 6 hours
An introduction to the issues of drawing,
including perception, analysis, invention, and
experimentation. A variety of thematic ideas,
structural possibilities, and imaginative inter-
pretations are explored. Students are exposed
to a wide spectrum of precedents in the history
of drawing and are encouraged to enlarge their
working definitions of how form and space
can be effectively expressed.
FA 223
Introduction to Figure Modeling
3 credits, 6 hours
Modeling from life for the beginner, stressing
direct observation, eye-hand coordination, and
depth discrimination. Both perceptual and
conceptual skills are developed and funda-
mental studio practices are taught, such as
armature construction, clay utilization, and
modeling techniques. Works are fired in clay
or cast in plaster.
FA 234
Drawing Studies
1.5 credits, 3 iiours
A three-hour studio course advancing the
objectives of FA 222 Drawing: Form/Space.
Emphasis will be on two essential concerns:
process and purpose. Students will be
expected to carry out sustained involvement in
specific projects focused on method and con-
tent. Studio practices will include both
open-ended invention and closed-system
approaches. This kind of sustained focus on a
variety of techniques and themes will culmi-
nate in a final term project.
Prerequisite: Sophomore status.
FA 235
Media/Teciiniques
1.5 credits, 3 hours
A three-hour studio course of instruction and
demonstration in a variety of traditional tech-
nical approaches to the handling of paint
media, including the preparations of grounds
and supports. Media options could include oil,
acrylic, encausfic, casein, gouache, gold-
leafing, fresco, and egg tempera. This course
is unique among our course offerings in its
focus solely on physical processes, not con-
cept- or image-development.
FA 330
Drawing: Site-Specific Projects
3 credits, 6 hours
Focus on the production of drawings and
models of site-specific projects. Issues related
to public art, environmental art, public and
private realms, materiality, site selection, and
site specificity are explored.
FA 333 A
Attitudes and Strategies
3 credits, 6 hours
A studio-criticism course jointly coordinated
by the three Fine Arts areas, which presents
issues that cross over the unique domains of
the sculptor, the printmaker, and the painter.
Fine Arts students from all three majors work
on projects designed to increase their aware-
ness of the attitudes and strategies embodied
in artworks. Concepts such as idealism, natu-
ralism, and expressionism are explored in
light of their implication for form-making
methods and principles. Lectures, studio proj-
ects, and group critiques create a forum for
advanced study of the purposes and contexts
of the Fine Arts.
FA 424 A/B
Drawing References
1 .5 credits, 3 hours
Advanced drawing projects focusing on the
relation between a given work and its refer-
ences and resources. Emphasis is on
understanding the nature of references or
resource material and the manner in which
references or resources influence the outcome
of a work. This studio/critique course aims at
enhancing students" ability to connect their
personal and subjective interests to the larger
context of nature, history, and culture.
Prerequisite: PT334. PR 333, or SC 333.
FA 460
Senior Fine Arts Seminar
1.5 credits, 3 hours
The artist's role in historic and contemporary
contexts. Issues surrounding the various pur-
poses of art and how culture deals with artists
are explored through discussion with visiting
artists, alumni, and faculty. Students work
toward the acquisition of a professional profile
in resume, artist statement, and slide prepara-
tion. Discussion of gallery practices and
portfolio presentations cultivate an awareness
of professionalism and career opportunities
in the fields of painting, printmaking, and
sculpture.
Prerequisite: Completion of Junior studio course-
worli.
IN 449
Crafts, Fine Arts Internship
3 credits, 6 hours
Opportunities to apprentice to practicing
artists, gain gallery experience, and work with
nonprofit organizations, which lead to prac-
tical experience and knowledge about the
field.
Graded Pass/Fail.
Open to Juniors, Seniors. Fine Arts and
Crafts students.
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
147
MFA in Ceramics,
Painting, or Sculpture
FA 610
Studio Topics
3 credits. 5 hours repeatable
Brings together students from each of the
major disciplines to explore studio issues
common to all visual arts.
Open only to SUM FA students.
FA 611
Graduate Drawing
3 credits, 5 hours
An advanced studio focused on developing
and expanding students" visual language and
skills while challenging their conceptual
approach to drawing by examining and
applying the use of materials and methods
having historic and cultural origins.
Open to all CAD graduate students upon
portfolio approval.
FA 612
Professional Practices
3 credits. 5 hours
Designed to familiarize students with
methods, practices, and professional standards
in preparation for the thesis exhibition and
eventual entry into the visual arts professions.
Prerequisite: FA 611.
FA 691, FA 692
Independent Studio I, II in
Ceramics, Painting, or Sculpture
(Winter/Summer Critique)
3 credits per semester. 5 hours
The Independent Studio is intended to assist
students in establishing independent produc-
tion in their major discipline while acquiring
the ability to integrate studio production with
the demands of off-campus life. At the conclu-
sion of Summer I and. subsequently, Winter
Critique I, the student and faculty mentor
agree on a plan of work to be pursued during
the off-campus semester, which will be a con-
tinuation of work begun in the previous
semester. The students are required to propose
a direction for their investigations and have
access to off-campus studio space within
which to carry out the proposal. Enrollment in
the Independent Studio requires a commit-
ment of 150 hours, equivalent to 10 hours of
studio activity per week during the 15- week
off-campus semester. The studio mentor meets
with the student five times during the semester
at three-week intervals, reviewing the stu-
dent's progress for a 1-2 hour session. The
first meeting is a group meeting held on
campus and the next three are held as indi-
vidual critiques at the student's studio. One
meeting may take place at the mentor's studio.
The last meeting is the final critique of the
semester, which takes place at the Winter
Critique held at the University.
Open to SUMFA students only.
FA 695, FA 696
Independent Writing Project I, II
1 .5 credits, 3 hours
The Independent Writing Project is a corequi-
site of the Independent Studio I and II. and is
intended to inform the student's ongoing
Independent Studio investigations undertaken
during the fall and spring off-campus semes-
ters. The student proposes an area of research
intended as a continued examination of topics
introduced during the previous summer semi-
nars, Structure and Metaphor or Art and
Society. The student is encouraged to explore
through writing the range of issues emanating
from seminar reading and discussion, and the
relationship of these external influences to the
development of themes and directions being
explored in the studio work.
Open to SUMFA students only
FA 781, FA 782
Thesis Writing Project I, II
1 .5 credits. 3 hours
The Thesis Writing Project is a corequisite of
Thesis Preparation I and II. and takes place
during the fall and spring off-campus semes-
ters. Research for the Thesis Writing Project is
intended to inform the student's second-year
independent studio activity, which focuses on
identifying and developing potential directions
for the thesis exhibition and written thesis.
The student is expected to consider issues
raised during the previous summer's seminar
that are particularly relevant to the more
focused direction of his or her studio work.
The student independently formulates a pro-
posal and bibliography for a formal paper to
be based upon the more developed du'ection of
his or her work. The range of issues consid-
ered for further investigation may include
aesthetic, conceptual, technical, or visual cul-
ture issues as well as the relationship of the
major work to other disciplines.
Prerequisites: FA 692. FA 78 L
FA 793
Thesis Preparation I
3 credits. 5 hours
Following the successful completion of
Summer II and the MFA Candidacy Review,
the student is declared a degree candidate and
may begin independently producing a body of
work intended for eventual presentation in the
thesis exhibition following completion of
Summer III. In consultation with the studio
mentor, the student submits Thesis
Preparation Plan I. identifying and describing
a direction of investigation to be undertaken
during the fall semester. The student is
expected to identify specific issues to be
addressed: intended focus of the work, consid-
erations of technique, materials, scale,
location, etc. The student must propose a per-
sonal timetable for accomplishing the thesis
and identify the sources that will be used in
preparation for the exhibition. Enrollment in
Thesis Preparation I and II requires a commit-
ment of 150 hours, equivalent to 10 hours of
studio activity per week during the 15-week
off-campus semester.
Prerequisite: FA 692.
FA 794
Thesis Preparation II
3 credits, 5 hours
In consultation with the studio mentor, thesis
candidates propose further development of
directions begun in studio work the previous
semester by submitting Thesis Preparation
Plan II for the spring semester to the mentor.
Prerequisite: FA 793.
148
The University of ttie Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
FA 795
Thesis Exhibition
6 credits, 10 hours
The MFA degree certifies that the artist has
attained a high level of competence and inde-
pendent judgment in the discipline and is
qualified to stand with his/her mentors as a
master artist. The thesis exhibition and accom-
panying written thesis are intended to serve as
a demonstration of this mastery. During the
final semester, criticism-based research is
undertaken as a continuation of the summer
seminar in Criticism and is intended to assist
the MFA candidate in completing the written
component of the thesis requirements.
Prerequisite: FA 794.
Foundation
FP 101
Drawing and SIcetching
1 .5 credits, 3 hours
This course is intended to provide individuals
who are not majoring in the visual arts with
the basic skills required to represent the form
of simple objects and the presence of space on
a two-dimensional surface. No prior drawing
experience or portfolio of work is required to
enroll in this course. The class will include
instruction in the basics of linear perspective
using both optical and diagrammatic methods.
In-class projects will focus on fundamental
principles while homework assignments will
support the students as they develop the ability
to sketch and draw, and think and plan, using
manual drawing tools and materials.
FP 102
Sl<etchingthe Human Figure
1.5 credits. 3 hours
This course is intended to provide individuals
who are not majoring in the visual arts with an
introduction to some of the materials,
methods, and processes useful when drawing
the human figure. No prior experience with
manual media or portfolio of work is required
to enroll in this course. The course will intro-
duce a basic series of drawing exercises using
the figure as a subject. Analytical and respon-
sive approaches will be compared and a range
of materials including pencil, charcoal, and
collage will be used. The figure and the figu-
rative volume in its immediate spatial
environment will be studied and the ability to
capture the gesture, appropriate scale, propor-
tion, and mass of the figure will be stressed.
Homework assignments will apply principles
learned in class.
FP 103
Color Basics
1 .5 credits. 3 hours
This course is intended to provide individuals
who are not majoring in the visual arts with
the basic skills required to work with some of
the fundamental properties of color and use
them for representational purposes. The
course will introduce the basic color vocabu-
lary and begin training the eye to perceive and
apply the distinctions of hue, value, tone, and
temperature. Methods of color classification
will set the stage for a sequence of projects
designed to help students develop the ability
to begin working with color formally and
descriptively. Homework assignments will -
apply principles learned in class.
FP 104
Materials, Tools and Form
1 .5 credits, 3 hours
This course will instruct students in those
basic manual skills that will help them build
three-dimensional objects and spatial works.
No prior experience with manual media or a
portfolio of work is required to enroll in this
course. Paper and wood are the primary mate-
rials that will be used to execute freestanding
objects of various sizes and all assignments
will include instruction on how to best use and
extend the physical properties of these mate-
rials. Students will be challenged to fabricate
works with multiple parts as well as works
that include some formal and mechanical
complexity. Assignments that focus on the
design of spaces and the modeling of environ-
ments will also be included. Instruction will
be conducted in the foundation studio and
wood shop and all students will be given an
orientation to the safe use of that facility and
all of its power tools.
FP 110
Drawing
3 credits, 6 hours
Drawing is approached as a process by which
the student examines and investigates the
visual world. Line, mark, and shape are
among the drawing elements emphasized in
the first semester. With these tools, students
examine the form and structure of various sub-
jects while they improve their manual skills,
strengthen their vision, and begin to define
their drawing vocabulary. Graphite and char-
coal pencils and a range of appropriate papers
are the most frequently used materials.
Historical precedents are discussed, master
works analyzed, and relevant practical infor-
mation-including the elements of spatial
representation-is assimilated into the flow of
class assignments. Focus is on the challenges
and rewards of developing perceptual skills.
Prerequisites: Aceeptance hr portfolio cf v/f ii- and
FPWlorFPlOl.
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
149
FP 111
Drawing
3 credits. 6 hours
Building on the sensibilities, skills, and infor-
mation of FP 1 10, students refine their
perceptual abilities, utilize new media such as
charcoal and inks, and develop additional
drawing strategies. Students undertake the
analysis of complex natural objects, sculpt
volume with line and tone, encounter the chal-
lenge of drawing the human figure, and meet
other situations, which demand the assimila-
tion of new information and the application of
advanced skills. Controlling proportion,
building volume, and engaging the illusion of
space, while at the same time developing the
desired quality of light and illumination are
the descriptive goals of the semester. Faculty
bring skills, projects, and information devel-
oped in the two- and three-dimensional design
classes into the service of drawing.
Prerequisite: FP 110.
FP 120
Two-Dimensional Design
3 credits, 6 hours
A focused introduction to the two-dimensional
plane and its elements. The first semester
defines the terminology and sharpens the
ability to di.scem and use the visual elements
of point, line, shape, and pattern. These funda-
mental elements are studied as independent
units and brought together, supporting and
animating one another, in a variety of formats.
Skills in the use of black and white media
such as inks, plaka, and acrylic pigments and
equipment including technical pens, brushes,
and drafting tools are developed in the first
semester. The visual forces discovered during
efforts to combine these elements and mate-
rials define the more complex subject of the
class.
Prerequisite: Acceptance hy portfolio review or
FPI03.
FP 121
Two-Dimensional Design
3 credits, 6 hours
Builds on the projects and skills established in
FP 120. The majority of FP 121 is devoted to
the introduction and extended study of colon
The major works of the semester are based in
the use of acrylic paints and require skills of
mixing and application. Other color mediums
such as collage, pastels, watercolors, and oil
sticks are also explored. Color theories are
discussed, projects requiring tinfing. shading,
and toning clarify these basic concepts and
master works of color are studied. Ideas devel-
oped in the class are shared with other
Foundation courses and skills from three-
dimensional and drawing classes are imported
to support current two-dimensional projects.
Representational and nonrepresentational
form is developed as students integrate past
experience, refine their skills of observation,
expand the study of visual forces, and explore
more complex principles of organization.
Prerequisite: FP 120.
FP 130
Three-Dlmensional Design
3 credits, 6 hours
Introducdon to concepts of mass, volume,
space, the properties of materials, and the
unique visual qualifies of three-dimensional
form. The introduction of three-dimensional
ideas and related terminology is combined
with the instruction in the use of materials
such as paper, wood, plaster, and clay, and the
operation of hand and power tools. Students
develop the practical experiences needed to
make objects that counteract and respond to
forces and answer visual requirements. As the
semester progresses, challenges of assembly,
scale, and visual complexity increase.
Inventive processes, form generation, and con-
struction are undertaken as properties of
materials join with visual goals to develop
new forms. Most importantly, students under-
stand that they have access to a new language
as they learn to see, think, and plan three-
dimensionally.
Prerequisite: Acceptance by portfolio review or
FP 104.
FP 131
Three-Dimensional Design
3 credits. 6 hours
Building on the skills, language, and sensibili-
ties of FP 130, the second semester undertakes
more complex projects. Some projects involve
the combining of several materials and require
the assembly of multiple parts. The semester
builds in complexity, exploring the challenges
of scale and engaging dme and movement as
part of their conception. Included is the intro-
duction of environmental works, setting in
place new principles of three-dimensional
organization, researching the order of nature,
and taking up the challenge of representation
in three dimensions. Faculty relate works and
share principles with either the two-dimen-
sional or drawing classes, and attempt to
harvest skills and sensibilities developed in
those classes into the service projects in
Three-Dimensional Design.
Prerequisite: FP 130.
FP 140
Time and Motion
3 credits, 6 hours
An introduction to the fundamental principles
of time-based art: sequence, movement,
timing, motion design, principles of anima-
tion, perception, and concepts of narrative.
Students work in a variety of media using
manual, computer, video, and body-based
approaches.
Prerequisites: FPllO. FP 120. and FP 130.
150 The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Graphic Design
GD 105
Freshman Graphic Design Projects
1.5 credits, 3 hours
An elective course introducing the Foundation
student to the profession of graphic design and
its working processes. The classworlc begins
with directed formal studies and leads to an
introductory communication project.
Emphasis on the craftsmanship and working
methods of the student as well as the breadth
and depth of the student's individual investiga-
tive process. Studio lecture/demonstrations
focusing upon professional case studies and
field trips.
GD 210
Letterform Design
3 credits, 6 hours
The analysis and development of letterforms.
The norms of weight, proportion, character
width, and alphabetic relationships are devel-
oped perceptually, by hand. This course
stresses the inherent optical relationships that
exist in the construction of typefaces derived
from the Latin alphabet.
Prerequisite: Completion of the Foundation pro-
gram, or permission of the instructor by
portfolio review and interview.
GD211A
Descriptive Drawing
3 credits, 6 hours
A freehand drawing course based upon obser-
vation and analysis of the underlying structure
and form of man-made and natural objects.
Logical representation and problem solving
are emphasized. A visual vocabulary of line,
shape, value, texture, and spatial organization
is addressed to develop drawing as a method-
ology for research and invention.
Prerequisite: FP 1 1 1, or permission of the
instructor by portfolio review.
GD 211 B
Descriptive Drawing
3 credits, 6 hours
A continuation of GD 21 1 A. A freehand ana-
lytical drawing course that addresses organic
form and objects from nature. Drawing skills
are developed to sketch and research visual
concepts, as well as to use the medium for the
invention of original images in upper-level
courses.
Prerequisite: GD211 A.
GD 212
Typography Fundamentals
3 credits, 6 hours
The course addresses the basic formal lan-
guage of typography and the application of
typographic principles to frame basic commu-
nication messages. Typographic investigations
are achieved by both manual and digital
means.
Prerequisites: GD 2 10 and enrollment in EM 201.
.or permission of instructor by portfolio review and
interview.
GD 213 A
Design Systems
3 credits, 6 hours
An intensive laboratory where the formal
aspects of composition, organic and geometric
form, color, symbolic drawing, craftsmanship,
and processes of conceptualizing are investi-
gated. Assignments are founded on directed
goals and playful investigation to train the stu-
dent in areas of selection, self-criticism, set
theory, and visual logic.
Prerequisite: Completion of the Foundation pro-
gram, or permission of the instructor by portfolio
review and interview.
GD 213 B
Design Systems
3 credits, 6 hours
A continuation of GD 213 A. Further investi-
gation of the visual language of design,
culminating in a basic communication
problem.
Prerequisite: GD213A.
GD 306 A
Typography Emphasis
3 credits, 6 hours
This course investigates and defines advanced
principles of typography in a communication
context. Directed research based upon typo-
graphic norms addresses the issues of
informational hierarchies achievable through
visual form and structure as well as the
editorial and expressive potentials of
typography. Coursework uses traditional and
digital technologies.
Students must have working knowledge of
QuarkXPress and basic Macintosh operation
or be concurrently enrolled in EM 202.
Working knowledge of Adobe Illustrator is
preferred.
Prerequisites: EM 201 and Junior status in the
Graphic Design department, or permission of the
instructor by portfolio review and interview.
GD 306 B
Typography Emphasis
3 credits. 6 hours
An extension and continuation of GD 306 A.
The typographic principles of the grid, text
typography, text hierarchies, image integra-
tion, all within the context of a multi-page
format.
Students must have working knowledge of
QuarkXPress and basic Macintosh operation
or be concurrently enrolled in EM 203.
Working knowledge of Adobe Illustrator and
Adobe PhotoShop is preferred.
Prerequisite: EM 202. GD 306 A. or permission of
the instructor by portfolio review and interview.
GD 310 A
Photographies I
3 credits, 6 hours
Develops a designer's methodology and view-
point to achieve both structure and meaning in
photography, and as a way to extend the range
of how objects and nature can be seen and
translated using photographic processes. The
course explores darkroom techniques, con-
trolled lighting, and studio setups. Students
use both traditional photography and digital
software to create hybrid photographic
images. Extensive studio and darkroom work
is required.
Prerequisites: PF211 A and Junior status in the
Graphic Design department, or permission of the
instructor by portfolio review and interview.
GD 310 B
Photographies II
3 credits, 6 hours
An upper-level elective studio in photography.
Students undertake self-initiated projects
to explore various applications of the con-
structed photograph. The designer's
perspective and working process are used to
focus the communication aspects of the
imagery. Past topics have included medium-
and large-format cameras, advanced studio
lighting, and advanced printing and darkroom
techniques. Extensive studio and darkroom
work. Traditional and digital media can be
explored.
Prerequisite: PF211 A Introduction to Photography
or permission of the instructor by portfolio review
and interview.
Tlie University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
151
GD 311 A
Communications Studio
3 credits, 6 hours
Developing an understanding of visual rela-
tionships and how to use them to create visual
impact and clarity while solving communica-
tions problems. Invention, intuition, and
discovery are combined with logical thought
and thorough preliminary research. Special
attention is given to refining the student's per-
ceptual abilities, hand skills, and the
integration of various media. Use of both tra-
ditional and computer technologies.
Prerequisites: EM 201 and Junior stains in the
Graphic Design department, or by permission of the
instructor by portfolio review and interview. Students
must have woricing Icttowledge of Adobe Illustrator,
basic image scanning, and basic Macintosh opera-
tion, or be concurrently enrolled in EM 202.
GD311 B
Communications Studio
3 credits, 6 hours
A continuation of GD 3 1 1 A, concentrating on
the development of color, sensitivity, and per-
ceptual abilities within a communications
context. A working process that develops
invention through logical thought and intuition
is applied to communications problems. Use
of both traditional and computer technologies.
Prerequisites: EM 202 and GD3II A. Students
must have working knowledge of Adobe Illustrator,
basic image scaimiitg, and basic Macintosh opera-
tion, or be concurretitly enrolled in EM 203.
GD313
Color and Image Concepts
3 credits, 6 hours
Addresses color and image concepts devel-
oped deductively from nature and inductively
thorough experimental, perceptual analysis. A
communications problem in which color is the
prominent vehicle is solved in a thorough
research process. Diverse media are explored.
Applications may use two- and three-dimen-
sional formats.
Prerequisite: Junior status in the Graphic Design
department, or permission of the instructor by port-
folio review and interview.
GD316A
Drawing Applications I
3 credits, 6 hours
The use of drawing as both an expressive and
an informational vehicle to solve communica-
tions problems, Formal issues of composition,
selection, and color as well as the conceptual
issues of narrative, sequence, and representa-
tion are focused toward the communication of
ideas, emotions, and information.
Prerequisite: GD2I1 B. or permission of the
instructor by portfolio review and interview.
GD 316 B
Drawing Applications II
3 credits, 6 hours
An upper-level elective drawing course in
which students initiate individual projects that
use drawing as the primary medium to solve
communications problems. Various media,
mixed media, and hybrid images are explored
in a thorough research-oriented design
process. Connection between formal issues
and communication effectiveness is stressed.
Prerequisite: GDSI6A, or permission of the
instructor by portfolio review and interview.
GD322
Three-Dimensional Graphic Design
3 credits. 6 hours
Explores the design of messages in spatial
environments. Investigation of the relationship
between the communication of messages
within the context of scale, surface texture,
light modulation, and their application to
three-dimensional form, combine both experi-
mental and practical criteria. Although
traditional methods of conceptualizing are
used within a thorough visual process, exten-
sive computer work is involved.
Prerequisite: Junior status in the Graphic Design
department, or permission of the instructor by port-
folio review and interview. Students should have
expertise in QuarkXpress or Aldus PageMaker,
Adobe Illustrator or A Idus Freehand, and Adobe
PhotoShop.
GD326
Single Image
3 credits, 6 hours
The design of a complete publicity unit as
exemplified in a poster.
Prerequisite: Junior status in the Graphic Design
department, or permission of the instructor hy port-
folio review and interview.
GD411A I
Design Studio I
3 credits, 6 hoiirs [
A wide-ranging exploration of the connections
between image and text, and symbolic and
narrative imagery, supported by studies in
semiotics, information theory, and research
methodology. Both traditional and computer
technologies within a thorough research ;
process are included. Preliminary research and
definition of a self-generated degree project is
undertaken by Graphic Design majors in this
course.
Prerequisite: Senior status in the Graphic Design
department, or by permission of the instructor by
portfolio review and iitterview. Studeius should have
expertise in QuarkXpress or Aldus PageMaker.
Adobe Illustrator or Aldus Freehand, and Adobe
PhotoShop.
GD 411 B
Design Studio:
Senior Degree Project
3 credits, 6 hours
A self-generated degree project is developed
involving research, proposals, complete
design formulation, and final presentation.
Topics are reviewed by a panel of faculty in
Graphic Design, with projects reviewed by an ,
outside critic midway through the preliminary i
stages of development. This course uses both
traditional and computer technologies within a \
thorough research process.
Prerequisites: GD 41 1 A andGD4l2A. Students '
should have expertise in QuarkXpress or A Idus \
PageMaker Adobe Illustrator or Aldus Freehand, !
and Adobe PhotoShop. Experience in Macromedia i
Director is desirable. j
GD 412 A/B
Problem Solving
3 credits, 6 hours
Develops approaches to solving communica- '
tions problems of broad scope and
increasingly practical application across '
varied media formats. Students work within
technical and time constraints. The course ;
uses both traditional and computer technolo-
gies within a thorough research process.
Prerequisite: Senior status in the Graphic Design
program, or permission of the instructor by portfolio [
review and interview. Expertise in QuarkXpress or
A Idus PageMaker A dobe Illustrator or A Idus Free
Freehand, A dobe PhotoShop, and Macromedia j
Director is necessary. j
152
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
GD 426 01
Advanced Typography
3 credits, 6 hours
This elective course addresses typography as
both the primary vehicle to communicate
information and as a support to images.
Assignments range from informational design
to expressive, content-based problems, to intu-
itive investigations and formal experiments.
Problems may incorporate both static and
moving formats, both print and non-print envi-
ronments. Although traditional methods of
conceptualizing are used within a thorough
visual process, extensive computer work is
involved.
Prerequisite: Senior stuliis in llie Graphic Design
department, or permission of the instructor by port-
folio review and interview: Students should have
expertise in Quark Xpress or Aldus PageMaker.
Adobe Illustrator or Aldus Freehand, and Adobe
PhotoShop. Experience in Macromedia Director is
desirable.
GD 426 02
Advanced Typography
3 credits, 6 hours
Focuses on the design of the human experi-
ence with technology. As designers, our
processes and principals for shaping 2D and
3D information and artifacts have improved
our physical environment and the ways in
which we communicate. Explores how these
practices apply to the design of the digital arti-
fact and the man-machine interface.
Prerequisite: Senior status in the Graphic Design
Department, or permission of the instructor by port-
folio review and interview. Students should have
expertise in QuarkXpress, Illustrator, PhotoShop,
and Macromedia Director
IN 440
Design Internship
3 credits, 90 hours/semester
Open to Graphic Design, Illustration and Industrial
Design majors only.
Graduate Seminars
GR691
University Seminar:
Structure and Metaphor
3 credits, 3 hours
An interdisciplinary seminar in which students
from all graduate programs examine theoret-
ical issues of structure and metaphor in
relation to art and design. Topics include
cognition and perception, meaning and repre-
sentation, and systems of organization and
expression.
(May be taken to satisfy Aesthetics and Art
Criticism corequisites for the MAT program.)
Graduate students only.
GR692
University Seminar:
Art and Design in Society
3 credits, 3 hours
An interdisciplinary seminar in which students
from all graduate programs examine theoret-
ical issues relating to the place of art and
design in society. Topics include the social
role of the artist/designer, public policy and
the arts, issues of post-modernism, and aes-
thetic and ethical implications of emerging
arts and communications technologies.
(May be taken to satisfy Sociology/Anthropologv
corequisites for the MAT program.)
Graduate students only
XX 699
Graduate students may register for upper-level
undergraduate liberal arts courses and studio
electives for graduate credit. Graduate stu-
dents will be expected to contribute at a higher
level in the classroom and will have additional
assignments (readings, papers, etc.) in order to
be granted graduate credit. Students are
advised to select an area of study that
broadens or intensifies their background in the
arts, education, and related disciplines. Often
this work contributes directly to preparation of
the graduate project proposal. In order to reg-
ister for an upper-level undergraduate course
and receive graduate course credit, the student
must submit a completed special topics/inde-
pendent study form to the Office of the
Registrar.
GR 791
University Seminar: Criticism
3 credits, 3 hours
An interdisciplinary seminar in which
advanced graduate students further examine
the nature of image-making and design with
particular attention to the theories and applica-
tions of criticism.
Prerequisite: GR 692. Graduate students only
Liberal Arts
HU 008 A/B
English as a Second Language I, II
3 credits, 3 hours
Prepares students for whom English is a
second language to produce the kinds of
writing expected of them on the college level,
and to improve their reading and critical
thinking skills. This is a two-semester require-
ment. HU 008 A provides a review of English
grammar, sentence stnicture, and paragraph
development. It focuses primarily on the
development of fluency in writing and
reading. The second semester focuses on the
different kinds of prose techniques and on
responding in writing to readings and to the
work of other students. A workshop format
engages students in collaborative learning
activities.
Weekly proctored writing sessions with a
minimum of 10 essays per semester and
tutoring sessions are mandatory. Credits for
HU 008 A or B do not count toward gradua-
tion. On rare occasions, students may be
exempted from HU 008 B by the instructor.
HU 008 A and B are graded on a pass/fail
basis. A student who successfully completes
the sequence enters HU 1 10 A.
HU 009 AND HU 109 B
First Year Writing
3 credits, 3 hours
Designed to help students improve reading,
writing, and study skills. The emphasis is on
technical aspects of writing, including
grammar, punctuation, word usage, and para-
graph construction, along with reading
comprehension, vocabulary, and sentence
structure. Grades in HU 009 are on a pass/fail
basis only.
HU 009 credits do not count toward degree
requirements.
HU 009 B substitutes for HUIIOA. Students suc-
cessfully completing HU009B will take HUllOB
the following semester
HU 103 A/B
Introduction to IVIodernism I, II
3 credits, 3 hours
A multi-arts viewpoint that explores the his-
torical and cultural inheritance of the West
over the last two centuries. The first semester
concentrates on the period 1776-1914 and
examines the complex movements known as
romanticism and realism; the second semester
covers the next half-century of high mod-
ernism and its consequences.
Required of all UArts undergraduates.
Common Core
The University of the Ans Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
153
HU 110 A/B
First Year Writing I, II
3 credits. 3 hours
A year-long writing course, the theme of
which is "Artists as Writers." Covers the var-
ious kinds of writing that artists may be
expected to produce, ranging from infomiai
generative writing to formal critical analysis,
and from presentational writing to research.
The student will write about the arts
(including the student's own work), the artist,
and the artmaking process. The first semester
focuses on the artist and artmaking, and the
second semester on the various arts-visual
arts, dance, music, theater, multimedia, and
literature-regarded from various cultural
perspectives.
Required for all UArls undergraduates.
Common Core
HU 130 A/B
French I
3 credits, 3 hours
Study of the basic elements of French
grammar through conversation and drills
derived from readings of easy modem prose
and from a cultural reader.
Humanities
HU 131 A/B
German I
3 credits, 3 hours
A one-year course of basic grammar The aim
of the course is to develop the reading,
writing, and speaking skills of the first-year
German student.
Humanities
HU 132 A/B
Italian I
3 credits, 3 hours
This course covers basic grammar and conver-
sation about everyday Italian life and culture
and basic grammar through reading of Italian
prose.
Humanities
HU 140 A
Art History Survey I
3 credits, 3 hours
A survey of Western visual arts (including
architecture) from the earliest extant examples
(cave paintings) to the Renaissance. The focus
will be on ancient Greece and Rome, and
medieval Europe. The arts will be presented in
cultural and historical context.
Discipline History /Humanities
HU 140 B
Art History Survey II
3 credits, 3 hours
A continuation, from the Renaissance to the
present day, of the survey of Western visual
arts begun in HU 140 A. Major styles and
periods: baroque, romanticism, realism, mod-
ernism. The arts are presented in cultural and
historical context.
Discipline History/Humanities
HU 162
Individual and Society
3 credits, 3 hours
Examines the concepts of "individual" and
"society" and how they are related under
modem social conditions. It treats society and
social institutions as fundamental realities and
considers the ways in which social forces
affect individual personality and identity. It
provides an introduction to the perspective of
.sociology as distinct from that of psychology.
Topics include socialization, social solidarity,
morality, authority, deviance, individualism,
and freedom.
Social Science
HU 181 A
Child and Adolescent Psychology
3 credits, 3 hours
This course focuses upon Erikson's psychoso-
cial stages of life from birth to adolescence.
Major topics include pregnancy, the birth
process, and the physical, intellectual, emo-
tional, and social development of the child.
Family life and parent-child relationships are
also examined, with particular attention given
to the impact of our social institutions upon
parents and children.
Social Science
HU 181 B
Adult Psychology
3 credits, 3 hours
This course focuses upon Erikson's psychoso-
cial crises from adolescence to death. Major
topics include career choice, human sexuality,
love, marriage, values, mental health and
mental illness, aging, and death.
Social Science
HU 201
Lyric Poetry
3 credits, 3 hours
A survey of lyric poetry, with particular
emphasis on a single period or a group of
poets, e.g., Walt Whitman, Emily Dickinson,
Wallace Stevens, Allen Ginsberg, Sylvia Plath,
and the English Romantics.
Literature ■
HU210A
19th Century American Writers
3 credits. 3 hours
The major ideas and trends in 19th century
American literature, including works by Poe,
Hawthome, Melville. Dickinson, and James.
Literature
HU 210 B
20th Century American Writers
3 credits, 3 hours
20th century American writers including
works by Wharton, Lewis, Hemingway,
Fitzgerald, and Steinbeck.
Literature
HU211
Women Writers
3 credits, 3 hours
An examination of literature written by
women, studied for its uniqueness and,
equally important, for its significance to the
mainstream of literature. The course begins
with such writers as Jane Austen. Emily
Bronte, and Virginia Woolf, and concludes
with contemporary writers.
Literature
HU 212
Introduction to Mythology
3 credits, 3 hours
This course begins by defining mythmaking
(a creadve process essential to all sociefies,
past and present) and by analyzing the dif-
ferent approaches to myth. It moves on to
examine creation myths from around the
world and, finally, a selection of myths from
different cultures.
Lileralure
HU213
World Drama
3 credits. 3 hours
This course examines some of the most
important periods in dramatic literature before
the modern period, in both the Westem and
non-Westem traditions; Classical Greece and
Rome, India of Kalidasa, Medieval Europe,
Japan (Noh and Kabuki), Renaissance Italy
and Spain, Neoclassical France, Romantic
drama, and opera. The relation of drama to
ritual as a worldwide phenomenon. Emphasis
on the relarion of dramatic styles to the cul-
tures and theaters within which they
developed, and exploration of the idea of
"total theater" in which poetry, song, dance,
and music fuse together.
Literature
154
The University of Ihe Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
HU 216
The Short Story
3 credits, 3 hours
A study of the short story from Poe to the
present. Samplings from the British, the
Americans, and the Europeans, with particular
attention to the major authors who reinvented
the genre. At the end of the semester, students
look at developments in contemporary fiction:
the anti-story, the new wave, the surreal, the
minimal, the funny, the mythic.
Literature
HU 217
African-American Literature
3 credits, 3 hours
Examines the role of the African-American
writer in American society through writers
like Langston Hughes, Richard Wright, Ralph
Ellison, James Baldwin, Toni Morrison.
Imamu Baraka, and Gwendolyn Brooks, who
have made major contributions to American
literature and culture.
Literature
HU 218
Superheroes
3 credits, 3 hours
Examines the most important heroes of pop-
ular culture in the Middle Ages-Beowulf,
Roland, Siegfried, and King Arthur. What do
these heroes and the epics in which they
appear reveal about their culture? How do they
compare to modem popular superheroes?
Literature
HU 219
Children's Literature
3 credits, 3 hours
The anonymous oral traditions of world
literature, which continue to nurture the
imagination and sense of identity of children
today, and the modem tradition of children's
literature. The course focuses on children's lit-
erature as an introduction to the principles and
forms of art and to the role of the imagination
in child development.
Literature
HU 221
Forms of Autobiography
3 credits, 3 hours
Intimate, revelatory explorations of the many
worlds of the self; Hemingway as a young
writer in Paris meeting Fitzgerald, Stein,
Picasso; Salinger as Holden Caulfield, preppy
sage; Freud on himself on psychoanalysis;
Roth's Portnoy complaining in the throes of
lust; Proust's great theories of love, death, and
art; Van Gogh as artist and moral thinker in his
letters; Greene's portrait of a woman's obses-
sion with love and God; Andre Malraux's
Lazams; Tillie Olsen's stmggles to write as a
housewife; and others. Readings from letters
and diaries by the authors of the books.
Literature
HU 230 A/B
French II
3 credits, 3 hours
Open to students who have completed French
1 or have had two or more years of high school
French. Modem French short stories and a
novel. La Priiicesse de Cleves, by the 18th
century writer Mme. de la Fayette.
Humanities
HU 232 A/B
Italian II
3 credits, 3 hours
Open to students who have completed Italian I
or have had two or more years of high
school Italian.
Hitmanities
HU 240
Ancient Art
3 credits, 3 hours
An investigation of the art and architecture of
the ancient world, concentrating on the clas-
sical art of Greece and Rome, but also
considering the arts of Mesopotamia and
Egypt.
Humanilies/A rl History
HU 241
Medieval Art
3 credits, 3 hours
The sculpture, architecture, painting, and dec-
orative arts of Europe from the early Christian
period in the third century A.D. to the proto-
Renaissance in Italy in the 14th century,
observing the emergence and flowering of a
northern European mystical Christian vision
separate from the monumental classical vision
of Greece and Rome.
Humanities/Art History
HU 242 A
Northern Renaissance Art
3 credits, 3 hours
The painting of the late Gothic illuminators
and the 14th century German and Flemish
Mannerists such as Cranach, Bmeghel, and
Bosch. Students investigate the complex sym-
bolism of northern iconography, the new
techniques developed, and the historical back-
ground of a style often called
Northern Realism,
Humunities/A it History
HU 242 B
Italian Renaissance Art
3 credits, 3 hours
The major figures in the artistic centers of
Italy from Giotto in the 14th century to the
early work of Michelangelo at the end of the
15th century. The architects, sculptors, and
painters of Florence are the focus, but artists
in Venice, Padua, and Rome are discussed as
well.
Humanities/Art History
HU 243
Baroque Art
3 credits, 3 hours
The works of the major European artists of the
17th century: Bemini, Rubens, Velasquez,
Rembrandt, Poussin, and Vermeer Through
the genres of landscape, still life, and portrai-
ture, all mature by the 17th century; other
artists such as Hobbema, Ruisdael, Zurbaran,
and Hals are also studied.
Humanities/Art History
HU244
Mythology in Oriental Art
3 credits. 3 hours
An introduction to the symbolism of
mythology in Oriental art. The course investi-
gates myths in the major Oriental cultures and
their basic patterns, functions, and meanings.
HumanitiesIA rl History
HU 245 A/B
History of Western Architecture I, II
3 credits, 3 hours
In the first semester, this course surveys the
development of Western architecture from the
ancient world of the Greeks and the Romans
through the Renaissance to the end of the 19th
century. In the second semes" ■, emphasis is
on the 20th century. This course should be
taken in sequence; the second semester
assumes knowledge of the first semester's
work.
Humanities/Art History
The University of tiie Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
155
HU246
19th Century Art
3 credits, 3 hours
Painting and sculpture made in the modern
age in the West are examined in an interna-
tional context. Emphasis is on the worics of
the major French, English, German, and
American artists. The variety of subjects these
artists explored and the new styles they devel-
oped as they responded to the world of the
19th century will be among the topics
discussed.
Humanities/Art History
HU 248A
Film History
3 credits, 3 hours
A survey of the history of film. Categories of
films to be screened include: early film forms
(Lumiere, Griffith, and De Mille); Dada and
Surrealist influences (Leger, Bunuel. Marx
Brothers, and Resnais); the impact of
Constructivism and the Machine Aesthetic
(Eisenstein, Vertov, and Chaplin); German
Expressionist influence on Hollywood (Ford,
Welles, Wyler, and Hitchcock); modem
European and American films (Bergman,
Godard, Kubrick, and Altman); and avant-
garde art influences on new American cinema
(Deren and Brakhage).
Humanities/Art History
HU 248B
Issues in National Cinema
3 credits, 3 hours
The course selects films from modem
European and emerging national cultures that
demonstrate both their interactions with post-
modern politics, theory and culture, and the
development of an alternative discourse to
Hollywood commercial filmmaking. Films are
selected from the following: 1920s Soviet
cinema; Italian Neo-Realism; anthropological
documentaries; French New Wave;
postwar/holocaustal cinema in Europe; other
national cinemas (Spain, Hungary, Japan,
etc.); anti-colonialist struggles in films from
India, Egypt, Argentina, Chile, Brazil,
Senegal, and Cuba; and new women film-
makers.
Humanities/Art History
HU250
History of Sculpture
3 credits, 3 hours
A chronological survey of three-dimensional
art produced from the end of the 18th century
to the present day. Works by major artists from
Europe and the United States-including
Auguste Rodin, Pablo Picasso, Alexander
Calder, David Smith, Louise Nevelson, and
Christo-will be discussed and compared to the
works of
earlier artists.
Discipline History IHiitnanitiesI Art History
HU 251
History of Industrial Design
3 credits, 3 hours
A survey of industrial design in the West,
paying particular attention to developments in
the 20th century.
Discipline History IHiimanitiesI A rt History
HU253
History of Crafts
3 credits, 3 hours
A survey of the principal movements and ten-
dencies in Western crafts since the middle of
the 19th century. Main topics include the arts
and crafts movement; art nouveau; the
Bauhaus; the interrelationships among fine
arts, crafts, and design; and postmodernism.
Required of all Crafts majors.
Discipline History /Humanities/Art History
HU 254
History of Communication Design
3 credits, 3 hours
A survey of two-dimensional design in the
West, with particular attention to develop-
ments in the 20th century.
Required of all Graphic Design majors.
Discipline History IHumaititiesI Art History
HU 255
History of Photography
3 credits, 3 hours
Provides an introduction to the significant
photographers and their work in the history of
the medium; describes technical developments
and their impact; discusses the major visual
and aesthetic trends in the development of
photography and their relationship to art in
general; describes the larger social context in
which photography has developed.
Required of all Photography ttwjors.
Discipline History /Humanities
HU259
Listening to Music
3 credits, 3 hours
Examines the unique role assigned to the lis-
tener of music and addresses the special skills
expected of an informed audience. Ranging
between the hows and whys of listening, dis-
cussion introduces students to some of the
strategies composers use to organize their
thoughts, including concepts of variation,
development, and non-verbal narration.
Humanities
HU 260 A
Human Origins I
3 credits, 3 hours
An anthropological perspective on the evolu-
tion, biology, ecology, and behavior of
nonhuman primates from protosimians to great
apes. Students are introduced to the principles
of evolution and adaptive trends. The course
focuses on the successful terrestrial species of
Old World monkeys and on the apes — the
gibbon, orangutan, gorilla, and chimpanzee.
Comparisons are made among nonhuman pri-
mates and our own species regarding diet,
locomotion, tool use and manufacuire, modes
of communication, social behavior and social
systems, motherhood and child care, aggres-
sion, "cultural" behavior, and recent trends in
nonhuman primate behavior studies. Films are
an important part of the course.
Social Science
HU 260 B
Human Origins II
3 credits, 3 hours
An introduction to human biological and cul-
tural evolution, a survey of the major
evolutionary stages in hominid evolution, an
introduction to Paleolithic technologies, and a
comparison of contemporary Stone Age soci-
eties with Paleolithic populations.
Social Science
HU261
Observing Humans
3 credits, 3 hours
This course presents several different social
science frameworks and seeks to uncover what
can be learned about human behavior by
people watching. Students will choose places
for brief weekly observation and use their own
art skills to document what they see.
Social Science
156
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
HU262
History of China
3 credits, 3 hours
The time span is from the earliest days to the
present, with special emphasis on the modem
period and relations with the United States
and other Western powers. Intellectual and
cultural developments will take precedence
over political and economic history.
Social Science
HU 262 B
History of Japan
3 credits, 3 hours
The time span is from the earliest days to the
present, with special emphasis on the modern
period and relations with the United States
and other Western powers. Intellectual and
cultural developments will take precedence
over political and economic history.
Social Science
HU 263
The Culture of the Italian
Renaissance
3 credits, 3 hours
A comprehensive study of the political and
social conditions in Italy from the end of the
14th until the middle of the 16th centuries that
led to the artistic and philosophical flowering
known as the Renaissance. Not only will the
contributions of the larger states of Milan,
Venice, and Florence be explored, but also the
petty princely courts of Mantua, Ferrara, and
Urbino. Reading Machiavelli's The Prince and
portions of Catiglione's The Courtier is an
essential part of the course.
Social Science
HU 264
Modern American History
3 credits, 3 hours
A study of contemporary developments,
values, and issues as a product of 20th century
phenomena. The course explores the dramatic
changes that have occurred in American
society over the last 50 years.
Social Science
HU265
Introduction to Folklore
3 credits, 3 hours
Introduces folklore genres and the history of
folklore study. Sacred objects, fairy tales,
songs, parodies, and legends will be analyzed
and presented in class.
Social Science
HU 266 A
History ofthe Classical World
3 credits, 3 hours
The history of ancient civilizations in the Near
East and Europe. Egyptian, Greek, and Roman
history, religion, philosophy, and culture.
Readings from selected ancient texts and
slides of art works illuminate the culture of
these civilizations and provide links with the
present world.
Social Science
HU 266 B
History of Medieval Europe
3 credits, 3 hours
The history of medieval Europe from the
Germanic settlements to the establishment of
Christianity and the feudal social expansion of
the late Middle Ages are important topics for
the course. A wide range of readings and the
use of examples of medieval art promote a
broad interpretation of this period.
Social Science
HU 267
Introduction to Cultural
Anthropology
3 credits, 3 hours
The nature of and variation in human cultures
and the various theories (historical, functional,
and symbolic) that explain them. This survey
of culture in both Western and non-Western
societies considers a number of special topics
such as language and society; cultural identity
and the arts; gender, marriage and family; and
social ranking and power relations. The
impact of globalization, tourism, and cultural
change are also considered.
Social Science
HU268
Introduction to the Bible
3 credits, 3 hours
The main themes of the Bible are explored
from a modem, critical, nondenominational
point of view. No knowledge of the Bible is
assumed. Using historical and literary
analysis, continuities as well as differences
between the Hebrew and Christian testaments
are examined.
Social Science
HU270
Introduction to Aesthetics
3 credits, 3 hours
An introduction to the philosophy of art. After
a brief examination of analytic, philosophical
methods and the history of aesthetics, a con-
sideration of some of the fundamental
problems in aesthetics, such as the intention of
the artist, the physical object/aesthetic object
distinction, and the nature and comparison of
different kinds of media. The relationship
between language and art is central to the
course.
Humanities
HU272
Money Matters
3 credits, 3 hours
Explores issues in economics and business by
working out from the roles and interests of
individual agents and groups. We will look at
economic dynamics in artistic and cultural
work in the present, and at different historical
moments, to explore further the nature of
these relationships and their meanings.
Students are exposed to economic and busi-
ness discourse, provided with a broad and
intensive understanding of economic and busi-
ness language and logic, given experience in
the application of these concepts to issues in
their field of interest, and provided with a
foundation for thinking through the economic
and ethical dimensions of their work.
Social Science
HU 274
Introduction to Philosophy
3 credits, 3 hours
A course specifically tailored to students with
no experience in reading philosophy. Several
basic issues are considered, including
freedom, God, morality, death, mind, appear-
ance, and reality. In addition to brief readings
of primary sources, readings of discussions of
these issues along with innovative fiction
illustrating salient points.
Humanities
HU281
Dynamic Anatomy
3 credits, 3 hours
The stmcture of the body as it relates to form
(size, shape, and proportion) and support (pos-
ture, position, and movement). In-depth
exploration of the location, orientation, and
actions of major muscle groups, joints, and
bones, and how they differ by gender through
the life cycle.
Science/Math
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
157
HU 282 A
Fundamentals of College
Mathematics
3 credits, 3 hours
An introduction to the fundamental mathemat-
ical principles and operations used in
undergraduate courses in the physical and
social sciences. Topics include sets, logic,
probability, statistics, number theory, algebra,
and geometry.
SciencelMath
HU 282 B
Calculus
3 credits, 3 hours
An introduction to calculus emphasizing the
applications of differential and integral cal-
culus to the physical and social sciences.
Prerequisite: HU282A. equivalent college-level
mathematics, or pre-coUege advanced algebra and
geometry.
SciencelMath ' ■ ■
HU283
Probability
3 credits, 3 hours
This class introduces some of the most funda-
mental ideas in classical probability. Polling
techniques, casino gambling, weather fore-
casting, and lotteries are a few areas in which
the principles of probability directly influence
our lives. Modern science depends on proba-
bility to build mathematical descriptions of the
real world. This course explores the concepts
of probability in an intuitive and accessible
way, understandable to beginners. Topics
include sample spaces, counting, conditional
probability, and the concept of independence,
game, theory, random variables, and the law of
large numbers,
ScieitcelMath
HU 285 A
Life Sciences
3 credits, 3 hours
Life forms in the context of current adapta-
tions and evolutionary history. Special
emphasis is placed on an exploration of
evolutionary relationships, ecological special-
ization, and the dynamic relationships of
organisms in an integrated ecosystem.
SciencelMath
HU 285 B
Physical Sciences
3 credits. 3 hours
An investigation of astronomy, geology, and
other physical sciences. Topics include the
origin of the universe and solar system, the
nature of matter and energy, and the parame-
ters of physical science. Provides a
background for understanding the impact of
science on human values.
SciencelMath
HU286
Science and Pseudoscience
3 credits. 3 hours
The methods and issues of contemporary sci-
ence. Explores how scientific information is
used in society through an examination of sci-
entific, near-scientific, and pseudoscientific
claims, including strange creatures like
Bigfoot and the Loch Ness monster, miracle
cures for diseases, and paranormal phe-
nomena. The question of how funding might
affect scientific research is also examined.
SciencelMath
HU 288
Introduction to Brain, Mind,
and Behavior
3 credits, 3 hours
This course is an introduction to the organiza-
tion of the brain and nervous system and to
their interactions with other body systems that
produce observable behavior. Topics include
brain structure and function, neurological
changes over the life cycle, and the effects of
malfunctions. Students will learn about spe-
cific brain structures and how they contribute
to or produce specific behavioral characteris-
tics. We will explore learning, memory, the
senses, and sex differences in the brain, as
well as other current topics of interest,
SciencelMath
HU289
Contemporary Issues in Life
Sciences
3 credits, 3 hours
Each semester this course explores one area of
current research in the life sciences by
focusing on three significant issues in the cur-
rent scienfific literature. Students participate
in a series of semi-independent inquiry activi-
ties. For each research issue, student teams
complete a "challenge" that demonstrates their
ability to understand, collect, interpret, and
apply appropriate information in order to pro-
pose solutions and to convince classmates of
the success of their approaches.
Science IMath
HU292
Introduction to World Religions
3 credits, 3 hours
An exploration of world religious traditions
originating in Africa, the Americas. China.
India. Japan, and the Middle East. Religions
are studied in their historical and cultural con-
text, including their development in various
times and places, and their beliefs regarding
the cosmos, society, the self, and good and
evil.
Social Science
HU 293
Dance & Expressive Culture
3 credits, 3 hours
Dance is woven into the mythology, theater,
music, poetry, and literature of many cultures.
The course will consider dance as it has influ-
enced and has been influenced by these forms
of creative expression in the Western worid.
Humanities
HU 310
The Stories of Chel<hov
3 credits, 3 hours
The readings include most of Chekhov's best
stories, excerpts from his letters, some critical
interpretations, and supplementary material on
family life. Consideration of the literary
merits of his stories and exploration of what
goes on between the people in them.
Literature
HU 311
Greek Drama
3 credits. 3 hours
Plays by Aeschylus, Sophocles, Euripides, and
Aristophanes are examined to understand their
own integrity as works of art and to develop
an appreciation of the extraordinary achieve-
ment of Greek drama.
Literatin-e
HU313
Poetry Writing Workshop
3 credits, 3 hours
Students' poems are discussed, criticized,
revised, and improved. Principles governing
the decision to change a poem in various
ways, the study of poems by American and
English poets, the reading of some criticism,
and concentration on the basic principles of
craft are all included. Theories involve sound,
content, meaning, and purpose of student
poems and of poetry in general. The poet's
sense of an audience also figures in the
discussion.
Literatiu-elHwnanities
158
The University of the Art.s Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
HU 314
Literature and Film
3 credits, 3 hours
This course explores different subjects
through the arts of literature and film. Among
the topics treated have been images of
Vietnam, the thriller, and science fiction.
Literature
HU315A
Modern Drama
3 credits, 3 hours
A study of the modem theater from the end of
the 19th century to the present. Students will
read some of the world's best playwrights:
Ibsen, Strindberg, Chekhov, Shaw, Pirandello,
Lorca, Brecht, and Beckett. Theater trips are
part of the experience of this course.
Literature
HU 315 B
Contemporary Drama
3 credits, 3 hours
A study of the experimental developments in
today's theater, both on Broadway and off,
from Waiting for Godot to the present
moment. Students will read some of the best
known playwrights of our time; Genet,
Beckett, lonesco, Albee, Pinter, and Shepard,
as well as some not so well known. Theater
trips are part of the experience of this course.
Literature
HU 316
American Playwriglits
3 credits. 3 hours
A study of the American theater in the past 50
years, looking at the works of such authors as
O'Neill, Miller, Williams, Albee, and Shepard.
Theater trips as well as showings of filmed
plays are part of this course.
Literature . .
HU317A
Romanticism
3 credits, 3 hours
A study of the Romantic movement in
England, including the major poets (Blake,
Wordsworth, Coleridge, Byron, Shelley, and
Keats), several novelists (including Bronte's
Wiitheriiig Heights and Mary Shelley's
Frankenstein), and samplings from letters and
essays. Some of the dominant Romantic
themes-the artist as outcast, revolution, man's
relation to nature-will be addressed.
Literature
HU318
Literature of tlie Roman Empire
3 credits, 3 hours
After a glance at Greek influences, the course
will focus on the literature of classical Rome.
Readings from epic, drama, and lyric forms,
with an emphasis on the interaction between
those classical forms and the culture that
produced them.
Literature
HU 320 A
Western Literary Masterpieces I
3 credits, 3 hours
Works from antiquity through the Middle
Ages that form the foundation of Western lit-
erature. Focuses on the creation of character,
the structure and form of the works, and the
perspectives and values they reveal. Examines
the questions asked by different cultures and
how human potential, fate, and reality are
defined.
Literature
HU 320 B
Western Literary Masterpieces II
3 credits, 3 hours
Works from the Renaissance through the
Neoclassical periods that form the foundation
of Western literature. Focuses on the creation
of character, on structure and form, but also on
tone (humor, parody, satire, and irony) and the
perspectives and the values the works reveal.
Literature
HU322
Scriptwriting
3 credits, 3 hours
This workshop course introduces students to
the discipline of writing for theater and film.
Focusing on the elements necessary for the
creation of producable scripts, the student
develops practical skills leading to the cre-
ation of a short work for stage or screen by the
end of the semester.
Humanities
HU323
Arts Criticism
3 credits. 3 hours
A writing course designed to promote under-
standing and interpretation of the arts across a
multidisciplinary spectrum and to provide stu-
dents with the basic tools of critical analysis.
Group discussion and selected
readings.
Humanities
HU325
Fiction Writing
3 credits, 3 hours
A workshop course on writing short fiction.
Students will study the elements of creative
writing, experiment with several forms,
develop a clear voice, and learn how to criti-
cize the work of others usefully. The goal is to
produce a portfolio of finished pieces.
Humanities
HU326
Contemporary Arts in America
3 credits. 3 hours
A continuation of the two-semester
Modernism sequence, this course focuses pri-
marily on contemporary literature (mainly
plays and novels) and contemporary visual art
(mainly painting and sculpture), with occa-
sional forays into music. Investigation, by
studying primary sources, of the way various
works of art express the contemporary aes-
thetic in America.
Literature
HU342
Artsof Ciiina
3 credits, 3 hours
Painting, sculpture, architecture, and decora-
tive arts from the Neolithic period ( 1 6th
century B.C.) to the Ching dynasty (18th cen-
tury A.D.). Special emphasis on Shang bronze
ware. Han and T'ang sculpture, and Sung and
Ching pottery. The various styles are related to
their historical, religious, and social back-
ground, with particular attention paid to the
impact of Confucianism. Taoism, and
Buddhism on Chinese art and architecture.
From time to time. Eastern and Western cul-
tures will be compared to understand better
the similarities and differences between them.
Humanities/Art History
HU343
Art of Venice
3 credits, 3 hours
An emphasis on light, an apparent spontaneity
of organization, and a delight in richness and
sensuality guided the development of painting
in Venice from Bellini through Tiepolo. The
course presents Venetian painting from the
mid- 15th to the later 18th century, pausing to
focus especially on the art of Titian, Veronese,
and Tintoretto, and themes peculiar to
Venetian art: the female figure poesia;
Venetian light and landscape; portraiture;
courtiers, humanists, and beauties; the confra-
ternity narratives; and the fresco decoration of
the Venefian villas.
Humanities /Art History
The University of the Aits Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
159
HU344
Avant-Garde Cinema
3 credits, 3 hours
An examination of the arts of experimental
film and video. The exploration of mental
states, visual metaphors, process, and non-tra-
ditional forms and structures are central to the
course. In addition, the focus is on the co-exis-
tence of avant-garde film and video with their
commercial counterparts. Also examines film
and video language in relation to other art
languages.
Htimaiiilies/Arl History
HU345
Modern Architecture
3 credits, 3 hours
The course investigates modem architecture,
its theoretical premises, and the social context
that generated it. Students will also inquire
into modem architecture's legacy: postmodem
architecture.
HumanhieslArt History
HU 346
Foll< Art and Architecture
3 credits, 3 hours
A survey of American vernacular art and
architecture, with special attention to the
eastern United States. Comparisons will be
made to the ethnic traditions from which this
architecture springs, principally English and
German. Social considerations, including
those of gender, occupation, and religion, will
be discussed.
Humanities/Art History
HU 347
Arts of Africa
3 credits. 3 hours ,
Artistic, religious, sociological, and geo-
graphic aspects of societies in sub-Saharan
Africa are studied in order to establish conti-
nuity as well as distinction between their art
forms. Black American folk art, an extension
and transformation of African art, is analyzed.
Humanities/Art History
HU 348
American Art to 1945
3 credits, 3 hours
A survey of American art, architecture, and
design, emphasizing the 19th and 20th cen-
turies. The material is divided into a series of
secfions or themes and is considered in rela-
tion to tradition. Each section or theme is
studied through the work of the major artists
who best represent it.
Humanities/Art History
HU349
American Film Genres
3 credits, 3 hours
Considers various film genres and styles in
American cinema, such as comedy, film noir,
the Westem, the musical, and the American
independent film.
Humanities/Art History
HU 351
Electronic Video
3 credits, 3 hours
The history of video as an art form from the
eariy 1960s to the present. Basic film concepts
are reviewed in their application to emerging
new electronic formats. Video art is examined
in all of its aspects-as computer art. installa-
tion, and sculpture. The survey explores the
variety of styles, genres, and forms that consti-
tute the distinctive achievement of American
video art. The videotapes and documentation
of artists' projects are examined and placed
within the social and cultural context in which
they were produced. The market forces and
the political/psychological systems shaping
the audience and creating an increasingly
problematic role for artists are important con-
siderations.
Humanities
HU353A
Impressionism
3 credits. 3 hours
The 19th century style known as
Impressionism is often considered to be the
foundation of European modem art. The
course chronologically invesdgates
Impressionism in its historical and cultural
context. The technical and conceptual ideas
that underlie its development will also
be considered.
Humanities/Art History
HU 353 B
Post-Impressionism
3 credits, 3 hours
Post-Impressionism is chronologically investi-
gated with respect to its historical, cultural,
and aesthetic context. The technical and
philosophical concepts that underlie Post-
Impressionism's development are also
explored.
Humanities/Art History
HU354
Women Artists
3 credits. 3 hours
A chronological survey of professional female
painters and sculptors active in Westem
Europe and the United States, from the 16th
century to the present. The role played by
women artists in eariier ages, other nations,
and different media will also be examined.
Humanities/Art History
HU 355
Dada and Surrealism
3 credits. 3 hours
The history of the post-Worid War I antira-
tional movements of dada and surrealism.
Since these were literary and political as well
as artistic movements, attention is given to
texts by such authors as Artaud, Breton,
Freud, Jarry, Rimbaud, and Tzara, as well as
to works of visual art.
Humanities/Art History
HU 357
Modern Art
3 credits. 3 hours
At the beginning of the 20th century, artists
responded to new technological forces and the
pressures of mass culture in styles such as
cubism, constructivism, and surrealism- styles
that are still being explored by our contempo-
raries. The course surveys the period
1880-1980. emphasizing the continuity of the
modern artist's situation and role.
Humanities/Art History
HU359
Politics and the Media
3 credits. 3 hours
This course analyzes how political and social
forces interact with the American community
and how that interaction affects govemment
stmcture and policy. Factors such as popula-
tion profiles, "suburbanites." elite groups,
public opinion, party organization, elecfions,
and reform movements are studied.
Social Science
HU 360 A
Renaissance and Reformation
3 credits, 3 hours
The intellectual and cultural explosion that
heralded the modem era in Westem civiliza-
tion. Political, economic, philosophical,
religious, and cultural developments.
Social Science
160
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
HU 360 B
Age of Enlightenment
3 credits. 3 hours
The dramatic intellectual revolution of the
Age of Science and the applications of the
revolution to every province of human experi-
ence. The Enlightenment and the French
Revolution, which are also part of the trans-
formation of Europe, are studied from the
perspective of their consequences for the
modem world.
Social Science
HU 361
Islam: Religion and Culture
3 credits, 3 hours
Examines Islamic culture as it is refracted in
various religious and literary texts by Muslims
from Arabia. Iran (Persia), and India as well as
North America. Begins with discussions of the
centrality of prophecy and scripture in Islam,
followed by a perusal of Islamic theology and
mysticism, and ends with a sampling of pri-
marily literary prose and poetry pieces that
provide insights into the multifarious facets of
Islamic civilization.
Social Science
HU 362 A/B
American Civilization
3 credits. 3 hours
An in-depth study of the origins of American
society with an emphasis on the particular
political, social, and cultural patterns that
shaped the course of American development.
The first semester surveys the process of set-
tlement, colonial societies, independence, the
growth of the egalitarian spirit, and the Civil
War. The second semester studies American
society in the modem period. From the per-
spective of today, the course examines the
legacy of Reconstruction, the Industrial
Revoludon. the Reform Movements, the
World Wars, and the Cold War. The factors in
the past that have shaped contemporary
society are stressed.
Social Science
HU363
Modern Culture
3 credits, 3 hours
This course examines the nature of expressive
culture (media and art) and its role in contem-
porary society. A key question is why we use
expressive culture and how it affects us.
Topics include high versus popular culture;
relations between culture, politics and com-
merce; and the place of censorship in a Uberal
society.
Social Science
HU364
Sociology of Art
3 credits. 3 hours
An examination of the relationships that exist
between art and society. Focus on the social
influences that shape the creation and recep-
tion of artistic works. Topics include the social
role of the artist; art as a socially organized
form of work; the social institutions of artistic
production, transmission, and audience recep-
tion; and the understanding of art in terms of
its social context.
Social Science
HU 365 A/B
History and Culture of Latin America
3 credits. 3 hours
The history and culture of Latin America,
including indigenous as well as European cul-
tural sources. National distinctions and
the origins of modem society in the area
will be developed.
Social Science
HU 366
The City
3 credits. 3 hours
A study of the city in history, the forces that
shaped its development, and the impact of the
city on histor\'. The American city from the
17th century to the present is used as the
model for this study.
Social Science
HU 367
Eastern Religions
3 credits. 3 hours
An exploration of Hinduism, Buddhism.
Confucianism. Taoism, and Shintoism. Each is
studied in its historical and cultural context,
including its development into various forms
over the years and in different places, and its
beliefs regarding views of the cosmos, society,
the self, and good and evil. In addition to a
text, students read from the literature of each
religion.
Social Science
HU 368
Sociology of Politics
3 credits. 3 hours
The interaction of political, social, economic,
technological, and cultural forces in American
society, with their resultant impact on the
poUtical system. A brief introduction to polit-
ical science is incorporated eariy in the
semester. Factors such as population profiles,
"suburbanites," elite groups, party organiza-
tion, elections, and reform movements are
considered.
Social Science
HU369
Cultural Ecology
3 credits. 3 hours
An investigation, from the perspective of eco-
logical anthropology, of the various cultural
adaptations found in different ecosystems
such as deserts, grasslands, circumpolar
regions, tropical and temperate forests, and
high-altitude and urban areas. These adapta-
tions include hunting and gathering, fishing,
and agriculture. In these examples various atti-
tudes toward the environment, the impact of
population growth, and the effect of con-
flicting technologies on resources are
considered.
Social Science
HU370
Greek Philosophy
3 credits. 3 hours
After examining fragments from pre-Socratic
philosophers, we consider the writings of
Plato, including three or four dialogues and
The Republic. Selections from Aristotle's writ-
ings on physics, the soul, and aesthetics.
Humanities
HU371
The American Suburbs
3 credits. 3 hours
Increasingly, the United States has become a
suburban nation, with more and more of its
people living and working in the suburbs. This
course will examine how suburbs began in the
late 19th century, how they have evolved, and
what they are like today. Students will do
fieldwork.
Social Science
HU372
Continental Philosophy and
Existentialism
3 credits. 3 hours
Examined as a Westem altemative to the ana-
lytic method. Following some historical
background, the work of a major existentialist
philosopher, such as Martin Heidegger, is
explored.
Humanities
HU373
Ethics
3 credits. 3 hours
The history of ethics and the fundamental eth-
ical problems that have concemed
philosophers for the past 2.500 years. The
study begins with Plato and Aristotle and
extends to contemporary analytic philosophy,
phenomenology, and existentialism. Problems
include the "is/ought" distinction, the ultimate
objective of life, religious issues, human
rights, justice, and welfare.
Humanities
Ttie University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalos 2003/2004
161
HU374
Personality and Creativity
3 credits. 3 hours
Through readings of works of major theorists
on the nature of personality and creativity, the
course poses two major questions: "What do
major theorists have to say about the human
personahty?" and "What do major theorists
have to say about what it means to be a cre-
ative person?" There are a number of ways of
answering these questions and it is not the
purpose of the course to choose the "best"
answer, but rather, to put the student in a
better position to malce his/lier own decisions.
Social Science
HU377
Critical Theory and the Arts
3 credits, 3 hours
Since the 1960s, the arts have been influenced
by "critical theory," a term loosely designating
new developments in linguistics, philosophy,
and humanistic study. Unlike traditional inter-
ests in a work of art's formal properties,
antecedents, or author, critical theory investi-
gates the artwork as a text: an interlocking
series of messages, themes, and codes.
Investigating those themes, critical theory sees
in art texts everything from messages about
class, race, and gender to encoded forms of
power and desire. The class will consider the
reception of these critical ideas by artists
throughout the '70s. '80s, and '90s.
Social Science IHumanities
HU 381
Urban Wildlife
3 credits. 3 hours
As humans modify natural habitats and
expand our population, we increasingly
encounter wild animals in "our" environ-
ments. In some cases, these encounters result
from destruction of natural habitats for these
animals; in other cases, we have created
"greenspaces" that actively attract other
species. This course examines the ways in
which humans and other animals interact in
shared and contiguous environments ba.sed on
semi-independent field studies carried out by
students on selected species. After an intro-
duction to common species and a short period
of directed study, teams of students will plan,
carry out, and analyze one short-term (four-
week) study on one species that inhabits urban
Philadelphia.
SciencelMath
HU382
Social Psychology
3 credits, 3 hours
An introduction to the field of social psy-
chology and an examination of contemporary
life in America through its social institutions:
education, criminal justice, media, commu-
nity, and family, and the social problems that
have emerged since the 1940s. Significant cur-
rent events that illuminate these social
problems are incorporated into the course-
work.
Prerequisite: HU181A or B.
Social Science
HU383
Personality and Adjustment
3 credits, 3 hours
The study of personality and the patterns of
behavior and predispositions that determine
how a person will perceive, think, feel, and
act. The inner life of men and women, the
quality of their character, their adjustment to
their social milieu, and their potentialities for
self-fulfillment are all explored. Special atten-
tion is given to adjustment problems of artists
in work and in love.
Social Science
HU 384
Abnormal Psychology
3 credits, 3 hours
Human development and abnormal psy-
chology: ego defenses, emotional disorders,
therapeutic theories, and treatment techniques.
Clinical diagnosis and classificadon of mental
disorders.
Prerequisite: HU 1 81 A or B.
Social Science
HU 385
Concepts of Modern Physics
3 credits. 3 hours
A survey of important concepts in contempo-
rary physics. Students participate in
problem-based exploration of a particular
theme such as communication, predictions,
shelter, medicine, and sports.
SciencelMath
HU 386
Human Genetics
3 credits, 3 hours
Explores the fundamentals of genetics through
the study of our own species. Homo sapiens.
Introduces students to the study of inheritance
and how molecular, physiological, environ-
mental, and behavioral mechanisms affect the
measurable characteristics of humans around
the world. Topics include genetic diseases and
unusual physical characterisfics among others.
Using local resources, students engage in
problem-solving activities in comparative
biology.
Science/Math
HU388
Perception
3 credits, 3 hours
The structure and function of the senses of
vision, audition, olfaction, gustation, touch,
temperature, kinesthesis, time, and the brain
and nervous system are considered as they
relate to perception.
Science/Math
HU 389
Evolution in IVIodern Perspective
3 credits. 3 hours
Evolution is the unifying theoretical founda-
tion of all the life sciences. This course
explores the mechanisms that produce evolu-
tion and their meaning for our current
knowledge in biology, conservation, medicine,
agriculture, and related sciences. Students will
also consider the effect(s) that society's
awareness of evolution has had on social insti-
tutions such as law, literature, politics, and
education.
Science/Math
HU 390
Mass Media and the Arts
3 credits, 3 hours
A wide range of media are examined: televi-
sion (sit-coms and reality TV), movies
(comedies and adventure), advertising (print
and TV), and news (local and national tele-
casts). An underlying assumption in this
course is that a key aspect of all media is their
focus on the production of meaning through
language, through images, and through tech-
nology itself. The media is investigated
through the eyes of contemporary theory in
order to test the theory's usefulness as a tool in
understanding media. Students develop a
variety of critical tools to interpret mass
media.
Social Science
162
The University of ttie Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
HU 392
American Musical Tlieater
3 credits, 3 hours
Explores aspects and accomplishments of the
American musical theater from the '20s to the
'80s. Emphasizes the social, political, and
psychological elements ranging from
Gershwin to Sondheim, to offer entertainment
with a serious message.
Not open to students who have reeeived credit
form 3 12 A.
Humanities
HU393
Afro-American Culture
3 credits, 3 hours
A survey of some of the most important Afro-
American contributions to American culture,
with special attention to the 20th century and
to the arts. Among those whose work will be
discussed are W. E. B. DuBois. Duke
Ellington, Langston Hughes, and Paul
Robeson.
Social Science I Humanities
HU394
Play, Performance, and Literature
3 credits, 3 hours
The focus of this course is the relationship
between theories of play and performance and
culture and the arts. The course draws upon
current thought in anthropology, sociology, art
criticism, and literary/dramatic performance
theory (e.g. Barthes, Brecht, Cage, and
others).
Humanities ■
HU 410
The Uncanny
3 credits, 3 hours
Treats the theme of the uncanny as it has been
represented principally in literature and the
visual arts, from Poe and Hoffmann down to
Kafka and recent cinema. The point of depar-
ture is Freud's essay on the subject.
Literature/Humanities
HU 411 A
Renaissance Literature
3 credits, 3 hours
Works by Boccaccio, Machiavelli, Erasmus,
Rabelais, Cervantes, Jon,son, Calderon, and
others are read to explore the remarkable con-
tribution of these writers and to develop an
understanding and appreciation of the
Renaissance.
Literature
HU 411
Shakespeare
3 credits, 3 hours
The dramatic works of the supreme writer of
the English Renaissance-Shakespeare. A
selection of his comedies, histories, tragedies,
and romances are read. Focuses on the plays
not only as literary accomplishments but also
as theatrical performances existing in three-
dimensional space. Concerned both with the
parameters of the original Renaissance stage
and with modem translations and transforma-
tions of the plays.
Literature
HU412
Detective Film and Fiction
3 credits, 3 hours
An examination of the genre known as hard-
boiled detective fiction as it developed in
literature and then was extended by feature
films. Among the authors to be considered are
Dashiell Hammett, Raymond Chandler, and
Ross MacDonald; among the films are The
Maltese Falcon, The Big Sleep, and The Long
Goodbye.
Literature
HU413
Literature and Film: From Text to
Screen
3 credits, 3 hours
Explores the conceptual and technical leaps
between the written text and its transformation
to a cinematic text on the screen. Students
examine what happens to plot, characteriza-
tion, and bound and free description when a
narrative text is converted to an audiovisual
presentation. In certain examples, the transfor-
mation of narrative structure is traced from the
novel to the screenplay to the finished film.
Students gain insights into the relafionships
between written and filmed dialogue, between
written description and cinematic mise-en-
scene, between the novel's omniscient narrator
and the film's voice-over.
Literature
HU414A
The Big, Fat, Famous Novel
3 credits, 3 hours
We will read three of the world's best and
most important novels: Tolstoy's War and
Peace, Melville's Moby Dick, and Joyce's
Ulysses. Each provides great pleasure to the
serious reader and much material for intense
discussion. Each novel has the equivalent of
its own little course, about one month long.
Literature
HU 414 B
19th Century Novel
3 credits. 3 hours
Study of some of the most admired, best-loved
books of the world, written in the heyday of
the novel, the 19th century: Crime and
Punishment by Dostoevsky, Madame Bovary
by Flaubert, Wuthering Heights by Bronte,
Great Expectations by Dickens. Portrait of a
Lady by James. This is a course for people
who love to read.
Literature
HU 415 A
Modern Poetry
3 credits. 3 hours
Reading and interprefing major American and
European poets of the late 19th and early 20th
centuries, such as Yeats. Eliot. Williams,
Stevens. Rilke. and Montale. Attenfion is
given to understanding each poet's style and
its evolution. Aesthetic theory and the function
of poetry as a social force in the modem worid
are also discussed.
Literature
HU 415 B
Contemporary Poetry
3 credits. 3 hours
Beginning with the Beats, the major schools
of contemporary poetic practice such as the
deep image, language/action, confessional
poetry, new formalism, and projectivism are.
addressed. The effects of feminism, sexual
orientation, and racial idenfity on contempo-
rary poetry are also examined.
Literature
HU416A
Contemporary Novel
3 credits, 3 hours
A range of contemporary novels from writers
who have made an impact since the 1970s.
Issues of form and style, the relationship of
the contemporary novel with the past, and the
nature of narrative are addressed.
Literature
Ttie University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
163
HU417
Art of Song Lyric
3 credits, 3 hours
A study of how contemporary song lyrics
developed from the tradition of lyric poetry
and folk ballads. Line-by-line analysis of
famous lyric poems from literary history will
be conducted. Popular songs of the past 50
years are used in the discussion of the prob-
lems and challenges of putting words to
music, with special attention paid to Bob
Dylan. Other artists include Billie Holiday.
Simon and Garfunkel, the Mamas and the
Papas, the Rolling Stones. Led Zeppelin, and
Stevie Wonder. There is a substantial writing
requirement: students may elect to study
poetry, librettos, or song lyrics, or to write
original song lyrics of their own.
Lilemture
HU 419
American Modernists
3 credits. 3 hours
In reading and discussing key works of three
American novelists-Fitzgerald, Hemingway,
and Faulkner-the student considers to what
extent and how they reflect such modernist
concerns as style, language, narrative point of
view, myth, psychology, and history. In addi-
tion, students lead discussions of selected
short fiction by Hemingway and Faulkner sup-
ported by research into criticism conducted at
a major research library, and finish the course
with an essay on one additional major work by
the writers studied.
Literature
HU 420
Major Writers
3 credits, 3 hours
Focuses on the life and work of a single
important writer. Among the authors who have
received this intense examination have been
James Joyce, Samuel Beckett, and Emily
Dickinson.
Literature
HU421
On tlie Nature of Poetry and Art
3 credits. 3 hours
An exploratory course on the nature of poetry
and art in which a variety of texts will be
used — literature, philosophy, art, letters, criti-
cism. We contend with some major figures,
including Wallace Stevens, Rilke, Eliot,
Giacometti, Monet, and Van Gogh.
Contemporary artists such as Sidney
Goodman. Warren Rohrer, Ray Metzger, and
Tom Chimes are discussed; some may them-
selves join in our discussion.
Literature
HU 422
American Politics and Culture:
1945-1975
3 credits, 3 hours
The interaction of politics and culture from
1945 until 1975. Course materials include fic-
tion, film, poetry, and journalism.
Social Science I L iterative
HU 423
Literature in Opera of the 20th
Century
3 credits, 3 hours
A study of 20th century opera's treatment of
major literature.
Literature
HU 424
Latin American Literature
3 credits, 3 hours
Latin American literature has had tremendous
influence not only upon post-war European
and American literature but upon other arts as
well. Examines the major exponents of Latin
American literature. Traces the origins of style
and shows how Latin Americans began both to
define themselves and to understand their
landscape through literature. The focus is on
the writers of the so-called "boom" who man-
aged to assimilate the tradition and be
completely new and original.
Literature
HU428
Portraits of the Artist
3 credits, 3 hours
Primarily a literature course, with excursions
into the visual and musical arts. Explores the
ways some major artists investigate, in their
art, what it is to be an artist. Readings/view-
ings will include: novels by James Joyce.
Virginia Woolf, and Don DeLillo; plays by
Samuel Beckett, Sam Shepard, and Stephen
Sondheim: plus stories, poems, paintings, and
photographs by various artists; and a film by
Federico Fellini.
Literature
HU 440
Wagner and the Ring Cycle
3 credits, 3 hours
A detailed examination of Richard Wagner's
gigantic four-opera cycle of music dramas,
The Ring of the Nibehmgei}. a crowning
achievement of Romanticism. Wagner's goal
of combining all the arts remains a funda-
mental inspiration in film, theater, and
pertbrmance art today. No previous musical
training or knowledge is assumed.
Humanities
HU442
Abstract Expressionism
3 credits, 3 hours
Abstract Expressionism was the most impor-
tant movement in post- World War II
American art. This course surveys its origins,
accomplishments, and decline.
HimwnitiesIA rt History
HU448A
American Art Since 1945
3 credits, 3 hours
In 1945. Worid War II ended and the focus of
modern art shifted from Paris to New York
City. The course begins with Abstract
Expressionism; studies other major American
styles, such as pop art and minimalism; and
concludes with postmodernist developments
such as performance and decoration by artists.
HumunitieslArt History
HU 448 B
European Art Since 1945
3 credits. 3 hours
Art since World War II has been dominated by
the New York market and by the issue of
abstraction; in Europe, however, artists con-
tinued to use the human figure as a vehicle for
social and ethical concerns, and in the last 10
years their engagement has become a model
for younger artists in both Europe and
America. The course examines crafts and
book arts as well as fine arts; it also makes use
of plays and films.
Humanities/A rt History
HU449
Diaghilev and the Ballet Russes
3 credits, 3 hours
Investigates the role of the impresario Serge
Diaghilev and his Ballet Russes in both
shaping and echoing the course of the artistic
revolution in Paris from 1909-1929. The
Ballet Russes existed for only 20 years, but in
that brief period it transformed ballet into a
vital art, creating such vanguard pieces as
Firebird, Petrouchka, and L'Apres-Midi d'un
Faune, and brought to dance the riches of
other arts as it forged partnerships between the
most important composers, painters, and poets
of the day. Special emphasis is placed on the
interrelationships between various artists,
composers, choreographers, and writers.
Humanities
164
Ttie University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
HU450
Arts of India
3 credits. 3 hours
Painting, sculpture, and architecture from the
Indus Valley civilization of the second millen-
nium B.C. through the different periods of
Buddhist. Hindu, and Islamic dominance to
the Rajput painting of the 1 8th century A.D.
The different art styles are related to their his-
torical, religious, and social backgrounds.
HumanitiesIA n History
HU451
Arts of Islam
3 credits, 3 hours
Architecture, architectural decoration, callig-
raphy, book illustration, textile, and ceramic
art of the Middle Eastern countries from the
beginning of the Islamic era (seventh to 18th
centuries A.D. ). A study of the impact of
Islamic religion on the character of Islamic art
and architecture and various regional styles
within this unified visual mode of expression.
From time to time Islamic and Christian cul-
tures are compared to understand better their
similarities and differences.
HumanitieslArl History
HU452
Topics in Design
3 credits, 3 hours
Topics vary from aesthetic issues, such as the
significance of organic form, to social issues,
such as the influence of design on social
change and the impact of design on the natural
environment. The areas of design studied also
vary from tools, furniture, and electronics to
machinery, transportation, and the design of
the community.
HumanitieslArt History
HU453
Arts of Japan
3 credits, 3 hours
Painting, sculpuire, architecture, and minor arts
of Japan from the Neolithic period to the 1 8th
century A.D. The emergence and the develop-
ment of a unique national style from an art world
dominated by Chinese influence. The develop-
ment of painting from the medieval Yamoto-e
narrative scrolls through the 15th cenOiry. The
evolution of various architecuiral styles from the
great Buddhist temples of the seventh cenmry to
the majestic casdes of the 1 7th century. In sculp-
hire and pottery, the technical improvements and
the change of aesthetic values from the Jomon
andYayoi phases to the porcelains of the 17th
century are analyzed. A brief historical and social
background of Japan accompanies the study of
the various art styles. Special attention is given
to the influence of Zen Buddhism on Japanese
culture.
HumanitieslArt History
HU456
Major Artists
3 credits. 3 hours
Concentrates on the work of a single artist or a
group of artists. Among the artists who have
come under this intense investigation have
been Donatello, Michelangelo, Rembrandt,
and Picasso; others may be chosen in the
future.
HumanitieslArt History
HU462
American Social Values
3 credits, 3 hours
The moral foundation of American culture.
Examines the primary American value orien-
tations-equality and individualism-and
compares them with those of other societies:
considers their relations to religion and polit-
ical ideologies; and assesses their influence on
contemporary social issues like moral decline
and tolerance of differences.
Social Science
HU463
Middle Eastern Arts and Culture
3 credits. 3 hours
An introduction to the arts and culture of the
Middle East through the perspective of anthro-
pology and art history. Examines design,
symbols, and techniques of Middle Eastern
art, particularly painting, architecture,
ceramics, glassware, textiles, and metal work.
These arts are examined in their social, cul-
tural, and historical context, which includes
the role of the artist and craftsman in Middle
Eastern society; the influence of Islam on
ritual and symbol; the influence of environ-
ment on materials and architecture;
urban-rural traditions; trade patterns and
market organization; and diffusion of
design and materials.
Social SciencelHumanitieslArt History
HU 464
The Holocaust
3 credits. 3 hours
The Holocaust is a watershed event in modem
history. This traumatic episode left indelible
marks on Western society. It was caused by
factors that still exist in the worid. Examines
the history that led to the Holocaust, and
attempts to understand what happened and
what meaning it has for us today.
Social Science . ■ .
HU 466, HU 467
Comparative Religion I, II
3 credits, 3 hours
A study of the world's major religions through
their historical development, beliefs, sacred
literamre, and the works of contemporary
writers. The tirst semester is concerned with
Eastern religions such as Hinduism,
Buddhism, and Taoism; the second semester
deals with Judaism, Christianity, and Islam.
Social Science
HU474
Contemporary Philosophy
3 credits. 3 hours
An examination of some of the problems
occupying today's philosophers and the strate-
gies they have devised in approaching them.
Humanities
HU 475
Freud and Mahler
3 credits. 3 hours
This course examines and discusses the 'theo-
ries of Sigmund Freud. All basic areas will be
included, beginning with his work on dreams
(c. 1890). aspects of psychoanalysis, the
nature of the person, and his rather pessimistic
attitude regarding the prospects for the sur-
vival of the human species. The class will also
listen to the work of the great Viennese com-
poser Gustav Mahler Freud and Mahler were
not only contemporaries and soul mates, but
Mahler saw Freud as a therapist, in what has
since become a famous session.
Himianities
HU 478
Aesthetics Seminar
3 credits. 3 hours
Advanced philosophic problems related to
works of art and discourse about works of art.
Students review the analytic method of philo-
sophic inquiry and discuss the philosophy
of Wittgenstein and other 20th century
philosophers.
Humanities
HU480
Psychology of Creativity
3 credits. 3 hours
The problems involved in defining and
attempting to measure creativity. The course is
developmentally oriented, focusing on rela-
tionships between creativity and normal
growth and development, and intelligence and
personality. Problems that the artist encoun-
ters with productivity are explored, as well as
the values of society toward creativity and the
artist.
Prerequisite: HU 181 A or B.
Social Science
The University of the Aits Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
165
HU 481 A/B
Physics
3 credits, 3 hours
An introductory college physics course. The
first semester covers kinematics, dynamics,
energy, structural analysis, and waves: the
second semester concentrates on a study of
light, electricity, and magnetism. Both semes-
ters include frequent references to
architecture, design, and the fine arts.
Competence in algebra is required.
SciencelMath
HU483
Theories of Personality
3 credits, 3 hours
Introduces the study of personality and how
patterns of behavior, interaction, perception,
and response are understood by a broad
variety of theorists. Quesfions of nature versus
nurture, whether the past impacts the present,
and what defines mental health are discussed.
Psychodynamic, cognitive, humanistic, and
behavioral approaches are compared and
contrasted.
Prerequisites: HUI8IA and HU 181 B; or
HUlSlAorB and one of the following: HV 374.
HU378, HU384. HU480. HV484. MM 360.
Social Science
HU484
Educational Psychology
3 credits, 3 hours
An introduction to educational psychology for
potential educators. The basic principles of
learning theory and education are presented
and critically examined. Using a psychosocial
orientation, the developmental stages of the
human life cycle are explored, as well as the
needs of a variety of special populations, e.g.
those with learning disabilities or physical dis-
abilities. Considerable attention is given to
increasing awareness and understanding
of communication, group dynamics, and
organizational behavior.
Social Science
HU492
Vienna and Berlin: 1890-1925
3 credits, 3 hours
At the beginning of the 20th century, Vienna
and Beriin were important centers during one
of the richest periods in the cultural and
artistic history of the Western worid. Much of
the science and art of this century was given
its focus and thrust by the men of genius
working in these two cifies. In this course, stu-
dents examine the works of Einstein, Freud,
Mahler, Schoenberg, Wittgenstein, Kafka, and
the German Expressionists. An interdiscipli-
nary course involving the visual, musical, and
literary arts, as well as philosophy.
Humanities
HU495
Dante in the Modern World
3 credits, 3 hours
Dante's Divine Comedy has been highly intlu-
endal on art, music, and drama from its own
time to the present. The shaping power of the
poet's journey in his search for answers to
ulfimate questions, and his quest for order and
its reflection in his art continue to inspire reac-
tions from fellow artists. The course considers
a number of works reflecfing this influence in
several media. Concentration is on the
Inferno, but consideration of Paradiso and
Purgatorio may also be included.
Literature
HU 497
Women and Sex Roles
3 credits, 3 hours
An introducfion to the history of women and
to theories of gender An interdisciplinary
course combining history, literature, and the
visual arts. Slide lectures on images of woman
in art, myth, and religion, from ancient times
to modem. Economic and historical factors
affecting how women have lived. Definitions
of masculinity and femininity. The nature-nur-
ture debate over hormonal differences.
Literature
HU 999
Independent Study
1-3 credits, 1-3 hours
Independent study considers a particular issue
of interest to the student and one or more fac-
ulty that is not covered in a regular course.
Prior approval by the Director of Liberal Arts
is required.
Industrial Design
ID 113
Freshman ID
1.5 credits, 3 hours
This course introduces Foundation students to
the issues surrounding the industrial design
profession and highlights its importance in
informing culture and shaping the way we
live. The fundamental skills required to sup-
port the process of concept ideation, design
development, and presentation of products and
furniture are introduced through in-class exer-
cises, lectures by visiting professionals, and
direct involvement in relevant activities within
the Industrial Design department itself.
ID 200 A/B
Studio 1: Projects Studio
3 credits, 6 hours
Formal introduction to the conceptual and
practical understanding of design and three-
dimensional problem-solving processes. This
studio provides focused fundamental design
instruction and integrated experiences cov-
ering a wide range of subjects including the
tools, processes, and languages of design.
Emphasis is on the development of three-
dimensional model-making skills, problem
solving, creative thinking, and their applica-
tion to problems of design.
Prerequisite: Completion of the Foundation pro-
gram or permission of the instructor by
portfolio review.
ID 214
Materials and Processes Seminar
3 credits, 3 hours
A hands-on seminar course introducing the
student to the nature of materials used in
industrial products and the various processes
by which they are formed. Films, lectures, and
field trips familiarize students with traditional
processing of wood, metal, and plastic mate-
rials as well as emerging developments in
advanced fabrication processes such as injec-
tion molding, laser cutting, and
stereolithography. Emphasis is on the study of
material characteristics and the appropriate
use of manufacturing methods. The course
includes an introduction to technical informa-
tion, research, design specification writing,
and professional communications.
Prerequisite: Completion of the Foundation pro-
gram or permission of the instructor by
portfolio review.
166
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
ID 220 A/B
Studio 2: Techniques
3 credits, 6 hours
This studio will assist the student in acquiring
essential two- and three-dimensional represen-
tational skills to support the process of design,
including conceptualization, production, and
presentation. It is taught in a collaborative
manner; the instructors conduct projects indi-
vidually or as a team in order to provide
instruction and experiences over a wide range
of subjects, including the tools, processes, and
languages of conceptual drawing and mod-
eling, rendering and detailing, using both the
computer and traditional media as a means to
assist design and control production. Students
learn to apply these techniques to design prob-
lems addressed in ID 200 A/B.
Prerequisite: Completion of the Foundation pro-
pain or permission of the instructor by
portfolio revie)f.
ID 290
Design Issues Seminar
3 credits, 3 hours
Designed to assist the student in developing an
understanding of the major issues of design in
modern society. Discussions range from issues
such as the ecological responsibility of
designers to the contributions of individual
designers and design organizations throughout
the history of the discipline. Assignments
include research and demonstration projects
that explore ideas and illuminate ethical, prac-
tical, and moral issues with which designers
should be concerned. Students prepare infor-
mation and present their views on issues
through written, oral, and visual means.
Prerequisite: Completion of the Foundation pro-
gram or permission of the instructor by
portfolio review.
ID 300 A/B
Studio 3: Projects Studio
3 credits, 6 hours
The first semester introduces problems of
design from a highly conceptual point of view
with an emphasis on user interface, informa-
tion technology, and areas of use. In the
second semester, the students apply this
humanistic understanding to develop more
complex products involving mechanical tech-
nology and systems. Emphasis is on the ability
to apply the process of design to both hypo-
thetical and real problems while developing an
appreciation of meaningful form and the
appropriate use of technology to meet human
needs. Students discover relevant knowledge
and apply it to practical problems of design-
many brought to the studio by industry.
Visiting experts also bring knowledge of cur-
rent design, marketing, and manufacturing
practices into studio projects organized to
explore the nature of different product types in
different industries.
Prerequisites: ID 200 B. ID 220 B. and ID 290.
ID 312
Architectonics
3 credits, 6 hours
Visual principles for structuring and ordering
architectural space. Introduction to formal
issues as applied to interior installations and
exhibition design will be developed through
drawing, model-building skills, and other rep-
resentational means such as computer-aided
drafting. This course will develop concepts
through analytical studies of objects/spaces
and will culminate in an actual built/altered
environment.
ID 320 A/B
Studio 4: Techniques
3 credits, 6 hours
Assists the student in developing graphic com-
munication skills using computational media
and applying these skills to both two- and
three-dimensional images and presentations.
The student is taught to conceptualize,
develop, detail, present, and communicate
design ideas through graphic design, computer
imaging, three-dimensional computer mod-
eling, basic animation, and interactive design
presentation. The first semester focuses on
integrating graphic software and the develop-
ment of printed presentations. The second
semester focuses on the development of inter-
active digital presentations.
Prerequisites: ID 200 B. ID 220 B. and ID 290.
ID 326
Human Factors Seminar
3 credits, 3 hours
The object of this research-intensive course is
to develop the ability to apply technology
effectively to meet human needs through the
integration of human engineering principles in
the design of products and equipment. Human
anatomy, anthropometrics, and the strength of
body components are considered, as are sen-
sory systems, human perception, and
psychology. Lectures are complemented by
laboratory experiments designed to teach stu-
dents methods of testing and evaluadng their
own product design concepts in human terms.
Concepts of scientific writing and reporting
are demonstrated through the documentation
of coursework.
Prerequisites: ID300A.ID214. ID 320.4,
and ID 327.
ID 327
Design Semantics Seminar
3 credits, 3 hours
This seminar addresses design as a languaging
process of social interaction. Semantic princi-
ples and design vocabulary are introduced
through lectures, weekly readings, discus-
sions, and exercises. Students work on
individual as well as team-based projects to
increase the competence of translating these
ideas, concepts, and principles into design
practices, applying replicable design methods
toward proposing particular products whose
meanings matter and whose use is dominated
by facets of human understanding.
Prerequisites: ID 200 B. ID 220 B.
and ID 290.
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
167
ID 400 A/B
Studio 5: Projects Studio
3 credits. 6 hours
In these senior design studio courses, the cur-
ricukim focuses on a highly critical and
responsible position in formulating new direc-
tions into product realization.
Students are encouraged through critical
discourse and research on historical and con-
temporary cultural shifts to formulate their
own ideology. Investigations into the social,
ergonomic and ecological consequences of
product development are followed by a spe-
cific program of context, abstractions and
conceptual studies, physical and material
experimentation, and the research of tech-
niques of construction. Development of
manual skills, highly communicative design
drawings, sketch models, computer modeling,
prototypes, and one-off objects are all
involved in the process.
Industry-sponsored projects of international
caliber give opportunities for "client interac-
tion" from initial contact and proposals to
final presentadons of projects. One semester is
dedicated to production furniture design for
the new domesticity. The other semester is
dedicated to product design. A highly aca-
demic and theoretical thesis project runs
simultaneously with a highly pragmatic
product development studio.
Prerequisites: ID 300 B. ID 320 B. ID 326.
and ID 327.
ID 420 A/B
Studio 6: Professional
Communication
3 credits. 6 hours
Refines the students' written, verbal, and
visual presentation skills, and assists them in
developing communication materials for their
senior theses and industry-sponsored projects.
Intensive group critique of individual presen-
tations prepared outside of class. Students
develop self-promotion, presentation, and cor-
respondence materials utilizing service
bureaus and contemporary technologies such
as digital files, fax and the World Wide Web to
prepare and transmit this information.
Prerequisites: ID 300 B. ID 320 B. ID 326.
and ID 327.
ID 490 A
Design Theory Seminar
3 credits, 3 hours
In this industrial design seminar, students will
investigate advanced design philosophies,
issues, and pedagogy, from a historic as well
as contemporary international design context.
Students study various definitions of design,
explore design theories and issues, and con-
sider theoretical relafionships with other
applied arts.
Prerequisites: ID 300 B, ID 320 B, ID 326.
and ID 327.
ID 490 B
Design Practice Seminar
3 credits, 3 hours
Exposes the student to industrial design pro-
fessional practice through discussion, lectures,
and research. The following subjects are
addressed:
1. Running a practice
2. Legalities and contracts
3. Publicadons
4. Exhibidng -^
5. Client interacdon
6. Portfolio
Visitors represent a broad spectrum of the
design community from across the United
States, including design shop owners, design
curators from galleries or museums, industrial
design entrepreneurs, and copynght lawyers.
Prerequisites: ID 300 B. ID 320 B. ID 326.
and ID 327.
IN 440
Design internship
3 credits. 90 hours/semester
Open to Graphic Design. Illustration, and Industrial
Design majors only.
Master of Industrial
Design
ID 600
Design Seminar:
Concepts and Contexts
3 credits. 3 hours
A seminar devoted to examining the shift in
cultural, technological, material, and profes-
sional landscapes that a graduate design
candidate must navigate. Through readings,
presentations, and discussions, students
explore how these evolved contexts are
changing the nature of design practice and
thinking. Special emphasis is placed on devel-
oping key concepts and ideas that inform the
work that the students undertake throughout
their program. The seminar works in parallel
with the studio course; topics and themes cov-
ered in the seminar are germane to the studio
projects.
With permission of instructor
ID 601, ID 602
Graduate Design Studio
6 credits. 6 hours
The major mulddisciplinary studio where
design ideology, process, development, and
production are emphasized through the inte-
gration of critical issues that inform the design
of products, systems, and environments.
Issues discussed and studied are: human expe-
rience and lifestyles: cultural and political
issues; ergonomics; poetics; semantics; inter-
activity; imagery; and form. The design
process considers the above issues in the
formulation of a design program: conceptual
and abstract studies: physical and material
investigations; simulated and physical
representation; and the application of
manufacturing processes.
Coreqiiisite: ID 600.
ID 620
Advanced Design Methods
3 credits. 3 hours
As a complement to the studio course (ID
601 ), this course helps to develop methodolo-
gies for critical, social and cultural analysis,
sU'ategies for design research, and the means
for documenting that research and analysis.
Students develop a common design process
that provides the foundation for all subsequent
MID work. The emphasis is on clear and con-
vincing communication, a skill that is
increasingly critical to designers as they work
more and more with those outside of their own
disciplines. Content for the course-work
comes directiy from the studio projects
themselves.
Corequisite:ID601.
168
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
ID 625
Advanced Computer Applications
3 credits. 3 hours
A laboratory /practicum in the use of advanced
computing capabihties with emphasis on
three-dimensional computer modeling, ren-
dering, animation, and human figure modeling
to evaluate and present design solutions with
attention to collaborative design support
systems.
With permission of instructor.
ID 627
Human Factors: Interactivity
3 credits. 3 hours
A seminar course that addresses human
behavior through the interaction with manu-
factured objects, environments and systems,
and the ergonomic, functional, informational,
aesthetic, and safety requirements encountered
in the design of these products for human use.
With permission of instructor
ID 700
ID Seminar:
Professional Development
3 credits. 3 hours
A professional seminar/workshop that
addresses the individual career interests of
each degree candidate, especially as they
relate to the smdent's thesis project. The
product of this course is the formulation of a
careei" plan and objectives tailored to each
candidate, and the development of a portfolio,
resume, and other documentation targeted
toward the practical application of the candi-
date's knowledge and skill. .
Prerequisite: ID 710.
ID 710, ID 711
Advanced Project Tutorial I, II
6 credits. 6 hours
Primary studio/practicums in which design
concepts are explored and skills, techniques,
tools, and products are developed, demon-
strated, and tested related to the thesis.
Individual weekly meetings are scheduled
with faculty and with outside advisors as dic-
tated by thesis project objectives and
sponsorship. A faculty-monitored educational
practicum in a professional or industry setting
may be arranged to fulfill preplanned project
and career objectives.
Prerequisite: ID 602.
ID 749
Masters Thesis Documentation
6 credits. 6 hours
A tutorial providing the opportunity for indi-
vidual candidates to develop and present their
theses in a manner that directly reflects their
career objectives. The thesis project and docu-
ment must exhibit an in-depth exploration of
an appro\'ed topic, which addresses an area of
importance to the Industrial Design field and
contributes to the body of know ledge per-
taining to that area. It may be carried out
under industry sponsorship, as part of a
research project, or independently based.
Prerequisite: ID 602.
Illustration
IL 100
Foundation Illustration
1.5 credits. 3 hours
Within the context of illustration assignments,
students are introduced to a variety of media,
methods, styles, and techniques used to create
both black-and-white and color illustrations.
Includes conceptual, perceptual, and technical
problems. The development of narrative skills,
logical steps to problem solving, research, and
creative thinking will also be covered. Guest
Illustrators offer insight into the many ways
artists are working in the field.
IL200A/B
Pictorial Foundation
3 credits. 6 hours
Introduction to drawing and painfing skills as
they relate to illustration. Objective visual per-
cepUon, clarity in drawing, and technical
facility are stressed. Smdents are exposed to
visual communications, strategies, and design
concepts through exposure to art history and
the field of contemporary illustration.
Prerequisite: FP III.
IL 202 A/B
Figure Anatomy
3 credits, 2 hours (lecture),
3 hours (drawing lab)
Focus on the investigation and application of
line, plane, mass. light and shade, shadow,
perspective, anatomy, and proportion as they
relate to figure drawing. Weekly sessions
include a lecture, demonstrations from the
skeleton, and drawing from life.
Prerequisite: FP III.
IL204
Typography
3 credits, 6 hours
Beginning studies in the form, use, nomencla-
ture, and history of typography. Individual
letters, word formations, text arrangements,
type combined with imagery, and the applica-
tion of type to simple communication
exercises will be addressed. Use of Macintosh
computer for generating type and industry-
accepted software will be used.
Prerequisite: FP 121.
The University of the Ans Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
169
IL205
Drawing for Animators
3 credits, 6 hours
Focuses on introducing and developing the
skills and disciplines needed for good figura-
tive animation drawing. The primary issues of
anatomical figure drawing are covered with a
strong emphasis on the structure and solidity
of the figure, good proportions, and specific
movement and gesture as they relate to the
model. Topics also covered: two-dimensional
versus three-dimensional ways of translating
form; how perspective and viewpoint are
used with the figure and their effect on scale;
exaggerated foreshortening techniques; dia-
grammatic and expressive line quality; facial
expressions; hand and foot studies; capturing
movement through gesture; and introduction
to animal drawing for animation.
Prerequisite: FP II I.
IL300A/B
Illustration Methods
3 credits, 6 hours
The development of narrative and conceptual
imagery, pictorial illusion, space, and their
combined potential for communicadon.
Procedures focus on developing visual aware-
ness, personal imagery, and conceptual
directions. Direct drawing situadons and pho-
tographic reference (existing or student-
produced) also serve as source material for
pictorial development. Various media and
technical procedures are explored. The history
of the Golden Age of American Illustration is
covered. Assignments and lectures focus on
the requirements of applied illustration.
Prerequisite: IL 200 B.
IL301
Design Methods
3 credits, 6 hours
Within the context of design/illustration proj-
ects, a basic understanding of how artwork is
reproduced in commercial print media.
Emphasis is on the relationship between elec-
tronic media and production techniques.
Specific programs udlized include:
QuarkXPress, Adobe Illustrator, and Adobe
PhotoShop.
Prerequisite: IL 204.
IL302
Figurative Communication
3 credits, 6 hours
Emphasis is on working from life. The course
focuses on the use of the figure and or sdll life
objects to communicate concepts in the
figurative context. Drawing and painting
media are explored.
Prerequisite: IL 202 B.
IL 303 .
Figure Utilization
3 credits, 6 hours
Studies of the figure in narrative contexts are
explored, as is work from single and grouped
models, nude and costumed. Concentration on
developing composidons and concepts from
different and often combined resources.
Drawing and painting techniques are utilized.
Prerequisite: IL 302.
IL304
Sequential Format
3 credits, 6 hours
Course focuses on sequendal formats.
Potential areas of inquiry include brochures,
direct-mail pieces, simple animations, slide
presentations, multi-page spreads, and identity
programs.
Prerequisite: IL 301.
IL 310
Children's Book Illustration
3 credits, 6 hours
The design and illustradon of children's
books. Emphasis on the stages of development
of a book from manuscript through dummy
design to finished art. Professional practice,
and working with editors and art directors are
discussed. Students become familiar with the
work of past and present book illustration and
design.
Prerequisite: FP 1 1 1. Juniors and Seniors preferred.
IL 400 A/B
Illustration
3 credits, 6 hours
Assignments revolve around specific areas of
illustradon-advertising, book, documentary,
editorial, and insdtutional. Emphasis is on
solutions, both practical and relevant, and the
type and quality of finish for professional
needs and demands. A senior thesis project
(Ely Competition) is incorporated in the
fall/spring semesters.
Prerequisite: IL 300 B.
IL 402
Communication Worl<shop
1.5 credits, 3 hours
Structured as a design studio, the workshop
brings Graphic Design and Illustration majors
and their respective faculty together to pro-
duce posters for School of Theater Arts
productions. Students are challenged with
real-life, professional design studio experi-
ences: working with a client on a deadline
from concept and design through production
in the University's Borowsky Center for
Publicadon Arts.
Junior and Senior Graphic Design and Illustration
majors only, approved by faculty advisors.
IL 403 A/B
Senior Portfolio
3 credits, 6 hours
Development of a portfolio based on the stu-
dent's personal interests, abilities, and target
markets. Students focus on a freelance or
studio orientation and develop over the year a
working portfolio for presentation at the end
of the spring term. In addidon to the portfolio,
the course offers instrucdon in marketing and
promodon, business pracdces and procedures,
resume writing, taxes, and small business
requirements as they relate to artists. The
course culminates in The University of the
Arts' Portfolio Day at the Society of
Illustrators in New York at the end of the
semester.
Prerequisite: IL 300 B.
Corequisite:IL400AIB.
IL 404
Illustration Workshop:
Personal Viewpoint
3 credits, 6 hours
This special elective course is offered by the
Illustration Department for qualified Junior
and Senior Illustration majors. The
Department invites three of America's most
accomplished illustrators to share their talent,
insights, and expertise by finding and empha-
sizing the personal conceptual viewpoint of
each student. The goal is to meld that identity
with each student's developing technique to
create the greater vision of the artist through
illustradon as a self-expressive art form. Each
of the three faculty presents his or her work
and answers questions in an open forum, and
then teaches an intensive four-week long part
of the course. The artists give lectures, tech-
nical demonstrations, and studio assignments
and students work through a demanding
process to produce finished illusQ-ations. This
flexible curriculum also allows for timely
illustradon issues to be covered as they
develop in the field.
Prerequisite: IL 300 A, Junior ai\d Senior
Illustration majors only, by portfolio review.
IN 440
Design Internship
3 credits, 90 hours/semester
Open to Graphic Design. Illustration, and Industrial
Design majors only.
170
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Internships
Intepiships are a valuable part of a stu-
dent's academic experience. By
reinforcing and expanding classroom
theory and practice, internships enable
students to test career choices and gain a
greater understanding of the workplace
through this initial entiy into the profes-
sional world. The ultimate goal of the
internship is to assist students in testing
and expanding their professional skills
and knowledge, and enabling them to
make informed career decisions.
Students applying for an internship
must meet the following eligibility
requirements: junior or senior level in a
BS or BFA program, a 2.5 cumulative
grade-point average, and be registered
for no more than 18 credits, including
those from the Internship during the
semester No more than six Internship
credits may be credited toward a BS or
BFA degree.
CM 499
Communication Internship
1 .5 credits, 90 hours/semester
Professional internship with a media organiza-
tion or producer. Student needs to gain
approval for internship from advisor, meet
periodically for supervisory discussions, and
complete a short, reflective essay at the end of
the internship.
Open to Communication majors only.
DA 499
Internship
3-12 credits. 90-360 hours/semester
Internships are a valuable part of a student's
academic experience. By reinforcing and
expanding classroom theory and practice,
internships enable students to test career
choices and gain a greater understanding of
the workplace through this initial entry into
the professional world. The ultimate goal of
the internship is to assist students in testing
and expanding their professional skills and
knowledge, and enabling them to make
informed career decisions.
Open only to Junior and Senior Dance majors.
IN 440
Design Internship
3 credits, 90 hours/semester
Open to Graphic Design, Illustration, and Industrial
Design majors only.
IN 449
Crafts/Fine Arts Internship
3 credits, 90 hours/semester
Open to Crafts and Fine A rts majors only.
MM 499
Multimedia Internship
3 credits, 90 hours/semester
Students are placed with regional companies
to expose them to a real work environment in
the fields of multimedia, web design, and
information.
Open to Multimedia majors only.
MS 759
Graduate Museum Internship
3 credits. 90 hours/semester
A three-month, supervised practicum in a
cooperating museum. Taken in a cooperating
museum, the internship represents full-time
employment equivalency under the mentor-
ship of a professional museum educator
Provides practical on-site experience, in which
the intern is integrated into the museum staff,
assuming professional-level responsibilities
and experience. A University professor also
observes, advises, and assesses the student
during the internship.
Prerequisite for Museum Exhibition Planning
and Design majors: 15 credits in Museum Studies.
Prerequisites for Museum Communication majors:
MS 501, MS 508. MS 600.
Prerequisites for Museum Education majors:
MS 5 10, MS 501, and MS 508.
Open to Museum Studies majors only
MU 499
Music Internship
1-3 credits. 30-60 hours
An opportunity to participate in a workplace
environment during the academic year.
Students earn internship credit by completing
a minimum number of hours in the field
during the semester, and by satisfying the
requirements of the sponsor, such as atten-
dance, punctuality, responsibility,
professionalism, and tasks completed.
Students may be assigned to recording stu-
dios, radio stations, arts organizations, or with
music publishers, entertainment attorneys,
music therapists, or record producers.
MU 620/621
Graduate Professional Internship
1 credit, 15 hours/semester
Provides hands-on. sitting-in experience in a
variety of professional settings-rehearsals,
performances, meetings with producers, and
in-studio projects such as recording,
arranging, or project coordination. The pro-
gram is developed by the graduate advisor and
major teacher in conjunction with the student
to select topics and experiences most relevant
and beneficial to that particular suident's
education.
Prerequisite: Matriculation in the Master of Music
program.
PF 499
Internship
3 credits, 90 hours/semester
Internship program in which the student is
placed in one of several professional situa-
tions. Placements in photography may include
assisting in professional studios, practice in
biomedical photography laboratories, and
curatorial positions in galleries, among others.
Placements in film and animation are spon-
sored by local independent production houses
and television stations, design firms, and free-
lance animation artists; students of film may
assist in location shooting, set production,
editing, casting and scripting, and a myriad of
other practical tasks.
Prerequisite: PF 211 B (for Photo internships) :
or PF2I0B (for Film/Video internships) :
or PF2I2 B (for Animation internships) .
Open to Media Arts majors only
TH 449
Internship
3-12 credits, hours by assignment
Hands-on involvement with a professional
company. Placements may consist of adminis-
trative or production support work, positions
in assistance to directors, producers, stage
managers or dramaturges, literary manage-
ment, casting, understudying or performance,
and may be outside of the Philadelphia area.
Prerequisite Icorequisite: TH 419.
Open 10 Theater A rts majors only
WM499
Internship
3 credits, 6 hours
Seniors are placed with companies to expose
them to a real work environment in the field of
media. Placements vary and may include local
network-affiliated television stations or public
broadcasting stations. A paper or journal
chronicling the experience is required upon
completion of the internship.
Open to Seniors in Writing for Film and Television
only.
iity of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
171
Master of Fine Arts in
Ceramics, Painting, or
Sculpture
Each summer session will begin with a
detailed review of the student's previous
work, assessing progress, addressing
problems, and planning the summer's
work. Ongoing individual meetings with
the studio mentor will be augmented by
group critiques at the beginning, middle,
and end of the summer session and by
occasional group or individual critiques
with visiting artists. Each summer's
course concludes with planning for work
to be continued on an independent study
basis during the academic year.
Independent studio work is assessed at
weekend critiques held at periodic inter-
vals and at the end of the fall and spring
semesters.
The following courses are open to students in
the summer MFA program only.
CR 610
PT 610
SC610
Major Studio I
6 credits. 10 hours
Evaluation of the student's artistic involve-
ment; projecting and testing options for the
direction of the student's graduate work.
CR611
PT 611
SC 611
Major Studio II
6 credits. 10 hours
Further exploration of the options, with
increased awareness of theoretical issues and
personal vision. Greater focus in the student's
work, with a view to completing the personal
repertoire of skills and expression in the
medium needed to undertake a thesis project.
Prerequisites: CR610.PT blO.SC 610.
CR710
PT710
SC710 ^
Major Studio III
6 credits. 10 hours
Planning and initiation of a sustained body of
mature work to be presented in a thesis exhibi-
tion during the following summer.
Prerequisites: CR6I1.PT611.SC61 1.
FA 610
Studio Topics
3 credits, 5 hours repeatable
Brings together students from each of the
major disciplines to explore studio issues
common to all visual arts.
FA 611
Graduate Drawing
3 credits, 5 hours
Advanced studio develops and expands the
student's visual language and skills while
challenging his or her conceptual approach to
drawing by examining and applying the use of
materials and methods having historic and cul-
tural origins.
Open to all CAD graduate students upon
portfolio approval.
FA 612
Professional Practices
3 credits, 5 hours
Designed to familiarize students with
methods, practices, and professional standards
in preparation for the thesis exhibition and
eventual entry into the visual arts professions.
Prerequisites: FA 610. FA 611.
FA 691, FA 692
Independent Studio I, II in
Ceramics, Painting, or Sculpture
Winter/Summer Critique
3 credits per semester, 5 hours
The Independent Studio is intended to assist
the student in establishing independent pro-
duction in his or her major discipline while
acquiring the ability to integrate studio pro-
duction with the demands of off-campus life.
At the conclusion of Summer I and. subse-
quently. Winter Critique I, the student and
faculty mentor agree on a plan of work to be
pursued during the off-campus semester,
which will be a continuation of work begun in
the previous semester. The student is required
to propose a direction for his/her investiga-
tions and to have access to off-campus studio
space within which to carry out the proposal.
Enrollment in the Independent Studio requires
a commitment of 150 hours, equivalent to 10
hours of studio activity per week during the
15-week off-campus semester The suidio
mentor meets with the student five times
during the semester at three-week intervals,
reviewing the student's progress for a one to
two hour session. The first meeting is a group
meeting held on campus and the next three are
held as individual critiques at the student's
studio. One meeting may take place at the
mentor's studio. The last meeting is the final
critique of the semester, which takes place at
the Winter Critique held at the University.
Corequisile: FA 695, FA 696.
FA 695, FA 696
Independent Writing Project I, II
1.5 credits, 3 hours
Informs the student's ongoing Independent
Studio investigations undertaken during the
fall and spring off-campus semesters. The stu-
dent proposes an area of research intended as
a continued examination of topics introduced
during the previous summer seminars,
Structure and Metaphor or Art and Society.
The student is encouraged to explore through
writing the range of issues emanating from
seminar reading and discussion, and the rela-
tionship of these external influences to the
development of themes and directions being
explored in the studio work.
Corequisile: FA 691, FA 692.
FA 781, FA 782
Tfiesis Writing Project I, II
1.5 credits. 3 hours
Fall and spring off-campus semesters.
Research for the Thesis Writing Project
informs the student's second-year independent
studio activity, which focuses on identifying
and developing potential directions for the
thesis exhibition and written thesis. The stu-
dent considers issues raised during the
previous summer's seminar that are particu-
larly relevant to the more focused direction of
his or her studio work. The student independ-
ently formulates a proposal and bibliography
for a formal paper to be based upon the more
developed direction of his or her work. The
range of issues considered for further investi-
gation may include aesthetic, conceptual,
technical, or visual culture issues as well as
the relationship of the major work to other dis-
ciplines.
Corequisile: FA 783, FA 794.
172
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
FA 793
Thesis Preparation I
3 credits. 5 hours
Following the successful completion of
Summer II and the MFA Candidacy Review,
the student is declared a degree candidate and
may begin independently producing a body of
work intended for eventual presentation in the
thesis exhibition following completion of
Summer III. In consultation with the studio
mentor, the student submits Thesis
Preparation Plan I. identifying and describing
a direction of investigation to be undertaken
during the fall semester. The student is
expected to identify specific issues to be
addressed: intended focus of the work, consid-
erations of technique, materials, scale,
location, etc. The student must propose a per-
sonal timetable for accomplishing the thesis
and identify the sources that will be used in
preparation for the exhibition. Enrollment in
Thesis Preparation I and II requires a commit-
ment of 150 hours, equivalent to 10 hours of
studio activity per week during the 15- week
off-campus semester.
Coreqiiisite: FA 781.
FA 794
Thesis Preparation II
3 credits. 5 hours
In consultation with the studio mentor, thesis
candidates propose further development of
directions begun in studio work the previous
semester by submitting Thesis Preparation
Plan II for the spring semester to the mentor.
Coreqiiisite: FA 782.
FA 795
Thesis Exhibition
6 credits. 10 hours
The MFA degree certifies that the artist has
attained a high level of competence and inde-
pendent judgment in the discipline and is
qualified to stand with his/her mentors as a
master artist. The thesis exhibition and accom-
panying written thesis are intended to serve as
a demonstration of this mastery. During the
final semester, criticism-based research is
undertaken as a continuation of the summer
seminar in Criticism and is intended to assist
the MFA candidate in completing the written
component of the thesis requirements.
GR691
University Seminar:
Structure and Metaphor
3 credits, 3 hours
An interdisciplinary seminar in which students
from all graduate programs examine theoret-
ical issues of structure and metaphor in
relation to art and design. Topics include
cognidon and perception, meaning and repre-
sentation, and systems of organization and
expression.
(May he taken to satisfy Aesthetics and Art
Criticism corequisites for the MAT program.)
Graduate students only.
GR692
University Seminar:
Art and Design in Society
3 credits, 3 hours
An interdisciplinary seminar in which students
from all graduate programs examine theoret-
ical issues relating to the place of art and
design in society. Topics include the social
role of the artist/designer, public policy and
the arts, issues of post-modernism, and aes-
thetic and ethical implications of emerging
arts and communications technologies.
(May be taken to satisfy Sociolog}'/Anthropology
corequisites for the M.4T program.)
Graduate students only
GR791
University Seminar: Criticism
3 credits. 3 hours
An interdisciplinary seminar in which
advanced graduate students further examine
the nature of image-making and design with
particular attention to the theories and applica-
tions of criticism.
Graduate students only
Multimedia
MM 110, MM 111
Visual Concepts I, II
3 credits. 6 hours
The fall semester covers fundamental visual
concepts including point, line, shape, compo-
sition, texture, color, and image. Although
non-digital techniques are occasionally used,
the mastery of digital tools is a primary
aspect. Exercises require students to develop a
vocabulary for discussing their work while at
the same time learning a basic set of software
tools. The spring semester continues with an
introduction to the visual concepts of typog-
raphy, series, sequence, and narrative.
Prerequisite: Open to non-majors with permission
of the instructor.
MM 121
Introduction to Interface Design
3 credits. 3 hours
The software interface represents the focal
point of user interacfion with the various
modes of multimedia communication.
Readings by interface theorists will inform
discussions on the evolution of the software
interface, conceptual models, prototypes,
interaction design, deliverables, and basic
concepts of human-computer mteraction.
Avenues for pursuing interactive media design
in entertainment, publishing, and education
will also be addressed. Current technologies,
including the trend from soft to hard interfaces
are studied, in terms of their potential short-
and long-term influence on communication
and multimedia. Basic methods for rapid pro-
totyping and testing are considered.
Prerequisite: Open to non-majors with permission
of the instructor
MM 130
Information Concepts
3 credits, 3 hours
Emphasis is on the importance of organizing
and communicating information in a digital
worid. Students will acquire a basic under-
standing of how computers operate and
communicate with each other, as well as an
understanding of the evolution of the personal
computer and the industries that have spun out
of this technology. Student assignments
include readings, database projects, and
written analysis.
Prerequisite: Open to non-majors with permission
of the instructor
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
173
MM 150
Collaboration and Spontaneity
3 credits. 3 hours
Through a series of exercises, class discus-
sions, and readings, explores what it means to
work as part of a team. Students learn to
develop environments in which the creative
process is encouraged to unfold. The basic
assumptions that affect the formation of col-
laborative groups, such as personal
responsibility, authority relations, leadership
issues, individual differences, competition, the
development of norms, and the generation and
uses of power are experienced, explicated, and
examined. Students work within this collabo-
rative environment to explore the connections
between spontaneous verbal and nonverbal
communications.
Open to non-majors with permission of tiie
instructor.
MM 210
Visual Concepts Studio
3 credits. 6 hours
Visual problem solving in a digital environ-
ment. A project-based visual art/design studio
that builds on skills developed in Visual
Concepts II. This course allows students the
time to concentrate on and refine the visual
communications aspects of their craft through
three fully realized pieces. Projects are
assigned by the instructor, and conceived of
and developed by the students. Projects may
include but are not limited to: titling design
and animation, visual interface design;
graphic design; CD packaging design; poster
and postcard design; digital painting and
drawing, etc.
Prerequisite: MM 111, or permission of the
instructor.
MM 219
Introduction to Multimedia
3 credits, 6 hours
An introduction to the basic software environ-
ments for digital interactivity. After
concentrating on creating nonlinear texts, stu-
dents investigate the integration of other
media elements. Subjects include the use of
buttons, screen navigation, transitions, basic
scripting, and controlling sound and video.
MM 221, MM 222
Interactive Studio I, II
3 credits. 6 hours
Concepts and practical applications of interac-
tivity. The first semester focuses on creating
interactive media in low bandwidth environ-
ments. Developed for HTML environments
and their extensions for the Worid Wide Web.
Interactive modes explored include but are not
limited to reading, play, and conversation.
Comprised of both lectures and practical exer-
cises. Individual creativity is stressed as well
as the understanding and use of interactive
devices in the communication of ideas. Both
collaborative and individual exercises will be
assigned. The second semester focuses on
high bandwidth applications.
Prerequisite: MM 121 or permission of the
instructor
MM 223
Interactive Narrative
3 credits, 3 hours
Introduces students to new ways of thinking
about interactivity and storytelling. Students
analyze how the interactive structure of an
experience creates narrative. Short readings
discussed in class range from Surrealist Dada
and Fluxus language games to the experi-
mental literature of Joyce and Burroughs to
the literary theories of Barthes and Eco.
Students examine contemporary examples of
interactive media such as CD-ROMs, role-
playing games, and Internet sites.
Prerequisite: Permission of the instructor
MM 231
Digital Storytelling
3 credits, 6 hours
This class explores how visual and aural lan-
guages complement the verbal while
providing instruction in the use of multimedia
software. After collecting old photographs,
movies, tape recordings, and meaningful
objects, students create stories associated with
them in digital form.
MM 240
Writing for Games
3 credits, 3 hours
A writing laboratory that allows students to
develop competency in writing rule-based pro-
cedural description as well as evocative story
lines for games and user/play scenarios.
Special emphasis will be placed on the differ-
ences in writing required between game types
(chance, puzzles, and strategies) as well as
game genres such as role-playing, twitch, and
games of perfect information.
Prerequisite: HU HOB.
MM 271
Survey of Multimedia
3 credits. 3 hours
Examines the chronological evolution of dig-
ital technology and its inevitable application
by the aesthetic community. Beginning with
the development of digital technology in the
mid- 1940s, the course discusses the conver-
gence of the scientific, military, and political
environments that spawned the employment of
digital technology, including the path that led
to the digital dominance over analog. Includes
the enhancement, exploitation, and embracing
of digital technology by the corporate and aes-
thetic communities, the invention of the
personal computer and its ancillary products,
and the application of digital technologies in
fields as diverse as medicine, communica-
tions, manufacturing, cognidve psychology,
and in particular, the arts. Pioneers in all fields
will be identified and examined.
Prerequisite: HU 103 B.
Discipline History IHmnanities
MM 310, MM 311
Multimedia Studio I, II
3 credits, 6 hours
The experience of producing complete multi-
media works in a project-based environment.
Lectures and meetings augment this studio
course. Individual creativity is stressed as well
as collaboration in the creation of works
through individual and group projects.
Assignments vary in scale, and focus on
appropriate planning and information archi-
tecture, as well as acquisition and creation of
content in various media. Programming envi-
ronments used include but are not limited to
HTML. Lingo, and Java Script. Previously
introduced concepts and technology are re-
explored with an emphasis on integration and
effectiveness in the communication of the con-
cept of the piece.
Prerequisite: MM 222 or MM 219. or permission of
the instructor
MM 320
Advanced Interface Seminar
3 credits. 3 hours
A seminar that builds on MM 121
(Introduction to Interface Design). Focuses on
the issues involved in creating user interfaces
in today's development platforms (hardware,
software, input devices, cell phones, etc.).
Lectures, discussions, readings, research, and
writing constitute the body of this course. In
addition to current interface trends, the
process of developing the interfaces of
tomorrow is addressed.
Prerequisite: MM 222, or permission of the
instructor
174
The University of the Arts Undergi^duale and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
MM 340
Interactive Programming
3 credits. 3 hours
Introductory programming dealing with cre-
ating interactive apphcations. The focus of
this course will be on client and server side
programming languages. Students will create
applications in each of the languages taught.
The Internet as a programmable en\'ironment
is stressed. This is primarily a lecture course
supplemented with practical introductory pro-
gramming exercises and exams.
Prerequisites: MM 222, or permission of the
instructor, and completion of Game Design minor
requirements.
MM 341
Programming for Games
3 credits, 6 hours
An introduction to programing for interactive
game environments. Students learn techniques
and theory through exercises and applications
that they construct. The programming lan-
guage studied can change each semester and
may include: FlashAction Scripting,
Advanced Lingo for Games, C++, or Java.
Prerequisite: MM 221, or permission of instructor.
MM 342
Game Play
3 credits, 3 hours
A lecture-based focus on the human behavior
in the how and why of play and creativity.
Course material examines the relationship
between creativity and play, the effects of
reward and punishment, cultural notions of
play, and the integration of play with design
techniques that will enhance sustainability of
play. Students examine the differences
between informed and uninformed play as
well as the phenomenon of flow.
MM 344
Game Design Thesis Project
3 credits, 3 hours
Students complete a fully marketable game
prototype. Students and instructor examine
how the gaming industry functions as well as
research and develop an individual work.
Special attention is paid to preparing to enter
the field.
Prerequisite: Completion of Game Design minor
requirements.
MM 350
Business Seminar
2 credits, 2 hours
A seminar that focuses on the professional
implications of pursuing a career in multi-
media's various industries. Taught by a guest
lecturer. Lectures, discussions, readings,
research, writings, and presentations consti-
tute this course. Assignments include the
creation of both a vita and resume in addition
to a portfolio. Professional practice is stressed.
Topics such as portfolio presentation, self-pro-
motion, financials, interviewing, and firm
research will be addressed.
Prerequisite: MM 310. or permission of the
instructor
MM 360
Psychology of Human/Computer
Interaction
3 credits, 3 hours
Students explore the ways humans interact
with computers. How do humans treat com-
puters? Why? Should we interact with them
the same way we do with other humans? The
reasons behind why some computer interfaces
work and some don't will be discussed in
depth. Should computers be able to perceive
our emotions? Or should computers them-
selves have emotions'? The final for this course
will allow students to take part in designing an
original interface solution.
Social Science
MM 370
E-Music Thesis Project
3 credits, 3 hours
A culminating course for students in the e-
music minor in which they develop an
application. Students develop a proposal for
an application and carry the idea through
research implementation, execution, and pres-
entation. With the consent of the instructor,
projects may be the work of one student or
that of a group of students, be in a variety of
shapes, and in a variety of media.
Prerequisite: Completion of E-music minor
requirements.
MM 410, MM 411
Senior Studio I, II
4 credits, 8 hours
Studio courses that make use of all the stu-
dents" previous instruction. Consists of a
six-hour studio component and a two-hour cri-
tique component. One project completed each
semester. Students will be prepared on the first
day of each semester with a proposal that
includes but is not limited to a schedule, map.
research, executive summary, and supporting
documentation. Projects can be collaborative
or individual. Students are encouraged to try
both over the course of the year.
Prerequisite: MM 311.
Open only to Multimedia majors.
MM 440
Innovative Interfaces
3 credits. 6 hours
The notion of digital environment transcends
the concept of a computer, as we know it.
These addresses and environments, although
supported by digital technology, are non-com-
puter-like in many respects. Building these
environments calls for changes in the choice
of interaction devices (using touch, voice, ges-
tures, and possibly just user's intent as a basis
for interaction), shape and size of computers
(no boxes, but interactive surfaces), their loca-
tion (floor, wall, pocket), as well as a change
in content structure. Using cross-disciplinary
data from cognitive and computer sciences
and social psychology, the students in this
research/studio course focus primarily on the
design and development of innovative ways of
interacting with digital technology.
Prerequisite: MM 222. or permission of the
instructor
MM 470. MM 471
Issues in Multimedia Seminar I, II
1.5 credits, 1.5 hours
These courses serve as vehicles for discussion
of current topics in multimedia. Special atten-
tion is paid to the discussion of emerging
technologies and criteria for evaluating their
effectiveness, appropriate use, and potential.
Ethical issues surrounding new media are dis-
cussed.
Tlie University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
175
MM 472
Special Projects in Multimedia
3 credits, 3 hours
This seminar is designed to give students,
direct contact with their soon-to-be peers in
the various multimedia industries. The multi-
media industries that may be covered include
but are not limited to: fine art, interface
design, installation art, game design, and elec-
tronic music. Timely and relevant issues
concerning the craft, thought, and professional
expectations of a multimedia artist/designer
will be the content of this course. Topics
related to the multimedia industries in general
and the instructor's specific industry experi-
ence will be discussed. Readings, discussion,
and a practical presentation or project will
make up the body of this course.
Prerequisite: MM 350. or permission of the
instructor.
Open only to Multimedia majors.
MM 499
Multimedia Internship
3 credits, 90 hours/semester
Students are placed with regional companies
to expose them to a real work environment in
the fields of multimedia, web design and
information.
Museum Studies
MS 501
Museum Seminar: The Museum
3 credits, 3 hours
Lecture/seminar course exploring the history,
organization, and operation of the museum as
a cultural/educational institution, an economic
entity, and a management enterprise. Visiting
lecturers bring a wide range of knowledge and
practices from their respective institutions and
consultancies to provide the student with
insight into the differences between museums
of different types, sizes, and missions. The
course provides students with an overall
understanding of the museum as an institution
and an introduction to the many roles played
by museum professionals.
Prerequisite: Upperclass undergraduate or graduate
standing.
MS 502
Museum Seminar: The Exhibition
3 credits, 3 hours
Lecture/seminar course exploring the philos-
ophy and history of museum exhibitions and
the development of the museum exhibition
form. Visiting lecturers bring a wide range of
knowledge and practices from their respective
professional disciplines and provide insight
into museum exhibition practice. Provides stu-
dents with an overall understanding of the role
exhibitions can and do play in public institu-
tions. Offered in the evening. Priority for
enrollment is given to graduate stadents in the
Museum Education, Museum
Communication, and MEPD programs.
Prerequisite: Upperclass undergraduate or graduate
standing.
MS 508
The Museum Audience
3 credits, 3 hours '
Lecture course focusing on museum commu-
nications and learning, identifying the
characteristics of the museum visitor, the ways
in which visitors experience museum exhibi-
tions, cognitive and affective behavior, the
relationship of museum exhibitions and edu-
cational programming, and the impact of
museum visitor studies on the planning and
design of museum exhibitions and the envi-
ronment.
Prerequisite: Upperclass undergraduate or graduate
.•itaiiding.
MS 510
Museum Education Practicum
3 credits, 3 hours
Develops the practiced insight and skills
needed as a professional in a museum environ-
ment with all age groups. Provides
opportunities for preliminary observations and
experience with professional museum educa-
tors and directors. The seminar is conducted in
conjunction with museum visits and visiting
lecturers. Through this process, students study
dynamic teaching techniques, which explore
and interpret information, concepts, and cul-
tural values of a museum collection. Hands-on
techniques and experiences with curriculum
development and methodology prepare stu-
dents for research and internships.
MS 600
Museology
3 credits, 3 hours
Introduction to the social and cultural theory
underlying museum practice. The museum is
studied as a dynamic institution. Its structure
and functions are examined in the context of
political, economic, and social change. A sem-
inar/lecture course, students study the writings
of the founders of modern museum theory
focusing on the development of museums and
their service to the public, learning as a central
focus of contemporary museums, and the shift
from private to public support and responsi-
bility for museums.
Prerequisite: Graduate standing, or admission to a
Museum Studies program.
MS 601
Issues in Museums Seminar
3 credits, 3 hours
Presents and discusses current political and
social issues, which may unexpectedly and
sometimes problematically affect museum
practice, particularly in the public areas of
exhibition, programming, and publications.
Recent examples would include controversial
exhibits: legal, gender, race, cuhural, and reli-
gious issues impacting museums: and the
public right to participate in the museum
experience as an active contributor. Museum
scholars, specialists, and university faculty
offer in-depth examination of current topics.
Students complete projects designed to
develop professional ability to deal with
emerging debates in the museum profession
and the knowledge of the impact of politics
and the mass culture on museum policies and
practices.
Prerequisite: MS 600.
176
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
MS 602
Museum Governance: Legal Issues,
Ethics and Museums
3 credits, 3 hours
Legal status of the museum and its obligations
to the public, governance, staffing, and policy-
making as a nonprofit organization.
Establishing collections policies, laws, regula-
rions, conventions, and codes that affect
acquisidons, deaccessions, loans, and collec-
tions care. The case study method is used to
examine the issues, the law. and the decisions
that affect today's museums. State, federal,
and international legislation, common law,
and the applications of administrative law in
museums are examined. Examines the com-
plex reladons of museums and museum
professionals with trustees, collectors, donors,
dealers, outside interest groups, and artists.
Prerequisite: MS 600.
MS 610 A/B
Museum Exhibition Design Studio
6 credits. 12 hours
The primary vehicle for exploring and devel-
oping museum exhibition planning, design,
project organizadon, and presentation skills
and techniques.
Prerequisite: Admission to MEPD program.
MS 615
Educational Programming for
Museums and Alternative Sites
3 credits. 3 hours
Prepares museum educators for the develop-
ment of educational programs and plans for
diverse types of museums and alternative
learning sites. Exposes students to current
issues and trends in museum education such
as interdisciplinary and integrated learning,
and issues of diversity. Methods of inter-
predng works of art. artifacts, and collections
are studied. Extensive "theory into practice"
component provides students with the oppor-
tunity to apply theory to actual permanent
coUecdon and temporary exhibition projects at
area museums.
Prerequisite: MS 508.
MS 619
Video, Film, and Technology for
Museum Interpretation
3 credits, 3 hours
Students become familiar with important his-
torical, philosophical, and site-based
interpretive uses of media in museum settings
through a pracdcum that includes analysis of
media (video, film, and technology) in trans-
ferring knowledge and information in the
museum environment. Relates the artisdc, his-
torical, and content to the techniques of a
variety of moving image and multimedia
approaches. Research, planning, supervision,
outsourcing, and execution of media pieces
for museum environments are explored.
Prerequisite: Admission to a Museum Studies pro-
gram and computer literacy.
MS 620 A
Museum Graphics
1.5 credits. 3 hours
Writing, design, and production of museum
graphic components. Graphic Design is
defined as any visual information in museums
that is two-dimensional rather than three.
Corequisite: EM 21 1 or competence in computer
desktop applications.
MS 620 B
Museum Lighting
1.5 credits, 3 hours
A lecture/demonstration/workshop course
dealing with the use of lighting and color in
the museum environment.
Prerequisite: Admission to a Museum Studies pro-
gram, or MS 620 A.
MS 621
Publications, Public Relations,
and Marlceting
3 credits, 3 hours
Organizational principles and practices as they
relate to the processes of public relations and
museum communication (primarily print
media). Topics include public relations, inter-
pretive and informational publications,
advertising, identity, audience development,
and marketing. Addresses the use and creation
of publications, marketing plans, instimtion
and exhibition-based public relations, the cre-
ation of effective identity programs, and
audience development through membership
and outreach programs. In a workshop setting,
students learn to create effective publications
and print media, and discuss Web-based com-
munication. Students work under the guidance
of a university professor and visiting experts
in the museum field.
Prerequisite: MS 620 A or equivalent experience.
MS 622
Media for Museum Communication
3 credits. 3 hours
Laboratory/workshop course on utilization of
appropriate technological media, with
emphasis on the creation of visitor interaction.
Prerequisite: Admission to museum programs.
Computer literacy, familiarity mth Macintosh
System 9 required.
MS 623 A
Exhibition Materials and Methods
1 .5 credits. 3 hours
Demonstration/studio course directed at the
problems of working with basic materials,
methods, and tools of exhibition fabrication
and study of the characteristics of these mate-
rials, methods, and tools.
Prerequisite: Admission to a .Museum Studies pro-
gram, or MS 620 AIB.
MS 623 B
Exhibition Materials and Methods
1.5 credits. 3 hours
Demonstration/studio course directed at the
problems of exhibit production, the choice of
materials and methods, suppliers of materials
and services, and the use of CAD (computer-
aided design).
Prerequisite: MS 623 A .
MS 648
Graduate Museum Project
3 credits. 3 hours
Culminating research project concerning
museum studies, management, and education.
The project is completed in one semester and
includes the study of research in the field, a
team project with the Museum Exhibition and
Planning program, and an individual project
related to the student's main area of interest
within the museum profession. Provides
preparatory research for the culminating
museum internship (MS 658).
Prelcorequisites: MS 510. MS 622. MS 501 , and
MS 508 (except MEPD students) .
The University of tiie Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
177
MS 650
Development, Fundraising, and
Grantsmanship
3 credits, 3 hours
Introduction to the organizational develop-
ment principles as they relate to fundraising
and grant writing process. Addresses the
changing nature of funding for contemporary
museums, and sources of funds. The need and
methods for developing new forms of public
programming and communication to achieve
direct public support of the museum will be
addressed. In a workshop setting, students
learn current techniques for formulating insti-
tutional funding requests under the guidance
of an instructor and visiting experts in the
museum field. Students will acquire profes-
sional knowledge of museum practices in
development and revenue generation; and
skills in developing a master plan and carrying
out its elements for specific institutions and
for specific funding objectives.
Prerequisite: MS 501 or MS 600.
MS 651
Collections Management and
Computer Applications in Museums
3 credits, 3 hours
Students acquire the skills and knowledge
necessary to develop, implement, and super-
vise collections management projects.
Emphasizes data processing applications
related to collections management, documen-
tation, and other museum functions, including
collections administration, loans requests,
rights and reproductions, exhibition planning
and design, publications, collections security,
and project management. Topics include mul-
timedia and digital imaging, graphics, and
database development and processing stan-
dards. Instruction in computer languages,
database development and use, and digital
imaging. Word processing experience and
access to a computer are expected. Database
management experience is helpful.
Prereqiiisiles: MS 600, and a general level of com-
puter competence.
MS 658
Museum Education Internship
6 credits (or 3 credits per semester for
Museum Education students)
Taken in a cooperating museum, the internship
represents full-time employment equivalency
under the mentorship of a professional
museum educator. It is intended to provide
practical on-site experience in which the
intern is integrated into the museum staff,
assuming professional-level responsibilities
and experience. A University professor also
observes, advises, and assesses the student
during the internship.
Prerequisites: MS 510. MS 501, MS 508.
MS 710
Museum Exhibition Design Studio
6 credits. 6 hours
The primary vehicle for exploring and
developing museum exhibition planning,
design, project organization, and presentation
skills and techniques.
Prerequisites: MS 501 and MS610B.
MS 740
Thesis Research
3 credits. 3 hours
Examines the principal approaches to
research. The nature of appropriate research
methods for selected thesis topics; the
approaches and benefits of various methodolo-
gies; and the steps in research design. Students
identify a research problem, design a study,
collect and analyze data, compile, interpret,
and report the results.
Prerequisites: Graduate standing, and completion
of or eiuvllment in MS 501 , MS 502, MS 600,
or MS 648.
MS 749 A/B
Thesis Development
6 credits (or 3 credits per semester for
MEPD students)
3 credits (or 1.5 credits per semester for
Museum Communication students)
Independent research and design in an area
supporting the student's career objectives and
interests.
Prerequisites for MEPD students: MS 502 and
MS610AIB.
Prerequisites for Museutn Communication stu-
dents: MS 501, MS 508, MS 600.
MS 759
Graduate Museum Internship
3 credits, 90 hours/semester
A three-month supervised practicum in a
cooperating museum, the internship represents
full-time employment equivalency under the
mentorship of a professional museum edu-
cator. Provides practical on-site experience, in
which the intern is integrated into the museum
staff, assuming professional-level responsibili-
ties and experience. A University professor
also observes, advises, and asses.ses the stu-
dent during the internship.
Prerequisite for Museum Exhibition Planning
and Design: 15 credits in Museum Studies.
Prerequisites for Museimi Communication: MS
501, MS 508, and MS 600.
Prerequisites for Museum Education Students:
MS510,MS501,andMS508.
Open to Museum Studies majors only.
178
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Music
WIU 007 A/B
Introduction to Music Theory
3 credits, 4.5 hours
Fundamentals of music theory, designed to
introduce students to the basic principles of
theory and harmony.
MU 010, MU 020, MU 030
Jury Examination
credits
MU 040
Senior Recital
credits
MU 100
Major Worl<shop
1 credit, 1.5 hours
Students, grouped by major, learn and practice
aspects of performance including technique,
literature, sight-reading, and improvisation.
Students perform individually and in groups.
Open to Music majors only.
MU 103 A/B
Musicianship I, II
3 credits, 3 hours
The establishment of fundamental skills
through the singing and recognition of dia-
tonic materials, i.e., scales, intervals, triads,
and seventh chords, both as isolated phe-
nomena and in musical contexts. Solfeggio
performance of diatonic melodies and
rhythmic performance in all basic meters are
emphasized, as well as the dictation of these
materials.
Permission of instructor is required.
MU 107 A/B
Music Theory I, II
3 credits. 3 hours
An introduction to basic theory. Includes the
study of scales, intervals, chords of various
types, harmonic progression, and the analysis
of small musical forms.
Permission of instructor is required.
MU 111 A/B
Composition Class for Non-Majors
1 credit. 1 hour
Students develop basic skills in various
aspects of composition, including form,
melody, harmony, rhythm, color, texture,
notation, improvisation, and orchestration.
MU 113
Freshman Improvisation
1 credit. 1 .5 hours
Introductory-level jazz improvisation dealing
with linear, melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic
fundamentals of improvisation, as well as the
interactive and group aspects. Lecture and
skills development with a performance base.
Open to Music majors only.
MU 115, MU 116
Music Technology Survey
1 credit. 1 hour
Provides students with a working knowledge
of music technology practices, definitions, and
concepts. Through both lecture and lab
classes, students become familiar with a cross-
section of hardware and software currently in
use by the school and working professionals.
MU 121
Calligraphy
1 credit. 1 hour
Professional methods of musical score and
part preparation, both in the traditional way
with paper and pen, and with computer pro-
grams. An elective for all majors.
Prerequisite: MU 107 B or permission of instructor
MU 123 A/B
Guitar Class for Non-Majors
1 credit, 1 hour
One hour class of instruction in contemporary
guitar. Course covers basic technique
including fingering, scales, chords, and
chord melodies.
MU 124 A/B
Drum Class for Non-Majors
1 credit. 1 hour
Drum set instnjction in basic technique and
contemporary styles including rock, jazz,
and Latin.
MU 125 A/B
Brass Class for Non-Majors
1 credit, 1 hour
Designed for students with little or no experi-
ence or formal training. Students will learn
basic breathing, embouchure, and reading
techniques.
MU 126 A/B
Saxophone Class for Non-Majors
1 credit, 1 hour
Introductory class in saxophone techniques,
embouchure, sound production, breathing, fin-
gering, and literature.
MU 127 A/B
Flute Class for Non-Majors
1 credit. 1 hour
Provides the student with a solid introduction
to tone and technique development and reper-
toire for the flute.
MU 130 A/B
Piano Class for Non-Majors
1 credit. 1 hour
Instruction in traditional beginning piano.
Coursework includes basic technique
including scales, chords, and chord melodies.
MU 131 A/B
Class Piano I, II
1 credit, 1 hour
Introductory and elementary keyboard
training using theoretical, harmonic, and tech-
nical concepts in practical keyboard
application: transposition, melody harmoniza-
tion, elementary improvisation, technique, and
repertoire.
Open to Music majors only
MU 139, MU 140
Styles and Diction
1 credit, 1 hour
Required of all vocal majors. Students prac-
tice English and Italian diction, and perform
for faculty and guests in a variety of musical
styles.
Open to Music majors only
MU 141 A/B
Voice Class for Non-Majors
1 credit. 1 hour
Voice instruction using traditional methods.
Course covers proper technique of breathing,
support, focus of tone, production of clear
vocal line, and some musical interpretation
of literature.
MU 149 A/B
Aural Concepts
3 credits, 3 hours
For non-Music majors. An introduction to the
use of music and sound as components of
multimedia and their potential for enhancing
communication. Recognizing the special
background and needs of the non-music major
student, examines the fundamentals of music
and sound, their potential relationship to the
visual image, and the technology necessary to
implement that relationship.
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004 179
MU 151 A/B
Introduction - Music Education
1 credit. 1 hour
A two-semester sequence required of all stu-
dents in the MATPREP program, and open to
any student interested in exploring Music
Education as a career option. Survey course
designed to provide an overview of music
teaching- past, present, and future, and to
serve as an introduction to the philosophy,
methodology, and professional role of the
music teacher. i
Open to Music majors only.
MU 190 A/B
Applied Instruction Non-Majors
1.5 credits, 0.5 hour
Private instruction in all instrumental, vocal,
and composition areas.
Permission of instructor is required.
MU 191 A/B - MU 591 A/B
Applied Major Instruction: Voice
3 credits, 1 hour
Private instruction in voice.
Open to Music majors only.
MU 192 A/B - MU 592 A/B
Applied Major Instruction:
Instrumental
3 credits, 1 hour
Private instruction in instrumental area.
Open to Music majors only.
MU 193 A/B - MU 593 A/B
Applied Major Instruction:
Composition
3 credits, 1 hour
Private instruction in composition.
Open to Music majors only.
MU 208 A/B
JazzTheory I, II
3 credits. 3 hours
A study of diatonic and chromatic theory as
related to jazz and contemporary music.
Prerequisite: MU 107 B or permission of instructor
MU 209 A/B
Jazz Ear Training I, II
3 credits, 3 hours
Melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic aural skill
development in the jazz and contemporary
music idioms.
Prerequisite: MU 103 B or permission of instructor
MU 213 A/B
Jazz Improvisation I, II
2 credits. 3 hours
The application of improvisational techniques
encompassing all standard forms and styles.
Performance practices are related to the indi-
vidual student's abiUties. background, and
experience. Coursework includes solo tran-
scription and analysis, a comparison of
improvisational methods, and a survey of edu-
cational resources.
Prerequisites: MU 103 B and MU 107 B, or permis-
sion of instructor
Open to Music majors only
MU 232 A/B
Class Jazz Piano!, II
1 credit. I hour
Harmonic concepts in keyboard application
for jazz and contemporary music, chord
voicings for popular tunes, standards, and
original harmonizations.
Prerequisite: MU 131 B.
Open to Music majors only
MU 241 A/B
Vocal Styles and Diction I, II
2 credits, 2 hours
Brings together Vocal majors to expose them
to the wide variety of literature and styles
required of professionals. Students perform
and are critiqued by faculty and guests.
English, Italian, French, and German diction
are studied.
Prerequisites: MU 13 1 B and MU 140.
Open to Vocal majors only.
MU 254
Basic Conducting
2 credits, 2 hours
A study of fundamental conducting skills and
techniques with emphasis upon physical
aspects of conducting, score reading and
preparation, and rehearsal principles.
Open to Music majors only
MU 257 A/B
LabTeaching/Practicum I, II
2 credits, 2 hours
Observation and introduction to teaching in
the schools. Course includes field experience
as well as classroom seminars.
Open to Music majors only.
MU 301 A/B
Music History I, II
3 credits, 3 hours
Designed to define the major style periods
from ancient Greece to the present in terms of
their philosophies, accomplishments, and
interrelationships. Composers, performers,
and theorists are examined in the context of
musical literature with emphasis upon styles,
forms, and techniques of composifion as they
evolve and change. The sequence puts into
historical perspective the materials presented
in the Music Theory courses. Through lis-
tening assignments, students are expected to
further develop their aural skills and knowl-
edge of musical literature.
Discipline History I Humanities
MU 306 A/B
History of Rock Music
3 credits. 3 hours
The history of Rock from its inception in the
1950s to the present. Beginning with the
important antecedents of Rock and Roll, the
course historically traces the various styles
that evolved from that time to the present.
There are live demonstrations and illustrations
by guests in class. May be taken for elective
credit.
Humanities
MU 307 A/B
Advanced jazz Theory
and Ear Training
3 credits, 3 hours
Practical study of jazz and pop theory com-
bined with an advanced ear-training program,
emphasizing performance application.
Students are required to bring their instru-
ments to class. Coursework includes
recognidon, writing, dictafion, and sight
reading of advanced chords, chord additions
and alteraUons, chord substitutions, progres-
sions, and rhythm.
Prerequisite: MU 208 B.
Open to Music majors only
MU 308 A/B
Analysis and Composition of
Contemporary Music
1.5 credits, 1.5 hours
Examination of compositional techniques
used in pop songs, jingles, soundtracks, and
underscores for radio, TV, records, films,
shows and industrials. Students investigate the
ways in which music serves to enhance the
overall goals of the product or project.
Musical analysis demonstrates how each style
is created. Students produce their own musical
compositions in each media context.
Prerequisite: MU 208 B.
Open to Music majors only
i8o
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
MU 309
Advanced Rhythmic Skills
1 credits, 1.5 hours
This is a skills-based class intended to
advance the student's rhythmic understanding
and performance abilities as applied to solo
and sectional playing and singing, as well as
improvisation, reading, arranging, tran-
scribing, and composing. Subject matter is
derived from and applies to comtemporary
American and Latin popular and art music.
Prerequisites: MU 208 B.MU 209 B and
MU213B.
MU 310, MU 311
Transcription and Analysis
1 credit, 1.5 hours
Designed to advance the skills of ear training,
theory, and improvisation using transcription,
analysis, and composition. Students transcribe
and compose melodies, rhythms, harmonies
and arrangements, in increasingly complex
forms. The musical theory underlying each
piece is discussed and sometimes performed
and used as a basis for further work.
Prerequisites: MU 208 B. MU209 B, ami MU 2)3 B
MU 313 A/B
Jazz Improvisation III, IV
2 credits, 2 hours
Continuation of MU 2 1 3 A/B .
Prerequisite: MU 213 B.
Open to Music majors only.
MU 315 A/B
Jazz Arranging 1, 11
2 credits, 2 hours
A functional approach to ensemble scoring
including score analysis, combo arranging,
arranging for mixed instrumentation, musical
settings for vocalists, string writing, writing
for pop recording, and special techniques for
multi-track recording.
Prerequisites: MU 208 B and MU209B.
MU317A
Orchestration 1
3 credits, 3 hours
Introduction to instrumentation, designed to
acquaint the student with ranges, transposi-
tions, functions, and characteristics of
individual instruments and voices. Aural and
score analysis provide the basis for under-
standing of vocal and instrumental treatments
in small and large ensembles. Written orches-
trations are required.
Prerequisite: MU 208 B.
Open to Music majors only.
MU 317 B
Orchestration 11
3 credits, 3 hours
Primarily intended for composers, this course
presents an analytical history of orchestration.
Coursework culminates in a large project that
is scored and critiqued. Composers
are encouraged to orchestrate their own
compositions.
Prerequisite: MU 208 B and MU 317 A.
Open to Music majors only
MU 331 A/B
Advanced Piano and Accompanying
1 credit, 1 hour
Designed for all music majors, this course
continues in the development of piano tech-
niques with an emphasis on learning
self-accompaniment. Literature from all vocal
areas is practiced including oratorio, musical
theater, jazz, opera, and contemporary.
Students also accompany other singers.
Prerequisite: MU232 B.
MU 341 A/B
Vocal Styles and Diction Ml, IV
2 credits, 2 hours
Continuation ofMU 241 A/B.
Prerequisite: MU 241 B.
MU 344 A/B
Opera Staging 1, 11
2 credits, 3 hours
The interpretation and pertbrmance of opera
roles. Technical and artistic preparation for
public performance from workshops to major
productions of full operas.
Permission of instructor is required.
MU 347 A/B
Advanced Sight Reading
1 credit, 1 hour
An advanced music reading course designed
to further develop the student's music reading,
writing, recognition, and inner-ear skills.
Prerequisite: MU 209 Bar TH 2^2 B.
MU 348 A/B
Vocal Improvisation
2 credits, 2 hours
Develops improvisation skills for vocal
majors through the study of advanced vocal
techniques, transcription, theory and analysis,
and metric concepts.
Open to Music majors only, or with permission
of instructor
MU 356 A/B
Music Teaching Sl<ills 1, 11
1 credit. 1 hour
Incorporates advanced skills in functional
piano, guitar, recorder, writing/arranging for
elementary classroom ensembles, handbells,
establishment of classroom environment.
Projects include arranging, pertbrming, and
simulated teaching.
Open to Music majors only
MU390
Introduction to Acoustics
3 credit. 3 hours
This course deals with the physical nature of
sound, the reception and perception of sound,
theories of consonance and dissonance, scales
tunings and temperaments, the acoustic prop-
erties of musical instruments, electronic
instruments and the voice, sound reinforce-
ment, and environmental considerations.
Open to all students.
Science/Math
MU 401 A
Jazz History
3 credits. 3 hours
Study of jazz from its African and European
roots through its emergence at the turn of the
20th century as a unique and distinctive
American art form. The various styles of jazz
are studied (ragtime. New Orieans Dixieland,
Chicago style, swing, be-bop, cool, hard bop,
free-form, third stream), including their effect
on the popular music with which jazz has
coexisted. An in-depth study of the primary
exponents of the various styles. Audio and
video materials are used to provide students
with a better understanding of jazz and its
influences on the music industry.
Prerequisites: MU 208 B. MU 209 B. and
MU2I3 B, or permission of the instructor
Discipline History /Humanities
MU 401 B
American Music History
3 credits, 3 hours
The development of both classical and popular
American musical styles from the 17th to the
20th century. Recordings and films as well as
in-class performances will help bring to life
the music of our American past. Students gain
a clear understanding of the social, historical
and musical time line that evolved into our
current musical environment.
Humanities/Art History
The University of tiie Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
181
MU402
World Music
3 credits, 3 hours
The classical and folk music of various coun-
tries in Asia. Indonesia, the Middle East,
Africa, and the Western Hemisphere. Course
open to all University students, which may be
taken for Music or Liberal Arts credit.
Humanities
MU406
Advanced Rhythmic Theory
and Practice
3 credits, 3 hours
Study of the rhythmic theories and practices
of such composers as Hindemith, Messiaen,
Stravinsky, Carter, Reich, Bartok, and
Babbitt, as well as other contemporary and
jazz composers.
Prerequisites: MU 208 B, MU 209 B. and MU 213 B.
Open to Music majors only.
MU408
Form and Analysis
3 credits, 3 hours
This course serves as a continuation of the
theory work of the freshman year. It is an
enhanced study of classical theory designed to
prepare students for graduate work and for the
teacher certification examinations. The
emphasis is on harmonic forms and those built
upon ostinati principles. The literature for
study is drawn from all musical periods.
Prerequisite: MU 107 B.
MU 409
Contrapuntal Theory and Analysis
3 credits, 3 hours
A continuation of freshman theory courses
taken by instrumental, vocal, and composidon
majors. It is designed to enhance basic clas-
sical theory skills; to prepare for graduate
level theory work; and to meet the require-
ments on the theory portions of the teacher
certification examination. The course centers
on contrapuntal organization and contrapuntal
devices. The literature is drawn from all
musical periods. Harmony, rhythm, melody,
and timbre are discussed as they relate to
specific compositions. Requirements include
analytical study, out-of-class listening and
research, and written contrapuntal
assignments.
Prerequisites: MU 107 A and MU 107 B.
MU411
2oth Century Music
3 credits, 3 hours
A study and analysis of the music of the first
half of the 20th century, by composers such as
Schonberg, Berg, Webern, Stravinsky,
Hindemith, Varese, Bartok, Copland, and
Messiaen.
Prerequisites: MU 208 B. MU209 B. and MU 213 B
or permission of the instructor.
Humanities
MU413 A/B
Recording!, II
2 credits, 2 hours
Study of the recording process and the many
facets of the recording studio. Designed to
familiarize the student with conventional and
creative recording techniques through prac-
tical experience in the studio.
MU 415 A/B
Introduction to MIDI and
Electronic Technology
3 credits. 3 hours
Detailed, applied examination of the use of
microcomputers in the present-day composi-
tion environment. The course includes the
uses of the computer, the language of MIDI,
sequencing, FM and other types of synthesis,
and a survey of currently available music soft-
ware packages. Students are strongly
encouraged to engage in independent work
based on their own compositional interests.
No prior computer or synthesis experience is
needed.
MU 416 A/B
MIDI Synthesis i, II
1.5 credits. 0.75 hour
Students become proficient at the skills neces-
sary to work creatively in the MIDI studio.
Current synthesis methods and programming
of original sounds and drum machines; sam-
pling procedures; collecting and editing
original samples; MIDI studio recording
processes; the use of sync codes.
Prerequisite: MU 415 B.
MU 417 A/B
Opera Literature
3 credits, 3 hours
Survey of operatic styles and genres.
Emphasis on the cultural and social contexts
of a wide diversity of operas, and upon char-
acter analysis. Intensive examination of
complete operas.
Open to all University students for free elective or
Liberal Arts credit.
Humanities
MU 420 A
Business of Music
2 credits. 2 hours
Examination of the legal, pracdcal, and proce-
dural problems encountered by the practicing
musician. Content includes the study of music
publishing, recording contracts, and copyright
and intellectual property rights issues.
MU 420 B
Careers in Music
2 credits. 2 hours
Study in the career options available to musi-
cians and the knowledge and craft necessary
for the successful recognition and exploitation
of these opportunities.
Open to Music majors only
MU 424
Wagner and the Ring Cycle
3 credits, 3 hours
An in-depth study of Wagnerian opera with
special emphasis on the four operas that con-
stitute the Ring Cycle. Lectures and
discussions will cover libretti, harmonic
idiom, staging, and symbolism.
Open to all University studems for free elective or
Liberal Arts credit.
MU427
Diaghilev and His Time
3 credits, 3 hours
The role of Serge Diaghilev and his famous
Ballet Russes in shaping the course of music
and dance from 1909-1929. Special emphasis
on the works of Igor Stravinsky with reference
to his music for the stage. The interrelation-
ships between various artists, dancers, and
writers such as Picasso, Cocteau. Nijinsky,
Bakst, Massine, and others who were active in
Paris. Works are examined from the perspec-
tive of the composer, the choreographer, the
set and costume designer, the dancers and the
audience. Literature includes Stravinsky
{Firebird, Petrushka, Rite of Spring. Les
Npces. Piilcinella, Oedipus Re.x). Debussy
(Jeiix). Ravel {Daphnis and Chloe). Satie
(Parade), De Falla (The Three-Comered Hat),
Milhaud (Le Train Bleu, La Creation du
Monde), Poulenc (Les Biches) and Prokofiev.
Open to all University students for free elective or
Liberal Arts credit.
182
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
MU 441 A/B
Vocal Workshop
1 credit. 1 hour
Exit-level course for vocal majors, which pre-
pares students for the musical, career, and
performance practices they will encounter in
the competitive professional marketplace.
Class includes lectures by guest singers, com-
posers, opera and musical directors, vocal
coaches, and record producers.
Prerequisites: MU 331 B. MU 341 B. andMU347B
MU 444 A/B
Opera Staging III, IV
2 credits. 3 hours
Continuation of MU 344 A/B.
Prerequisite: MU 344 B.
MU 451 A
Psychology of Music Teaching I
2 credits. 2 hours
Acquaints the prospective music educator
with the major theories and developments
associated with child development in physical,
emotional, and psychological terms; and a
volume of principles supported by psycholog-
ical observation and investigation, which
appear to possess import for the
teaching/learning endeavor in music.
Open to Music majors only.
Social Studies
MU 451 B
Psychology of Music Teaching 11
2 credits, 2 hours
Emphasis on the application of learning theo-
ries to practical considerations of teaching,
including motivation, learning sequence, stu-
dent-teacher interaction, and classroom
management. Developmental theories, like
those of Piaget and Erikson, are explored with
attention to selecting learning experiences in
the music classroom.
Open to Music majors only.
Social Studies
MU499
Internship
1-3 credits, 30-60 hours
An opportunity to participate in a workplace
environment during the academic year.
Students earn internship credit by completing
a minimum number of hours in the field
during the semester, and by satisfying the
requirements of the sponsor, such as atten-
dance, punctuality, responsibility,
professionalism, tasks completed. Students
may be assigned to recording studios, radio
stations, arts organizations, or with music pub-
lishers, entertainment attorneys, music
therapists, or record producers.
Master of Arts in
Teaching in Music
Education
MU 550
Advanced Conducting
3 credits, 3 hours
Advanced conducting techniques and applica-
tions of these techniques to instrumental or
choral music teaching at the secondary school
level. Emphases include the selections of
appropriate literature, style and interpretation,
rehearsal planning and implementation, evalu-
ating performance outcomes, and special
considerations relative to the teaching of
music through the vehicle of performance.
Students select either instrumental or choral
emphasis.
Prerequisites:. 4 course in Basic Conducting and
matriculation in the .MAT in Music program.
MU 551
Education in American Society
3 credits, 3 hours
Lecture/discussion, field research, and presen-
tations address historical, philosophical, and
contemporary issues in American education.
Students are required to complete four major
papers dedicated to the aforementioned issues
and present them during seminar sessions.
Assigned readings and the keeping of a note-
book devoted to current events in education
are required. Students are granted release time
from class to complete research papers and are
counselled individually to facilitate their proj-
ects. Guest speakers typically include a school
administrator, a counselor/social worker, a
supervisor or teacher from a curricular area
other than music, and related school
personnel.
Prerequisite: Matriculation in the MAT in Music
program.
MU552
Workshop in Vocal Methods
2 credits, 1 hour
Instruction and participatory experiences
in voice theory, vocal production, teaching
methods, and instructional materials for use in
elementary and secondary schools. The physi-
ology of the voice is studied with reference to
principles of choral singing. Special problems
of the child and adolescent voice are
considered.
Prerequisite: .Matriculation in the .MA T in Music
program.
MU 553
Music and Special Children
2 credits, 2 hours
Readings, discussions, guest speakers, class-
room observations and simulated teaching
define and examine various types of disabili-
ties; offer a background on special education
practices and laws in America; develop an
appreciation of the needs of handicapped per-
sons in general society, in education, and in
music education; and guide music education
students in developing goals and objectives,
adapting lessons, and preparing meaningful
lesson plans for special students in the music
classroom. Participation in class discussion
based on assigned reading, a written/verbal
presentation on a specific disability, field
observations, and two written examinations
provide bases for evaluating student achieve-
ment.
Prerequisite: .Matriculation in the M.AT in Music
program.
MU 554 A
Elementary Methods and Materials
3 credits, 3 hours
Concentrated study of methods and materials
involved in planning, implementing, and eval-
uating instructional programs in elementary
music education. Lecture, workshop, and sim-
ulated teaching sessions.
Prerequisite: Matriculation in the MA T in .Music
program.
MU 554 B
Secondary Methods and Materials
3 credits. 3 hours
Concentrated study of methods and materials
involved in planning, implementing, and eval-
uating instructional programs in secondary
music education. Lecture, workshop, and sim-
ulated teaching sessions.
Prerequisite: Matriculation in the MAT in Music
program.
MU555
Elementary Student Teaching
4 credits: off campus at school placement
Taken concurrently with MU 556 and
MU 558. Offered only during the spring
semester to students in their final semester of
study. The equivalent of six weeks experience
at the elementary level is required to receive
credit for this course. Placement in schools is
determined by the Director of Music
Educadon.
Prerequisite: Matriculation in the MA T in Music
program.
Tlie University of tlie Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
183
MU 556
Secondary Student Teaching
4 credits: off campus at school placement
Taken concurrently with MU 556 and
MU 558. Offered only during the spring
semester to students in their final semester of
study. The equivalent of six weeks' experience
at the secondary level is required to receive
credit for this course. Placement in schools is
determined by the Director of Music
Education.
Prerequisite: Matriculation in the MAT in Music
program.
MU557
Music Administration and
Supervision
3 credits. 3 hours
Course addresses issues and concerns of
administering school music programs: pro-
gram planning and development, budget and
finance, facilities, equipment, public relations,
scheduling, concert planning, and related mat-
ters. Principles and methods of effective
supervision of programs and personnel consti-
tute a second focus of the course.
Prerequisite: Matriculation in the MAT in Music
program.
MU 558
Student Teaching Seminar and
Major Project
2 credits, 2 hours
Taken concurrently with MU 555 and
MU 556. Required of and limited to students
who are student teaching. Discussion and
analysis of field experiences, special work-
shops, and field trips. Major paper comprises
a thorough status study and evaluation of the
programs in which each student is interning.
Successful completion of an oral exit exami-
nation is required.
Prerequisite: Matriculation in the MA T in Music
program.
MU 559
Research, Evaluation, and
Technology in Music Education
3 credits. 3 hours
The course has three foci;
1 . Examination of the role of research in
music education, sources of research, analysis
of research types and methods, and the criti-
cism of research in terms of internal and
external criteria.
2. Principles of effective evaluation strategies
in music education; standardized and teacher-
constructed approaches to evaluating music
teaching; and learning in the cognitive, psy-
chomotor, and affective domains.
3. Study of computer applications and related
technological advances relative to the
teaching and administration of programs
in music education.
Prerequisite: Matriculation in the MAT in Music
program.
MU 560 A
Worl<shop in Instrumental
Methods 1
2 credits. 2 hours
Performing on brass and percussion instru-
ments and teaching brass and percussion in
elementary and secondary schools. The class
will constitute a lab ensemble for exploring
methods and materials. Full class sessions
supplemented with small-group instruction.
Clinics focus on instrument care and repair,
instrument selection, developing beginning
instrumental programs in schools, and related
issues.
Prerequisite: Matriculation in the MAT in Music
program.
MU 560 B
Workshop in Instrumental
Methods 11
2 credits. 2 hours
Instruction and participatory experiences in
performing on woodwind and string instru-
ments and teaching woodwinds and strings in
elementary and secondary schools. The class
will constitute a lab ensemble for exploring
methods and materials. Full class sessions are
supplemented with small-group instruction.
Clinics focus on instrument care and repair,
instrument selection, developing beginning
instrumental programs in schools, and related
issues.
Prerequisite: Matriculation in the MAT in Music
program.
Master of Music in
Jazz Studies
MU603
Graduate Project/ Recital
3 credits, 3 hours
Independent research project designed to
enable the student to work in depth on a topic
of special relevance applicable to perform-
ance. The graduate project is evaluated in two
parts: as a thesis, with the expectation that the
student has completed extensive research in a
comprehensive manner; and as a recital, in
which the student incorporates aspects of the
project and demonstrates personal instru-
mental growth. Students give presentations
throughout the semester in a seminar setting,
showing their progress in research and its
application to performance.
Prerequisite: Matriculation in the Master of Music
program.
MU 615, MU 616
MIDI and Music Technology
2 credits, 2 hours
Hands-on exploration of music technology
applicable to performer, composer, and
arranger, with focus on fluency with MIDI
sequencing including MAX to create interac-
tive live performance situations. Students
work with modular digital multi-tracks and
edit and create original sounds for synthe-
sizers and samplers. Hard disk recording using
Pro-Tools III and Digital Performer. SMPTE
and synchronization in the studio, and compo-
sition and sound design for film, video, and
theater are also explored. Training in notation
software is an integral and essential aspect of
the course: after the first month, assignments
for all graduate courses require use of profes-
sional notation software.
Prerequisite: Matriculation in the Master of Music
program.
184
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
MU617
Advanced Transcription
and Analysis
3 credits, 3 hours
Accurate notation, transcription fluency, and
recognition of theoretical concepts are devel-
oped through a regime of continual rigorous
assignments-all designed to further advance
skills in ear training and theory. Projects begin
with single-line melodies in varying instru-
mental registers and progress through
advanced rhythms and chord progressions to
complete arrangements and compositions.
Sources include bass lines, synthesizer
sequences, pop recordings, jazz improvisa-
tions, and drum solos. Students learn
techniques and performance practices of
varying styles and periods, and then pertbrm
transcribed parts and solos.
Prerequisite: Matriculation in the Master of Music
program.
MU 620, MU 621
Graduate Professional Internship
1 credit, 15 hours/semester
Provides hands-on, sitting-in experience in a
variety of professional settings-rehearsals,
pertbrmances. meetings with producers, and
in-studio projects such as recording,
arranging, or project coordination. The pro-
gram is developed by the graduate advisor and
major teacher in conjunction with the student
to select topics and experiences most relevant
and beneficial to that particular student's
education.
Prereqiiisite: Matriculation in the Master of Music
program.
MU622
Graduate Arranging
2 credits, 2 hours
Emphasis is on effective writing in various
contemporary styles and building on basic
arranging skills, with a focus on specific
arranging techniques such as writing effec-
tively for the rhythm section, horn voicings,
sax soli, and contemporary fusion styles.
Arrangements are studied in score format and
aurally, and then techniques are applied to stu-
dent projects.
Prerequisite: Matriculation in the Master of Music
program.
MU 624
Composing for Performers
2 credits, 2 hours
A dual emphasis-on acoustic instruments and
on technologies-exposes students to a variety
of professional composing situations,
including large jazz ensembles, fusion,
acoustic/electronic hybrids, films, videos,
musical theater, and jingle writing. Techniques
using MIDI. MAX, and electronic composi-
tion are explored. Faculty and guest
composers present workshops on their own
approaches. Students learn to use the
recording studio as an instrument and use
notation software for score and part prepara-
tion. Student works are rehearsed and
performed by graduate and advanced under-
graduate ensembles.
Prerequisite: Matriculation in the Master of Music
program.
MU 625, MU 626
Graduate Improvisation I, II
2 credits, 2 hours
Improvisational styles, techniques, and
devices are studied. Intervallic improvisation,
modem triad improvisation, and advanced
pentatonic concepts are addressed, as well as
study of the pioneers of jazz improvisation
through recorded solos that mark turning
points of improvisation. Topics include
melody embellishment, improvising in
phrases, silence, time-feel, pacing, syncopa-
tion, chord tone soloing, dynamics,
non-harmonic triads, contracting and
expanding chord duration, tri-tonic cells, sus-
taining peak points, and unaccompanied
soloing.
Prerequisite: Matriculation in the Master of Music
program.
MU 627, MU 628
Graduate Forum
1 credit. 1 hour
Seminar where various aspects of study,
including musical development and accom-
plishment, are correlated with critical,
aesthetic, and historical components.
Additionally, artistic and professional issues
are researched and discussed, and guest artists
and professionals conduct master classes and
workshops. A module on research techniques
is included.
Prerequisite: Matriculation in the Master of Music
program.
Music Ensembles
BM and MM students participate in a range of
ensembles selected for their diversity of style
and instrumentation, designed to present
varied musical experiences. Each ensemble is
directed by a faculty artist expert in the
selected idiom.
MU 761
Handbell Choir
1 credit
Permission of instructor is required.
MU 762
Chamber Singers Ensemble
1 credit
Permission of instructor is required.
MU764
Small Jazz Ensemble
1 credit
Permission of instructor is required.
Required of all MM in Jazz Studies majors.
MU 765
New Music Ensemble
1 credit
Permission of instructor is required.
MU 772
Chorus
1 credit
Permission of instructor is required.
MU 774
Large jazz Ensemble
1 credit
Permission of instructor is required.
Private Lessons
The following course.^ are open to Music
majors only.
MU 191 A/B
Major Lessons (Vocal)
3 credits
MU 192 A/B
Major Lessons (Instrumental)
3 credits
MU 193 A/B
Major Lessons (Composition)
3 credits
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
185
MU 291 A/B
Major Lessons (Vocal)
3 credits
Prereqiiisiw: MU 191 B.
MU 292 A/B
Major Lessons (Instrumental)
3 credits
Pm-equishe:MU 192B.
MU 293 A/B
Major Lessons (Composition)
3 credits
Prerequisite: MU 193 B.
MU 391 A/B
Major Lessons (Vocal)
3 credits
Prereqiiisile:MU29l B.
MU 392 A/B
Major Lessons (Instrumental)
3 credits
Prerequisite: MU 292 B.
MU 393 A/B
Major Lessons (Composition)
3 credits
Prerequisite: MU 293 B.
MU 491 A/B
Major Lessons (Vocal)
3 credits
Prerequisite: MU 391 B
MU 492 A/B
Major Lessons (Instrumental)
3 credits
Prerequisite: MU 392 B
MU 493 A/B
Major Lessons (Composition)
3 credits
Prerequisite: MU 393 B.
MU 592 A/B
Major Lessons (Graduate)
3 credits
Prerequisite: Admission to the MM program.
Media Arts
Photography/Film/
Video/Animation
PF 125
Freshman Photography
1.5 credits. 3 hours
An introduction to fundamental techniques
used in black-and-white photography,
including camera operation, developing, and
printing. Lectures and presentations on the
technical aspects of photography as well as
the creative and conceptual aspects related to
the field. Demonstrations on the production of
photograms and pinhole images, the use of the
copy stand and slide film, and a brief descrip-
tion of different camera formats.
PF127
Freshman Animation
1 .5 credits. 3 hours
An introduction to the basics of animation,
with an emphasis on the development of story-
telling capabilities. Inventive studio projects
explore production techniques used both in
experimental and character animation. In addi-
tion, an historical overview is provided
through film screenings and group discussion.
PF 128
Freshman Film
1 .5 credits, 3 hours
A short survey of film and video production,
with an emphasis on the discussion of the
artistic possibilities inherent in this medium.
Topics will cover elements of narrative, the
poetics of film (eariy historical experiments,
dream form, and visionary film), the docu-
mentary idiom (propaganda, social analysis,
and political activism), video as an art form
(technology, fine art video, and performance
art), and kinetic design in the commercial
sector (text and moving image design, and
kinetic structure in television commercials).
Students write two short papers and prepare a
treatment for a work in film or video. Studio
assignments concentrate on storyboard devel-
opment and group shooting projects.
PF203
Portfolio Documentation
1 .5 credits, 3 hours
The use of photography to create a portfolio of
artwork, exhibitions, and installations is nec-
essary for artists in all visual media. Students
will learn how to photograph two- and three-
dimensional artwork in a studio setting and on
location. Instruction addresses a wide range of
issues including: artificial and natural lighting,
film-based and digital camera operation,
image processing techniques, and output
options. By participating in lectures, demon-
strations, field trips, and shooting
assignments, students will acquire the skills
necessary to create a coherent visual portfolio
of their work.
Prerequisite: FP 111 orFP 121. or by permission of
tlie department.
PF209
Photography for Illustrators
3 credits. 6 hours
Introduction to basic concepts and techniques
of black-and-white photography, including
camera operation, developing, and printing, as
well as photographic digital imaging.
Emphasis is placed on film selection and
lighting for both the studio and environmental
shooting. The fundamentals of PhotoShop are
employed for digital image manipulation.
Lectures and projects are designed to provide
the tools necessary for illustrators who wish to
use photography in their work.
Prerequisite: FP 111 orFP 1 21, or by permission of
tlie department.
PF 210 A . •
Introduction to Film I
3 credits. 6 hours
A hands-on introduction to the principles and
techniques of media production: shooting
16mm film, developing a sensitivity to the
nuances of movement, understanding lighting
and exposure, composition, and the logic of
editing. A survey on the historical and aes-
thetic development of the medium in order to
expand the students" sense of the possibilities
of media.
Prerequisite: FP 121, or by permission of the
department.
186
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
PF 210 B
Introduction to Film/Digital Video
3 credits. 6 hours
This course offers an introduction to the basic
practices of digital video editing and further
creative exploration of the art of mixing
images. Students perform timing, staging, and
blocking exercises to develop a feel for direc-
tion, experiment with more advanced film
strategies, learn to edit digital video, and
investigate relationships between sound and
image. A final project intergrates these explo-
rations creafively.
Prereqiiisile: PF2I0A or permission
of tiie department.
PF 211 A
Introduction to Photography I
3 credits. 6 hours
Introduction to basic concepts, processes, and
techniques of black-and-white photography,
including camera operafion. exposure, dark-
room procedures, and lighting, and the
controlled applications of these techniques.
Emphasis on the normative standard of photo-
graphic rendering.
Required for admission to all other Pholograpliy
eomses.
Prerequisite: FP 1 1 1 or FP 12!. or by permission of
the department.
PF211B
Introduction to Photography II
3 credits. 6 hours
While consolidating the student's control of
the medium, this course introduces the student
to a departure from normative photographic
rendering, techniques, and modes of expres-
sion and form. Strong emphasis on
manipulation of materials, including tradi-
tional photographic methods as well as an
introduction to computer manipulation.
Prerequisite: PF 211 A. PF209, orPF220, or by
presentation of portfolio.
PF 212 A
Introduction to Animation I
3 credits, 6 hours
Through a series of exercises concentrating on
timing and movement, the student acquires a
basic understanding of animation. Sound is
introduced for the final project, which consists
of a short, animated film shot on 16mm using
the Oxberry camera.
Prerequisites: FP 110 or FP 120.
PF 212 B
Introduction to Animation II
3 credits. 6 hours
The student is introduced to under-the-camera
animation using varied mediums such as
cutouts, sand, and painting-on-glass. All proj-
ects are shot on 16mm using the Bolex
camera. The final project may consist of any
medium selected by the student. A lab fee is
required for this course in order to offset the
cost of film stock and lab expenses.
Prerequisite: PF212A.Sophmorefilm majors are
exempt from prerequisite
PF216
Computer Animation I
3 credits. 6 hours
Introductory course in computer animation.
Emphasis is placed upon developing the stu-
dent's expertise with computer hardware,
software tools, and the video utilized in cre-
ating electronic images that move.
Prerequisite: FP 1 11 orFP 121, or by permission of
the department.
PF217
Color Concepts
3 credits. 6 hours
Introduction to methods of color shooting and
printing leading to an exploration of the tech-
nical and creative possibilities of color in
photography. Processes covered include
negative and transparency films, filtration,
chemical printing, and digital color controls
with PhotoShop.
Prerequisite: FP 121 or by portfolio review.
PF 218
Creative Sound
3 credits, 6 hours
Exploration of the creative use of sound as a
primary artistic medium. Topics include sound
and hearing, microphones and recording, tape
editing and manipulation, sound aesthetics
and production styles, voice and narration,
signal processing and sound manipulation,
and production formats. Through audio pro-
duction projects, students gain insights into
new ways of using sound, both on its own and
with other media.
Prerequisite: FP 121 or permission
of the department.
PF219
Character Layout and Design
3 credits. 6 hours
Designing characters, backgrounds, pans, and
creative camera moves for the animated scene.
Design styles and techniques are explored for
their potential in developing a wide range of
character types, traits, moods, personalities,
and attitudes. Students learn to lay out scenes
around character action, work with camera
fields, deal with issues of composition and
perspective, and create moods through layout.
A final project requires the development of an
"Animator's Bible." a production workbook
for the student's personal film portfolio.
Prerequisite: PF212A or by portfolio review.
PF220
Introduction to Documentary
Photography
3 credits. 6 hours
Introduces students to documentary photog-
raphy as it exists in the digital age. Topics
covered include the history of documentary
photography. 35mm camera operation, digital
camera operation, and the ethical, legal, and
strategic issues of contemporary journalism.
Students create documentary photographic
projects utilizing both traditional and digital
photographic techniques.
Prerequisite: FP 121 or MM 110.
PF 310 A/B
junior Cinema Production I, II
3 credits. 6 hours
Production techniques in actual filming situa-
tions, starting from the script through
budgeting, script breakdown, camera work,
and editing, to the finished release print.
Students are expected to execute specific
assignments in lighting, editing, and sound,
and are introduced to synch-sound procedures.
Prerequisites: PF210 BforPFSIOA.
PF310AforPF310B.
PF 311 A/B
Junior Photography Workshop
3 credits, 6 hours
Exploration of photographic imagery through
a series of problems aimed at personal vision
and creative growth.
Prerequisite: PF211 Bfor PF311A.
PFSUAforPFSIlB.
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
187
PF 312 A/B
Junior Animation Worlcsliop I, II
3 credits. 6 hours
A series of advanced drawn-animation exer-
cises culminating in a one-minute animated
film. A short, additional film is produced
during the second semester. Aspects of career
concerns in animation are introduced: grant
writing, resume's, budgets, and the process of
entering film festivals. The student also
receives detailed instruction on operating the
Oxberry camera.
Prerequisite: PF 2 12 BforPF 312 A.
PF312AforPF312B.
PF 313 A/B
Basic Pliotography Studio I, II
3 credits. 6 hours
Familiarizes the student with the tools, tech-
niques, and language of studio photography.
Entails extensive use of the 4" x 5" view
camera. The first semester deals exclusively
with black-and-white materials: sheet film
exposure, hand processing, and printing large-
format negatives. The second covers the
introduction of color transparency films and
strobe lighting.
Prereqiiisile: PF2II Bfor PF3I3A.
PF313AforPF3I3B.
PF315
Digital Photography Worl<stiop
3 credits, 6 hours
Concentrates on the producfion of creative
digital photography; students are encouraged
to experiment with new tools and techniques.
Film and print scanners. CD-ROM discs, and
digital cameras are used to produce images
that are critiqued on the basis of both technical
proficiency and aesthetic accomplishment.
Portfolios are printed on digital output
machines, silver-based photo materials, and
four-color offset. Frequent readings, lectures.
and site visits expand the ongoing studio
experience.
Prerequisite: PF 211 B. orPF217. or
by portfolio review.
PF 316
Computer Animation II
3 credits. 6 hours
Advanced course in computer animation,
which builds upon the student's personal
exploration of the electronic multimedia envi-
ronment established in PF 2 16. An integrafion
of digital audio, video, and two- and three-
dimensional software tools is emphasized.
Prerequisite: PF 216. PF322. or MM 222, orper-
mission of tlie department.
PF320
Narative Sound Production
3 credits, 6 hours
Students in this course explore creative sound
design in finished films with instruction and
practice in the use of sound recording equip-
ment, sound transfers, building and editing
mukiple synchronous sound tracks, and
preparing for the sound mix. Students work in
groups to create and complete a five-minute
sync sound film that incorporates the concept
of "sound design."
Prerequisite: PF 210 B.
PF 322
Experiments in
Advanced Digital Video
3 credits, 6 hours
An intermediate level course in digital audio
and video production. In the context of screen-
ings and readings drawn from the history of
experimental media, students will learn to use
various digital and optical strategies to
approach a variety of thematic issues. The
course is the venue for the production of short,
aesthetically energized works for a variety of
screening environments, and encourages col-
labortafion with Dance and Muisc majors.
Prerequisite: PF 2 10 B.
PF323
Selected Topics in Photography
3 credits, 6 hours
Study of one or more various media, methods,
or problems in still photography to be offered
according to the instructor's interests and stu-
dents' requests. Topics include: portraiture,
documentary photography, digital imaging,
color manipulation, photographic illustration,
and photo-based mixed media.
Prerequisite: PF 211 A or by portfolio review.
PF324
Film Forum: Selected Topics
3 credits, 6 hours
Concentrated study of a particular area of
film, video, or animation. Courses deal with
specific issues and have included: film theory;
seminars in sound; media, theater, and per-
formance; history of video art; and history of
animation.
Prerequisite: PF210 B or PF212 B. or permission
of the department.
PF325
Sound Design and Technology
3 credits, 6 hours
A hands-on exploration of various technical
materials and procedures that complement the
animator's production skills, including video
editing and post-production technologies,
analog and digital sound mixing and pro-
cessing, film editing and track preparation,
Oxberry Animation Stand use, and computer
image processing.
Prerequisite: PF 212 B.
PF 326
Advanced 3D Computer Animation
3 credits, 6 hours
An exploration of the aesthetic and technical
possibilities of using two-dimensional com-
positing and motion software and
three-dimensional modeling and animation
software as a means of creating character and
graphic animation.
Prerequisite: PF 316 or by permission
of department.
PF327
Moving Art: Animation Theory
and Production
3 credits, 6 hours
The aesthetics of animation and how the
design and structural elements of frame-by-
frame filmmaking differ from traditional
cinema. Analytical, theoretical, production,
and historical approaches will be brought to
bear in the inquiry.
Prerequisite: PF212 B or by permission
of department.
PF328
Selected Topics in Animation
3 credits, 6 hours
Exploration of media used in animation. The
content of each course offering will reflect the
professional interests of the instructor. Topics
include clay and puppet animation,
character layout and design, and narrative sto-
rytelling development.
Prerequisite: PF212 B, or permission
of the department.
PF330
Clay and Puppet Animation
3 credits, 6 hours
The technique of animating handmade three-
dimensional characters. Topics include puppet
construction (clay and mixed media), set
design and construction, and lighting. The his-
tory of puppet animation is also studied
through film screenings and lectures, with a
special emphasis on European filmmakers and
nonverbal storytelling.
Prerequisite: PF212A.
188
Ttie University of ttie An.s Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
PF331
Image and Performance
3 credits, 6 hours
For artists and performers of all disciplines.
An intensive cross-disciplinary workshop in
which the students create their own short per-
formance works using fusions of video,
animation, dance, motion, and sound to
explore the interactions between visual media
and the performing arts.
Prerequisite: Sophomore standing in any
major department.
PF332
Video and Animation Technology
3 credits, 6 hours
This course will introduce students to princi-
ples of animation and a variety of means of
recording and manipulating media and the
conceptual possibilities available through
these means. The course will examine the
technical and aesthetic principles of off-line
video post-production, sound processing and
mixing, and non-linear digital editing.
Prerequisite: Multimedia majors or permission of
the instructor
PF 410 A/B
Senior Cinema Production I, II
3 credits, 6 hours
Each student produces an independent
thesis film.
Prerequisite: PF 310 B for PF410 A.
PF410AforPF4I0B.
PF 411 A/B
Senior Photography Wori«hop
3 credits. 6 hours
Students work on long-term individual proj-
ects or shorter-term problems to develop
technical, aesthetic, and conceptual mastery of
the medium. The course culminates in a group
thesis exhibition and production of an
individual portfolio.
Prerequisite: PF 31 1 B. orPF313 Bfor
PF41IA.PF411AforPF41IB.
PF 412 A/B
Senior Animation Wori^shop
3 credits, 6 hours
Directed independent production of a short
film project in an idiom of the student's
choosing; additional production of a VHS
video portfolio composed of several short ani-
mated sequences that each student will be able
to use when applying for work as either a free-
lance animator or for employment with an
animation company.
Prerequisite: PF 312 Bfor PF412 A.
PF412AforPF412B.
PF 413
Professional Practices
3 credits. 3 hours
Study of the practice of professional photog-
raphy, with attention to various career
opportunities, portfolio presentation, business
practices, professional ethics, photographic
law, and personal objectives. A variety of pro-
fessional guests visit the course.
Prerequisite: PF311 A orPF313A.
PF415 A
Critical Issues in Photography
3 credits, 6 hours
Concentrated study of the concepts of photo-
graphic criticism. Extensive reading, writing,
and discussion of contemporary photographic
hterature, exhibitions, and trends is required.
The course is an in-depth examination of the
photographic medium from a historical and
critical viewpoint. The course requires field
trips to galleries and museums, and attendance
at visiting lecturer events to place current
trends in photography in a critical context.
Prerequisite: PF311A or permission of the
department.
PF415 B
Senior Photography Seminar
3 credits, 6 hours
Analysis and study of contemporary photo-
graphic practices and trends. Extensive
reading, writing, and discussion with attention
to current showings and exhibitions is
required. The course requires field trips to gal-
leries and museums, and attendance at visiting
lecturer events to place current trends in pho-
tography in a larger historical and critical
context, and to assist students in placing their
own work within the canon of photographic
expression.
Prerequisite: PF415A or permission of the
department.
PF423
Professional Practices
in Film/Digital Video
3 credits, 6 hours
A series of mini seminars in various aspects of
professional film and video production. Topics
to be addressed include: studio operations,
advanced lighting, advanced sound recording,
sound mixing, and gaffer and grip responsibil-
ities. Independent producers will be brought in
to conduct workshops on topics of interest.
This course supplements, but does not replace,
Media Arts required courses.
Prerequisite: PF 3 10 A orperniission of the
department.
PF424
Time: A Multidisciplinary Seminar
3 credits. 3 hours
The concept of time considered from a multi-
disciplinary perspective, drawing on readings
in philosophy, literature, psychology, soci-
ology, and film theory. Relevant works in film
and video are screened. Students are respon-
sible for a final term paper that interrelates
two or more of the readings with one of the
screened works.
Prerequisite: PF310B or PF312 B.
PF499
Internship
3 credits. 90 hours/semester
Internship program in which the student is
placed in one of several professional situa-
tions. Placements in photography may include
assisting in professional studios, practice in
biomedical photography laboratories, and
curatorial positions in galleries, among others.
Placements in film and animation are spon-
sored by local independent production houses
and television stations, design firms, and free-
lance animation artists: students of film may
assist in location shooting, set production,
editing, casting and scripting, and a myriad of
other practical tasks.
Prerequisite: PF 211 B (for Plwto internsliips) ;
orPF 210 B (for FUmlVideo internships):
orPF212 B (forAnimation internships).
Open to Media Arts majors only.
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
189
Printmaking/
Book Arts
All Printmakiiig/Book Arts classes are
open on a studio elective basis if the pre-
requisites are met and space is available.
PR 102
Freshman Screenprinting
1.5 credits, 3 hours
An introduction and investigation of various
stencil methods, based on three primary types
of screen stencils-cut paper, blockout/resist,
and photo emulsion, using water-based inks
on both paper and fabric. Emphasis is placed
on the acquisition of personal expression and
technical skills, within the capabilities of
screenprinted opaque and transparent colors,
and the use of editions in collaborative class
image exchange. Additionally, the various
media unique to printmaking are shown and
discussed, to introduce the beginning student
to the wide possibilities of the expression
inherent in printmaking.
PR 103
Freshman Etching
1 .5 credits, 3 hours
This printmaking course will introduce the
hands-on processes used on metal plates to
create images with line, tone, and texture.
Color and monochromatic idea development
is encouraged in this print medium that is a
favorite of historic and contemporary artists. A
class portfolio of prints will be exchanged by
the participants.
PR 201
Relief/ Monotype
3 credits, 6 hours
Introduction to the graphic and expressive
qualities of woodcut, linoleum, and collograph
processes printed in monochrome and color
Monoprinting ideas from direct drawing and
painting on plexiglass and metal plate are
also explored. ,
PR 202
Screenprinting
1.5 credits, 3 hours
Introduction and investigation of stencil
methods in screenprinting with water-based
inks. Idea development and acquisition of
visual skills in expression in color, line, and
form through drawn, photographic, or com-
puter-generated stencil processes.
PR 204
Screenprinting/Etching
3 credits. 6 hours
The graphic qualities of expression in screen-
printing and etching/intaglio are presented
through historic and contemporary examples
and demonstration of the methods, which
convey ideas in these two media. Various
stencil processes from direct-drawn to photo-
graphic and computer-generated are explored
in screenprinting with water-based opaque and
transparent inks. Handwork on the metal plate
includes drawn drypoint. etching, and tonal
processes. Emphasis is placed on the under-
standing of the qualities of these methods and
development of personal ideas through their
combination.
PR 211
Etching/Monotype
1.5 credits, 3 hours
Individual expression with the graphic quali-
ties of etched and directly drawn ideas created
on the metal plate by hand or acid etching in
color and monochrome. Processes also
include printing from drawing and painting
directly on plexiglass and metal plate with oil
and water-based materials.
PR 222
Non-Silver Processes
1.5 or 3 credits. 3 or 6 hours
Students are introduced to the basic tech-
niques of non-silver by building images in
color with layers of brushed-on, light-sensitive
emulsion. Light-resists can range from pho-
togram objects to drawings and paintings to
film or paper negatives. Processes covered are
VanDyke brown, cyanotype, gum bichromate,
and palladium printing.
PR 223
Bool<binding Methods
1.5 credits, 3 hours
A workshop class familiarizing the student
with the characteristics and handling qualities
of materials used in various book structures.
Some of the structures covered include pam-
phlet binding, multi-signature books,
clamshell boxes, portfolios, accordion struc-
tures, and oriental binding. Emphasis will be
placed upon both the use of archivally sound
materials and the use of these structures as
vehicles for the students' creative expression.
PR 224
Bool< Arts: Structures
1 .5 credits, 3 hours
Historical book forms serve as models and as
departure points for innovative new work.
Students are made familiar with traditional
binding techniques, encouraged to explore
new applications, and to experiment by com-
bining images and text into unique book
structures. Some of the structures presented
are signature binding. Japanese binding,
accordion structure, pop-up structures, and
tunnel books.
May also serve as a follow-up course for
students who have completed PR 223
Bookbinding Methods.
PR 300
Lithography
3 credits, 6 hours
All of the basic techniques of drawing, image
making, and printing that are necessary to pro-
duce hand-pulled black-and-white lithographs
from lithographic stones and plates will be
experienced. An emphasis will be placed on
visual expression and development of ideas
through group discussions and critiques.
PR 301
Printmal<ing Workshop
1.5 credits. 3 hours
A continuation of the development of skills
in all media such as relief, intaglio, and
screenprinting by concentrating on one or a
combination of them, including non-print-
making methods. Investigation of the
combination of media, including three-dimen-
sional forms and unorthodox uses of materials
and techniques, with an emphasis on
integration.
Pmequisites: PR 201 and PR 204.
PR 306
Print Study Seminar I
1.5 credits, 3 hours, alternate weeks
Students meet at the Philadelphia Museum of
Art Print Study Room to discuss and study
original prints and rare books from the
museum collection. Masters of the 15th
through the 18th centuries are introduced and
researched. Printmaking processes that par-
allel the material covered are demonstrated
and practiced in the printmaking studios.
190
Tlie University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
PR 307
Book Arts: Concept and Structure
3 credits, 6 hours
An opportunity to explore the integration of
type and rehef image in unique and editioned
book structures. Hands-on experience in
dealing with composition (metal) type and
computer typesetting is on an intermediate
level. Methods of relief printing are explored
and cultivated. Wood engraving, pho-
topolymer relief, color reduction printing, and
related traditional and contemporary methods
of multiple image making are pursued. Special
emphasis on development of a personal visual
language.
PR 308
Advanced Lithography Workshop
3 credits, 6 hours
Opportunity for further investigation and
development of lithographic image making,
including photographic techniques and multi-
color printing. Editioned prints of greater
scope and complexity are undertaken, consis-
tent with the student's interest and experience.
Prerequisite: PR 300.
PR 322
Advanced Non-Silver Processes
1.5 or 3 credits, 3 or 6 hours
Continued development of image and skills in
combinations of non-silver processes.
Prerequisite: PR 222.
PR 326
Introduction to Offset Lithography
1 .5 or 3 credits, 3 or 6 hours
Develops skills in image preparation and
printing techniques using offset lithography.
An emphasis placed on personal imagery.
Hand-drawn, photographic, and digital
methods of image making are investigated.
PR 327
Advanced Offset Lithography
1 .5 or 3 credits, 3 or 6 hours
A continued investigation of offset Uthography.
Prerequisite: PR 326.
PR 333
Attitudes and Strategies:
Printmaking
3 credits, 6 hours
While the first semester of this course concen-
trates on general issues of contemporary
artists" practice, it continues in the second
semester with a focus on the printmaker's
world. The student creates many prints
exploring a variety of printmaking methods.
Drawings to clarify the direction that a pos-
sible later series of prints might take are
another expectation, as well as completed
drawing projects. Students should take at least
one area of printmaking and develop technical
skills beyond elementary proficiency. All three
mediums: relief, intaglio, and planographic
are to be used in making prints this semester
Combining methods, particulariy for the addi-
tion of color, is urged.
PR 400
Advanced Workshop
3 credits, 6 hours
Development of ideas, images, and techniques
while establishing direcfion and personal orig-
inal expression. The workshop atmosphere
permits a comfortable handling of all proce-
dures and printmaking processes. Students are
encouraged to be involved with adjacent
expressive means such as drawing; painting,
sculpture, photography, and crafts.
Prerequisites: PR 201. PR 204. PR 300,
and FA 333 A.
PR 406
Print Study Seminar II
1.5 credits, 3 hours, alternate weeks
The historical and conceptual context of
prints, portfolios, and book arts of the 19th
and 20th centuries is studied at the
Philadelphia Museum of Art. Written and
printed expression of the ideas and processes
involved are integrated into this course of
study.
PR 412
Digital Printmaking
3 credits, 6 hours
Working in screenprinting, etching, relief, or
lithography, students will bring digital
imagery into the printmaking process.
Emphasis is on the intergration of idea,
process, and the incorporation of computer-
generated material. Investigation will continue
into printmaking processes on an advanced
hands-on level in terms of technical under-
standing and the development of imagery.
Prerequisite: Introductory class in one or more
printmaking processes.
PR 420
Thesis Workshop
3 credits, 6 hours
Develops a body of work in preparation for
portfolio and exhibition presentation. An
emphasis is placed on the development of
ideas and content of each student's work sup-
ported by a series of individual and group
critiques by faculty and visiting artists. The
student is expected to participate in group
exhibitions as well as a solo exhibition, and to
present a professional portfolio of work.
Prerequisites: PR 201, PR 204, PR 300,
and FA 333 A.
PR 421
Collaborative Printmaking
1 .5 or 3 credits, on tutorial basis, 3 or 6 hours
Involvement in the business, technology, and
experience of prindng limited editions for fac-
ulty, student, or professional artists by guiding
the artist in preparation of the idea, then
proofing and printing the edition. Advanced
students only; demonstration of mark-making
and editioning abilifies.
PR 425
Book Production
1 .5 or 3 credits, 3 or 6 hours
The development and production of a printed
book or portfolio of works: design and format-
ting of a publicaUon including investigation of
sequence, page design, and binding possibili-
ties; and hands-on experience in the
preparation of images for press production,
pre-press techniques, and assisfing the Master
Printer in the printing. All work is produced in
the Borowsky Center for Publication Arts, the
University's state-of-the-art offset lithography
facility. Smdents may choose to collaborate on
projects or work independently.
Prerequisite: Recommendation from the partici-
pant 's major department chair is required.
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
191
M FA Book Arts/
Printmaking
PR500
Graduate Papermaking
3 credits, 6 hours
Graduate Papermaking is an advanced studio
course based on the in-depth involvement with
handmade paper as a creative artistic medium.
Digital slide lectures and demonstrations on
Western and Japanese pulp preparation, sheet
formation, pressed and drying techniques will
be presented. Students will create papers and
images using a variety of handmade pulps and
fibers. Book structures unique to the hand-
made paper process and the creation of unique
papers specifically for prints and books will
be presented. Students will engage in indi-
vidual projects utilizing this exciting medium
to enhance their artistic development as well
as broaden and enrich their educational goals.
PR 600 A
Colloquium: Text and Image
1 .5 credits, 3 hours
An understanding of language and verbal con-
structs enables the individual to explore the
relationship between text and imagery.
Emphasis is placed on the individual's per-
sonal vision throughout the program's course
of study.
PR 600 B
Colloquium: History of the Book
1.5 credits, 3 hours
Hands-on study of rare books and manuscripts
from antiquity to the present, with discussions
dealing with their structural, historical, and
artistic significance. The class meets at the
Library Company of Philadelphia, with field
trips to local special collecdons.
Prerequisite: PR 600 A.
PR 610 A/B
Book Arts Studio: Color/Mark
3 credits, 6 hours
Provides the student with an opportunity to
explore a broad range of image-making
approaches. Emphasis on mark-making with a
number of instruments and media, the use of
color as a structural basis for composition,
and the compositional and expressive use of
letter forms.
PR 612 A/B
Book Arts Studio
A 3-4.5 credits, 9 hours
B 3 credits, 6 hours
A series of studio courses exploring concep-
tual concerns intrinsic to the creation of a
book. The student learns to incorporate calli-
graphic, handset, or computer-generated
lettert'orms with images in unique and edi-
tioned books. Emphasis on proficiency in
process and the creation of a personal visual
language. Focus on achieving a strong founda-
tion in technical and conceptual skills.
Frequent faculty and visiting artist critiques
encourage an evolution in ideas and imagery.
PR 611
Non-Toxic Printmaking Methods
3 credits, 6 hours
A range of printmaking media using non-toxic
processes and materials. Designed for grad-
uate students who are experienced artists with
an understanding of their personal imagery
and approach to visual expression, but who
are not necessarily proficient printmakers.
Students will be offered a number of solutions
to working in the studio, solvent- and acid-
free. Topics covered will include intaglio
(using water process photographic plates),
drypoint, relief, collograph, monotype, and
screenprinting.
PR 623 A/B
Bookbinding
1 .5 credits, 3 hours
Basic book structures are explored in the first
semester with emphasis on sound conserva-
tion techniques and good craftsmanship. In the
second semester historic book structures
serve as models and departure points for inno-
vative bindings.
PR 626
Offset Lithography
1.5-3 credits, 3-6 hours
Oft'ers the student hands-on experience with
offset lithography as an artist's medium. The
primary focus is on the creation of personal
imagery (photographic and/or hand-drawn)
for prints and books. The course enables stu-
dents to take advantage of state-of-the-art
production methods and develop skills in pho-
tomechanical processes, platemaking, and
color printing.
PR 700 A/B
Colloquium: Professional Practices
1.5 credits, 3 hours, alternate weeks
Professional practices and issues related to the
fields of printmaking, book, and publication
arts are explored through discussions, lectures,
and field trips in the first semester. In the
second semester, the focus is on the comple-
tion of the individual's written thesis
requirements. Each thesis candidate prepares a
resume', an artist's statement, and presents a
slide lecture to be placed on record in the
University Library.
Prerequisite: PR 600 B.
PR 710 A/B
M FA Thesis Studio
3-6 credits, 6- 12 hours
A continuation of book and printmaking proj-
ects is combined with related visual concerns
in preparation for the required MFA Thesis
Exhibition to be presented during the final
semester. The MFA candidate develops an
individual course of study and defines the
projects in a written contract. A thesis com-
mittee to advise the student through the thesis
exhibition process is chosen during the fall
semester. The evolution of ideas and imagery
is encouraged through frequent faculty and
visiting artist critiques.
Prerequisite: PR 610 B.
PR 711 A/B
MFA Thesis Studio:
Thesis Exhibition
3 credits, 6 hours
PR 723 A/B
Bookbinding
1 .5 credits, 3 hours
Continued investigation of the book structure
at an advanced technical level. Individual
attention to developing creative solutions to
support book content will start in the first
semester. Through critiques and individual
instruction, the final semester is devoted to
developing structures that support thesis work.
Prerequisite: PR 623 B.
192
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Painting/Drawing
PTIOI
Freshman Painting
1.5 credits. 3 hours
Primarily an introduction to the decisions,
general methods, and problems of painting.
Students are introduced to oil painting with
both still life and figurative subject matter
Technical instruction related to the broad
image possibilities in painting. Students work
from setups, models, and landscapes.
PT 124
Freshman Drawing
1.5 credits, 3 hours
Designed to increase the beginning student's
awareness of drawing as an expressive picto-
rial form. It is meant to enrich rather than
duplicate the Foundation Drawing experience.
Included in the course of study is an investiga-
tive perceiving and representing of objects and
scenes, mark-making as a conveyor of feel-
ings, sensations, and ideas, and compositional
and stylistic strategies that present meaning.
The emphasis is always on the awareness of
options for expression rather than on pre-
scribed systems of drawing.
PT 202 A/B
Sophomore Painting
3 credits, 6 hours
Studio work introduces the student to the
domain of painting through projects that cover
not only the basic elements of form, color, and
technique, but also the basic conceptual chal-
lenges unique to painting. Students are
exposed to the origins and purposes of
painting and the range of possibilities offered
by both traditional and contemporary
approaches.
PT 211
Painting Studio
1 .5 credits, 3 hours
A general study of painting subjects, such as
the still life, landscape, the city, and the
human figure and its environs. This course
often includes a subtitle, such as Figure in the
Landscape, which defines the thematic basis
for the studio projects,
PT 213
Anatomy and the Figure
1.5 credits, 3 hours
An opportunity to investigate the basic visual
structure of the human figure, both skeletal
and muscular.
PT 219
Watercolor
1.5 credits. 3 hours .
A course in which the preferred medium is
transparent watercolor, the particular charac-
teristics of which are explored. Both
perceptual and non-perceptual approaches
introduced.
PT225
Figure Drawing
1 .5 or 3 credits. 3 or 6 hours
Students work from the clothed and nude
model and are introduced to the range of
approaches relevant to the act of direct obser-
vation. This course encourages the students to
clarify what they are looking for when they
are drawing the human body. Proportion,
anatomy, psychology, posture, kinetics,
weight, volume, tactility, and envu'onment are
a few of the considerations that have an
impact on the diverse ways in which figure
drawings can be made.
PT 226
Abstract Drawing
3 credits, 6 hours
An assignment/cntique format, which exam-
ines the nature of abstraction in the context of
drawing disciplines. Opdons in media, tools,
methods, and formats are considered in rela-
tion to the purposes of a given project. In
general, abstraction calls for an appreciation
of the intrinsic properties of the materials used
in a work, the formal characteristics of tool-
markings, and the significance of pictorial
structures.
PT 227
Figure Painting
3 credits, 6 hours
Painting projects that develop awareness of
the many issues to be considered in creating
forms that represent the human being.
Working from live models as well as from
other visual sources, including those of pho-
tography and fine-art masterworks, students
investigate the variety of conceptual and sty-
listic possibilities in depicting the human
figure. Concerns for gesture, weight, color,
proportion, scale, apparel, portraiture, space
and light, composition and narration, can all
be a part of the circumstances in which the
human figure is the center of interest.
PT233
Landscape Painting
3 credits, 6 hours
Painting the traditional subjects of the land-
scape: land, city and country, water and sky,
light and air. An examination of how these
subjects can be seen and interpreted.
PT236
Figure Composition
1 .5 or 3 credits, 3 or 6 hours
A drawing course emphasizing the develop-
ment of images using multiple figure
arrangements. Assignments are designed to
foster awareness of the significance of poses
and groupings relative to formal design
virtues, narrative, and symbolism.
PT237
Representational Painting
3 credits, 6 hours
A studio course addressing traditional and
contemporary concepts and approaches to rep-
resentational images. Special emphasis is
placed on the relation between content and
form. Exploration in color, space, texture,
shape, composition, and style will be evalu-
ated in the context of intention, aspects of
recognition, and precedent. Paintings will be
generated out of direct observation of nature
and human models as well as from the stu-
dents" own resources. Projects may focus on
contemporary prototypes (paintings since
1945), specific domains such as American
Portraiture, or paradigms from the entire lin-
eage of East/West traditions of
representational art.
PT 238
Abstract Painting
3 credits, 6 hours
The genesis of abstraction can be nature, idea,
or emofion. An abstract paindng is one in
which the pictorial form is primarily a product
of invention and imagination. It may or may
not reflect a reality outside itself. Assignments
investigate a range of concepts, sources, and
procedures.
PT264
Mixed Media Drawing and Painting
3 credits, 6 hours
A diversity of drawing and painting media and
methods, including collage and construction,
are explored, discovered, invented, and inter-
mixed in order to develop a versatile
repertoire of studio skills.
PT269
Collage: The Constructed Image
3 credits, 6 hours
Studio projects are assigned that promote the
development of images through the aggrega-
fion of fragments. Collage as a principle of
construction re-examines compositional
notions of unity and harmony and can involve
the interaction of diverse and incongruous
materials, methods, styles, and/or images.
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 200S/2004
193
PT 302 A/B
Junior Painting
3 credits. 6 hours
Students maintain designated spaces in the
Junior Studio where they can develop a more
professional working routine. They are
expected to show increasing personal initiative
and direction. Regular critiques on both an
individual and group basis connect the student
to the values of the past and the present, stim-
ulate interest in the major questions of our
time, and provide resources for progress. This
course embraces plurality of ideas about
painting and, linked with the goals of FA 333.
advocates a spirit of experimentation and
research.
PT 334
Junior Drawing
3 credits. 6 hours
An advanced studio in drawing extending
knowledge, experience, and authority in
drawing as a form-making act in the painting
process and as a form of expression in its own
right. Students will be guided through various
aspects of the uses of pictorial elements (hne,
tonality, surface, etc.) in the making of images
that express content and meaning. References
to contemporary and historical sources will be
investigated.
PT 340
Color Studies
1.5 credits, 3 hours
Studio group projects and independent proj-
ects consider the puiposes and effects of color
organization, color perceptions, and color
theory. Color is approached as emotive, sym-
bolic, descriptive, and structural.
Prerequisites: Junior status.
PT360
Junior Seminar
1 .5 credits, 3 hours
A discussion format aimed at investigating
and understanding the content of, the motiva-
tions for, and the influences on contemporary
painting. Emphasis is on exploring the theo-
ries, questions, and issues that create the
intellectual context for contemporary artists.
Students will be given reading assignments as
preparation for the seminar dialogue. Selected
texts will include artists' documents, critical
writings, and classic essays covering such
areas as aesthetic principles, political and cul-
tural realities, and psychological perspectives.
Class sessions will emphasize group discus-
sions based on viewing slides and other
appropriate visual material, reading assign-
ments, and various written and oral forms of
student presentations.
Prerequisite: Junior status.
PT 402 A
Senior Painting
4.5 credits, 9 hours
Promotes the individual's development of
identity as a painter. It simulates the studio-
based condition that the painter is likely to
maintain as a professional artist. The painter is
the architect of the place where he or she will
initiate short- or long-term projects as needed.
Within this context, the senior painting major
consolidates and develops issues that have
emerged from coursework and study of prior
and contemporary art.
One-on-one weekly critiques from faculty,
monthly senior group critique, and periodic
critiques from visiting artists ensure the stu-
dent's diverse responses to recently developed
work. The senior painting faculty may assign
specific projects if the student's initiative
requires broadening or focus.
Prerequisites: PT 302 B ami FA Hi B.
PT 402 B
Senior Painting
6 credits. 1 2 hours
Continuing the structure of PT 402 A. the
painting major formulates a senior thesis
project. Working with senior faculty who read
and critique early drafts, the student develops
a formal, written thesis and a body of artwork
to be presented at the end of the term to a
senior thesis panel. This panel is comprised of
studio faculty, liberal arts faculty, and student
peers.
IN 449
Crafts/Fine Arts Internship
3 credits^ 90 hours/semester
Conditions for enrollment: Must be enrolled
as a junior or senior in a BS or BFA program;
must have a 2.5 cumulative GPA; and cannot
enroll for more than 18 credits, including
those earned from the Internship during that
semester.
Open to Crafts and Fine Arts majors only.
MFA in Painting
Each summer session begins with a
detailed review of the student 's previous
work, assessing progress, addressing
problems, and planning the summer's
work. Ongoing individual meetings with
the studio mentor are augmented by
group critiques at the beginning, middle,
and end of the summer session and by
occasional group or individual critiques
with visiting artists. Each summer's
course concludes with planning for work
to be continued on an independent study
basis during the academic year.
Independent studio work is assessed at
weekend critiques held at periodic inter-
vals and at the end of the fall and spring \
semesters.
The following courses are open to students in
the summer MFA program only.
PT610
IVlajor Studio I
6 credits. 10 hours
Evaluation of the student's artistic involve-
ment, projecting and testing options for the
direction of the student's graduate work.
Open to SUMFA students only. '
PT611
Major Studio II
6 credits, 10 hours
Further exploration of the options, with
increased awareness of theoretical issues and
personal vision. Greater focus in the student's
work, with a view to completing the repertoire
of skills and expression in the medium needed
to undertake a thesis project.
Prerequisite: PT6I0.
Open to SUMFA sttidents only
PT 710
Major Studio III
6 credits, 10 hours
Planning and initiation of a sustained body of
mature work to be presented in a thesis exhibi-
tion during the following summer.
Prerequisite: PT 61 1.
Open to SUMFA sludents only
See complete course listing
under Master of Fine Arts.
194
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Sculpture
All Sculpture classes are open on a studio
elective basis if prerequisites are met and
space is available.
SC 101
Freshman Sculpture
1.5 credits, 3 hours
An introduction to sculptural thinking and
methods using a variety of materials and
processes, including modeling and fabrication.
Form-making options are undertaken that are
especially suited to acquaint beginning stu-
dents with the diversity of sculptural activity.
SC 201, SC 202
Sculpture I
3 credits, 6 hours
Emphasizes the fundamental and formal
aspects of sculpture. Projects are assigned to
help the student experience and understand the
unique expressive values of mass, space,
plane, line, and texture, along with such visual
phenomena as balance, rhythm, scale, move-
ment, and transformation. Introduces the
student to a variety of materials and tech-
niques. Assigned projects, group critiques, and
slide lectures are standard parts of this course.
SC 220 A/B
Molding and Casting
1.5 credits, 3 hours
Covers processes and techniques utilizing
plaster, rubber, plastics, clays, and wax for
making hard and flexible molds and for
casting sculpture in durable materials.
Provides a thorough foundation in foundry
practices, including wax preparation,
investing, pouring bronze or aluminum,
chasing, finishing, and patinating finished
metal casts.
May be repeated for credit.
SC 241, SC 242
Introduction to Sculpture Projects
3 credits, 6 hours
An open studio oriented toward helping the
development of individual initiative. How
ideas are transformed into sculptural state-
ments through aesthetic reasoning and the
internal logic of a sculpture's color, material,
and physical construction.
SC251
Sculpture since 1945
1.5 credits, 1.5 hours
Lectures, discussions, projects concerning
various artists, movements, concepts, philoso-
phies, and critical theories influencing
contemporary sculpture, focusing on the cur-
rents since 1945.
SC 260 A/B
Structure of the Figure
3 credits, 6 hours
Anatomical and morphological analysis of
male and female bodies for artists through a
three-dimensional constructional method.
Proportions, anatomic structure, surface
topology, morphological variation, and the
body in movement are covered. Directed
toward two-dimensional artists as well as
sculptors. The means by which the body's
salient features can be recognized from any
viewpoint in any pose is stressed.
SC321
Carving
1 .5 credits, 3 hours
Introduces the student to stone carving, one of
the basic methods of forming sculpture.
Students learn to prepare, maintain, and use
the tools of the carver. They are introduced to
the characteristics of suitable carving mate-
rials. Emphasis on the exploration of the
formal and expressive potential of carved
stone.
May be repeated for credit .
SC333
Attitudes and Strategies: Sculpture
3 credits, 6 hours
A studio criticism course designed to increase
awareness of tlie attitudes and strategies
embodied in artworks. Concepts such as ide-
alism, naturalism, expressionism, modernism,
and post modernism are explored in light of
their implication for form-making methods
and principles. Lectures, studio projects, and
group critiques create a forum for an emphasis
on sculpture.
SC 401, SC 402 . '
Sculpture III
3 credits, 6 hours
Terms like site-specific, monumental, genre,
narrative, emblematic, environmental, etc.,
reflect the cluster of types of sculptural
imagery. This studio course is concerned with
the ideational and technical issues raised by
various types of sculptural imagery that are
assigned in turn. The relationship that sculp-
tures have with the context they exist in and
the purpose they serve is stressed.
Prerequisite: SC 202.
SC 421
Metals
1.5 credits, 3 hours
Forming metal has contributed much to the his-
tory of sculpture, particularly in the present,
where the idiom has become as familiar as
carving and modeling. Concurrently offering
both basic and advanced technical instruction
in welding and forging, using both ferrous and
non-ferrous metals, this course is concerned
with both the technical and aesthetic aspects of
metal sculpture.
May be repeated for credit.
SC 431, SC 432
Advanced Figure Modeling
3 credits, 6 hours
Provides an atelier to continue figure mod-
eling on increasingly advanced levels, and a
context to help formulate a personal figurative
sculptural idiom. Works are sculpted at var-
ious scales and independent projects are
undertaken in consultation with the faculty.
Critiques involving the meaning and sculp-
tural significance of the works are an integral
part of the ongoing class activity.
Prerequisites: FA 223 B or by permission.
May be repeated for credit.
SC433
Projects in Figure Modeling
3 credits. 6 hours
Allows the student to move beyond modeling
the figure as an academic study. Exploration
using the figure in expressive contexts is
emphasized.
Prerequisites: SC 202 and FA 223.
May be repeated for credit.
SC 441, SC 442
Advanced Projects
3 credits, 6 hours
Provides a studio context where maturing,
self-initiated areas of concentradon in sculp-
ture can be developed to fruition on an
advanced level. Whatever the direction, a crit-
ical emphasis is placed through both open and
devised assignments on how materials and
forms compatible to personal statements are
found.
Prerequisites: SC 241 and SC 242, or by permission.
May be repeated for credit.
IN 449
Crafts/ Fine Arts Internship
3 credits, 90 hours/semester
Conditions for enrollment: Must be enrolled as
a junior or senior in a BS or BFA program: must
have a 2.5 cumulative GPA; and cannot enroll
for more than 18 credits, including those earned
from the Internship during that semester.
Open to Crafts and Fine Arts majors only
The University of the Ans Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
195
MFA in Sculpture
Each summer session begins with a
detailed review of the student's previous
work, assessing progress, addressing
issues, and planning the summer's work.
Ongoing individual meetings with the
studio mentor are augmented by group
critiques at the beginning, middle, and
end of the summer session and by occa-
sional group or individual critiques with
visiting artists. Each summer's course
concludes with planning for work to be
continued on an independent study basis
during the academic year Independent
studio work is assessed at weekend cri-
tiques held at periodic intervals and at
the end of the fall and spring semesters.
The following courses are open to students in
the summer MFA program only,
SC 610
Major Studio I
6 credits, 10 hours
Evaluation of the student's artistic involve-
ment, projecting and testing options for the
direction of the student's graduate work.
Open to SUMFA students only.
SC611
Major Studio II
6 credits, 10 hours
Further exploration of the options, with
increased awareness of theoretical issues and
personal vision. Greater focus in the student's
work, with a view to completing the repertoire
of skills and expression in the medium needed
to undertake a thesis project.
Prerequisite: SC 610.
Open to SUMFA students only
SC 710
Major Studio III
6 credits, 10 hours
Planning and initiation of a sustained body of
mature work to be presented in a thesis exhibi-
tion during the following summer.
Prerequisite: SC 61 1.
Open to SUMFA students only
See complete course listing under
Master of Fine Arts.
Theater Arts
TH 100 A/B
Acting for Non-Majors I, II
1 credit, 1.5 hours
Introduces the non-actor to improvisation,
character development, and the basic idea of
action and objective in performance. The first
four weeks acclimate the new actor to being
expressive in a group using body and voice
through improvisation, theater games, and
movement; breathing and relaxation tech-
niques are also taught. The students are
introduced to script analysis, and asked to
write and develop monologues and create dra-
matic characters for performance. Grading is
based on class participation and progress with
the work on monologues.
TH 101
Neutral Mask
1 credit, 1 .5 hours
A sequence of instruction in mask/movement
techniques designed to remove all pedestrian
movement from the actor, thereby developing
the student actor's movement vocabulary.
Develops students' awareness of their own
personal movement habits, and their ability to
drop their habits in order to achieve neutral
body movement. Exercises are designed to
achieve neutral body by beginning with
simple actions, and progressing to object iden-
tification.
Prerequisite: TH 105 A.
TH 103 A/B
Acting Studio I, II
3 credits, 6 hours
Introductory studio focusing on the fundamen-
tals of acting, basic skills for stage
communication, voice and movement exer-
cises, centering techniques, and exercises
designed to increase physical and emotional
stamina, identify and strengthen poor tech-
nique, develop focus and concentradon, and
introduce the student to the demands of the
theater. In the process of demystifying the
craft, the student discovers the energy, power,
and vulnerability of .self
Prerequisite: Permission of thefaeulty
TH 103 L
Crew
Credits, hours by assignment
Four different production assignments for
School of Theater productions. Continues the
classroom instruction providing an increased
understanding of Technical Production.
Open to Theater majors only.
TH 105 A ^
Stage Combat I
2 credits. 3 hours
The integration of aggressive acting intent and I
safe combat technique using both the unarmed !
body and the knife.
Prerequisite: Permission of the instructor. !
Corequisite: THI03A. '
TH 105 B ■
Stage Combat II j
2 credits, 3 hours
The integration of aggressive acting intent ;
and safe combat technique using a saber or
single rapier. '
Prerequisite: TH 105A or permission of the j
instructor '
TH 109 A/B
Voice and Speech for Actors I, II
2 credits. 3 hours
Linklater exercises are the basis of a course
designed to help the student find his/her "nat-
ural voice," and to integrate body, breathing, '
voice, thought, and feeling into expression
through speech. The student is given a prac-
fical understanding of the voice and how it i
works. Tensions that inhibit primary impulses j
are uncovered and dismantled. The function of ,
the articulators is studied and they are exam- j
ined for blocks and exercised for release. i
Prerequisite: Permission of thefaeulty '
TH 111 ;
Makeup
1 credit, 1 .5 hours ]
Focuses on cosmetic application combined ]
with thorough exploration of the relationship '.
of appearance to character. The course empha- '
sizes the total visual impact of the character '
on the audience, discussing in depth the con- ',
tribution of props and costume to the overall _'
effect. The student is given clear directions on j
the basic techniques, including methods and j
materials for all types of stage makeup, period J
makeup, fantasy, and the use of three-dimen-
sional makeup and prosthetic makeup. i!
Prerequisite: TH 103 L :
TH 113 j
Encounters With Theater Arts j
3 credits, 3 hours j
Designed to foster students' intellectual ^
engagement with drama and theatre, from ''
classical to contemporary, by introducing j
them to the basic terminology and method- -;
ology used in understanding plays and ;
performances. A range of critical perspectives
are applied to a variety of plays from different ,
periods and places: additionally, a number of ;
contexts for theatre study are introduced, i
including theatre history and production
elements.
196
The University of the Ans Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
TH 114
Mask Characterization
1 credit. 3 hours
Introductory course in character development
focuses on a process designed to release and
open the student's emotional and physical
range, stimulate the imagination, place great
emphasis on physical actions, acting with the
whole body, and ridding the student of self-
conscious mannerisms. Through the use of
oversized masks (and a series of challenging
exercises), the student is allowed the freedom
to become someone else. The work aims to
integrate the student's skills with his/her
instincts, allowing impulses and the imagina-
tion to flow in conjunction with a flexible and
vulnerable body. The work culminates with
the presentation of a fully realized character, a
synthesis of the entire semester's work.
Prereqiiisile: TH 101.
TH 115 A/B
IVIovement for Actors I, II
1 credit. 1.5 hours
Introduces basic movement vocabulary in
modem dance, primarily using basic improvi-
sational technique. The course is designed to
provide the student with awareness of his/her
body and the basic skills of movement and
dance, such as stretching, breathing, posture,
coordination, balancing, etc. Allows the stu-
dent the experience of creative application of
movement and movement expression through
various forms and structures of improvisation.
Prerequisite: Permission of the faculty.
TH 116
Dance for Actors
1 credit. 1 .5 hours
A foundation course for actors that uses basic
Vaganova ballet technique to develop align-
ment, flexibility, coordination, and
discipline, and introduces the actor to the
movement vocabulary of this tradition.
Development of body awareness with
attention toward the verticality. two-dimen-
sionality, control, and restraint of ballet.
TH 122 A/B
Music Skills for Musical Theater I, II
2 credits. 3 hours class. 1 hour lab
Skill training in sight reading, ear training,
keyboard, and music theor)'. oriented to the
needs of the musical theater performer. First
year focuses on rudiments of notation, pitches,
intervals, rhythms, and simple chords.
Students learn to read from "lead sheet"
notation. Examples are drawn from musical
theater and classical repertoire. In-class exer-
cises and drills are supplemented with
computer-based instruction and keyboard lab.
Corequisile: TH 122.
TH 122 L
Music Skills Lab
credits. 1 hour
Supports Music Skills I and II.
TH 123, 124
Scene & Lighting Tech
Costume and Property Tech
2 credits. 2 hours
Introductory course in various phases of phys-
ical production dealing with the stage, house,
backstage personnel and their duties, con-
struction and painting of scenery, stage
lighting, costumes, props, and makeup.
TH 123 L, TH 124 L
Scene & Lighting Tech Lab
Costume and Property Tech Lab
1 credit. 3 hours
Laboratory experience for smdents in SOTA's
ATA. Students receive foundation training in
scenery construction and rigging, lighting and
electrical production, costume and property
construction, and provide production support
serving as primary assistants to professional
designer working on SOTA shows. Weekly
hours may vary depending upon assignment.
Prerequisite: Open to Applied Theatre Arts students.
TH 141 A/B
Voice for Musical Theater I, II
1 credit. 1 .5 hours
Introduction to the fundamentals of vocal
technique, vocal anatomy, and vocal perform-
ance for the musical stage. Examination of
various vocal styles used in the musical the-
ater, past and present.
Prerequisite: Permission of the faculty.
Corequisite: TH 141 L.
TH 142 A/B
TH 242 A/B
TH 342 A/B
TH 442 A/B
Voice Lesson for Musical Theater
1 credit, 1 .5 hours
Individual (and. occasionally, small group)
instruction in vocal techniques appropriate for
the musical theater, culminating in a jury
examination each semester.
Prerequisite: Permission of the faculty.
TH 150 A/B
Dance for Musical Theater I, II
1 credit. 3 hours
Dance technique training oriented to the spe-
cific needs of the musical theater pertbrmer.
Classes in jazz and ballet build strength and
awareness and extend the student dancer's
physical and expressive range.
Prerequisite: Permission of the faculty.
TH 203 A/B
ActingStudiolll, IV
3 credits, 6 hours
Course continues the work started in TH 103.
Sensory/emotional work and its relation to
characterization is further explored, leading to
an in-depth study of motivation and subtext.
Sensory, emotional, and adaptation exercises,
as well as improvisation and two-character
scenes are used to deepen the actor's ability to
execute honest and purposeful stage action
and communication. Emphasis is placed on
the "truth of the movement." Both pertbrm-
ance and personal journals are maintained on
a continuing basis, and outside rehearsals on
scenes are expected. All scene work is
directed by the instructor, using an individual-
ized hands-on approach.
Prerequisite: Placement by the faculty.
TH 205 A
Stage Combat III
2 credits, 3 hours
Intermediate course teaches the integration of
aggressive acting intent and safe combat tech-
nique using a broadsword and rapier
and dagger.
Prereqmsite:TH I05B.
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
197
TH 205 B
Stage Combat IV
2 credits. 3 hours
Intermediate course prepares the student for
the National Stage Combat Proficiency Test
adjudicated the last day of class by a Fight
Master from the Society of American Fight
Directors. This test includes unarmed combat,
rapier-and-dagger, and broadsword integrated
into a character-specific scene of dramatic
conflict.
Prerequisih':TH205A.
TH 209 A/B
Voice and Speech for Actors III, IV
2 credits, 3 hours
Practical training in speech for the stage.
Emphasis on articulation and eliminating
regionalisms. During the course of the year
the student is expected to achieve a high
degree of proficiency in General American
pronunciation. Resonance, placement, and
range are developed. Particular attention is
paid to ending consonants, equafing length of
thought and length of breath, and key
wording.
Prerequisite: TH 109 B.
TH 213
Script Analysis
3 credits. 3 hours
Introduces the student to practical analysis
of texts/scripts. The course explores the con-
cepts of conflict, human action, character,
action/reaction cycle, dramatic structure,
translations, and resources external to the
script (historical perspective). At the course's
end. the student should possess a firm under-
standing of the process involved in script
analysis, be thoroughly familiar with the
composite types of dramatic literature, begin
to understand the nature of an informed aes-
thetic, and understand the consequences
of each element of a performance on its
audience.
Prerequisite: THIlSorHUllO Bfor non- Theater
majors.
Discipline History IHuimnities
TH 215 A/B
Movement for Actors III, IV
2 credits, 3 hours
Utilizes intensive physical-emotional improvi-
sation work, including exercises in
Williamson technique, rhythmic movement,
center floor work, stretches, and the use of
physical impulse to expand emotional range.
Prerequisite: Placement ijy the faculty.
TH 222 A/B
Music Skills III, IV
3 credits. 3 hours class, I hour lab
Continued skill training in sight reading, ear
training, keyboard, and music theory, oriented
to the needs of the musical theater performer.
Examples are drawn from a wide range of
musical repertoire. In-class exercises and
drills are supplemented with computer-
based instruction.
Prerequisite: TH 122 B.
TH 222 L
Advanced Music Skills Lab
credits, 1 hour
Supports Music Skills III and IV. • i!
Corequisite:TH 222.
TH 223
Acting Studio: Technique I
4 credits, 7.5 hours
Study in contact and truthful response, conver-
sational reality, concentration, spontaneity,
getting in touch with one's own behavior and
that of others.
Prerequisite: Placement hy the faculty. ■ "
TH 224
Acting Studio: Technique II
4 credits, 7.5 hours
Refinement of the actor's inner resources, and
further development of the actor's technique
and skills at textual analysis. Exploration of
relationship, point of view, circumstance,
truthful involvement, and the reality of doing.
Prerequisite: Placement by the faculty.
TH 227
Fundamentals of Stage Management
3 credits, 3 hours
An examination of the role of the stage man-
ager in theatrical production. Practice in the
techniques of pre-production activity, coordi-
"nating and maintaining rehearsal discipline,
developing a prompt script, and calling a
show.
Prerequisite: TH 123.
TH228
Theater Management
3 credits. 3 hours
An introduction for the Applied Theater Arts
student to the important role that theater man-
agers and their administrative staffs play in the
day-to-day operations of theater companies.
An up-close look at all the facets of running a
successful theater: fundraising and audience
development, markefing and public relations,
fiscal organization and board relations, box
office and house management, and educa-
tional outreach.
Open to all students.
TH 241
Foundations of Singing-Acting
2 credit, 3 hours
Students are introduced to techniques for han-
dling the unique challenges of acting while
singing. Vocal technique and acfing technique
are integrated through intensive work on solo
literature, musical scenes, exercises, and
improvisations.
Prerequisites: TH 223. TH 122. and TH 14L
TH 250 A/B
Dance for Musical Theater III, IV
2 credits. 4.5 hours
Continuation of the previous year's dance
training. Technique training in jazz. tap. ballet,
social dancing, and related subjects is con-
tinued, with focus on the technical needs of
the musical theater performer.
Prerequisite: TH 150 B.
Required of all Musical Theater majors.
TH 305 A/B
Stage Combat V, VI
2 credits, 3 hours
Advanced exploration of the text-specific
challenges of fight direction and fight per-
formance using a wide variety of weapons.
Weapons and texts change each semester.
Prerequisite: National Stage Combat Proficiency
Test Recognition.
TH 309/310
Voice and Speech for Actors V, VI
2 credits. 3 hours
Involves the study of the key dialects of North
America, the Brifish Isles, and Europe using
the International Phonetic Alphabet as a guide.
The dialects chosen are those for which there
is most demand in dramatic literature; conse-
quently some time is spent on "Standard
British," "Southern Irish," "American
Southern," and "New York." Approximately
eight to 10 dialects are addressed in depth.
Prerequisite: TH 209 B. May be repeated for credit.
TH 311 A/B
Theater History I, II
3 credits. 3 hours
Two-semester survey of the history of theater:
its dramatic literature, theater structures and
production methods, styles of acting, and his-
torical trends, through readings, discussions,
and lectures. The course explores the history
of theater through its artistic, spiritual, polit-
ical, and cultural sources of empowerment.
Students are provided with the historical back-
ground to apply acting, directing, and
designing techniques to the theater of other
periods of history.
Prerequisite: TH 213.
Discipline History/Humanities
198
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
TH 312 A/B
Musical Theater History I, II
3 credits. 3 hours
Two-semester survey of the history of the
American musical theater in the 19th and 20th
centuries. Students develop insight into the
writers, performers, and theater artists who
created the legacy of the musical theater in
America, and examine representative works
from a variety of periods. Students undertake
research projects focusing on major per-
formers, writers, directors, and
choreographers. Artists and their work are
studied in print and on audio and video
recordings.
Coreqiilsitefor Musical Theater majors: TH 318
Musical Theater Repertory.
Discipline History/Humanities
TH 315 A/B
Movement for Actors V, VI
2 credits. 3 hours
Develops clarity and precision of movement
through increased awareness of action and
character. The student develops greater kines-
thetic sense and enhances his/her capability
for expressive movement. First term focuses
on Laban efforts; second term on LeCoq tech-
niques and period work.
Prere(juisite:TH2l5B. . .
TH 317
Fundamentals of Directing
3 credits, 3 hours
An overview of the directorial process.
Discusses the various facets of a director's
job, especially in the early phases of a produc-
tion, e.g. working with the actor, casting, table
work, and rehearsal, and culminates with each
student directing a scene of his/her own. The
emphasis is on empowering the students as
theatre practitioners within the rehearsal
process by introducing them to the basic prob-
lems encountered by the stage director, with
whom all theatre participants work.
Prerequisite: THSII B or TH3I2 B.
TH 318 A/B
Musical Theater Repertory
2 credits, 5 hours
Scenes, songs, and dances are drawn from the
diverse musical theater repertory, enabling the
student to develop versatility and a sense of
style.
■ Prerequisites: TH 222 B. TH 24 l.andTH 250 B.
TH320
Musical Theater Performance
2 credits. 3 hours
Elective course for non-major actors, singers,
and dancers in which students can explore the
craft of the singing actor through exercises,
improvisations, and repertoire study. Students
learn and rehearse solos, scenes, and ensem-
bles from the musical theater repertoire.
Emphasis is on developing honesty, ease,
and expressiveness in musical theater
performance.
Prerequisile: Permission of the instructor
TH 323
ActingStudio: Technique III
3 credits, 6 hours
Studies in advanced acting. Further develop-
ment of performance technique as it relates to
the rehearsal process. Special emphasis given
to clarity of behavior, characterization, action
and objective. Scene work used as a means of
gauging the actor's ability to apply studio
work to text.
Prerequisile: TH 224.
TH324
ActingStudio: Poetic Realism
3 credits. 6 hours
Exploration of scene study methods as they
apply to dramatic works by such authors as
Ibsen, Strindberg, Wilde, Chekhov, and Shaw,
and further development of actor's attention to
and application of behavioral specificity.
Prerequisile: Permission of faculty
TH 325
Oral Interpretation
2 credits, 3 hours
Examines the elements of form and structure
in various kinds of literature, and applies that
analysis to the craft of the performance.
Studies begin with fairy tales, investigate
modem and contemporary retellings of fairy
tales, and continue with modem and contem-
porary short stories. The techniques of oral
interpretation-different than those used in a
studio acting class-focus on the meaning of
literature via suggestive vocal dexterity and
subtlety of revelation, rather than explicit
action. Students are required to write papers
analyzing the literature they choose to per-
form. The course closes with a class
performance.
Prerequisite: Permission of faculty.
TH326
Audition Techniques
2 credits, 2 hours
Focuses on the skills necessary to audition
successfully for theatre, film, and television.
Topics include cold readings, monologues, tel-
evision commercials, and dealing with agents
and casting directors.
Prerequisite: Placement by the faculty
TH327
Advanced Stage Management
3 credits. 3 hours
Advanced study of the stage manager's func-
tion in theatrical production. Coordination of
production personnel, and the management
responsibilities in the pre-rehearsal, rehearsal,
and production periods.
Prerequisite: TH 227.
TH 330
Acting on Camera
1 credit. 2 hours
Designed for acting students who want to gain
knowledge and experience in acting for film
and television, the primary market in the
entertainment industry. Sessions give each
participant a hands-on experience in acting for
the camera. The actors are able to see and
evaluate each other's film work during a spe-
cial screening session at the end of the course.
Prercqiii.sile:TH 323.
TH 341 A/B
Voice for Musical Theater V, VI
1 credit, 1 .5 hours
Styles of singing-acting. Students apply inte-
grated singing-acting technique to a diverse
range of period styles of musical theater Solo
literature from the 1 860s through the present
day is examined.
Prerequisites: TH 224. TH 222 B. andTH24L
TH 349
Production Practicum
1 credit, hours by assignment
Practical application of training to experiences
in a wide range of producdon areas:
dramaturgy, design, technology, theater man-
agement, etc. May include realized studio,
workshop, or project assignments.
Prerequisite: Two semesters of TH 103 L. May be
repeated for credit.
TH 350 A/B
Dance for Musical Theater V, VI
1 credit. 3 hours
Continued study of ballet and jazz technique
and musical theater styles.
Prerequisite: TH 250 B.
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
199
TH 405 A/B
Stage Combat VII, VIM
2 credits, 3 hours
Advanced exploration of the text-specific
challenges of fight direction and fight per-
formance using a wide variety of weapons.
Weapons and texts change each semester.
Pmequisite-.TH .U)5 B.
TH 415 A/B
Movement for Actors VII, VIM
2 credits, 3 hours
Confinuation of TH 315. Work in LeCoq
movement. Spring term develops a senior
movement project.
Prerequisite: TH 315.
TH417
Directing Studio
3 credits, 3 hours
A thorough investigation of the direcdng
vocabulary, exercises in space and composi-
tion, exploration of scripts from the director's
point of view, and practical experience with
ground plans. The student is asked to demon-
strate his/her understanding of blocking values
and textual analysis by conceptualizing and
then staging simple scenes. Introduces the
basics of acting coaching and is coordinated
with script analysis and dramatic criticism.
Prerequisite: TH 317.
TH 419
Business of Theater
1 credit, 1 .5 hours
Exploration of the business and legal aspects
of careers in the professional theatre: the roles
of agents, managers, producers, and managing
directors are explored. Involves lectures on
various topics such as unions, contracts, taxes,
management, and representation as well as
occasional visits by" professionals in the field.
Prerequisite: Placement hv the faculty.
TH423
Acting Studio: Verse Drama I
4 credits, 7 hours
Integrated voice and performance work on
period scenes and monologues. Material to be
covered includes Greek to Restoration.
Prerequisite: TH323 or permission of faculty.
TH424
Acting Studio: Verse Drama II
4 credits, 7 hours
Continues the student's training in the most
advanced level of period and style work.
Increased attention to voice work is supported
by the use of texts from Greeks to Restoration.
Exploration of comic techniques, heightened
behavior, and emotional support are involved.
Prerequisite: TH423 or permission of faculty.
TH430
Stage to Video Production
2 credits, 4 hours
Project work both behind and in front of the
camera. Each actor works on a monologue or
scene chosen in consultation with the
instructor to make his/her work in front of a
camera compelling, secure, and believable.
ATA students will deal with Production
Assistant responsibilities, such as continuity,
assisting directing, etc. Student assignments
may vary according to strengths and interests.
Special benefit: Students can use excerpts
from the workshop for a "video audition"
commonly required by today's casfing direc-
tors, agents, and film/TV directors.
Prerequisite:TH 330.
TH 441 A/B
Voice for Musical Theater:
Cabaret/Audition
1 credit, 2 hours
A senior seminar in singing-acting. Students
work on more demanding repertoire and on
special perforining challenges such as cabaret
theater and auditioning. A Senior Showcase is
prepared and performed, and professional out-
placement issues are addressed.
Prerequisite:TH 341 B.
TH 449
Internship
3- 1 2 credits, hours by assignment
Hands-on involvement with a professional
company. Placements may consist of adininis-
trative or producdon support work, positions
in assistance to directors, producers, stage
managers or dramaturges, literary manage-
ment, casting, understudying or performance,
and inay be outside of the Philadelphia area.
Prerequisite/corequisite: TH4I9.
Open toTheaterArts majors only. ■ •'
TH 450 A/B
Dance for Musical Theater VII, VIII
I credit, 3 hours
Continued study of ballet and jazz technique
and musical theater styles.
Prerequisite:TH250B.
TH 451, TH 452
Senior Project
3 credits, hours vary by assignment
Faculty approved and supervised capstone
experience in a student's area of concentra-
tion. May be a School of Theater
Arts-sponsored project or one with a reputable
outside company recognized by the faculty
and area professionals.
Prerequisite: TH 349.
TH475
Special Studies in Theater
3 credits, 3-6 hours
Topics and studies of current interest in areas
of theater practice, such as new trends or
movements in performance, movement, voice
work or international theater. Topics could
also include areas of theater production, guest
artists workshops, or contemporary develop-
ments in the field. Courses can be taught in
either a studio or lecture format with contact
hours varying accordingly. May be repeated
for credit for topics on' different subjects.
Prerequisite: By permission of faculty
TH 460
Applied Theater Arts Seminar
3 credits, 3 hours
Analysis and study of contemporary pracfices
and trends in non-performance disciplines of
theatrical production. Students will engage in
readings, discussions, and writing projects
dealing with their experiences to-date in their
chosen field of theatrical endeavor. The course
may require field trips and/or attendance at
special events to place current trends in larger
social and practical contexts, and to help the
student develop strength and perspective
within his or her own work.
Prerequisite: U4 Status in the ATA program.
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 200S/2004
Writing for Film
and Television
WM 111, WM 112
Traditions of Narrative I, II
3 credits, 4 hours
Two-semester studio writing course that uses
narrative examples from various genres to
introduce dramatic structural elements such as
character, conflict, and premise. Smdents are
required to write extensively both in and out
of class. Two major creati\'e written works
required in each semester.
Prereqiiisiies: Permission of the instructor and
re\ie\r of a portfolio of written work.
VIM 113, 114
Dramatic Structure I, II
3 credits. 4 hours
An intensive year-long writing course that
introduces students to major principles of the
three-act structure found in narrative screen-
plays. Focus on such topics as act design,
creation of character, conflict, and setting.
Students will be required to complete major
written work and participate in workshops of
written material.
Prerequisite: Permission of tlie instructor
WM 214, 215
Screenwriting I, II
3 credits. 4 hours
An intensive screenwriting workshop where.
in the first semester, students write a series of
outlines for a short screenplay. In the second
semester, students vvrite outlines and a short
screenplay.
Prerequisite: WMIIS. tVM 1 14: or \IM2I9. or
permission of the instructor.
WM 219
Writing for Film
3 credits. 4 hours
Studio writing class introducing students to
the basic elements of screenwriting for film.
Students are required to write dramatic exer-
cises in class, as well as outside of class.
Supplemental readings are discussed and film
highlights shown to assist the students in their
writing.
Prerequisite: Hi HOB. ■
WM 225
Interactive Writing I
3 credits. 4 hours
The first semester of a \ ear-long smdio course
that builds upon the basic principles of dra-
matic wrifing by idendfying and utilizing the
web environment as a unique medium for nar-
rarive storytelling. Through analysis and
written exercises, students learn how multiple
story and character arcs are designed and sup-
ported by specific interactive storyielling
models.
Prerequisite: WM 2 1 9 for non-Hriting majors:
MM 22 1 for writing majors.
WM226
Interactive Writing II
3 credits. 4 hours
The second semester of a year-long studio
course that extends the interactive storytelling
knowledge gained in Interactive Writing 1 to a
project-based and dialogue dri\ en-narrative.
Working in v\riting teams. sUidents create and
write two short web drama scripts based on
models studied in Interacdve Wrifing I. As a
final project, each student completes a formal
web drama proposal, outline, and script for a
potential production in the culminafing
course. Web Drama Studio.
Prerequisite: IVM 225
WM 241
Arts of the Media
3 credits. 3 hours
Introducfion to the various production values,
which directly influence the character of the
dramafic product. Subjects of smd\ include
music, cinematography, art and production
design, editing, sound, costume design and
special/computer effects as they relate to
the writer's intenUon and the quality of the
final product.
Open to all students.
WM243
Screenplay Analysis
3 credits. 3 hours
A course devoted to the critical analysis of
screenplays. Students will be required to read
numerous scripts and write critical papers on
various dramafic structural principles high-
lighted.
Prerequisite: WM219, or permission of the
instructor
WM 251, WM 252
Narrative Cinema I, II
3 credits. 6 hours
Examines and analyzes film through the per-
spective of narratixe structure. Various forms,
schools of film, styles, and genres from both
the domestic and international film commu-
nity are studied chronologically, emphasizing
the influence and integration of the various
forms with one another. The course requires
weekly screenings of the work being studied.
Students who have successfull} completed
HU 248 ATQ are not eligible to enroll for
credit in this course.
Open to all students.
Discipline History/Humanities
WM253
History of Television
3 credits. 3 hours
Pro\'ides an o\er\ie\\ of the medium of televi-
sion. The impact of tele\ision since its inception
has become increasingly per\asive and has
influenced an entire society through its ability to
educate and entertain. Xldeo examples of the
medium are supplemented by class discussion
and reading assignments. Two term papers, a
midterm, and final exam are required.
Open to all students.
Discipline History /Humanities
WM315
Adaptation from Fiction
3 credits. 3 hours
Writing course de\'eloping the craft of adapta-
tion, focusing on the use of fictional material
as the source for the dramatic form. The var-
ious genres of fictional material, including
novels and short stories, are examined and sm-
dents learn to handle the conceptual and
technical challenges inherent in the process of
altering written text for the mediums of televi-
sion and film.
Prerequisite: Hi HOB. or permission of the
instructor based on a revicK of a portfolio
of Kritten work.
WM316
Adaptation from Non-Fiction
3 credits. 3 hours
Writing course developing the craft of
adapting non-fictional sources to the dramatic
and documentary form. Various genres of non-
fictional material, including but not limited to
newspapers, periodicals, autobiographies,
biographies, memoirs, letters, diaries, and his-
torical texts, are examined. Students learn to
manage the conceptual and technical chal-
lenges inherent in the adaptation of
non-fiction for television and film.
Prerequisites: HU HOB. and permission of the
instructor based on review of a portfolio of written
work.or\VMH2.
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
WM317
Episodic Television Writing
3 credits, 4 hours
Studio writing class that analyzes the specific
genre of episodic television writing. Students
read scripts and view examples of various
genres in the form, and work in teams to
create original written work.
Prerequisites: HU 1 10 B, atidJimior slaliis in the
major, or permission of the instructor based on a
review of a portfolio of written work.
WIV1318
Episodic Television Writing II
3 credits, 4 hours
Advanced studio writing course in which stu-
dents outline and draft two full-length scripts
for episodic television series.
Prerequisite: WM 317.
WM 321, WM 322
Advanced Screenwriting I, II
3 credits, 4 hours
Studio writing course preparing the student
for the entire process of crafting a full-length
script for film. In the first semester, students
develop a concept, pitch the project, prepare
an outline/treatment for a full-length work,
and draft the first act. The second semester is
devoted to the completion of the full-length
work and the revision process.
Prerequisite: WM215. or permission
of the instructor
WM 323, WM 324
Advanced Playwriting I, II
3 credits, 4 hours
Studio course preparing students to write a
full-length play. The fu'st semester focuses on
development of a theme and preparation of a
draft of the first act. The second semester is
devoted to the completion and refinement of
the piece, resulting in a full-length work.
Prerequisite: WM215, orpennission
of the instructor
WM330
Web Drama Studio
3 credits. 6 hours
A capstone course in which students are
required to begin with an already completed
and approved web drama proposal and script.
Each student then works to produce his/her
own web drama script online, while collabora-
tively supporting other writer/producers in the
course on their projects.
Prerequisite: WM226 or permission of instructor
WM341
Acting/Directing for Writers
3 credits. 4 hours
Studio course addressing the collaborative
aspect of dramatic production involving
writers, actors, and directors. Students are
introduced to direcdng and acdng, using their
own dramatic texts as the source material.
Prerequisite: WM214 or WM2I9.
WM 343
Film Story Analysis
3 credits, 3 hours
Explores dramatic structures and storytelling
conventions of narrative films. Screenings,
group discussions, and analysis will highlight
the devices employed by screenwriters to tell a
good story. Weekly screenings followed by
critical papers of each screening.
Prerequisite: WM215, or WM219.
WM 411, WM 412
Senior Thesis I
3 credns. 4 hours
Senior Thesis II
3 credits, 3 hours
The final writing project in the program where
over the year, the student develops an
outline/treatment and the completion of a full-
length screenplay along with two revisions.
Entertainment industry practices are inte-
grated into the course.
Prerequisite: WM322.
WM 431
Interarts Project
3 credits, 6 hours
Provides an opportunity for writers and stu-
dents throughout the University to collaborate
on a semester-long project. Students jointly
submit project proposals for approval and
develop them to completion. Emphasis is
placed on the students' ability to consider the
artistic and technical implications of the com-
bined media while successfully integrating art
forms in a considered and polished final piece.
Open to all students with permission
of the instructor
WM 499
Internship
3 credits, 6 hours
Seniors are placed with companies to expose
them to a real work environment in the field of
media. Placements vary and may include local
network-affiliated television stations, public
broadcasting stations, or film production com-
panies. A paper or journal chronicling the
experience is required upon completion of the
internship.
Open to Seniors in Writing for Film and Television
only.
The University of ttie Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
■
ueneral Information
.
■ ■
Undergraduate and Graduate
Course Catalog
2003 • 2004
to
The University
OF THE Arts®
Admission
Barbara Elliott
elliott@uarts.edu
Director of Admission
First Floor, Dorrance Hamilton Hall
215-717-6030
The admission requirements and procedures are designed to help
the University select, from among the men and women applying,
those best qualified to benefit from the educational opportunities at
The University of the Arts. The University prefers applicants who
express themselves through visual images, performance, and cre-
ative writing; who demonstrate intellectual abilities through their
academic record; who wish to increase their awareness of them-
selves and their world; who address their environment in a posifive.
individualistic manner; and who bring energy, concern, and humor
to their inquiry. The University values diversity, liveliness, thought-
fulness, and curiosity, and seeks in its students a broad range of
intellectual, artistic, extracurricular, and personal energies.
Admission is offered without regard to race, color, national or ethnic
origin, religion, sex, sexual orientation, marital or parental status,
age, or handicap. Each applicant is considered individually, and the
Director of Admission may make an exception to any requirement.
Admission to The University of the Arts is based on both aca-
demic performance and artistic development. Each college at The
University of the Arts has special admission criteria related to its
course of study. The admission committee examines every appli-
cant's academic record for evidence of rigorous, scholariy
preparation. In addition, each college at the University has separate
requirements for evaluating a candidate's artistic progress. Entrance
to the College of Art and Design requires the candidate to present a
• visual portfolio. The College of Performing Arts requires students to
pass an audition in their specific discipline. The College of Media
and Communication asks candidates to present a media or writing
portfolio. Because the portfolio and audition requirements are spe-
cific to each program, interested applicants should contact the
Admission Office for a full explanation of the University's expecta-
tions.
Admission to the University is based upon a combination of fac-
tors; candidates for admission must assume responsibility for all of
the admission requirements when submitting an application and
realize that the Admission Committee will base its decision on the
sum total of these factors.
Undergraduate Application Process
International applicants should also refer to the section of this cat-
alog titled International Students. (See index.)
All applicants are encouraged to visit The University of the Arts
for an information session and portfolio review or audition.
Information sessions with the Admission staff offer students and
their families the opportunity to learn more about the application
process, programs of study, campus life, and financial aid. Portfolio
reviews, interviews, and auditions are part of all applicants' entrance
requirements and are separate from the information sessions. In
addition to demonstrating their artistic abilities during the portfolio
review or audition, students should be prepared to discuss their aca-
demic record, personal achievements, extracurricular activities, and
professional goals.
1. Application Form. Paper forms are available from the Office
of Admission or downloadable from the University website; they
also may be electronically submitted at www.uarts.edu/applynow.
All candidates are required to submit a completed application for
admission and a $50 application fee. The application fee for interna-
tional applicants who are not U.S. citizens or Permanent Residents is
$75. The University of the Arts will waive the application fee in
cases of extreme family financial need. A fee-waiver request is
required from a high school guidance counselor, two-year college
counselor, or other authorized person.
2. Secondary Scliool Record. An official copy of the secondary
school transcript is required of all applicants. A curriculum of col- ,
lege preparatory subjects is recommended. Specific course
distribution is not required, although a minimum of four (4) years of
English and two (2) years of history is strongly recommended.
Remaining courses should be .selected from the approved college
preparatory program, including study in languages, mathematics,
science, humanities, art history, psychology, and sociology. These
courses should be augmented by study in visual art, music, dance,
drama, or creative writing.
Applicants not holding a regular high school diploma may qualify
for admissions consideration upon conversion of the General
Education Development Test (GED) to a state diploma through the
Department of Public Instruction of the applicant's resident state.
The University of the Arts welcomes applications from students
who are home-schooled. Home-schooled students must present a
secondary school diploma issued by their public school district or
the GED. For Pennsylvania residents. The University of the Arts
also accepts secondary school diplomas issued by Erie Area
Homeschoolers, Buxmont Christian Educational Institute, and
Pennsylvania Homeschoolers Accreditation Agency, all of which are
approved by the Pennsylvania Department of Education to award
secondary school diplomas.
3. Standardized Test Scores. The submission of official stan-
dardized test scores is required for admission although applicants
who have completed a college-level English Composition course
with a grade of "C" or better, or applicants who have been out of
school for more than five years, are not required to submit standard-
ized test scores. The SAT, SAT 1 , or ACT are the acceptable
standardized tests. Applicants with a diagnosed learning disability or
the other qualifying impairment may submit nonstandard-adminis-
tration test results. United States-educated students whose first
language is other than English are required to submit the results of
the SAT II English Language Proficiency Test (ELPT). The ELPT is
offered as an achievement test through CEEB. Test results should be
sent to the University directly from the testing agency. The
University of the Arts' CEEB code is 2664. The ACT code is 3664.
Candidates for admission from Puerto Rico or Latin America may
substitute or augment the SAT or ACT with the Prueba de Aptitud
Academica(PAA).
i^. English Language Proficiency. Applicants educated outside
the United States for whom English is not their first language are
required to demonstrate proficiency in English. The TOEFL is
required for applicants who have been educated in non-English-
speaking countries. A minimum score of 500, if paper-based, or 173,
if computer-based, is required for undergraduate admission. United
States-educated students whose first language is other than English
are required to submit the results of the SAT II English Language
Proficiency Test (ELPT). The ELPT is offered as an achievement
test through CEEB. Test results should be sent to the University
directly from the testing agency. The University will also accept the
204
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003^004
results of the College Board's Advanced Placement course and exam
in Internationa! English Language (APIEL) as proof of English lan-
guage proficiency for undergraduate admission. A minimum score
of 3 is required.
5. Recommendations. Applicants are required to submit a letter
of recommendation from a teacher, guidance counselor, or
employer. Recommendarions should comment on the applicant's
demonstrated abilities in the arts, maturity, ambition, determination,
and seriousness of purpose.
6. Personal Statement. All applicants are required to submit a
150- to 300- word essay. The statement should be typed on a separate
sheet of paper and attached to the application. The applicant should
list his/her name. Social Security number, and the semester for
which he/she seeks admission on the statement.
7. Artistic Presentation. Refer to the Portfolio and Audition
requirements published in the application packet.
8. Interview. Although not required, all applicants are encour-
aged to visit The University of the Arts and interview with a member
of the Admission staff or University faculty. Applicants to the
College of Art and Design are expected to present their portfolio
during the inter\'iew. Applicants to the College of Performing Arts or
the College of Media and Communication should be prepared to dis-
cuss their academic record, personal achievements, extracurricular
activities, and goals. The interview also provides the applicant with
an opportunity to ask questions about the University. Applicants
should feel free to note questions about the application process, pro-
grams of study, courses, instructors, student life, or financial aid and
bring these with them to the interview.
9. Financial Aid, Federal Loans, Scholarships. The University
encourages electronic aid application. Students may submit the Free
Application for Federal Student Aid (FAFSA) online at
http://www.fafsa.ed.gov. For those without Internet access, the
FAFSA can be obtained from a high school guidance counselor.
Submit the FAFSA to the Federal Student Aid Program by March 1
for priority consideration. List The University of the Arts as the
institufion to receive your information. The Title IV Code for The
University of the Arts is 003350. For additional infonnation. see the
Financial Aid section of this catalog.
Transfer Applicants
Transfer students are admitted to The University of the Arts under
policies that vary from college to college. The University considers
any applicant who has been enrolled in a college-level program of
study after secondary school to be a transfer applicant. Transfers
enjoy a preferred position among applicants for admission since it
can be assumed they have matured in their goals and have demon-
strated their abilities at the college level.
Transfer Application Requirements
The application process for undergraduate transfer students is the
same as for freshmen with the exception that, in addition to the
process described in the above section, applicants must submit offi-
cial transcripts from all colleges attended. Candidates should include
a listing of any courses in which they are currentiy enrolled or intend
to complete prior to matriculation at The University of the Arts. To
aid in the assessment of transfer credits, a catalog containing the
course descriptions, credit assignment, and credit-hour ratio for each
college attended should be sent to the Office of Admission. A min-
imum G.P.A. of 2.0 is required for transfer.
Transfer of Credit
Students may receive credit for courses taken at other regionally
accredited institutions that are similar in content, purpose, and stan-
dards to those offered at The University of the Arts. A minimum
grade of "C" is required in order to present a course for transfer
credit. Only credits are transferable, not grades.
Candidates are given a preliminary transfer credit evaluation at
the time of admission; final award of transfer credit and placement
level is subject to receipt of final official transcripts and verification
by the registrar at the time of enrollment.
Residency Requirements
The time it takes for a student to reach graduation will depend
upon the time needed to fulfill The University of the Arts' degree
requirements.
Every transfer student must complete a minimum of four full-time
semesters in residence preceding graduation and must earn a min-
imum of 48 credits in studio and/or liberal arts courses. Transferable
credits will be applied only to the specific studio and liberal arts
requirements stipulated for a UArts degree. For this reason, transfer
students may be required to remain in residence at the University for
more than the minimum four semesters and to complete more than
the minimum 48 credits, regardless of the number of credits earned
at previously attended institutions. Transfer credit is evaluated by the
department chair or school director and the Director of Liberal Arts
in consultation with the Office of the Registrar.
College of Art and Design
Upon completion of the preliminary credit evaluation, the appli-
cant will be invited to schedule an interview and portfolio review
with a faculty member from the major department. If unable to
attend a personal interview, refer to the University's Portfolio and
Audition Brochure for specific requirements.
Freshman Transfers
Transfer students with fewer than 2 1 transferable liberal arts
credits and without qualifications for advanced standing in studio
should expect to be registered for the Foundation Program and antic-
ipate being enrolled at The University of the Arts for the equivalent
of eight semesters. Those who qualify for either the three-year pro-
gram or advanced standing but wish to take advantage of the
Foundation Program and elective courses may also apply as
freshman transfers.
Three-Year Transfers
Applicants who have not had substantial studio instruction but
who present a minimum of 21 transferable credits in liberal arts may
qualify for the three-year transfer program. Under this program, stu-
dents have the opportunity to fulfill the College of Art and Design's
graduation requirements in three years. In the first year, the
Foundation Program curriculum is combined with studies in the
major department. If approved by both the Foundation Program and
major-department chairpersons, the transfer .student may attain
third-year status at the start of his or her second year. This program
imposes an extremely demanding schedule and is best suited to
mature students who have definitely decided upon a major.
Advanced Standing
Students transferring into the second- or third-year level studios
of major departments are considered advanced-standing candidates.
The University of the Arts LTndergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
205
The first year in the College of Art and Design includes 21 credits of
studio classwork in the Foundation core (Drawing, Two-
Dimensional Design, Three-Dimensional Design, and an optional
course. Time and Motion) and elective courses. Students who have
completed between 18 and 21 credits in studio and who have studied
in the Foundation areas may be considered for advanced status.
Decisions concerning admission to a major department, class
standing, and mandated prerequisites are made by major-department
faculty upon an evaluation of the admission portfolio and prelimi-
nary transfer-credit analysis.
College of Performing Arts
At the time of the entrance audition, the Audition Committee
evaluates the applicant's performance with respect to the level of
achievement required for advanced standing. Transfer credit in the
major may be granted for comparable previous undergraduate credit
earned, up to the level of placement. Transfer credits may be granted
toward the Liberal Arts requirements regardless of a student's
standing in the major. The number of Liberal Arts credits accepted
for transfer is unlikely to change the length of time required to com-
plete the degree. Transfers to the College of Performing Arts are not
given credit for studio courses until after the completion of the first
semester at The University of the Arts. Transfer students to the
College of Performing Arts should assume that they will receive
freshman status unless advanced status is clearly indicated in their
letter of admission.
College of Media and Communication
Transfer applicants to Writing for Film and Television.
Multimedia, and Communication are evaluated on a case-by-case
basis, depending on the nature of prior educational experience and
demonstrated creative abilities. Transferrable credits may be applied
to major. Liberal Arts, and/or elective requirements.
Application Notification
Applications are reviewed on a rolling basis beginning in
December for fall admission and September for spring admission.
Priority is given to fall candidates who file an application for admis-
sion by March 15, although the University will accept and review
applications as long as space in the class is available. All applicants
are notified of the Admission Committee's decision in writing by the
Director of Admission. Generally, students can expect to receive
notification of the decision within two weeks of completing all
admission requirements.
Tuition Deposits
Applicants who are offered admission for fall enrollment are
asked to submit a $300 tuition deposit within three weeks of the
offer of admission to reserve a place in the entering class. Upon
receipt of the tuition deposit a housing reservation will be sent to the
student. The tuition deposit may be refunded if the student notifies
the Office of Admission of his/her intent to cancel enrollment, in
writing, prior to May 1.
The University of the Arts subscribes to the May 1 Candidate's
General Reply Date and will honor any applicant's written request to
defer the acceptance of the offer of admission until May 1 . Requests
for a refund of the tuition deposit that are postmarked after May 1
cannot be granted. After May 1 the University assumes that the stu-
dent's tuition deposit to The University of the Arts is the only
enrollment deposit that the student has submitted. The University
reserves the right to cancel the ofter of admission if the student posts
a deposit at another college or university.
Housing Deposits
University housing is open to new students entering in both fall
and spring semesters. Housing reservation forms are sent to all
incoming students upon receipt of the tuition deposit. The
University will guarantee housing to all students who submit a
housing reservation and post a non-refundable $200 housing deposit
by June 1. Although the University anticipates that it has adequate
housing to meet the student demand for on-campus living, there is ■
no way to predict when University-supervised housing may be
filled; therefore, after June 1 , space is available on a first-come, first-
served basis.
Deferred Admission
Deferment of admission is not automatic. Undergraduate and
graduate students who are admitted to The University of the Arts
and then wish to defer their admission must submit their requests, in
writing, to the Office of Admission. If permission is granted, a $300
nonrefundable tuition deposit must be paid in order to confirm
enrollment for the following semester or year. Deferred students
who enroll in a degree program at another institution in the interim
will not retain their defen'ed status; they must reapply to the
University as transfer students.
Deferred candidates are also required to submit a statement of
_ activities and reaftlrm their intent to enroll at The University of
the Arts. Candidates seeking fall or summer enrollment must file
this statement by January 15; spring candidates must submit
this statement by November 15. Students are permitted only
one deferment.
Those who are not approved for deferred admission may reapply
for the following year. A new application form must be filed with a
reapplication fee of $10; additional credentials may be required.
Early Admission
Extremely capable students may be ready for college before they
have completed the normal four-year secondary school program.
The University welcomes applications from those who feel they are
scholastically and artistically prepared, and sufficiently mature, per-
sonally and socially, to undertake college work.
Early Admission candidates must be able to fulfill either of the
following conditions:
1 . By taking an overioad during the junior year of high school or
summer courses, the applicant is able to complete high school
diploma credit requirements and receive the diploma before
enrolling at the University.
2. Under a written agreement, the candidate's high school authori-
ties grant the applicant a high school diploma upon completion of
the freshman year at The University of the Arts.
Conditional Admission
The University of the Arts has designed alternative admission pro-
grams to consider those whose potential may not be indicated in
standardized test scores or class rank, or who have had limited
formal training in the arts.
Offers of admission may specify one or more of the following
conditions;
206
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
1. Pre-Freshman Enrichment Program. The admission of
freshman applicants to the College of Art and Design or the
Multimedia program may be contingent upon successful completion
of the University's Summer Pre-Freshman Enrichment Program
(PREP). This condition is made when the application review indi-
cates that additional preparation in studio is necessary to ensure the
student's success in the first year curriculum. PREP includes studies
in drawing, two-dimensional, and three-dimensional design. Classes
are scheduled for a four-week session, with 30 hours of instruction
per week. PREP is a noncredit program, but grades are given to
measure performance. A minimum "C" (2.0) grade-point average
indicates successful completion.
2. Academic Warning. Students admitted under Academic
Warning must achieve a "C" (2.0) grade-point average at the end of
their first year of study in order to be promoted.
3. Academic Achievement Program. Applicants may be
required to participate in the Academic Achievement Program
(AAP). The purpose of the program is to provide developmental
maintenance and transition services to students who. because of life
circumstances, may not have achieved their potential in secondary
school and need additional preparation in art and academics to
ensure their success. AAP is funded by the Commonwealth of
Pennsylvania's Higher Education Opportunity Act (ACT 101).
Students selected to participate in the program must be Pennsylvania
residents and meet the family income eligibility guidelines estab-
lished by the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania.
Advanced Placement
CEEB Advanced Placement Program (AP)
The University of the Arts may award three credits toward the
Liberal Arts requirements for a score of 4 or better in any CEEB
Advanced Placement Examination in an academic subject. An offi-
cial report of scores must be submitted to The University of the Arts
directly from The College Board. Advanced Placement Program,
Princeton, NJ. AP credit is not given for studio art or performance.
Students are notified of AP credits awarded prior to registration.
College Level Examination Program (CLEP)
The University of the Arts cooperates with the College
Examination Board in its College Level Examination Program
(CLEP). Credits may be awarded for Subject Examinations in com-
position and literature, foreign language, history and social studies,
or science and math depending on the score earned in the examina-
tion and other factors as follows:
1. The credit must be directly applicable to the student's
degree requirements.
2. The credits cannot be used to fulfill upper-level course
requirements.
3. The total number of credits awarded through CLEP is
limited to 12.
4. A score equivalent to the minimum acceptable score or
higher as recommended by the American Council on Education
is necessary.
College- Level Coursework
The University may also award credit for college work completed
while the student was still in high school. Applicants who have taken
college courses should arrange to have their college transcripts sent
to the Office of Admission for transfer-credit evaluation. Students
should also send official descriptions of the college courses so that
the University can make accurate evaluations. Transfer credit cannot
be granted for courses that were taken to fulfill high school gradua-
don requirements nor for credits earned in a dual enrollment
program that granted secondary school and college credit for the
same course. Credit will not be granted for pre-college programs.
International Baccalaureate
The University of the Arts recognizes the International
Baccalaureate Examination (IB). The University may award six
credits toward the Liberal Arts requirements for a score of 4 or better
in a higher level (HL) examination and three credits for a score of 4
or better in a subsidiary level (SL) examination in an academic sub-
ject. An official report of scores on the IB exams should be sent to
the Office of Admission for evaluation. Students are notified of the
credits awarded prior to registration.
Credit from Nonaccredited Institutions
Based on the applicant's portfolio, credit may be awarded at the
time of admission by the department chairperson of the intended
major. The maximum number of credits awarded may not exceed the
number of credits earned at the nonaccredited institution (as
adjusted to conform with the University's credit evaluation policies).
These credits may be assigned to fulfill specific requirements of The
University of the Arts degree as agreed upon by the department chair
or director, and the registrar.
Credit by Portfolio/Audition
A maximum of 18 credits may be granted to applicants by port-
folio review for artistic experience independent of any coursework.
Credit by portfolio is granted only for studio work done prior to
matriculation at The University of the Arts. Academic standing and
course credit based on portfolio review are detennined by the appro-
priate department chairperson during the admission process. This
portfolio work cannot have been part of the assigned work for a sec-
ondary or post-secondary course.
Applicants who qualify may be granted credit by audition in per-
formance subjects. Audition credit requires the approval of the
Audition Committee and the school director. Academic standing and
course credit based on the audition are determined during the admis-
sion process.
International Students
Applicants who are neither U.S., citizens nor Permanent Residents
are considered International Students. The University encourages
international candidates with strong academic and artistic qualifica-
tions to apply for admission.
International students who apply to the University should follow
the procedures outlined in the appropriate section of this catalog.
International applicants should also be aware of the following addi-
tional requirements and procedures:
1. English proficiency. Applicants to the undergraduate pro-
grams whose first language is other than English are required to
demonstrate their proficiency in English in one of two ways:
Submit official scores from the Test of English as a Foreign
Language (TOEFL). A minimum score of 500 on the paper-based
test, or 173 on the computer-based TOEFL, is required for admis-
sion to the undergraduate programs.
or
Complete Level 112 in the English Language Program offered by
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
207
any one of the more than 20 ELS Language Centers located
throughout the USA. Information about these programs may be
obtained directly from:
ELS Language Centers
1357 Second Street, Suite 100
Santa Monica, CA 9040 1 - 1 1 02 US A
Telephone: 310-458-7400 . , ,
Fax:310-458-7404 -• . '
www.els.com ■ ■
International candidates for admission to a graduate program
whose first language is other than English must present an official
TOEFL score of 550 or above, if paper-based, or 2 1 3, if computer-
based, or complete Master's Level 1 12 in the English Language
Program offered by any of the ELS Language Centers located
throughout the U.S. Information about these programs may be
obtained directly from ELS Language Centers, as listed above.
2. Transcripts/Mark/Grade Sheets. All applicants must provide
complete, oft'icial transcripts from every school attended on the high
school/secondary level and postsecondary level. Each transcript
must be translated into English by a certified translator and the
translafion must be notarized.
International students who wish to be considered for advanced
standing and receive transfer credit for coursework already com-
pleted should submit an Evaluation of Foreign Educational
Credentials Comprehensive Report from the Academic Credentials
Evaluation Institute (ACEI). International applicants to the graduate
programs are also required to submit The Basic Report from ACEI.
It is the applicant's responsibility to contract with ACEI directly for
this service. Instructions and application for foreign credentials eval-
uation can be obtained directly from:
Academic Credentials Evaluation Institute, Inc.
P.O. Box 6908
Beverly Hills, CA 90212 USA
Telephone: 310-559-0578
Fax:310-204-2842
www.aceil.com
3. Certification of Finances. International students who plan to
enroll at the University are responsible for all of their educational
and personal expenses for the full duration of their education at The
University of the Arts. Certification that these financial obligations
can be met is required in order to qualify for the F- 1 visa. A
Certification of Finances form is sent to international students upon
receipt of their application. The form must be completed in English
and certified by a bank official. This statement must declare the
availability of funds of at least (U.S.) $3 1 ,340 to cover the cost of
one year of education and personal expenses. The 1-20, used to
apply for the F-1 visa, will not be issued without a valid
Certification of Finances. All F- 1 students are responsible for
obtaining immigration
information and following all the regulations in order to maintain
status. Page 2 of the 1-20 explains many of the obligations of an
F-1 student.
4. Financial Aid. International students may be considered for a
limited number of University-funded, merit-based scholarships.
These scholarships cover partial tuition costs only. Need-based
financial aid is not available. Students who are not U.S. citizens or
Permanent Residents may qualify for educational loans through an
International Student Loan Program (ISLP). Further information on
the ISLP may be obtained directly from:
International Education Finance Corporation
424 Adams Street
Milton, MA 02 186 USA
http://www.IEFC.com
5. Scliolarships. A limited number of partial merit scholarships
may be awarded to international students who demonstrate out-
standing academic and artistic achievement and potential.
International merit scholarship recipients are notified of the scholar-
ship award within two weeks of the ofter of admission.
Admission Requirements for Graduate
and Post-Baccalaureate Programs
The University of the Arts offers these graduate degrees:
Master of Fine Arts
Book Arts/Printmaking """
Ceramics
Museum Exhibition Planning and Design '
Painting
Sculpture
Master of Arts
Art Education
Museum Communication
Museum Education
Master of Arts in Teaching
Visual Arts
Music Education
Master of Industrial Design
Master of Music
Jazz Studies
In addition to the graduate programs. The University of the Arts
offers post-baccalaureate non-degree programs in Crafts and teacher
certification in Visual Arts. Please refer to the Table of Contents to
locate full program descriptions.
Candidates for graduate admission are strongly encouraged to file
the admission application and complete all admission requirements
early. The University has established several deadlines, after which
candidates' completed applications will be reviewed and notification
of admission and financial aid decisions issued. If space remains
available in the entering class after the published application dead-
line, applications will continue to be accepted and reviewed on a
rollino basis until the class is filled.
208
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Application Deadlines
Fall and Summer Enrollment
Application for fall admission and admission to the summer resi-
dence MFA (Ceramics, Painting, and Sculpture) programs may be
submitted as follows:
Priority Decision
Applications received and completed prior to February 1 for fall
or summer enrollment will be reviewed for priority consideration.
Applicants will be notified of the Admission Committee's decision
on or before March 15.
Rolling Admission
Applications received after February 1 for fall and summer enroll-
ment will be considered on a space-available basis and reviewed on
a rolling basis.
Spring Enrollment
Music. Museum Communication, Museum Education, and Art
Education accept applications for spring enrollment.
Regular Decision
Applications received and completed by November 15 will- be
notified of the admission decision on or before December 1 .
Rolling Admission
Applications received and completed after November 15 will be
considered on a space-available basis and reviewed on a rolling
basis. Candidates can generally expect to be notified of a decision
within two weeks of completing all application requirements.
Transfer of Credit
A maximum of six credits may be transferred and applied toward
graduate degree requirements with the approvabof the program
director and registrar. Only those graduate courses in which a grade
of "B" or higher has been earned may be considered for transfer
credit.
Graduate Application Requirements
All applicants for admission to graduate study at The University
of the Arts must hold a bachelor's degree from a U.S. institution that
is accredited by a recognized regional association, or have the equiv-
alent of a bachelor's degree from a foreign institution of acceptable
standards.
1. Application Form: All candidates are required to submit a
completed graduate application for admission and $50 application
fee. The fee for international applicants who are not U.S. citizens or
Permanent Residents is $75. The application fee will be waived for
University of the Arts alumni.
2. College Transcripts: An official transcript from each under-
graduate and graduate school attended is required of all applicants.
3. Recommendations: Applicants are required to submit three
letters of recommendation. Two of these recommendations must
come from professors or professionals in the area of the student's
intended major who are familiar with the applicant's capabilities
and credentials.
4. Personal Statement: Ail applicants are required to submit a
one- to two-page statement that describes their professional plans
and goals. The statement should be typed on a separate sheet of
paper and attached to the application. Applicants should list name,
Social Security number, and the semester for which they seek
admission on the statement.
5. Interview: A personal interview with the director of the pro-
gram to which the candidate is applying is strongly recommended.
Appointments should be scheduled directly with the department.
6. English Language Proficiency: Applicants for whom English
is not their first language are required to demonstrate proficiency in
English. The Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL) is
required for applicants who have been educated in non-English-
speaking countries. A minimum score of 550 on the paper-based
test, or 213 on the computer-based test, is required for graduate
admission, or level 1 12 in the English Language Program, offered
by any one of the more than 250 ELS Language Centers located
throughout the USA, must be successfully completed.
7. Financial Aid: Obtain the Free Application for Federal Student
Aid (FAFSA) and a Stafford Loan Application if applying for finan-
cial assistance. Submit the FAFSA to the Federal Student Aid
Program by February 15 for priority consideration. The Title IV
Code for The University of the Arts is 003350.
Graduate students who wish to be considered for grant assistance
should contact their department for additional information.
8. Special Requirements for Graduate Education Applicants:
Master of Arts in Teaching in Visual Arts (MAT)
Candidates for this program must hold a BFA or BA degree in art,
or equivalent, with 45 credits in studio art and 12 credits in art his-
tory, with a "B" or better cumulative average. They must also have
completed six credits in cellege-level math, three credits of English
composition, and three credits in American or British literature.
Master of Arts in Art Education (MA)
Candidates for this program must hold a BFA or BA degree in art,
or equivalent, with 45 credits in studio art and 12 credits in art his-
tory, with a "B" or better cumulative average. A teaching certificate
is not required.
Deficiencies in this minimum must be made up as prerequisites or
corequisites: a maximum of 12 such credits may be taken while a
matriculated graduate student. With approval of the program
director, a maximum of 6 studio credits may be applied to the elec-
tive requirements in the program.
Graduate Portfolio and Audition Information
Every student applying to the College of Art and Design must
submit a portfolio of his/her work. Every student applying to the
College of Pertbrming Arts must audition. An application must be
filed with the Admission Office before a portfolio review or audition
is scheduled. Please refer to the Graduate Application Form for spe-
cific requirements, which may be obtained through the Admission
Office.
Crafts Studio Post-Baccalaureate Certificate
Admission to the Crafts Studio Program is based on portfolio and
interview. The program is designed for students who already hold an
undergraduate degree. Applications may be obtained from the Office
of Admission. See Bachelor's Degree Holders in the Financial Aid
section of the catalos for additional information.
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
209
Post-Baccalaureate Teacher Program,
Pre-Certification Concentration in Art Education
Professional Semester
The Post-Baccalaureate Teacher Program, Pre-Certification
Concentration in Art Education, is only available to University of the
Arts/College of Art and Design alumni. The Professional Semester
is taken the semester after graduation and after all pre-certification
requirements have been met. except for AE 552 The Art of Teaching
and AE 659 Student Teaching Practicum. To be eligible to take the
Post-Baccalaureate Professional Semester, candidates must have a
"B" average and have successfully completed the Instructional I,
PRAXIS tests. They must also meet with the chair of the Art
Education Department and fill out a Student Teaching Application
the semester prior to student teaching.
Post-Baccalaureate Teacher Program
(Non-Degree)
Candidates for this program must hold a BFA or BA degree in art,
or equivalent, with 45 credits in studio art and 12 credits in art his-
tory, with a "B" or better cumulative average. They must also have
completed six credits in college-level math, three credits of English
composition, and three credits in American or British literature. In
addition, candidates must have successfully completed the
Instructional I, PRAXIS tests.
Credits earned in the Post-Baccalaureate Teacher Program (Non-
Degree) may not be converted to graduate credits or be considered
for transfer credit in a graduate program.
Applications may be obtained from The University of the Arts
Office of Continuing Studies.
Tuition and Expenses
Mariann Cardonick
mcardonick@uarts.edu
Manager, Student Billing Office
Second Floor, Dorrance Hamilton Hall
215-717-6187
Undergraduate Tuition and Fees
Annual tuition is charged to all full-time undergraduate students,
with one-half payable prior to the start of each semester. Full-time
students carry a minimum of 12 credits per semester and may carry
up to 18 credits without incurring additional charges. Excess credits
are subject to additional charges at the standard semester credit rate.
Permission of the dean of the appropriate college is required for a
student to carry more than 1 8 credits in one semester.
In addition to the annual tuition charge, all students registered for
12 credits or more are required to pay an annual general student fee.
The general student fee is applied toward the cost of library facili-
ties, studio and computer operations, orientation, student activities,
and special services, including health services, placement, and regis-
tration. The annual general student fee is not refundable.
Students registering for fewer than 12 credits are charged per
credit. There may be additional course fees or charges, which may
include deposits, the cost of expendable materials, and lab fees in
selected studio classes. Lab fees, in particular, are most common in
the Crafts and Media Arts departments. Please contact those depart-
ments directly for more information. In addition, private lessons for
students who are not enrolled in the School of Music will carry an
additional fee. Reservation deposits for housing and tuition are cred-
ited to the student's bill and are not refundable.
Schedule of Annual Undergraduate
Charges and Fees
2003-2004 Academic Year
Full-time tuition
(12-18 credits/semester)
Tuition per credit
General Student Fee
; 20,860
$904
$ 850 (all full-time students)
Housing Fees
Housing:
Barleigh Residence
Pine Residence
Furness Residence
1228 Spruce Residence
311 Juniper Residence
Housing reservation deposit
Housing damage deposit
$ 5,450
$5,248-5,670
$4,710-5,390
$5,450-5,990
$5,890-6,200
$200
$ 200 (refundable)
Graduate Tuition and Fees
Graduate students are considered full-time if enrolled in at least
nine credits. Teacher Certification students in Visual Arts are consid-
ered full-time at nine credits. Full-time graduate students pay annual
tuition plus the general student fee. General student fee charges are
the same for graduate and undergraduate students. Tuition for part-
time graduate studies is charged on a per-credit basis.
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
A student who has completed all the course requirements for the
master's degree and is currently working on the graduate
project/thesis, either on or off-campus, must register and pay a grad-
uate project continuation fee (equal to the cost of 0.5
credit/semester) until all degree requirments are met. Students com-
pleting a degree in the summer must pay the fee in the final
semester. This registration, through the Office of the Registrar, is
required in each semester until all degree requirements are met.
A student without an approved leave of absence who does not reg-
ister each semester will be considered to have withdrawn from
candidacy for the degree. Students who have not maintained contin-
uous registration must apply through the Office of the Registrar for
readmission to the program, and will be retroacrively charged for the
intervening semesters.
Schedule of Annual Graduate
Charges and Fees
2003-2004 Academic Year
Full-time tuition $20,860 (9-18 credits/semester)
Tuifion per credit $ 1,059
General Student Fee $ 850 (all full-time students)
Tuition Payments and Financial
Responsibility
Payment in full for each semester is required before students may
attend classes. Tuition invoices are mailed to students each July and
November. Students who have not made arrangements to pay their
tuition, fees, housing, and/or any other financial obligations to the
University before the first day of classes each semester are subject to
having their registration cancelled for that semester and losing their
class places. Cancelled registrations can only be reinstated with the
approval of the Student Billing Office and are subject to a late pay-
ment fee of $60.
The first-semester bill must be paid by mid-August and the
second-semester bill must be paid by mid-December. Any amount
unpaid after the due date as indicated on the invoice is subject to a
late payment fee of S60 unless an alternative payment plan has been
arranged through TMS (see "Payment Plans'"). Settlement of all
financial obligations of the University rests with the student or the
student's parents if the student has not attained independent adult
status.
Failure to receive a tuition statement does not excuse a student
from paying tuition and fees before attending classes each semester.
Student accounts are considered settled when students receive
Business Office Approval and a validated ID card.
Any unpaid balance at the end of the semester will be referred to
the University's outside collection agency for collection and legal
action. Students or their paying agents will be responsible for all
collection costs and attorney fees.
Methods of Payment
Students who wish to make their tuition payment directly to the
University may use one of the following methods of payment:
1. Check
2. Certified check
3. Money order
4. Wire Transfer (Before arranging for a wire tiansfer. please call
the University for details about the process: 215-717-6194.)
Payment Plans
As a service to our students and their parents, the University
offers a commercially-sponsored tuition payment plan. The plan
allows for the total sum of all tuition and fees to be paid over 10
months, from May through February.
Tuition Management Systems. Inc. (TMS), offers a budget plan
that allows you to pay all or part of your annual charges in 10
monthly installments for a nominal annual administrative fee. A sep-
arate insurance program is also available to participants with this
plan. For more information contact TMS at 1-800-722-4867.
Acceptance of Credit Cards
The University only accepts credit cards for payment of new stu-
dent application fees. Continuing Education programs, and
purchases made at the bookstore. Due to the high cost of merchant
service fees imposed by credit card companies and banks, the
University does not accept credit cards for payment of undergrad-
uate and graduate tuition, housing charges, and the general fee. For
those who prefer to use credit cards for their convenience or for
reward/bonus programs. Tuition Management Systems. Inc.
(TMS — see Payment Plans, above) provides two options. You may
use your credit card either to make your monthly payments to TMS
or to pay the tuition in full. TMS will not assess a separate enroll-
ment fee for these options. However, their contract levies a
convenience fee. between two to three percent of the balance
charged. For more detailed information, please call TMS at 1-800-
722-4867.
Tuition Remission and Discounts
Students are entitled to only one type of tuition discount (i.e.,
alumni discount, sibling discount, spousal di.scount. etc.) in any
given academic year. For more information, contact the Office of the
Registrar at 215-717-6420.
Alumni Discount
Sons and daughters of alumni of the University of the Arts are eli-
gible for a 10 percent remission on their tuition. To qualify, a student
must present to the Registrar an original or notarized copy of the
long-form birth certificate, which lists the names of both parents.
For purposes of this policy, alumni are defined as graduates who
have received a diploma, degree, or certificate as a matriculated
student in an undergraduate or graduate program from either
the College of Art and Design, the College of Media and
Communication or the College of Performing Arts, excluding the
Evening or Continuing Education divisions of each College. The
discount will be issued commensurate with the number of years that
a student's alumni parents attended the University (i.e., if an
alumnus received a certificate from a two-year program, the dis-
count would be off'ered for only two years).
Sibling Discount
Families that have two or more members simultaneously
attending The University of the Arts are eligible for a tuition remis-
sion. To qualify, a student must present to the Registrar an original
or notarized copy of the long-form birth certificate, which lists the
names of both parents. The youngest member of the family may
receive a 10 percent tuition remission each semester during which
both are full-time matriculating students.
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Spousal Discount
A husband and wife attending The University of the Arts are eh'-
gible for tuition remission. To qualify, presentation of an original or
notarized copy of the certificate of marriage must be submitted to
the Registrar. The second person of the married couple to register at
the University may receive a 10 percent tuition remission each
semester during which they are both full-time matriculated students.
Housing Fees
Students are not permitted to move into University housing until
all tuition and fees are paid in full. A damage deposit is required of
all students who live in University housing. This deposit is held in
escrow and will be refunded to the student after the apartment is
vacated. Any charges for damage to the apartment will be subtracted
from this deposit. An additional Housing Reservation Deposit is
required to reserve a space in University housing. This deposit will
be credited to the student's bill and is not refundable.
Special Charges and Fees
Application Fee
An application fee of $50 is required with every application for
admission or readmission.
Tuition Deposit
Once the student has been accepted for admission to the
University, a $300 tuition deposit is required to reserve a place in the
class. This deposit will be credited to the student's bill and is not
refundable after May 1 . The tuition deposit must be paid in U.S. dol-
lars within three weeks of the offer of admission. Please refer to the
Admissions section of this catalog for more complete information.
Late Registration
A late registration fee of $35 will be charged to any student regis-
tering after the dates listed in the Academic Calendar.
Late Payment
A late payment fee of $60 will be charged to any student failing to
pay his or her tuition and/or housing bill by the due date.
Bad Checi< Penalty
A $25 fine is charged for all checks issued to the University and
not p.aid upon presentafion to the bank. A hold will be placed on all
official student docuinents until the original charge is paid in addi-
tion to the fine. A "flag" will be placed on the student's account and,
for a period of one year, payment with a personal check will not be
permitted. At the end of one year the student may appeal to the
Billing Manager to review his/her payment history. All balances will
be referred to a collection agency if repayment is not made.
Transcript Fee
A $5 fee is charged to students requesting an official transcript
from the University. Please refer to the Academic Policies section in
the front of this catalog under Transcript Request Procedures for
more information.
Tuition Refund Policy and Procedures
By registering for classes, students accept responsibility for
paying charges for the entire semester/term, regardless of the
method of payment and attendance in class.
Students who are considering withdrawing (either from the
University or individual classes) should seriously consider the finan-
cial consequences. Depending on the time of withdrawal, balances
may still be owed to the University, the Federal Government (if a
Title IV program aid recipient), State Governments, Agencies, loan
providers, and other non-University grantors of scholarships and
awards. Students are urged to meet with a financial aid counselor to
discuss the monetary impact of withdrawal and their eligibility for
aid in the current and future semesters.
General Refund Policy
Fall or Spring Semester
Tuition Charged
Tuition Refunded
Withdrawal occurring:
Prior to first day of classes 0%
100%
Before end of second week 20%
80%
Before end of third week 60%
40%
After end of third week 100%
0%
0%
100%
20%
80%
60%
40%
00%
0%
Summer Sessions
Withdrawal occurring:
Prior to first day of classes
Before end of first week
Before end of second week
After end of second week
The following items will be excluded from the refund calculation:
1. The comprehensive fee.
2. Supplies, which are considered 100 percent expended upon
purchase.
3. Books, which are considered 50 percent expended during the
first week of classes and 100 percent thereafter.
4. The documented cost of any equipment issued to the student
and not returned in good condition.
5. Library fines and late fees.
6. Security deposits, which will be returned separately once it has
been determined that no damages or fines have been assessed.
Retention of Federal Title IV Program Funds
Students should understand that withdrawing from the University
may cause them to owe more money than if they had remained to
complete the semester/term.
Withdrawing students who have been awarded Title IV Program
aid funds are permitted to retain a pro-rata portion of these funds as
an offset (payment) against tuition charges prior to completion of 60
percent of any Term or Summer Session. After the 60 percent mark,
all such aid is treated as 100 percent earned. Title IV Program or
Federal funds would include PELL and SEOG grants, and Perkins,
Stafford, and PLUS loans.
For example, a student withdrawing during a fall or spring terni
on the 20th calendar day after the start of classes retains 19 percent
of the total Title IV aid awarded (excluding Federal Work Study).
This percentage is calculated by dividing the 20 days completed by
the 105 total days in the term (including Saturdays, Sundays, and
holidays). This retained aid is then applied against the remaining
balance of tuition charges calculated under the general refund
The University of the Ails Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
policy. The balance of the Title IV aid-or 81 percent-must be
returned to the appropriate issuer. If this student also received
University awards (non-Title IV Program), the same retention per-
centage would apply.
If a student withdrew after 60 percent of the term was completed,
or on the 63rd day. 100 percent of the aid would be retained.
A student withdrawing during a Summer Session on the 20th cal-
endar day after the start of classes retains 47.6 percent of the total
Title IV aid awarded. This percentage is calculated by dividing the
20 days completed by the 42 total days in the session (including
Saturdays, Sundays, and holidays). This retained aid is then applied
against the remaining balance of tuition charges calculated under the
general refund policy. If this student also received University awards
(non-Title IV program), the same retention percentage would apply.
If a student withdrew after 60 percent of the term was completed,
or on the 25th day, 100 percent of the aid would be retained.
That portion of Federal Title IV aid that will be returned to the
issuer must be repaid in the following order:
1 . Unsubsidized Federal Stafford Loan
2. Subsidized Federal Stafford Loan
3. Federal PLUS Loan
4. Federal Perkins Loan
5. Federal Pell Grant . .
6. Federal SEOG Aid
7. Any other Title IV program aid
8. Other federal, state, or private student financial assistance
' 9. To the student
Retention of University Scholarships,
Grants, and Awards
Withdrawing students who have received University Scholarships.
Grants, and Awards are permitted to retain a portion of these funds
as an offset (payment) against tuition charges based on the duration
of attendance. For those students not receiving any Title IV program
aid, the portion retained is the same as the tuition charged under the
general refund policy. For example, a student without any Title IV
aid withdrawing before the end of the third week of classes will be
liable for 60 percent of tuition charges. This same student will also
receive credit for 60 percent of any University aid awarded.
If a withdrawing student received Title IV Program aid in
addition to University Scholarships and Awards, the total amount
of aid retained from both sources is calculated using the Federal
Title IV rules.
Financial Holds
Students who do not satisfy their financial obligations to the
University will have a financial hold placed on their record. Such a
hold may result in cancellation of the student's preregistration and
will prevent the student from being permitted to register for future
courses unfil the financial hold is lifted. Furthermore, students with
outstanding financial obligations to the University will not be eli-
gible to receive official copies of their transcripts or their diplomas.
To avoid incurring late fees and/or a hold on academic records, stu-
dents are expected to make arrangements to pay all tuition, fees,
library fines and fees, and dormitory charges by the due date on their
bill. Students are encouraged to apply early for financial aid.
Financial Aid
AquilaW. Galgon
finaid@uarts.edu
Director of Financial Aid
Second Floor, Dorrance Hamilton Hall
215-717-6170
The University of the Arts offers a variety of financial aid pro-
grams to assist students in meeting their educational goals. Aid may
be offered in the form of grants, scholarships, loans, or employment,
and is funded through federal, state, institutional, or private organi-
zations. Grants and scholarships are considered gift aid and need not
be repaid. Loans, which must be repaid, are usually offered at a low
interest rate and have an extended repayment period.
Financial need is defined as the difference between the cost of
education and the family's federally calculated contribution to these
costs, the Expected Family Contribution (HFC). Where need exists,
the University assists in meeting costs within the resources available
to the institution.
Eligibility for aid is based upon the applicant's financial need, the
ability to meet individual program requirements, and the availability
of funding.
Typically. 75 percent of the University's students enrolled on a
full-time basis are eligible for some type of need-based aid.
Therefore all students, undergraduate and graduate, are encouraged
to apply.
Information on application procedures, types of aid, program
requirements, educational costs as determined by the University, and
the students' rights and responsibilities is detailed in the following
pages. Most general questions will be answered in these pages.
Contact the Financial Aid Office to speak with your counselor for
assistance with any specific questions you may have.
Eligibility Criteria
In order to qualify for financial aid a student must;
• Be a U.S. citizen, or eligible non-citizen per Immigration and
Naturalization Service (INS) regulations.
• Be admitted to the University.
• Not have received a bachelor's degree or its equivalent. Some
forms of aid are offered to post-undergraduate students as
specifically noted under "Bachelor's Degree Holders."
• Not have received aid for the maximum number of allowable
semesters (eight).
• Not have defaulted on a previous federal loan.
• Be matriculated in a program that terminates in a degree
or certificate.
• Be enrolled as a full-time student. (A full-time student is one
who is registered for at least 12 credits per semester.) The
University offers some types of financial aid to part-time stu-
dents. For undergraduates, part-time is defined as 6-1 1.5 credits.
For graduate students, part-time is defined as 4.5-8.5 credits.
Some forms of aid are offered to less than full-time students as
specifically noted under "Part-Time Students."
• Maintain satisfactory academic progress as defined by the
University.
• Apply for financial aid by the deadline.
, • Demonstrate financial need as determined by the analysis of the
Free Application for Federal Student Aid (FAFSA).
iity of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
213
Deadlines
Deadlines are used to assist the University in determining how
many students wish to be considered for aid from the available
funds. We also use deadlines so that we will receive the necessary
information, and be able to forward a response to you, in time for
you to make important decisions regarding your enrollment plans.
Students who miss the filing deadlines may not receive all of the
aid for which they may have been eligible. Late applicants are also
subject to out-of-pocket expenditures for aid that has not been
processed, as well as the withholding of registration and class atten-
dance in the event of outstanding balances.
All eligible students are considered for financial assistance
regardless of filing date, depending upon availability of funds.
However. University-administered funds will not be used to replace
federal or state grants, or loans for which a student may have been
eligible but for which he/she failed to apply successfully.
Currently Enrolled Students
The University of tiie Arts' postmark deadline for submission
of tlie FAFSA is Marcli 15, 2004.
All students who plan to attend the University during the Fall
2004 or Spring 2005 semesters must file the FAFSA by the above
deadline. Incomplete applications, and applicafions submitted after
March 15 will be considered only after on-time applicafions have
been awarded. Some types of aid {University Grants, Scholarships,
SEOG Grants, Perkins Loans, Federal Work Study, and PHEAA
Grants) are awarded on an on-fime basis and may not be available to
otherwise eligible but late applicants.
New Students
Tiie University of tlie Arts' postmarli deadline for submission
of the FAFSA is March 1,2004.
All students who plan to attend the University during the Fall
2004 or Spring 2005 semesters must file the FAFSA by the above
deadline. Incoming students are considered on a rolling, funds-avail-
able basis after the 1 st. Applicants are advised to submit all
application materials by March 1, or as soon as possible. Some
sources of funding (as above) are limited and will not be available to
otherwise eligible but late apphcants.
Award Letter Deadlines
The response date on the award letter is the date by which the
University requests confirmafion of the acceptance of the
University's offer of financial aid. (Financial aid includes all offers
of Scholarships, Grants, Loans, and Work Study.) Students are not
obligated to the University in any way by confirming the award, and
will not be penalized in any way by doing so. By confirming the
award, the student reserves those funds.
If the University does not receive a confirmation from the stu-
dent we will assume that he/she does not wish these funds to be
reserved, and will rescind the entire financial aid offer.
New students are strongly urged to confirm their awards from the
University of the Arts even if they have not made their final college
choice.
Stafford/PLUS Application Deadline:
The March 15, 2004, Stafford/PLUS deadline is a suggested
deadline. Eligibility for these loans will not be affected if applica-
fions are submitted after March 15. Students should submit loan
application(s) as soon as they have decided which college to
attend in the fall because loan applications require six to eight weeks
of processing time.
We cannot guarantee that loan applications that are submitted
after May 1 , 2004, will be processed in time for fall billing. If a loan
applicafion(s) is submitted late, the student will be required to pay
tuition from other resources and then wait to be reimbursed from
loan proceeds.
PHEAA State Grant Deadlines-All Students
The state's deadline for receipt of the completed FAFSA applica-
tion is May 1, 2004, for the following year (2004-2005).
Applications received after that date may render a student ineligible
for PHEAA Grants as well as the other types of aid specified above.
Duration of Eligibility
Under federal and University guidelines, undergraduate students
may continue to receive financial aid for only eight semesters, or
until the first baccalaureate degree or its equivalent has been earned.
Students are no longer eligible for aid once they have either com-
pleted the requirements for the degree or have completed the
equivalent number of credits.
Students may not receive undergraduate grants to complete
minors, double degrees, or teacher certification programs that extend
beyond eight semesters.
Students are not permitted to delay graduation in order to con-
tinue their eligibility for aid.
Students can also exhaust their eligibility for financial aid by
failing or withdrawing from courses.
If you have questions about your states please contact the
Financial Aid Office.
Financial Aid Application Procedure
Prerequisite
To be considered for financial aid, students must be accepted for
admission to the University or be currently enroUed and making sat-
isfactory academic progress as defined by the University.
Requisite
All students who wish to be considered for financial aid must file
the Free Applicafion for Federal Student Aid (FAFSA). The infor-
mation must be released to the U.S. Department of Education and to
the University.
The FAFSA is basic to the University's Financial Aid application
process and is essential to the determination of the student's ehgi-
bility for all types of aid (Pell, FSEOG, and PHEAA Grants,
University Scholarships, as well as Federal Work Study and loans).
A student cannot be considered for any type of financial aid until a
correct and complete FAFSA has been processed.
The University does not require the CSS, ACT. FAF, Profile,
or other financial aid applicafions to be considered for financial
assistance.
The Department of Education has provided an easy way to apply
electronically for aid. With Internet access, the FAFSA can be com-
pleted and filed at http://www.fafsa.ed.gov.
Students can also file using software provided by the Department
of Education by downloading the FAFSA Express from the Depart-
ment's Web page at http://www.ed.gov/offices/OPE/express.html.
Remember, no matter how a student decides to file, he/she should
submit only ONE applicafion each year.
214
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
The paper FAFSA application must be mailed directly to the
processor in the envelope provided and requires approximately four
weeks to process.
Transfer students may be required to submit financial aid tran-
scripts to the University from post-secondary institutions attended in
the current year, whether or not aid was received. This regulation
applies to transfer students who enroll beginning in January. It does
not apply to transfer students who enroll beginning in September.
Declining Financial Aid
If a student declines his/her offer of financial aid or admission, the
University will rescind all offers of financial assistance (scholar-
ships, grants, loans, and work study). If that student later decides to
enroll at the University, he/she will be reconsidered for assistance at
that point. Eligibility for financial assistance may be greatly reduced
at a later point, and will be determined on a funds-available basis.
Title IV Code
? The University's Federal Title IV code is 003350.
State Grant Information
Residents of Pennsylvania (per PHEAA"s guidelines) will be eval-
uated for a PHEAA Grant by filing the FAFSA. PHEAA deadline
May 1. FAFSA serves as the state grant application.
Residents of Alaska, Connecticut, Delaware, District of
Columbia, Maine, Massachusetts, Ohio, Rhode Island, Vermont, or
West Virginia, please note these additional deadlines:
Connecticut deadline February 1 : state grant application required.
District of Columbia deadline June 28: district grant application
required.
Rhode Island deadline March 1 : FAFSA seires as state grant
application.
I . West Virginia deadline June 28: state grant application required.
Students who are residents of these states and are currently
receiving a state grant MUST file the Free Application for Federal
Student Aid (FAFSA). A separate state grant application form may
also need to be submitted to the higher educadon assistance agency
in the student's home state.
If the state grant can be used in Pennsylvania, it is "portable."
Portable state grants may be less at UArts than if used at a college in
a student's home state.
Residents of states not listed above are prevented by their state
from using their state grants in Pennsylvania.
Types of Aid
Each student who completes a FAFSA will be considered for all
of the following types of aid. Parental enrollment will not be consid-
ered when eligibility for University aid is calculated.
Institutional Scholarships
and Grants
University Scholarships
University Scholarships are awarded on the basis of academic
excellence and demonstrated talent. The Presidential, Promising
, Artist, and Artist Grant are types of University Scholarships.
University Scholarships are awarded v^hen students are admitted.
Those students who demonstrate exceptional artistic ability and out-
standing academic achievement will be considered for University
scholarships.
To assist students and their families with financial planning for
their enrollment, scholarship amounts are fixed and renewable so
long as the student makes academic progress.
Named Scholarships
The University offers a number of scholarships that have been
donated by individuals or groups to help support promising artists.
These named scholarships are awarded based on need and merit.
University Grant
University Grants are need-based and are awarded by the
Financial Aid Office to supplement all other financial aid assistance.
Students must be enrolled for at least 12 credits in order to receive
Institutional Aid that is merit-based.
Federal/State Grants
Pell Grant
The Pell Grant is a federally funded program that awarded indi-
\'idual grants in amounts ranging from 5400 to $4,000 in 2002-2003.
Pell Grants are awarded to students who have not received a bach-
elor's degree nor been aided for the maximum number of semesters
allowed.
Eligibility is determined by the federal government and notifica-
fion is sent directly to the student in the form of a Student Aid
Report (SAR). The student should expect to receive the SAR
approximately four weeks after the FAFSA has been filed. The SAR
should be reviewed for accuracy and corrected if necessary. The cor-
rect SAR should be retained by the student as confirmation of
receipt of the FAFSA. Students must enroll for at least three credits
in order to be eligible for the Pell Grant.
University scholarships are awarded when students are admitted.
Those students who demonstrate exceptional artistic ability and out-
standing academic achievement will be considered for University
scholarships.
To assist students and their families with financial planning for
their enrollment, scholarship amounts are fixed and renewable so
long as the student makes academic progress.
PHEAA Grant
Awards are made to Pennsylvania residents who have not
attained the bachelor's degree nor been aided for the maximum
number of semesters allowed (eight).
Eligible students must demonstrate financial need, Pennsylvania
residency, and be enrolled for at least six credits. To continue to be
eligible for state grant assistance, a full-time student must complete
a minimum of 24 credits per academic year
An award letter may indicate an estimated state grant amount;
however, eligibility is determined by the state, and official notifica-
tion is sent directly to the student beginning in May.
NOTE: Students must meet state residency requirements in accor-
dance with PHEAA guidelines. PHEAA's filing deadline is
May 1.
Other states have scholarship programs for their residents.
Information and applications are available from the respective state
boards of education.
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
215
Federal Supplemental Educational
Opportunity Grant (FSEOG)
FSEOG is a federally funded University administered program.
These grants are awarded to needy students who do not hold a bach-
elor's degree. Typically. FSEOG grants are first awarded to Pell
Grant recipients who have met the fihng deadlines on a funds-avail-
able basis.
Outside Scholarships
The University encourages students to explore all options for out-
side scholarship assistance. Local businesses, foundations, churches,
ijnions, civic organizations, etc., often sponsor scholarships that can
be used toward educational costs.
A good place to begin the search for outside scholarships is on-
line at www.fastweb.com. This is a free scholarship search service.
The University of the Arts does not recommend that students pay
fees for financial aid information, or for scholarship searches.
■ As a service to students, the Financial Aid Office maintains a
scholarship notebook containing useful information about such
funding. This notebook may be viewed in the Financial Aid Office.
The Financial Aid Office must be notified if any additional
awards are received. Notification of all grants and scholarships will
be included in the award letter.
Student Loans
Student loans are available at low interest rates (capping at 8.25
percent), and with extended repayment terms to assist students in
meeting both tuition and living expenses. Because loan indebtedness
has serious implications, students should carefully consider the
amount of their borrowing (both yearly and cumulative) and borrow
the minimum necessary to reasonably meet those expenses that
remain above the Financial Aid Award.
Students wishing to borrow should secure an application from the
bank of their choice. All students, regardless of state of residency,
may borrow from Pennsylvania banks and are urged to do so. The
Financial Aid Office can provide an application from one of our rec-
ommended lenders.
All students must use the new Stafford application called the
Master Promissory Note (MPN). Returning Students may secure a
MPN from the same lender used previously. New Students' award
letter package should include an MPN.
Students who have previously received a Stafford using an MPN
are not required to file another MPN for 10 years.
Students who use PHEAA lenders must sijbmit all loan applica-
tions (MPN and PLUS) directiy to PHEAA. Students who use
out-of-state guarantors must submit loan applications to the
University's Financial Aid Office.
Students are encouraged to use a lender having PHEAA as a guar-
antor. PHEAA has reduced the fees charged on student loans and
provides financial incentives during repayment.
If the student has previously borrowed under any of the student
loan programs, he or she is encouraged to use the same bank to
avoid having multiple loan payments upon graduation.
(Pennsylvania borrowers are required to use the same lender.)
All loan applications are based on the FAFSA application; thus
this application is prerequisite to the filing of the loan application.
While the loan application is an element of the Financial Aid
application process, it is also a separate transaction between the stu-
dent and his or her bank. It is critical that the student understand that
it is he or she alone who is responsible for repaying funds borrowed.
and that for most students this will be the most serious long-term
financial obligation yet undertaken.
All first-time borrowers are required to attend an Entrance Interview
before loan funds will be released by the University. Additional infor-
mation will be available at orientation and registration.
All students must submit the Stafford Loan Application by
March 15.
Graduating students who have borrowed under any federal loan
program (as well as those who leave the University prior to gradu-
ating) are required to attend an Exit Interview. Students intending to
discontinue enrollment at the University must contact the Financial
Aid Office.
Student Loan Programs
Federal Perkins Loan (Perkins)
Perkins is a federal loan that is need-based and is awarded by the
University. The Federal Perkins Loan is currentiy offered at a fixed
five percent interest rate and is repayable to the University over a
maximum 10-year period. Repayment begins nine months after
graduation or cessation of at least half-time enrollment at an eligible
institution in an approved program of study.
Because Perkins loan funds are limited, this loan is offered to the
earliest applicants whose Expected Family Contribution (EEC) is
lowest. Perkin loans are usually awarded to freshman and sopho-
more students (junior and senior students have greater eligibility for
Stafford loans). Notification of eligibility for this loan is included in
the award letter.
Parent Plus Loan For Undergraduate Students
(PLUS)
The parent of a dependent student may borrow up to the cost of
education (which includes living expenses) minus any other finan-
cial aid the student is scheduled to receive. Repayment begins 60
days after loan funds have been disbursed. The PLUS loan interest
rate is variable and caps at nine percent. Approval for the PLUS loan
is based upon credit history.
Loan applications are available from the lender of the student's
choice. The parent must borrow from the same lender the student
has chosen for the Stafford loan, unless that lender does not pailici-
pate in the PLUS program. A PLUS loan cannot be approved until a
complete FAFSA has been processed.
Typically the loan application process requires six to eight weeks.
In order to deduct the anticipated proceeds from a PLUS loan from
the invoice, the loan must have been approved. Therefore, parents
wishing to use PLUS proceeds toward the fall balance must submit a
complete application by March 15 in order to deduct the amount of
the anticipated loan check from the fall invoice.
NJ Class Loan
If a student's parent is a New Jersey resident, he/she may be inter-
ested in the NJ Class loan, which may allow payments to be deferred
while the student is enrolled. For information and application forms
call 1-800-792-8670, or visit www.state.nj. us/treasury /osa.
2l6
The University of the Ans Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Federal Stafford Student Loan (Stafford)
-Applications for the Stafford loan are available from the lender of
the student's choice.
The University is pleased to recommend a preferred lender to
those students who have not previously borrowed. Please contact the
Financial Aid Office for additional information.
A Stafford loan cannot be approved until a complete FAFSA has
been processed. Students wishing to use proceeds from the Stafford
loan must submit a complete application by March 15. Students who
use Pennsylvania lenders must submit the loan application directly
to the lender. Students who use out-of-state lenders must submit the
loan application directly to the Financial Aid Office.
Under federal regulations, only one Stafford loan may be
processed for each student each year.
I
Stafford Loan Eligibility
Undergraduate Students
Undergraduate students are required to register for at least six
credits each semester in order to receive funding from the Stafford
program.
Stafford loan eligibility is determined based upon the number of
credits the undergraduate student has completed, according to the
following schedule:
- 29.75 credits Freshman maximum $2,625
30 - 59.75 credits Sophomore maximum $3,500
60 - 89.75 credits Junior maximum $5,500
90 -I- credits Senior maximum $5,500
The above loan amounts may be subsidized or unsubsidized
depending upon the student's financial eligibility. If the loan is sub-
sidized the student is not responsible for making any interest or
principal payments during enrollment. If the loan is unsubsidized
the student is responsible for making interest payments during
enrollment.
Undergraduate students who are independent and dependent stu-
dents whose parents cannot qualify for the PLUS loan are eligible
for the following additional amounts under the Unsubsidized
Stafford Program. .
- 29.75 credits Freshman maximum $4,000
30 -59.75 credits Sophomore maximum $4,000
60 - 89.75 credits Junior maximum $5,000
90 -I- credits Senior maximum $5,000
Graduate Students
Graduate Students are required to register for at least 4.5 credits
each semester in order to receive funding from the Stafford program.
Subsidized Stafford Loan Eligibility up to $ 8.500
Unsubsidized Stafford Loan Eligibility up to $10,000
(Total graduate maximum Stafford eligibility per academic year
$18,500)
PLUS/Stafford
The lender will deduct Origination and insurance fees from
Stafford and PLUS loans before they are disbursed. These fees can
total up to four percent of the principal amount borrowed. Thus, the
amount available from the loan to pay educational costs may be less
than the amount initially borrowed.
Students who are in default on a federal loan are not eligible for
Stafford or Perkins loans, or other financial aid while enrolled at The
University of the Arts.
Students and their parents are strongly urged to make an appoint-
ment in the Financial Aid Office to discuss questions regarding any
of the student loan programs.
PHEAA Loan Line (to check on the status of your loan):
1-800-692-7392 or www.pheaa.org
Remember:
If a student uses his/her Stafford or PLUS loan proceeds toward the
fall invoice, he/she must submit the loan application(s) by March 15.
Disbursement Amount
The lender will deduct origination and insurance fees from
Stafford. PLUS, and other alternative loans before they are dis-
bursed. These fees can total up to four percent (or more for some
alternative loans) of the principal amount; thus, the amount available
from the loan to pay educational costs may be less than the amount
borrowed.
Student Employment
Federal Work Study (FWS)
FWS is a federally funded program administered by the
University. Eligibility for this program is based upon the availability
of funds to the University and the student's EEC.
The Financial Aid Office will make a determination of the stu-
dent's eligibility to earn money through the FWS Program.
Notification of eligibility will be included in the Award letter.
A FWS award is not an offer or a guarantee of a job; it is the
amount a student is eligible to earn should she or he secure a job.
Work study awards are not applied against the invoice. Payment is
made directly to employed students by University payroll check.
Eligible students are permitted to work up to 20 hours weekly
when classes are in session. Students are paid at least minimum
wage and hours may be arranged to accommodate the class
schedule. The 2003-2004 FWS award can be used between
July 1.2003 and June 30. 2004.
Jobs are usually available throughout the University in academic
departments, security. University offices, the library, etc. Positions
require various levels of skill and experience.
For students who are interested in working in the larger commu-
nity, there are several off-campus work study positions available.
These jobs are located at sites such as community and arts organiza-
tions, theaters, and museums.
The Student Employment Handbook contains expanded informa-
tion about FWS and NEWS, job openings, and additional
information for fall placement. The handbook is available in the
Financial Aid Office in late summer
Non-Federal Work Study (NFWS)
Students who do not qualify to work under the Federal Work
Study program may work on-campus under the NFWS program.
The University of tlie Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
217
Information about job availability and placement is as listed in the
Federal Work Study section.
The Student Employment Handbook details all of the regulations
governing the Federal and non-Federal Work Study programs.
Students are reminded that falsifying time cards is a criminal
offense, which can subject them to criminal prosecution, discipli-
nary action, expulsion, and loss of all financial aid.
Award Notification
Award letters will be sent to new students beginning in March and
to returning students beginning in June. The Financial Aid Office
staff will be available to counsel students at any point during the
application process. Students should be aware that some aid is con-
ditional on the availability of funds to the University, and if these
funds are reduced, the University will reduce aid accordingly.
Students must return a signed award letter with acceptance of aid.
Failure to return the award letter may result in cancellation of aid.
If an award is estimated, that means some additional steps must
be taken before the student can receive those funds, such as com-
pleting verification. To receive the Stafford, the student must submit
the loan application and his/her funds must be disbursed. Stafford
loan proceeds are disbursed electronically or by paper check. He/she
must endorse the Perkins loan promissory note in order for this loan
to be credited to his/her account.
Additional steps are required to claim these forms
of financial aid:
Federal Work Study
In order to claim a FWS award the student must locate an eligible
job. Once hired, the student must come to the Financial Aid Office to
complete the necessary payroll paperwork. Students cannot work,
nor can they be paid, until this paperwork is submitted and proper
identification is documented. FWS cannot be deducted from the
tuifion invoice.
Pell Grant
Approximately four weeks after the FAFSA is filed, the student
will receive a Student Aid Report (SAR). This document will notify
a student as to Pell Grant eligibility. All of the information on the
SAR must be correct and complete.
The award letter will list the Pell Grant amount. Changes to the
FAFSA information may affect the student's Pell Grant eligibility.
Perkins Loan
To claim these funds the student must endorse a Perkins promis-
sory note in the Student Billing Office. Funds cannot be credited
until a complete, correct note is negotiated.
PLUS and Stafford Loans
These loans must be applied for through the student's lender
Proceeds from these loans are disbursed to the University. Most
Stafford loans will be disbursed to the University electronically and
will not require the student's signature. If a student loan is disbursed
by check, it cannot be credited to his/her account until he/she signs
the check. (Stafford loan checks will be available in the Finance
Office for signature; PLUS checks will be mailed to the parent bor-
rower.)
The award notice is subject to revision under the following
circumstances:
1. If government funding levels to the University are reduced,
individual awards will be adjusted accordingly.
2. Verification - The Financial Aid Office is required by federal
reguladon to resolve any discrepancies in information submitted per
verificafion with that already in a student's file. Any discrepancies
may result in revision to a student's aid amounts and/or types.
3. As above, if at any point in the year we become aware of infor-
mation that conflicts with other documentation in the student's file,
we will resolve the discrepancy and revise the award accordingly.
4. Outside Scholarships - Per federal regulation, a student is not
permitted to be "overawarded." That is, a student's total amount of
scholarships, grants, loans, and work study may not exceed the stu-
dent's calculated need. If a student would be overawarded due to an
outside scholarship, we are required to adjust the other elements of
the aid package to eliminate the overaward. We encourage students
to seek outside scholarships, and will adjust institutional aid only if
absolutely necessary.
5. The University may substitute other aid funds of equal
amount and type at any point in the year at its discretion and
without any notice.
Special Circumstances
income Reduction
The FAFSA collects information about a family's income and
assets from the previous year (2002). For most people this informa-
tion is a good predictor of the current year's (2003) income, since
most people do not experience wide swings in income from year
to year.
If however, a family's income in the current year will be signifi-
cantly different (more than 10 percent) from last year's, the family
should notify the Financial Aid Office in writing, including all
available documentation. Reductions in income that are caused
by involuntary job loss, unusually high unreimbursed medical
expenses, separation, divorce, death of a wage earner, or the like will
be considered.
If a family's circumstances meet these criteria, the University will
calculate the financial aid award based upon the estimated current
year (2003) figures for the fall semester At the end of the fall
semester the family will be required to provide documentation (such
as final pay stub, or an estimated 2003 return) for evaluation of the
spring semester's award.
Unfortunately, the University is not able to consider reductions in
income due to voluntary job changes, back taxes owed, high con-
sumer debt, multiple mortgages, employment bonuses received in
the previous year, overtime, self-employment losses, fluctuations in
income from commission sales, or discretionary purchases.
Divorce or Separation
When a married student or parent separates from or divorces
his/her spouse .subsequent to the filing of the financial aid applica-
tion, the custodial parent should notify the Financial Aid Office in
writing.
In the case of separation or divorce, the Financial Aid Office is
permitted to discuss the student's record only with the custodial
parent.
218
The University of the Ans Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Death
Sadly, the University occasionally is called upon to assist a student
whose parent or spouse has died subsequent to the filing of the finan-
cial aid application. Should this occur, the Financial Aid Office should
be contacted immediately, and it will offer every assistance possible.
Dependency Override
The Financial Aid Office is occasionally asked to re-evaluate a
student's status due to the student's assertion that he or she should
be considered independent of parental support.
The guidelines for dependency are set by federal law, and thus
each student must first be evaluated against them. A dependent stu-
dent is someone who is younger than 24, is not a veteran, is not a
graduate or professional student, is not married, is not an orphan or
ward of the court, or does not have legal dependents.
An independent student is someone who is older than 24, a vet-
eran, a graduate or professional student, married, or has legal
dependents. (See the FAFSA.)
Federal and institutional policy is that the first responsibihty for
college costs is the student's and his/her family's; thus appeals are
rarely granted.
A student who wishes to be considered independent must write a
letter of appeal to the Financial Aid Office. The letter must clearly
state the reasons for appealing the dependency status. The student
will be required to document his/her means of support as well as
other items. Please contact the Financial Aid Office for additional
information. . . ' '
Other Appeals
The Financial Aid office cannot consider proposals based on any
circumstances other than those listed above. Regrettably, the
University cannot reconsider the financial aid award in response to
offers from competing institutions, or as a means of recognizing the
student's academic or artistic achievement.
Academic Progress
Students who receive assistance in any form, which includes but
is not limited to University grant, scholarship. State grant. Federal
Pell Grant, FSEOG, FWS, Federal Perkins Loan, Federal
PLUS/Stafford, etc., must maintain satisfactory academic progress
in their program of study in order to conUnue to receive those funds.
Satisfactory academic progress for students at the University is
defined as
1. earning between 12 and 18 credits each semester, and
2. maintaining a minimum cumulative and semester grade-point
average (GPA) of at least 2.0 ("C" average).
If a student's semester or cumulative grade-point average is below
2.0 ("C" average), he or she is automatically placed on probation
and required to attain at least a 2.0 cumulative grade-point average
by the end of the next semester, and meet other requirements as
specified by the dean's office.
Students may be required to maintain a GPA higher than 2.0 in
some departments or majors. Thus, it is possible to be placed on pro-
bation at higher GPAs.
A student who does not meet the above-cited grade-point
average and credit load requirements will jeopardize his/her
financial aid eligibility.
Students who have had two semesters of academic probation are
not eligible to receive financial aid of any type during a third
semester of academic probation.
Students who receive University-sponsored scholarships may be
required to maintain a GPA greater than 2.0 ("C" average). The stu-
dent will be notified of specific GPA requirements when receiving
notification of the scholarship. Specific scholarship GPA require-
ments are as follows:
Presidential Scholarship 3.0
Promising Artist Scholarship 2.5
Artist Grant 2.5
University Grant 2.0
Students who have been dismissed from the University are not eh-
gible for financial assistance of any kind during the first semester of
re-enrollment, when the first semester of re-enrollment is at least the
student's third semester of censure.
Insufficient Credit Accumulation
In addition to the qualitative standard (GPA), students are also
required to meet a quantitative measure of academic progress (rate of
credit accumulation). Students who receive merit- and/or need-based
aid must earn sufficient credits each semester toward graduation.
Students who enroll for at least 12 credits during a given semester
must complete, with a grade of "D" or higher, at least 12 credits in
order to continue to receive financial assistance.
Although 12 credits is the minimum per-semester credit accumu-
lation to maintain eligibility for financial assistance, the student will
NOT be on track to graduate in four years at this rate. Also, "D"
grades will cause the student to fail the qualitative (GPA) progress
standard.
Each student's total credit accumulation is reviewed at the end of
each semester. Students who complete fewer than 24 credits per aca-
demic year will be placed on FINANCIAL AID PROBATION for
the following semester. If by the end of the probationary semester,
the student has not earned at least 36 credits (for the three-semester
period being reviewed), the student then loses his/her eligibility for
financial assistance. Students may fail the quantitative standard
regardless of GPA.
The student's eligibility for financial assistance will be restored
when the student has earned at least 36 credits and has met all other
academic progress requirements.
PHEAA Grants
The state grant agency requires that a student earn a minimum of
24 credits each academic year in order to continue to receive state
grant assistance. Any student who earns fewer than 24 credits will
not be eligible for his/her state grant for the first semester of the fol-
lowing year. Students who enroll for a single semester are required
to earn at least 12 credits to retain their PHEAA Grant. The
University will not replace funds for which the students has lost
eligibilty.
Financial Aid Academic Progress
Appeals
University-Administered Financial Aid
The University reviews the academic standing of all students at
the conclusion of each semester. Students who have not met the aca-
demic progress standards required for continued financial aid
eligibility have the following options for appealing loss of aid.
Please note — under federal privacy guidelines we are only
permitted to discuss academic matters with the student.
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
219
If the student wishes to appeal the loss of financial aid, except
PHEAA state grant, he or she may do so in writing to the Financial
Aid Office. (PHEAA state grant appeals must be addressed to
PHEAA). Appeals are reviewed by the Financial Aid Appeal
Committee. Appeal letters must be written by the student and must
document significant, unusual circumstances that contributed to aca-
demic difficulties. (Significant circumstances include events like
major illness, severe injury, or family upheaval such as death or
divorce). Students are required to provide documentation of the cir-
cumstances upon which the appeal is based.
In order to be considered the appeal letter requesting reinstate-
ment of aid for a given semester must be received in the Financial
Aid Oft'ice prior to the first day of classes for that semester Students
are cautioned that the committee that reviews financial aid appeals
meets on an as-needed basis and generally requires approximately
three weeks to respond to appeals. Appeals that are submitted close
to the beginning of any semester are unlikely to be reviewed prior to
the start of classes. Thus, students should be prepared to pay their
invoice in full. If the appeal is granted the student will be reimbursed
from any credit balance created by reinstated financial aid.
The University does not have the authority to make exceptions to
federal financial aid policies and will not entertain any requests to
do so. For example, federal law requires that students be enrolled on
an at least half-time basis for Stafford loan eligibility. The
University cannot and will not make exceptions to this and other
federal regulations.
Students who have been placed on academic probation and wish
to appeal their probationary status should follow the guidelines
under the Academic Review secUon in this catalog.
For those financial aid policies under which the University has
discretionary authority to make exceptions, the Financial Aid Appeal
Committee's decisions are final and cannot be further appealed.
PHEAA State Grant Appeals
The University has no authority to make exceptions to PHEAA
state grant policies. Students wishing to appeal the loss of state
grants must write a letter of appeal to PHEAA. Appeal letters must
include documentation of those significant events (major illness,
severe injury, or family upheaval such as divorce or death) that
impacted the student's academic performance. Students wishing to
appeal the loss of state grant eligibility are urged to do so as soon as
such information is known, as the state requires several weeks (typi-
cally 8-10) to respond to appeals.
Change in Enrollment Status
Unless specifically designated otherwise, all awards are issued
based upon the student's anticipated enrollment as a full-time under-
graduate (completing 12 credits or more per semester, in a
degree-granting program).
Students who become less than full-time or who enroll as "non-
degree" may lose their eligibility for aid in full or in part.
The Financial Aid Office periodically reviews all student accounts
and will immediately remove any aid credited to the account of a
student who has failed to satisfy progress or enrollment require-
ments as above.
Students who are considering withdrawing (either from the
University or from individual classes) are urged to meet with a
financial aid counselor to discuss the impact of the withdrawal on
their eligibility for aid. Please read the information about refunds in
the "Tuition and Expenses" section of this Catalog.
Students are reminded that withdrawing from their courses (either
in full or in part) may cause them to lose their eligibility for aid in
current and future semesters.
To avoid unexpected balances, students must contact the Financial
Aid Office with any questions pertaining to this subject.
Graduate Students
Graduate students are eligible to apply for Stafford loans and
should refer to the section on student loans for further information.
Graduate students may also be eligible for assistantships or fellow-
ships through the department in which they are enrolled. Contact the
departmental office for additional information and application
instructions.
Graduate students are required to maintain satisfactory academic
progress in order to continue to receive financial aid as specified in
this catalog.
Students who have attained a bachelor's degree or its equivalent
are not eligible to receive Pell, PHEAA, FSEOG, FWS, Perkins, and
most other forms of financial aid including institutional grants.
Graduate students who are in default on a federal student loan are
not eligible to receive assistance of any type while enrolled at the
University.
The following Web site is helpful for graduate students:
www.gradschools.com.
Summer MFA Students
Students who enroll at least half-time (4.5 credits) in the Summer
MFA program may borrow under the Stafford Loan program.
Students who matriculated as of June 2000 and follow the 12, 4.5,
4.5 credit pattern are permitted to borrow during all semesters of
enrollments and qualify for deferments: these students may borrow
up to $18,500.
Students who matriculated prior to June 2000 and follow the 10, 3, 3
credit pattern are not permitted to borrow during the fall and spring
semesters. Summer MFA students who are enrolled less than half-time
are not peimitted to borrow and do not qualify for deferments.
For the summer of 2003, Summer MFA students who enroll for
10 credits may borrow up to $1 1,000, less any other aid.
Transfer Students
Transfer undergraduates are eligible for aid and should apply fol-
lowing the same application procedures as other undergraduates
(with exceptions listed below).
All transfer students may be required to submit a Financial Aid
Transcript (FAT) from each prior post-secondary institution attended
in the cun'ent year, whether or not financial aid was received while
enrolled. This regulation applies to transfer students who enroll
beginning in January. It does not apply to transfer students who
enroll beginning in September.
Transfer students who have borrowed the undergraduate max-
imum under the Stafford program are not eligible for continued
Stafford assistance while enrolled at the University.
Any transfer student who is in default on a federal loan is ineli-
gible for financial aid of any type while enrolled at the University.
Transfer students who enroll for the spring semester should be
aware that financial aid received for enrollment during the fall
semester at another institution is not transferable. Students must
reapply for most forms of aid at the University. Contact the
Financial Aid Office for additional information and instructions.
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Bachelor's Degree Holders
Students who have earned a bachelor's degree or its equivalent
and who enroll as undergraduates are eligible to apply for Stafford
loans (with exceptions below). In some cases these students may
also be eligible for University-sponsored aid. Students are not eli-
gible to receive PELL. PHEAA. FSEOG. and Perkins.
Students who have already borrowed the undergraduate maximum
under the Stafford program are ineligible for continued Stafford
assistance while enrolled at the University.
Those who are in default on a federal student loan are not eligible
for aid of any type while enrolled at the University.
Part-Time Students
Part-time students who are enrolled in degree programs may be
eligible for Pell, University, and PHEAA grants, as well as Stafford
loans.
Part-time students are subject to all requirements governing the
financial aid programs, except that they be enrolled full-time.
Part-time students are not eligible for merit-based aid.
Part-time students should follow application procedures as
detailed in this catalog.
Continuing Education Students
Students who enroll through the Continuing Education program
are eligible for a very limited selection of loan programs.
Continuing Education students are not eligible for any other type
of financial aid. Contact the Financial Aid Office for additional
information.
International Students
Students who are neither U.S. citizens nor eligible noncitizens (as
confirmed by the Immigration and Naturalization Service) are not
eligible to receive any form of Federal Title IV financial aid while
enrolled at The University of the Arts.
International students will be reviewed for scholarships when
offered admission. Those students who demonstrate exceptional
artistic ability in their portfolio review or audition will be considered
for the University's Scholarship Program.
International students may be eligible to borrow money through a
very limited selection of loan programs. International students must
have a U.S. citizen co-signer. Contact the Financial Aid Office for
additional information.
Study Abroad and Off-Campus Study
Students who wish to study abroad or at another U.S. school for
one or two semesters as part of the degree program at UArts will
need the advice and approval of their department chair, a written
agreement in advance of the courses, and a description of how they
will transfer back into the degree program. This off-campus study is
normally best done in the junior year. Interested students should
begin by making an appointment in the Dean's office to discuss their
plans at least six months before the program begins. Appointments
with the Registrar. Financial Aid, and Billing offices are also recom-
mended at that time. If the student has financial aid, he/she should
register during the normal registration period. While away, the stu-
dent should keep the Financial Aid Office informed of any changes
in status.
The following information should be used to assist in determinins
if sUidy abroad will be a viable option, and to help plan for the
financial responsibilities.
Financial Aid that can be used abroad:
1 . Federal Pell Grant
2. Federal SEOG
3. Federal Perkins Loan
4. PHEAA State Grant
5. Federal Stafford Loan
6. Federal Plus Loan
These forms of aid are subject to reduction if costs for study
abroad programs are less than costs at The University of the Arts.
Financial Aid that cannot be used abroad includes all University-
sponsored aid, such as:
1 . Talent Scholarship
2. Presidential Scholarship
3. University Grant
4. Promising Artist Award
5. Artist Grant
6. Named Scholarships
7. Graduate Grants, Scholarships, and Assistantships
Students who plan to study abroad should apply for financial aid
adhering to normal deadlines and procedures. Additionally, such stu-
dents must provide The University of the Arts' Financial Aid Office
with the following:
1. Contact person at coordinating university or college including
their address, telephone, and fax numbers.
2. Power of Attorney, duly executed (if documents will require
your signature in your absence.)
3. Consortium Agreement, completed, (available from the
Financial Aid Office.)
4. Contact Financial Aid Office before final departure. It will be
necessary to maintain close contact with our office to assure aid is
processed before you leave the country.
Reminders:
1 . The study abroad program must be approved by both the aca-
demic dean and the University's Office of the Registrar. Contact
those offices for additional information and procedures.
2. Students must begin all paperwork at least six months prior to
the semester abroad.
3. In most countries students will not be permitted to earn wages,
so they should be prepared to have sufficient spending money.
4. Students may not use financial aid for unapproved programs
abroad. In order to be eligible for financial aid, the student must
enroll through a college or university that is approved for participa-
tion in the Federal Title IV programs.
5. Students may not use the extended payment plan (TMS) to pay
for tuition.
Budgets
Educational costs include not only tuition and fees, but also indi-
rect costs such as room, food, books, supplies, and personal
expenses. Direct costs reflect the actual amount a student will be
billed by the University. Indirect costs are what a typical student
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
might expect for out-of-pocket expenses such as supplies, books,
clothing, food, medical expenses, personal items, and transportation
over a nine-month period.
Naturally, one's own habits and personal spending patterns will
dramatically influence these costs. Therefore, these are estimates
only.
These factors are used in formulating a student's budget and
determining financial need. The Financial Aid Office will assign
each student a budget depending on the information provided on the
FAFSA. If the budgets shown below differ significantly from the
expenses you expect to incur, please inform the Financial Aid
Office.
While certain academic departments may recommend that stu-
dents have their own computers, the University's students are not
required to provide their own computers. Therefore, the University
will not accept responsibility for the funding of student-owned
machines. Students interested in purchasing computers are welcome
to contact the Academic Computing Office for advice on hardware
and software selection, and information on the educational discounts
available. For more information, please refer to the Academic
Computing section of this catalog.
Estimated Expenses for 2003-200^^
These figures are intended for your use in estimating your costs
for the upcoming academic year.
Resident/
Commuter
Off-Campus
Graduate
Tuition (12-18 credits) $20,860
$20,860
$20,860
General Fee
850
850
850
Housing
—
5.800
—
Subtotal
$21,710
$27,510
$21,710
Indirect Expenses
Books & Supplies
2,000
2,000
2,000
Housing
2,300
—
7,300
Food
1,800
1,800
1,800
Living Expenses
1,690
1,690
1,690
Estimated Total
$29,500
$33,000
$34,500
Commuters
Students who live within reasonable commuting distance of the
University and reside with parents or relatives.
Resident/Off-Campus
Students who reside in University-owned housing or who reside
in housing that is owned by neither the University nor their parents
or relatives. Students who live within commuting distance of the
University will not be funded as residents, or as off-campus.
Graduate Students
Most graduate students maintain their own homes and have corre-
spondingly higher living expenses. Graduate students who live with
parents or relatives will be assigned a commuter budget.
Part-Time Students
Budgets for part-time students are determined on an individual
basis.
Tuition Tax Benefits
The Taxpayer Relief Act of 1997 includes tax credits for educa-
tion. The Hope Scholarship is a tax credit of up to $1,500 that covers
100 percent of the first $1,000 in qualified tuition and related
expenses, and up to 50 percent of the second $1,000, required for
enrollment during the first two years of college.
The Hope tax credit is generally available for tuition and fees
paid, less grants and scholarships, for classes that begin on or after
January 1, 1998. The credit is phased out for single taxpayers with
adjusted gross income between $40,000 and $50,000 (580,000 to
$100,000 for joint returns). Students who do not qualify for the
Hope Scholarship may qualify for the Lifetime Learning Credit.
For specific information about how these tax credits may affect
you, contact your tax professional.
Confidentiality and Privacy of
Financial Aid Information
FERPA (Family Educational Rights and Privacy
Act of 1974)
Under FERPA educational privacy and access rights accrue to the
student when she/he turns 18 OR enrolls in a post-secondary institu-
tion. The University of the Arts is a post-secondary institution.
Persons who have applied to but who have not attended the
University as an enrolled student are not covered under FERPA.
Under institutional policy, applicants are extended the same privacy
and access rights to their financial aid information as students.
Applicants, students, and parents should be aware of the fol-
lowing institutional financial aid privacy policies.
The financial aid staff is permitted to discuss or otherwise dis-
close a student's financial aid information to the following parties:
1 . the student.
2. the student's parent(s) whose information appears on the FAFSA.
3. other University officials having a legitimate educational
reason to know the student's financial aid information (e.g. staff in
the billing office so that they can manage the student's account).
4. external agencies and organizations such as guarantors, lenders,
state grant agencies, and auditors that have a legitimate reason to
know the student's financial aid information (i.e. staff at such agen-
cies authorized to process loans and grants for the student).
5. external federal agencies granted such rights under FERPA
(e.g. DOE, INS, CSPCA, et cetera). Under FERPA, institutions are
required to disclose a student's information (sometimes without
notification to the student) in response to commands from the courts
(typically subpoenas) and demands from specific federal agencies.
The Financial Aid staff will comply with all lawfully issued
demands for information from the entities identified in the FERPA
regulations and will (or will not) notify the student as required.
Students and parents should be aware that their signatures on the
FAFSA and other financial aid documents (e.g. loan applications)
authorize the release of their information to certain federal and state
agencies. Please read the FAFSA and other financial aid documents
for more information.
Depending upon the scope of the information requested by the
student or other authorized parties, the Financial Aid Office may
require time to present the records requested. When the information
requested cannot be produced immediately the Financial Aid Office
may require such time as is permitted under FERPA regulations to
retrieve and present the records requested.
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 200S/2004
The Financial Aid staff is not permitted to discuss or otherwise
disclose a student's Financial Aid information to others including
but not limited to:
1 . the student's parent(s) or stepparent(s) whose information does
not appear on the FAFSA (the non-filing parent) without written
permission from the student and the filing parent.
2. the student's parentis) or stepparent(s) whose information does
appear on the FAFSA when the parents have separated or divorced
and the other parent has been identified as the custodial parent,
without written permission from the student and the custodial
parent.
3. high school guidance counselors and teachers.
4. the student's spouse.
5. interested relatives, neighbors, and friends.
The Financial Aid Staff is not permitted to discuss or otherwise
disclose academic information (which includes but is not limited to
scholarship eligibility, financial aid eligibility, grades, grade-point
average, academic standing, or probafionary status) to anyone
(except the federal and state agencies responsible for processing the
student's financial aid or having authority under FERPA to access
such information) other than the student (whether or not the student
is dependent, whether or not the parent pays the invoice) without the
student's written authorization.
Disclosure Authorization
When extraordinary circumstances exist that prevent the student
from accessing and understanding Financial Aid information the
Financial Aid staff will discuss normally confidential information
with the individual(s) the student designates on the disclosure
authorizaUon form. Students may request a disclosure authorization
form from the Financial Aid Office. Students must complete and
sign the disclosure authorization form in the Financial Aid Office in
the presence of a Financial Aid staff member. Students can rescind
the disclosure authorization at any time. Due to the highly .sensitive
nature of financial aid and academic information, facsimiles, photo-
copies or mailed disclosure authorization forms will not be
accepted.
Rights and Responsibilities
The receipt of financial aid is a privilege, which creates both
rights and responsibilities.
Students have the right to know the method used to determine
their need: the right to have access to information and records used
in determining need; and the right to be awarded aid as equitably as
funds permit.
Students applying for financial aid are responsible for accurately
portraying financial resources and circumstances and notifying the
Financial Aid Office of any changes in status: for applying in a
timely manner: and for maintaining satisfactory academic progress
and good standing.
Students who fail to maintain adequate progress will be placed on
probation. Failure to correct academic deficiency will result in the
loss of financial aid until the required credits and grade-point
average have been earned.
Students or parents who knowingly provide false information on
any financial aid form (financial aid forms include but are not lim-
ited to the FAFSA, verification forms. Work Study time cards and
loan applications) will be denied financial aid and will be refused for
all subsequent years without the possibility of appeal. Additionally,
students so identified will he billed for all aid disbursed and may
face prosecution by the Department of Education, which may result
in fine, imprisonment, or both.
While the Financial Aid Office staff is available to assist students
through the application process, it is the student's responsibility to
see to the correctness and completeness of his or her application. If a
student receives notification that his/her FAFSA or loan application
is incomplete, the student must determine what is necessary to com-
plete the application(s) and submit the required information.
An application for financial aid will have no effect on the decision
concerning admission. The admission decision is made without
access to financial aid data.
Application for 2004-2005
• File the 2004-2005 Free Application for Federal Student Aid
(FAFSA) by March 15. 2004.
• Register for the Fall 2004 semester in April 2004.
Additional Sources of Financial Aid
A helpful way to begin the search for additional financial assis-
tance is on the Internet at www.fastweb.com. Additional financial
aid Web sites are listed below. Students are cautioned not to pay for
financial aid information: these are free Web sites. The Financial Aid
Office also maintains a notebook of scholarships.
www.pheaa.org
www.fafsa.ed.gov
www.finaid.org
www.fastweb.com
www.cashe.com
www.ed.gov
www.usagroup.com
www.cns.gov
For Additional Information
Listed below are numbers to call if a student receives an incom-
plete notification or does not receive notification within six weeks of
application filing.
To check the status of your FAFSA:
1-319-337-5665
1-800-4-FEDAID
www.fafsa.ed.20v
PHEAA Grant Line
1-800-692-7435
www.pheaa.org
The University of the Arts
1-800-6 16- ARTS
www.uarts.edu
PHEAA Loan Line
1-800-692-7392
www.pheaa.org
Office of Financial Aid
1-2I5-7I7-6170
fax 1-215-717-6178
www.finaid@uarts.edu
Inquiries and requests for application forms should be directed to:
The University of the Arts
Office of Financial Aid
320 South Broad Street
Philadelphia. PA 19102
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
223
student Services
John Klinzing, Dean of Students
jklinzing@uarts.edu
Gershman Hall
401 South Broad Street, Room 309
215-717-6618
The Student Services Division consists of a group of profes-
sionals committed to assisting students of the University in reaching
their goals. The division provides students with opportunities to
develop the interpersonal, leadership, organizational, and communi-
cations skills that will serve them on a personal and professional
level. The office of the Dean of Smdents administers and coordi-
nates student services and represents student concerns to campus
groups, faculty, staff, and administration.
Counseling Center
Attending college can be a time of major adjustment for both
undergraduate and graduate students. There are times when students
need support to help them work through this transition. The
University of the Arts Counseling Center offers counseling and
workshops that can provide this support.
If a student is seeing a psychiatrist at home, the University recom-
mends that he/she establish a relationship with a professional closer
to the University. This will help monitor symptoms and medications
in a more consistent way and provide a more immediate level of care
should a crisis arise. Counseling and Health Services can help with
referrals to other professionals.
All counseling and medical issues are strictly confidential.
As with medical emergencies, students are strongly encouraged to
carry health insurance for psychological emergencies.
Brian Hainstock, Director of Counseling
215-717-6614
Gershman Hall ' .,
40 1 South Broad Street, Room 308
Health Services
The University maintains a health office with a Registered Nurse
from Monday through Friday during the academic year and for six
weeks in the summer. First aid is rendered, minor illnesses treated,
and appropriate referrals to other health professionals are made.
Health counseling is offered, emphasizing disease prevention, health
maintenance, stress control, and wellness activities.
Medical services are offered to UArts students by contractual
agreement with Jefferson Family Medicine Associates (JFMA), a
group of physicians who specialize in Family Medicine Practice.
Students may use these doctors as they would use their family physi-
cian at home and need only a referral from the University's nurse to
obtain an appointment. Besides treafing acute and chronic illnesses,
there are services for drug abuse, sexually transmitted diseases, birth
control, and mental health. University of the Arts students are not
charged for these office visits. There will be charges for these serv-
ices if specialists are called in, if X-ray or laboratory work is
needed, and for emergency room visits.
In the event of an emergency after office hours, JFMA physicians
are on call 24 hours a day, seven days a week, and may be reached
by phone.
Jefferson Family Medicine Associates
Telephone: 215-955-7190
JFMA is located at:
833 Chesmut Street, Suite 301
By appointment through Health Services
JFMA hours:
9:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Friday
1:00 p.m. to 5:00 p.m. Thursday
If an ambulance is necessary, the student will be billed for this
service. The cost of the emergency room visit is the responsibility of
the student.
Because of the high cost of medical care. The University of the
Arts strongly recommends that students have adequate health insur-
ance to cover unforeseen illness or accident. For those students not
enrolled in an insurance program of their parents and who need low-
cost insurance, the University offers various insurance plans.
Information and brochures may be obtained at the Health Office.
Health Records
All entering students must have a physical exam, complete the
Student Health Form, and file it with the Office of Health Services.
In addition, the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania insists that univer-
sities screen for immunization deficiencies of all first-time students.
Students failing to meet these requirements will not be allowed to
attend classes.
Anne Whitehead, Director
Anderson Hall Office: 215-717-6230 ' ,, .
333 South Broad Street. Room M-36 , '
Terra Building Office: 215-717-6232
2 1 1 South Broad Street, 4th floor. Room 401
Student Activities/Special Events
The Student Activities Office sponsors a variety of activities to
complement the academic programs. Annual events include a
Halloween party, a Fall Carnival, and the popular UArts Late Night
Skate. Other events include Grocery Bingo, open mic nights, and
trips to New York and Washington, D.C,
Students play a major role in determining the character of the stu-
dent life program. There are many opportunities for involvement and
leadership. The University Student Council helps develop, plan, and
implement changes that benefit the student body. Students are wel-
comed and encouraged to join this organization, which acts as the
voice of the student body in the University governance system.
Student clubs and organizations also contribute to campus activi-
ties, and students are encouraged to investigate the opportunities
these groups have to offer. Organizations include the African
American Student Union, UArts Christian Fellowship, Fencing
Club, Green Team, Rainbow Connection, and Gallery One.
To encourage participation in sports and physical fitness, the
University offers partially subsidized membership in a local fitness
center. For more information about any of these opportunities, con-
tact the Student Activities Office.
Sandra K. Tilford, Director of Student Activities
215-717-6615
Gershman Hail
401 South Broad Street, Room 313
224
The University of the Alls Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Residential Life
The University of the Arts has made a strong commitment to pro-
viding a supportive living/learning environment. The University has
four residence halls on campus. All residence halls are furnished and
have separate bathroom and kitchen facilities in each apartment.
Each building has laundry facilities and 24-hour security and main-
tenance. All residence halls are "smoke free."
Fumess Hall is a historic remodeled building highlighted by its
high ceilings and tall windows. It is a four-story building with two
separate wings and has large studio, and one- and two-bedroom
apartments, housing three to four residents.
The 1500 Pine Street Residence Hall is a 10-story building, which
has studio and one- and two-bedroom apartments, housing two
to five residents. It features hardwood floors and a studious
environment.
The 1228 Spruce Street Residence Hall is a recently acquired
eight-story building with studio apartments housing two students.
It features walk-in closets.
The 3 1 1 Juniper Street Residence Hall is also a recendy acquired
and newly renovated 12-story building with one- and two-bedroom
apartments housing two to four students. It features spacious
kitchens with built-in microwave ovens, air conditioning, wall-to-
wall carpeting, and Internet/cable hookups.
All living environments are supervised by specially selected
Resident Assistants. RAs are upper-class students, trained in peer
advising and crisis intervention, who assist students in their adjust-
ment to college as well as to life in the city. The residence program
is supervised by the Director of Residential Life.
It is important for residents to understand that they must abide by
the standards listed in the housing contract. Failure to do so makes
them subject to the penalities listed in the contract.
Students receive a housing packet outlining all facilities and
accommodations after they are admitted to the University. All new
students are guaranteed housing if their housing deposits are
received by June 1 . On-campus housing for students after their first
year is determined on a first-come first-served basis.
The Residential Life Office assists students in finding off-campus
accommodations through its off-campus housing service. Early
inquiries regarding this information are strongly recommended.
Glenn Smith. Director
215-875-2256
1500 Pine Street, Room 100
gsmith@uarts.edu
Meals
Almost all student residences feature separate kitchens within
each apartment. Students prepare their own meals according to their
individual schedules and dietary preferences. In addition, the
University maintains a cafe that serves breakfast and lunch, and has
an optional meal plan. Snack and beverage vending machines are
accessible at all times.
Academic Support Services
The Academic Support Services are available to all students as a
supplement to their classroom instruction. Tutors help students
develop sidlls in reading, writing, and other academic and studio
areas, including successful classroom strategies and improvement of
study habits.
Professional and peer tutoring are available to undergraduate stu-
dents for general skills and for specific subjects or courses.
Computer-assisted academic instruction is also available.
The International Student Advisor will also assist students from
abroad in securing support ser\ices. Although students may be
referred to the services by their instructors, students are also wel-
come to avail themselves freely of these support services.
For more information, please contact:
Anita Lam, Director
Academic Support Services
215-875-2262
1500 Pine Street, Room 102
alam@uarts.edu
Academic Acliievement/ACT loi
Program
The Academic Achievement/ ACT 101 Program (AAP) is part of
the Higher Education Opportunity Act of the Commonwealth of
Pennsylvania. At The University of the Arts, the purpose of the pro-
gram is to provide developmental maintenance and transition
ser\ices to students who need preparation in arts and academics.
Students selected to participate in the program must be Pennsylvania
residents with financial and/or academic needs. With the extra sup-
port of the AAP, these students become a highly motivated, cohesive
group whose determination to succeed is reflected in their high
retention and success rates.
Each year, a small number of students receive conditional admis-
sion to the University under the Academic Achievement/ ACT 101
Program. These students are mandated to attend the Summer Bridge
Intensive, receive tutoring and counseling during the semester, and
attend a midsemester review to ensure their success the first two
years. To further assist these students, the University also awards an
AAP Grant to them so they will be less burdened by financial
demands and can focus on their education.
For more infonnation. contact the Academic Achievement Program.
Anita Lam, Director
215-875-2262 . '
1500 Pine Street, Room 102
alam@uarts.edu
Learning Sl<ills Specialist
The University is committed to assuring equal educational oppor-
tunity for students with learning disabilities. The goal of the
Learning Skills Center is to assist students to maximize their poten-
tial while maintaining their independence. Eligibility for services is
determined individually based on documented need. Services
include direct instruction, monitoring, and consultation. The
Learning Skills Specialists acts as a liaison between students and
faculty. Academic accomodations and adjustments are provided
when appropriate. This is a confidential service.
For additional information, please contact:
Neila Douglas, Learning Skills Specialist
ndouglas@uarts.edu
215-717-6616
Gershman Hall
401 South Braod Street, Room 309C
For assistance with any other type of disability, students should
contact the Dean of Students at 2 1 5-7 1 7-66 1 8.
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
225
International Student Services
In an effort to meet the special needs of the international student,
the University has developed a network of University personnel and
offices to provide specialized services to students from abroad.
These services are provided through the Office of Admission, the
International Student Advisor, the Director of Residential Life, and
the Dean of Students.
The University has designated one member of the professional
staff as the International Student Advisor. In addition to serving as
liaison for students from abroad, the International Student Advisor
will assist the student in securing necessary services provided
through the support areas of the University. Special programs
designed to help international students include the following: ESL
tutorial assistance for undergraduates. Immigration Service advise-
ment, and Orientation.
Students interested in participating in the Residential Life pro-
gram should contact the Office of Residential Life directly, as do all
other entering students. While there is no distinct residential pro-
gram for students from abroad, special efforts are made by the
Office of Residential Life to consider the needs of the international
student.
Likewise, the University Health Service, while meeting the needs
of all enrolled students, also considers the support needs of interna-
tional students. All international students should take special note of
the University's requirement that they maintain or secure appro-
priate medical insurance coverage, either through their family or
through the medical insurance plan offered through the University.
All F- 1 students are responsible for obtaining immigration
information and following all the regulations in order to maintain
status. Page 2 of the 1-20 explains many of the obligations of an
F-1 student.
When in need of assistance, students are advised to contact either
the International Student Advisor, Anita Lam, at 1500 Pine Street,
Room 102, 215-875-2262, alam@uarts.edu, or the Office of the
Deanof Student Services at 215-717-6675. '
Career Services
As students advance academically and artistically, it is important
for them to begin to develop a plan for their career in the arts. The
Career Services Office assists students by providing comprehensive
services and individual counseling tailored to their specific needs.
Services for students include the following: career counseling;
assistance with resume writing; interview techniques and job search
skills; career resource library and industry publications/periodicals;
Career Connections monthly newsletter; internship listings; job list-
ings including freelance projects, part-time jobs, summer jobs,
audition opportunities, and full-time career opportunities; informa-
tion on fellowships, grants, and contests; annual Futures Fair (Career
Day); Web site including online resumes, job listings and career
links; graduate school information; and study-abroad information.
The professionally trained staff of the Career Services Office pro-
vides assistance to both students and alumni of The University of the
Arts. For additional information, please contact:
Elisa Kuriand, Director
215-717-6075
3rd Floor, Gershman Building
careerservices@uarts.edu
General Information
Campus Security
The University posts security personnel in all of its buildings to
provide 24-hour protection. Every semester, identification cards are
issued and validated by the Public Safety Office for all students, fac-
ulty, and employees. Public Safety officers may deny access to
University facilities for anyone not carrying a validated identifica-
tion card. Spot-checking of identification cards occurs throughout
the day. Complete identification checking occurs each weekday
from 7:15 p.m. until 8 a.m.; after 12 noon on Saturday until 8 a.m.
on Monday; and when classes are not in session. The general
campus area is patrolled on a regular basis.
Campus Security also provides programs to develop student
awareness of safety and security concerns in an effort to diminish
exposure to loss. The campus Security Department administers the
University Safety Program to ensure the safety of all students, fac-
ulty, and staff.
In the event of a family emergency about which it is necessary to
contact students at the University, parents or guardians should call
215-717-6401 at any time of the day. Security personnel will take
the necessary information, contact the appropriate offices to locate
the student, and deliver the message.
Escort Service
Public Safety ■ .
215-717-5400
The Escort Service provides safe transportation for any member
of the University community to any address that falls between 3rd
and 23rd streets, bordered by Race and Federal streets. The Escort
Service operates daily from 7 p.m. to 3 a.m., and picks up passen-
gers every half hour from Anderson Hall, the Terra Building, and the
1228 Spruce Residence Hall. The service is in effect from the
second week in September through the third week in May, with the
exception of scheduled University holidays and closings.
Sciiool Closings
In the event of inclement weather, members of the University
community should listen to KYW 1060 AM radio for announce-
ments of school closings. The University code number is 1 16.
Additionally, members of the University community can check
NBC- 10 TV or KYW-TV3 where the school name will be listed at
the bottom of the screen. Closing information is also available on-
line at www.NBClO.com or www.kywl060.com.
Please refer to the Academic Calendar in the front of this catalog
for scheduled school closings and holidays. Regularly observed hol-
idays include New Years Day, Martin Luther King Jr. Day, Memorial
Day, the 4th of July, Labor Day, Thanksgiving, and the following
day, and Christmas.
Automobiles
Students living in the University's residence halls are not per-
mitted to maintain vehicles (except bicycles) on campus. Any
resident student found to be maintaining a vehicle (except a bicycle)
on campus will be subject to disciplinary action by the Dean of
Students. Such action may include dismissal from the residence
halls. Students with disabilities may request an exemption from this
rule from the Dean of Students.
226
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
Veterans
As an accredited degree-granting institution, the University is
approved for tlie training of veterans. Information about education
benefits may be obtained from any VA office.
Student Assistance General
Provisions
In accordance witti the Higher Education Amendments of 1998,
The University of the Arts has available, upon request, information
regarding academic programs, financial assistance, and institutional
policies and statistics. This information may be found in the
University's catalog.
The Student Assistance General Provisions report includes infor-
mation on the following:
• Accreditation,
• Current degree programs including related facilities and faculty,
• Tuition, fees, and other estimated expenses,
• Withdrawal and refund policies,
• Description of financial aid programs, including eligibility,
award criteria, and application procedures, as well as students"
rights and responsibilities upon receiving financial assistance
(such as continued eligibility, exit counseling, and options for
payment deferral),
• Requirements for the return of Title IV grant or loan assistance,
• Services available for students with disabilities,
• Graduation rate.
In addition, each October, the Public Safety Department publishes
an annual report on the University's security policies and crime sta-
tistics, which is available to all current and prospective students and
employees.
To request a copy of the Student Assistance General Provisions
report, please contact the Office of the Provost, The University of
the Arts, 320 South Broad Street, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19102.
Code of Conduct
The University's regulations governing nonacademic student con-
duct safeguard the particular values and common welfare of the
student body and promote the best possible environment for study.
Membership in the University is regarded as a privilege, and the stu-
dent is expected to exercise self-discipline and good judgement. By
registration, the student acknowledges the University's authority to
define and enforce standards of acceptable conduct. Adjudication of
alleged student misconduct is the responsibility of the Office of the
Dean of Students. A committee on campus standards, representing
the student body, faculty, and administration, serves in an advisory
capacity to the Dean. The Campus Standards Committee may rec-
ommend suspension, dismissal, or expulsion for student conduct
considered unacceptable at the University.
A complete set of rules and procedures is contained in the current
code for student rights, responsibilities, and conduct. This Student
Code of Conduct may be found in both this Catalog and the Student
Handbook.
University policy provides that a student may be required to with-
draw from the University for psychological/health reasons. A
student who is withdrawn under this policy is one whose behavior
necessitates a leave from the University community.
Academic Distionesty
The University of the Arts does not condone any form of academic
dishonesty, including cheating on exams, plagiarism, or similar types
of behavior. Lack of knowledge of citation procedures, for example, is
an unacceptable explanation for plagiarism, as is having studied
together for remarkably similar papers submitted by two students.
Penalties for any form of academic dishonesty may include a repri-
mand, a failing grade or non-credit for a particular assignment, a
failing grade in the course, disciplinary probation, suspension, dis-
missal, and/or expulsion.
If a faculty member suspects a student of any form of plagiarism
or academic dishonesty, the faculty member may address the issue
directly w ith the student. The faculty member shall determine an
appropriate course of action after meeting with the student and may
impose penalties, which include repeating the project, resubmitting
the paper, failing the project or paper, or failing the course. The
department chair or director must be notified in writing when the
student receives a failing grade in the course as a result of academic
dishonesty on the student's part.
Both the faculty member and the student have the right to forward
the case, in the form of a written complaint, to the chair or director
of the department. (If the instructor is also the chair or director of
the department, the case goes directiy to the Office of the Dean, and
to the Provost in the case of the Director of Liberal Arts.) If the fac-
"ulty member considers the act of dishonesty serious enough to
warrant a more serious penalty, he/she must forward the case to the
next level, i.e., the department chair or director, or the Dean of the
College or the Provost.
If the student or faculty member chooses to appeal the decision
made by the chair or director; the student or instructor may forward
the case to the Dean of the College. A request for such an appeal
must be submitted in writing. The Dean has the right to assemble a
committee to address the case, or when suspension or expulsion may
result, to forward the case to the Dean of Students.
If the student seeks a further appeal, the case may be brought to
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
227
the Provost, who has the right to assemble a committee to review the
case. Please note that the Provost's decision is the final and binding
decision in such cases and no further appeal will be entertained.
Sexual Harassment and Other
Prohibited Harassment
The University of the Arts is committed to maintaining an envi-
ronment in which students, faculty, and staff may pursue academic,
artistic, and professional excellence. This environment can be
secured only through mutual respect and unconstrained academic
and professional interchange among faculty, staff, and students.
Faculty, staff, and students of the University are entitled to partici-
pate in and obtain the benefits of the University programs, activities,
and employment without being discriminated against on the basis of
their sex, race, religion, creed, age, ethnicity, national origin, preg-
nancy, disability, sexual orientation, or military status.
The University regards any act of sexual harassment or harass-
ment because of race, religion, creed, age, ethnicity, national origin,
pregnancy, disability, sexual orientation, or military status to be a
violation of the standards of conduct required of all persons associ-
ated with the institution. The prohibition against sexual harassment
and other forms of harassment applies to all interactions occurring
on campus, in University facilities, or within the context of
University-related activities.
The rights defined by this policy apply to all University faculty,
students, and employees and the obligations are binding on all fac-
ulty and staff as part of their employment regardless of tenure or
years of service, and all students, regardless of academic status.
Harassment constitutes a serious offense and the University will
take all necessary disciplinary actions to eradicate it from the
University. Those who commit harassment prohibited by this policy
are subject to the full range of discipline, up to and including imme-
diate dismissal from the University faculty or employment, or
expulsion from the University, as appropriate.
The prohibitions set forth in this policy include acts of retaliation
against members of the University community who have filed com-
plaints under this policy.
Substance Abuse Policy
The members of The University of the Arts community and their
health and safety are of paramount concern. The University will not
tolerate drug and alcohol abuse, as it imperils the health and well-
being of its faculty, staff, and students, and threatens the operation of
its educational programs.
The use, possession, or distribution of illegal drugs and abuse of
other controlled substances, in or out of class, or on University
premises is inconsistent with law-abiding behavior expected of all
students, and may result in discipline, up to and including expulsion.
The University prohibits the illegal and/or unauthorized manufac-
ture, sale, or delivery, holding, offering for sale, possession, or use
of any controlled substance as defined under the Pennsylvania
Controlled Substance, Drag, Device and Cosmetic Act, 35 PS.
Section 780-102, the Uniform Controlled Substances Act, the
Uniform Narcotic Drug Act, or the Federal Food, Drug and
Cosmetic Act, 21 U.S.C. Section 301 et seq., on University property.
Such controlled substances for the purposes of this policy shall
include but not be limited to alcoholic beverages, narcotics, hyp-
notics, sedatives, tranquilizers, stimulants, hallucinogens, and other
similar known or habit-forming drugs and/or chemicals as defined
under the aforesaid laws.
Smol<ing Policy
The University of the Arts maintains a smoke-free environment.
Smoking is permitted only out of doors.
Solicitation
In an effort to assure a productive and harmonious work environ-
ment, persons not employed by The University of the Arts may not
make solicitations or distribute literature at the University at any
time for any purpose.
The University recognizes that students and alumni may have
interests in events and organizations outside the University.
However, students and alumni may not make solicitations or dis-
tribute literature concerning these activities on the University
campus or by electronic mail.
Worl<place Violence
The University is committed to maintaining a safe working,
learning, and living environment for all members of the University
community.
Threats, acts of aggression, and violence are unacceptable in the
University community. Any such threat or violent act, regardless of
intent, will be considered serious misconduct and may be the basis
for disciplinary action, up to and including dismissal.
In addition, the University prohibits the possession of firearms,
explosives, and other dangerous weapons on campus and at
University functions off-campus.
228
The University of the Arts Undergraduate and Graduate Course Catalog 2003/2004
student Code
Part One — Student Rights,
Responsibilities, and Conduct
I. Definitions
As used in this Code, ttie following terms shall have the following
meanings:
A. "University" means The University of the Arts and, collec-
tively, those responsible for its control and operation.
B. "Student" means all persons whose primai^ relationship to the
University is as a student, presently registered at the University,
either full-time or part-time, pursuing undergraduate or graduate
studies, or continuing education courses.
C. "Instructor" means any person hired by the University to con-
duct classroom or studio activities.
D. "Student organization" means a group of students who have
complied with the requirements of the University for formal recog-
nition as set forth in Section IV of this Code.
E. "Group" means a number of students who have not complied
with the requirements for formal recognition as a student organiza-
tion.
F. "Student media" means either an organization whose primary
purpose is to publish/prepare and distribute any publication/presen-
tation on the University campus or a regular publication of any
student organization.
G. "Custodian" means the administrative officer of the University
with applicable supervisory authority.
H. "Shall" is used in the imperative sense.
I. "May" is used in the permissive sense.
J. All other terms have their natural meaning unless the context
dictates otherwise.
II. Student Rights
A. This Code recognizes that the students of the University, as
members of an academic community, are entitled to the rights set
forth herein, including, to the extent provided by applicable law, the
right to be free from discrimination and harassment based on gender,
religion, race, national origin, creed, disability, or sexual preference.
B. The University reserves the right to change the provisions of
this Code as it deems necessary. In addition, except to the extent
expressly provided herein, the Code is not intended to deal with aca-
demic issues, financial obligations, or residence assignments: the
University retains its traditional powers in these and all other areas
of campus life.
III. Campus Expression
A. Discussion and expression of all views are permitted within the
University, subject to requirements for. the maintenance of order.
Support for any cause by orderly means, which do not disrupt the
operation of the University, is permitted. The Univer 
TVNews
OpenLibrary